Catalogo Aquatic Ecosystem

2011 Master Catalog
Over 13,500 Products Available
Aquaculture
Koi
Selection. Service. Solutions.

Lake & Pond Aquarium
Order Toll Free 877-347-4788
Free Tech Support 407-598-1401

Same day shipment on most orders entered by: 4PM EST MondayFriday We are open 8AM7PM MondayThursday 8AM5PM Friday Customer pick-up hours: 8AM5PM MondayThursday 8AM4:30PM Friday
Shop Online AquaticEco.com
Complete Systems Lake & Pond Aeration Water Quality Controllers/Monitors Chemicals Feeds/Feeders/Live Feed Building the Perfect Pond Live Organisms and Fish Lab Equipment Cleaning Predator Control Nets Hatchery Supplies Hydroponics Lighting Tanks Filtration Heaters/Chillers Pumps Electrical Paint/Safety Plumbing Reference
4 12 48 86 107 114 131 140 156 159 174 180 182 196 203 210 217 229 279 293 318 321 323 348
Five Easy Ways to Order 1. Phone

407-886-3939 (Local) 877-347-4788 (Toll Free) Call from 8:00 AM7:00 PM Monday to Thursday, 8:00 AM5:00 PM Friday.
AES Workshops in Your Area!
2. Fax
407-886-6787 Did you know Aquatic Eco-Systems offers technical workshops? We will host your team at our facilities, or the AES technical staff of aquaculture engineers (PE), wastewater engineers (PE) and biologists will bring their expertise right to your doorstepworldwide! Obviously, complex systems like recirculating aquaculture and aquarium life support cannot be taught in a one-day workshop. So we provide hands-on activities that clearly demonstrate key principles and concepts. Standard cost per person is typically $120 for our 1-day workshops with 15 participants. If you would like a workshop in your area, call 877-347-4788 or email your request to AES@aquaticeco.com. For more information, call customer service and request a brochure describing our standard workshops (see topics below). AES will also develop custom aquatic workshops to meet specific needs.

3. Email
AES@AquaticEco.com
4. Internet
AquaticEco.com Enjoy the convenience of online shopping on our secure website.
5. Mail
Mail your orders to: Aquatic Eco-Systems, Inc. 2395 Apopka Blvd. Ste. 100 Apopka, FL 32703
Recirculating aquaculture system design. Aquarium life support systems design. ducation curricula (embryology, water chemistry, hydrology, E animal husbandry, etc.) and lab facilities. Aquatic research system LSS and aquatic lab animal husbandry. Lake and pond aeration system design. quaponics (system design, aquatic animal selection and plant A selection). Gas transfer (aeration, oxygenation, ozone and degassing). Live feed production.
For International Orders

Mail your order to the address above or: Phone: 407-886-3939 Fax: 407-886-4884
Symbol Legend
Invented Here - Invented Here AES designed and developed. Our expertise backs these items, so you can expect better performance and reliability than from similar products. AES Exclusive - AES Exclusive We are the only source for these products. aes - AES Number This will help you estimate aerator sizing (see Tech Talk 84). Hazmat Air - Hazmat Air Hazardous Material: Air Fees Only. Hazmat AG - Hazmat AG Hazardous Material: Air and Ground Fees. CHEMICAL
Waiver Form Required
Chemical Waiver Form
- Fresh Water or Salt Water

Indicates products that are compatible with fresh water or salt water. Aquaculture Duty - Aquaculture Duty Ultra reliable and tough enough to withstand constant use.
Products with this symbol require a Chemical Waiver form (see p. 357). These products are not FDA approved and may be used with ornamental, aquarium and bait fish but not with fish that could be used for human consumption. TF - Tech Favorite These products are highly recommended by our technicians. FD - Factory Direct These products ship directly from the manufacturer. If the item is over $200 and you are paying with a credit card, we'll charge the credit card for the merchandise amount at the time the order is placed. Freight will be billed later.
- Warranties
Identifies the manufacturer's length of warranty.
Information Resources/Index 354
Message From the President/Directions
Introduction
Message From the President

We keep hearing the phrase "economic recovery" these days, as if just saying the words will make it true. But unemployment, debt and foreclosure remain true challenges for which there is no easy or immediate solution, and they continue to threaten sustainable economic growth globally. Of course, hope breeds optimism, which in turn builds confidence. And just as pessimism is contagious and fuels fear, apprehension and a retreat to safety, optimism too is contagious and will at some point usher in a new era of growth and prosperity. As I used to ask my dad on a long road trip, "Are we there yet?" Current economic conditions are like a trip to the beach: The sky seems a little brighter, I see a few seagulls flying around and there's a sign that I can buy three T-shirts for $10. But until I put my feet in the sand and feel the cool water wash over my toes, I can't declare us there yet. That said, 2010 was a good year for Aquatic Eco-Systems as we saw our sales grow, added jobs to our workforce and saw many of our customers experience a similar story. Future growth, however, will come from our ability to adapt to an ever-changing world market. The globalization of aquaculture will usher in new opportunities overseas for AES as we open our first subsidiaries outside the US in 2011. Likewise, the new numeric nutrient criteria issued by the EPA have created compliance issues for lake and pond owners. The Aquatic Eco-Systems Lakes Department is working with landowners, developers, municipalities and our government representative as they grapple with the overwhelming challenge of compliance. We are investing significant resources in new products and new markets as we capitalize on our longstanding expertise and focus on "greener" technologies. We have increased our emphasis on hydroponic and aquaponic solutions as we encourage more efficient and productive use of our limited environmental resources. We are also introducing new systems using such renewable energy sources as wind and solar energies as alternatives to fossil fuels and to reach remote areas off grid. We are building smart controllers to automate the collection and analysis of data and replace the redundant tasks of today. These are only a few of the things we are looking at in 2011. As always, we value the feedback of our customers, and we are listening. We heard the request to expand our technical support resources and are investing in the training and personnel needed to remain your most reliable source for expert answers and solutions to all your difficult aquatic questions.
AES Commitment to Customer Satisfaction

Our customers are our first priority. We will provide extraordinary service to satisfy the needs of our customers. We will deliver our products and services on time and error free, conforming to the requirements of our customers. We strive to do it right the first time and eliminate any problem that prevents us from achieving complete customer satisfaction. We thank you for your patronage.
We want to hear from more of you, too. You can always reach me on my cell phone, 24 hours a day, at 407-456-4644 if you have a question or a concern. Otherwise, you can reach me by email at ToddC@AquaticEco.com. At Aquatic Eco-Systems, we are not sitting still, waiting for the surf to come to us. We are investing in new technologies, innovative products and inventive tools to improve the customer experience, and we're preparing the business for the better days just around the corner. We have our swimsuits and sunscreen on, and we're ready to join our customers in a positive year of growth and prosperity. See you at the beach.
Todd Childress, President
Stop by when you're in town. We're located just northwest of Orlando. From I-4:

E xit onto SR 414 (Maitland Blvd) heading west. xit SR 414 towards SR 441 (before SR 414 E becomes a toll road). urn right (north) on SR 441. At the first traffic light, T turn left on Overland Rd. urn right at the first intersection (Apopka Blvd). T We are .3 mile on the right.
Ora nge ssom Blo

Maitland Blvd
(toll)
l Trai
(toll)
(toll)
(toll)
(toll)
(to ll)
Beach Line Expressway (toll)
Our 130,000-sq.ft. office/warehouse. GPS coordinates: Lat 28.642306 N, Long 81.461045 W

(toll)
Customer pick-up hours: 8 AM5:00 PM Mon.Thurs. and 8 AM4:30 PM Fri.
Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401
AquaticEco.com
Website
Order 24/7 From the Most Up-to-Date Source: AquaticEco.com

Where to Begin?
If you don't know exactly what you want, start with one of our main categories Aquaculture, Lake & Pond, Koi, Aquarium or Classroomand you'll see equipment and supplies that are good fits for those needs.
Find Technical Info

All our famous Tech Talks are listed on their own page, but did you know to look for a "Tech Talk" tab on product pages for all that apply? Besides Tech Talks, we've added links to additional technical information, such as performance curves for pumps, and different pictures of equipment on many product pages. You can also download product manuals and MSDS sheets on their respective webpages. We're always adding more, so keep checking back or send in a request if you don't see what you're looking for. For help with equipment sizing, click the "Request AES Services" link at the bottom of any webpage and fill out a form that will give our technicians everything they need to provide fast, accurate recommendations. Plus, our conversion and aquaculture calculators will make any calculations you want to do easier.
Give Feedback
After you've had to chance to use what you ordered, why not let us and fellow aquatic enthusiasts know how everything worked by adding to our customer reviews? Click the "Reviews" tab on any product page to get started. Once you log in, you'll see a field where you can type your opinion and assign a rating from 1 to 10.
WHERE TO BEGIN?
FIND TECHNICAL INFO - MANuALS
GIVE FEEDBACK
FIND TECHNICAL INFO - CuRVES
Many Ways to Contact Us

Need to get in touch with us? Chat with our customer service reps and technicians in real time with Live Help (available MondayFriday from 8 AM to 5 PM EST). All you have to do is click on the Live Chat icon below the search field on every page. If you'd like to submit a question online outside the Live Help hours, please use our online contact form. You'll get a reply within 24 hours. Note that there are separate forms for domestic and international customers. Or you can always send an email to AES@AquaticEco.com, and a representative will answer your question promptly.
MANY WAYS TO CONTACT uS
Helpful Info
Check out our FAQs pageyour questions about ordering, billing, email and shipping may have already been answered. You can also download PDF files of our most recent print catalogs.
HELPFuL INFO
AquaticEco.com E-Catalogs
Carrying around that heavy Master Catalog sure can wear you out! Now you can look through the pages just like you would by hand if you flip through our e-catalog. We're putting other catalogs online too, such as the 2010 Lakes Catalog. Just visit AquaticEco.com and look for either a banner on the homepage that links to the catalog you want or the Catalogs page at http://www.AquaticEco.com/pages/ 15/Catalogs.
Website
The equipment and supplies on the e-catalog pages have links in the price area to their webpages on AquaticEco.com, so you can conveniently add them to your shopping cart when you're ready to order. Note that since our e-catalogs are based on print catalogs, e-catalog pricing may not match pricing on AquaticEco.com, which is the most up-to-date.
Closeouts and Specials

Who doesn't like saving some money on a purchase? Take advantage of great buys in a couple of new categories online: Closeout Deals and Specials. Closeout items are a diverse mix of equipment and parts that we aren't going to carry again after stock is gone, so don't hesitate or you might miss out. Specials are items that we've discounted for a limited time, often based on what's appropriate for the current season. If you don't jump on a deal in the Specials area, you may have to wait a year before you get another chance at that price!
Facebook and Twitter

Ever feel like you're the last one to find out about a great deal? Follow us on Facebook and Twitter! Social media is a convenient and fun way for us to interact with our customers, and we love to say thanks to our online friends by giving them first crack at sales and other offers. In addition to money-saving deals, find out the latest industry and technical news as well as new product showcases. To become a member of our Facebook business page, visit Facebook.com/AES.AquaticEco and hit the "like" button. To follow us on Twitter, visit Twitter.com/AquaticEco.
YouTube
Sometimes words and pictures can only do so much. Subscribe to our channel on YouTube (YouTube.com/AquaticEcoSystemsInc) to see AES equipment in action in product demonstrations and instructional videos.
Complete Systems
Design & Engineering/R&D
Design and Engineering Services

Throughout the 30+ years AES has been in business, we have developed and tested many products. From creating high-density rotifer systems in-house to improving microflocculation tilapia systems currently, we continue to push the envelope with respect to design and R&D. We work closely with academic institutions with extensive aquaculture curriculums, such as NC State (NCSU. edu) and UNC Wilmington (UNCW.edu), to continually refine our products. We have built an extensive database of system design criteria over the years that we use to assist clients in choosing the proper components for their particular applications. From oxygen utilization spread sheets to mass balance calculators to aeration system sizers, we have a unique combination of tools paired with many decades of practical experience at our disposal to help our customers maximize their yields. Some of the projects we are in the process of researching are:

Innovative ozone dissolution contactors and controllers. Advanced automation and monitoring of systems. Aquaponic systems where fish and vegetable crops can be grown concurrently. High-density koi filtration systems. reen technologies using solar collectors to power system components and G heating and cooling applications to lower electricity usage. ero discharge recirculating systems where all nutrients are managed to minimize Z the contamination of natural waters.
Research and Development Division

Improvements in technology and equipment can help you improve efficiency, cut costs and see a better bottom line for your organization. Our dedicated team (headed by a PhD) travels the globe to source materials and production processes to take advantage of when developing new products for your changing needs. This past year we created a line of monitoring and controlling systems that are flexible enough to meet a range of demands. The standard system with 3.5" touchscreen monitors pH, conductivity, TGP and temperature; automates pH and conductivity dosing; notifies you of high-temperature and low-water conditions; and can be linked to a Sensaphone for off-site alarms.
Our advanced system with 15" high-res touchscreen performs every function the standard system does and much more. It allows remote monitoring, controlling and alarming; calculates filter vessel pressure differentials for maintenance notices and alarms; and records any parameter (dissolved oxygen, salinity, etc.) measured with a probe. That's just a sampling of its capabilities.
Need design or engineering assistance?

We give our customers free advice over the telephone. Just call our Technical Department at 407-598-1401, give us your customer number and keep the conversation under ten minutes. For in-depth services, we'll be happy to design a system for you at a fair price based on the complexity of your project.
You can count on us to continue to develop innovative solutions to problems faced in many different industries.
Fish Farm/Holding Systems
Complete Systems
Fish Farm II
Invented Here AES Exclusive Assembly of the system is easy. Most components come preassembled, requiring only a screwdriver and less than 4 hours of labor. Flexible pipe joins the tanks to the filter. This allows some options for tank position to fit a variety of layouts. Complete instructions and a setup/operation video are included. Tanks are 70" D x 30" H. Weighs 620 lbs, ships via motor freight. All accessories packages are available for various species, climate conditions and special applications. One-year warranty. FF400 ALR15 PF2 SL88 Fish Farm II Replacement Diffusers Replacement Filter Media Replacement Air Pump $ 6,221.23 12.86 29.00 472.00
The ultimate in a Fish Farm.

Our Fish Farm II is a perfect system for producing up to 300 pounds of fish at one time. Avoid the usual high costs and problems associated with designing an untested system. It is perfectly suited for schools and individuals who wish to "get their feet wet" prior to going into the fish farming business. The Fish Farm II features two 500-gallon polyethylene tanks with viewing windows and support stands, a complete filtration unit using a double-drain system to separate and remove solids and a moving bed bioreactor. An efficient compressor provides aeration and circulation. This eliminates electrical devices in the water for safety. With two tanks, it is possible to culture two species or two sizes of fish at the same time. Isolation valves allow separation of one or both of the tanks from the filter for cleaning or treatment. Maintenance requires as few as 15 minutes a day and 40 gallons of makeup/exchange water.
For AES Vibratory Feeders, see page 147.
Stocking your Fish Farm with koi can teach your students valuable lessons AND recoup some of your costs at the end of the year. Ask for part number KFS400 when you call and save $215!
Holding System, 1,500-Gallon
Invented Here AES Exclusive
Produce up to 700 pounds of fish at one time.

You don't have to guess about equipment sizing or worry about losing fish with this system. We've designed and tested it to ensure that it is complete, easy to maintain and flexible; just supply water and a place for drainage! Our commercial system includes three 500-gal tanks, bead filter, biofilter, air and water pumps, UV sterilizer, sump, plumbing, feeders and mesh tank covers. This system is great for quarantine or for holding fish for retail. Each tank has valves for adjusting its water level to full, half-full or empty. For example, you may want to lower a tank's level to half-full when treating diseased fish with medicine, halving the volume of water so that you only need half the medicine as a full tank. Because the plumbing is already in place underneath the tanks, you don't need to build it into your flooring. Other features include a bottom center drain, baffle to help create a circular water flow inside the tanks and mesh netting to cover each tank. Each tank has a vibratory feeder (holds 1.75 liters of up to 6-mm food), digital timer, controller and adapters. Set up to 24 feedings per 24 hours from 159 seconds each. We use top-quality, reliable components for each commercial system. You get a Sweetwater air pump (SL170), AquaDyne Bead Filter 2.2 and Clearwater Low-Space Bioreactor (handles 49 lbs feed/day). The bead filter has its own air pump for backwashing. You can bypass the UV sterilizer (120 W, puts out 30,000 Ws/cm2) for service. We recommend operating the supplied Artesian water pump at 3045 gpm. System is 115V/60 Hz or 230V/50 Hz (for export) and requires a minimum space of 25' L x 8' W x 5.3' H. Call AES to learn more about our commercial system or for a quote on a larger package. Note: This system is built to order. FHS $ 12,398.25
Mechanical Filtration with Backwash Assist Pump Filter Return Line
You can make PVC rings to hold the mesh netting tightly in place, eliminating any sag over the center of the tanks. Just cut a 1-inch wide ring of PVC out and then make a notch in the ring so it can be stretched open. You may want to smooth any sharp edges before use. Slide the ring over netting on a tank's edge (our picture is of 1" wide, 2" dia. PVC rings).
Biofilter (49 lbs of Feed per Day)
Sweetwater Air Pump
Complete Systems
Fish Farm/Aquaponics
Invented Here AES Exclusive Stocking your Fish Farm with koi can teach your students valuable lessons AND recoup some of your costs at the end of the year. Ask for part number KFS50 when you call and save $56!
The Mini Fish Farm

#1 in the classroom.
The beauty of the Mini Fish Farm is its simplicity. It is simple to set up, simple to maintain and simple for a novice to successfully bring 100 pounds of tilapia to market size under standard conditions.
Exceptional quality.
Made entirely of professional quality, aquaculture-duty components, the Mini Fish Farm is not a toy. With minor maintenance all components have a life expectancy exceeding fifteen years. All electrical components are UL-approved and power consumption is a mere 60 watts. That's under $4 per month!
Safe and easy to maintain.

Maintenance takes less than ten minutes per day and only two 5-gallon pails of water need to be emptied and replaced. The entire system fits in a 6' x 8' area and can fit through a 36" door. Extremely safe, there is no electricity in the water, and the system is virtually leakproof. The 5'4" diameter x 35" high polyethylene tank is shown here with an optional viewing window, FW22, 213/4" x 243/4". A smaller window, FF50W, 93/4" x 213/4" is also available. Order multiple windows if you like.
Complete.
The Mini Fish Farm is a complete fish raising system. It includes a quiet, oilless air pump, a state-of-the-art clarifier and a biological filter employing moving bed technology. The entire system contains only 400 gallons of water, making heating, water changes and overall size and weight minimal. Included is an operational manual and a video that gives step-by-step set-up instructions and maintenance procedures. And remember, personal assistance is only a phone call away. Ships motor freight. One-year warranty. Made in USA. FF50-2 FF50W FW22 ZPF2 ALR15 SL44B Mini Fish Farm Small Window, Each Large Window, Each Replacement Filter Pads Replacement Diffusers Replacement Air Pump
Ship Wt FF50-2 Large viewing window, FW22, sold separately.
230 lbs
$ 2,590.54 155.27 203.24 7.16 12.86 342.00
6.14/6+ 11.57/10+
Don't see what you're looking for? Find all our products at AquaticEco.com.
The Mini Fish Farm Floating Aquaponics Option Kit

Would you like a low-cost addition to your Mini Fish Farm that could greatly enhance its use as a teaching tool while making it even more exciting to your students? The Aquaponics option is a unique hydroponics tray that allows the growth of lettuce, herbs, fl owers and other crops in the same tank as the fish! This interaction between animals and plants provides students with the opportunity to study and observe a more natural ecosystem. The kit is constructed of heavy duty ABS plastic and designed to float within the AES Mini Fish Farm, covering one half of the water's surface. It weighs 30 lbs and is capable of growing up to 24 plants. Special screening protects plant roots from foraging fish and the design provides proper tray height above the water. Includes 24 net pots (2"), 24 Rockwool cubes, 2 trays and complete instructions. Ships Oversize. Aquaponics refill kit weighs 2 lbs and includes 24 net pots (2") and 24 Rockwool cubes. Made in USA. CK50 CK50R Mini Fish Farm Aquaponics Option Aquaponics Refill Kit $ 178.64 22.00
The Mini Fish Farm Stand-Alone Aquaponics Option Kit Invented Here
AES Exclusive
Utilize dissolved fish waste as fertilizer, while supplementing biofiltration with plant uptake, by using this aquaponics kit with our Mini Fish Farm FF50. Eighteen lettuce, herb or other leafy plants are partially suspended in the recirculated water, providing optimal nutrient uptake and aeration of roots without the use of gravel or perlite. This unit is modeled after a commercial aquaponics unit that produces 45,000 heads of lettuce per day. It requires no additional power. Kit includes black ABS tray with removable top for root inspection and harvesting (measures 4' long x 2' wide x 6" deep), aluminum stand, 18 net pots (2") with growing cubes and all plumbing/fi ttings for hookup to the Mini Fish Farm, plus a comprehensive hydroponics manual. Weighs 60 lbs, ships Ground. FF50HT FF50HT-R CK50R Stand Alone Aquaponics Option Kit Retrofit Kit to Fit FF400 Aquaponics Refill Kit $ 698.58 23.00 22.00
CK50
Fish Farm/Quarantine Systems
Complete Systems
Fish Farm, Automated

Simple, reliable, low-maintenance.
This Fish Farm can automatically remove fish waste every few hours, day and night, maintaining excellent water quality. You don't have any fish waste to handle or waste water to haul. In the basic system (FF50MA) the filter is washed by opening a valve for 20 seconds. The Pulse Auto Control Panel (FF50ACP) can be added at any time to automate filter cleaning and fish feeding and is recommended for heavy fish and feed loading. The basic system supports up to 50 lbs of fed fish; order the Bioreactor (sL94 air pump included, add a sL56 if ordering as a retrofit) to support up to 125 lbs of fish. The Precision AutoFeeder (FF50AF ) coupled with the Auto Control Panel make a complete, self-sustaining life support system (five days at heavy feeding). A single energy-efficient, ultra-quiet air pump recirculates the water, delivers air to the diffuser and cleans the filter. The innovative Pulse BioClarifier (patent pending) gently settles out fish waste, captures suspended particles and acts as a biofilter. Select the automatic Pulse wash cycle using two dialsone for time on, one for time off. It's simple! The 400-gallon tank self-cleans through a center drain and is equipped with a float valve that maintains tank water level. Request the UV sterilizer (FF50AUV ) to keep water and filter clear of algae and to reduce fish pathogens. The Fish Farm comes with a sturdy dome frame for hanging the Precision AutoFeeder and for supporting the net cover (included). Secure a tarp to the frame to exclude light or airborne pollutants. All options are easy to install as retrofits. Components assemble in about 1 hour. Made in USA. Note: All plumbing will be underground w/out stands. Operate several Fish Farm with one Pulse controller and large air pump. Request a brochure to learn more. FF50MA FF50ACP FF50AB3 FF50AF FF50AUV

ff50auv
Mount on a Post or Wall Bioreactor Option Float Valve
Post Not Included
Basic System w/Manual Controls Pulse Auto Control Panel Bioreactor Precision AutoFeeder UV Sterilizer
Ship Wt
290 lbs 5 lbs 75 lbs 10 lbs 15 lbs
$ 3,825.00 745.96 1,239.43 303.72 375.16
Window Included Filter Waste Flush Line Pulse BioClarifier Air Pump
Our Auto Fish Farm has been a great learning experience. Mike Hosford has been a readily available resource to help us with our Auto Fish Farm installation and operation. The trout we are raising in our basement are healthy and amazingly fast growing. The Auto Fish Farm is a balanced, easy-to-maintain system, and we are excited about adding another tank to our existing system.
Mike and Charlotte Henderson
Manual Controls (Standard)
FF50AF
FF50ACP Automation Option
Quarantine and Holding Systems

New, thicker gel coat and stronger than ever.
AES Exclusive
A complete tank and filter system that can be used for a multitude of applications. Use it for holding sick fish, for retailing koi and goldfish in a pond shop, etc.the applications are endless. Each system includes an imported fiberglass tank, a top-mounting filter with multiple filtration chambers and a UL-listed submersible pump. The top filter chamber includes brushes and filter pads for removing debris and two biological chambers filled with ceramic biorings for high surface area. The chambers can also be filled with carbon or other chemical media. Tanks are nestable and ship via motor freight. Air pumps sold separately. HS81A HS122A HS235A HS523A PF2 AZ16027

HS81A
Holding System, 81 gal Holding System, 122 gal Holding System, 235 gal Holding System, 523 gal Replacement Particulate Filter Replacement Bio-Filter, 24"
$ 638.40 817.60 1,366.40 2,050.33 29.00 7.25
Each
26.69 6.55
4+
Crating charges not included in price.

Top View B D Side View C
A In Overhead view of top filter chamber. Out
hs81A hs122A
48" 60"
30" 30"
15" 18"
21" 33"
hs235A hs523A
72" 96"
36" 48"
24" 30"
33" 36"
Waterlife Design Group
Who We Are
Waterlife Design Group is a design, engineering, consulting and construction team servicing the public zoo, aquarium and aquaculture industries. Whether you need a life support system designed and installed or already have an LSS that needs improvement or expansion, we have the expertise to provide you with the best designs. We value quality, efficiency and completeness in order to provide better long-term solutions.
What We Offer

Project design, consulting and management. Concept development and implementation. Turnkey systems. Husbandry manuals and operations/maintenance manuals. Troubleshooting and retrofitting existing systems. Start-up, commissioning and staff training.
Engineering
Need a system that incorporates dependable equipment suitably sized for the target species while also taking personnel and visitor needs into account? Waterlife's professional engineers draw on their 100+ years of experience to deliver exactly that. We can provide both design and construction documentation to head off any problems that might crop up in building out a system design. If you have other engineers working on a project, we will seamlessly coordinate with them to assist with any aspect of design.
Consulting
Receive expert advice on exhibit concept development, design and layout, life support system requirements based on animal and exhibit needs and mechanical area layout. If you want to maximize your facility's performance while remaining within budget, then Waterlife's knowledge, training and experience are reliable and proven. We even offer "green" design, incorporating water reclamation and power conservation strategies to lessen your system's environmental impact.
CAD
Waterlife's drafting staff will give you drawings and specifications of your system from design through construction, so there will be no costly surprises for you. In addition, we offer a 3D virtual walkthrough, a great way to visualize the mechanical spaces that also prevents conflicts in the field during installation.
Troubleshooting
Waterlife field personnel will schedule on-site visits to assess water quality or filtration issues on existing systems, ensuring accuracy, thoroughness and timeliness with our diagnostics. We can also provide training in person, giving your staff valuable hands-on experience in proper maintenance and operational procedures. If you have an older system, we can recommend retrofit work to optimize its efficiency, so you'll still have ways to save time and money without a complete overhaul.
Waterlife Design Group
Project Management
A large-scale installation requires experts from several different trades to work together. To coordinate the various jobs and ensure that your filtration equipment is installed and integrated properly, Waterlife can provide an on-site project manager for the duration of the life support system installation. Our experience means we will avoid potential pitfalls and retain the flexibility to smoothly handle the unexpected.
Installation
We are uniquely suited to assist our clients by drawing on our extensive field experience to make sure your system is not only functional but also easy to use and maintain. Waterlife's installation team includes master plumbers and project/ construction managers who fully understand the special needs of aquatic system construction where animal welfare is critical.
Start-Up/System Commissioning
After the glue has cured and the pipes have been hydro-tested, a Waterlife representative will be there to "flip the switch" and get your system up and running. We will fine-tune all the components and train your staff to properly operate all equipment prior to sign-off by the owner. Although not everyone needs an operations/maintenance manual, we'll be happy to supply one if you prefer.
10
Aquatic Habitats
The Best Environment Outside of Nature

Aquatic Habitats (AHAB) was founded in 1997 to meet the unique needs of the aquatic research community. AHAB developed the premier aquatic housing system now being copied by other manufacturers. We design a turnkey system that is secure, efficient, ergonomic, robust and as fail-safe as possible. And now we are partnered with Aquatic Eco-Systems, taking full advantage of their 20 years of experience as system designers and supplier to the aquaculture science communities. Our policy of continuous improvement, incorporating customer feedback, continues to help us evolve and maintain our position as the leader. We make every effort to keep updates backward compatible so all systems benefit. AHAB now has access to more systems and expertise than ever before, allowing you to focus on your research. Our combined resources will also speed up the development and introduction of enhanced systems and services. Whatever research model you are working withzebrafish, Xenopus, medaka, stickleback, eel, shrimp, octopusAHAB's team of fisheries biologists, aquaculturists, engineers and other professionals with aquatic system experience can design the perfect system for you. When you partner with AHAB, we will be there for you every step of the way, from carefully listening to your goals to making recommendations on facility design. We can make sure you get exactly what you want within the limits of your budget. With AHAB you will receive the all-important "single-vendor" responsibility. We do it allfrom design and manufacturing to turnkey installations.
university of utah. Princeton university.
university of Washington.
New York university.
Custom system at AHAB production facility.
These fine institutions are already utilizing AHAB systems:

Dana Farber Cancer Institute. Hutchinson Cancer Research Center. Phylonix Pharmaceuticals. Harvard University. University of California, San Francisco. Children's Hospital of Boston. Oregon Health Sciences University. National University of Singapore. Temasek Life Sciences Laboratory. University of Massachusetts Medical Center.
Fred Carnegie Marine
Institution of Washington. Biological Laboratories. National Institutes of Health (NIH). University of Maine. Massachusetts General Hospital. University College London. University of Washington. Georgetown University. University of Utah.
Technician Profile
Abby Walker
Abby received her BS in environmental science from Springfi eld College in Massachusetts and her MS in zoology from the University of New Hampshire. She specializes in recirculating systems for aquaculture and has done research on fish nutrition and larvaculture.
Purdue university.
Aquatic Habitats
11
The New AquaticHabitats.com

Now you can order consumables and repair or replacement parts for your AHAB systemincluding tanks, filter media, filter accessories, feeds, chemicals, air pumps, air compressors, tubing and moredirectly from AHAB's website! Click on "Consumables" in the top navigation bar to get started. For help ordering a system, call 407-886-7575 or request a system quote online.
X-Rack
The X-Rack line is designed for Xenopus applications and accommodates a wide variety of tank sizes for other species.
Research Systems
Here are a few of the systems that AHAB offers:
Stand-Alone System
The Stand-Alone is one of our proven, time-tested zebrafish housing systems. Save time setting up and keeping track of your experiments compared with conventional fish-keeping systems. In fact, you can fit up to 120 tanks in the same footprint as three conventional 10-gallon glass aquaria!
Xenopus laevis
Benchtop System
The AHAB benchtop system is ideal for labs that have no floor space and limited counter space. Each shelf holds six 10-liter, twelve 3-liter or twenty 1.5-liter tanks. Mix and match for added versatility!
Danio rerio
Multi Glass Tank System

With bigger tanks than the Stand-Alone system, the Multi Glass system is a nice fit for labs where larger species of fish are being used. Also a great choice for toxicology-related studies in which plastic tanks may not be ideal.
Mass Embryo Production System (MEPS)

Designed specifically for the production of large numbers of zebrafish embryos for drug screening, toxicology assays/experiments or propagation of fish.
Oryzias latipes
Close-up of spawning sites.
Multi-Rack System
The Multi-Rack system is custom-built to your specifications, with as many racks as your research needs. You'll get flexible options regarding tank sizes, shelf configurations, rack widths and heightseverything. No facility design is too complicated.
12
Lake & Pond
AES Lakes Department
Aquatic Eco-Systems Lakes Department

We are world leaders in lake management systems, having improved the quality of large bodies of water and aquatic ecosystems since 1978. Our 50+ years of field experience in pond and lake management includes a PhD Professional Engineer who leads a staff of highly trained biologists, technicians and specialists. Count on lots of personal attention as we draw from our extensive resources to tackle all your lake and pond problems. Whether you need a large reservoir aeration system designed and quoted, assistance troubleshooting the backyard farm pond or simply an answer for an aquatic question, you're in qualified hands. We also stock a wide selection of equipment and can ship in-stock items the same day!
Our Lakes team is ready to listen and help.
Our Lakes Department values relationships with every customer, giving all the high level of attention and service they deserve. We can provide you with the following services:
Does your lake or pond have ...

Frequent algae blooms? Low oxygen in the lower levels? High nutrient levels? Toxic gases such as hydrogen sulfide and ammonia? Stagnant, inadequate mixing? Lack of benthic organisms such as mussels and snails? Foul odors and fishkills?
erial mapping & aeration equipment A sizing. quatic weed management A assistance.
Pond management consulting. Fisheries consulting. General aquatic troubleshooting.
The Problem
A great need for oxygen exists at the bottom of a eutrophic (nutrient rich) lake. Oxygen is absorbed at the surface but fails to reach the lake bottom due to thermal stratification, poor circulation and/or rapid consumption. During the summer months when the water is warm, oxygen can be consumed faster than it can be replenished, killing aquatic animals in the lower levels. Without bottom oxygen, a lake's self-purification capability is reversed. Nutrients that would normally be unavailable or "locked" in the sediment get recycled into the water column. These excess nutrients are just as harmful to the lake as those that come from the surrounding watershed. Fertilizers, animal droppings, septic tank seepage and nutrients recycled from the sediment all increase a lake's need for oxygen.
Don't wait until you experience a fishkill to realize that you have a problem!
Aeration system design map.
The Solution
Invented Here
A Great Lakes synergistic airlift diffuser assembly will deliver up to 10 lbs of dissolved oxygen per horsepower per hour! Our Sweetwater compressor, in conjunction with our Great Lakes synergistic airlift diffuser assemblies, delivers 8,000 gpm/hp of circulationby far the highest in the industryguaranteed.
The Results
A Great Lakes aeration/destratification system will:

We focus on correct, accurate technical information and believe this dedication to detail is the keystone of our business and important for your success. If you accomplish your goals, that's when we succeed. Give us a call at 407-472-0520 to talk with a lakes technician.
Eliminate thermal stratification. Reduce BOD and COD. Increase bottom redox potential. Reduce sedimentation rate (muck accumulation). Reduce internal nutrient cycling. Improve water clarity. Eliminate fishkills and improve fishery. Reduce algae growth. Not suspend bottom sedimentsguaranteed!
Bathymetric map of country club lake in Southgate, KY.
Guarantee
We will guarantee in writing that our aeration systems will keep the bottom dissolved oxygen above 5 mg/L, as mandated by the US Clean Water Act of 1972, when requested to do so. We do require accurate data on which to base our design and guarantee.
One of our lake technicians testing a new product.
Lake & Pond

Case Studies
13
AES has aerated over 500,000 acres of lakes.

Large Lake and Reservoir Systems
We have everything needed for a complete solution.
The Great Lakes Synergistic Airlift Technique employs oilless air compressors with the appropriate accessories, including protective cabinets, mufflers, soundproofing, tubing, couplers and clamps as well as super efficient air diffuser assemblies.
Chern Ching Reservoir

Aquatic Eco-Systems, Inc., designed, supplied and installed an aeration/ destratification system in the 255-acre Chern Ching drinking water reservoir in Taiwan. The 45-year-old, man-made reservoir was highly eutrophic. Dissolved oxygen levels were typically less than 1 ppm at the bottom and ORP values above the sediment layer (in some places up to 13 feet thick!) were -400 mV. The Taiwan Water Authority used two main criteria for judging the success of the operation: the D.O. levels measured at 4 inches above the sediment layer would have to be at least 4 ppm and the ORP values at any location would have to be greater than 0. The AES Great Lakes Aeration System brought rapid improvement that exceeded their criteria. The Taiwan Water Authority declared the operation a success on all accounts, including a significant improvement in water clarity. The cost of treating the reservoir's water (to make it drinkable) was significantly reduced.
Park Lake
A 10-acre lake, located in Orlando, Florida, was plagued with some of the poorest water quality in the area. The lake generated many complaints involving hydrilla, algae blooms, low dissolved oxygen, high nutrient levels and fishkills. The herbicides that were used offered some relief of the blooms but were an expensive, ongoing cost. The urban run-off added nutrients to the 24-foot deep lake, and internal nutrient cycling compounded the problem. The lake remained stratified (stratification occurs when a layer of warmer, less dense water settles on top of cooler, denser water). When this occurs, the lower water cannot exchange gases. Oxygen becomes depleted and toxic gases, such as ammonia, carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide, accumulate. Most of the lake's bottom remained devoid of organisms. Without the mussels, snails, aerobic bacteria and other organisms that feed on the detritus, the lake's water quality could only get worse. Nutrient levels would increase from the internal nutrient cycling. The City of Orlando installed an aeration system designed to aerate the lake by turning over the water every six days. Within weeks, dissolved oxygen levels in the lake increased and the toxic gases dispersed. Phosphorus and other nutrient levels decreased and water quality improved. Within one year, the lake supported largemouth bass and hundreds of waterfowl. The diversity and quantity of other species increased. The ability of the lake to assimilate nutrients into the food web has been vastly improved. Park Lake is now considered a jewel to the city and the surrounding neighborhood and to have some of the best water quality in this city of 90 lakes. Over the years, the City of Orlando has purchased thirty additional systems for other city lakes.
Lake Study: Park Lake

24 21 18 15 Depth (feet) 12 9 6 3 0 Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec mg/L 1.6
Water Clarity (Secchi Depth)
1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 Jul
Phosphorus
Total Phosphorous Ortho Phosphorous
Aug Sep
Oct
Nov Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug Sep
Oct
Nov Dec
28 18 15 12 mg/L 9 6 3 0 Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
24
Carbon Dioxide & Dissolved Oxygen

Carbon Dioxide Dissolved Oxygen
Ammonia (Nitrogen)
mg/L
20 16 12 8 4 0 Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Return a design questionnaire and we will size and quote the perfect Great Lakes system. Visit our website or call and ask for the Lakes Department.
14
Lake & Pond

Aeration
Great Lakes Aeration Systems
Invented Here TF
Our Great Lakes Aeration Systems are complete and ready-to-go packages that include everything you need: lockable heavy-duty aluminum cabinet, efficient rocking piston air compressor and synergistic diffuser manifolds. DA1B and DA2B come with ala4glb 4-diffuser manifold (DA2B includes two) and unweighted or easy-to-install weighted tubing (see item descriptions below for which is included). Also available is the DA3B aeration system, which provides extra air in larger, deeper impoundments. In keeping with the benefits of the original systems, the DA3B is install-ready with all-weather cabinet, rocking piston air compressor and larger ala6glb 6-diffuser manifold. Weighted 5/8" tubing ( wd1r, required for DA3B) is sold separately. Great Lakes systems with self-weighted tubing do not require bricks or ties and install much easier and faster than systems with unweighted tubing. To keep from bringing electricity to the lake, the compressor can be located up to 1,000' away with additional P200S tubing. The sound-reducing, ventilated, weatherproof, heavy-duty cabinet is easily installed on a post, pier or boathouse. Or install on the ground with an additional base (dabase ). Instructions are included, and the entire unit can be shipped Ground. 115V/60 Hz. 230V systems require longer lead time.
8 Feet of Heat-Dissipating Hose Included
Pressure Relief Valve Included
Sound-Reducing Foam High-Flow, NoiseReducing Air Filter
Open Top Cabinet Design Allows for Easy Maintenance
DA1B System
DA1B DA1BW DA1BWNC DA1BNC DA1BNT
Cabinet Unweighted Tubing (100')
P P P P P
Weighted Tubing (100')
P P
Ship Wt (lbs)
Efficient, Reliable Rocking Piston Compressor
Hinged Cover for Easy Access High-Flow, 105-cfm Cooling Fan
45+12 59+12 38+12 24+12 39+12
$ 1,078.94 1,162.15 860.93 833.65 1,056.78
Louvered Design Allows for Optimal Air Flow
Rubber Shock Mounts Reduce Vibration
DA2B System
DA2B DA2BW DA2BWNC DA2BNC DA2BNT
Cabinet Unweighted Tubing (200')
up to 1/8 acre, 35' deep up to 1/4 acre, 59' deep up to 1/2 acre, 912' deep up to 1 acre, 1215' deep up to 11/2 acres, 1520' deep
da1b
P P P
P P
Weighted Tubing (200')
P P
56+12+12 85+12+12 63+12+12 35+12+12 44+12+12
Ship Wt (lbs)
$ 1,547.62 1,624.39 1,474.70 1,359.80 1,518.11
up to 1/4 acre, 35' deep up to 1/2 acre, 59' deep up to 1 acre, 912' deep up to 2 acres, 1215' deep up to 3 acres, 1520' deep
da2b
*Consult the sizing guides on these pages or call 407-472-0520 for the
Lakes Department and ask for sizing advice on irregularly shaped ponds.
Lake & Pond

Aeration
15
DA3B System
Cabinet
DPX200
DA3B P 52+15 DA3BNC 31+15 DA3B-230* P 52+15 DA3BNC-230* 31+15 *230V models have additional lead time.
Ship Wt (lbs)
$ 1,584.11 1,423.22 1,584.11 1,423.22
Handheld Depth Findersee page 36.
Close-up of Lock
up to 3/4 acre, 59' deep up to 11/2 acres, 912' deep up to 21/2 acres, 1215' deep up to 31/2 acres, 1518' deep up to 4 acres, 1820' deep
DA3B Lockable lid shown on ground mount (DABASE ).
This is all you see in the water when your aeration system is running.
Accessories
WD2R WD2R-100 WD1R P200S 62071 62072 ZB3858 DFAN ALR15MB ALR23MB AB300B DA1B-RK DA2B-RK DA3B-RK DABASE 50' 3/8" Weighted Air Tubing 100' 3/8" Weighted Air Tubing 50' 5/8" Weighted Air Tubing 100' 1/2" Unweighted Air Tubing 3/8" x 3/8" Adapter, Barb x Barb 1/2" x 1/2" Adapter, Barb x Barb 3/8" x 5/8" Brass Adapter, Barb x Barb Replacement Cooling Fan Replacement Diffuser 9" Repl. Diffuser Replacement Air Filter DA1B Compressor Repair Kit DA2B Compressor Repair Kit DA3B Compressor Repair Kit Ground Mount w/24" x 24" Pad $ 45.69 91.39 75.26 37.80 .48 .48 4.05 40.30 12.60 17.98 1.30 128.27 112.36 112.36 121.15 43.01/4+ 86.02/4+ 69.89/4+ 34.02/4+ .44/10+ .44/10+ 3.65/10+ 11.34/10+ 16.18/10+ 1.24/10+
WD2R-100
Lake Specialist John Baylor went above and beyond what I expected, and I am very pleased with his help. Thanks!
Tom Rosegger, MS
DFAN
ALR15MB
ALR23MB
16
Lake & Pond

Tech Talks
Tech Talk 122

Water Flow and Turnover Rates in Bubble Plume Aeration Systems
Bubble plumes, unconfined airlifts or non-ducted aeration systems have been studied for many years in a variety of applications. These systems have been used for lake and reservoir destratifi cation, gas transfer and reaeration, bubble curtains for prevention of ice formation, containment of water quality contaminants (phytoplankton and suspended solids) and ocean sequestration of carbon dioxide. Common to all of these applications is the difficulty in predicting water flowrates and lake or pond turnover rates. This is because of the complex interaction of limnological and climatological conditions. Weakly stratified conditions will affect water flow differently than strongly stratified conditions. The temperature, solar radiation and wind speed also affect the water flow patterns in bubble plumes. The flowrate of unconfined systems can be quantified, either by measuring the time required to destratify a large lake-like impoundment or by taking direct measurements of their flowrate. Researchers have shown that water flowrates in bubble plumes will vary depending on gas flowrate, lake stratification and weather conditions. There are several types of fl ow patterns generated, which can be described as Types 1, 2 and 3. The fi gure below shows the three flow patterns.
Tech Talk 36
Lake Aeration
It takes a lot more than bubbles to do it right...
It takes know-how and a properly-sized Great Lakes aeration/ destratification system. Most lakes cover vast areas and contain millions of gallons of water with a biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) of 10 mg/l or less. So a few random air bubbles rising from the bottom just aren't enough to satisfy a lake's need for oxygen. But, use that same small volume of air to induce a significant rising current, and you have an extremely efficient lake aerator! Aquatic Eco-Systems' synergistic airlift diffusers are designed to lift and circulate huge volumes of water, bringing life-giving oxygen from the surface to the bottom. These unique air diffusers were specifi cally engineered to cause an upwelling current without turbulence or bottom erosion. The 4-sq.ft. diffuser assembly creates a vertical current using the rising force of air, moving low oxygen water up from the bottom and eliminating stratification. Hundreds of man-hours have gone into the development of this technique, including underwater dye-flow studies and destratification experiments. The system is simple, safe and virtually maintenance free. It's the most effective lake aerator made! As little as 3/4 horsepower can be used to properly aerate a eutrophic 10-acre lake!
Technically Speaking
Subsurface Peel
When oxygen levels are low, you can expect transfer performance of more than 10 lbs of dissolved oxygen per horsepower per hour! (Pumps, fountains and "air bubblers" are typically less than 2 lbs per horsepower per hour.) Bubbles expand and spread out as they rise. The column of water entrained within the bubbles from a synergistic diffuser rises at about a foot per second, moving 2,000 gpm from the area above the diffuser (a drilled pipe diffuser with the same air volume would move only about 200 gpm). The surface boilcreated by the kinetic energy of the rising waterrises approximately two inches above the surrounding water level. From there, the water rushes outward until its energy has dissipated, sometimes traveling more than 100 feet, depending upon temperature, surface tension and wind. The lake surface tension is ruptured in the boil area. Supersaturated gases, including carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide, escape from the bottom water, and oxygen is absorbed. There's no danger to swimmers, boaters or aquatic lifeeven a marking buoy is unnecessary. And, like hundreds of others, you'll enjoy watching the surface "spring" boils. There is no electricity in the water. It's best to install the system prior to stratification. If the volume of anaerobic bottom water is greater than 1/6 of the lake's total volume, contact AES for start-up instructions. Every lake is different. An AES aeration specialist will be happy to assist with equipment selection and system design. We'll need to know the lake's shape, size, depths, history, bottom type, water source, flow, etc. Call for a sizing form or you'll find one online at AquaticEco.com.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
In unconfined bubble columns, air is forced through diffusers at the lake bottom. As the bubbles rise to the water surface, water is entrained (carried with the bubbles) in a mixture of bubbles and water. This rising bubble plume carries deeper water that is colder and heavier than the water above. The plume will rise until the negatively buoyant water is no longer entrained. At this level, water within the bubble plume is detrained (ejected) or peels off. The bubbles continue to rise and entrain more water. The detrained water will sink to a level of neutral density and then spread out horizontally away from the bubble plume. In the case of a stratifi ed lake, the buoyant plume will rise to different levels before water is detrained and moves out horizontally. This will vary depending on the degree of stratification as shown in the figure. Because of these complications, it is difficult to describe water flowrates from bubble plumes without complex limnological and climatological input data. Several researchers have used sophisticated water quality models to describe bubble plume behavior in different applications. Some manufacturers have placed their diffusers in a draft tube to determine the water flowrate. However, using a confining tube will affect the velocity and flowrate (causing a "chimney effect"), making the diffuser appear to perform better than it does. Others have completed fl owrate testing in tanks or containers where walls and boundaries affect the results. These methods of testing are so unlike the actual conditions of unconfined bubble plumes that the results should not be used to predict flowrates in an open water body and should not be used in making comparisons between diffuser systems. At present, there is no way to accurately compare different unconfined bubble systems because there is no standardized method of testing to evaluate water flowrates. Turnover rates are especially difficult to calculate and, until a standard measurement is established, should never be used as a basis for system sizing. Without a standard method, there is no way of comparing water fl ow and turnover rates for competing systems. What is clear is using confined flow or flow in a ducted system is not an accurate method of describing flowrates in unconfined bubble plume systems.
All diffusers need maintenance, even ones with rubber membranes.
Lake & Pond

Tech Talks
17
Tech Talk 101

Lake Destratification System Evaluation
Over the last 31 years at AES, we have seen a lot of lake aeration companies come and go. One thing they had in common was that they all exaggerated their performance. It is no different today! We see others with superior claims who have not measured or don't know how to measure their performance. It's not easy, but the following is the background you will need to evaluate manufacturers' claims. Lakes have a very low BOD to volume ratio, as opposed to aquaculture or wastewater. This difference makes the standard aeration techniques ineffective or impractical. Realizing this problem early on, we developed the air-driven, unconfined, destratification technique, which is very efficient at moving bottom water to the surface. The goal of our technique is to move enough water to keep the lake bottom above 5 mg/l dissolved oxygen, in keeping with the US Clean Water Act of 1972. During our research and development, we naturally began with a draft tube because of its "chimney effect," high efficiency and lack of a requirement for a sophisticated air diffuser (for an explanation of how ducted airlifts work, see Tech Talk 68Airlift Notes). The draft tubes worked very well; however, we had to discontinue their use for most lake destratification jobs because of their high capital, installation and maintenance costs. AES then developed the synergistic airlifts as the best nonducted or unconfined airlifts. We estimate their efficiency at 90%.
Measuring Performance
The performance of systems can be quantified, either by measuring the time required to destratify a large lake-like impoundment or by taking direct measurements of their flowrate. You can use either a dye or a flow grid (along with a diver and underwater camera) for in-place measurements. The goal is to identify and measure the uprising column of water's minimum diameter and speed, then estimate and subtract losses due to eddy currents (dye will provide a good visual). Unfortunately, you cannot use a draft tube measuring device (A), as the confining tube will increase the velocity and flowrate ("chimney effect"). It will also cause all of the tested devices that have the same airflow rate to have the same water flowrate, making comparisons impossible. That would be like comparing the rise rate of free-floating helium balloons to that of a chimney full of helium balloons. The method we used in our R&D, and the one that we feel is the most accurate, is the flow grid, as illustrated by B. It can be used for diffused air, propeller or venturi type destratification devices. It will require a wire rack with 2" x 2" grid, with 12" long negatively buoyant ribbons attached at each intersection and adjustable legs. It is important that this be done in a large lake-like impoundment with very clear water (much of our testing was done in clear ocean waters). The flow rack should be fixed at the minimum column diameter in the upwelling stream, measurements recorded, then flows calculated by the diameter of the current and rise rate. Subtract losses from eddy currents and express results in gallons per minute per kilowatt hour.
If you are managing a municipal lake or reservoir, or other important water body, we recommend that you join the North American Lake Management Society (608-233-2836), www.nalms.org.
Tech Talk 94
Lake Aeration Diffusers
The air diffusers used will determine the overall efficiency of a lake aeration/ destratification system. The two most common styles are the synergistic airlift assembly (developed by AES) and the rubber membrane diffuser. Each was designed for different tasks. The synergistic airlift assembly (SAM) is made to lift a large volume of bottom water, thus removing stratification. The rubber membrane type (RM) was designed to aerate waste water. Destratification is the most economical form of lake aeration. This is only accomplished by moving large volumes of water. SAMs were developed through extensive underwater flow testing to lift the maximum amount of water from above the diffuser to the surface of the lake with a minimum amount of air (8,000 pm/hp). This technique requires a specific spacing of the individual diffuser fingers to provide nonturbulent entrainment of the bottom water into the column of rising bubbles. For that reason, they must take on the odd shape of the ALA4glb, 6glb and 8gl diffuser manifolds. Each is optimized for a specific depth range. The smaller ALA4glb manifold is designed for shallow lakes from 4 to 8 feet in depth. These shallow depths cause short circuiting of the lifted water back to the diffuser, which limits their effectiveness. Therefore, more diffuser manifolds per surface acre of water are required than for a deeper lake of the same size. The ALA6glb diffuser manifolds are best used in water 8 to 40 feet deep. The deeper the water, however, the greater volume of air that needs to be used by each diffuser. This is true for all diffusers. The ALA8glb diffuser manifold is typically used in water deeper than 30 feet. RM diffusers are not designed to lift water for destratification, so they are not recommended for lake aeration. If used for lake aeration, many more of them must be used to achieve the same result as a single synergistic airlift assembly. When the rubber membrane diffusers are used in salt water or waste water, they may operate for as long as one year without excessive clogging. After that, remote cleaning can be accomplished by doubling or tripling the amount of air delivered to a diffuser. This will blow up the rubber, as in a balloon, dislodging the fouling matter. Wastewater treatment plants are designed for this, but it may be impractical for lake applications where there is only one compressor. Sometimes, RM diffusers will tear, greatly reducing their oxygen transfer ability. If detected, retrieve the diffuser and replace the rubber membrane. The ceramic diffusers used on SAMs should be inspected every three years in most cases. Clogging can be detected by recording the air pressure when new, then annually checking the pressure to see if it has increased. Diffusers can be cleaned by pouring muriatic acid into the air lines and turning on the compressor. The original pressure will be quickly restored and the small amount of acid will be diluted with no effect on the lake.
18
Lake & Pond

Aeration
Invented Here
great Lakes Aeration Systems
The Great Lakes aeration/destratification system is guaranteed to be the lowest cost method of inducing circulation to remove stratification, add oxygen and deliver the many benefits that result from sufficient bottom oxygen. These systems feature Sweetwater unconfined synergistic airlift (USA) diffusers that have proven their effectiveness in over 250,000 acres of lakes worldwide. Install a Great Lakes system and be confident that you have the most effi cient and effective system available. We have more experience than anybody. For system sizing see the Average Sizing Guides below, then contact us to double-check before ordering. One-year warranty. Installation available.
For Shallow Lakes
For shallow lakes:

Systems come factory wired for either 115V or 230V single-phase (add "-230" after part number for 230V). Three-phase models, not wired, are also available. Great Lakes systems feature Sweetwater oilless rotary vane compressors that include a muffler, inlet check valve, control valves, 030 psi liquid-filled pressure gauge and pressure relief valve. Our shallow lake systems, which use the ALA4gLb diffuser manifold(s), are recommended when the majority of the lake is 415 feet deep. Tubing is not included; we recommend P200 polyethylene tubing on the land and WD1 weighted tubing underwater. Maintenance kits include four sacrificial carbon vanes, gasket and two inlet filter elements. SL3MK SL5MK SL9MK N516 Maintenance Kit for 1/4-hp System Maintenance Kit for 3/4-hp System Maintenance Kit for 1-hp System Nut Driver (Fits All Clamps)
ship Wt
Powered by
up to 1 acre, 46' deep
2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs
$ 97.66 114.60 230.88 13.48
4GL54
up to 2 acres, 69' deep up to 3 a cres, 912' deep up to 4 acres, 1215' deep
4gL54 gL54NC
Aeration System + 4 Diffusers w/Cabinet Same, w/o Cabinet
3/4-hp
ship Wt
150 lbs 90 lbs
$ 2,678.46 1,952.47
Note: Maintenance kits include four sacrificial carbon vanes, gasket and two inlet filter elements.
4GL32
up to 1/2 acre, 46' deep up to 1 acre, 69' deep up to 11/ p 2 acres, 912' dee up to 2 acres, 1215' deep ship Wt
4GL75
up to 11/2 acres, 46' deep up to 21/ ep 2 acres, 69' de up to 4 acres, 912' deep up to 5 acres, 1215' deep
1/4-hp Aeration System + 2 Diffusers w/Cabinet 4gL32 4gL32NC Same, w/o Cabinet
127 lbs 67 lbs
$ 2,197.92 1,468.92
4gL75 4gL75NC
Aeration System + 5 Diffusers w/Cabinet Same, w/o Cabinet
3/4-hp
ship Wt
157 lbs $ 2,829.41 97 lbs 2,104.93
4GL53
up to 3/4 acre, 46' deep up to 11/ ep 2 acres, 69' de up to 2 acres, 912' deep up to 3 acres, 1215' deep ship Wt
up to 2 acres, 46' deep
4GL96
up to 31/ ep 2 acres, 69' de up to 5 acres, 912' deep up to 6 acres, 1215' deep

ship Wt
3/4-hp Aeration System + 3 Diffusers w/Cabinet 4gL53 4gL53NC Same, w/o Cabinet
147 lbs 87 lbs
$ 2,279.83 1,664.90
4gL96 1-hp Aeration System + 6 Diffusers w/Cabinet 4gL96NC Same, w/o Cabinet
165 lbs 105 lbs
$ 3,166.67 2,479.79
Lake & Pond

Aeration
19
For Deep Lakes

For deep lakes:
Compressors are factory wired for either 115V or 230V single-phase (add "-230" after part number for 230V). Three-phase models, not wired, are also available. Deep lake systems use our ALA6gLb diffuser manifold(s) intended for lakes deeper than 8'. The compressors can be mounted in an optional vandalproof, lockable cabinet. The cabinet is made of 1/8" thick galvanized steel and powder-coated avocado green to blend into the landscape. Cabinets include built-in cooling fan(s), lock(s) and soundproofing that keeps the noise level below 55 dB (normal conversation) at 10' and virtually inaudible at 50'. Cabinets come mounted on a lightweight equipment pad that is suitable for private installations. The cabinet can be bolted to a concrete base (for public installations). Tubing sold separately due to the variation in lake sizes. Choose either a 100' (P200S) or 400' (P200) roll of unweighted tubing on land. If used in the water, the unweighted tubing requires tie wraps ( T120R) and three-hole bricks (purchased locally) attached every 58' for weight. Self-weighted tubing (WD1) takes much less time to install and eliminates the bricks and tie wraps. Both types of tubing can be connected using couplings (101A) and clamps (use SSA for P200 tubing and SSb for WD1 tubing). One coupling and two clamps per connection will be needed. Cabinets can be located a long distance from the lake shore (call and ask us for guidance or see the friction loss chart with HeavySet tubing).
the boil from an installed aeration system.
3-Phase Equipment
We highly recommend using protective devices with all 3-phase equipment. Motor starters, phase monitors and phase protectors are not included in the sale and should be sourced locally. Failure to install protective devices will void most warranties. We also recommend that a certified electrician perform the installation.
sL3
up to 2 acres, 1012' deep up to 3 a cres, 1215' deep up to 5 acres, 1518' deep

ship Wt (lbs)
up to 1 acre, 810' deep
up to 5 acres, 810' deep sL7

up to 7 p acres, 1012' dee up to 9 ac res, 1215' deep up to 13 acres, 1518' deep
SL3 SL3NC
1/4-hp
Aeration System (AQ3) + Diffusers w/Cabinet Same, w/o Cabinet
120 60
$ 1,876.47 1,184.92
SL7 SL7NC
3/4-hp Aeration System (AQ7) + 3 Diffusers w/Cabinet Same, w/o Cabinet
ship Wt (lbs)
142 82
$ 2,617.65 1,914.76
up to 4 acres, 1012' deep

up to 6 p acres, 1215' dee up to 8 ac res, 1520' deep up to 10 acres, 2028' deep
sL5
sL9 ship Wt (lbs)
up to 8 acres, 810' deep up to 10 acres, 1012' deep up to 13 acres, 1215' deep up to 17 acres, 1518' deep ship Wt (lbs)
3/4-hp Aeration System (AQ5) + 2 Diffusers w/Cabinet SL5 SL5NC Same, w/o Cabinet
140 $ 2,314.25 80 1,551.24
SL9 1-hp Aeration System (AQ9) + 4 Diffusers w/Cabinet SL9NC Same, w/o Cabinet
150 90
$ 2,945.10 2,575.05
20
Lake & Pond

Aeration
Invented Here
wd3 wd2 wd1 wd4 wd5 p200
HeavySet Weighted Air Tubing
Our HeavySet tubing remains on the bottom when filled with air. The dark blue color makes it easy to hide. Installation is fast, clean and neat. For long distances and large bodies of water use 3/4" or 1". Use 1/4" or 3/8" for smaller volumes of air, shorter distances or where line loss is not important. Compatible with 1/2" "nominal" insert fittings and "shoreside" tubing. Requires clamps (or solvent weld the couplings). Call for large quantity discounts. wd1r Ships exposed. Made in USA.
5/8" WD1 Per foot 1 lb 5/8" WD1R 50' Coil 27 lbs WD1R-100 100' Coil 5/8" 54 lbs 3/8" WD2 Per foot 1 lb 3/8" WD2R 50' Coil 10 lbs WD2R-100 100' Coil 3/8" 20 lbs 1/4" 1 lb WD3 Per foot 1/4" WD3R 50' Coil 6.5 lbs 3/4" 1 lb WD4 Per foot 3/4" WD4R 50' Coil 39 lbs WD5 Per foot 1" 2 lbs WD5R 50' Coil 1" 59 lbs 101A Coupling, 5/8" for WD1, p200 101B Coupling, 3/4" for WD4 1/2" SS Clamps for WD2, p250 SSA 3/4" SS Clamps for WD1, p250 SSB SSC 1" SS Clamps for WD4 SSE 11/2" SS Clamps for WD5 T120R Tie Wraps, 50/Pkg, 15" Long KT100 Tubing Cutter 5/16" Nut Driver for Clamps N516
I.D.
Weight
$ 1.61/ft 75.26 70.00/4+ 150.53 140.00/4+ 1.07/ft 45.69 42.50/4+ 91.39 86.02/4+ .80/ft 37.63 35.00/4+ 2.44/ft 105.00 97.65/4+ 3.11/ft 132.00 124.25/4+ 1.20 .93/10+ 1.48 1.31/10+ 1.20 1.12/10+ 1.30 1.22/10+ 1.40 1.34/10+ 1.45 1.37/10+ 12.24 15.00 13.48
2 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 62069 Barb

3 /8 " 5 /8 "
1/4" Actual 1/2" O.D.
5/8" I.D. 11/8" O.D. 8 oz/ft Use SSB Clamps Use 101A Barb 3/4" I.D. 17/16" O.D. 12 oz/ft Use SSC Clamps Use 101B Barb
Actual O.D. 3 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 62071 Barb

3 /8 "
1" I.D. 111/16" O.D. 18 oz/ft Use SSE Clamps Use 101C Barb I.D. 1 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 101A Barb
5 /8 "
5 /8 "
Air Friction Loss

Psi Cfm
Air Friction Loss

Psi
Cfm
Distance Inches H2 O
1 1.5
101a
100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
18 35 57 115 190 280
.63 1.26 2.06 4.15 6.85 10.12
2 3 4 5 6 8
100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
4 8 13 19 27 44
.63 .29 .47 .70 .96 1.58
2 3 4 5
ssb
kt100
Heavy-Duty Polyethylene Tubing

This heavy-duty, high-density polyethylene tubing is kink-resistant and durable. Each coil of this unique tubing has sealed ends and is factory pressurized at 10 psi. Contains 2% carbon black for UV protection. Uses insert fittings with hose clamps. Note: Actual I.D. differs from nominal size. P300 ships by motor freight. Lifetime warranty. Made in USA.
Ships Nominal Actual Weight Max psi Coil Ground I.D. Wall Per 100' @73.4F Length Each Coil
Technician Profile
Daniel Kerr
Dan graduated form Florida Gulf Coast University with a B.A. in marine science. He has advanced knowledge and experience with water quality testing and practice.
P200S P200 P250 P300
Yes Yes Yes No
5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
1"
.625" .625" .824" 1.049"
.060" .060" .060" .070"
6 lbs 6 lbs 7 lbs 11 lbs
100 100 100 100
100' $ 37.80 400' 125.82 400' 130.34 300' 148.44
34.02/4+ 113.24/4+ 117.30/4+ 133.60/4+
Third-Party Comparison of Lake Diffusers

This experiment was performed in a 21' Dia. x 30' H tank. Diffusers were placed in 7' of water but raised 3.5' off the bottom. The results show that, when tested in the same environment, the Sweetwater synergistic airlift diffuser manifold has a greater pumping rate as airflow increases than that of the rubber membrane-based competition. After testing was completed, the following conclusions were offered: 1. Pumping rates increase as airflow increases. 2. T he 6" x 9" glass-bonded silica 6-diffuser manifold (ALA6GLB) configuration produces the maximum pumping rate at flowrates over 2.2 cfm, while the 4-diffuser manifold ( ALA4GLB) produces the maximum pumping rate at flowrates below 2.2 cfm. Synergistic lift occurs when individual air diffusers arranged in an array create a bubble plume that renders the whole diffuser assembly greater than the sum of its individual air diffusers. This phenomenon is depicted in the graph. At flowrates up to 2.2 cfm, the 4-diffuser manifold is the most efficient method of aeration; however, flowrates greater than 2.2 cfm indicate the 6-diffuser manifold is most efficient. It is important to note these differences in efficiency are a direct result of air diffuser size and proven arrangements. Study by Gerald L. Shell @ GSEE, Inc. "Evaluation of Fine Bubble Diffuser Pumping Rates"
3,000 Pumping Rate (GPM) 2,500 2,000 1,500 1,000 500 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Gas Flowrate (SCFM) 14 16 18 6-Diffuser 4-Diffuser 4-Disc 2-Disc
Aeration/Tech Talk
Lake & Pond
21
Synergistic Airlift Diffusers by great Lakes

ALP4 ALR8Mb ALP4MU ALA4gLb ALR15Mb ALA6gLb S1b S2 ALA8gL ALR23Mb AD11gL CV1 Small Pond Diffuser Manifold, 1.2 cfm, 3/8" Barb 3" Replacement Diffuser Repl. Underlay 4-Diffuser Manifold, 1.52.4 cfm, 5/8" Barb 6" Repl. Diffuser 6-Diffuser Manifold, 37 cfm, 5/8" Barb Repl. Underlay Repl. Ballast Attachment 8-Diffuser Manifold, 610 cfm, 5/8" Barb 9" Repl. Diffuser De-Icing Diffuser, 2 cfm, 5/8" Barb Check Valve, 3/4" FNPT
ship Wt
Invented Here
all are self-weighted and include a plastic underlay that prevents sediment erosion.
3 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 10 lbs* 1 lb 13 lbs* 3 lbs 6 lbs 16 lbs* 2 lbs 9 lbs 1 lb $ 56.05 7.20 3.50 147.15 12.60 189.56 22.47 51.00 249.78 17.98 159.36 8.45 6.71/10+ 11.84/10+ 16.90/10+ 7.58/6+
Flexible Membrane Synergistic Lift Stations

Flexible membrane diffusers prevent clogging, require little maintenance and are built for lakes with high levels of organics and/or salinity. Great for de-icing as well as aeration. Keep in mind that pumping rates are not as efficient as with ALA4gLb and ALA6gLb. 5/8" inlet. AFM4gL AFM6gL S1 4-Diffuser Station 1.52.4 6-Diffuser Station 37 Repl. Underlay (White)**
req'd cfm ship Wt (lbs)
10* 13* 1
$ 102.09 156.23 22.46
*Ships in 2 boxes. **Also compatible with discontinued models ALA4gL and ALA6gL.
*Ships in 2 boxes.
Note: See the third party diffuser comparison study on page 20.
aLa4GLb
aLa6GLb
aLP4
aD11GL
aFM4GL
aFM6GL
Diffuser Comparison
Diffuser type recommended cfm Inlet Fitting
3 / 8" 5 / 8" 5 / 8" 5 / 8" 5 / 8" 5 / 8" 5 / 8"
ship Wt (lbs)
replacement Diffuser
application
ALP4 ALA4gLb ALA6gLb ALA8gL AFM4gL AFM6gL AD11gL WD50 WD55
4 x 3" Medium-Pore 4 x 6" Medium-Pore 6 x 9" Medium-Pore 8 x 9" Medium-Pore 4 x 6" EPDM Membrane 6 x 10" EPDM Membrane Rubber Membrane Weighted, 3 Cut Weighted, De-Icing
1.2 1.52.4 3.07.0 6.010.0 1.52.4 3.07.0 2.0 .1/ft .01/ft
barb barb barb barb barb barb barb I.D. I.D.
3 10 13 16 10 13 9 48/200' 48/200'
ALR8M ALR15M ALR23M ALR23M DYMD6 DYMD10 AD11
Koi Pond Lakes <11' Deep Lakes >11' Deep Very Large, Deep Lakes Organically Rich Water* Organically Rich Water* De-Icing Aeration tubing De-Icing Tubing
1/2" 1/2"
*EPDM rubber membrane diffusers are designed for lakes with high levels of organics and/or salinity as well as wastewater lagoons. Use item number 62021 for 3/4" NPT x 3/8" barbed male adapter if using 3/8" I.D. tubing.
Tech Talk 121

Diffuser Maintenance
Just as maintenance is important for your home and your car, your aeration system requires some upkeep. Your diffusers are constantly exposed to an organically rich environment and are going to have buildup. Nothing in life is maintenance-free. Unfortunately, they can't be expected to clean themselves. The good news: An annual inspection plan is all it takes for you to rest assured your system is running optimally. Rubber diffuser membranes consist of many tiny holes that open as air passes through and close when airflow ceases. This process prevents water from entering the unit. However, when compressed air is introduced into water, as in aeration, calcium carbonate (CaCO3) forms a hard crust on the diffuser surface. The calcium buildup on these small openings forces the rubber to stretch in order to continue to diffuse air, leading to an inability to go back to its original size for the rubber (called memory loss). This results in larger bubble size and a less efficient diffuser. Glass-bonded silica diffusers may become infused with bacteria, other organics and mineral deposits such as calcium carbonate, causing unnecessary back pressure on the compressor or blower over time. If this back pressure persists, it can dramatically increase wear and tear and, in turn, shorten the life of the compressor. Whether or not a diffuser is operating unobstructed is impossible to tell by simply looking at the bubble plume. It may be apparent if the rising bubbles are noticeably larger, but this is not always the case. There is only one way to be sure the diffusers are free of obstructionsremove them from the water and take a look. Whether you use glass-bonded silica or rubber membranes, it is imperative they are checked at least once a year to determine if cleaning is necessary. If needed, undiluted muriatic acid can be used for both kinds of diffusers. See Tech Talk 53 for more information.
22
Lake & Pond
Aeration Info/De-Icers/Tech Talk
Benefits of Lake Aeration

Without Aeration Fish try to catch food on its way to bottom. Dead algae, fish, insects and food to settle to bottom. Decaying septic sludge of decomposing fish, animals, plants, fertilizer, fish food. Black anaerobic sludge Blue-green algae bloom shuts out sunlight, excretes toxins. Floating scum of decaying algae. Thin layer of water with oxygen suitable for fish life. Dead water. No living fish or animal life. Septic water. No oxygen. Loaded with toxic gases from decaying animal matter.
With Aeration Artificial circulation removes toxic gases from bottom water.
Oxygen enables benthic organisms and fish to live on bottom. Benthic organisms feed on fish and water fowl droppings, dead leaves and other plant and animal matter.
Fish feed on benthic organisms; they are healthier from natural foods, abundant oxygen, lack of toxins and of disease organisms.
De-Icing System by Great Lakes
Invented Here
Looking for a low-cost de-icing system for a pond or lake? Here it is! This aerator will do a fine job keeping water open (see De-Icing Tech Talk). The heart of the aerator is the reliable Sweetwater compressor, which uses only 253 watts at 115V. The compressor is mounted in a cabinet with an exhaust fan to provide cool compressor operation. Air is delivered from the shore-mounted compressor to the air diffuser assembly. This is done via 100' of HeavySet self-weighted tubing (included) to ensure that the tubing and the diffuser assembly stay securely on the bottom (HeavySet tubing does not contain lead or other metals). The special de-icing diffuser assembly (AD11GL) is a 10" diameter flexible membrane that moves less water than the ALA4GLb diffuser and is ideal for de-icing applications. The diffuser is mounted on a weighted plastic support. To prevent any possible bottom erosion and to give the assembly a stable platform, a 24" x 24" polyethylene underlay is included. Weighs 63 lbs. One-year warranty on all parts, five-year warranty on diffuser. LPA3-2 $ 875.84 Note: If used for summer aeration/destratification, switch to an ALA4GLb diffuser assembly (not included).
Tech Talk 56
De-Icing Lakes
Most of us are aware that aeration systems are primarily required in summer, when the oxygen consumption rate is highest and stratification is most severe. In some lakes and ponds, winter fishkills are also quite common. When ice covers a lake, oxygen transfer from the atmosphere is eliminated. If there is a significant accumulation of snow on top of the ice, the photosynthetic oxygen production can also be virtually eliminated. If the ice and snow cover persists long enough and the oxygen consumption rate underneath the ice is great enough, there will be a fishkill. Clean lakes, that is, those with a low trophic state index, may not require winter aeration. During the summer, thermal stratification occurs when warmer water floats above cooler, heavier water. Near freezing, the situation is reversed. As water approaches the freezing point, it expands and floats on top of warmer water. The oxygen consumption that takes place in a lake is the result of biological and chemical reactions. Since the rate of these reactions is related to temperature, the winter aeration system needs to be only about 20% of the size of a summer aeration system. If it is acceptable to have an open hole in the ice, the simplest way to prevent a winter fishkill is to keep a small area ice free, either by using air or an electric de-icer. The electric de-icer may work best at the shoreline, perhaps mounted on a dock, while air-powered systems seem to be preferred where longer distances are involved. When the air compressor is mounted on the shore, the air line is buried below the frost line into the lake and directed to the area that is to remain ice-free. Caution must be taken due to the hazards of open water in the winter, where people or animals may be on the ice. Also, be careful not to open too large a hole in the ice, which can result in the loss of too much of the lake's heat.
AD11GL
WD2R-100
Experience is necessary when designing de-icing systems, so we recommend contacting the AES Lakes Department for assistance.
Suitable for ponds from 1/4 to 5 acres. Call for placement suggestions.
Lake & Pond

De-Icers
23
bubble Curtain De-Icing

Ice can be a dock or boat's worst enemy, as thick sheets can structurally damage boat hulls and pilings. For the winter hunter, it's critical to keep an open hole in the ice to continue to attract waterfowl such as ducks and geese to your pond. Another important reason to consider de-icing is to simply allow your pond to breathe in the winter. As ice forms and snow falls, sunlight penetrating the pond is severely reduced, which decreases existing algae's ability to make oxygen that your fish need to live. Bubble curtains are the most versatile de-icing method available. Our self-weighted PerfAerated tubing is flexible and can be designed to fit any application, including docks or open water. As thousands of tiny bubbles rise to the surface, they effectively disrupt surface tension and prevent ice crystals from forming in the area. The tubing can be formed into concentric rings and placed around pilings to deter ice formation. Or curve the tubing around any structure to prevent ice from forming and damaging expensive equipment. The shore-mounted compressor can power up to 100' of continuous tubing length. Custom designs are available through the AES Lakes Department.
Rising bubbles burst at the surface and prevent ice from forming.
LPA3-2
Tubing is weighted to the bottom.
Flexible and self-weighted, Perfaerated tubing can be installed around dock pilings, boat slips or in front of sea walls to prevent structural damage from expanding ice formations, also known as "ice jacking." Our LPA3-2 De-icing system uses a rubber membrane diffuser to make a hole in the ice that encourages winter waterfowl populations and prevents winter fishkills.
De-Icers
Kasco de-icers are designed to be suspended from a dock or boat. They may also be attached to an optional horizontal float or universal dock mount (sold separately). Mounted in either a vertical or horizontal position, the de-icer circulates water to the surface, causing turbulence that reduces or eliminates ice formation. The motor assembly is sealed in an oil bath for long life and has ball bearings that provide smooth operation. The guard and motor case are made of stainless steel. The 1/2-hp model keeps a 3050' diameter area from freezing, the 3/4-hp model keeps a 5075' diameter area from freezing. Each unit includes a motor, propeller, 20' of suspension rope, guard assembly, zinc anode and 25' of low-temperaturerated power cable. ETL-approved to UL standards. Two-year warranty.
Options:
Universal Dock Mount: Dock mount kit allows the de-icer to be mounted in a vertical position or several other angles. The de-icer can be adjusted to a maximum of 10' away from the mounting bracket. Horizontal Float: Allows an elongated circulation pattern. Well suited for shallow water or where water/ice levels may fluctuate, like tidal waters. C20 Timer/Thermostat Control: Designed for outdoor use, controls how long the de-icer will operate when temperatures demand. One C20 controller will control one de-icer. D100 D101 D102-50 C20 KD HF T10 De-Icer, 115V De-Icer, 115V De-Icer, 230V 50' Cord Control Unit Universal Dock Mount Horizontal Float Twist Lock Electric Plug, 30 A
1/2-hp 3/4-hp 3/4-hp
Dock mount kit (kD) With D100.
D100.
26 lbs 36 lbs 36 lbs 3 lbs 22 lbs 6 lbs 1 lb
$ 546.00 622.00 670.00 167.00 180.00 196.00 31.00
Want to dramatically improve water clarity in your lake or pond? Ask our Lakes team about an alum injection system.
Horizontal float with D100. C20 timer.
24
Lake & Pond
Aeration/Windmills
PIOU
Weighted Diffuser Tubing

This 1/2" I.D. weighted diffuser tubing is useful in applications where long lengths are required. Equal bubble distribution is possible with lengths as long as 25' for WD50 and 200' for WD55. On the WD50, unique die cut slitslocated in sets of three every 11/2"flex open with air pressure and close when air is stopped. On the WD55 ice-melting diffuser tubing, single die cuts are located every 24". The feeder tubing ( WD0) has no slits. See Index for less expensive, HeavySet feeder tubing. This weighted tubing requires WD fittings. Full rolls are 250' long (60 meters). This diffuser tubing is not compatible with most regenerative blowers as 25 psi is required. Also note that this coarse bubble diffuser tubing will only provide about 1/3 as much oxygen transfer per cfm of air when used for aeration with diffusers. For 250' roll, add "-250" to part number.
PIOM
PIOt
WD55
st Th e B e for g De-Icin
WD Fittings
These black plastic fittings are required for the weighted diffuser tubing. The PIOU couples 1/2" tubing. The PIOM is a 1/2" male adapter. The tee union (PIOT) connects two lengths of tubing to a 1/2" MNPT male adapter. Tube insert supports included. Made in USA. aes I.D. O.D. Cfm/ft 1/2" 5 / 8" WD50 Diffuser, Weighted, 3 Cut 2 .1 1/2" 5 / 8" WD55 Diffuser, Weighted, De-Ice .04 .01 1/2" 5 / 8" WD0 Feeder Tubing, Weighted PIOU WD Coupling PIOM WD Male Adapter, 1/2" MNPT PIOT WD Tee Union, 1/2" MNPT
WD50
24 lbs/100' 24 lbs/100' 24 lbs/100'
ship Wt
$ 4.25/ft 4.00/ft 3.40/ft 3.80 2.75 6.75
956.25/Roll 900.00/Roll 765.00/Roll 3.43/10+ 2.48/10+ 6.06/10+
908.44/4+ Roll 855.00/4+ Roll 726.75/4+ Roll
Windmill Control box

Windmills are a cheap, environmentally friendly way to power your aeration system, but what about when the wind stops blowing? Use this windmill control box in conjunction with your electric aeration system to take advantage of alternative energy and still have aeration 24 hours a day. If the wind stops blowing, the box's air pressure sensor system turns on your electric aeration system. When the wind picks back up, the box shuts your electric system back off. Easy to installjust attach the "T" valve into your windmill air line, plug it in, and then plug your electric aerator into the control box. 15-second delay prevents over-cycling. Save moneyboth the windmill and electric aerator are connected to the same air line. One-year warranty on all parts and components.
Hybrid Windmill System

A complete windmill aeration system that won't stop just because the wind does. Get everything you need to keep your pond aerated 24/7while using as little energy as possiblein one package. The windmill gives you efficient, environmentally friendly power whenever possible. When winds drop below 5 mph, the electric aeration system will automatically kick in, ensuring your pond will stay aerated. Includes galvanized windmill aeration system, lockable heavy-duty aluminum cabinet, electric rocking piston air compressor, WCb1 windmill control box and 100' polyethylene tubing. ALA4gLb diffuser manifold is sold separately. HWS1-12 HWS1-16 HWS1-20 WD1R-100 12' H x 100" W 16' H x 80" W 20' H x 631/2" W 5/8" Weighted Tubing
Dimensions ship Wt
$ 2,645 2,770 2,895 151
WCb1
$ 299
Aeration Windmills
No wiring needed.
An aeration windmill can effectively aerate up to a one-acre pond (15' deep) with as little as a 5 mph wind! As the blade spins, air is compressed in the direct drive diaphragm compressor and forced through a 3/8" air line down to the diffuser on the pond bottom (40' maximum depth). Automatic overspeed protection is standard. The FAW12 galvanized steel windmill package includes a 12' H x 6' W base (16' H and 20' H models also available), mounted diaphragm compressor, 12-blade 65" diameter rotor, 100' air line, diffuser assembly and complete instructions. The freeze control option with 2-gallon tank (FAW1) helps to prevent air line freeze-up (ethanol, isopropyl alcohol are not included). Ships motor freight. One-year warranty. FAW12 FAW16 FAW20 FAW1 Windmill Pkg Windmill Pkg Windmill Pkg Freeze Control 12' H x 61" W 16' H x 79" W 20' H x 97" W 2-gallon Tank
Dimensions
FaW12
244 lbs* 276 lbs* 356 lbs* 6 lbs
ship Wt
$ 1,145.00 1,245.00 1,345.00 97.95

Note: ALA4gLb diffuser manifold sold separately.
HWs1-12
*Ships in multiple boxes.
Lake & Pond

Fountains
25
Floating Fountains
These Kasco fountains are built for larger ponds and more decorative applications. Look under the pictures to see what nozzles are included with different models (except Cypress, which is 3/4-hp only). Fountains provide a full column of water 10' high x 10' in diameter when run with no nozzle. Each fountain includes float with screens, power control center with GFCI and three 50' mooring ropes. Three-year warranty. Made in USA. ETL-approved to UL and CSA standards.
*Not included with 3/4-hp models.

KFJ751-100 KFJ751-200 KFJ752-100 KFJ752-200 KF202-100 KF202-200 KF303-100 KF303-200 KF505-100 KF505-200
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
hp hp hp hp 2 hp 2 hp 3 hp 3 hp 5 hp 5 hp
Voltage
115 115 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
running amps
6.5 6.5 2.9 2.9 10 10 13.4 13.4 20 20
Cord Length
100' 200' 100' 200' 100' 200' 100' 200' 100' 200'
$ 1,633.50 1,919.00 2,247.00 2,594.50 3,737.25 3,915.50 4,236.00 4,756.00 4,610.00 5,278.00
redwood 2 hp (22' H x 7' W) 3 hp (24' H x 8' W) 5 hp (26' H x 8' W)
3/4 hp (7' H x 4' W)
sequoia
5 hp (21' H x 10' W)
3/4 hp (4.5' H x 15' W)
Willow
3/4 hp (3' H x 20' W)
Juniper
3/4 hp (6' H x 16' W)
Cypress
3/4 hp (6' H x 18' W)
Linden
2 hp (12.5' H x 28' W) 3 hp (13' H x 35' W) 5 hp (14' H x 36' W)
2 hp (8' H x 46' W) 3 hp (9' H x 48' W) 5 hp (10' H x 50' W)
2 hp (18' H x 30' W) 3 hp (19' H x 35' W) 5 hp (20' H x 35' W)
birch 2 hp (12' H x 11' W) 3 hp (14.5' H x 10' W) 5 hp (14' H x 12' W)
spruce 2 hp (19' H x 10' W) 3 hp (21' H x 13' W) 5 hp (24' H x 15' W)
Lighting Packages
Come with three adjustable, 12V, solid brass-cased halogen lights. You also get three clear lens covers and 100' of power cable. Three-year warranty.
bottom-Draw Surface Aerator by Shearwater

Pulls water from as deep as 7 feet.
The lowest oxygen levels are nearest the bottom. To aerate the entire pond with a surface aerator, you need the unique Bottom-Draw Surface Aerator. The standard unit draws water from a depth of over 3'. By simply connecting an optional extension tube, it can draw from 7'. It transfers gases more effectivelyincluding oxygen, hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxidebecause it throws water higher and in smaller droplets than other surface aerators. A 50' power cord is standard. Add "L" after the part number for a 100' power cord and add $133.45. You may also want to order a winter propeller if you plan to operate it in freezing weather. One-year warranty. Made in USA. HS8 HS9 HS36 HS38 HS37 HS8F HS9F Aerator, 1/2 hp, 115V 7.5 Aerator, 1/2 hp, 230V 3.5 Extension Tube, 3' Replacement Propeller, Winter Replacement Propeller, Summer Replacement Foam Float w/Plastic Coating Replacement Foam Float aes 600 600
running amps
all four colored bulb options in action. ship Wt (lbs)
50+4 lbs 50+4 lbs 30 lbs*
ship Wt
LR375 LR375QD 840322 b501 b502 b503 b504
Light Kit for All Fountains Light Kit With Quick Disconnect Bracket Kit for 6 Lights (2, 3 and 5 hp) Yellow Bulb, 50 Watts Red Bulb, 50 Watts Green Bulb, 50 Watts Blue Bulb, 50 Watts
15 18.5 2
$ 922.70 1,190.25 175.00 13.80 13.80 13.80 13.80
$ 935.71 855.94 52.00 21.50 21.50 149.74 103.26
Each
*Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate;

actual weight is 20 lbs.
Technician Profile
Clarke DeWitt
Clarke graduated from Brunswick Community College in Supply, NC, with an A.S. degree in aquaculture technology. His technical experience includes hatchery management, aquatic weed control and aquarium supplies.
Hs8
shown during testing at aquatic Eco-systems' r&D facility.
standard models draw water from a depth of over 3 feet.
26
Lake & Pond

Fountains
Whether you'd like to create a majestic new focal point for your lake or enhance its existing natural beauty, a floating fountain is the perfect solution. Manufactured by Aquatic Eco-Systems, Desert Rain fountains are built to last using the finest materials and workmanship available. Our fountains are available in three different operating system types. You determine which system is best suited for you based on your location and personal preferences. Spray shape can be customized by choosing from our assortment of 8 nozzles. For more information about Desert Rain fountains, call 800-899-2565. The Onshore is a Desert Rain exclusive. The system uses a shore-mounted pump with an intake located on the bottom of your pond, ensuring excellent circulation and aeration. With all electrical and moving parts on land, this fountain is safe and easy to maintain.
Onshore Fountains
The Onshore fountain system is a good choice for fishing lakes, brackish water or any body of water in need of both circulation and aeration. The pump is mounted on dry land close to the shoreline, allowing for easy installation and maintenance. The intake for the pump can be placed anywhere in the pond but is usually located at the deepest point. Water drawn from the bottom of the pond is then aerated as it is discharged through the fountain. No electricity is in the water unless the optional light kit is installed. Onshore systems include a prewired control panel, dual compartment float, pump, your choice of 8 different display nozzles, mooring rope, stainless steel intake assembly with foot valve, 100' of fire hose for discharge and 25' of suction hose for intake. Optional light kits are matched to fountain size. Light kits include stainless steel brackets, submersible cast bronze fixtures with clear lenses and 250- or 500-watt quartz lamps, 100' of power cable, timer, GFCI and photo cell controls are prewired into control panel if lights are ordered with the fountain. Please specify your nozzle choice and desired cable/hose length when ordering. Add nozzle suffix to part number for fountains (e.g., OSF1T ). Lighting power cords are available in even 50' increments starting at 100 feet. Add the power cord length to the end of the part number (e.g., LK2250-150). Additional power cable for lights and additional suction and discharge hose also available. Allow 1014 days for delivery. All fountains ship motor freight, FOB Orlando.
Hp Amps @230V Base Price
Control Panel Valve Pump Rigid Pipe
Float
Flexible Hose Intake
Diagram of Twin Onshore fountain system.
Control Panel Valve
Float Underlay
Pump Rigid Pipe
Flexible Hose Intake
OSF1 OSF2 OSF3 LK2250 LK2500 LK4500
1.5 (115/230V) 7 2 10.5 3 16.3 500-Watt Light Kit 1,000-Watt Light Kit 2,000-Watt Light Kit
$ 3,847.83 4,039.87 4,757.98 1,227.33 1,652.57 3,115.00
Diagram of Trip Onshore fountain system.
Twins and Trips

Custom fountains
Twins and Trips fountain packages offer the flexibility to run multiple fountains off one pump. Twins incorporate two nozzle heads, while the Trips package can power up to three nozzles. You can use any combination of nozzles. Since these multinozzle packages use our Onshore fountain technology, all pump maintenance can be performed on dry land. Unless a light kit is incorporated, no electrical parts are installed in the pond. Due to the potential improvement in water quality and additional atmosphere that fountains provide, Twins and Trips fountains can even add value to your property.
HP V Nozzle Display Spray Config. H W
OSF5TT-TWIN OSF5C-TWIN OSF5SC-TWIN OSF5TT-TRIP OSF5C-TRIP OSF5SC-TRIP
5 5 5 5 5 5
230 230 230 230 230 230
Three-Tier Cascade Sky Cascade Three-Tier Cascade Sky Cascade
Twins Twins Twins Trips Trips Trips
21' 9' 15' 15' 7' 10'
16' 5' 3' 12' 4' 3'

OSF5TT Three nozzles operating on just one pump. Call for more information about this option.
All trips and twins fountains are fully adjustable since each nozzle runs on its own discharge line. A valve connects to each individual discharge line at the pump and can increase or decrease flow to each nozzle.
Lake & Pond

Fountains
27
Traditional Fountains
Traditional fountains include a prewired control panel, mooring rope, float system, display nozzle, submersible pump, stainless steel frame and 100' of PVC doublejacketed power cable. Optional light kits are matched to fountain size. Light kits include stainless steel brackets, submersible cast bronze fixtures with clear lenses and 250- or 500-watt quartz lamps, 100' of power cable, timer and GFCI. Photo cell controls are prewired into control panel if lights are ordered with the fountain. Eight different nozzle options are available, and additional power cords for pumps and lights are also available in even 50' increments starting at 100 feet. Add nozzle suffix and power cord length to part number (e.g., TfF1SC-100). Traditional fountains are made to order and require a 50% nonrefundable deposit and/or a signed purchase order with approved credit. Please allow 26 weeks for delivery. All fountains ship motor freight, FOB Orlando. TfF1 TfF2 TfF3 TLK2250 TLK2500 TLK4500

Direct Line Fountains

The Direct Line fountain is used on irrigation or fill lines and is a cost effective way to add an aesthetic improvement to your lake. There is no need for a control panel or electrical cable. Simply connect the supplied 2" hose to your existing pump's discharge. Install and anchor the float and nozzle assembly in your pond and enjoy the beauty of your new fountain. Direct Line fountains include a dual compartment float, stainless steel hardware and nozzle holder, solid brass display nozzle of your choice, mooring rope and 100' of 2" fire hose. Add nozzle suffix to part number (e.g., DLF1SC). These systems usually ship in 5 to 10 business days. All fountains ship motor freight, FOB Orlando.
Required Flow Base Price
1 7 2 10.5 3 16.3 500-Watt Light Kit 1,000-Watt Light Kit 2,000-Watt Light Kit
Hp Amps@230V Base Price*
$ 5,274.22 5,891.67 6,419.00 1,227.33 1,656.57 3,115.00
DLF1 30130 gpm @ 510 psi $ 998.46
*Base price includes 100-ft power cord.

The Traditional floating fountain is a stainless steel submersible pump mounted on the float frame. This system offers simple installation and the most display options.
Sky Cascade (SC) with optional light kit. See more nozzles on page 25. Float
Control Panel Float
Pump Intake Cord Diagram of Traditional fountain system.
Flexible Hose Irrigation or Fill Line Diagram of Direct Line fountain system.
Desert Rain Nozzles
Arch (A): 1 hp (18' H x 24' W), 2 hp (22' H x 28' W), 3 hp (26' H x 32' W)
Sky Cascade (SC): 1 hp (18' H x 4' W), 2 hp (25' H x 4' W), 3 hp (35' H x 4' W)
Cascade (C): 1 hp (8' H x 4 ' W), 2 hp (10' H x 6' W), 3 hp (15' H x 6' W)
Three-Tier ( TT ): 1 hp (10' H x 12' W), 2 hp (20' H x 15' W), 3 hp (30' H x 20' W)
Trumpet ( T ): 1 hp (3' H x 10' W), 2 hp (3' H x 15' W), 3 hp (6' H x 20' W)
28
Lake & Pond

Fountains
Fountain/Aerator
Use this reliable fountain in areas where the appearance of the pond or lake is as important as the need for aeration. The pattern it produces is comparable to many of the larger fountains on the market, but it uses about half the electric power. The high-volume spray resists misting and icing and produces a spray 7' high by 18' in diameter. Includes solid bronze end bells and foam-filled ABS float. 60 Hz (50 Hz also available). One-year warranty. Made in USA. aes amps ship Wt(lbs) Each PHF1b 1-hp Fountain, 115V, 50' Cord 750 8.2 45 + 30 $ 1,340.00 PHF1Cb 1-hp Fountain, 115V, 100' Cord 750 8.2 50 + 30 1,401.00 PHF2b 1-hp Fountain, 230V, 50' Cord 750 4.1 45 + 30 1,340.00 PHF2Cb 1-hp Fountain, 230V, 100' Cord 750 4.1 50 + 30 1,401.00 FTP Replacement Propeller 109.75 bLF Replacement Float, Black 267.00
Low-Cost Floating Fountains by Kasco

Floating fountains offering very good quality at a low price and delivering an effective mix of aeration and display. These models have a V-shaped display. Include float with screening, power control center with GFCI protection and two 50' mooring ropes. Two-year warranty. KFX501-50 hp KFX501-100 hp KFX751-50 3/4 hp KFX751-100 3/4 hp KFX752-50 3/4 hp KFX752-100 3/4 hp 4400VX-100 1 hp 4400VXH-100 1 hp 8400VX-100 2 hp 5100VX-100 5 hp
1/2 1/2
Voltage
115 115 115 115 230 230 115 230 230 230
running amps
5.6 5.6 7.3 7.3 3.7 3.7 11.3 5.7 11 20
Cord Length
50' 100' 50' 100' 50' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
Display Dimensions
5.5' H x 15' W 5' H x 15' W 6' H x 21' W 6' H x 21' W 6' H x 21' W 6' H x 21' W 8' H x 26' W 8' H x 26' W 8' H x 32' W 9' H x 34' W
$ 1,145.25 1,212.50 1,244.50 1,314.50 1,988.50 2,058.50 1,832.50 2,362.50 3,629.50 4,927.00
PHF2Cb
Floating Fountains by Aqua Control

High flow at a low price. The Evolution series fountain is shipped fully assembled and includes CSA-listed controller with GFCI, timer and photo sensor, Tornado spray pattern, 100'' mooring rope and two mooring stakes. 1/2 hp, 115V, 5.6 amps. Tornado pattern is 6' H x 15' D. Two-year warranty. Optional stainless steel LED light kits are .01 amp and include four lights. EV650 EV6100 EV6175 EV6LED50 EV6LED100 EV6LED175 EV6ARU EV6CLA EV6FLE EV6SAR EV6TIA EV6RED EV6bLU EV6gRE EV6YEL Fountain w/50' Cord Fountain w/100' Cord Fountain w/175' Cord Light Kit w/50' Cord Light Kit w/100' Cord Light Kit w/175' Cord Arum Spray Nozzle, 6' H x 21' D Cluster Arch Spray Nozzle, 6' H x 16' D Fleur de Lis Spray Nozzle, 7' H x 18' D Spider & Arch Spray Nozzle, 6' H x 18' D Tiara Spray Nozzle, 6' H x 21' D Repl. Lamp, Red Repl. Lamp, Blue Repl. Lamp, Green Repl. Lamp, Yellow $ 1,249.00 1,349.00 1,599.00 749.00 799.00 949.00 99.00 99.00 99.00 99.00 99.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00
arum
Cluster arch
Fleur de Lis
spider & arch
tiara
torrent (No Nozzle)
tornado
Fountains/Tech Talk
Lake & Pond
29
Aqua Series Aerating Fountains
Operate in as little as 14" of water. hp, 3.19 SAE* rating; 1/2 hp, 2.04 SAE* rating. Two fountain patterns in one unit.
1 /4
These floating aerating fountains are designed for beauty and aerating small, shallow ponds. The motors are made with marine-grade aluminum with a polyester coating for high corrosion resistance. Each aerator includes an oil-cooled motor (with thermal overload protection), float, power cable, two fountain nozzles (AquaGem and AquaBlast patterns), debris screen and mini power panel with GFCI and timer. ETL- and CE-listed. Units are 115V/60 Hz (230V/50 Hz available on special order). The deluxe series includes the Fountain Glo low-voltage light settwo 12V, high-intensity MR16 halogen lights. Add a " D" to part number for deluxe units. Fountains have a two-year warranty, lights have a one-year warranty. Ship in 1 box. Made in USA. 20115 21115
Ship Wt (Standard/Deluxe) Amps
1/4 hp Aerator, 50-ft cord 1/2 hp Aerator, 100-ft cord
1/4 hp AquaGem Nozzle
Spray Height: 3 ft Spray Diameter: 7 ft Flowrate: 175 gpm
1/2 hp AquaGem Nozzle
Spray Height: 4 ft Spray Diameter: 9.5 ft Flowrate: 200 gpm
49/74 lbs 49/74 lbs
3.9 5.5
$ 1,095 1,260
1,434 1,565
"D"
*SAE is "Standard Aeration Efficiency." See Tech Talk 4.

I must tell you, I deal with a lot of suppliers of pond and koi equipment, and you are by far the most prompt in shipping and customer service.
Stephen Scott
Hampstead, KY
1/4 hp AquaBlast Nozzle
Spray Height: 1.5 ft Spray Diameter: 4 ft Flowrate: 210 gpm
1/2 hp AquaBlast Nozzle
Spray Height: 2 ft Spray Diameter: 5.5 ft Flowrate: 260 gpm
Tech Talk 104

Floating Fountains
Do fountains aerate?
Of course, but they are not the most cost-effective way. Aeration systems are designed to aerate. Fountains are designed for appearances. Lake aeration systems like AES's Great Lakes technique are located on the bottom of the lake and lift huge quantities of low-oxygen water from the bottom using a comparatively small amount of energy. They are the more cost-effective way of aerating lakes deeper than six feet. Traditional floating fountains aerate only the surface water near the fountain and only when the surface oxygen level is low.To achieve some of the benefits of destratification and aeration, locate the pump's intake near the bottom of the pond. Use a dissolved oxygen (D.O.) meter to measure bottom D.O. and when it drops below 5 mg/L operate the aerator/fountain, especially at night. Our fountains are distinguished from our aerators by their intended function and aeration efficiency. The standard aeration efficiency SAE of a fountain is typically less than 1.5 lbs/kWh, whereas an aerator is more than 2.5 and a Great Lakes system can be as high as 10! This poor SAE of fountains is due to the wasted energy from throwing water much higher than is needed for aeration. However, a fountain can aerate, especially if used in a pond that is not too large, if the fountain draws its water from a deep depth and if it is operated at night.
Decorative Fountain
This 1/4-hp floating fountain includes five interchangeable nozzles and is a good choice for use in smaller ponds. The fountain includes a 50-ft waterproof power cord, two 15-ft mooring ropes and RC-15 timer box with photoeye and GFCI protection. The fountain is also available with an LED underwater light ring that includes a 50-ft waterproof power cord and low-voltage transformer. Fountain is 115V/60 Hz, draws 3.1 amps and has a minimum operating depth of 12". ETL-listed, one-year warranty. Shipping weight 35 lbs. Light kit is 8 lbs. 1400J 1400F 1401L
Condor (Inner Tier: 4' H x 4' W; Outer Tier: 2' H x 10' W) With Lights
Fountain Kit $ 721.25 Fountain Kit With LED Light Kit 829.50 Light Kit Only 287.50
How to ensure a long life for your fountain.

The fountain needs two things to ensure long life: adequate electricity and adequate cooling. For prolonged pump and motor life (regardless of brand), an adequate level of electricity must be provided to the motor. There are two cardinal rules for floating fountains concerning electricity: 1. C alculate from TRUE SOURCE to the motor when figuring cable size. True source is typically the electric company's installed meter. 2. U se one continuous (NO SPLICING) PVC-jacketed electrical cable from motor to control panel. All submersible pump motors are water-cooled. When you see that the fountain spray is shrinking, turn it off, as there is an obstruction of some kind that needs to be cleared. Some motors contain oil that requires periodic changes. Most manufacturers include ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI), surge protection and properly sized breakers to turn off the fountain when either electricity or cooling is inadequate. If not included, have your electrician take care of it.
Hawk's Nest (3' H x 7' W) Osprey (3.5' H x 7' W) With Lights Eagle's Nest (3.5' H x 10' W) Falcon (4' H x 4' W)
30
Lake & Pond
Weed Control/Tech Talk
Parachute Skimmer
This economical aquatic plant control tool is like a push broom for water. It sweeps a five-foot swath using a mesh screen to capture everything in its path. As the skimmer is pulled from the pond, the device closes and traps the catch. Large-screen model (1/4" hole size mesh) is great for trash, filamentous algae and larger debris. Micro- screen model is ideal for duckweed, watermeal and smaller vegetation. Approved for use by the Florida EPA. PS51 PS52 Large Screen Micro Screen $ 149.00 149.00
Ps51
beach Rake
An easy and effective way to remove debris from the beach without taking the sand along for the ride. 1" aluminum frame cuts into sand, allowing you to scoop up the debris, while the fine aluminum mesh sifts out the sand. 14" x 12" x 31/2" deep with 36" handle. b04A $ 49.95
Aquatic Weed Cutter

Cuts plants off at the roots.
If you've ever tried to cut aquatic weeds, you know what a miserable job it is. This aquatic weed cutter will do in two hours what would take two days to do by hand. Simply throw it out and pull it init cuts a 49" path up to 30' deep. It is made of galvanized steel with stainless steel blades and comes complete with a blade sharpener and 30' of rope. Three-part handle (9' total) allows easy storage. Caution: cutter blades are very sharp. Weighs 8 lbs. AWC1 $ 146.00
Tech Talk 77
blue-green Algae
the Problem
Blue-green algae, also known as cyanobacteria, can form unsightly and unhealthy algal blooms. Certain blue-green algae (Microcystis, Anabaena and/or Aphanizomenon) produce harmful toxins that damage nerves, cause muscle tremors, damage the liver and cause cancer! Recent evidence has shown that the probability that any blue-green algae bloom will be toxic is 45-75%! Since laboratory tests are needed to confirm toxicity, experts recommend that all blue-green algae blooms be treated as if they were toxic to humans and all animals.
Weed Rake With 3" Teeth

Floats or sinks.
Our aquatic weed rake is 3' wide and features 3" long, rigid aluminum teeth. It is equipped with a foam float that's easily removable if you need to pull in floating weeds or rake the bottom. A two-piece handle adjusts from 51/2' to 10', and it comes with 20' of poly rope. Weighs 10 lbs. Made in USA. AWR1 $ 134.00
Blue-green algae toxins, called cyanotoxins, have been linked to human and animal illness around the world. The World Health Organization has identified blue-green algae in drinking water as an "urgent concern" and established a 1 microgram per liter (1 part per billion, or ppb) standard for microcystin-LR, the most common cyanotoxin. Pet, farm and wild animal deaths occur when cyanotoxins are concentrated, which can happen when accumulated near the shore. People swimming in waters with concentrated cyanotoxins can experience skin irritations, gastrointestinal and respiratory problems and allergic reactions without actually ingesting any water.
Controlling blue-Green algae With aeration

Artificial mixing of lakes using aeration has been shown to shift the dominant resident planktonic community towards more desirable green algae and diatoms. Aeration and destratification have been shown to dramatically reduce the abundance of Microcystis by circulating the water and reducing the amount of time the blue-green algae spend in water with enough light available for photosynthesis (photic zone). Mixing eliminates another condition for blue-green algae growth: the stable, warm layer of water that can form at the surface of lakes or ponds during warm months. In addition to removing blue-green algae from the photic zone and creating circulation, synergistic airlift destratification systems also dramatically increase lake bottom (hypolimnion) oxygen concentration, which reduces the level of phosphorusa key nutrient for algal bloomsreleased from lake sediments.
Weed Rake With 8" Teeth

replaceable teeth.
The Weed Raker is a 3' wide patented tool featuring 8" flexible teeth that won't get locked in heavy roots. The tip of each tooth has holes, allowing the addition of a filament (included) to assist in pulling weeds from lake bottom, if desired. Additional weight (which increases the digging action) is easily added by filling the hollow rake bar with stones. Includes 43' of rope and a sectional, 11' aluminum handle. Rake weighs 12 lbs. Made in USA. AWR22 AWR22T AWR22T Rake Repl. Tooth Repl. Teeth, 12/Pk $ 119.00 5.00 54.00
Controlling blue-Green algae With algaecides

In addition to controlling blue-green algal blooms with aeration, you can use algaecides. Algaecides with sodium carbonate peroxyhydrate are effective at rapidly eliminating blue-green algae. When added to water, these compounds break down into hydrogen peroxide and sodium carbonate and typically last for less than 48 hours. Hydrogen peroxide quickly destroys the thin membrane cell wall of the blue-green algae at low concentrations of .3 to 1.7 ppm. These algaecides can also control both planktonic algae (green water) and filamentous algae (long string-like algae) at higher concentrations. Algaecides that form hydrogen peroxide are 100% biodegradable. Unlike some copper-based ones, peroxyhydrate algaecides applied according to label directions will not harm fish and other freshwater animals.
Lake & Pond

Weed Control
Herbicide
Weedtrine D or Reward Shore-Klear Aquathol Sonar
31
Designed Lakes and Ponds

Too often, man-made lakes are not properly designed, constructed or maintained, causing extensive maintenance problems as time passes. This book describes some limnological, maintenance and safety issues that can make the difference between a healthy lake and a dead one and provides guidance for designing, constructing and managing the limnology of man-made lakes and ponds. Arlo W. Fast, 2010. WQB122 $ 26.95
Aquatic Plant Alligator Weed American Lotus Bulrush Cattail Common Reed Cutgrass Fragrant Waterlily Giant Cutgrass Giant Foxtail Alternanthera philoxeroides Nelumbo lutea Scirpus spp. Typha spp. Phragmites australis Leersia hexandra Nymphaea odorata Zizaniopsis miliacea Setaria magna Panicum hematomon Panicum purpurascens Pontederia spp. Cladium jamaicense Polygonum spp. Hydrochloa caroliniensis Nuphar luteum Panicum repens Paspalum fluitans Hydrocotyle umbellata Ludwigia uruguayensis Brasenia schreberi Justicia americana Lemna minor Spirodela polyrhiza Azolla caroliniana Salvinia rotundifolia Wolffiella floridana Eichhornia crassipes Pistia stratiotes Wolffia columbiana Ultricularia spp. Ceratophylium demersum Egeria densa Elodea canadensis Cabomba caroliniana Zannichellia palustris Hydrilla verticillata Najas spp. Myriophyllum aquaticum Potamogeton spp. Ranunculus aquatilis Ruppia maritima Vallisneria americana Submersed Plants Myriophyllum spicatum Floating Plants Emersed Plants
G G E E G
G G
F F
G G
E E G E E F G F F E E F
G G F G G F G G G G F F G F E F F F E E G F G G F G G G G G G F G G E E E F G E F G E E G E G F E E E G E E G G E G E E G G G E G G G G G F F
Perfect Pond Plus Fertilizer

Maintains the perfect balance of plankton in your pond.
This mixture is easy to apply, water soluble (dissolves in the upper two feet of water) and will not clump. It can be broadcast from a bank or pier or poured out of a boat; up to a 5-acre pond can be fertilized from just one location. The formulation for Perfect Pond Plus is 12-48-8 (N-P-K). Includes the scientifically designed Micro-Nutrient package and has a patent pending. Do not fertilize if undesired vegetation is present because the fertilizer will only stimulate growth. PFP25
Warning:
Maidencare Paragrass Pickerelweeds Sawgrass Smartweeds Southern Watergrass Spatterdock Torpedograss Water Paspalum Water Pennywort Water Primrose Watershield Waterwillow Duckweed Giant Duckweed Mosquito Fern Salvinia Slender Duckweed Waterhyacinth Waterlettuce Watermeal Bladderworts Coontail Egeria Elodea Eurasian Watermilfoil Fanwort Horned Pondweed Hydrilla Naiads Parrotfeather Pondweeds Water buttercup Widgeongrass Wildcelery
25 lbs
$ 73.50
The purpose of Perfect Pond Plus fertilizer is to increase algal growth. Use only if you want "green water" in your pond.
F G
Technician Profile
John Baylor
John has been a licensed/certified aquatic herbicide applicator in the state of Florida since 1996. During this time he has had extensive experience with golf courses and homeowners' associations, making full use of his knowledge of aquatic plant management.
Water Weeds and Algae
TF
F = Fair; G = Good; E = Excellent NOTE: This is a guide only; read and follow manufacturer's labels.
Don't guess what plants are in your pond. Here is a good reference guide for identifying 65 aquatic plant species. Each plant is pictured, along with the suggested herbicide and application rate to control it. Features herbicide product information, application techniques and general lake and pond management tips. James C. Schmidt and James R. Kannenberg, 1998, 5th edition. 128 pages. WQB2 $ 11.83
32
Lake & Pond
Weed Control/Algaecides
Hazmat Air R
Cutrine -Plus
Cutrine-Plus granular Algaecide

Great for spot-treating.
Ideal for use in lakes, reservoirs and potable water supplies. It is a patented, concentrated, liquid herbicide/algaecide that contains chelated copper and stays in solution long after initial application. Water bodies treated with Cutrine -Plus can be used immediately after application for swimming, livestock watering, irrigation or fishing. Do not use with salmon or cyprinids. Average application rate is one gallon per acre-foot. Ship weight per gallon is 11 lbs.
Cutrine-Plus Granular Algaecide controls bottom-growing algae. Clean, dry, granular algaecide sinks rapidly and works evenly over the affected area. Easily spread from the bag (wear gloves) or with a crank-type rotary spreader. EPA-approved for use in lakes and potable water reservoirs, farm fish ponds and fish hatcheries. For spot treatment, apply at the rate of 1 lb per 720 ft2 (1 kg per 147 m2). 30-lb bag. Made in USA. AQA3 $ 86.45 82.14/4+
*For best results, use with a surfactant such as Cide-Kick II,

Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. AQA9-C $ 37.50 35.66/4+
Do not use copper-based products in waters with koi, carp, goldfish or trout.
greenClean Pro granular Hazmat AG Algaecide

This non-copper-based algaecide eliminates algae on contact. Designed for lakes, ponds and unpainted surfaces. Sodium carbonate peroxyhydrate destroys algal cell membranes and chlorophyll within 60 sec. Biodegrades completely and adds 13% bioavailable oxygen to the water. For spot treatments apply at a rate of 2050 lbs/acre-foot; for algae blooms apply at a rate of 930 lbs/acre-foot; for filamentous algae blooms treat at a rate of 5090 lbs/acre-foot. Safe for use with koi and trout. EPA-approved. Usable in California! gC51-C 50 lbs $ 125 116.25/4+
Earthtec Algaecide
self dispensingno need to spray.

Earthtec algaecide/bactericide contains a high concentration of biologically active cupric ions in liquid form and will control and prevent recurrence of planktonic, filamentous and chara algae in lakes, ponds, fish farms, potable water, fountains and other water systems. Great for green water or planktonic algae! Registered by the EPA and certified to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 for addition to drinking water. Contains 20% copper pentahydrate and should be used carefully and only as labeled. May be harmful to salmonids in soft or acid water and members of the family Cyprinidae (minnows and carp). Nonfoaming and will not stain surfaces. Average treatment rate is 1 gallon per acre foot (1 liter per 324 m3). Ships motor freight, hazmat. Made in USA.
aQE2
greenClean Liquid
Hazmat AG

Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. Quart, .95 liter Gallon, 3.8 liters 5 gallons, 20 liters AQE2 AQE3 AQE4
ship Wt
A liquid concentrate version of GreenClean Pro, utilizing activated liquid peroxygen chemistry to control a wide variety of algae on contact. More effective on planktonic algae and problematic bacteria. Not for use in California.
*For best results, use with a surfactant such as

3 lbs 11 lbs 53 lbs
Hazmat Air Hazmat Air Hazmat AG
$ 16.25 41.55 161.00
37.40/4+ 149.42/4+
Cide-Kick II, Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. gCL25 $ 144.00 129.60/4+
F-30 Algae Control

The professionals' choice. Controls all types of algae without leaving behind sediment, toxins or pollutants. F-30 is an odorless blue liquid containing 10.9% higher active ingredients. Controls algae at .2 ppm to .4 ppm copper. One gallon treats approx. 326,000 gallons of water.
greenClean
GreenClean works on contact to control algae in water gardens, ornamental ponds, fountains and other water features. Does not harm aquatic life, and its patented formula releases oxygen into the water as it biodegrades. GreenClean also eliminates algae on a wide variety of surfaces. 2-lb container treats a 1,000-gal pond for an entire season. EPA-approved. gC21-C gC81-C 2 lbs 8 lbs $ 25.50 55.26 22.95/4+ 49.73/4+
GC21-C

Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. FF30 $ 25.00 22.25/4+
PX700 Liquid biostimulant

A 100% all-natural liquid plant extract that stimulates bacteria in a safe, fast and effective manner. Derived from sea kelp, vitamins and micro- and macronutrients. Provides an innovative solution for an environmentally sound and effectively safe treatment for lakes and ponds. Excellent for algae control, odor problems, water clarity and reduction of organic solids. PX700 is sold only through our AES Lakes Department. Contact one of our Lakes technicians to discuss your lake management needs and recommended solutions. Call 407-472-0520 to get started. PX700 5-gallon pail $ 295
Whitecap Herbicide
Whitecap SC provides effective, long-term control of submersed weeds. For the management of unwanted aquatic vegetation in freshwater ponds, lakes, reservoirs, drainage canals and irrigation canals. Contains Flurido ne, the same active ingredient successfully used by aquatic weed management specialists for over 20 years to control hydrilla, Eurasian water milfoil and other noxious weed species. P1123b 8 oz $ 158 146.94/4+
Weed Control/Surfactants
Lake & Pond
33
Sonar
Weedtrine-D
Hazmat Air R
can control weeds up to one full year.

Sonar controls target weeds in almost any body of water. It usually takes 30 to 90 days for Sonar to work. Susceptible plants absorb Sonar through their leaves, shoots and from roots. Within a short period (seven to ten days) injury symptoms begin to appear. Susceptible weeds will start to show chlorosis, a deficiency of green pigment. Sonar's selectivity lets desirable aquatic plants become reestablished. Won't restrict swimming, fishing or drinking, even immediately after application! Rates depend on target species and habitat conditions. As always, follow label rates and restrictions. SN1 1 pint
Ship Wt
This is a form of diquat (8.5%), an aquatic herbicide that is not absorbed by fish. Controls bladderwort, cattail, coontail, duckweed, elodea, naiad, pennywort, pithophora, pond weeds, salvinia, spirogyra, water hyacinth, water lettuce and water milfoil. Also recommended for top-kill of shoreline emergent weeds and as a grass and broadleaf weed killer in noncrop areas. Absorption and herbicidal action are usually quite rapid, with visible effects in a few days. Ideally suited for use in small bodies of water. Apply only to water where there is no overflow. Do not use treated water for animal consumption, spraying, irrigation or domestic purposes for 14 days after treatment. For marginal weed problems, apply at the rate of 2 oz/gal of water. Check local laws prior to ordering, as use of this product may not be legal in your area. D.O.T. rating is hazardous when shipped by air. Weighs 8 lbs. Made in USA.
1 lb
$ 380
361/6+
*For best results, use with a surfactant such as Cide-Kick II, Red River 90 or
Aquathol K (Liquid or Granular)
Organic-Kick. WTD1
$ 78.00
73.35/4+
Selective contact control for submerged aquatic weeds, including Najas species, coontail, milfoil and most pond weed species. Carries no turf irrigation restrictions. Granular formulation recommended for spot treating small weed patches and deep growing plants. Liquid formula supplies most active ingredients per dollar. Apply 1 gallon per acre-foot (1 liter/326 m3) for control of most plant species. As always, read and comply with product labels. AQT25 ships motor freight only, AQT10 ships Ground.
Reward
Hazmat AG R

Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. 2.5 gallons 10 lbs AQT25 AQT10
Ship Wt
AQt25
25 lbs 11 lbs
$ 242.00 279.00
Each
228.47 251.35
4+
A fast-acting contact herbicide containing diquat (35%) with a 24- to 36-hour burndown that is less selective than Aquathol K. Carries a 14-day irrigation restriction. Not for use in turbid water conditions. Tank mix with Cutrine-Plus for greater effectiveness on copper only resistant algae. Apply on a sunny day to actively growing weeds at the rate of 1 to 2 gallons per surface acre. Available in 2.5-gallon (9.5 L) containers, weighs 25 lbs. Follow label rates and restrictions.
Hazmat AG

Red River 90 or Organic-Kick. RW25 $ 398 366/4+
Shore-Klear
A systemic postemergence herbicide used in controlling undesirable vegetation growing in and adjacent to aquatic sites. Apply 3 oz of Shore-Klear per 1 gal of water (24 mL per liter) for control of most postemergent weeds.
Cide-Kick II Surfactant
makes your spray application more effective.
A nonionic additive mixed with herbicides to break down the waxy coating on the leaf surface, effectively penetrating the cell wall of the plant. Use 1 ounce of Cide-Kick II per 1 gallon of spray solution (8 mL/L). Available in 1-quart (1 liter) containers only. WTD2 $ 19.75 18.69/4+
*For best results, use with Red River 90 surfactant.

RD1 RD25 Quart 2.5 gallons $ 56.00 90.00 52.52/6+ 81.82/4+
Rd1
Red River 90 Surfactant Eraser-AQ

A systemic herbicide that targets common shoreline weeds, including cattails and torpedo grass. Apply 3 oz of Eraser AQ per gallon of water. Works best when used with a nonionic surfactant like Cide-Kick II. This item cannot be sold to the following states: CA, CT, IA, ME, MT, NE, NH, NJ, VT and WA. RRERG $ 32 Spray herbicides more effi ciently (and save money) by sticking to your targetnot the area surrounding it. Red River 90 is a multifunctional, nonionic surfactant containing free fatty acids. When mixed with herbicides, it spreads the mixture evenly across the leaf surface, allowing quick penetration of leaf tissue. The result is a highly effective, consistent and fast weed control. Compatible with most herbicides and inhibits excessive foam produced by many wetting agents. RR90G RR90Q Gallon Quart $ 29.95 12.25
Thank you, Cullen, your prompt response and professional efforts are greatly appreciated!! Your employer is lucky to have an employee like you. We are in a process to acquire a much bigger facility and expand our business roughly 20 times of our current scale. Look forward to doing a lot of business with you in a couple of months.
Organic-Kick Surfactant
A nonionic wetting agent, activator and penetrant all in one. Organic-Kick helps break down the waxy cuticle on the leaf surface and helps penetrate the cell wall of the plant, allowing a more effective uptake. Made from citrus peel oil, OMRI-listed. Use 1 ounce of Organic-Kick per 1 gallon of spray solution. ORK1 $ 15.50
Dr. Jyuhn-Mirng Chern (Jimmy)

Capital Aquaculture
34
Lake & Pond

Water Dyes
Blue Vail Super Concentrated Blue Colorant

Harmless to animals and fish.
Use only one-fourth as much Blue Vail as any other dye! That's rightuse only one quart per 1,000,000 gallons of pond water. We recommend Blue Vail for use in controlled waterways like private ponds, lakes and fountains. Blue Vail will turn water an attractive blue color and is harmless to animals and fish when used as directed. Lasts up to 4 months. Sold in quart containers (equal to one gallon of other brands) and by the case of 12. OWD5 Quart OWD5c Case $ 31.14 355.00
ADMIRAL Liquid
For control of algae and aquatic vegetation growth.

ADMIRAL is an EPA-approved water colorant that controls the growth of several types of aquatic weeds and algae while enhancing the appearance of the water. It can be used in natural or man-made ponds, lakes, fountains, fish hatcheries and swimming ponds. One quart treats one acre-foot to control filamentous blue algae, bluegreen algae, chara, leafy pond weed, spirogyra, slender naiad and water milfoil at depths greater than two feet. ISO 9001-certified and EPA-approved. Four gallons per case.

Blue/Black Vail and Black Vail

If you prefer the natural look.
Clean, clear water in a lake with a natural black bottom looks black from all angles. We offer Blue/Black Vail (a 50/50 mix) and Black Vail because they look more natural. They are used in some of the finest garden ponds in the USA. Not recommended for use with fountains. Like Blue Vail, they contain no herbicides or algaecides, are nontoxic and safe for fish, humans and birds. The quarts per acre are typical for 3 acre feet or approximately 1,000,000 gallons. Sold in quart bottles. OWD7 OWD8

ALD1
Gallon
Ship Wt
11 lbs
$ 51.60
Each
47.25
4+
Crystal Blue
Crystal Blue is a water colorant that produces a more vibrant blue color than some other dyes. The typical application rate is one gallon per 1,000,000 gallons of pond water (equals one acre, 3' deep or approximately one acre, 4' deep with sloping sides). Four gallons per case. CB64 Gallon $ 32.75 30.46/4+
Blue/Black Vail Black Vail
Quarts/Acre
2 3
$ 35.42 35.42
Each
31.26 31.26
6+
owd7 owd8
1 gallon = 3.8 liters 1 pound (16 ounces) = 454 grams 1 foot = 30.5 cm
In certain states, herbicides and algaecides are restricted. Products with this symbol cannot be sold into the states of California, Connecticut, Iowa, Maine, Michigan, Nebraska, Montana, New Hampshire, New York, Vermont or Washington.
Aquashade Water Colorant

EPA-registered.
Before After
Aquashade is a water dye that filters sunlight to reduce the growth of aquatic weeds and algae. It is also useful for coloring water an attractive blue to enhance its aesthetic quality. Apply to controlled waterways such as ornamental and golf course ponds, lakes, fountains and fish farms. May be used for swimming ponds (after complete dispersal). Results appear immediately and last up to four months in nonflowing waters. The typical application rate is 1 gallon per 1,000,000 gallons of water. Case contains 4 gallons.

OWD2
One surface acre 4' deep = 1,303,404 gallons (4.9 m3). A one-acre pond 4' deep with sloping sides is only about 1,000,000 gallons (3.8 m3). One acre-foot = 1 acre, 1 foot deep = 324,522 gallons.
Blue Colorant Dry Packets

Easy to apply.
Performs like the liquid water colorants, but comes in packets that are 100% water soluble. Simply toss one or more packets into the water, where they quickly disperse. One packet (approx. 1/2 lb) typically treats 250,000 gallons. Sold in single packets. 16-packet case weighs 8 lbs. Salt water compatible. Made in USA. OWD4 $ 20.50 17.93/16+
OWD2
Gallon
Ship Wt
11 lbs
$ 59.35
Each
55.79
4+
Important
Though we have tried to make this catalog as comprehensive and factual as possible, errors occasionally occur. Additionally, prices, specifications and packaging may have changed since the date of publication. Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. reserves the right to substitute equivalent items and make other changes without notice.
Lake & Pond

Pond Clarifiers
35
Nutrient-Binding Pond Logs

Water clarification and erosion control made easy! These semisolid blocks are environmentally safe, nontoxic and formulated for specific water environments. They work in conjunction with your bottom-based aeration system, floating fountain or waterfall to improve the water quality in your lake or pond. Benefi ts include increased water clarity, reduced algae, odor control, decreased suspended solids and metal reduction. One log treats up to 500,000 gallons. Pond logs are specific to your water's chemistry. Send us a sample of your water and bank soil. Based on that, we'll send you the pond log(s) best suited to your lake or pond's specifi c needs (each type is $ 152.50). For pond sample analysis forms and procedures, contact the AES Lakes Department at 407-472-0520, look online at AquaticEco.com (Request AES Services link at the bottom of any page) or email Lakes@AquaticEco.com.
Float
"Bacteria in a Bag" by ProLine

ProLine "Bacteria in a Bag" is a good product for elimination of pond sludge and odors. It uses natural bacteria and enzymes to biodegrade bottom sludge. Comes in handy-to-use, water-soluble bags. Simply calculate water volume and dispense at the rate of one 1-oz bag per 600 gallons of water or one 8-oz bag per 4,800 gallons in ornamental ponds, biofilters or raceways. When treating large ponds/lakes, dose 1 lb per acre-foot of water every two weeks while temperatures are above 68F (20C); double dose on first application of the season and if temperatures are below 68F (20C). 239400 239410 239425 Six 1-oz Bags One 8-oz Bag One 25-lb Bag $ 13.75 10.00 347.00
239410
BARACLEAR Pond and Lake Clarifier

New, improved formula!
BARACLEAR is a convenient phosphorus removal and water clarification solution for murky waters. It is the only alum treatment product that addresses the large amount of phosphorous that resides in the bottom sediment of many ponds. The pebbles are easy to usesimply scoop up the 3/8" pellets and scatter them over the surface of the water. They will sink, mostly intact, to the bottom and provide a time-release of alum into the sediment and water. Use in any size waterway, from one hundred to ten million gallons. The typical application rate for phosphorus removal in municipal lakes, golf courses and farm ponds is 1/2 lb per 1,000 gallons of water, or approximately three 50-lb pails of clarifier per acre-foot. The pH should be between 5.5 and 8.0, alkalinity between 50 and 200 ppm and salinity below 3 ppt. Large quantities are shipped from the factory. Call for a quotation. Made in USA. Note: BARACLEAR leaves a residual stone in the pond after the active alum ingredients have entered the water. Place the pebbles in a mesh netting to prevent residual stones. BAR40 50 lbs $ 82.00 77.90
4+
diffuser
Pond Log
Aeration: Pond Logs are simply tied to a float, keeping them in line with the upward bubble movement enabling the polymer blend to dissolve.
Microfloc Alum Injection System by Sweetwater

continuous algae control.

Great for small recreational lakes, farm ponds and golf courses. Safe for swimmers and harmless to fish and wildlife.
Dramatically improve water clarity and quality with this easy-to-install and maintain system. The Sweetwater Microfl oc Alum Injection System eliminates nuisance algal blooms in ponds by continually removing the nutrients (food) that feed algae. The system's small shore station delivers particles of alum (aluminum sulfate) into the water column and evenly distributes them throughout the pond. On contact with the water the alum particles form a floc of aluminum hydroxide, which removes phosphorus, making it unavailable to algae. Each system includes a microfl oc generator with alum metering pump, air compressor, alum storage tank and timers. Everything is enclosed within a sound-reducing, ventilated, weatherproof, heavy-duty metal cabinet. 115V/60 Hz.
Phosclear
Phosclear (buffered aluminum sulfate) is a convenient phosphorus removal and water clarification solution for murky waters. Use in lakes, ponds and reservoirs. Simply broadcast the granules evenly across the surface of the water. Typical application rate is 80 lbs per acre-foot (25 ppm). A buffering agent prevents pH drops. Note: pH should be between 5.5 and 8.0, alkalinity between 50 and 200 ppm and salinity below 3 ppt. Large quantities ship from factory. Made in USA. PHOS15 15-lb Container PC40 40-lb Pail $ 43.90 82.86 39.51/4+ 80.31/4+
Pc40
Please call the Lakes dept. at 407-472-0520 for sizing and pricing.
2" Stone Pad Weighted Alum and Air Lines microfloc generator Shore Station
Pond Clarifier
Removes phosphorous.
DePhos-A is a 2-part buffered alum water clarifi er from Sweetwater Technology Corp. It is ideal for small recreational lakes, farm ponds, garden ponds and golf courses. It is safe for swimming (and drinking) and harmless to fish. Has no impact on rooted plants. It is not an algaecideit flocculates and removes phosphorus and particulate matter from the water (if water clarity is less than 24", use an algaecide first, then DePhos-A after the algae bloom subsides). One 40-lb (dry powder net weight) plastic pail of DePhos-A will treat 45,000 ft3 (equal to one acre, one foot deep or 1/4 acre, 4' deep). Make a slurry and spray it over the pond surface*. Ship weight 45 lbs. AL40 $ 118.00 106.20/4+
ALmIS
*First test the flocculent treatment in a sample portion

to determine whether the pond's water chemistry causes the floc to float or sink. If it floats, use a skimming device to remove it.
36
Lake & Pond

Measuring
Secchi Disk and Decals

The plastic Secchi disk is a standard for measuring the relative visibility of water. Lower it into the water and when it disappears, record its depth. SEC is a LaMotte silk-screened plastic disk with stainless steel eye bolt and lead weight. Lowering line not included. 21 oz, 8" (20 cm) diameter. SE1 is a black and white vinyl decal for freshening up any 8" Secchi disk or for making your own. SE1 SEC

Fish Tags
Farmers and researchers have found that fish tags are one of the best ways to identify individual fish. They can be used to distinguish male fish from females and broods from the rest of the stock. They can mark genetic strains and individual fish for research and growth studies. We offer the popular T-bar anchor tags in both flag and number styles. They're easy to insert, cause minimal stress and can remain in the fish for years. The flag tag is 21/2" long with a 3/16" x 3/8" flag (no labeling possible). The number style is international orange with black numbers. The tagging gun, which is compatible with both tag styles, uses a needle to insert the tags to a depth of 5/8". Custom printed tags and other styles are also available. FFT1 FFT2 FFT3 FFT4 FFT6 FFT7 FFT9 FTN100 TG TGN TGS Lt Blue Flag Tags, Pk/100 Dk Blue Flag Tags, Pk/100 Yellow Flag Tags, Pk/100 Red Flag Tags, Pk/100 Orange Flag Tags, Pk/100 Dk Green Flag Tags, Pk/100 Clear Flag Tags, Pk/100 No. 1100 Tags, Pk/100 Tagging Gun Replacement Needle Needle Sharpener $ 4.15 4.15 4.15 4.15 4.15 4.15 4.15 129.00 93.33 20.00 13.90 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 3.64/10+ 121.19/10+
Decal Disk
$ 6.00 26.50
Each
5.64 24.65
4+
A s L ow
sec
On D ec al
64
ly
as
Tech Talk 79
Tagging Fish
Fish tags can be useful in fisheries research, as well as broodstock management. When used with proper record keeping, tags can keep track of sex, age, genetic line, year class, dispersal patterns or that the fish's name is "Bob." Making a good tag consistently can take some practice, but the following general procedure can be followed for most species of fish. The goal is to set the "hook" of the tag into the dorsal fin rays that extend into the musculature of the fish. This means you should actually feel the bone when setting the tag. 1. H old the fish firmly in the swimming position when it is tagged to reduce movement. Anesthetized fish should be held firmly as well. Squirming fish can bend the needle and cause injury. 2. Using the needlepoint, lift up a scale on the left side of the fish and insert the needle at the anterior (forward) base of the dorsal fin, forcing it forward through the dorsal rays. 3. Once the needle is inserted, hold the gun firmly against the fish's body while compressing the handle firmly. 4. T wist the gun slightly and remove the needle. DO NOT RELEASE THE COMPRESSED HANDLE UNTIL THE NEEDLE HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN. Once withdrawn, release the handle slowly to make certain the next tag is fed into position for tagging. Failure to do so may cause feed mechanism to skip. 5. T ug the tag lightly to set. One final note: disease transmission can be a concern when tagging fish. To minimize risk, swab the needle with rubbing alcohol, iodine, etc., after each tag.
fft1
tg
Technician Profile
Cullen Danner
Cullen received his B.A. in environmental and aquatic sciences from the University of Central Florida. He worked as a consultant to the energy industry for environmental compliance and mitigation issues concerning marine mammals in the Gulf of Mexico. Cullen also has experience with pest and weed control and environmental restoration.
Self-Piercing Tags
Small animal ear tags are self-piercing and can be used as operculum tags in aquatic research and aquaculture applications. They are also useful for monitoring fish habits, tracking growth rates and marking broodstock. Tags are available in steel or monel (nickel-copper alloy), which is recommended for saltwater applications. The tag should be inserted in the operculum or lower jaw (always allow room for growth) and an applicator tool is required. Steel tags are available in red (R), blue (B), green (G), and yellow ( Y ). Add color letter after part number (e.g., FT28B). Sold in packs of 100. FT10 FT10T FT15 FT15T FT28 FT28T Monel Tool Monel Tool Steel Tool 10 mm 15 mm 28.5 mm $ 14.30 45.38 14.30 27.14 10.62 34.10 12.95/10+ 12.95/10+ 9.03/10+
lm1065
Using a Secchi disk to measure your water's transparency? Lower it into the water with a calibrated sampler line. See more details on page 38.
Measuring/Fish Habitat
Lake & Pond
37
Fish Measuring Board

Quick and easy to use!
This economical board is easy on the fish and easy to use. Made entirely of ABS with permanent markings in inches with 1/10" divisions and in centimeters. Overall length is 24" (60 cm). Weighs 4 lbs. Made in USA. FMB2 $ 66.15 59.47/4+
Reel Tape
This lightweight reel tape has a frame made of strong fiberglass. It is 1/2" wide and graduated in feet and inches to 1/8". Ship weight 2 lbs. TAP1 TAP3 100' 300' $ 19.85 39.90 17.87/4+ 37.90/4+
tap1
"Rite in the Rain" Scale Envelopes

Made from all-weather "Rite in the Rain" paper, these fish scale sample envelopes can be written on in the rain or shine. They are the perfect complement to research equipment and fisheries gear. Sold in packages of 100. RR101 $ 20.31/Pk
Measuring Tape, Stainless Steel

A great measuring tape for those who work in and around water. All metal parts are stainless steel. A built-in shock absorber is used to protect blade tip. Measures to 25'. Markings are clear and distinct, in inches and feet. TAP2 $ 17.85
AquaCrib Fish Habitat

Encourages fish propagation.
The AquaCrib is the most functional, convenient and cost-effective means to date for encouraging sport fish propagation. Functions especially well in deep lakes, which often are lacking in protective vegetation. A durable shelter for fish through all life cycles, the AquaCrib encourages propagation of most inland-water species of fish. Hinged top panel allows replacement of brush, keeping the AquaCrib functional indefinitely. Weighted with concrete block. Made of recycled HDPE, corrugated plastic and measures 60" L x 48" W x 48" H (153 cm x 122 cm x 122 cm). Weighs 30 lbs. The AquaCrib is the only fish habitat chosen by the Bureau of Fish Management of the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources after three years of in-depth study. Its innovative design has since been patented (#5,042,424).
Catheter Tubing
This Teflon tubing is commonly used for sampling egg stage development in brood stock. It has a wall thickness of .15 mm (150 microns) and is safer than glass capillary tubes. Sold by the foot.

On-site inspections and underwater photos show that the AquaCrib attracts abundant varieties and sizes of sport fish, with spawning indicated next to the structure. The AquaCrib is a convenient, effective and ecologically sound method of fish propagation and an active mechanism to ensure supplies of game fish in shelter-poor waters. AC $ 148
TT86 TT97 TT119 TT173
Inside Dia. x Outside Dia.
.86 mm x 1.14 mm .97 mm x 1.27 mm 1.19 mm x 1.49 mm 1.73 mm x 2.03 mm
$ 2.27 2.27 2.27 2.81
Time-tested value, made of recycled materials.
I just wanted to drop you a quick line to let you know how impressed I was with the quick response time to my question. The information you provided was helpful and I look forward to using your business in the future. Thanks again and have a great day!
Crystal Schalmo
Sacramento Zoo
38
Lake & Pond
Water Sampling/Bottom Sampling
Water Sampler
Recommended for water 5 meters or more in depth.
Simplified, one-liter, horizontal-style sampler features a clear acrylic body with a built-in outlet for removal of the water sample. A brass messenger is sent down a 20-meter, calibrated, nylon line to trigger a release mechanism sealing the sample chamber. The seal is made with two heavy plungers. A lead collar surrounds sampler to eliminate drift. Messenger and calibrated line are included. LM1077 $ 216
Sampling & Measurement Kit, Marine Science

This rugged combination outfit is easy to transport, simple to use and a necessity for any salt water field sampling. Durable, reliable sampling gear and measurement devices all housed within a rugged field carrying case for easy transport and storage. Kit includes: Forel-Ule color comparator kit and Secchi disk (20 cm in diameter) to determine turbidity and degree of visibility in water columns; bottom sampling dredge to obtain bottom sediment for surface analysis; D.O. water sample bottle to collect water samples for analysis at controlled depths (holds 60 ml of sample); plankton net to collect plankton and invertebrates for surface studies (153 micron mesh net is 15" in length and has a 5" diameter mouth and two 50 ml collection tubes at end); armored thermometer in protective, plastic jacket for accurate temperature readings (range is 5 to 45 C); sounding lead and calibrated line (includes a 2-lb weight and a nylon sampler line marked from 020 m in one meter increments). All items are contained in heavy-duty 14" x 14" x 7" foam-lined case. Ships Ground. Weighs 14 lbs. LM1069 $ 485
Water Sampler
Find true water quality at depth.
Collect samples from depths between one and twenty meters. Its inner collection chamber allows dissolved oxygen samples to be "fixed" prior to removal. Outer chamber (1,200 mL) is clear acrylic. A thermometer clip, zinc weight and two extra inner collection chambers are included. Weighs 4 lbs. Measures 81/4" x 3" dia. Made in USA. LM1060 $ 108.70
Calibrated Sampler Line

This heavy-duty nylon line is marked from 0 to 20 m in one-meter increments. Great for use with Secchi discs, bottom grab samplers and water samplers. A 2-lb spring clip is attached to one end for easy attachment. Line is wound on a foam spool to prevent loss if dropped overboard. LM1065 actual weight is 3.25 lbs (1.5 kg); LM1064 includes a 2-lb (908 grams) lead weight and has an actual weight of 5.25 lbs (2.5 kg). Made in USA.

Handheld Depth Finder

This versatile, handheld depth finder will give instant readings from 2.5' to 120' (1/10" precision). The digital backlit display will show depth or switch to display air and water temperature (F). Waterproof up to 50', It shoots through fiberglass hulls and ice. Powered by a 9V battery (included) and measures 7" x 2" x 2". Two-year warranty. Weighs 1 lb. DPX200 $ 119.47
LM1065 LM1064
Calibrated Line Calibrated Line w/Lead Weights

lm1064
$ 38.50 52.00
Each
Bottom Grab
This benthic sampler is designed for taking samples on soft muck, mud or fine, peaty material. Made of 316 stainless steel, it requires a messenger to release the two-pin jaw. Uses 11-oz messenger (SBK2 or SBK3not included) and 3/16" braided line. Weighs 10 lbs. Made in USA. BS195 SBK2 SBK3 Bottom Grab $ 442.00 Split Messenger 61.98 Solid Messenger 50.77
bs195
Dredge, Bottom Sampling

Our all stainless steel dredge features a bottom sensing closure that eliminates the need for a messenger weight! This dredge is a convenient sediment-collecting device for mud, sand, and light gravel. A newly designed trigger ensures that the jaws stay open during descent. Sampling volume is 110 in3. Sampling area covered by open dredge: 45 in2 (114.3 cm2). Actual weight is 3 lbs. Made in USA. LM1097 $ 195
Periphyton Sampler
Ideal for sampling algae or zebra mussels.
This artificial substrate sampler can be placed in a stream, reservoir or lake and is secured by means of a line or anchor. It is left in place for two weeks, in which time algae grow on the glass slides. At the end of the sampling period, the slides are removed and the algae and other growths can be examined for identification and counting. Glass microscope slides are held firmly in place in a removable slide tray. The rugged slide tray holds up to 8 slides. Two polyurethane floats keep the sampler self-righting and allow it to float inconspicuously. Meets EPA recommendations. Measures 143/4" x 73/4" x 61/2", complete with 16 slides. Weighs 2 lbs. PS156 PS156T Periphyton Sampler Replacement Tray $ 96.86 96.86
Wash Bucket
Easily and quickly washes and sorts samples from dredges and bottom grabs. Makes a messy job easier. Replaceable bottom screen is #30 stainless steel mesh (600 microns) that catches macroinvertebrates. 107/8" deep and 9 5/8" diameter. Weighs 5 lbs. Made in USA. WB2 $ 137
ps156
Lake & Pond

Water Flow
39
Water Flow Probe

Perfect for monitoring spring runoff.
This water ow probe is a lightweight, easy-to-use water velocity meter. It is highly accurate and comes complete with LCD digital display, internal ball bearings and a telescoping handle. Shipped in a padded case for safe carrying. Probe measures both instantaneous velocity (accuracy .5 feet per second (fps)) and average velocity (accuracy .1 fps). Reads in fps and meters per second (m/sec). Range is 0.319.9 fps (0.16.1 m/sec). Datalogger stores 30 sets, including MIN, MAX and AVG. Unit also displays true digital running average, updated once per second. Sensor is a protected Turbo-Prop propeller with magnetic pickup. Internal lithium battery is nonreplaceable and has 5-year life. Ship weight 12 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. FP6 FP7 Flow Probe, 3.7'6' Handle Flow Probe, 5.5'15' Handle $ 844 906
Water Flow Meters

Automatically stay horizontal!
These compact, mechanical velocity meters are designed for measuring water ow in lakes, rivers and more. Determine water speed, volume or distance. The meters incorporate a precision-molded rotor coupled directly to a six-digit counter that registers each revolution of the rotor and displays it similar to an odometer (up to 999,999equal to approximately 14.5 nautical miles). Properly balanced to maintain a horizontal position when suspended by a towing line. After completing each sampling, simply remove the meter and record the reading and time. Subtract the rst reading from the second to calculate average speed over a given time. Each ow meter measures 83/8" long, 19/16" in diameter and includes 18" of tow line and a stainless steel connecting axle pin. The high-speed meter measures from 10 cm/sec to 7.9 m/sec. The low-speed meter measures from 2 to 100 cm/sec. Ship weight 2 lbs. One-year warranty. 203001 203002 High-Speed Meter Low-Speed Meter $ 524.62 553.85
FP6 203001
Wading Rod
For mechanical velocity meters.
This telescopic wading pole extends from 3' to 9' and has a stainless steel swivel tting that connects to the velocity meters above. Ideal for measuring ow in hard-to-reach areas. Weighs 3.5 lbs.
LCD Display
203007
$ 160.46
Shown with 203002. 203007
Impeller
Staff Gauges
Monitor your water level at a glance.
Commonly used to gauge water depths in rivers, lakes, ponds, sewage plants, irrigation channels, etc. (including salt water). These heavy-duty gauges are made of heavyweight steel, nished with a white porcelain enamel to resist rust and discoloration for many years. Each gauge is accurately graduated and has grommet holes for fastening.
Technician Pro le
Matt Rayl
Matt graduated from Earlham College in Richmond, Indiana, with a B.A. in biology. He has operated a hatchery and lake and pond management company. Matt has extensive knowledge of lake and pond ecology, aeration systems as well as aquatic weed identi cation and control.
Style "C" Gauges

Gauges are 21/2" wide, graduated to hundredths, marked at every foot and tenth. Order a bottom section plus any others to reach the required level. Weighs 1 lb per ft. 56106 56156 56206 56333 56666 5610
56333
The cleanest lake in the USA?

Looks like that honor goes to Crater Lake in Oregon. Water clarity is typically 142 feet (43 meters). The 1,940 foot deep lake stays clear (oligotrophic) because it has a relatively small watershed and no tributaries to bring in nutrients or sediments. It is in a national park with only six boats allowed, four tour boats and two research vessels.
Graduated 01.06' Graduated 01.56' Graduated 02.06' Graduated 03.33' Graduated 3.336.66' Graduated 6.6610'
$ 38.95 39.95 42.95 52.45 52.45 52.45
40
Lake & Pond

Plankton Nets
Plankton Nets
Designed for biological, limnological and oceanographic studies, these nets are also used for a variety of aquaculture applications, including plankton and larval collecting. Each net includes a stainless steel mouth ring/towing bridle, cod end ring, rubber-coated hose clamp and a 1-liter capacity cod end jar. Nets are conical in design.
Mouth Diameter (cm)
Plankton Nets, Sampling

Large, cone-shaped net has 153-micron mesh net that measures 38" long with a 12" mouth opening. The net mouth is braced by a sturdy brass ring and wire harness. There is a 50-mL collecting bottle at the end of the net. LM30023 $ 140
PKN1 PKN2 PKN3 PKN4 PKN5 PKN6 PKN7 PKN8 PKN9 PKN10
30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50
Net Length Mesh Opening (cm) (microns)
90 90 90 90 90 150 150 150 150 150
35 63 80 100 150 80 150 200 335 500
$ 394 362 353 336 327 538 474 466 454 458
Plankton Net
Great for student projects, this 15" cone-shaped plankton net is made from #10 mesh, 153-micron nylon cloth. Minute plankton are collected and can be observed in the clear, 50-mL, conical graduated tube at the end of the net. Two tubes are provided. The 5" net mouth is braced by a sturdy brass ring and harness. Weighs 2 lbs. LM1063 $ 83.50
pkn2
Plankton Nets, Miniature

Plankton nets have a 5" (12.7 cm) diameter net mouth and measure 15" (38 cm) long. The net mouth has a stainless steel ring with nylon tow lines attached through grommets. Nets include a 125-mL sampling bottle. The small mouth to net ratio (3:1) makes them good for shallow water sampling. LM007 LM008 153 microns 80 microns $ 46.24 52.72
lm007
Conversion Chart
Mesh 4 8 10 14 18 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 Microns 5,205 2,487 1,923 1,307 1,000 840 710 590 500 420 350 297 250 210 1 ft = 30.5 cm 1 in. = 2.54 cm Inches .2030 .0970 .0750 .0510 .0394 .0331 .0280 .0232 .0197 .0165 .0138 .0117 .0098 .0083 Mesh 80 100 120 140 170 200 230 270 325 400 550 800 1,250
2
Plankton Collectors
Microns 177 149 125 105 88 74 62 53 44 37 25 15 10 5 1 yard = .91 m 1 ft = .09 m
2
Inches .0079 .0059 .0049 .0041 .0035 .0029 .0024 .0021 .0017 .0015 .0009 .0006 .0004 .0002
These heavy-duty collectors are great for field sampling or lab scale work. Collectors can also be used to harvest zooplankton for larval feeding. The 6" diameter models have permanently mounted screens of high-grade polyester plankton cloth. The 12" diameter models also include a rope handle. A 53-micron screen is best for collecting rotifers and a 120-micron screen for Artemia nauplii. BBPC4 BBPC5 BBPC6 BBPC20 BBPC21 6" Dia., 25 microns 6" Dia., 53 microns 6" Dia., 125 microns 12" Dia., 53 microns 12" Dia., 120 microns $ 28.33 27.08 25.00 66.36 58.86
bbpc4
bbpc20
Plankton Nets/Sampling
Lake & Pond
41
Plankton Nets
For use where a flow-through straining bucket is not required. Supplied with a 5" stainless steel hoop mouth and 6" stainless steel bridle. Assembled and ready for use. A plastic collecting bottle with screw-off end cap for emptying sample is attached to the net. Net length is 18" (45 cm) long. Available in both 60- and 153-micron mesh sizes. Weighs 2 lbs. DNP8 DNP9

Kick Nets
Perfect for benthic studies.
Designed to collect aquatic organisms from natural waters and shorelines up to 2' deep. Net measures 1 m x 1 m (3.28' x 3.28') and is 500-micron mesh. Sides are hemmed for poles and bottom has a reinforced seam for anchoring. Meets US EPA Rapid Bioassessment Protocols for benthic invertebrates. Includes two wooden poles. Weighs 3 lbs. KN1 $ 128.97
60 microns 153 microns
$ 64.74 64.74
dnp8
Ring Nets
Designed for collecting plankton and other pelagic organisms, these nets have a 12" (30 cm) diameter circular mouth with a stainless steel ring and 3-point bridle. The nets measure one meter long and are made with high-quality mesh netting. Net funnels down to a two-piece PVC collecting bucket that features quick release clamps and filtering holes. Custom nets are also available with different mesh sizes, mouth sizes and length ratios (please inquire).
Mesh close-up.
Hess Sampler
Bottom samplers collect flora and fauna in gravel and cobble stream bottoms. The Hess sampler consists of a circular cylinder which is pushed into the substrate. Substrate bottom is then stirred up, and the organisms are washed into the collecting bag by the current flowing through the front screen opening. The net and screen wrap around the frame and are secured with Velcro, enabling them to be easily removed. The sampler is 14" in diameter and 18" high. Weighs 12 lbs. Made in USA. HN5 500 microns $ 475.27
RN80
80 microns
Ship Wt
2 lbs
$ 287.07
Surber Sampler
The Surber sampler is a small, portable, stream bottom sampler. It consists of two folding brass frames that are affixed to right angles and locked by braces. After the horizontal frame is set in the substrate, silt and rocks are stirred up so that the current can wash the bottom organisms into the net. Net is constructed of 500-micron screening. The inlet measures 12" x 12" (30 cm x 30 cm) and the net is 24" (60 cm) in length. Weighs 9 lbs. Made in USA. SN5 $ 334.88
Sieve Sets
Used to separate and grade samples, these sets are great for students. S548 includes six interlocking sieves with plastic frames and graduated, stainless steel wire screens; a solid container at the bottom and a snap-on lid (US Bureau of Standards mesh sizes 5, 10, 35, 60, 120 and 230). Weighs 3.25 lbs. S3076 consists of four high-impact plastic sieves, with graduated mesh sizes (5, 10, 60 and 230), solid container at the bottom and lid. Weighs 2.5 lbs. Sieves measure 63/4" x 3". S3076 S548 Four-Sieve Set Six-Sieve Set $ 74.25 103.00
D-Shaped Net
This sampling net has a heavy cotton/polyester bag and is secured to a 12" wide D-frame. The bag depth is 8"; bottom mesh is approximately 500 microns and is protected from snags and wear by a 4" skirt. Has a 48' telescopic aluminum handle. LM100 $ 63.50
s3076
Bright Dyes
Fluorescent water tracing dyes. certified for use in potable water.
Fish and Wildlife Conservation Kit by Hach
Hazmat Air
NSF
This kit has everything necessary to learn whether ponds, lakes, wetlands, rivers and streams are healthy for fish and wildlife. It utilizes analytical, drop-count titration and color disc colorimetry to test for acidity (1 drop = 2.27 mg/L or 5.46 mg/L as CaCO 3), alkalinity (6.84342 mg/L), carbon dioxide (5100 mg/L), hardness (0513 mg/L), dissolved oxygen (010 mg/L) and pH (410). Each kit includes enough reagents for 100 tests (pH up to 300 tests). Weighs 5 lbs. 1802-33 $ 190
Ecologically safe dyes for use in stream tracing, lake studies, flow mapping, storm and sewer analysis, pollution studies and leak detection. Two formulations: FWT Red, a specially formulated version of the dye Rhodamine WT; and FLT Yellow/ Green, a formulated version of the dye Fluorescein. The fluorescent colors can be detected visually in most water conditions or with the use of ultraviolet light or a fluorometer. The dyes are temporary and will degrade naturally in sunlight (23 days for Red and 57 days for Yellow/Green) or with the addition of chlorine. Yellow/Green is resistant to absorption in organic matter and should be used in water with heavy sediment loads. 1 pint per 10,000 gallons. 106023 106001 FWT Red, Pint Liquid FLT Y/G, Pint Liquid $ 21.32 21.32
106023
106001
42
Lake & Pond

Thermometers
Pocket Thermometers
This shirt-pocket thermometer ( TH26) is filled with nontoxic red liquid and includes an aluminum protective case. Measures both C and F, range -40 to 70C and -40 to 158F. TH27 is the same, but it has a plastic protective case. TH26 TH27 Aluminum Plastic $ 7.45 5.25
Wireless Thermometer
Utilizing a radio wave signal, this monitor measures the temperature at remote sensors, displaying the reading in either F or C. The monitor can accept up to four different remote sensors and receive signals as far as 100 feet (30 meters) in optimum conditions. The remote sensors have a waterproof probe tip attached to a 36" cable. The monitor and remote sensors require two AAA batteries each (not included). Monitor includes one remote sensor. The LCD display is 13/4" x 13/4". Two-year warranty. WTP100 WTP101 Monitor w/Sensor Additional Sensor $ 36.00 19.85
tH26
tH27
WtP100
Stainless Steel
The lip on the stainless steel back allows thermometer to hang inside tank, perfect for aquariums. Reads both F and C, ranges 30120F and 050C. Contains a nontoxic red liquid. Measures 5" (13 cm) L x 1" (3 cm) W. TH11A $ 3.05 / TH11AC 12/Pk 32.94
Min/Max
A simple way of knowing the high and low temperatures in water, a building, cooler, outside, etc. over time. Easily reset with the push of a button. Accuracy of 1%. Length is 8". Dual scales of -50/50C and -40/120F. Contains mercury. TH25 $ 17.85 16.96/4+
Floating
This low-cost floating thermometer is ideal for aquariums and small tanks. Overall length is 5". Floats in an upright position. Reads both F and C. Range 30 to 120F and 0 to 50C. Contains nontoxic red liquid. A suction cup support is included. TH10A $ 2.05
Sinking
This sinking thermometer has a tough, clear buterate casing with a 21" tether cord and ring. Reads -20 to 120F and -30 to 50C. Overall length is 8". Perfect for fish ponds, minnow tanks, hot tubs, etc. Contains nontoxic red liquid. TH21 $ 9.75
Pond/Tank
This ABS plastic thermometer is ideal for use in garden ponds and fish tanks. It reads in both F and C (30110F, 040C), has a shatterproof magnifying lens and features a snap on/off cap that allows it to float or sink. Contains a nontoxic red liquid. Three-foot cord is included. Measures 8" (20 cm) long x 11/4" (3.2 cm) dia. TH31 $ 10.65
Stick-On
This accurate, digital, stick-on thermometer works by liquid crystal color changes. It reads 64 to 93F (18 to 34C). Designed for mounting on the outside of glass aquariums. Reusable adhesive. Measures 5" x 3/4". If two numbers show a color change, the temperature is in between the two. TH175 $ 1.42
tH11A
tH31
tH21
tH10A
tH25
tH175
Lake & Pond

Thermometers
43
Pocket-Sized, Waterproof
This thermometer uses a 2.75" (70 mm) stainless steel stem to measure temperature. The digital display shows Fahrenheit (-40 to 392) or Celsius (-40 to 200) with .2F/ .1C accuracy and .1 resolution. Capable of max/min recall of high and low temperatures, each has data hold and auto shut-off. Includes one LR44 button battery and a protective cover. OAL is 6". 39240 $ 19.99 / 39240C 5/Pk 89.96
Miniature Digital
This inexpensive digital thermometer measures temperature at the base unit and at a cable-connected submersible probe. Reads temperature in C or F and has a clock function. Cable is 30" long. Uses 1 AAA battery (not included). DTDS1 Digital Thermometer $ 16.48 15.00/4+
Heavy-Duty
These rugged, handheld, digital thermometers are designed for field use. They read in both Fahrenheit and Centigrade and feature a large LCD display, maximum reading and data hold. A basic 18" wire cable probe is included for air measurements; however, the optional TH29P general purpose probe is required for use in liquids. It is a 31/2" stainless steel probe with 39" cable. Other type K probes also fit. Meter includes 9V battery, holster with stand and wrist strap. Weighs 14 oz. One-year warranty. TH29 TH29P HD Thermometer General Purpose Probe $ 94.99 39.99 Ranges -501,300C -502,000F Resolution .1 or 1.0 Accuracy .3% ROG, 1C or 2F Dimensions 6.5" x 3.0" x 1.7"
Temperature Alarm
The large display Temp Alert features an adjustable audible alarm for high and low temperatures and larger digits on a 4" x 4" x 1" meter. Accuracy of .5. The alarm will activate for both water and room temperature settings. Submersible probe with 3' cable, suction cup and AAA battery included. Weighs 4 oz. One-year warranty. TH24 TH24C Alert, F Alert, C $ 37.15 37.15
th24
th29
Temperature Alarm
Set the temperature and feel safe with this alarm thermometer. This device can be set with both minimum and maximum temperatures. If either temperature is passed, the audible alarm will sound at 51 dB. Displays can be read in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade and range from 23 to 122F (-10 to 50C). Accuracy is 2F or 1C. Uses one AAA battery (included). Five-year warranty. 8040 $ 18.00
th29p
Underwater Remote
This 12V thermometer will allow temperatures to be monitored from up to 20' away. It may be dashboard-mounted in hauling trucks or boats (case is water resistant) with its 20' sensor cable. The bright red 3/4" digital readout can be seen even in direct sunlight. Reads in Fahrenheit only, 0 to 99.9, with calibration adjustment on back. Made in USA. One-year warranty. TP12 $ 66.56 61.91/4+
Temperature Alarm, Indoor/Outdoor

A great thermometer for greenhouses and fish rooms. Large 1.5" LCD shows indoor and outdoor temperatures at the same time, ranging from -58 to 158F (with great precision). Features an audible alarm (approx. 52 dB) and red/green LED indication when temperature is above or below set points. Includes 10' weatherproof outdoor temperature sensor, adhesive backing, built-in stand, screws for wall mounting and AAA battery. Measures 23/4" x 23/4", weighs .2 lb. One-year warranty. TH28 $ 20.99 19.94/4+
Digital Thermometer w/Light

Measures both F and C. Safe for fresh or salt water; includes miniature submersible probe with 36" cable. It is also a digital clock. One AA battery (included). 41/2" long. Display is 11/2"x1/2" with 5/16" digits. Weighs .3 lb. Range: -58 to 158F (50 to 70C). One-year warranty. TH22A $ 22.90 21.18/4+
Laboratory
This accurate yet economical thermometer is made with nontoxic red liquid (no mercury) on white background. The range is 0 to 230F and -20 to 110C. Requires minimum immersion depth of 3". Overall length is 12". TH6 $ 3.80
44
Lake & Pond
Thermometers/Meters/Accessories
Infrared Temperature Scanners

Read temperature instantly from a distance! It is easy to measure pipes, walls, motors, vents, ceiling insulation, etc., up to 930F. Simply point them at any surface and read the temperature. You will find these extremely useful for finding insulation leaks and motor temperatures. The large model features a built-in laser that guides you right to the point of measurement. Results are displayed on a large backlit LCD in either F or C. Readings are held for 7 seconds after trigger is released. Auto power off. Uses 9V battery (included). Range: -4 to 840F (-20 to 450C), accuracy 2%. Distance to size (D:S) ratio is 8:1; i.e., measures 1 inch dia. when held 8 inches away. Scanner is 8" x 3" x 13/4", weighs only .45 lb (200 g). Five-year warranty. 800102 $ 60.00
Rain Gauge
This rain gauge uses a wedge design that is recognized as the most accurate by universities and the US Weather Bureau. The English scale measures in increments of 1/100" of an inch to 6". One-piece, heavy-duty, weatherresistant, clear plastic resists discoloration. Comes with aluminum mounting bracket and two mounting screws. 14" long. RG6 $ 9.08 8.49/12+
Have a complaint?
If you're unhappy, we're unhappy. If you have a problem with our service, an item you purchased or anything at all, we want to know about it. We will do everything we can to correct the problem and take any action to make sure you are satisfied. We appreciate your business, and we want to keep it!
The Mini TempTestr IR

The is an economical, noncontact, infrared thermometer that is only 11/2" wide by 21/2" high and measures surface temperatures of any liquid, solid or semisolid in less than one second. Minimum and maximum readings are stored in the internal memory, hold function freezes reading for 7 seconds. Selectable display reads F or C. Range: -30 to 430F (-33 to 220C), accuracy 2%. Five-year warranty. MT100 $ 38.45
Pocket Wind Meter

This sleek wind meter is very accurate, tough and affordable. Simply hold it up to measure wind speed, whenever and wherever needed. The meter can track maximum and average wind speeds, along with current readings. Measures in knots, mps, kph, mph, fpm and Beaufort force. Measures wind speed with a precision ultra light impeller that turns on sapphire bearings. It is completely waterproof, floats and includes a slip-on case and batteries. Weighs only 2 oz. KWM1
mt100 Now you can measure hard-to-reach and high-temp areas.
800102
$ 100
Min Wind Speed .3 m/s Max Wind Speed 40 m/s Display 21/2" digit LCD
Water-Resistant Clock by Sweetwater

100% humidity? No problem.
This quartz clock uses O-ring seals, even on the battery compartment. 6" (15 cm) face with chrome hands. Uses one AA battery (included) that will last for over a year. Compare to others at over $30. 810034R $ 16.95 14.24/4+
Dial
channel catfish
The channel catfish (Ictalurus punctatus) is the most predominant catfish species in North America. It can weigh as much as 4050 lbs (1823 kg), with the world record catch weighing 58 lbs. The average-size channel catfish in most waterways is between 2 and 4 lbs. Catfish are omnivores, and can be caught with almost any kind of bait. Channel catfish are especially suitable for commercial aquaculture. They spawn easily and produce a lot of fry, which can quickly begin consuming manufactured feed after yolk-sac absorption. Channel catfish keep a good growth rate and feed conversion efficiency through their life cycle. They also handle crowded and diverse conditions well. Ponds, cages and raceways are all successfully used in channel catfish culture. They are popular for their mildly flavored white meat that can be prepared many ways. *Some information from Mississippi State University Extension Service: <http://msucares.com/aquaculture/catfish/biology.html> Features a large 13/4" diameter, easy-to-read dial with an accuracy of 1%. Has a 5" stainless steel stem, recalibration nut and watertight plastic dial cover. It reads 0 to 230F (2 divisions) and 18 to 110C (1 divisions). Immerse at least 1" but 34" is better. Pocket clip case included. TH4 $ 14.20 12.78/6+
Hygrometer
know your humidity level.
Ideal for the lab, classroom or indoor fish farm, this precision 4" (10 cm) hygrometer is easy to read from a distance. It provides relative humidity to an accuracy of 5% using a precise synthetic hair hygrometer. The inner dial thermometer reads in F to an accuracy of 2%. This precision meter is made in Germany and weighs just .2 lb. Five-year warranty. HG1 $ 34.75
Lake & Pond

Field Notebooks
45
Waterproof Paper
"Rite in the Rain" writing paper for wet placesno more ruined field notes.
"Rite in the Rain" is a unique paper that allows field notes to be written in wet or humid conditions. The chemical coating on the paper sheds water, making it possible to write clear, readable notes, even in a rainstorm. Requiring no special writing instrument, this paper works best using just a pencil (felt-tip pens will not work). This may be the best insurance against lost time and ruined field notes. Made in USA.
All-Weather Notebook
A hip pocket, notebook that becomes hands-free when not in use. Features horizontal line paper and a PE cover. Wire spiral at top of notebook. 50 leaves, 4" x 6", weighs 3 oz. RR146 $ 5.67 5.17/12+
All-Weather Spiral
The all-weather spiral notebook is great for fitting into tight spaces. A flexible PE cover folds back and has a side wire spiral. Perfect for fi eld trips. Numbered notebook pages 1 through 64. 32 leaves, 45/8" x 7", weighs 3 oz. RR393 $ 7.97 7.17/12+
Field Notebook
This 81/2" x 11", spiral-bound notebook has 24 leaves and a polyethylene cover. Field pattern. RR115 $ 16.68 15.60/12+
All-Weather Binder Level Book Notebook

Finally, a notebook that works as hard as you do. This bound book has been manufactured with tough outdoor components. The cover, as well as the glue, is designed to handle rough and wet weather conditions. Fabrikoid (hardbound cloth) cover. Includes a title and contents page. 78 leaves, 43/4" x 49/16", 9 oz. RR310F $ 20.53 18.63/12+
RR200 with RR392
This 6-ring binder has a hard polyethylene cover and contains an inside clear plastic pocket on the inside front cover. Great mini notebook for field notes. Binder is chrome and contains antirust metals. Designed to hold 100 leaves and measures 511/16" x 73/4", weighs 5 oz. Paper sold separately. RR200 RR312 RR392 Binder Level Paper, 100 Sheets Horizontal Lines, 100 Sheets $ 13.85 15.18 15.18
Each
9.97 13.97 13.97
12+
Memo Book
Perforated leaves that are stapled at the top fill this memo book. Has horizontal lines and a tagboard cover. 31/4" x 53/4". RR100 $ 4.95
Notebook
All-weather tag-board covers this 45/8" x 7", saddle-stitched notebook. Choose either level columnar ruled or horizontal lines, both with 24 leaves. RR311 RR391 Level Columnar Horizontal Lines $ 4.85 4.85
Each
Grid Sheets
81/2" x 11", "Rite in the Rain" sheets in a choice of two patterns. Printed on one side. Sold in packs of 100 only. Ship weight is 1.5 lbs/100. RR1104 RR1136
1/4" Quadrille Grid 36 Horizontal Lines
RR311
4.47 4.47
12+
$ 17.95 17.95
All-Weather Copy Paper

81/2" x 11", 200 sheets per pack. Make your own waterproof forms! 3 lbs. RR851 $ 33.95/Pk 31.95/4+
Shirt Pocket Spiral Book

This spiral-bound booklet is 3" x 5", has 50 leaves, horizontal lines and a polyethylene cover. RR135 $ 4.95 4.53/12+
RR104 RR1136
All-Weather Pen
Writes underwater and upside down! Fine point. Black ink. RR37 RR37R All-Weather Pen Refill
RR37
"Rite in the Rain" Scale Envelopes

Made from all-weather "Rite in the Rain" paper, these fish scale sample envelopes can be written on in the rain or shine. They are the perfect complement to research equipment and fisheries gear. Sold in packages of 100. RR101 $ 20.31/Pk 17.72/12+
$ 9.90 6.85
46
Rain Suit
Lake & Pond
Waders/Boots/Rain Suits
Ultra Lightweight Waders

Built-in latex "socks" keep feet warm and dry.
Now the same technology used by cold water sport fishermen and divers (dry suit) is available to the aquaculturist. Made of a tough 430 denier nylon fabric with a 3-layer polyurethane backing that ensures watertight integrity, each wader has quadruple interlocking stitching. Must wear shoes, divers' booties or boots on the outside to protect the latex socks from abrasion. Built-in "gaiter type" ankle guards keep sand out of your shoes. Both the chest and waist high waders have stretch shoulder strap suspenders and belt loops. In warm water, use the waders as they are over jeans. In cold water, wear thermal underwear under the waders. Waders come with a storage/ travel bag. They weigh 2 lbs. Made in USA. Add size to end of part number; e.g., FCWM.
Three pieces allow flexibility.

This rain suit is made of nonwoven polyester for comfort and protection. Batwing construction allows freedom of movement and the dielectric sealed seams are stronger than the garment itself. Complete 3-piece suit: jacket, detachable hood and bib overall with front fly (sold in complete sets only). Weighs 4 lbs. Comes in sizes S, M, L and XL. Add size to end of part number; e.g., RS4M. RS4 $ 29.76 27.97/3+
All-Purpose Rain Suit

This rain suit is made from .20 mm PVC fabric. It has a snap front with storm flap. Attached hood has draw cord and is detachable. There are two front flap pockets and underarm vents provide ventilation. Bib overalls have adjustable waist snaps for a perfect fit, adjustable suspenders are reinforced for durability. Ankle and cuff take-up snaps provide extra protection. Specify size: small, medium, large, X-large, XX-large or XXX-large. Add letter after part number; e.g., 73515M for medium size. 73515 $ 12.63 11.12/3+
Please specify small, medium or large.

FCW FWH Chest Waders Waist-Highs $ 159 143 148/3+ 131/3+
fwh
Chest Waders
Complete with leakproof boots.
These lightweight chest waders are durably constructed of pliable PVC, have injectionmolded, one-piece leakproof boots; steel shank (meets ANSI 241 standard); removable insole and great resistance to ozone, salt water, oil and cold weather. They come with an inside storage pouch, kick-off lug, PVC upper with polyester backing and built-in adjustable belt loops and drawstrings. Available in men's shoe sizes 713. The upper part of waders in all shoe sizes accommodates build of average size person only. The larger shoe sizes do not accommodate a larger build. Use part number followed by shoe size (example: to order size 9, use WC9). Waders weigh approximately 9 lbs. Made in USA. WC (713) $ 137.71 123.94/3+
Chest Waders
Extra tough .55 mm thick chest waders offer excellent cold weather flexibility. Durable, heavy-duty, PVC upper with polyester backing can be folded or rolled without cracking. Resists oil, grease, gasoline, salt water and ozone. Drop-in replaceable insoles provide comfort. Waders have reinforced belt loops and suspender buttons (belt and suspenders NOT included). Top drawstring closure provides snug fit. All chest waders measure 56.5" in height from heel to top of wader. Available in men's sizes 613. Add size to part number; e.g., 86066-9. 86066 $ 134.92 121.43/3+
Hip Waders
Superior waterproof protection to the hips.
Excellent for use in aquaculture, fishing, municipalities, utilities, etc. Completely waterproof, these hip waders are comfortable and flexible, even in cold weather. They can be folded or rolled without cracking and resist oil, gasoline, salt water and ozone. The lightweight, durable PVC upper with a nonabsorbent, polyester backing is very comfortable. Full cushion insoles are replaceable. Available in two models, both with steel toes. Model 86856 features a steel midsole and ultra-grip bottom soles. Specify men's shoe size 613. Add size to part number; e.g., 86049-12. 86049 Standard $ 84.61 86856 Steel Midsole 115.15 76.15/3+ 103.64/3+
86049
The level of service was extremely responsive. In this day and age of poor service and belligerence, it was enjoyable to experience a company who prides themselves on taking care of the customer. I am very satisfied with Aquatic Eco-Systems' professional and rapid service, as well as the quality and value of the products. I will certainly make them one of my go-to companies. Thank You,
Bill Ashling
Lake & Pond

Gloves/Apron
47
Gloves, 14" Waterproof

Flexible, PVC-coated gloves that maintain an excellent grip when wet. Not recommended for handling fish. Black, size large only. GW14 $ 6.15 5.64/12+
Pith Helmet
Tried and true performance.
Everyone needs sun protection outdoors. The pith helmet is popular around the world because its form follows functionto keep the head cool while keeping the sun off ears, face, neck and out of eyes. The porous material is very cool, providing about 70% shade. These are high-quality, reasonably priced hats and feature an adjustable headband that fits all. Made in USA. H1 $ 24.74
Gloves, Fillet
Single ambidextrous glove made of "New Twist" yarn that provides the safety of steel mesh and the comfort of man-made fiber. Outstanding cut resistance. Machine washable, large only. G9C $ 17.00 15.30/12+
Gloves, Dive
These 60% acrylic, 40% nylon gloves are ambidextrous and offer an excellent grip. Recommended by commercial divers, these gloves stay snug under water and dry quickly. Gold color and large only. GD $ 5.16 4.79/12+
Gloves, Aqua
Designed to keep arms and hands completely dry when working inside tanks and aquariums. Full arm length (28" total) with elastic bands to hold them snugly on the upper arm. Flexible PVC with fiber-reinforced sleeves. AG2 $ 18.49 16.47/12+
Apron
This waterproof apron has a large belly flap for long life with less weight. Made of 20-mil PVC in turquoise, one size fits all. Easily trimmed. GA35 $ 8.86 7.97/6+
gw14 ag2
g9c
gd
John,
Look online at AquaticEco.com to see additional gloves.

Gloves, Shoulder Length Disposable
An economical alternative to our aqua gloves, these clear, shoulder length gloves are made of polyethylene and will keep your hands and arms dry. Gloves are 1.25 mil thick and 34" long. Price is per box of 100. B61000 $ 12.25 11.02/12+
A quick note from your customer in Michigan again. Attached are before and after pictures of our pond. Your recommendations worked! It took about 45 weeks for the pond to completely clear up, but we are very pleased with the results and appreciate all your help. Our bog garden was only mildly impacted by the Sonar product. All the ponds beyond ours are covered in scum and duckweed while ours is clear and beautiful. I should have contacted you guys years ago. Appreciate your advice. I would be glad to recommend your company and products to anyone who asks.
Roland Fortner
Before
After
48
Aeration
Compressors the only compressor made for the Aquatic Industry

Heat Expansion Bearings
Rotary Vane Compressors, 1/4 to 1 hp by

Sweetwater motor-mounted, oilless vane compressors are compact, easy-to-service and excellent for moderate-pressure, continuous-duty applications. They more than double the air output of reciprocating compressors with better longevity. Sacrificial oilless carbon vanes automatically adjust as they wear to maintain efficiency. Thermal overload protection, air filter, inlet check valve and 8' power cord are included on single-phase units. Ten-psi models work to a water depth of 18 feet and 15-psi models work to 27 feet, depending on tubing diameter and distance. The only wearing parts are carbon vanes, which can be replaced in about 15 minutes using common tools. In continuous operation, vanes last 918 months, depending on pressure. All Sweetwater compressors are performance tested before shipping and covered by a one-year warranty (not including air filters, vanes, water or lightning damage). Although all models can be rewired in the field, it's best if you specify your voltage when ordering, so we can supply the correct power cord (all single-phase models will be wired 115V if not specified). Check valves are recommended where air tubing can fill with water when the compressor is off. Three-phase models ship with vanes removed. three-phase pumps do not have a power cord and must be wired by an electrician. AES highly recommends using protective devices with all 3-phase equipment. Failure to install protective devices will void most warranties.
Replacement Vane Part No. max psi cfm @ 5 psi 60 Hz/50 Hz cfm @ 10 psi 60 Hz/50 Hz customized End Plate
Rust-Resistant Bolts
AQ5
AQ3-2* 1/4 hp 3/4 hp AQ5 AQ5-2* 3/4 hp 3/4 hp AQ7 3/4 hp, 3-Phase AQ73 AQ9 1 hp AQ93 1 hp, 3-Phase
AQ3V AQ5V AQ5V AQ5V AQ5V AQ9V AQ9V
10 15 15 10 10 10 10
4.0/3.5 7.2/6.2 7.5/6.0 9.5/7.8 9.5/7.8 11.8/10.2 11.8/10.2
3.6/3.0 6.8/5.7 6.8/5.5 8.8/7.6 8.8/7.6 10.1/8.8 10.1/8.8
5.0tt 10.2 8.2 10.7 2.1 @ 230V 11.2 2.2 @ 230V
60 Hz 50Hz Running Amps @ 10 psi, 115V
4.4 9.6 7.6 10.1 1.7 @ 230V 10.6 1.9 @ 230V
115 / 100240 115230 / 100240 100115 / 208240 115230 / 100240 208440 / 208440 115230 / 100240 208440 / 208440
Voltage 60 Hz/50 Hz
Ship Wt
34 lbs 53 lbs 58 lbs 53 lbs 60 lbs 62 lbs 62 lbs
$ 535.41 762.38 890.22 796.48 817.91 886.55 889.24
*High-efficiency, energy-saving models. **Note: See compressor comparison table on page 49 for more info.
Rotary Vane Compressor Accessories

miscellaneous Parts
AQ3V AQ5V AQ9V AB992B AF109C AQ11 AQ14 AQ255 AQ16 AQ13 AQ1301 AQ13OR AQ19 ZBN54 Vane Set for AQ3 Vane Set for AQ5, AQ7, AQ73 Vane Set for AQ9 and AQ93 Vane Set for 0822, 0822HP, 1022 Vane Set for 0522 End Cap, Felt Holder for All Quiet Models Filter Element, 1/41 hp Models Flushing Solvent, 16-oz Aerosol Hazmat Air Muffler Assembly (Specify 1/4, 3/4 or 1 hp) Pressure Relief, 3/4" NPT (1/42 hp) Pressure Relief, 1" NPT (25 hp) Replacement O-Ring for AQ13 Inlet Check Valve, Installed (1/41 hp) Brass Male Adapter 1/2" NPT x 5/8" Barb Gauge, 15 psi Gauge, 30 psi, Liquid-Filled Gauge, 60 psi Single Outlet for 5/8" I.D. Hose Single-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Two-Valve Outlet Two-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Three-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Four-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Five-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Six-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 6 lbs 7 lbs 8 lbs $ 74.77 97.61 205.57 99.94 79.41 6.88 12.00 30.70 72.69 59.95 71.05 1.95 19.78 3.10 $ 11.65 25.85 11.65
AQ14 AQ19
AQ3V (Vane sets include gaskets.) AQ16 AQ13
gauges
BG15 LPG30 BG61 AOV1 AOV1PR* AOV2 AM2PR-G* AM3PR-G* AM4PR-G* AM5PR-G* AM6PR-G*
outlet Valve Assemblies

$ 30.29 59.95 70.60 147.88 181.94 206.35 241.28 260.00
*All include gauge.

Brass hose barb adapters are supplied on all outlet assemblies, together with galvanized steel fittings and 2' of heat-resistant flexible hose, clamps and a hose barb fitting for 5/8" hose.
ZBN54
LPg30
Am5PR-g
Accessories/Cabinets
Aeration
49
Repair Kit / Vane Set
Compressor Comparison
Compressor Type Hp
1/8 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Phase
Voltage 60/50 Hz
Max psi
5 psi 60/50 Hz
10 psi 60/50 Hz
15 psi
20 psi
25 psi
30 psi
Ship Wt (lbs)
FB109D AQ101 AQ201 AQ401 AQ501 AQ3-2 AQ5 AQ5-2* AQ7 AQ73 AQ9 AQ93 AQ21 AQ23 AQ31-2 AQ33 AQ61 AQ63
Diaphragm Rocking Piston Rocking Piston Rocking Piston Rocking Piston Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane Rotary Vane
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
115V, 60 Hz 115V, 60 Hz 115V, 60 Hz 115/230V, 60 Hz 115/230V, 60 Hz 115230V / 100240V 115230V / 100240V 115230V / 100240V 115230V / 100240V 208440V / 208440V 115230V / 100240V 208440V / 208440V 230V, 60 Hz 208/230/460V, 60 Hz 230V, 60 Hz 208/230/460V, 60 Hz 208/230/460V, 50/60 Hz 208/230/460V, 50/60 Hz
20 20 20 20 30 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 8 8 10 10 10 10
1.85 3.3 4.75 4.4 4.0/3.5 7.2/6.2 7.5/6.0 9.5/7.8 9.5/7.8 11.8/10.2 11.8/10.2 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 53 53
1.5 1.8 3.2 4.6 4.2 3.6/3.0 6.8/5.7 6.8/5.5 8.8/7.6 8.8/7.6 10.1/8.8 10.1/8.8 17.9 17.9 50.5 50.5
1.7 3 4.5 4.1 6.2 6.2
1.6 2.9 4.2 4
3.9
3.8
17 19 21 17 17 34 53 58 53 60 62 62 90 85 95 90 175 155
AF109RK AQ101RK AQ201RK-2 AQ401RK AQ501RK sl3mk sl5MK sl5MK sl5MK sl5MK sl9MK sl9MK AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ6V AQ6V
1 1 11/2 11/2 2 2 5 5
Standard frequency in the US is 60 Hz. *High-efficiency, energy-saving model.
Replacement Vane Reference List

Compressor Model Vane Set Compressor Model Vane Set Compressor Model Vane Set
Compressor Cabinets
Invented Here
Soundproofing included with all cabinets.

The most durable cabinets in the industry. These heavy steel cabinets are almost 1/8" thick and virtually vandalproof. They're equipped with cooling fan(s), soundproofing, electric receptacles, built-in locks and bottom outlet holes (air compressors and valve outlets not included). The sound level is typically below 55 dB at 10' and inaudible at 50'. Add "-230" for cabinets with 230V receptacles. CABS2 ships Ground, others ship by motor freight.
0522 0522q 0523 0822 0822q 0822hp 0822hpq 0823 0823hp

cabl
af109c aq3v aq3v ab992b aq5v ab992b aq5v aq5v aq5v
1022 1022Q 1022Q3 1023 AQ3 AQ5 AQ7 AQ73 AQ9
AB992B AQ5V AQ5V AQ5V AQ3V AQ5V AQ5V AQ5V AQ9V

cabxl
AQ93 AQ20 AQ21 AQ23 AQ31 AQ33 AQ60 AQ61
AQ9V AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ6V AQ6V
CABS2
Protects one compressor up to 1 hp with up to 6 diffusers. One cooling fan. 24" x 15" x 16" H. Weighs 70 lbs.
CABL
Protects two vane compressors up to 1 hp each. 8 diffuser outlets. One cooling fan. 24" x 24" x 18" H. Weighs 105 lbs.
CABXL
Protects up to four vane compressors up to 1 hp. 16 diffuser outlets. Three cooling fans. 44" x 24" x 22" H. Weighs 245 lbs. CABS2 CABL CABXL CF1 CF2 CF3* CF4* PAD24 PAD36 PAD3648-3

cf1/cf2
24" x 15" x 16" H Cabinet 24" x 24" x 18" H Cabinet 44" x 24" x 22" H Cabinet 115V, Replacement Fan 230V, Replacement Fan 115V, Replacement Fan 230V, Replacement Fan 24" x 24" x 2" Equipment Pad 24" x 36" x 2" Equipment Pad 36" x 48" x 3" Equipment Pad
Ship Wt
70 lbs 120 lbs 205 lbs 6 lbs 6 lbs 4 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 8 lbs 10 lbs
$ 729.00 917.00 2,087.00 119.45 130.00 61.55 72.73 52.85 71.00 161.00
*CF3 and CF4 are newer style fans sold from February 1996 on.
cabs2 cf3/cf4
Compare picture with your fan to ensure you order the correct style.
50
Aeration
Compressors/Accessories
Vane Compressors, 11/2 and 2 hp

aq20
This oilless vane compressor can be powered by an electric motor (as shown) or by belts and pulleys. The vane life is 9 to 18 months, depending on rpm and pressure. The shaft is 7/8" diameter, 41/2" H and rotates counter clockwise (facing shaft). Operating range is 8001,800 rpm. Motor horsepower depends on rpm and pressure. All vane compressors are equipped with an inlet muffler and 1" NPT ports. Motors listed are 1,725 rpm ODP, but others are available. Power cords are not included. These vane compressors are guaranteed for one year (not including vanes [AQ2V ] or filters [AQ14]). Three-phase vane compressors ship with the motor coupling removed. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
AQ20 AQ21* AQ23* AQ31-2* AQ33*
aq21 Vane Part No. Motor 5 psi
Compressor Head Only Compressor, 11/2 hp Compressor, 11/2 hp Compressor, 2 hp Compressor, 2 hp
AQ2V AQ2V AQ2V AQ5V AQ5V
None 1-Ph, 230V, 60 Hz 3-Ph, 208/230/460V, 60 Hz 1-Ph, 230V, 60 Hz 3-Ph, 208/230/460V, 60 Hz
19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5
Cfm @ 1,725 rpm 10 psi Max psi
17.9 17.9 17.9
15 15 15 15 15
Running Amps @ 8 psi (230V, 60 Hz)
8.5 4.5 7.6 5.5
50 lbs $ 813.27 50+40 lbs 1,151.85 50+35 lbs 1,140.00 50+45 lbs 1,370.97 50+40 lbs 1,115.38
Ship Wt
*Compressors with motors shipped in two boxes when shipping Ground.
3-Phase Equipment
Vane Compressors, 5 hp
This oilless vane compressor can be powered by an electric motor (as shown) or by belts and pulleys. The vane life is 9 to 18 months, depending on rpm and pressure. The shaft is 7/8" diameter, 41/2" H and rotates counter clockwise (facing shaft). Operating range is 8001,800 rpm. Motor horsepower depends on rpm and pressure. All vane compressors are equipped with an inlet muffler and 1" NPT ports. Motors listed are 1,725 rpm ODP, but others are available. Power cords are not included. These vane compressors are guaranteed for one year (not including vanes [AQ6V ] or filters [AQ15]). AQ60 is a compressor, jar-type filter and coupling only with base not included. Three-phase vane compressors ship with the motor coupling removed. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
aq60
AQ60 Compressor Head Only AQ61 Compressor, 5 hp AQ63 Compressor, 5 hp
Vane Part No. Motor 5 psi
AQ6V AQ6V AQ6V
None 1-Ph, 208/230/460V, 50/60 Hz 3-Ph, 208/230/460V, 50/60 Hz
53 53 53
Cfm @ 1,725 rpm 10 psi Max psi
50.5 50.5 50.5
10 10 10
Running Amps @ 8 psi (230V, 60 Hz)
26.0 16.3
Ship Wt
90 lbs $ 1,735.17 175 lbs 2,523.56 155 lbs 2,198.77
Accessories for 11/2 to 5 hp Compressors

AOVL1PR2* AOVL2PR2* AOVL3PR2* AOVL4PR2* AOVL5PR2 AQ2V AQ6V AQ14 AQ15 AQ17 AQ18 ICV2 ICV3 AQ13 AQ255** AE586 AE593 Single-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Two-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Three-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Four-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Five-Valve Outlet w/Pressure Relief Vane Set for AQ20 33 Vane Set for AQ60 63 Filter Element for AQ20 33 Filter Element for AQ60 63 Muffler Assembly for AQ20 33 Muffler Assembly for AQ60 63 Inlet Check Valve Assembly for AQ20 33 Inlet Check Valve Assembly for AQ60 63 Pressure Relief, 3/4" NPT (11/2 to 5 hp) Flushing Solvent, 16-oz Aerosol Rubber Coupler for AQ20 33 Rubber Coupler for AQ60 63 2 lbs 5 lbs 7 lbs 9 lbs 11 lbs 1 lbs 2 lbs 1 lbs 1 lbs 2 lbs 4 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 1 lbs 1 lbs 1 lbs 2 lbs $ 124.80 186.90 220.00 246.44 271.56 171.60 395.14 12.00 13.12 61.60 112.00 21.52 24.37 59.95 30.70 32.84 103.58
Rocking Piston Air Compressors by Sweetwater

Sweetwater continuous-duty oil-free rocking piston air compressors are the highest performing piston compressors available. They are the perfect choice for aerating small ponds or deep water applications. They come equipped with noise reducing intake air filter, pressure relief valve, 6-foot power cord and thermal overload protection. 1/3 hp, 20 psi max continuous duty, 1/4 FNPT outlets. AQ101 and AQ201 are 115V/60 Hz only, AQ401 is 115/230V, 60 Hz. AQ201 has dual outlets. Clean air filters quarterly and replace the piston cup and valves (included in repair kit) every two years. Optional outlet hose assembly is 2 feet long with brass 5/8" barb (compatible with 1/2" nominal tubing); two are required for the AQ201. One-year warranty on compressors. See DA1b or DA2b for complete pond aeration systems.

*Use with AQ20 AQ33 units only. **Ships HazMat Air.

aq13
AQ101 AQ201 AQ401 AQ101RK AQ201RK-2 HA109
1.6 cfm @ 20 psi, 4.4 FLA 14 lbs $ 319.56 2.9 cfm @ 20 psi, 5.3 FLA 18 lbs 428.08 4.2 cfm @ 20 psi, 5.4 FLA (115V), 2.7 FLA (230V) 20 lbs 530.00 Repair Kit for AQ101 128.27 Repair Kit for AQ201 112.36 Optional Outlet Hose 13.54
Ship Wt
aq18
aq101
aq201
Paddle Wheels
Aeration
51
Paddle Wheel Aerators, for Aquaculture & Waste Water

One-year warranty.
Excellent oxygen transfer and circulation. Asian-made paddle wheels have become the most popular, even in North America, because of their low cost. But be careful, they are not all the same. Gear reducers, motors, bearings, paddles and seals are all problematic components. The availability of repair parts, warranty replacements and efficiency ratings must be considered over low price! We offer only high-quality, Taiwanese-made paddle wheels featuring high-efficiency TEFC motors and the high-quality gear reducer to ensure a long service life. The entire unit, including gear reducer and motor, has a one-year warranty. The frame, drive shafts and hardware are 304 stainless steelall compatible with salt water. The SAE is approximately 4.1 on all models. Power cable not included; see Index. Other features include fiber-reinforced nylon paddles (8 blade) and one-piece, molded, polyethylene floats. We will be happy to provide quotations for larger quantities shipped directly to you from the factory. 50-Hz models are available in quantity by special order. Note: Warranty requires the gear oil be changed after the first 3 months. Ships motor freight only. PW11 PW21 PW23 PW333 PW11M PW21M PW23M PW33M PW11G PW33G G90 PW23-5 PW23-3 PW11-5 PW23-8
aes Running Amps Ship Wt (Lbs)
3-Phase Equipment
1 hp, 1, 115/230V, 60 Hz 1,450 8.0 400 2 hp, 1, 230V, 60 Hz 2,900 13.0 430 2,900 6/3 430 2 hp, 3, 230/460V, 60 Hz 3 hp, 3, 230/460V, 60 Hz 4,350 9/4.5 460 Replacement Motor, 1 hp, 1 132 Replacement Motor, 2 hp, 1 143 Replacement Motor, 2 hp, 3 143 Replacement Motor, 3 hp, 3 152 Replacement Gear Box, 1 & 2 hp 47 Replacement Gear Box, 3 hp 53 SAE 90 Gear Oil, 1 gallon 12 Pillow Block (Fits All) Motor Cover (Fits All) Paddle Wheel (Fits All) Float (Fits All)
$ 911.42 1,040.00 945.45 2,666.67 472.73 492.63 463.44 314.00 245.82 273.00 17.98 11.50 24.83 50.98 57.20
4.1 SA E
PW11
The AIRE-O2 Series II Aerator

For aeration and circulation.
FD
The AIRE-O2 is the original aspirating aerator first developed over 25 years ago. The AIRE-O2 Series II is a surface mounted, electric motor-driven, adjustable, aspirating aerator. It is lightweight and portable and can be adjusted from 25 to 45 degrees to optimize mixing and oxygen dispersion for various depths and applications. The design features floatation built to withstand harsh conditions. It consists of a pontoon made of molded polyethylene with a UVinhibitor. The shaft housing is nonmetallic, noncorroding and flanged for mounting to the aerator. It forms a guard around the 316 stainless steel hollow shaft and supports a field replaceable, water-lubricated bearing press-fitted into the housing's lower end. The propeller/diffusercan be replaced easily in the field. The motor is a premium quality USA motor designed for tough environments and years of trouble-free operation. It is totally enclosed and fan-cooled with a service factor of 1.15. The motor is connected to a hollow shaft within a protective housing that is angled into the water. The shaft is connected to and drives a propeller/diffuser that draws air through intake holes above the water surface and down through the propeller/diffuser. The AIRE-O2 system distributes and mixes oxygen throughout the pond, producing bubbles smaller than 2.2 mm in diameter. Each aerator arrives fully assembled, ready for attachment to the floatation assembly. Two- and three-hp models are available in various voltage and phase options, including 50 Hz. Larger hp models are also available for export. Order underwater power cable below (not included). See Index for mooring cable (not included). Ships by motor freight from factory. Weighs approximately 70 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. 5101197 5101226 5101198 5101227
Motor View from underwater. Aquaculture farm in Hawaii.
2.02.2 lbs/O2 /hr SAE
2 hp 2 hp 3 hp 3 hp
230/460, 60 Hz 208/230, 60 Hz 230/460, 60 Hz 208/230, 60 Hz
Volts
Phase(s)
3 1 3 1
$ 1,054.29 1,167.14 1,131.43 1,235.71
All models are salt water compatible.
52
Aeration
Pond Aeration/Tech Talks
Pond Aeration Systems

Perfect for large koi ponds.
This is the best way to aerate a pond! It is the most economical, energy-efficient way to circulate, destratify and aerate because so much water is moved by so little energy. And there is no noise or electricity in the water. You can read about the method in Tech Talk 101. These aeration systems use UL-listed, all-weather linear compressors that deliver air via easy-to-install self-weighted tubing to the diffuser assembly. Systems are complete with the appropriate couplings, valves (on larger system), self-weighted tubing (dark blue for low visibility) and diffuser(s). Just drop the tubing and diffuser in the water and plug into a 115V power source. The small system will provide oxygen for up to 100 lbs of fish (when diffuser is at a 48" water depth; less fish weight at a shallower depth) and circulate water in ponds of up to 8,000 gallons while using only 50 watts! The compressors and air diffusers have two-year warranties. See Index for poly tubing (use part no. P200) in order to pipe air up to 1,000' from the compressor in place of running electricity to the pond. KPA3 Small System KPA4 Large System
Max Diffuser Depth
Tech Talk 5
"Why Watts"
You know how you can tell what people know by the questions they ask? Well, we know that most people don't know about watts. They ask, "How many amps does this motor use?" instead of, "How many watts does this motor use?" Watts are what you pay for, not amps; amps are used to size wire, breakers, etc. The direct current formula we all learned (volts x amps = watts) is correct for incandescent light bulbs and electric heaters, but it is not correct for motors. When dealing with power loads that involve inductance magnetic devices such as motor windings, solenoids, transformers, lamp ballasts, etc., the formula for single-phase loads is volts x amps x power factor = watts. In many cases, especially with linear air compressors and mag drive pumps, the actual watts used are significantly less than what is calculated by multiplying volts x amps. The only way to determine the watt consumption is to test it using a wattmeter (such as our KW4). In the AES catalog, we have published the actual watts for most of our motor-driven devices as tested in-house in our RDTE shop with our test equipment.
8 ft 10 ft
Watts
50 90
Lbs of fish
100 200
Diffuser Assemblies
1 2
Weighted Tubing
25' 50'
$ 459.38 692.73
Price
Solar Aeration Systems

KPA3
Solar-powered aeration systems utilize the sun's energy to add oxygen to your pond. It's an environmentally friendly way to take care of your pond and save money on electricity! The solar panels convert photons from sunlight into usable energy, which is then stored in a battery and used to power a highly efficient air compressor. Systems can be retrofitted to power LED pond or landscaping lights, small decorative fountains and 12V water pumps. All systems include photovoltaic solar panel(s); industrial battery(s) enclosed in a weatherproof, ventilated steel cabinet; linear air compressor; bottom-mounted air diffuser assemblies; tubing; and stainless steel clamps. SPAK and SPAS include 100' of 3/8" tubing; SPAM and SPAL include 200' of 5/8" and 50' of 3/4" self-weighted tubing. SPAK SPAS SPAM SPAL
Panels
1 2 2 4
Batteries
1 2 2 4
kW
1/2
1 1 2
$ 3,034.18 4,311.55 4,854.55 8,097.73
Tech Talk 35
How much oxygen will aeration devices deliver?
None at all if the oxygen level in your water is at saturation!
Many commercially made aerators have been tested for their standard oxygen transfer rate, but that much oxygen can almost never be expected. Because the rate of oxygen transfer is concentration- and temperature-dependent, an aerator will only provide its measured (advertised maximum) oxygen transfer rate when the oxygen level in the water is close to zero. Use this chart to estimate the oxygen transfer an aerator will give when there is already oxygen in the water. Example: if the water temperature is 68F and the oxygen level is 5 mg/L, an aerator that is rated at 3 lbs of oxygen per hour will really only provide under 1.3 lbs per hour (3 lbs x 41% = 1.23 lbs).
Actual Oxygen Transfer Rate As a Percentage of the Maximum Advertised Transfer Rate* 59f (15C) 68f (20C) 77f (25C) 86f (30C) SPAS
D.O. Level in Water Being Aerated 50f (10C)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
89% 82% 75% 67% 58% 52% 41% 34% 25% 17% 9%
90% 82% 73% 64% 55% 46% 36% 27% 17% 8% 0
91% 82% 72% 62% 51% 41% 30% 19% 8% 0 0
92% 82% 72% 58% 47% 35% 24% 10% 2% 0 0
96% 82% 67% 56% 44% 31% 17% 3% 0 0 0
As always, AES customer service remains the most exemplary of ANY company that I have ever dealt with. I have the misfortune of running into many people from various supply companies that view it almost as an inconvenience to help with tech information, shipping quotes or just plain old advice. That is not an issue with AESnever has been and I am sure never will be. Richard Masse replied within a very brief time, answered my question and provided me with more information than I could have ever dreamed. If all of your employees follow his lead, one can see why this is a fantastic company! With deepest gratitude,
*These percentages are approximate for fresh water at sea level.
Michael H. Comet
Surface Aerators
Aeration
53
Surface Aerators by Kasco

Kasco aerators are ideal for aquaculture and wastewater applications. They are lightweight, easy to install, simple to operate and backed by a two-year warranty. Made in USA and you won't find them for less than at AES!

High oxygen transfer at an affordable price. Water circulation with little or no bottom turbulence. Portable for fast response to emergencies. E xcellent shallow water operation. Ideal for supplemental aeration. Salt water compatible and fitted with a zinc anode. SAE rating of 3.0. Two mooring ropes, 50' each, are included.
Shown during testing at Aquatic Eco-Systems' R&D facility.
Call an AES technician for help with sizing aeration devices (407-598-1401). Kasco motors are specially designed, energy-efficient, permanent-split capacitor type, continuous duty and single-phase with automatic reset, thermal overload protection. They are fitted in an oil-filled, stainless steel housing with a stainless steel prop guard. ETL-approved to UL and CSA standards.
Dock Mount Kit (KD)
Easy to install just drop it in!
KA501-50 KA501-100 KA501-150 KA501-200 KA751-50 KA751-100 KA751-150 KA751-200 KA752-50 KA752-100 KA752-150 KA752-200 KA101-50 KA101-100 KA101-150 KA101-200 KA102-50 KA102-100 KA102-150 KA102-200 KA202-50 KA202-100 KA202-150 KA202-200 KA303-50 KA303-100 KA303-150 KA303-200 KD KM501-50 KM751-50 KM752-50 KM202-50 KZA KPROP12 KPROP34 KPROP2 KF34 KF2 RC-15
aes hp w/50' Cord 600 hp w/100' Cord 600 hp w/150' Cord 600 hp w/200' Cord 600 3/4 hp w/50' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/100' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/150' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/200' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/50' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/100' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/150' Cord 800 3/4 hp w/200' Cord 800 1 hp w/50' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/100' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/150' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/200' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/50' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/100' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/150' Cord 1,100 1 hp w/200' Cord 1,100 2 hp w/50' Cord 2,100 2 hp w/100' Cord 2,100 2 hp w/150' Cord 2,100 2 hp w/200' Cord 2,100 3 hp w/50' Cord 3,200 3 hp w/100' Cord 3,200 3 hp w/150' Cord 3,200 3 hp w/200' Cord 3,200 Dock Mount Kit, (1" Dia. Steel Pipe Not Included) Motor Only, 1/2 hp w/50' Cord Motor Only, 3/4 hp w/50' Cord Motor Only, 3/4 hp w/50' Cord Motor Only, 2 hp w/50' Cord Repl. Zinc Anode, Fits All Models Repl. Prop for 1/2 hp Repl. Prop for 3/4 hp Repl. Prop for 2 hp Repl. Float for 1/2 and 3/4 hp Repl. Float for 2 hp Aerator Timer Control w/GFCI
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
Running Amps
5 5 5 5 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 11.3 11.3 11.3 11.3 5.7 5.7 5.7 5.7 9 9 9 9 10.7 10.7 10.7 10.7 5 6.7 3.3 10
Voltage
115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 230 230 230 230 115 115 115 115 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 115 115 230 230 115
32+30* lbs 38+30* lbs 27+24+30* lbs 27+30+30* lbs 40+30* lbs 45+30* lbs 36+24+30* lbs 36+30+30* lbs 40+30* lbs 45+30* lbs 36+30+30* lbs 36+38+30* lbs 45+55* lbs 38+17+55* lbs 38+38+55* lbs 38+49+55* lbs 45+55* lbs 38+20+55* lbs 38+32+55* lbs 38+55+55* lbs 56+55* lbs 53+20+55* lbs 53+35+55* lbs 53+42+55* lbs 76+60* lbs 70+17+60* lbs 70+34+60* lbs 70+53+60* lbs 22 lbs 22 lbs 33 lbs 33 lbs 46 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 23 lbs 49 lbs 2 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 702.00 799.00 1,123.00 1,180.00 778.00 875.00 1,186.00 1,256.00 808.00 877.00 1,183.00 1,255.00 1,114.00 1,366.00 1,850.00 2,032.00 1,127.00 1,188.00 1,482.00 1,326.00 1,797.00 2,007.00 2,173.00 2,266.00 2,102.00 2,390.00 2,477.00 2,681.00 200.00 629.00 714.00 747.00 1,455.00 14.92 26.81 27.50 164.00 250.00 809.00 235.00
*Aerators ship Ground in multiple boxes.
54
Aeration
Surface Aerators/Tech Talk
Dual-Prop Surface Aerators by Power House

The dual-prop aerators provide high oxygen transfer with low energy consumption. They are built with solid bronze end bells and foam-filled ABS floats (white is standard, black is available by special order). 115V or 230V, 60 Hz (50 Hz also available). One-year limited warranty. Made in USA. Aerators ship in 2 boxes. Float ships Oversize at 30-lb rate (two can ship for price of one).
Tech Talk 4
Choosing an Aerator
Efficiency Versus Type ... Select the right type of aerator for the application.
An aerator's standard aeration efficiency (SAE) is an important consideration when comparing one aerator with another.
CompleteAerators With Floats

DP34 DP34C DP35 DP35C DP01 DP01C DP02 DP02C
aes
115V, 50' Cord 115V, 100' Cord 230V, 50' Cord 230V, 100' Cord 1-hp, 115V, 50' Cord 1-hp, 115V, 100' Cord 1-hp, 230V, 50' Cord 1-hp, 230V, 100' Cord
3/4-hp, 3/4-hp, 3/4-hp, 3/4-hp,
800 800 800 800 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
Amp Draws
9.0 9.0 4.8 4.8 7.0 7.0 3.5 3.5
45+30 lbs 50+30 lbs 45+30 lbs 50+30 lbs 45+30 lbs 50+30 lbs 45+30 lbs 50+30 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 1,089.00 1,150.00 1,089.00 1,150.00 1,151.00 1,211.00 1,151.00 1,211.00
The SAE can be calculated by measuring the aerator's oxygen transfer and the amount of energy used per horsepower, per hour, under standard conditions. An SAE of 2.1, for example, means that 2.1 lbs of oxygen per horsepower, per hour, are transferred to the water under standard conditions. The higher the SAE, the higher the oxygen transfer, the higher the efficiency. However, SAE numbers are a fair comparison only when comparing aeration equipment of the same exact type. You cannot use the SAE as your only tool in the selection of an aeration system. Before looking at the SAE numbers, choose the right type aerator or oxygenator for the job.
Dual-Prop Motor Assembly & Cord Only

DP34M DP34MC DP35M DP35MC DP01M DP01MC DP02M DP02MC DPC1 DPC2 DPC3 DPC4 DPF DPROP1 DPROP2

115V, 50' Cord 45 lbs 115V, 100' Cord 50 lbs 230V, 50' Cord 45 lbs 3/4-hp, 230V, 100' Cord 50 lbs 1-hp, 115V, 50' Cord 45 lbs 1-hp, 115V, 100' Cord 50 lbs 1-hp, 230V, 50' Cord 45 lbs 1-hp, 230V, 100' Cord 50 lbs 50' Replacement Cord, 115V 5 lbs 50' Replacement Cord, 230V 5 lbs 100' Replacement Cord, 115V 10 lbs 100' Replacement Cord, 230V 10 lbs Float Only, Replacement (Black) 30 lbs Upper Propeller Lower Propeller
3/4-hp, 3/4-hp, 3/4-hp,
Ship Wt
Here are some examples (analyze the differences):

$ 671.00 731.00 671.00 731.00 730.00 790.000 730.00 790.00 92.75 92.75 170.00 170.00 267.00 24.50 24.75
A surface aerator like our Kasco 3/4 hp (with an SAE rating of 2.9) may be a good choice where the volume of water is small and the stocking density is high, such as in a culture tank or small pond. It may be a poor choice, however, if cold water temperatures are required when air temperatures are warm (summer trout culture), because both the motor and the airborne water droplets will add unwanted heat. surface aerator would be a poor choice for a large or deep pond. Without A moving water away from the aerator, it will continue to pump the same water over and over again, adding no oxygen where it is needed. surface aerator may be excellent in emergencies because it quickly raises A the oxygen level in a small area. If trained, the fish will move to that location. Again, it will not be a good choice for full-time aeration because it will not disperse oxygen throughout the pond. diffused air system (with an SAE rating of 2.7) may be the best choice A for multiple tanks and ponds because the energy source (blower) can be centralized and just the right amount of energy (compressed air) can be easily directed where it is needed. What appears to be lower SAE efficiency (2.7) is more than offset by comparative application efficiency. Water-moving aeration devices like the AIRE-02 Series II aerator and paddle wheel type aerators are excellent choices for medium and large ponds where movement of oxygenated water away from the aerator is most important. If destratification alone will solve a bottom oxygen problem, only a few air diffusers may be needed to accomplish this. For instance, a 10-acre lake, 15' deep, may need only 3/4 hp. Only 1 cfm of air may be needed to aerate a 1/20 -acre pool when raising tropical fish, compared to 6 cfm per pool using airlifts. destratification system, such as our Great Lakes aeration system, should A not be used as an emergency aerator because it very quickly mixes the water. Its rate of oxygen transfer is excellent; however, it cannot raise the oxygen level of such a large volume quickly enough to avoid a fishkill. It can actually aggravate the problem. ven noise is a consideration above and below the water surface. AES E diffused air systems are preferred over agitators in bait stores, improving conditions for both the fish and the employees. As more of our research is conducted under water, we are increasingly aware of underwater noise produced by devices such as paddle wheels, agitators, airlifts and drilled pipe spargers (our Sweetwater air diffusers have a barely audible hiss). Some fish breeders have reported that diffused air is the only aeration method they can use that will not disrupt breeding.
UL- andCE-listed.
DP35
DP35 Float
Close-Up of Motor
aes This is the pounds of fish supported. See Tech Talk 84.
The situations and considerations are virtually endless, so take some time to research the best aeration method for your particular application. Through a phone call, you can discuss your application with an AES aquaculture technician and get an expert opinion (407-598-1401).
Standard aeration efficiency tests conducted at Auburn University showed that the AES Sweetwater diffuser and 1-hp blower combination yielded a 2.71 SAE. Prior to rating our diffusers, Auburn gave air diffusers in general an SAE rating of only 1.6. That 70% increase illustrates how much efficiency can change when the right combination is used.
Oxygen/Fish Transport/Tech Talk
Aeration
55
Tech Talk 82
Blowers, Air Pumps or Compressors
Blowers
Blowers are designed to provide large volumes of air at low pressure (under 4 psi). They are commonly used in conjunction with air diffusers and airlifts. This combination adds oxygen and removes carbon dioxide with low power consumption. Typical applications include recirculating fish tank and aquarium systems, bait fish and lobster holding facilities and shallow pond aeration. Regenerative blowers are preferred in the aquaculture industry because they are the most reliable and economical in this pressure range.
DC Air Pumps
TF
4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 Flowrate (CFM) 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 .5 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pressure (PSI)
DC 126 0 DC 124 0
Perfect for use with solar power.

These commercial-grade DC air compressors offer superb performance and durability. Typical applications include live fish transport on trucks or fishing boats; however, they can also be used in emergency situations. Their simple design makes them easy to maintain and repair (oilless, easily accessible brushes and diaphragm). Pigtail wires and 3/4" 90 ell are included; DC1220 and DC1230 include car lighter plug but do not include ell. Models that include cases do not require additional housing for outdoor use. One-year warranty. 1 Lpm = .035 cfm DC1220 DC1230 DC1240 DC1260 DC1280 DC12100 DC24120 20 Lpm w/o Case 30 Lpm w/o Case 40 Lpm w/Plastic Case 60 Lpm w/Plastic Case 80 Lpm w/Steel Case 100 Lpm w/Steel Case 120 Lpm w/Steel Case
DC12100
DC24120
DC 12 DC 100 128 0
Compressors
Sweetwater oilless rotary vane and piston compressors are used in applications where water depths are greater, such as with lake aeration, algae culture and lobster pounds. These compressors allow air lines to be run thousands of feet when electricity is not near the water. A compressor with as little as 3/4 hp can be used to aerate and destratify a 10-acre lake. Compressors used for aquaculture should always be "oilless."
DC 12 20
DC1
230
Wire Max Ship Wt Voltage Length cfm (lbs)
Air Pumps
Fractional horsepower Sweetwater Linear Piston Air Pumps fill the gap between aquarium air pumps and blowers. These units supply up to 4 cfm at depths to 8 feet. Air pumps provide long service life, very quiet operation and very low energy use. They are a perfect fit for koi ponds, bait shop tanks, classrooms, laboratories, etc.
12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 24V
6' 6' 9" 9" 12" 12" 12"
.6 .9 1.6 2.4 3.2 3.5 4
13 13 23 23 30 30 30
$ 172 185 248 272 343 368 394
Each
155 167 224 245 309 332 355
3+
System Sizing
To size a system, first determine the pressure required. Enough pressure is needed to overcome the water pressure at the diffuser's depth, the piping friction loss and the diffuser's resistance to airflow. Example: For a water depth of 36", a low-restriction piping system of 4" of water and a low-resistance air diffuser of 10" of water (just prior to cleaning) will require an air pressure of at least 50" of water (36" + 4" + 10"). This is equal to about 2 psi. The next consideration is the volume of air needed to accomplish the job. If there is only one fish room, one linear air pump compressor with an additional one for emergency back up may be sufficient. In a larger facility, two or more primary blowers or compressors and one emergency back up may be required. When using low-pressure air, it's important that the air piping system and diffusers offer little resistance to air flow (request our bulletin "Air Distribution Systems for Sweetwater Blowers"). Performance charts and tables are available for all of our blowers and compressors. Selecting the right system for your application is accomplished simply by comparing your pressure and airfl ow requirements with manufacturer's performance charts. If you need help, call an AES technician at 407-598-1401.
DC1240
DC1280 DC24120
DC1260 DC1220
Fish-Flo2 Oxygenation Systems

The best for live wells and fish transport.
Now you can oxygenate on board with the same method that the professionals use. Simply mount the special, ultra-fine-pore diffuser in your hauling tank or boat live well, then set the selector knob on the regulator for the estimated number of lbs of fish you have. It's that easy! Choose from 12 settings, between 5 lbs and 40 lbs of fish (1/32 to 8 liters per minute). The system includes the nickel-plated oxygen regulator, aluminum oxygen cylinder (rated to 2,216 psi, shipped empty), 7' of oxygen tubing, and an ultra-fine-pore bubble diffuser (6" x 1"). Ship weight 13 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. S100 S101 6 cu.ft./170 liters 24 cu.ft./680 liters
Tank Size Bottle Dimensions S100
Oxygen Bottle Adapter

With this transfiller adapter, you can refill the above oxygen cylinders from a larger one. Adapter has a 36" flexible connecting hose, pressure gauge and instructions. Maximum working pressure is 3,000 psi. For use with CGA 540 inlet valves. BA100 $ 354
3.2" Dia. x 12" 4.5" Dia. x 25.5"
$ 515 558 Invented Here
12V Hauling Tank Aeration Systems
Fish-Flo2 Oxygen Regulator

No oxygen meter? No problem!
Just dial the pounds of fish in your tank and the regulator automatically feeds the correct amount of oxygen to your diffuser. Choose from 12 settings between 5 lbs and 40 lbs of fish. This nickel-plated brass regulator is designed for use in harsh marine environments. For use with CGA 540 inlet valve cylinders, not intended for medical use. Regulator has 1/4" barb fitting outlet. Ship weight is 2 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. FF100 $ 264.60
How about those anxious drives with live fish in the back of the truck? Will they or won't they be swimming when you reach your final destination? The HTA1-2 aeration system will provide enough aeration for up to 200 lbs of warmwater baitfish at a water depth of 48" (100 lbs at 24" water depth) and double that for the HTA2-2. Built around a 12VDC compressor, these complete packages include diffuser manifolds, tubing and appropriate fittings to get you running immediately. One-year warranty. Battery not included. Made in USA. HTA1-2 HTA2-2
fish Capacity
200 lbs 400 lbs
Ship Wt
18 lbs 28 lbs
$ 401 765
HTA2-2
56
Agitators
Aeration
Baitfish/Hauling/Tech Talk
Bait Aeration System, Small
Invented Here
We offer both the traditional agitators and the bubble aspirator style. Each has a high-impact nylon basket and continuous-duty motor. A5 This heavy-duty 12VDC agitator draws 5 amps and is often used on hauling trucks by installing it in a 4" hole in the tank top. A shaft spinner on the top shows the driver it's working. The A5 is also available in the bubble aspirating style (A6). A7 This 115V AC (60 Hz) agitator is normally suspended above the water by its hanging ring. It's a heavy-duty unit with automatic thermal overload protection and an 8' power cord. A9 uses the same motor but is the aspirator style. Use of a GFCI is recommended with 115V units. One-year warranty. Made in USA. A5 A6 A7 A9

For use in bait shops or home bait holding systems. Ready-to-install system includes a quiet air compressor, 6-valve control manifold, flexible tubing and 6 air diffusers (AS2). System is for use in multiple small tanks or a single tank with separate compartments. Each air diffuser will support approximately 1 lb of minnows. Compressor is rated for outdoor use but is not UL-listed. 115V/60 Hz. Pump has six-month warranty. CBS4 $ 143.48
Agitator Aspirator Agitator Aspirator
Power Amp Draw "H" Lbs of Fish Ship Wt
12V 12V 115V 115V
5.0 4.0 1.5 1.5
9" 15" 9" 143/4"
90 50 90 45
$ 186.67 173.98 240.00 224.09 186.67 173.98 240.00 224.09
Each
3+
a5
a7
Find bait tank water conditioners on p. 129.
Bait Tank Aeration System
Invented Here
Imagine walking into your bait shop and not hearing the splashing sound of the agitators. Bait store owners are discovering what aquarium shops and fish farmers have already learned: it's much better and quieter to use air than to use agitators!
H H
The only thing in the water is an air diffuser and a flexible 1/4" air supply line. PVC plumbing is overhead or along the tank wall and air is supplied by a single, quiet Sweetwater linear air pump. We offer three complete, ready-to-install systems. All you supply is 1/2" PVC pipe. Each is designed to aerate 3 tanks (or compartments) with one diffuser in each. If divider screens are used, one diffuser per compartment is needed. Air flow to each diffuser is controlled with valves (included). A smaller, fourth diffuser on each system is used to aerate your customer's bait bucket while waiting. All have a one-year warranty. CBS10 Supports up to 10 lbs of minnows per diffuser (3" long). Air pump is for indoor use only. CBS20 Supports up to 20 lbs of minnows per diffuser (6" long). CBS3 Supports up to 30 lbs of fish per diffuser (9" long). CBS10 CBS20 CBS3
Ship Wt
Vertical Pump Aerators

These aerators have changed little in the last 25 years because they work so well! The patented design uses a propeller inside the lift tube, increasing the pumping efficiency. Low-restriction slots spray the lifted water, providing excellent aeration. Models V1 and V1S are 12VDC, 10-amp units that are very popular for live fish transport. V2S is a 115/230V single-phase, 60-Hz, salt water compatible model. Power cords are not included. Models V1S and V2S use a stainless steel bearing, tube, propeller and fasteners for salt water compatibility. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Pumping Ship Rate Power Tube Wt (gpm) (V) Amps Length (lbs) Each 3+
30-lb Bait System 60-lb Bait System 90-lb Bait System
16 lbs 23 lbs 30 lbs
$ 282.84 384.12 416.11
cbs10
V1 Aerator 75 12 10@12V 20" V1S Aerator (Saltwater) 75 12 10@12V 20" V2S Aerator (Saltwater) 115 115/230 3.2@115V 20"
17 $ 507.46 456.71 17 576.12 518.51 35 661.19 595.08
Tech Talk 8
Aspirators vs Agitators
Aspirators and agitators are the aeration devices most commonly used on hauling tanks when the stocking densities do not require the use of pure oxygen. Agitators use a small motor (normally 12V) to spin a paddle that is in the water. The paddle splashes the water, which adds oxygen and removes carbon dioxide. Aspirators also use a small motor, which spins a small venturi device. Air is pulled down through the shaft and exits the venturi underwater, causing a draft of bubbles. Agitators are the best choice for heavy stocking loads because they transfer more oxygen than aspirators. Aspirators are a good choice for smaller stocking densities, and they are much quieter than agitators.
Vertical pump aerators are ideal for hauling tanks.
v1
v2s
Baitfish/Hauling/Tech Talks
Aeration
57
KeepAlive Aerator
Ideal for salt water.
KA1
Economy Bait Bucket Aerator

This low-cost bait bucket aerator is handy when moving or holding small numbers of fish in a 5-gallon bucket. Like our other battery-powered compressors, it can also be used as an emergency air source during power interruptions. It operates on two D cell batteries (not included), includes air diffuser, tubing and clip-on attachment (case). Output is about .03 cfm at 12". Weighs 2 lbs. Thirty-day warranty. DC3 $ 8.95 8.06/12+
DC3
KeepAlive aerators are 12V, high-performance submersible units that provide a gentle delivery of air, ideal for delicate baits. They work best in salt water because they produce smaller bubbles. The 3 suction-cup feet keep them secured in a portable cooler or live well. Choose the KA1 for up to 10 lbs of bait or the KA5 for up to 50 lbs of bait. Both models include a 6' power cord with battery clips. 3-month warranty.
The unique air induction method creates a fine mist of bubbles.

KA1 KA5 10-lb System 50-lb System $ 49.95 71.95
Bait Bucket Aerator

This high-quality air pump is designed for 5-gallon buckets and insulated chests. Output is .03 cfm at 12"that's enough for 1/2 lb of minnows. Its low amp draw provides over 100 hours of operation on two alkaline D cell batteries (not included). This great little aerator comes with an air diffuser, 30" of tubing and a clip for attachment to a bucket. Six-month warranty. DC5 $ 27.45 25.60/12+
Floating Bait Aerator

Floating aerators will automatically adjust to a live well of any depth, making them very versatile for live wells, hauling tanks and bait buckets. The 12VDC pump mixes air with water to produce a gentle current of bubbles for aeration. The aerator pumps 360 gph, yet draws only 2 amps. Pump includes battery clips and cable (battery not included). Made in USA. FA3 $ 49.95 43.86/4+
Tech Talk 50
Aeration Requirements
Bait Tanks
It is best to hold and transport bait at lower water temperatures, if possible, and at a minimum of 6 ppm dissolved oxygen (D.O.) to minimize stress. The fish consume less oxygen when they are cold, and cold water holds more oxygen than warm water. Oxygen consumption rates of fish at 80F (27C) can be double those at 63F (17C). Twice the lbs of fish can be supported in 63F water than at 80F with the same aeration system. Note that aeration systems cannot bring D.O. concentrations above saturation (9.65 ppm at 63F). If the oxygen level were higher than saturation, an aeration system would drive oxygen out of the water, bringing it down to the saturation point.
How many lbs of fish will a bait aeration system support?

The following chart is based on test results with minnows in 63F (17C) fresh water. Note that the tests were done at two depthsone foot and two feetand that air induced at greater depths will result in greater oxygen transfer. However, low-pressure compressors give less air deeper in the water, resulting in less oxygen transfer. Air by itself (20.9% oxygen) cannot get the D.O. above the saturation point.
Our precious young aquaculturist demonstrates fish-handling skills.
KeepAlive Aerator
PPM Dissolved Oxygen to Be Maintained Test Depth
Lbs of fish
Tech Talk 85
Bait Counts Per Pound
To estimate the carrying capacity of a bait aeration system, approximate the total weight of fish based on length and body depth of species. The following numbers are based on the average condition factor of the fish. The carrying capacity of AES aerators is rated in lbs of fish. Small Fathead Large Fathead X-Large Fathead Small Shiner Large Shiner Rosy Large Rosy
Minnow
6 8 10 12
1 foot 2 feet 1 foot 2 feet 1 foot 2 feet 1 foot 2 feet
4.1 5.1 2.2 3.1 Not Possible Not Possible
Note: Reduce lbs of fish supported by 50% for a 18F (10C) increase in water temperature.
1.52.5" 23" 2.53.5" 1.53" 2.54" 1.52.5" 23.5"
Size
quantity Per Lb
2530 Dozen 1215 Dozen 912 Dozen 2530 Dozen 915 Dozen 2530 Dozen 1015 Dozen
58
Aeration
Article/Battery-Powered Pumps
can provide dissolved oxygen levels of 2550 mg/L depending on flow rate, cone size, temperature and pressure. Although cones can be designed to handle full flow in a recirculating system, they are more often plumbed in a side stream configuration by pumping out of a sump. A side stream setup minimizes flow requirements while still providing very high levels of dissolved oxygen or ozone.
Speece Cones Saturate Water With Oxygen, Ozone

by Gary Rogers, PhD, PE
Speece cones offer a very efficient method for increasing oxygen levels in water for aquaculture applications as well as zoo and aquarium exhibits. The oxygen cone concept was originally developed by Dr. Richard Speece at Vanderbilt University in Nashville, Tennessee, USA. Speece initially called his system a downflow bubble contact aeration apparatus, a device used to supersaturate water with oxygen. The complete system included an inverted funnel open at the bottom with a water pump at the top, a bubble diffuser located about middepth and a source of oxygen gas. The design has since been modified to an enclosed cone-shaped chamber. The early design of the cone was limited to the wildlife hydrostatic pressure as defined by the depth at which the funnel was placed in the water body. The newer enclosed cones can be used at higher pressures limited by the type of material used for construction. Cones have been designed using polyvinyl chloride, fiberglass or stainless steel materials.
Additional Components
In addition to the cone, a few other items are necessary for operation. These include: Pipe side flange fittings. Outlet holes for mounting pipe flange fittings are custom. Flanges can be either American or European standard sizes. Bleed valve. The bleed valve purges gas trapped inside the cone during the start-up procedure. Outlet valve. An outlet valve regulates the operating pressure within the cone. Pressure gauge. The pressure gauge monitors the pressure within the cone. In some cases, a venturi is used to introduce oxygen, although it is not necessary. The venturi injection method has the added benefit of improved oxygen dissolution in the water due to the turbulence created in the venturi. In addition, a venturi provides other advantages, including control of full flow line pressure, lower energy requirements for pumping and a limited space requirement.
Gas Transfer
The transfer of oxygen gas to the water follows Henry's Law, which is used to determine saturation concentrations of dissolved gases. According to Henry's Law, under steady-state conditions, the partial pressures of dissolved gases in water are in balance with the pressures of the same gases in the atmosphere above the water. When the pressure of the gases over water is decreased, the amount of dissolved gas also decreases. In addition, the saturation concentrations of those gases will vary depending on temperature, salinity and pressure. Higher pressure increases the amount of gas dissolved per unit volume, so the saturation concentration for a gas is higher at higher pressure or in deeper water. The inverse is the case for temperature and salinity. Water at higher temperature or salinity dissolves less gas per unit volume.
Ozone Applications
Speece cones are also very efficient at dissolving ozone in water for aquaculture or other uses. Oxygen cone ozonation eliminates the need for venting gas or an ozone destruct unit, as efficiencies are near 100%. In addition, the economics of ozonation can be greatly improved in terms of lower capital, maintenance and operational costs.
Cone Operation
Speece oxygen cones are fairly easy to install and operate. Once installed, they are virtually maintenance-free. Water enters at the top of the cone and flows downward. At the same time, oxygen is introduced through a fitting at or near the top of the cone. The downward-flowing water counteracts the buoyancy of the rising oxygen bubbles. The bubbles are kept in suspension, no matter how large or small they are. Because the cone is pressurized, effluent water becomes supersaturated with oxygen by the time it reaches the tank. The design of the cone optimizes oxygen transfer, and efficiencies up to 100% are possible. Concentrations of oxygen greater than saturation can be obtained depending on various operational parameters. For example, Speece cones
Precautions
Two safety considerations are important when working with oxygen cones. First, fiberglass cones are not designed to operate at pressure greater than 21 psi. Failure to keep the operating pressure at or below this level can result in permanent damage to the cone and/or serious injury to the operator. Secondly, highly concentrated sources of oxygen can be fire or explosion hazards. Pure oxygen at high pressure in combination with a spark can lead to an explosion. Therefore, the design and manufacture of oxygen systems requires that potential ignition sources are eliminated.
12V Air Pumps

Want a basic, hard-working, 12V pump? Take a look at these. We have offered these pumps for many years and they remain our #1 low-cost air pump. Each pump comes with 12" pigtails, 6" of 3/8" I.D. outlet hose and a plastic manifold for aquarium tubing. Designed without an air inlet filter. Not recommended for saltwater environment. Three-month warranty. Imported.

12V Diaphragm Compressor

Great for mobile use, emergencies and even solar power applications. Specially designed for aquaculture, providing high volume at low pressure (10 psi max). Oilless operation, ball bearing construction and low amp draw with replaceable diaphragms and brushes for extended life (brushes on motors wear out after about 2,0003,000 hours of use). The DC20 will run for over six hours on a typical car battery. Comes with 9" pigtail wires, two feet of 3/8" I.D. outlet hose and inlet filter. We recommend additional housing for outdoor use. Six-month warranty.
DC8 DC15
25 Watts 80 Watts
Ship Wt
8 lbs 9 lbs
$ 95.00 120.00
Each
85.50 108.00
3+
8 6 PSI 4 2
Flowrate vs Pressure

DC 1
5
DC
DC20 DC20RK DC20B
12V Compressor Repair Kit for DC20 Brushes only, DC20

Pressure vs Amps
Ship Wt
9 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 299.87 62.70 33.59

12 10 8
Each
284.88 56.43 30.56
3+
8
20 Flowrate vs Pressure
0 CFM
2
AMPS
18 16 12 8 4 0 PSI 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
DC20
PSI
dc8 dc15
0 DC2
6 4 2 0 CFM 1
Aquarium Pumps
Aeration
59
Air Pumps by Penn Plax

Lots of output and high quality. The Silent Air series air pumps offer reliable, quiet operation. Each pump features separate compressors for each outlet, nonskid feet and mounting tabs for attaching to a wall with screws (not included). Five-year limited warranty. SA2 SA4 SA2RK SA6RK

Luft Pump
Designed for higher pressure applications, this small air pump can deliver enough air for an aquarium airstone at a 7' depth. Safe for outdoor use, it works great for aerating small fish ponds, deep aquariums, foam fractionators, etc. It features a heavy rubber diaphragm and adjustable air output. Outlets are 3/16" barb fittings, pump is 115V/60 Hz, weighs 3 lbs. Max 4 Lpm. Cubic Feet per Minute TL5 TL5RK Pump $ 64.60 Repair Kit 9.95 61.31/4+
@ 1 psi
.02 cfm 20 gal .04 cfm x 2 55 gal Repair Kit for SA2 Repair Kit for SA4
Rated Up To
Ship Wt
2 lbs 3 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 15.53 24.90 2.90 6.80
Each
14.74 23.66 2.76 6.46
4+
.09
@ 3 psi
.05
@ 7.5 psi
Shutoff
sa4
sa2
Whisper Air Pump by Tetra

This quiet air pump has tremendous power for its size. Ideally suited for deeper aquariums (up to 8') and fine pore air diffusers. The perfect choice for air-driven protein skimmers. Backed by a limited lifetime warranty!
Total cfm @ Outlets 12" 18" 24" 36" 48"
Important
96"
DW9622
.6
.6
.5
.5
.4
.15 $ 75.36
Each
69.33
4+
Air Pumps by Hagen

Hagen air pumps are powerful, low in power consumption and economical in price. Pumps are 115V, CSA-approved. Six-month warranty.
Psi Watts Each 4+
Low-Cost Outdoor Air Pumps

These large-size air pumps have aluminum covers and internal noise-absorbers. Although the pump housings are waterproof and designed for outdoor use, the pump is not UL-listed. Pumps include 6' power cord, 1/4" hose barb, flexible outlet adapter, and outlet adapter to aquarium tubing (3/16"). Six-month warranty, 115V/60 Hz. Imported. 9720 9730 9720D 9730D

Pump w/6-Outlet Adapter, 25 W Pump w/10-Outlet Adapter, 50 W Repl. Diaphragms for 9720 (x2) Repl. Diaphragms for 9730 (x2)
Ship Wt
10 lbs 12 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 65.06 96.24 7.65 9.50
Each
59.20 87.58
4+
AH800 AH801 AH802 AH803 AH805 AH807 A18080 A18190 A18330
Elite 800, .05 cfm 2.5 2.0 $ 7.95 Elite 801, .09 cfm 3.0 2.5 8.95 Elite 802, .05 cfm x 2 3.5 3.5 12.95 Elite 803, .12 cfm 4.0 4.5 13.95 Maxima, .09 cfm x 2 2.5 4.0 17.95 Optima, .18 cfm 4.0 4.5 31.50 Repair Kit for AH800, AH801, AH802 (AH802 Requires 2) 2.15 Repair Kit for AH803 2.15 Repair Kit for Maxima and Optima 5.05
7.16 8.06 11.66 12.56 16.16 28.35 1.94 1.94 4.54
ah801
9720
5.8 4.4 PSI 2.9 1.5 CFM .3 .7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.8
97
20
973 0
Look online at AquaticEco.com to see additional aquarium pumps.
60
Aeration
Pumps
Linear Air Pumps by Whitewater

Indoor rated.
Whitewater air compressors are designed for indoor use only. Outlet is 3/8" barb; 115V/60 Hz with 6' power cord. Diaphragms typically last one year at the highest pressures, longer at lower pressures. Add "D" to the part number of the pump for a replacement diaphragm set (2). Imported. Six-month warranty. LT11 LT15 LT19 LT24 LT26 LT28
Watts @ 2 psi
Diaphragm Air Pumps by Whitewater

Outdoor rated.
TF
16 34 51 60 105 130
Ship Wt
4 lbs 7 lbs 14 lbs 16 lbs 18 lbs 23 lbs
Diaphragms Only
These sturdy, reliable, very quiet air pumps will provide a long service life. Built for outdoor use, Whitewater pumps deliver from .8 to 7.9 cfm (23 to 223 Lpm) of oil-free air with a maximum pressure of 4 psi. Each has a 3/4" barb outlet and grounded power cord (5 ft). UL-listed. 115V, 50/60 Hz (230V available for export). Two-year warranty. TL40 TL66
Watts @ 2 psi
$ 5.55 6.65 7.20 7.70 8.35 8.80
70.00 100.00 135.00 187.00 221.00 272.00

6 5 4 PSI 3
Each
65.00 93.00 126.00 173.91 205.53 252.96
4+
35 50
Ship Wt
15 lbs 17 lbs
$ 226.69 257.09
TL66 TL40
28 LT
6 LT2 4 LT2 9 LT1 5 LT1
4 3 PSI 2 1 CFM 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
TL40
6 TL6
2 1
LT11
LT24
LT19
CFM
Q: Do I need an expensive air pump? A: Maybe not. It all depends on your need for reliability. If an air pump failure will cause a signifi cant disruption and/or jeopardize the health of your fish, you not only need a reliable air pump (read expensive) but also a redundant system and a backup. Every air pump will fail eventually and when it does you will want something in place to automatically prevent catastrophe. It could be two air pumps installed on separate breakers so that when one failed the other would do the job. An inexpensive air pump will do for low-value, low-risk and/or temporary applications of less than 9 months duration; for instance, summer aeration in a koi pond where a water pump/splash is the primary aerator. They can also be used as economical backup air pumps.
You guys rock! Products and customer service are top shelf. I only buy aquaculture products through you.
Renzo Fancellu
Silent Pumps by Whitewater

Need a pump for deep water? These inexpensive pumps work well in deep applications. They are virtually silent and feature a rugged, weatherproof, aluminum housing. Pumps have a 3/8" outlet and a 4' power cord. 115V/60 Hz. Not UL-listed, imported. Six-month warranty. V201 V301
6 5 4 PSI 3 2 1 CFM .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
V20 1
Watts
15 25
Ship Wt
7 lbs 9 lbs
$ 65.65 76.75
Each
60.09 70.07
V201
4+
Linear Piston Air Pumps

These are not linear "diaphragm," but true linear "piston" type pumps. Since the only moving partthe pistonfloats on a bed of air, a exceptionally long service life can be expected (8 years of continuous life is not uncommon). These Medo pumps will provide exceptionally quiet, energy-effi cient operation and clean, oil-free air. An outdoor-rated housing, a grounded power cord, 3/4" hose barb and 115V/60 Hz are all standard (add "H" to the end of the part number for 230V/50 Hz). UL-listed. One-year warranty.
V3 01
Extremely quiet. linear piston. energy efficiency.
Outdoor-rated Exceptionally
housing.
True
long service life.
Outstanding
Note: To power any linear air pumps with inverters (square wave), oversize the inverter at least 200%. SL22 SL44B SL88 81" max depth, 7" x 7" x 8", 48 W 100" max depth, 11" x 8" x 8", 92 W 100" max depth, 15" x 8" x 9", 64 W $ 257.00 342.00 472.00
It's hardly ever that you run across an individual quite like him. The first time I met him, at your warehouse, he shook my hand and made sure we were taken care of. Every time after that, it was the same, always helping us with a smile. The last time, we needed a fitting and he brought us to his office while he researched the part and made sure we got what we needed. As a small customer to a huge, multimillion dollar corporation, it's very nice to feel valued. Mento really does signify "customer service."
60-Hz performance at sea level is shown. 50-Hz performance is the same 10%. 4 PSI 2 CFM 1 LPM 28
B 44 SL 22 SL
SL22
SL 8
8
Mento
2 57
3 85
4 5 6 113 141 170
SL88
R. Ramjeawan
SL44B
Linear Pumps/Tech Talk
Aeration
61
Linear II Diaphragm Air Pumps by Sweetwater

Higher output and lower watts.
Aquaculture Duty
8 6 4
60-Hz performance at sea level is shown. 50-Hz performance is the same 10%.
You will see similar looking air pumps imported from Asia, but the Sweetwater brand is significantly different. These are designed for 60-Hz (American) operation to produce maximum efficiency (we also offer 50-Hz models for export). These models permit continuous operation exceeding 3 years! Simply clean the air inlet filter as needed. There is no need for lubrication, and the outlet air is always clean. Besides being effi cient, they are quiet. You can even operate them right in the classroom, pet store or laboratory. Each uses a heavy, cast-aluminum, dripproof housing. Standard models are 115V/60 Hz with 6' power cords. UL-listed and CE-approved. Three-year warranty (does not include filters or diaphragm). For 230V export models add "H" to the end of the part number. Prices are the same. SL14 SL24 SL56A SL94A SL190 SL1424RK SL56RK SL56ARK SL94RK SL170RK SL190RK SL5694A SL56AA SL94AA SL170A SL190A Air Pump, Indoor 85" 6" x 5" x 5" Air Pump, Indoor 120" 6" x 5" x 5" Air Pump, Outdoor 150" 8" x 5" x 9" Air Pump, Outdoor 180" 8" x 5" x 9" Air Pump, Outdoor 190" 11" x 8.5" x 10" Repair Kit for SL14 and SL24 Repair Kit for SL56 Repair Kit for SL56A Repair Kit for SL94 Repair Kit for SL170 Repair Kit for SL190 Air Filter Kit for SL14, SL24, SL56 and SL94 Air Filter Kit for SL56A Air Filter Kit for SL94A Air Filter Kit for SL170 Air Filter Kit for SL190
Max Depth Dimensions (L x W x H) Watts
SL 9
PSI
SL1 90
1 Lpm = .035 cfm 1 cfm = 28.3 Lpm 1 inch = 2.54 cm 1 psi = 27.7" H2O
CFM 1 LPM 28
4 SL2
4 SL1
56 SL
2 57
3 85
4 5 6 7 8 9 113 141 170 198 226 255
9 15 50 90 190
Outlet
1/4" 1/4"
Sound (dB)
3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
40 40 40 50 48
Cfm @ 1 psi
.5 .85 2 3.7 8.8
Cfm @ 2 psi
.2 .56 1.5 3 8.1
Ship Wt
7 7 15 16 30
$ 208.85 228.24 328.51 435.71 925.75 43.75 78.95 52.02 124.22 155.00 215.28 5.70 5.25 5.25 11.85 12.00
Each
Above part numbers are 60-Hz for use in North and South America and the Caribbean. We also offer 50-Hz models @ 230V (same watts as 60-Hz units) for use in Europe, Asia, Africa, etc. To order 50-Hz use the part numbers followed by an "H" (e.g., SL56H). Prices are the same. Repair kits include diaphragms, heads and valves.
Also in 50 H z
SL190
SL94A SL56A
SL14/SL24
Tech Talk 64
Air Pump/Compressor Comparison
For the safety of our aquaculture customers we only offer oilless type air pumps and compressors. To select the one that is right for you first determine the volume of air you require in cubic feet per minute (cfm) and the pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) to get it there (Hint: It takes 1 psi to push an air bubble 28" below the surface of the water). cfm x 1.699 = m3h m3h x .588 = cfm inches H2O x .036 = psi inches H2O x .074 = 1" Hg inches H2O x 1.868 = mmHg inches H2O x 2.49 = mbar mbar x .40 = "H2O psi x 27.68 = "H2O inches Hg x 13.59 = "H2O cfm x 28.32 = Lpm
Linear Diaphragm Rotary Vane Piston Rotary Lobe Regenerative Blower CFM 5 10 20 40 9.5 to 400 to 650 60 80 PSI 5 5 10 20 40 60 80 12 1.5 50 15 50 Airflow/Volume 6.5 Pressure 7.5 50
These quick guides will help you decide what type of air pump for which to look. Consider the cost, physical size, noise level, etc., then pick the type most efficient for your situation.
62
Aeration
Sweetwater Regenerative Blowers

All Sweetwater blowers come with internal mufflers and low-restriction, washable inlet filters as standard equipment. Outlet fl ex hoses, which simplify installation, are also standard equipment. The Sweetwater blower's electric motor is a high-efficiency type motor that will run cool and handle a wide range of power variations so often found in rural locations. Automatic thermal overload protection is standard (except S631). Should a power brownout occur and trip the motor, the Sweetwater blower will restart automatically after cooling. Motors are completely enclosed and fan cooled for the highest reliability in a humid aquaculture environment. Each blower is assembled with antiseize compound, performance tested prior to shipment and guaranteed by AES for three years! All are UL-listed, CSA-certifi ed and CE-compliant.
Are All Regenerative Blowers the Same? NO!

Sweetwater regenerative blowers reach higher pressures, operate in more corrosive environments and operate at lower noise levels than industry standard commercial blowers. They are inexpensive to operate, and the air they deliver is oil-free. They are extremely energy-efficient and quiet. Sweetwater blowers are simple. And simplicity means reliability. They have only one moving part: a dynamically balanced impeller that is attached directly to the motor shaft. The rotating impeller doesn't touch a thing, so there's no wear, no vibration, no seals and no lubrication. Just wash the inlet air filters as needed and replace the motor bearings after three years of continuous operation.
3-Phase Equipment
3-Phase Motor Testing

A common mistake in the field is to wire a 3-phase motor and "bump" it to test the rotation. (Keep in mind, only certified electricians should be installing electrical equipment!). A phase tester should always be used to test the rotation. When a motor is "bumped" and the rotation is incorrect, the impeller canand willspin off. When the impeller spins off, it will not only break the impeller but also damage the volute. This can be a costly mistake.
Automatic Thermal Overload Protection* Should a power brownout occur and trip the motor, the Sweetwater blower will automatically restart after cooling ( *except S631).
Air filter Low-restriction inlet, washable filter that removes particulates to 50 microns included in price.
Antiseize Compound Sweetwater is the only blower we know of that is assembled with antiseize compound to ensure easy disassembly when it becomes necessary years down the road. High-Efficiency Premium Motor Runs cool, is completely enclosed and fan cooled for the utmost reliability in humid environments. Universal 50/60 Hz, UL-, CSA- and CE-compliant.
flexible outlet hose simplifies installation.
Sweetwater Regenerative Blowers
Aeration
63
Regenerative Blowers by Sweetwater

Altitude
Aquaculture Duty
s45
s69
High altitude will affect blower performance. Deduct 4% of volume and pressure for every 1,000' (300 m) above sea level.
Hz
All models will operate on both 50 and 60 cycle (Hz) power except S631 and S651, which are 60 Hz only. At 50 Hz, both pressure and volume will be about 30% less than the 60-Hz curves shown.
3-Phase Note
Combination starters are not included, but strongly recommended. NEC and local electrical codes prevail.
s11a
27.43 24.93 22.44 19.95 17.45 KPA 14.96 12.46 9.97 7.48 4.98 2.49 Pressure, Inches H2O 110 100 250
Starting
The 3,450-rpm motors used on these regenerative blowers require about ten seconds to reach full speed. During this period, power draw is much higher than normal. See specifications for both starting watts and running watts. Use starting watts to size generators and use full load amps to size breakers.
3 S7
90 80 70
2S41
@
HZ 60
200
Ordering Information
Single-phase blowers up to and including 1 hp are supplied with a 8' power cord. To order 230V, add "230" after the part number, otherwise 115V will be shipped. All Sweetwater blowers come with inlet air filters and flexible pipe connectors as standard equipment. Three-year warranty begins on date of shipment. Double the pressure by using two blowers of the same size, with one blowing into the other. See the 2S41 example in the curve to the right.
S56
S7 3@
9 S6
53 1/S S5
50 40 30 20 10
S4 1/S 43
50 HZ
100
50
Volume (CFM) m3/H
50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 25 42.25 84.5 126.75 169 211.25 253.5 295.75 338 380.25 422.5 464.75 507 549.25 591.5
We follow a policy of continuous improvement and reserve the right to alter published data.
Blower Specifications (at Sea Level, 68F, 60 Hz)

Running Watts Max Rated Height Model Cfm Free Air @ Inches Water Max No. Input @ Starting Full Load w/o Number 20" 30" 40" 50" Duty Hp Phase Filters Inches Water Watts Voltage Amps Filter Width Outlet Hose Price Pipe Weight (Including Size (lbs) Filter)
S11A 1 2 S21 1 2 S31 1 2 S313 1 S41 1 2 S43 2 S45 2 S453 2 S51 2 S53 2 S61 3 S63 3 S631 3 5 S651 3 S653 3 S56 3 S69 3 S73 3 2S41 4 S15 S18P S18S S30P S30S
1 2
13 3 27 19 7 34 28 21 16 34 28 21 16 70 65 53 36 70 65 53 36 110 100 90 80 110 100 90 80 135 120 110 100 135 120 110 100 190 180 165 190 180 165 160 190 180 165 160 190 180 165 160 190 180 165 160 120 120 118 117 250 245 230 210 390 375 350 330 78 74 70 61 650 640 630 610 720 710 690 650 410 405 400 395 1,275 1,230 1,200 1,190 650 640 630 625
34" 43" 56" 56" 58" 58" 65" 65" 65" 65" 45" 80" 75" 100" 110" 280" 110" 125" 110" 125" 105" 200" 125" 225"
1/8 1/3 1/2 1/2
1 1 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 31/2 31/2 5 5 6 51/2 10 1+1 15 18 18 30 30
1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 2 1
198/20" 900 377/30" 1,800 471/30" 2,000 410/30" 4,000 971/40" 4,000 860/40" 5,000 1,430/40" 9,000 1,500/40" 12,000 1,760/40" 14,000 1,750/40" 17,000 2,600/40" 14,000 3,260/60" 28,000 3,400/60" 21,000 3,710/80" 29,000 3,520/80" 36,000 4,000/150" 38,000 4,190/60" 48,000 7,640/80" 75,000 800/80" 11,000/80" 70,000 12,000/80" 90,000 12,000/80" 90,000 20,000/80" 140,000 20,000/80" 140,000
115/230 115/230 115/230 230/460 115/230 230/460 115/230 230/460 115/230 230/460 115/230 230/460 230 230 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460
2.0/115 3.8/115 5.6/115 2.0/230 9.8/115 3.2/230 10.4/230 4.9/230 11.9/230 6.9/230 11.8/230 8.8/230 19.0/230 22.3/230 12.0/230 18.2/230 18.2/230 25.0/230 19.6/115 50/230 52/230 52/230 98/230 98/230
10" 10" 10" 10" 12" 12" 14" 14" 14" 14" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16" 19" 22" 24" 23" 20" 22" 23" 23"
8" 9" 10" 10" 12" 12" 15" 15" 15" 15" 17" 17" 17" 17" 17" 22" 22" 22" 21" 28" 28" 32" 33"
1" 1" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2" 2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 5" 5"
23 28 36 36 50 50 77 85 87 100 100 115 115 150 150 215 250 245 452 438 431 630 606
$ 488.58 537.60 578.65 597.22 704.63 706.77 944.85 944.85 1,015.38 983.48 1,380.33 1,289.40 1,402.03 1,479.40 1,486.80 2,206.06 1,981.12 2,400.00 5,064.91 4,696.92 4,696.92 8,898.22 8,898.22
Standard with 115V or 230V 8' power cord (230V models are also rated for 208V). Specify voltage when ordering, otherwise 115V cord will be fitted. S453 and smaller ship Ground. 3 S51 and larger ship via motor freight only. 4 Blowers in series double the pressure. 5 No thermal overload protection.
mbars
60
150
3 S6
5 S4
S6
1
53 /S 4
S21 A S11
) 1(C S4 1/S313 S3
A(B) S11
64
Aeration
Regenerative Blower Accessories
Pressure Relief Valve Assembly

Designed for low-pressure blowers, these valves will automatically protect blowers from over-pressurization by discharging air to the outside. The valve assembly is easy to install and calibrate. Pressure relief valves can be noisy when dumping air, so add a muffler assembly if you plan to use it as a normally open bleed valve. Both sides are FNTP. One-year warranty. PRV20 PRV30 BM60-2 BM70-2 2" PR Valve Assembly $ 222.55 3" PR Valve Assembly 338.29 2" Muffler Assembly (use with PRV20) 100.87 3" Muffler Assembly (use with PRV30) 330.73
Gauges*
BG60 BG100 BG15 LPG30 VF2 BG61 BG00 Gauge, 060" H2O, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 0100" H2O, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 015 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 030 psi, 1/4" NPT, Liquid-Filled Gauge, 035 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 060 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge Kit (w/o Gauge), 3' Tubing, On/Off Valve and Adapter (1/8" NPT) $ 57.50 57.50 12.18 25.85 12.49 12.29 6.49
lpg30
*Recommended for all blowers. See Index for drill and NPT taps.
prv20
Heat Dissipating Pipe

When air is compressed it gives off heat. This heat of compression, plus the heat from friction, can make a blower's outlet air temperature high enough to fry an egg. When the inlet air is 100F and the blower pressure is just 55" H2O (2 psi), the resulting 150F discharge air can soften plastic PVC pipe. This 8" diameter thin wall galvanized steel pipe can be used to cool the compressed air before it reaches the plastic pipe. Rated to 4 psi (110"). Each clamp includes one gasket. Flex hoses are listed by pipe size and include clamps. Seal connections with silicone to prevent air leaks. Made in USA. DH8 DH45 DH90 DH19 DH20 PFG1 PFG2 PFG3 FH1 FH2 FH3 FH4 FH5

Air Filters
If you're not getting the air you need out of your blower, perhaps a dirty air filter is keeping air from getting into the blower. Keep a spare on hand, change out as needed, then wash and dry the dirty one when you have time. Both filters have 23/8" I.D.

BF4 BF6
Filter, 4" for S11, S21 Filter, 6" for S31 and larger
$ 18.25 22.98
Each
16.25 20.51
4+
Note: 2 or more BF6 filters required for S45 and larger blowers.
bf6
Straight Pipe, 58" Elbow, 45 Elbow, 90 Clamp w/Gasket, 190F Clamp w/Gasket, 1,100F Flange with 11/2" Nipple Flange with 2" Nipple Flange with 3" Nipple Flex Hose, 11/2" x 8" Flex Hose, 2" x 8" Flex Hose, 3" x 8" Flex Hose, 4" x 12" Flex Hose, 5" x 16"
Elbow Straight Pipe
Ship Wt
13 lbs 3 lbs 6 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 82.55 128.18 182.00 28.30 36.65 65.80 77.45 87.35 10.85 14.10 21.20 38.42 56.68
Each
78.00 121.13 172.71 26.87 34.80 60.55 67.27 80.34 10.15 13.32 20.11 36.50 53.46
4+
Bleed Valve Assemblies

Regenerative blowers are quieter, run cooler and use less power when excess air is vented or "bled off." Weighs 3 lbs. BV1 BV2 BV3 BV4 BV5 Fits S11, S21 with ALR15 Silencer Fits S31 with ALR15 Silencer Fits S41 with ALR15 Silencer Fits S45 and S51 Fits S6 Series $ 26.37 39.98 41.30 55.99 80.98
Clamp Flange w/Nipple
Flex Hose
Muffler Assemblies* (for Blower Inlet)

bv1
Check Valve Assemblies (for Multiple Blower Applications)

Inlet check valves can be plastic, but outlet check valves are subject to high temperatures, requiring steel. BCVA1 BCVA2 BCVA3 BCVA4 BCVA5 BCVA6 Inlet Check Valve Assembly for S11 S21 (Plastic) Inlet Check Valve Assembly for S31 (Plastic) Inlet Check Valve Assembly for S41 (Plastic) Inlet/Outlet Check Valve Assembly for S5 Series (Steel) Inlet/Outlet Check Valve Assembly for S6 Series (Steel) Inlet/Outlet Check Valve Assembly for S7 Series (Steel) $ 15.77 21.58 24.17 142.49 196.56 205.91
BM20 BM30 BM40-2 BM60-2 BM70-2
External Inlet Muffler Assembly (Plastic) for S11 or S21 (both 1" NPT) External Inlet Muffler Assembly (Plastic) for S31 (11/2" NPT) External Inlet Muffler Assembly (Steel w/Galv. Elbow) for S41, S45, SD4, S51, S53, SD5 (11/2" NPT) External Inlet Muffler Assembly (Steel w/Galv. Elbow) for S63, S65, S69, SD6 (2" NPT) External Inlet Muffler Assembly (Steel) for S15, S18P, S18S, S30P, S30S, S73 (3" NPT)
$ 27.12 28.40 96.46 100.87 330.73
*Air filters not included.
bm60-2
bcva4
Regenerative Blowers/Tech Talks
Aeration
65
Regenerative Blowers, Low Cost by

Whitewater blowers are a very good value for aquariums, pet stores, bait systems and seafood holding systems. They are smaller, lighter and quieter than most blowers and very energy-efficient. They feature a "cupped" impeller for reduced noise. The specially designed motor is low in power consumption and excellent in performance. Blowers are 115V/60 Hz and include a 6' power cord. One-year warranty. Pricing includes filter, filter connections and a flexible outlet.
All Whitewater blowers include:

Inlet
filter. outlet.
Filter connections. Power cord.
Flexible
ww10
ww80
WW10 WW18 WW29 WW39 WW60 WW80
10"
4 8 15 25 33 55
Cfm @ inches Water 20" 30" 40"
2 3 8 15 21 43
2 6 13 31
3.5 20
50"
Aquarium Outlets @ 10" Depth
40 60 100 300 460 860
Max Duty
25" 28" 35" 40" 43" 56"
Noise, dB
48 48 52 54 60 64
Running Watts
170 190 260 330 410 687
Outlet Hose for Pipe Size

3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
Ship Wt
1" 11/4"
$ 204.10 215.73 240.31 263.89 298.00 342.14
Each
Tech Talk 83
Blower Buying and Operating Tips
Compare blowers not by horsepower ratings but by watts. That's what you pay for!
Electricity cost should be a major concern when motors operate continuously. Don't get fooled by low horsepower ratings on electric equipment. Always compare work being done to power consumed in watts. For instance, you may have seen air blowers and water pumps advertised with lower horsepower ratings than other equipment of the same size. The gimmick is to use an undersized, low-cost, high service factor motor to imply superior performance. But this smaller motor has to work harder to do the job. The small motor may get through a temporary overload condition but is not reliable for continuous duty. It will actually use more electricity, operate at a higher temperature and have a shorter life than a larger 1.0 service factor motor doing the same work. Sweetwater blowers run cooler because they use the correct 1.0 service factor motor for the continuous duty work being done. Here are some blower operating tips:
Tachometer
This tachometer will indicate the true shaft speed. Perfect for motors, engines and chain- or belt-driven equipment. Reads from 504,000 rpm with both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation. Accuracy 3%. Includes cone- and cup-shaped tips for use on virtually any shaft style. Made in USA. 3BY11 $ 118.26
Pressure Switch
A low-cost method of starting backup equipment or tripping an alarm. Air/water line hose barb is 1/8". Can be used for either normally open or normally closed. Will carry up to 3 amps at 115V. Moistureproof. Preset to switch on/off at 30" H2O, but is adjustable from 27" to 33" H2O. 2" L x 11/2" H. B601 $ 29.65
leed off as much excess air as you can while you still have as much air as B you need. The blower will run cooler and use less power. If the ambient air is so dirty (feed dust, bird feathers, etc.) that the air filter requires frequent cleaning, pull a sock over the filter (the sock becomes a pre-filter). Then change your socks frequently! fter three years of continuous operation in critical animal life support A applications, purchase a new blower and have the original blower's motor bearings replaced. Operate the original unit for a month to be sure the work was done correctly, then switch back to the new blower, keeping the original one as a backup.
Tech Talk 11
Motor Too Hot?
"My motor is running too hot to touch. Is this a problem?"
The old "Too-Hot-To-Touch" test no longer applies due to the improved materials now used in motor manufacturing. The best way to determine if a motor is operating properly is to check the ampere (amp) draw. Each motor has a nameplate listing full-load amps (FLA). If the tested amp draw does not exceed the nameplate rating, its internal or external cooling fan is working (if so equipped) and the ambient air temperature around the motor is below 104F (40C), the motor is probably not running hot, even though it is too hot to touch.
You can't measure watts without a wattmeter, BUT you can estimate watt consumption with these formulas: Single-phase watts = volts x amps x power factor. Three-phase watts = volts x amps x 1.73 x power factor. The power factor of a fully loaded electric motor is about .9, but this goes down significantly as the load on the motor is reduced.
66
Aeration
Tech Talks
Tech Talk 1
Dissolved Oxygen in Aquaculture
Dissolved Oxygen in Aquaculture: the First Limiting Factor of Water Quality
Air breathing animals are used to air containing about 21 percent oxygen, whereas aquaculture is conducted in water containing less than .0001 percent oxygen (10 mg/L). With so little oxygen available in the best of conditions, it is apparent that knowledge of dissolved oxygen (D.O.), oxygen measuring and aeration equipment is very important to the aquaculturist. If the oxygen level is too high, oxygen supersaturation can cause gas embolism, depress metabolism and inhibit respiratory enzymes, all of which can kill fish. If it is too low, the fish may not eat and may expend additional energy seeking oxygen. If lower yet, they can experience severe stress and, of course, death. The diurnal oxygen cycle in outdoor ponds is show below. The delicate balance of dissolved oxygen vs the rate of oxygen consumption can shift rapidly with changing algal, temperature and wind conditions. In outdoor ponds, lower D.O. levels will occur in the summer because the rate of oxygen consumption increases as the temperature increases. Oxygen is THE MOST IMPORTANT thing to monitor. Monitoring and record-keeping will provide predictive knowledge. Measure oxygen after altering water flowrates, feed rates, etc., and when developing new growing systems. No one can just look at the water and know the oxygen level. Oxygen can only be measured with a test kit or, more conveniently, with an oxygen meter.
Typical Daily Oxygen Curve for Outdoor Ponds
Tech Talk 3
Backup Blower Setup
Anyone who has worked with fish for a while knows that if you don't plan ahead, you won't be in business for long. When it comes to life support, a backup blower could save your business. The most crucial of life support requirements is maintaining an adequate oxygen level because it can be used up so quickly. We always recommend having a second blower attached to the main air supply line, wired to come on if the primary blower fails for any reason. Both blowers must have check valves on them. A pressure switch is located between the primary blower and its check valve. When this pressure switch senses a loss of air pressure, it closes, causing an electric relay to start the backup blower (see diagram). The check valves keep air from being lost through the nonrunning unit. Check valves must be able to tolerate high temperatures. Be sure the stand-by unit is on a different electrical circuit breaker.
Switch Location for Auto-On Backup Blower Air Pipeline
Check Valve Air Connection
Check Valve
Oxygen Saturation
"Normal On" Blower Normally Closed Pressure Switch (B601)

(+) (-)
Standby Blower Contacter (Relay) From Power Supply
Minimum Safe Level of Oxygen
Zero Oxygen
8 AM
10
12
2 PM
8 PM
10
12
2 AM
8 AM
The two blowers on this system work off of different circuit breakers. In the event that the "normal on" blower shuts down, the standby blower will start. For illustration only. Not to be used for wiring or plumbing.
More Aeration than RequiredWasting Energy Just Right Aeration No AerationStress & Possible Fishkill at Times
Important
Tech Talk 39
208V vs 230V Motors
A motor that is rated for 230 or 240 volts is not compatible with 208V power. The motor will fail and will not be covered by warranty. When it fails depends on how well the motor was built, how hard it is working and the actual voltage that is getting to the motor. If you only have 208V power and can't find a motor that is rated for it, you can install a "buck-boost transformer" to raise your voltage. Mostbut not allAC motors are built to tolerate a 10% up or down voltage variation from what is shown on the motor nameplate. A motor labeled as 120V can operate reliably between 108 and 132V. The range for 208V motor is 187 to 229V. The range for 230V is 207 to 253V. After reading these ranges you might think, "A 230V motor can work at 208V." That would be true if your service always gave a minimum of 208V. But it will not because of "voltage variation." For instance, if your service is 208V, you will experience normal voltage variations
as low as 187. This is why some 230V motors operate on 208V service for a while, then, when other equipment starts up, the voltage drops below 207 and the motor draws more amps, overheats and fails. Buck-boost transformers reduce (buck) or raise (boost) supply voltage to the required level. A common application is boosting 208V to 230V. If your motor is a long distance from your power meter you will also incur "line losses." These will show as lower voltage and higher amperage at the motor. To be sure your installation is correct, always measure the volts and amps at the motor location, while it and everything else on that line is operating. Both must be within the motor label's specifications. See Tech Talks 5, 10, and 11 for more information.
Sweetwater Blower Packages/Tech Talk
Aeration
67
Sweetwater Series 2 Regenerative Blowers

These regenerative vacuum, pressure blowers are ideal alternatives to standard rotary vane pumps and positive displacement, rotary lobe blowers. Their rugged die-cast aluminum build is lightweight, compact and super-quiet. Easy-to-install, close-coupled construction means you can quickly add them to your system. The cool-running outboard bearings increase service life. Oilless and virtually maintenance-free. CE- and UL-listed TEFC motors.
180 160 140 Pressure, Inches H2O 120 100 80 60 40 20 CFM 100 200 300 400 500 600
SST10 SST15 SST20 SST25 SST30 SST35 SST40 SST45 SST50 SST55 SST60 SST65 SST70 SST75 SST80
sst10
SST10 SST15 SST20 SST25 SST30 SST35 SST40 SST45
0.3 0.6 0.6 1.3 1.3 2 2.35 2.75
Hp
Cfm
30 60 75 105 105 105 150 150
115 115 230/460 115 230/460 230/460 115 230/460
Voltage
Phase(s)
1 1 3 1 3 3 1 3
$ 459.37 487.62 594.67 679.76 642.17 660.50 958.03 939.00
SST50 SST55 SST60 SST65 SST70 SST75 SST80
3.4 4.6 6.2 6.2 8.4 11.5 11.5
Hp
Cfm
235 235 235 300 370 370 500
230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460 230/460
Voltage
Phase(s)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1,376.43 1,470.03 1,524.00 1,783.45 2,576.63 2,608.30 3,221.63
Tech Talk 2
Pipe Sizing, Air
Incorrect pipe sizing all too often causes unsatisfactory performance. Friction is the culprit. As the volume of air passing through the piping increases, the pressure required to deliver the air also increases due to friction (think of it as wind resistance). Since most aquaculture type aeration systems utilize lowpressure blowers, it is critical that nonrestrictive piping be used. Pressure loss in air systems can be measured in inches of water ("H 2O). The resistance to airflow caused by friction will decrease both the pressure to the air outlet (typically an air diffuser) and the volume of air delivered. When designing the air system, it is important to add together all of the following: the maximum water depth to which the air is driven, the resistance in the air piping system and the resistance caused by the air diffuser. Our simplified chart can be used as a guide in determining the pressure loss caused by the piping. The blower pressure and air diffuser resistances are published in this catalog. If you are confused, don't worry. Call an AES technician at 407-598-1401 for help. Example: 4 cfm need to be delivered a distance of 200 feet from a rotary lobe blower. The average line pressure is 3 psi. There are no odd twists or elbows that need to be considered. The minimum diameter of plastic pipe will be 3/4", causing 7.4" H 2O resistance or pressure loss. The smaller 1/2" pipe would cause 24.6" of loss, which would probably be unacceptable. A 1" pipe, costing little more than the 3/4", might be an even better choice if there is the possibility of using more air in the future.
Friction Losses for Air as a Function of Flow and Pipe Size (loss expressed in inches H 2 O per 100' of pipe) Schedule 40 Pipe Nominal Diameter (Inches)
.25 .25 .25 .50 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0
.5 .62
.75 .80
1.25
1.5
Actual Inside Diameter (Inches)
1.03 1.36 1.59 2.05 3.04 4.00 6.03

Inside Diameter (mm)
6.3 15.8 20.4 26.1 34.5 40.4 52.0 77.3 101.5 153.2 8.3 25.0 .39 1.2 3.8 7.6 2.3 12.3 3.7 19.0 5.0 1.7 17.0 5.3 1.5 32.0 11.0 3.0 1.4 19.0 5.0 2.2 39.0 10.0 4.7 1.4 25.0 12.0 3.6 .54 25.0 7.5 1.1 43.0 13.0 1.8 .5 19.0 2.7 .7 26.0 3.8 1.0 45.0 6.3 1.7 .25 9.3 2.5 .35
Calculations based on average pressure of 3 psi, average air temperature of 90F and an air kinematic viscosity of 1.7 x 10 -4 ft 2/sec. Under this temperature and pressure, the scfm (standard cubic feet per minute) volume is 13% greater than actual.
Cubic Feet Per Minute
68
Aeration
Blowers/Packages/Engines
Remote-Drive Regenerative Blowers by Sweetwater

Sweetwater remote-drive regenerative blowers are almost as reliable as Sweetwater motor-mounted electric blowers, but they offer the added benefits of variable performance and nonelectric drives. They are designed to be bolted to a base and driven by belts. The power source can be an electric motor, gasoline engine, diesel engine or even hydro power. They are perfect for use in electrical emergencies or anywhere electric power is not available. Remote-drive blowers allow the user to vary performance by simply changing the engine speed or the pulley size. Ask an AES technician to calculate the pulley size for your application. Inlet air filters, flexible outlet hoses and double groove blower pulleys (sheaves) are included. Rotation is clockwise as you face the blower shaft. One-year warranty. Made in USA.

SD4 SD5 SD6* SD69* BF6
Belt-Drive Blower 2.4" 1 11/2" 30 lbs Belt-Drive Blower 3.0" 2 2" 40 lbs Belt-Drive Blower 4.0" 3 3" 80 lbs Belt-Drive Blower 4.0" 3 3" 155 lbs Repl. Inlet Filter
Pulley Dia.**
No. of Filters
Outlet Hose for Pipe Size
Ship Wt
$ 723.45 1,020.60 1,195.21 1,588.38 22.98

sd4
180 160 15 HP SD6 5500 10 HP 4500 160 140 Pressure, Inches H2O 120 100 80 60 40 20 100 200 300 CFM 100 200 2850 4 HP 7 HP 3500 11 HP 4500 SD69
*Ships motor freight; **Pulley diameters are pitch diameters using "A" section belts. Shaft diameter is 7/8" (.875") on all models.
160 140 Pressure, Inches H2O 120 Pressure, Inches H2O 100 80 60 40 20 3450 CFM 50 100 150 CFM 100 200 300 1 HP 3 HP 2 HP 4 HP
SD4
5500 SD5
140 9 HP Pressure, Inches H2O 120 100 5 HP 80 60 40 3450
120 100 80 60 40 3500 20 3 HP 4500 4 HP 7 HP
5500
4500
20 CFM
300
400
Belt-Drive Blower Packages
Invented Here
We can custom build your blower package using Sweetwater remote-drive regenerative blowers. Give us the performance required and the type of drive (gas, diesel or electric), and we'll build to suit. All standard packages listed below include heavy steel base plate, adjustable motor rails, pulleys, belts, pressure gauge and tachometer (Roots type blower packages also are available). Each one is always performance tested prior to shipment. Ships motor freight. Note: Due to the customized design of blower packages, please allow up to 2 weeks for production.
r Call fo Cus tom ! ion Q u ot a t
rd5
Standard Packages w/Briggs & Yanmar Engines

RD5 RD5-E RD6 RD8 RD9 RD11 RD16

SD4 SD4 SD4 SD5 SD6 SD6 SD69
Blower
5 6.5 6 8 9 13 16
Hp
Gas Gas Diesel Gas Diesel Gas Gas
Type
Manual Electric Electric Electric Electric Electric Electric
Start
Cfm @ 60" Water
100 100 100 150 200 200 250 @ 100"
$ 2,667.34 3,175.40 4,911.29 3,708.87 5,546.37 4,267.74 4,936.69
Also le Availab da on With H s Engine
yd4
rd5-e
Diesel Engines
These fuel-injected Yanmar diesels (biodiesel-compatible) can power continuousduty, engine-driven blowers and water pumps with extraordinary reliability. Available in 4.7-, 6- and 9-horsepower single cylinder models, the air-cooled Yanmar is known for its stingy fuel consumptiona big plus for continuous-duty use. All models come equipped with direct injection and both recoil and electric start, ultra quiet muffler and a small fuel tank that will operate at maximum duty for about 45 minutes. They are EPA emissions certified with 15-amp charging systems. Made in Japan. YD4 YD6 YD9 4.7 hp 6 hp 9 hp $ 1,976.67 2,205.00 2,709.84 Rpm Max Hp Continuous Hp Max Fuel (L/hr) Shaft Rotation Shaft Diameter, Keyed Dry Weight 4.0 3.6
YD4
3,000 3,600 4.7 4.0 3 .750 68 lbs 5.9 5.5
YD6
3,000 3,600 6.7 6.0 4 1.00 68 lbs 9.0 8.0
YD9
3,000 3,600 10.0 9.0 6 1.00 68 lbs
CCW Facing Pulley End of Crankshaft
Rotary Lobe Blowers/Pressure Relief Valves
Aeration
69
Rotary Lobe Blowers by Roots

In aeration applications where the pressure required is greater than that available from a regenerative blower, consider rotary-lobe blowers. They consume less energy at elevated pressures than comparative regenerative blowers. Roots Universal RAI blowers are heavy-duty and made in the USA. Completely assembled packages are possible using one of the 17 frame sizes of Universal RAI blowers. Packages may be customized for your application. Flowrates up to 2,370 cfm and pressures to 15 psi are available. To give example pricing, we've packaged standard systems with electric motors, inlet filters, silencers, steel bases, motor adjusting rails, V-belt drives and belt guards (pressure relief valves included with standard systems). If one of the standard packages does not fit your needs, let us know your exact requirements and we will provide a price quote. Roots 18-month uncontested warranty guarantees the repair or replacement of any unit that malfunctions for any reason. Roots Universal RAI blowers feature machined cast-iron casings, head plates and impellers. The impellers are dynamically balanced and antifriction. Oversized bearings are used throughout. Timing gears are center-timed to allow clockwise and counterclockwise rotation and made from hardened alloy steel. Bhp is brake horsepower. The electric motor horsepower required will be about 30% higher than the bhp to allow for belts and pulleys, 40% higher for gas engines. Note: Due to the customized design of blower packages, please allow up to 2 weeks for production.
rb32a Custom manifolds available.
3-Phase Equipment
rb22
Model Rpm
The air purge valve (ST5) can help prevent gas bubble disease. See p. 329.
RB22 Blower Only 22 RB22A Blower Package 22 RB32 Blower Only 32 RB32A Blower Package 32 RB36 Blower Only 36 RB36A Blower Package 36
1,160 3,560 5,275 1,160 2,800 3,600 1,160 2,800 3,600
2 psi Cfm/Bhp
2/.4 41/1.3 38/1.8 32/2.8 68/1.9 64/2.7 59/4.2 Priced with 2-hp ODP motor. Call for larger sizes. 34/.6 27/1.1 21/1.6 108/1.6 101/2.7 95/3.8 86/6.0 144/2.0 137/3.4 131/4.8 122/7.7 Priced with 5-hp ODP motor. Call for larger sizes. 85/1.2 72/2.3 61/3.3 253/3.3 239/5.8 229/8.3 334/4.5 321/7.7 Priced with 10-hp single-phase motor. Call for larger sizes.
7/.3 46/.8 73/1.2
4 psi Cfm/Bhp
6 psi Cfm/Bhp
10 psi Cfm/Bhp
12 psi Cfm/Bhp
Ship Wt
$ 1,358.73 3,458.91 1,486.15 4,017.87 1,602.46 5,277.16
Note: Pressure ratings based on inlet air at standard pressure of 14.7 psi (sea level) and temperature of 68F (20C).
Pressure Relief Valves

Eliminates damage from closed valves.
These weight-loaded pressure relief valves offer nonpulsating pressure relief for positive displacement blowers. The valve is installed in the discharge air stream to prevent damage to blowers when operating pressures exceed the maximum. As system pressure approaches the valve set point, the weight-loaded cylinder is forced up from the valve seat and exposes the vent ports for fast blow-down. When acceptable system pressures are restored, the valve automatically returns to its closed position. The valve cylinder and seat are cast iron and machined to very tight tolerances for smooth operation. PRV11 PRV14 PRV17 PRV21 PRV24 PRV27 PRV31 PRV34 PRV37

To: Huy Tran

Let me take the opportunity to thank you for all the hard work on the blower quotation. You are by far the most helpful and responsive vendor we deal with in the business. I am pleased to give you our business on this order and hope we can continue to purchase a volume of supplies through AES.
Michael Buchal
Bodega Bay, CA
1" FPT 1" FPT 1" FPT 11/2" FPT 11/2" FPT 11/2" FPT 21/2" FPT 21/2" FPT 21/2" FPT
Includes Wt for
13.5 psi 46.5 psi 710 psi 13.5 psi 46.5 psi 710 psi 13.5 psi 46.5 psi 710 psi
$ 160.30 194.35 245.01 198.64 248.55 318.24 298.73 405.60 536.44
Technician Profile
Huy Tran
Huy received his Bachelor of Science degree from the University of Hawaii in aquaculture sciences. He has a wide range of aquatic experience including hatchery and grow-out techniques for production of freshwater and marine finfish, prawns, and shrimp; bioassays and aquatic toxicology; and aquaculture and aquarium system design.
prv11
70
Aeration
Tech Talk
Tech Talk 62
Diffuser Comparison Chart
Fish Diffuser Supported Depth by System (ft Water**) (lbs) Annualized System Cost per lb of Fish Supported ($/lb/year*)
Gas used
Diffuser Specifications
De-Icing and Algae Tank Circulation

Linear Compressor (SL44), Pipe: 8 holes/LF 3/4-hp Vane Compressor (AQ7), Pipe: 8 holes/LF 1-hp Regenerative Blower (S41), Pipe: 8 holes/LF Drilled PVC Air Air Air 8 8 3 45 299 560 $ 4.67 2.47 1.80 Flowrate: Hole Size: Pressure Loss: .015 cfm/hole 1/16" <6"
De-Icing and Wastewater Treatment

3/4-hp Vane Compressor (AQ7 w/ WD50 diffuser) Air 5-hp Rotary Blower (RB32A, 3,600 rpm w/ WD50 diffuser) Air
10 10
962 13,172
1.06 .51
Flowrate: Pressure Loss:
.01.1 cfm/ft 2-5 psi
WD50
Wastewater Treatment
Linear Compressor (SL44 w/ED224 diffuser) 1/3-hp Diaphragm Compressor (AQ10 w/ED224 diffuser) 3/4-hp Vane Compressor (AQ7 w/ED224 diffuser) 31/2-hp Regenerative Blower (S63 w/ED224 diffuser) 5-hp Rotary Lobe Blower (RB32A w/ED224 diffuser) Air Air Air Air Air 3 10 10 3 10 95 159 952 4,760 15,223 2.36 2.43 .85 .78 .37 Flowrate: Pressure Loss: up to 10 cfm 15"
ED224
Hauling: Algae Tanks

1/3-hp Diaphragm Compressor (AQ10) 3/4-hp Vane Compressor (AQ7) 31/2-hp Regenerative Blower (S63)
BWD 10
Oxygen Generator (SOG84)
Air Air Air O2, 90%
10 10 3 3
311 1,864 8,736 734
1.23 .46 .37 6.70
.2.6 cfm/ft 20"
General Aeration: Hatchery, Grow-Out, Bait, Ponds, Lakes, Waste Water, Low-Density Hauling
Linear Compressor (SL44) 1/3-hp Diaphragm Compressor (AQ7) 3/4-hp Vane Compressor (AQ7) 1-hp Regenerative Blower (S41) 31/2-hp Regenerative Blower (S63) Air Air Air Air Air 3 10 10 3 3 72 199 1,348 2,256 6,810 2.46 1.92 .57 .52 .41 Flowrate: Pressure Loss: 1 cfm/ft 10"
AS235
Pure Gas (Oxygen), Hauling Tanks, Degassing Towers, Protein Skimmers

1/3-hp Diaphragm Compressor (AQ10) Oxygen Generator (SOG84)
Air O2, 90%
3 3
66 615
5.67 7.97
1 cfm/ft 15"
AS230
Pure Gas (Oxygen), Hauling Tanks, Aquariums, Hatcheries, Back-up Aeration

3/4-hp
DT12R
Vane Compressor (AQ7 w/fine-pore diffuser) Air 5-hp Rotary Lobe Blower (RB32A, w/fine-pore diffuser) Air Oxygen Generator (SOG84 w/fine-pore diffuser) O2, 90%
10 3 3
2,457 10,192 1,025
.39 .50 5.04
.01.2 cfm/ft 4 psi
Pure Gas (Oxygen, Carbon Dioxide), High-Density Hauling, Holding/Grow-Out Tanks, Emergency Aeration
Oxygen Generator (SOG84 w/AS303 diffusers) AS404 O2, 90% 3 3,624 1.83 Flowrate: Pressure Loss: .1 Lpm/sq.in. 25 psi
Note: Values reflect efficient farming practices, but should be used for comparison rather than budgetary purposes.
*Air compression unit, diffusers, electricity (at 10/kWh) and annual maintenance. Analysis Method: Equivalent Uniform Annual Cost (EUAC), 5-year time period. **For depths greater than 4 feet there is a risk of gas bubble disease in intensive systems.
Aeration
Diffusers
71
Air Diffusers
Invented Here
As close to perfect as diffusers get!

Sweetwater diffusers are the highest-quality ceramic-type air diffusers on the market today. They're machined from a solid block of glass-bonded silica. Because dust and dirt particles up to 30 microns in size will pass right through these diffusers, there's no need for expensive air filters. And with an air resistance of less than .25 psi, Sweetwater glass-bonded diffusers are compatible with economical low-pressure blowers. They produce a uniform medium/fine bubble and are very resistant to clogging. And when cleaning does become necessary because of a buildup of calcium precipitate or bacteria, an acid bath restores them to like-new performance. Note that water pH in excess of 9.0 will shorten the diffuser life. Self-weighting when used with typical tubing lengths.
Beware of imitations.
Sweetwater diffusers are the original 2,000F glass-bonded silica diffusers introduced by AES in 1984. You may come across other diffusers that copy our sizes, descriptions and even our photos, but it takes more than flattering imitation to compete with the best. Look for the name and the two-year warranty. Made in USA.
Sweetwater Medium Pore Diffuser Specifications

Body......................................................................2,000F Glass-Bonded Silica Fitting............................ABS (AS1 & AS2) Linear Polyethylene or Special Order Maximum Pore Size..................................................140 microns (.0055 inches) Bubble Size. .................................................................. 13 mm (.04.15 inches) Nominal Particle Retention. ................................................................50 microns Service Life at pH Below 8.0................................................................ Unlimited Flexural Strength...................................................................................2,500 psi
Length* in cm Width* in cm Suggested cfm
aes This is the lbs of fish supported. See Tech Talk 84.
AS1 AS2 AS3 ALS3 AS4 AS5S AS5L ALS5 AS8S AS8L ALS8 ALR8 AS15S AS15L ALR15 AS23S AS23L ALR23 AS30S AS30L ALR30 ASW88S** ASW88L**
1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 3.0 3.0
4 4 5 5 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 23 23 23 30 30 30 8 8
.50 .75 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0
1.3 2 2.5 2.5 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8
.05 .10 .20 .20 .25 .30 .30 .30 .35 .35 .35 .35 .50 .50 .50 .75 .75 .75 1.00 1.00 1.00 .70 .70
aes 1.5 3 5 5 7 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 20 20 20 27 27 27 19 19
3/16" 3/16"
Air Supply Connection
O.D. (4 mm), ABS O.D. (4 mm), ABS 3/16" O.D. (4 mm), PE 1/4" NPT, PE 3/16" O.D. (4 mm), PE 3/16" O.D. (4 mm), PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 1/4" NPT, PE 3/16" O.D. (4 mm), PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 1/4" NPT, PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 3/8" O.D. (9 mm), PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 3/8" O.D. (9 mm), PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 3/8" O.D. (9 mm), PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/4" O.D. (6 mm), PE 3/8" O.D. (6 mm), PE
Actual Wt
.03 lb .06 lb .10 lb .10 lb .21 lb .16 lb .16 lb .16 lb .39 lb .39 lb .39 lb .39 lb .75 lb .75 lb .75 lb 1.35 lbs 1.35 lbs 1.35 lbs 1.50 lbs 1.50 lbs 1.50 lbs .70 lb .70 lb
$ 1.62 2.35 3.30 4.00 4.00 4.83 4.83 4.90 6.44 6.44 7.20 7.49 10.57 10.57 12.86 15.05 15.05 18.32 18.15 18.15 21.65 21.54 21.54
1.38/20+ 2.00/20+ 2.80/20+ 3.40/20+ 3.60/20+ 4.10/20+ 4.10/20+ 4.17/20+ 5.80/10+ 5.80/10+ 6.48/10+ 6.74/10+ 9.51/20+ 9.51/20+ 11.58/10+ 13.50/10+ 13.50/10+ 16.41/10+ 16.34/10+ 16.34/10+ 19.49/10+ 19.30/10+ 19.30/10+
1.30/100+ 1.65/100+ 2.31/100+ 2.80/100+ 3.20/100+ 3.38/100+ 3.38/100+ 3.43/100+ 5.15/50+ 5.15/50+ 6.12/50+ 6.36/50+ 8.99/50+ 8.99/50+ 10.93/50+ 12.80/25+ 12.80/25+ 15.57/25+ 15.42/25+ 15.42/25+ 18.41/25+ 18.31/25+ 18.31/25+
*Dimensions of length and width are 1/8" (3 mm). **Fitting is in center of 3" x 3" dimension. The suggested cfm shown above is typical for aquaculture; higher cfm amounts will create larger bubbles. Nonstandard fittings are available on request. PE is high density linear polyethylene. ABS is green plastic.
Aquatic Eco-Systems Air Diffusers, Flat Ceramic

Economical price, robust performance.
These ultra-fine pore diffusers are ideal for pure gas applications (oxygen, carbon dioxide), high-density hauling, holding/growout tanks and emergency aeration. Choose from aluminum or nylon 6/glass composite (plastic) base. Aluminum models are best for long-term, heavy-duty use. Plastic models are tested at -20C to ensure performance and integrity. They also give you the convenience of two 1/4" barb positions to choose from, and their preinstalled check valve prevents damage.
dyfp16
DYPFP4 DYPFP8 DYPFP12 DYPFP24 DYFP8 DYFP12 DYFP16 DYFP24
Plastic Base, 4" x 2.5" Plastic Base, 8" x 2.5" Plastic Base, 12" x 2.5" Plastic Base, 24" x 2.5" Aluminum Base, 8" x 2.5" Aluminum Base, 12" x 2.5" Aluminum Base, 16" x 2.5" Aluminum Base, 24" x 2.5"
Diffusing Area (L x W)
$ 31.69 45.29 58.87 97.64 70.60 87.98 104.93 142.05
Each
28.53/10+ 40.77/10+ 52.99/6+ 87.88/6+ 63.54/10+ 79.19/10+ 94.44/6+ 127.85/6+
72
Aeration
Sweetwater Fine-Pore Diffusers/AES Diffusers
Fine-Pore Diffusers for Ozone and Pure Oxygen by Sweetwater Invented Here
Sweetwater fine-pore diffusers are the same high quality as our regular Sweetwater diffusers. The difference is in the smaller pore size, which produces finer bubbles. Sweetwater fine-pore diffusers do require higher pressure (about 5" H 2O more) and more frequent cleaning than our regular pore diffusers, so they are not typically recommended for regular aeration. The bubble uniformity is excellent. The CP part numbers are fitted with CPVC for use with mild ozone concentrations. The SS part numbers are fitted with stainless steel for use with the strongest ozone and carry a 1-year warranty. Made in USA.
Length (in.) (cm) Width (in.) (cm) Suggested cfm
Sweetwater Fine-Pore Diffuser Specifications

Body .........................................................................2,000 Heat-Bonded Silica Fitting .............................................................................. ABS, PE, CPVC or SS Maximum Pore Size ..........................................................................80 microns Bubble Size ........................................................................................ 0.52 mm Nominal Particle Retention ................................................................25 microns Service Life at pH Below 8.0 ............................................................... Unlimited Flexural Strength ..................................................................................3,500 psi
AS10 AS20 AS3F AS40 AS50 AS80 ALR80 ALR80SS ALR80SS4 AS150 ALR150 ALR150CP ALR150SS AS230 ALR230 ALR230CP ALR230SS AS300 ALR300CP ALR300SS
1.5 1.5 2.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
4 4 5 4 8 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 23 23 23 23 30 30 30
.50 .75 1.00 1.50 1.00 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
1.3 2.0 2.5 4.0 2.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
.05 .10 .20 .25 .30 .35 .35 .35 .35 .50 .50 .50 .50 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.00 1.00 1.00
aes 15 30 60 75 90 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 300 300 300
O.D., ABS O.D., ABS 3/16" O.D., PE 3/16" O.D., PE 1/4" O.D., PE 1/4" O.D., PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/2" NPT, SS 1/4" NPT, SS 1/4" O.D., PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/2" NPT, CPVC 1/2" NPT, SS 1/4" O.D., PE 1/2" NPT, PE 1/2" NPT, CPVC 1/2" NPT SS 1/4" O.D., PE 1/2" NPT, CPVC 1/2" NPT, SS
3/16" 3/16"
Air Supply Connection
Actual Wt
.03 lb .06 lb .10 lb .21 lb .16 lb .39 lb .39 lb .39 lb .39 lb .75 lb .75 lb .78 lb .875 lb 1.35 lbs 1.35 lbs 1.38 lbs 1.48 lbs 1.50 lbs 1.56 lbs 1.68 lbs
$ 2.29 2.77 4.18 6.30 5.23 7.60 9.95 27.90 24.10 13.05 14.88 17.91 44.90 20.90 22.20 25.08 49.50 23.60 29.39 56.10
1.95/20+ 2.35/20+ 3.69/20+ 5.67/20+ 4.71/10+ 6.84/10+ 8.96/10+ 25.11/10+ 21.69/10+ 11.75/10+ 13.40/10+ 16.12/10+ 41.04/10+ 19.13/10+ 19.98/10+ 22.57/10+ 44.86/10+ 21.27/10+ 26.45/10+ 50.49/10+
Inches Water Pressure
20 10
Fine 0) (AS15 S15L) Pore Pore (A Regular
Typical Range
*Note: 100% pure O2.
CFM
.25
.50
.75
1.0
Air Diffusers by Aquatic Eco-Systems

Keep any system aerated with AES' line of air diffusers. These offer great efficiency at an affordable price, and with our wide selection, you'll find the right fit for any application. Bubble sizes from 3 mm down to 100 microns. One-year warranty.
aes This is the lbs of fish supported. See Tech Talk 84.
Four different styles:

Ceramic diffusers are ideal for pure gas applications (oxygen, carbon dioxide), high-density hauling, holding/growout tanks and emergency aeration. Rubber poly (EPDM) diffusers perform best in pure gas applications (oxygen), hauling tanks, aquariums, hatcheries and backup aeration. Aluminum diffusers are intended for general aeration: hatchery, growout, bait, ponds, lakes, wastewater and low-density hauling. Rubber diffusers are best employed in wastewater treatment.
DYRD16
DYMD15
See AquaticEco.com for complete specs!

DYCBB DYCD7SM DYCD9SM DYCHP4 DYCHP6 DYCHP8 DYCHP12 DYMD15 DYMD20 DYMD20M DYRD8 DYRD12 DYRD16 DYRD20 HDPE Connector Block, 1/4" FNPT $ 21.00 Quad Aluminum Oxide, 6.7" x 1.6" (x 4) 76.93 Quad Aluminum Oxide, 8.7" x 1.6" (x 4) 88.69 Cylinder, Ceramic, 4" x 2" 38.25 Cylinder, Ceramic, 6" x 2" 44.44 Cylinder, Ceramic, 8" x 2" 48.87 Cylinder, Ceramic, 12" x 2" 64.65 EPDM Membrane, 15" x 1" 17.28 EPDM Membrane, 20" x 1" 23.23 EPDM Membrane, 20" x 1" (x 4) 109.53 Rubber Poly, 8" x 1.5" 12.28 Rubber Poly, 12" x 1.5" 17.50 Rubber Poly, 16" x 1.5" 22.78 Rubber Poly, 20" x 1.5" 27.79
DYCD9SM
DYCBB
DYCBB with four DYCD9SM diffusers attached. DYCHP12
Aeration
Diffusers
73
Generation II Diffusers by Sweetwater

Perfect for custom manufacturing.
Invented Here
Air Curtains
These flexible aquarium air diffusers produce a small curtain of air bubbles. Diffusers are rubber porous tubing with a flexible lead weight insert to counteract buoyancy. 5-mm air supply connection. They can be bent and remain in almost any shape.

Sweetwater diffusers manufactured by AES quickly became and still remain the standard of the aquaculture industry for diffused air aeration. The Generation II series is the same glass-bonded diffuser that is so resistant to clogging. Generation II diffusers give the added flexibility of changing the air diffuser fittings in the field. All diffusers have 1/8" FNPT threads that accept MNPT fittings, either straight or elbows. Use tubing with a smaller I.D. to act as a valve, restricting the volume of air delivered to the diffuser. Use a larger I.D. tubing in applications where the tubing is long and/ or too restrictive. To make the diffuser lie flat in deep water, use an elbow fitting and put a weight on the tubing to counteract its buoyancy.

AC30 AC45 AC60 AC75 AC90
12" (30 cm) 18" (45 cm) 24" (60 cm) 30" (75 cm) 36" (90 cm)
Lpm
.6 1 1.4 1.7 2
$ 2.88 3.45 4.25 4.95 5.78
Each
2.60 3.07 3.83 4.45 5.20
12+
ASI-3 ASI-5 ASI-8 ASI-15 ASI-23 ASI-30
2 3 3 6 9 12
Length in cm
5 7.6 7.6 15 23 30
1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Width in cm
2.5 2.5 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
aes 5 8 10 14 20 27
Avg. cfm
.2 .3 .35 .5 .75 1.0
$ 3.05 4.20 6.06 10.37 14.82 20.26
Each
2.75 3.78 5.45 9.33 13.34 18.24
20+
1.58 3.15 4.55 7.77 11.12 15.20 1 Lpm = .035 cfm; 1 cfm = 28.3 Lpm; 1 inch = 2.54 cm; 1 psi = 27.7" H2O
100+
All above do not include air supply connections, which must be ordered separately.
Wedge-Lock Diffusers
aes This is the lbs of fish supported. See Tech Talk 84. Wedge-Lock is a modular system of ultra-fine bubble diffusers that fit together to form a bank of up to 8 units. Point Four diffuser modules "twist and lock" together to form an airtight seal without the use of tools. Order one end set ( ENSE ) per "bank" (DBU) of Wedge-Locks. The streamlined wedge shape is more stable in tanks with high water flow. Single base (unassembled) diffusers measure 5.4" x 6.6" x 1.25" and weigh 1.8 lbs. Recommended flow 1.6 cfh (.75 Lpm), maximum flow 3.4 cfh (1.6 Lpm). Recommended operating pressure is 2235 psi, maximum pressure is 50 psi*. UV-resistant plastic. Inlet is 1/4" barb fitting. One-year warranty.
*Above 50 psi (3.4 bars) the diffuser can break.

Optimum Flow aes * Diffusing Area (in/cm) (cfh/Lpm)
Air Supply Connectors, HDPE

Male Adapters, Straight, 2-Barb
62001-2 62007-2 62009-2 62001L 62007L 62009L
1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
62001-2
DBU Base 5" D. x 1" H / 12.7 x 2.5 3.4/1.6 ENSE End Set
2 lbs $ 64.10 57.69/10+ 1 lb 57.38 52.22/10+
Ship Wt
NPT x 3/16" Barb NPT x 1/4" Barb NPT x 3/8" Barb NPT x 3/16" Barb NPT x 1/4" Barb NPT x 3/8" Barb
$ .25 .25 .25 $ .70 .70 .98
62001l
Elbows, 4-Barb
1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
See Index for other connectors.
ense
dbu
Ultra-Fine Bubble Diffusers

The original is still the best!
These high-quality, resin-bonded, ceramic plate diffusers are recommended for pure gas, including oxygen and carbon dioxide. They produce a cloud of ultra-fine bubbles, 100500 microns in size. 50% oxygen transfer at a depth of 4' is typical! The diffusers are set in enamel-coated aluminum frames. Operating range is 2550 psi*. Two-year warranty.
AS101 AS202 AS303 AS404
Optimum Flow Ship aes * Diffusing Area (in/cm) (cfh/Lpm) Wt
50 100 200 400
6 x 11/8 / 15 x 2.9 1.6/.75 121/8 x 11/8 / 30 x 2.9 3.2/1.50 121/8 x 23/8 / 30 x 6 6.4/3.00 241/4 x 23/8 / 60 x 6 12.7/6.00
1 lb $ 51.45 43.73/10+ 2 lbs 69.78 59.32/10+ 3 lbs 149.00 126.65/6+ 5 lbs 233.00 198.05/6+
Typical Applications
quaculture: For supplemental oxygen to boost fish densities and for emergency A backup. For fish transport by truck, barge, boat or plane. Anesthetizing using carbon dioxide: For fish handling and processing. Waste water and effluent treatment: Reduce BOD and COD in ponds, channels and large ponds. Ozone injection: Efficient injection of ozone into water.

as404 as303 as202 as101
*Above 50 psi (3.4 bars) the diffuser can break.
74
Aeration
Diffusers/Diffuser Accessories
Invented Here
Diffuser Hose
Air Diffusers, in Quantity

These inexpensive molded diffusers are sold in bulk quantity only, by the pack. 3/16" barb inlets. Made for hobbyists and aquarium use. aes Each 12+ AA1 1", 120/Pk .05 cfm 1 $ 19.56 16.63 AA4 4", 24/Pk .2 cfm 3 14.03 11.93 AA6 6", 24/Pk .3 cfm 4 19.90 16.92 AA8 8", 24/Pk .4 cfm 6 24.59 20.90 AA12 12", 24/Pk .6 cfm 8 34.82 29.60
Self-weighted Bio-Weave diffuser hose is for introducing air and oxygen into hauling tanks, culture tanks, lakes or wherever long flexible diffusion is needed. It's made of a strong, woven Dacron material that will last for years. Operating range is .2.6 cfm per foot. The diffuser surface is a soft fiber that flexes easily. Because Bio-Weave is self-weighted, placement and removal of these large diffusers is simple. We make these medium-bubble diffusers with 3/4" garden hose fittings (a cap on the male end and a 1/4" male barb adapter on the female fitting). Bio-Weave has about a 20" H 2O resistance to air flow, so it is marginally compatible with regenerative blowers. Ship weight is about 1 lb/foot. One-year warranty. Made in USA. See Index for garden hose adapters. BWD10 BWD20 BWD30 BWD40 BWD50 BWD60 BWD100 BWD150 BSS38

aes 1' L 15 2' L 29 3' L 44 4' L 58 5' L 73 6' L 87 10' L 146 15' L 218 Brass 3/8" Barb x MGHT
$ 36.27 40.32 55.86 69.37 84.82 97.05 152.47 216.11 3.64
Each
32.64 36.29 50.28 62.44 76.34 87.35 137.23 194.50 3.35
6+
29.02 32.26 44.69 55.50 67.86 77.64 121.98 172.89 3.17

bwd10
24+
aa4 aa12
aa1 aa8 aa6
Diffusers, Cylindrical
These diffusers are made from fused alumina. They produce a bubble size of 12 mm and require a higher pressure than Sweetwater medium-pore diffusers. They have a molded square rubber support on each end that supports and protects them from tank bottoms and protects the tank or liner from the diffuser. They fit both 3/16" and 1/4" tubing and are 1.2" in diameter. aes Length Cfm Each 12+ AD32 3.2" .3 5.0 $ 4.20 3.99 AD42 4.2" .4 6.5 7.98 6.75 AD52 5.2" .5 8.2 8.77 8.33
ad42
ad52
Disposable Plastic Diffusers

These disposable diffusers produce very fine bubbles. They cause no disease carryover and, of course, require no cleaning. Not self-weighted. The reusable insert (AD5) is sold separately and fits 3/16" I.D. aquarium tubing. Packed 100 per bag. AD3 AD5
ad32
Diffusers Insert
$ 23.90 13.65
Bag
21.51 12.29
10+
ad5
1/2"
ad3
1"
Diffuser Bumpers
11/2"
Protect diffusers from abrasives or protect a tank from abrasive diffusers. Use two bumpers for each diffuser. Made of Buna 70 for an easy stretch over 11/2" square diffusers. Sold in packs of 10. DB10 $ 4.82/Pk 4.34/5+ 3.86/10+
ALR8 With Bumpers
ad3 w/ad5
Air Diffuser, Low Cost

This glass bead air diffuser is resin-bonded and produces uniform small bubbles. It may be cleaned with acid to extend its life. It is 1/2" diameter by 13/4" long. Has a buterate stem for use with 3/16" tubing. Airflow range is .01 to .06 cfm. A good value in an American-made diffuser. 3/4" aes AD9 .5 $ .89 .79/20+ .71/100+ 3/
1 4"
Important
Tech Talk/Diffusers/Diffuser Accessories
Aeration
75
Tech Talk 53
Cleaning Diffusers
Sweetwater air diffusers, made of glass-bonded silica, are virtually indestructible and will give many years of service. The only maintenance normally required is periodic cleaning. The frequency of cleaning will be determined by the mineral and organic content of the water in which the air diffusers are used. In clean, cold, soft water, cleaning may only be necessary every 2 or 3 years. In very hard water or water high in organics, it could be necessary as often as every 2 months. 1. Remove from service and blow out excess water. If fouled with barnacles or other gross foreign material, scrape or hose off. 2. If you have a 1/2" NPT white fitting on the end of your diffuser, immerse the diffuser portion, not the fitting, completely in undiluted muriatic acid for a sufficient time to dissolve the clogging material. This may take from one minute to eight hours in the most extreme cases. Be very careful when using acid! Wear eye, face and hand protection and have clean water available for rinsing and acid diluting in the case of an acid splash or spill. 3. After the clogging material has been dissolved, rinse thoroughly before reuse. 4. Discard the used acid after reducing its strength to a neutral pH by diluting with at least ten times as much water as acid. Add acid to water; never add water to acid.
"Paper" Diffuser
Excellent for shrimp culture.
The XW "paper" diffuser is inexpensive, made of polyethylene, rolls fl at for easy shipping and produces fine bubbles. It's compatible with regenerative blowers and has an airflow resistance of approximately 10" of H2O when new. Continuous lengths of up to 50' per inlet can be used. This diffuser is popular for shrimp larvae culture tanks and other applications where a long disposable diffuser is desired. The typical air flowrate is .1 to .5 cfm/ft. The AES Number is 6 per foot. I.D. is 7/8". Fits over 3 /4" barb. T30R cable ties have a max bundle diameter of 11/4" and 6" length, 100/pack. See index for more sizes of cable ties. XW 103B T30R Diffuser Adapter Cable Ties $ .34/ft 1.36 4.35 .30/100+ 1.21/10+
XW
103B Adapter w/T30R Tie
Universal Diffuser Mount

Provides 3/4" FNPT threaded connection. Engineered for 28" metal or plastic, thick or thin wall pipe. Can be glued to PVC or ABS pipe. Easy to install.
Hauling Tank Diffusers

These diffusers are specifically made for fish hauling tanks and are virtually indestructible. Diffuser frames are stainless steel and fi tted with fi ne pore diffuser hose, which works well with pure oxygen systems. A 1/4" inlet barb fi tting is included. Made in Germany. FD8575 FD8580 FD8585 FD8590 FD8595 25" x 22" 28" x 22" 33" x 22" 36" x 22" 39" x 22"
Ship Wt FD8560
The universal diffuser mount for disc diffusers is designed to accept a 3/4" MNPT diffuser connection. Installation simply requires drilling a 11/4" diameter hole, deburring the hole, installing the diffuser mount and screwing in the diffuser. The universal diffuser mount may be used for mounting on the top or bottom of the lateral but is not recommended for sidewall diffuser mounting. ED328 $ 3.90 3.45/10+
$ 289.35 304.62 320.00 335.38 304.62
Snap-Cap Diffuser, 3"

This coarse bubble diffuser is very clog resistant. It uses a snap-on flexible diaphragm with built-in check valve. Handles fl owrates up to 10 cfm @ 12" H2O loss. About 2" high x 35/32" diameter with a 3/8" MNPT and a 1/2" MNPT adapter included. AD15 $ 19.64 17.68/6+
Diffuser Manifold for Round Tanks

Putting air diffusers in a round tank upsets the rotating, self-cleaning effect that makes round tanks with center drains so desirable. Here's a solution! This six-diffuser manifold with deflector has been designed to induce circular flow in a round tank while adding oxygen and assisting the self-cleaning effect. It requires 4.5 cfm at 1.2 psi (34" H2O min) and will supply approximately .12 lbs/O2/hour. It will connect directly to 1" PVC pipe and can be suspended over the side of tank to a depth of approximately 24" (standard length). The manifold is supplied with a ball valve for air control, a union for complete removal and six ALR23M diffusers. Ship weight 17 lbs. Made in USA. aes TM6 80 $ 199.28 179.35/4+
High-Efficiency Diffuser Tubing

Perfect for high-psi or oxygen uses.
This low-pressure, high-effi ciency rubber diffuser hose is made for aquaculture. Diffuser lengths of up to 20' per inlet are possible at low airflow rates. Tubing has a good oxygen transfer rate (average 2.5% per foot of water depth) with a head loss of only about 1 psi. This tubing is compatible with both regenerative blowers and linear air pumps. The gas flowrate is an average of .1.6 cfm/ft; higher and lower flows are possible. Produces a strong volume of mediumDT12R size bubbles (approximately 3 mm). For connections, use barb fittings with clamps. Hose ends may be heat-sealed or fitted with a plug and clamp. To counteract buoyancy, hold-downs or weights are required. No warranty due to individual clogging and fouling possibilities. Sold by the 50-m roll. DT12R DT14R
1/2" I.D., 1" O.D. 1/4" I.D., 1" O.D.
$ 253.25 270.00
76

Aeration
Diffusers/Tech Talk
Coarse Bubble Diffusers

5" diameter coarse bubble diffusers. Upgrade for smaller diameter diffusers.

Disc Diffuser, 9"

Designed to prevent blowout. High capacity airflow ranges to 20 cfm.
Engineered for maximum performance.

FlexAir disc diffuser bodies are made of high-strength polypropylene with 3/4" MNPT connections. Each diffuser has a minimum of 6,600 engineered air release orifices, which is up to 20% more than comparable models. The special design of the EPDM membrane, with its engineered thickness taper, results in full utilization of the membrane surface, even at low airflow operations. This results in improved oxygen transfer efficiency, along with maximum operational flexibility. The disc diffuser has an integral "triple" check valve to prevent fluid backflow. Normal airflow range is 05 cfm. Resistance is about 10" H2O when clean. FlexAir disc diffusers in stock have EPDM membranes installed and weigh 2 lbs. Made in USA. ED327 $ 20.52 18.42/10+
Environmental Dynamics, Inc. PermaCap 5 diffuser design offers greater unit capacity over small diameter diaphragm, coarse bubble diffusers. The body is ABS and diffusers are available with both 3/4" and 3/8" MNPT connections. The EPDM membrane is mechanically locked in place to prevent blowout. Airflow range is 020 cfm. Made in USA.

ED325 ED501
3/4" MNPT 3/8" MNPT
$ 8.80 8.80
Each
8.03 8.03
ed325
10+
Bubble Disk
These unique round air diffusers come in three sizes, each only 1" high with a 3/16" aquarium air line connection. aes Size Cfm Each 12+ BD3 3" .2 1 $ 4.60 3.91 BD4 4" .4 2 5.40 4.90 BD5 5" .7 4 7.00 6.46
bd3
Air Diffusers for Wastewater Treatment

AES features EDI diffuser systems, diffuser membranes and diffuser components for the most demanding wastewater aeration applications. These proven EDI products provide enhanced performance. AES also supplies EDI products for replacement or upgrade of most diffuser aeration systems. Replacement parts and upgrade equipment are available for AERCOR, Aqua-Aerobic , Ecologix, EDI Flexair, Flygt, Gummi Jager, GVA, OTT, Parkson BioFuser, Parkson Wyss, Sanitaire, Schreiber, SSI and mechanical aerators. Contact our wastewater department for more details.
EDI FlexAir T-Series fine bubble diffusers feature:

Airflow ranges from 040 cfm. Largest capacity airflow with greatest membrane area for fewer units required. MNPT 304 SS thread connection.
Tech Talk 80
Pure Oxygen or Aeration?
Aerators that spray water through the air or put bubbles in the water can typically compete with the economics of pure oxygen up to about 70% of saturation. Pure oxygen becomes more economical when raising oxygen to levels above 70%. Pure oxygen can be a very cost-effective tool for raising fish. It can unclutter the culture tank, reduce suspended solids, improve feed-conversion ratios and reduce stress. When used in large intensive culture systems, liquid oxygen can be purchased at a low price. It's especially cost-effective when used to raise the ambient dissolved oxygen a few parts per million to or above the saturation level. But a high-tech approach is not necessary if a low-tech one will do. Simple old-fashioned aeration (done correctly) will provide 1 lb of dissolved oxygen (at 75% of saturation) for about one kilowatt of energy. That's about 10 cents per lb. Can you buy pure oxygen that cheap? If you can buy it that cheap, will 100% of it be absorbed, or will you lose some through escaping bubbles, leaks, etc.? Is a water pump or other energy source required? A 1-horsepower water pump by itself can burn another 10 cents per hour. However, if your operation is large enough or intensive enough to warrant aerating with pure oxygen, it can be a great tool when used wisely. Here are a few tips:
3 /4"
EDI FlexAir diffusers are durable. The special inlet is molded from high-strength ABS and is permanently bonded to a PVC membrane support tube to create an integral diffuser body. Manufactured utilizing the most advanced technology, tests have shown that EDI membrane diffusers deliver increases of 15 to 50% over competitive products. EPDM elastomer membrane was specifically developed for municipal and industrial applications. For applications with high concentrations of oils and solvents, specially engineered urethane membranes are available (please inquire). ED224 ED226 ED220 ED230 ED240
Length
24" 26" 20" 30" 40"
Diameter
2.44" 2.44" 3.5" 3.5" 3.5"
08 cfm 08 cfm 020 cfm 030 cfm 040 cfm
Airflow
Ship Wt
$ 34.73 34.73 37.89 45.26 53.68
Each
32.63 32.63 34.73 42.10 51.57
6+
e sure to total all pure oxygen costs when figuring cost effectiveness, B including storage vessel rent, water pumping cost and oxygen loss. If you're thinking about making your own oxygen, include the actual cost of compressed air, back-up compressor and increased generator size, plus repairs. Use a saturation technique that is at least 80% efficient. Inject supersaturated water over a wide area to prevent large oxygen gradients in the fish tank. In a recirculating system you will need to "aerate" (de-gas), in addition to oxygenation, to remove carbon dioxide.
ed224
Injectors/Eductors/Tech Talk
Aeration
77
Turbo-Venturi Injector
These inexpensive venturis are ideal for small protein skimmers and koi ponds. Made of ozone-resistant ABS plastic, both models are FNPT inlet and MNPT outlet. V12 V34

1/2" 3/4"
Venturi, Low Cost

Each 10+
NPT NPT
330 gpm 540 gpm
$ 20.30 22.25
18.88 20.69
Our venturi fittings were engineered to entrain the greatest amount of air with the least resistance to water pressure. When pumping water, these may be used to draw in liquids or gases, including low-strength ozone. Made of PVC with standard slip connections. Venturi 4734 is fiber-reinforced plastic and has female slip ends. Made in USA.

v12
4738 4732 4734
Venturi Tee, PVC $ 8.60 Venturi Tee, PVC 11.02 Venturi Plastic 13.88
Each
7.74 9.91 12.52

4734
10+
3/16"
Male Barb
Mixing Eductors
It's easy to multiply the mixing force of pumped water. This nozzle requires as little as 7.5 gpm to draw in five times more. Molded of glass-filled polypropylene with smooth surfaces. Recommended flowrates shown are for between 10 and 50 psi.

4738: 3/4" in x 1" out 4732: 11/2" in and out Both are female slip with 3/4" air inlet.
3/4"
Male Slip
H2O Flow (gpm)
6 4 2
4738 Venturi Tee Depth Limits
6 4 2
ed3
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Two Gallons In
Vacuum - Inches H2O* This is the greatest depth at which the Venturi may be located. The shallower the depth, the greater the air volume.
Pump Pressure Required (psi)
ED2 ED1 ED3
3/8" MNPT 3/4" MNPT 11/2" MNPT
OAL
4.5" 4.5" 10"
717 1330 3375
Gpm
$ 31.30 24.70 59.15
Each
29.11 22.98 55.01
10+
Air In
8 8
Water & Air Out
4738
One Gallon Pumped Five Gallons Circulated
Venturi Injectors
Widely used for the injection of air, oxygen, and ozone. Also compatible with liquids. Tests have shown that when installed properly, injectors can transfer ozone into water with efficiencies as high as 99%. These are constructed of PVDF Kynar and are ozone compatible. Mazzei venturis have no moving parts and provide trouble-free operation. All except V514 include a 1/4" barbed ozone-safe check valve. Maximum operating pressure at 100F (38C) is 400 psi. Made in USA. V384 V584 V978 V1584 V514
Inlet/Outlet MNPT
1/2" MNPT 3/4" Barb
Flow Thru Injector @15 psi In/5 psi Out
1" MNPT 11/2" MNPT 2" MNPT
1 gpm 4 gpm 7 gpm 31 gpm 57 gpm
Air Suction @15 psi In/5 psi Out
1 5 9 72 394
Each
$ 67 54 125 170 370
60 49 112 153 348
4+
ed2
v1584
Tech Talk 63
Venturis
A well-designed venturi working in shallow water to aspirate air may cause as little as 15% additional head pressure and as little as 10% reduction in volume pumped. Therefore, a venturi can be a very economical device to operate, especially when it completely eliminates another piece of equipment, such as a chemical metering pump, an air pump or an ozone unit's air pump. They are particularly useful when injecting chemicals and gases that are aggressive in nature and would require special materials for the pumping device. As a venturi draws air into a depth of about 2 feet, there will be increased water pressure resistance and a reduction in volume pumped. When used with low-pressure pumps, the increase in head causes such a large reduction in volume that the venturi application becomes impractical. When sucking air the deeper the depth, the greater the pressure needed. When installed properly, venturi injectors can transfer ozone into water with efficiencies as high as 99%. Venturis have no moving parts and provide trouble-free operation.
Flow
Venturis offer an efficient and reliable way to inject virtually any gas or liquid into water.

We give our customers free advice over the telephone. Just call our Technical Department at 407-598-1401, give us your customer number and keep the conversation under ten minutes. For in-depth services, see Design and Engineering Services on page 4.
78
Aeration
Tech Talks
Tech Talk 7
Pure Oxygen vs Diffused Air
Cost is one of the biggest considerations. This generalized chart should help to quantify the difference between using an air blower with diffusers and using pure oxygen with a water pump and oxygen saturator (oxygen cone). Also see Tech Talk 80.
10 9 8 Dissolved Oxygen, MG/L (PPM) 7 6 5 4 3 2 Cost Using a Blower
Oxygen generator running cost. Cost of pure oxygen is fixed at this cost regardless of saturation level. Water saturation point (this example).
This Generalized Chart Is Based On:

lectric cost of 8 per kWh. E Sweetwater standard diffusers at 40" H2O. Water temperature 80F (27C), sea level. Fresh water @ 24 lbs/day oxygen concentrator. 40-gpm pump using 5 amps @ 115V.

ter etwa Swe
& Blower
ting C Diffuser Opera
ost
Example: Cost/100 lbs

Oxygen generator running cost including water pump cost, maintenance & depriciation.
1 ppm $ 1 $7 5 ppm $ 7 $7 7 ppm $ 18 $7 10 ppm No Way $7 This cost comparison illustrates that blowers are more efficient at lower D.O. saturation values and pure oxygen is more efficient at higher D.O. saturation values. Note that the cost of adding pure oxygen remains almost the same until reaching higher supersaturation levels. Pumping pressures, and therefore cost, go up beyond high supersaturation levels.
Aeration
Oxygen
1 2 4
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Cost Per 100 Punds of Oxygen (Dollars)
Look online at AquaticEco.com to see additional Tech Talks.
Tech Talk 52
Aeration Energy Consumption
Mechanical aerators break water into droplets to produce liquid/air contact, while underwater diffusers introduce bubbles from a depth to achieve oxygen transfer and mixing. Bubble type aeration systems are replacing many mechanical aerators because of their low maintenance, reliability, safety, flexibility and overall efficiency. They excel where small amounts of aeration, circulation and carbon dioxide degassing are needed in many locations. Bubble aerators are also better at removing gases, such as ammonia and carbon dioxide. Diffusers are made to deliver either coarse (approximately 6 mm), medium (approximately 3 mm) or fine (approximately 1 mm) air bubbles. Coarse-bubble systems require the lowest air pressure and are very resistant to clogging but are about a third as efficient as medium-bubble systems in transferring oxygen to the water. The medium-bubble diffuser requires only slightly higher air pressure, but its superior oxygen transfer more than compensates for the increase in maintenance. The fine-bubble diffuser's superior oxygen transfer usually does not compensate for its higher pressure and maintenance requirements. Fine-bubble diffusers are typically chosen for pure oxygen or ozone systems where pressure requirements are less important than transfer efficiency. Overall, when aerating with air, medium-bubble diffusers are the most popular among aquaculturists. Diffuser clogging can occur from the inside of medium and fine pore diffusers by dust and dirt particles carried by the air supply if an air inlet filter is not used. But clogging is most often due to calcium carbonate deposits (this source of plugging is prevalent in hard water and salt water). Another source of plugging is bacterial slime, which also forms on the external surface of the diffuser. Replacing medium- and fine-bubble diffusers with coarse-bubble diffusers might seem like a good way to avoid periodic cleaning, but it's not very cost effective. Let's work out the economics on a 10-horsepower system: If a 10-horsepower, medium-bubble aeration system can support 40,000 lbs of fish, a coarse-bubble system would require 30 horsepower! Electricity currently costs about $70 per horsepower per month in our area. This would make the utility cost rise from $700 a month to $2,100that's an extra $16,800 per year paid to the power company. An additional 20 horsepower in blowers would need to be purchased, as well as a larger diameter air-distribution pipe, if coarse-bubble diffusers were chosen over medium-bubble diffusers.
System Design with Medium-Bubble Diffusers
Diffuser placement should allow for easy removal, and time should be allotted to clean all the diffusers in one section at one time. This not only reduces the aggravation created by multiple individual cleanings, but also it suggests when to schedule the next cleaning. With our Sweetwater glass-bonded diffusers, frequency of cleaning can range between monthly in very hard water to once per year in soft water. Aquatic Eco-Systems introduced the low-pressure, low-maintenance, medium-bubble air diffuser to the aquaculture industry in 1978. Our glass-bonded silica, medium-pore diffuser is still the standard. We're always looking for a better diffuser; that is, finer bubbles, lower pressure loss, self-weighting, no clogs and less money. When we find one, we'll let you know. If you find one better than the Sweetwater diffusers, please let us know.
A Short Course in Fine Bubbles

Lesson 1
20mm
This large bubble (20 mm) has a volume of 4.19 cm3 and a surface area of 12.6 cm2.
Lesson 2
3mm
296 small bubbles (3 mm) could be made from the large bubble in Lesson 1. They would have a total surface area of 83.6 cm2. This is 6.6 times the surface area of the large bubble.
Lesson 3
Theoretically, with the small bubbles, 6.6 times as much water can be aerated with the same amount of air!
Solubility of Oxygen in Fresh Water

Use this table to air calibrate D.O. meters at sea level @ 29.92 inches Hg barometric pressure.
C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 F 32.0 34.8 39.2 42.8 46.4 50.0 53.6 57.2 60.8 64.4 68.0 71.6 75.2 78.8 83.4 86.0 89.6 93.2 96.8 100.4 104.0 O2 ppm 14.6 13.8 13.1 12.5 11.9 11.3 10.8 10.3 9.9 9.5 9.1 8.7 8.4 8.1 7.8 7.5 7.3 7.1 6.8 6.6 6.4
Pure Oxygen Accessories/Tech Talk
Aeration
79
Oxygen Flow Meters

These durable meters have a chrome-plated brass base, a precision flow-adjusting valve and a Lexan high impact hood. The MFR615 is a favorite for hauling tanks equipped for pure oxygen. Connections are 1/8" NPT female pipe thread on the side inlet and a 9/16" 18 male DISS bottom outlet. Price includes 1/4" barbed brass inlet and outlet adapter fittings. Approximate shipping weight of a single flow meter is 1 lb. Calibrated at 50 psi. Overall length without fitting is 51/2" (14 cm). MFR613 MFR614 MFR615 62007B .1253.5 Lpm .258 Lpm .515 Lpm 1/8" NPT x 1/4" Barb Brass Adapter $ 64.22 64.22 64.22 1.25
Each MFR615
Air/Oxygen Flow Meters, Acrylic

These acrylic, block style flow meters are clear and one piece, with built-in, brass, flow-regulating valves suitable for air or oxygen. The scale reads in cfh, cubic feet per hour at standard pressure (sea level) and temperature (68F, 20C). Connections are 1/8" NPT female. Price includes 1/4" barbed brass inlet and outlet adapter fittings. Approximate shipping weight of a single flow meter is 1 lb. Calibrated at 0 psi. See Tech Talk 13. MFR1 MFR5 MFR410 MFR440 MFR4150 MFR4200 .11.0 .55.0 110 440 15150 20200
Cfh OAL
59.72/5+ 59.72/5+ 59.72/5+ 1.10/30+
4.5" 4.5" 6.5" 6.5" 6.5" 6.5"
$ 60.64 60.64 76.16 76.16 76.16 76.16
Each
56.40 56.40 70.83 70.83 70.83 70.83
5+
MFR5 MFR4200
Flow Meter Systems

Manifolds are constructed from stainless steel and use our popular MFR series oxygen flow meters. They are easily mounted to hauling tanks or trucks and can be connected to form larger configurations. Manifolds are fully assembled, leak tested and include inlet/outlet barb fittings. Available in three flow ranges (add letter after part number to designate flow range): A (.125 to 3.5 Lpm), B (.25 to 8.0 Lpm), and C (.5 to 15 Lpm). MFR223 MFR228 2-Way Manifold 3-Way Manifold $ 312.50 435.16
Each MFR228
Flow Meter Manifolds

These flow meter manifolds are designed for use with pure oxygen. The manifolds and adjustable valves are chrome-plated. Flow meters measure from 0 to 6 Lpm and have 3/8" barb inlet/outlet connections. Pressure gauge included. One-year warranty. Imported. Not recommended for use with ultra-fine bubble diffusers. MFM2 MFM3 MFM4 MFM5 2-Meter Manifold 3-Meter Manifold 4-Meter Manifold 5-Meter Manifold
Ship Wt
$ 67.54 101.12 128.68 159.68
Each
60.73 91.98 115.76 144.62
5+
MFM3
Flow Meters
We carry both the solid acrylic block style flow meters and the Lexan round tube style. Both have a precision flow-adjusting valve with positive shut-off and a 100 psi maximum rating (when used in high-pressure systems, a pressure regulator is required).
Oxygen Manifolds
These manifolds can be used for hauling tanks, bait stores, hatcheries, etc. Nickel-plated brass with 1/4" barbed inlet/outlets. Knobs and barbs are plastic. One-year warranty. Imported. MFV3 MFV4 MFV5 3-Valve Manifold 4-Valve Manifold 5-Valve Manifold $ 30.80 34.40 41.95
Each MFV3
Safety Cap
Safety cap protects high-pressure oxygen cylinders even when in use. Rugged heavy-duty construction meets DOT, OSHA and MSHA requirements. Lockable design protects against theft (key lock included). Cap fits US standard oxygen bottles. UL-listed. 4-lb ship weight. OX10 $ 83.30
27.66 31.97 37.70
5+
Oxygen Accessories
OX5 OX6 OX7 OX8 "Y" w/o valves "Y" with valves Coupler FxF 1/4" Barb FxF $ 29.00 45.00 1.30 2.95
OX8
OX7
OX5
OX6
Oxygen Hose
Single-braid construction for conveying low pressure (to 200 psi) oxygen. Sold in 10' lengths with brass female oxygen threaded connections (flared is standard for oxygen connections). Also available by the foot with no connections. Add "F" to the part number. Made in USA. OX4 $ 17.05
Tech Talk 13
Flow Meters
Most flow meters, including all AES meters, are calibrated with no back pressure on the outlet side (unless specifi ed). Rarely, however, are flow meters used without some back pressure. Because pressure compresses the gas being measured, the measured volume will change depending on the pressure at which it is being used. At high pressure, the meter may read 5 cfh, but the flow may actually be 10 cfh. When used in vacuum applications, flow meters are off even further. Therefore, you should never expect the meter to provide an accurate reading, unless it has been calibrated for the same gas at the pressure and back pressure at which it is to be used. As inaccurate as these meters may be, they are good tools for "relative" fl ow adjustments and for resetting the same flow used in the past.
Oxygen Regulator
A single-stage, medium-duty regulator rated at 0100 psi with 540 CGA connections. Use where slight pressure changes won't affect the job. OX3 $ 125
80
Aeration
Sweetwater Oxygen Cones
Sweetwater Cones for Oxygen or Ozone

100% efficiency potential.
Sweetwater cones are designed to optimize the saturation of gases in water, and gas transfer efficiencies of up to 100% are possible. Operation of the cone is simple: as water and gas (either pure oxygen, ozone or other gas) enter from the top at a relatively high velocity, the water shears and moves the bubbles downward. As the cone widens the velocity is reduced. The undissolved bubbles keep returning to the top, so only water without bubbles can exit the bottom. At higher pressures, the dissolved oxygen concentration may be increased significantly above saturation. For example, a Sweetwater cone operating at only 10 psi can deliver water with a dissolved oxygen concentration above 25 mg/L. Sweetwater cones may be operated at a pressure of up to 21 psi. No matter what concentration of dissolved oxygen is needed, AES has the right cone for your application. Please contact an AES technician for assistance with sizing and complete skid systems.
Flow Range Suggested Flow Meter* Gallons (approx.) Inlet/ Outlet Ship Wt (lbs) Each Water Inlet
e Ozon tible
Compa
OY30S (Complete System using OY30F-1Call for Info)
OY30F-1 OY60F-1 OY110F-1 OY140F-1
73130 150260 280480 350600
MFR440 MFR4150 MFR4150** MFR4150**
45 110 195 335
3" 4" 5" 6"
65 100 245 290
$ 1,353.33 1,761.29 2,781.64 3,497.67
D A
*See Index for flow meters, flanges and valves. **Two required.
Oxygenated Water Outlet
Dimensions
A B C D E OY30F-1 68" 24" 16" 3.5" 8" OY60F-1 85" 34" 16.5" 4" 9" OY110F-1 107" 40" 19.5" 5.5" 10" OY140F-1 129" 48" 22" 6" 11.5"
1 lb O2= 12.08 ft3 @ STP; 28 liters = 1 cubic foot; 1 kPa= .145 psi
aes Multiply lbs/hr D.O. by 1,500 to estimate the lbs of fish that can be supported at 3% bodyweight (bw) feed per day (assumes oxygen/feed ratio of 0.5).
Oxygen Capacity at Maximum Flowrates, Various Temperatures and Pressures, Salinity 0, Sea Level, Inflow Sat. 100%, Contactor Sat. 60%
Temp 50F (10) Temp 68F (20) Temp 86F (30) Temp 50F (10) Temp 68F (20) Temp 86F (30)
Gauge Pressure psi bars OY30F-1 130 gpm OY60F-1 260 gpm OY110F-1 480 gpm OY140F-1 600 gpm OY10 12 gpm OY18 25 gpm OY35 65 gpm
D.O. lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L
Oxygen Capacity
D.O. D.O. lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L
Oxygen Capacity
Oxygen Capacity
Gauge Pressure psi bars OY35P 65 gpm OY75 90 gpm OY110 130 gpm OY160 200 gpm OY250 300 gpm OY400 500 gpm
D.O. lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L
Oxygen Capacity
D.O. D.O. lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L lbs/hr kg/hr mg/L
Oxygen Capacity
Oxygen Capacity
10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20
0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4
3.2 3.8 4.4 6.6 7.8 9.1 12.3 14.6 16.9 15.4 18.3 21.2 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.50 0.60 0.69 1.5 1.8 2.1
1.5 1.7 2.0 3.0 3.6 4.1 5.6 6.6 7.7 7.0 8.3 9.6 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.7 0.8 1.0
61 70 80 62 72 81 63 72 82 63 72 82 39 44 49 52 59 67 59 68 76
2.6 3.1 3.5 5.3 6.3 7.3 9.8 11.7 13.5 12.3 14.6 17.0 0.13 0.16 0.18 0.40 0.48 0.55 1.2 1.5 1.7
1.2 1.4 1.6 2.4 2.8 3.3 4.5 5.3 6.1 5.6 6.6 7.7
49 56 64 50 57 65 50 58 65 50 58 66
2.1 2.5 2.8 4.2 5.0 5.8 7.9 9.3 10.8 9.9 11.7 13.6 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.32 0.38 0.44 1.0 1.2 1.4
0.1 1.1 1.3 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.6 4.2 4.9 4.5 5.3 6.1 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.4 0.5 0.6
39 45 51 40 46 52 40 47 53 40 47 53 25 29 32 33 38 43 39 44 49
10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 20
0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4 0.7 1.0 1.4
1.5 1.8 2.1 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.2 3.8 4.4 5.0 6.0 6.9 7.6 9.1 10.5 12.8 15.2 17.6
0.7 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.7 3.1 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.8 6.9 8.0
59 68 76 60 69 78 61 70 80 62 71 81 62 72 81 63 72 82
1.2 1.5 1.7 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.6 3.1 3.5 4.0 4.8 5.5 6.1 7.3 8.4 10.3 12.2 14.1
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.7 5.5 6.4
47 54 61 48 55 63 49 56 64 49 57 65 50 57 65 50 57 65
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.8 4.4 4.9 5.8 6.7 8.2 9.7 11.3
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.7 4.4 5.1
38 44 49 39 45 50 39 45 51 40 46 52 40 46 52 40 47 53
0.06 31 0.07 35 0.08 40 0.18 41 0.22 47 0.25 53 0.6 0.7 0.8 47 54 61
Oxygen Generators/Saturators/Fittings/Valves
Aeration
81
Oxygen Generators
We offer the AirSep line of oxygen generators. They are the most efficient and dependable line of PSA regenerative oxygen generators. The trouble-free design of the AirSep line helps the pumps to last indefinitely if the minimum maintenance procedures are followed. Mechanical parts are kept to a minimum and, if a problem should occur, the operations manual and video tape provided with each unit simplify any corrections that may be needed. They run automatically, supplying oxygen 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. There is no need to replace membranes or molecular sieves, as they will last indefinitely if you provide this generator with clean, dry, compressed air.
Oxygen Generators
Using a patented Advanced Technology Fractionator (ATF), high-performance oxygen generators separate air into its components and concentrate oxygen up to 95%. SeQual's ATF is an ideal source of dry oxygen for applications such as oxygen enrichment for aquaculture or for the production of ozone. The unique design of the ATF generator eliminates hundreds of oxygen concentrator components (including all solenoid control valves and regulators) and dozens of pneumatic and electrical connections. The Workhorse and Teamwork units include internal air compressors. Provide 90+ psi for the Quads. One-year warranty. Ships from factory, CA. SOG8 SOG12 SOG15 SOG25 SOG60 SOG100 SOG84

OG20 and OG45 AirSep

The larger AirSep oxygen generators have a maximum oxygen delivery pressure of 45 psi and all require dry, compressed air. The T60 holding tank is included. In most cases, you will also want an oxygen receiver tank and an oxygen pressure regulator. Ships motor freight.
Workhorse 8 Workhorse 12 Workhorse 15 Workhorse 23 Quad 60 Quad 100 Teamwork 84
Cfh of 90% O2
8 12 15 23 60 100 84
No. lbs O2 /hr
.6 .9 1.1 1.7 4.5 7.5 6.2
Ship Wt
$ 1,631 1,815 1,965 3,131 5,263 6,473 10,168
OG12 AirSep
Features a built-in air compressor, stands only 26" high and weighs 55 lbs. Its maximum oxygen delivery pressure is 9 psi. It only requires 4 amps at 115V/60 Hz.
O2 Cyl Cfh Lpm Lbs/hr Equiv.* Cfh** Hp***
OG12 12 5.6 1.0 OG20* 20 9.4 1.6 OG45* 45 21.2 3.7
1.5 3 7
5.3 11.0
17" x 10" x 26" 55 lbs $ 1,929 3 13" x 11" x 57" 192 lbs 3,575 5 17" x 15" x 57" 300 lbs 5,315
Dimensions W x D x H Ship Wt
Price
sog100
*Based on "K" size cylinder (244 cu.ft.) and approximately 40-hr week operating
time. **Air required at 90 psi and less than 110F/43C before reaching oxygen generator. ***Air compressor hp listed are approximate ratings; use larger compressors for shorter run times.
PVC Saddle
Our straight PVC saddle is easy to install. Just drill a hole into 1/2" PVC pipe and secure the saddle in place with PVC glue. 1/8" FNPT threads. VS1 Straight Saddle $ 1.35 1.15/100 +
vs1 w/vbr1
3 /8"
Brass Valve
For use with 5/32" I.D. tubing, 1/8" MNPT. VBR12 $ 2.62 2.22/50+ 1.96/100+
Screw Clamps
These autoclavable screw clamps provide fine control that can replace stopcocks. Hinged sides allow for installation without disconnecting the tubing. Accepts air line up to 1/2" (13 mm) O.D. SC212 $ 6.70 6.30/25+
Plastic Valve
An inexpensive valve that will not corrode. For use with 3/16" I.D. tubing, 1/8" MNPT. Sold each. VPL12-B $ .97 .88/10+
Drip Emitter
Can be used in almost any flow application. They have an infinite adjustment up to 2 gph and will screw into a 10-32 thread, 3/16" tubing or into the open end of a riser tube. 42115 $ 1.60 1.41/25+
Tubing Valves, Roll Type

Made of a polyester (PBT) that offers permanent rigidity. Autoclavable to 320F (160C).
Each 25+
RC9 RC10
1/8" to 7/16" 1/4" to 9/16"
$ 6.48 7.50
5.88 6.74
rc10
Pinch Valves
For applications where precise flow is required. Simply slide tubing through valve and adjust as necessary. 34342 34341
34342
1/4" & 3/16" 3/8"
Tubing Valves, Clamp Type

Manufactured of tough plastic without sharp edges. DC9 is an "on/off" valve only. The DC10 and DC11 have a 12-position ratchet control. DC9 DC10 DC11

$ 14.35 19.37
dc9
Up to 1/4" 1/8" to 3/8" Up to 3/4"
$ .21 .80 2.50
Each
.19 .72 2.25
25+
82
Aeration
Fittings/Valves
Tee Eliminators
Here is a hard-to-find, cost-saving fitting. A PVC 3" x 3/4" reducing tee costs about $10. These tee eliminators can do the same thing for under a buck! Just drill a hole, press in a tee eliminator, then thread in the connection. Made of flexible PVC with female pipe threads. Work in all rigid pipe materials with pipe walls between 1/8" and 1/4" thick. Made in USA. FC32 FC34 FC36
FNPT Size
1/2" 3/4"
Flow Indicators
This polystyrene flow indicator provides an immediate visual indication of water, air or gas flow. Minimum flowrate with air is .1 cfm mounted horizontally, .28 cfm mounted in a vertical position. Minimum flowrate with water to activate the ball is 50 mL/min mounted horizontally, 140 mL/min mounted in a vertical position. Max pressure 10 psi. Measures 39 mm x 57 mm, inlet/outlet barbs fit 1/4" to 3/8" I.D. tubing. FW1 $ 21.25 18.92/12+
min Pipe Diameter
1"
1" 11/4" 11/2"
Hole Size
13/16" 17/16"11/2"
1"
$ .67 .75 1.00
Each
50+
.57 .64 .85
FC36
FC36
Hose Valve
This all-plastic hose valve fits 1/2" and 3/4" I.D. tubing. Handle turns easily. 70012 $ 6.75 6.07/12+
Miniature Stopcocks
For low-pressure air and water. MSK558 MSK610 MSK714 MSK816 8 mm (5/16") 10 mm (3/8") 14 mm (1/2") 16 mm (5/8") $ 1.84 1.88 2.20 2.60
Each
Aquarium Gang Valves

Top-quality gang valves with visual flow indicator. Stays where you set it. With an extra input/output connection. Fits 3/16" aquarium tubing. Plastic mounting bracket hangs on tank. VG2 VG3 VG4 VG5 2-Gang Valve 3-Gang Valve 4-Gang Valve 5-Gang Valve $ 5.20 5.75 7.35 9.20
Each
1.56 1.60 1.87 2.21
10+
mSk816
mSk610
4.68 5.18 6.60 8.28
12+ vG3 mSk558 mSk714
Thread Cutting Taps

These taps will cut pipe threads (FNPT) in PVC, mild steel, etc. Use with bits shown below to save the cost of tees, saddles and adapters. BNT1 BNT2 BNT3 BNT4 BNT5 Tap, 1/8" NPT Tap, 1/4" NPT Tap, 3/8" NPT Tap, 1/2" NPT Tap, 3/4" NPT $ 7.25 7.65 10.00 15.20 22.30
bNT1
Rigid Clear Tubing

Rigid tubing is ideal for microalgae and zooplankton culture tanks where aeration is required at the bottom of the tank. This is a thin wall (only .020" to .030" thick), rigid, "straw-like" tube. To extend length, use a piece of vinyl tubing as a coupler. 16005 16010 16015 16025 16035 16040 16045 16050
Length
36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36"
3/16" 5/16" 3 / 8" 1/2" 5 / 8" 3/4"
O.D.
Fits Tubing
1" 11/8"
TP30 TV40 TV60 TP70 TV80 TV90 TV100 TV125
$ 2.75 2.85 2.95 3.85 5.30 6.65 7.15 7.70
Each
2.20 2.28 2.36 3.08 4.24 5.32 5.72 6.16
6+
1.93 2.00 2.07 2.70 3.71 4.66 5.01 5.39
24+
Drill Bits
BT1 BT2 BT3 BT4 BT5 Bit, 11/32" for 1/8" NPT Bit, 7/16" for 1/4" NPT Bit, 9/16" for 3/8" NPT Bit, 23/32" for 1/2" NPT Bit, 15/16" for 3/4" NPT $ 3.75 4.90 14.05 21.95 32.65
bT1 16015
16010
16005
Valves/Manifolds
Aeration
83
Valve Manifolds, Small

These 1/2" PVC air manifolds are made with your choice of valves. The air supply inlet is a 1/2" FNPT with 1/4" barb (62014) which fits 1/4" I.D. tubing. Type P is made with plastic ( VPL12), B with brass ( VBR1), which fit 3/16" I.D. tubing (see Index to locate valve descriptions). Each manifold includes two 1/2" Clic fittings for mounting to a flat surface. VMP4-B VMB4 VMP6-B VMB6 VMP8-B VMB8
Valve # Valves Type
Valve Manifolds, Medium

Our valve manifolds will save you time and aggravation. They are made with quarter-turn valves (BV25). The manifold ports are 1/2" FNPT and a 1/2" FNPT plug is included. Each valve is 1/4" FNPT (see Index for tubing adapters). Each valve will pass .5 gpm with less than 1 psi pressure loss. They also make excellent manifolds for air distribution. The 1/2" threaded plug may be removed for another connection. MV2 MV3 MV4 MV5 MV6

4 4 6 6 8 8
Plastic VPL12 Brass VBR1 Plastic VPL12 Brass VBR1 Plastic VPL12 Brass VBR1
Approx. Overall Length (OAL) Each
11" 11" 13" 13" 15" 15"
$ 19.74 20.75 28.19 30.20 31.65 41.00
18.75 19.71 26.78 28.69 30.06 38.95
4+
2-Valve 3-Valve 4-Valve 5-Valve 6-Valve
81/4" 101/2" 137/8" 151/4" 151/4"
OAL
$ 23.10 26.82 33.31 42.34 48.49
Each
20.79 24.14 29.98 38.11 43.64
4+
vmp4-b
mv4
137/ 8"
vml4
Valve Manifolds, Large

These PVC globe valves are glued together as manifolds to save time. Each valve will pass 2 gpm with less than 1 psi pressure loss. The valves have 1/2" FNPT outlets. The manifold ports are 1/2" FNPT and a threaded plug is included (see Index for tubing adapters). Made in USA. PV2 PV3 PV4 PV5 PV6

Round Manifolds
We make these solid PVC manifolds for use as top inlet air diffuser manifolds, but you'll find many other applications for them. The center port is 3/4" NPT. The side holes are 1/2" NPT and have 1/8" diameter flow restrictors that can be easily drilled as needed for higher flow applications. M6B has 6 side holes, M08 has 8. Weighs 1/2 lb. Made in USA. M6B M08 $ 37.26 39.87
m6b
71/2" 101/2" 135/8" 167/8" 20"
OAL
$ 26.18 35.54 45.96 56.11 67.70

167/8"
Each
24.35 33.05 42.75 52.19 62.97
4+
Aquarium Check Valve

This high-quality duckbill check valve will prevent back siphoning through tubing when power is off. It's the perfect choice for aquarium systems or anywhere that 5/32" or 3/16" I.D. tubing is used. Resistance at .07 cfm is only 3" H 2O. Sold each. ACV1C $ 2.25 2.09/25+ 1.91/100+
pv5
Check Valves
Quick and positive action in any position. Polypropylene valve is highly resistant to chemicals and temperatures up to 100C (212F). Use for any pressure or vacuum system. 228225 will fit tubing 8/9/10 mm (1/4" 3/8" I.D.). Overall length 21/2". 228215 fits tubing 11/13/15 mm (7/16" 5/8" I.D.). Overall length 23/4".

Nonmetallic Check Valves

These polymer check valves have no springs. Use for fresh water, salt water or air. Make excellent foot valves with low pressure loss. 1/2-lb stainless steel springs (about 20" H 2O resistance) available for more positive closure for 25 more per valve. Add "85" to end of part number. Made in USA. CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 CV5

228225 228215
$ 3.57 4.67
Each
3.03 3.97
228225
50+
Ozone-Safe Check Valves

These clear, duckbill check valves work great for preventing water from back siphoning into ozone generators. Cracking pressure is 21/2" H 2O. Inlet/outlet accepts 1/8" and 3/16" I.D. tubing.

NPT 1" NPT 11/4" NPT 11/2" NPT 2" NPT
3/4"
$ 8.90 9.30 13.84 16.96 20.30
Each
8.01 8.37 12.46 15.26 18.27
10+
cv
CKV55 CKV60
3/16" Tubing 1/4" Tubing
$ 6.05 8.15
Each
5.45 7.34
ckv60
10+
Aquatic Eco-Systems' customer service was very helpful and quick. My teacher and I were afraid we weren't going to be able to get our aquarium to work for our Small Animal Care class. You were very helpful in telling me what I needed to know to start our filter. Thank you.
Tim Talford
84
Aeration
Tubing/Clamps
Stainless Steel Hose Clamps

You can find clamps for less, but then they must be replaced when the screw rusts away. These quality clamps are all stainless steel (#301 SS band) including the screw (#410 SS)! The one-piece housing is locked to the band without spot welds. The band is 9/16" wide (5/16" on SSAA) and the screw has both a slotted head and a 5/16" hex. Choose clamps with a larger maximum diameter than the outside diameter (O.D.) of the tubing that it will be holding. Made in USA. SSAA SSA SSB SSC SSD SSE SSF SSG SSH SSI SSJ
Size
1/4" 1/2" 3/4"
PerfAerated Diffuser Tubing

Aeration tubing and diffuser all in one!
Need to aerate a narrow or oddshaped body of water? Regular diffusers might not be your best choice. With perforated diffuser tubing, you can provide continuous aeration to lengths of up to 100', and even bend the tubing to conform to the shape of your waterway. Ideal for raceways and hydroponics systems. Also great for de-icing and creating a barrier to protect from nuisance vegetation. Weighted tubing has 3/8" inside diameter and an operating Underwater view of tubing at work. range of .15.6 cfm. Sold by the foot, max 100'. Weighs .2 lb/foot. Call our Lakes Dept. at 407-472-0520 for help with sizing. WBT2 Per Foot WBT2-25 25' WBT2-50 50' WBT2-100 100' $ 1.95 43.50 85.50 174.00
Diameter minimum maximum
SSb
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 31/2" 4" 5"
.22" .38" .50" .75" 1.00" 1.25" 1.50" 2.25" 2.50" 3.00" 4.50"
.62" .88" 1.06" 1.75" 2.00" 2.25" 2.50" 3.25" 4.50" 5.00" 6.50"
$ 1.02 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.75 1.75 2.05 2.25
Each
.94 1.12 1.22 1.34 1.34 1.37 1.37 1.60 1.60 1.82 2.04
10+
SSA
Soft Tubing Cutters

These handy cutters are great for vinyl tubing, rubber hose, polyethylene and other soft materials (not PVC pipe). The KT100 cuts up to 1" outside diameter tubing, while the KT200 cuts up to 11/2". Made in USA. KT100 KTB100 KT200 KTB200 Tubing Cutter 1" Replacement Blade Tubing Cutter 11/2" Replacement Blade $ 15.00 5.82 18.78 7.00
Each
Plastic Clamps
These quick ratcheting, noncorroding clamps work very well on vinyl tubing. They tighten by hand or with pliers and are releasable/reusable. Not for high-pressure applications. UV-resistant. SNP2 SNP6 SNP10 SNP14 SNP19 SNP24
Clamp Diameter min max
kT100
.351 .45 .57 .70 .86 .99
.39 .51 .65 .80 .99 1.14
Fits vinyl Tubing Part #
TV40 TV60 TV70/ TVR60 TV80/ TVR70 TVR80 TV90/ TVR90
$ .46 .56 .56 .70 .70 .81
Each
100+
.41 .51 .51 .63 .63 .73
Nut Driver
This top quality 5/16" chrome-plated nut driver is the handiest tool we've ever found for tightening or loosening clamps. Made in USA. N516 $ 13.48
SNP2
Black and White Vinyl Tubing

Opaque (nontransparent) tubing blocks sunlight to eliminate algae growth when used for water delivery. Black hides well in garden ponds, etc. Working pressures same as clear. Opaque tubing may be purchased by the roll or by the foot. Use an "F" at the end of the part number to indicate purchase by the foot. Comes in 100' rolls. Made in USA. BTP30HD BTV40 BTV70 WTP30HD WTV40 WTV60 WTV70 Black Black Black White White White White
Inside Diameter
3/16" 1/4" 1/2" 3/16" 1/4" 3 / 8" 1/2"
Cable Ties, Black

These quality, American-made nylon ties are made with carbon black for the best protection against UV light. Use longer ties and wrap around twice for double strength. Sold per package. Made in USA. T18R T30R T40I T120R T21081 T21084
T40I
Outside Diameter
5/16" 3 / 8" 5 / 8" 5/16" 3 / 8" 1/2" 5 / 8"
Ship Wt
Cable Ties Cable Ties Cable Ties 3" Cable Ties 4" Releasable Tie 5" Releasable Tie 10"
max bundle Diameter Length

3/4" 11/4"
4" 6" 111/2" 151/4" 20" 35"
# in Pack
100 100 100 50 25 25
$ 3.30 4.35 10.30 12.24 28.00 53.33
Pack Price
3.06/5+ 2.82/20+ 4.09/5+ 3.83/20+ 9.70/5+ 9.10/20+ 11.54/5+ 10.84/20+ 25.80/4+ 23.30/10+ 48.00/4+ 43.18/10+
$ .43 .45 .74 .41 .45 .57 .60
Foot
22.67 27.50 49.08 25.62 29.53 42.05 45.94
roll
4+roll
20.63 24.75 44.18 23.06 26.58 37.85 41.35
WTv40
WTv60
bTv60
bTv70
Aeration
Tubing
wd5
85
p200
Heavy-Duty Polyethylene Tubing

Durable.
This heavy-duty, high-density polyethylene tubing is kink resistant and so durable that it is warranted for twenty yearsyet is quite inexpensive. Specify this tubing for lake aeration systems and water piping where kink resistance is required.
wd3
wd2
wd1
wd4
Factory Pressurized... your assurance that it is leak-free.

Flexible piping installs much faster than rigid pipe and comes in long lengths requiring fewer fittings. Each coil has sealed ends and is factory pressurized @ 10 psi. When an end is cut off, pressurized air will blow out, indicating no leaks.
1/4" Actual 1/2" O.D. 5/8" I.D. 11/8" O.D. 8 oz/ft Use SSB Clamps Use 101A Barb 3/4" I.D. 17/16" O.D. 12 oz/ft Use SSC Clamps Use 101B Barb
Long Lasting.
Contains 2% carbon black for long-term UV protection. Uses insert fittings with hose clamps (see Index). Note: Actual I.D. differs from nominal size. Only P200S, P200 and P250 can ship Ground. Lifetime warranty. Made in USA. Call for large quantity discounts.
Ships Actual Weight Max psi Coil Ground Nominal I.D. Wall Per 100' @73.4F Length Each Coil
2 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 62069 Barb

3 /8 " 5 /8 "
Actual O.D. 3 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 62071 Barb 4+
1" I.D. 111/16" O.D. 18 oz/ft Use SSE Clamps Use 101C Barb I.D. 1 oz/ft Use SSA Clamps Use 101A Barb
5 /8 "
P200S P200 P250 P300
Yes Yes Yes No
1/2" 1/2" 3/4"
1"
.625" .060" .625" .060" .824" .060" 1.049" .070"
100 100 100 100
100' $ 37.80 400' 125.82 400' 130.34 300' 148.44
34.02 113.24 117.31 133.60
3 /8 "
Air Friction Loss

Psi Cfm
5 /8 "
Air Friction Loss

Psi
Cfm
1 1.5 2
100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
5 15 27 41 68 140
.25 .33 1.00 1.50 2.50 50
2 3 4 5 6 8
100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
3 5 7 20 25 44
.13 .25 .25 .75 2.00 1.58
HeavySet Weighted Air Tubing
Invented Here
3 4 5
Our HeavySet tubing contains no lead and remains on the bottom when filled with air. The dark blue color makes it easy to hide. It is designed for lake and pond aeration, making installations fast, clean and neat! Compatible with 1/2" "nominal" insert fittings (see Index) and P200 "shore side" tubing (see above). Requires SSB clamps, or solvent weld the PVC barb couplings. Ships exposed. Use the smaller 1/4" ( WD3) or 3/8" ( WD2) I.D. HeavySet tubing for smaller volumes of air or with higher pressure compressors where line loss is not important. Compatible with insert fittings (see Index). Call for large quantity discounts. Made in USA. WD1 WD1R WD1R-100 WD2 WD2R WD2R-100 WD3 WD3R WD4 WD4R WD5 WD5R 101A SSA SSB SSC SSE

wd1r p200s
Per foot 50' Coil 100' Coil 3/8" Per foot 3/8" 50' Coil 10 lbs 3/8" 100' Coil 20 lbs 1/4" Per foot 1/4" 50' Coil 6.5 lbs 3/4" Per foot 3/4" 50' Coil 39 lbs Per foot 1" 50' Coil 1" 59 lbs Barbed Coupling, 5/8" for WD1 1/2" SS Clamps for WD2 3/4" SS Clamps for WD1 1" SS Clamps for WD4 11/2" SS Clamps for WD5
5/8" 5/8" 27 lbs 5/8" 54 lbs
I.D.
Weight
$ 1.61/ft 75.26 150.53 1.07/ft 45.69 91.39 .90/ft 37.63 2.44/ft 105.00 3.11/ft 132.00 1.20 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.45
70.00/4+ 140.00/4+ 42.50/4+ 86.02/4+ 35.00/4+ 97.65/4+ 122.76/4+ .93/10+ 1.12/10+ 1.22/10+ 1.34/10+ 1.37/10+ To avoid the use of lead, buy HeavySet tubing by the foot, cut it in pieces with a knife, then thread your air line through it, positioning as needed. You can tie-wrap it, and you can split it with a knife or saw.
Use HeavySet
WD3 1/4" WD2 3/8" WD1 5/8"
TP30 5/32" I.D. x 1/4" O.D. TV40 1/4" I.D. x 3/8" O.D. TV60 3/8" I.D. x 1/2" O.D.
Air Lines Requires
3" per foot (5 cm/30 cm) 4" per foot 4" per foot
HeavySet Weighted Tubing
Air Line Tubing
Diffuser
86
Water Quality
Test Kits
Professional Test Kit by LaMotte

For the koi keeper who demands the most accurate tests!
We co-developed this test kit for the professional koi keeper. The kit utilizes LaMotte spectrophotometric tablets individually foil-wrapped. It measures dissolved oxygen, nitrite, ammonia, pH and salinity. The kit has reagents for 50 tests each, four 10-mL sample vials with lids, a 100-mL sample vial, a stir rod, complete instructions. PK94 3968-H 3969-H 6459-H 3976-H 3885-H 3920-H 3886-H Test Kit Ammonia #1 Reagents, 50 Ammonia #2 Reagents, 50 pH Refill, 50 Dissolved Oxygen Tablets, 50 Chloride Reagents, 50 Alkalinity Reagents, 50 Nitrite Reagents, 50 $ 182.46 10.55 9.25 11.60 9.40 16.50 7.20 16.50
Marine Lab Test Kit by Red Sea

Ideal for saltwater fish aquarium systems. This master test kit includes 45 ammonia, 80 nitrite, 60 nitrate, 100 pH and 60 alkalinity tests. See individual tests below for ranges. Weighs 1 lb. TK2 $ 38.40
Saltwater Test Kits by Red Sea

Pk94
Red Sea test kits are a fast and accurate method for testing water quality and marine fish and reef tanks. Each kit includes a color comparator chart, testing vial and reagents. For use with salt water only. R20111 R20121 R20131 R20171 R20180 R20145 R20201 pH/Alkalinity Ammonia Nitrite Copper Ozone Nitrate Oxygen 100/60 45 80 55 100 60 60
# Tests
7.48.6 05 ppm 08 ppm 010 ppm 01 ppm 2.5100 ppm 010 ppm
range
$ 13.45 13.45 10.90 14.20 14.20 14.20 14.20
We offer many test kits designed for different markets. All are accurate. The most important consideration is their use for fresh or salt water. Look for these symbols.
Important
r20111
Pond Care Master Test Kit

This is a complete kit for testing pond water. Tests include pH, ammonia, nitrite and phosphate. Kit contains instruction book, improved color cards for easy reading, 4 test tubes, holding tray and enough reagents for 50 tests each. 164M $ 19.52
Deluxe Freshwater Aquarium Test Kit
Hazmat Air
This all-inclusive test kit is for both beginners and serious freshwater aquarists. Includes 100 pH tests, 60 ammonia tests, 80 nitrite tests, 25 hardness tests, 60 iron tests, 35 carbon dioxide tests, 60 chlorine tests and samples of plant fertilizer, dechlorinator and pH reducer. Weighs 2 lbs. TK3 $ 41.60
Water Quality Water Testing Strips

Each vial of test strips features a leakproof, hinged, pop-top lid and a wrap-around desiccant liner to protect strips from moisture intrusion. The multi-strips have 5 different tests (alkalinity, pH, nitrite, nitrate and hardness) on one strip. Test strips are both fresh and salt water compatible, 25 tests per kit. R443 R444 R442 Ammonia, 06 ppm Nitrite, 0-10 ppm/Nitrate, 0200 ppm Multi-Strip $ 12.55 11.35 10.75
r442
Test Kits/Strips
87
Instant Ocean Calcium Kit

Economical test kits for reef tanks.
These kits use a color chip comparator and foil-packed granular reagents for accurate, easy measurement of water quality. The phosphate and low-range nitrate kits are sensitive enough to measure extremely low levels. The calcium kit measures levels accurately to determine the need for supplements or water changes. All kits and refills include enough reagents for 20 tests each. TR1003 Calcium Kit, 0500 mg/L $ 14.95
Water Quality Test Strips

These small test strips provide a rapid means of checking water quality. Simply dip a strip into the sample, wait for color to develop, and compare color on the reagent pad to the color chart on the bottle. Each kit contains 50 tests, except H27451, H27453, H27454 and H27553 have only 25. Only parameters marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with salt water.
tr1003
H27448 H27553 H27451 H27450 H27452 H27453 H27454 H27456 H27571
Alkalinity 0240 ppm Ammonia 05 ppm Copper (Total) 0240 ppm Free and Total Chlorine* 010 ppm Hardness* 0425 ppm Iron (Total) 05 ppm Nitrate/Nitrite 050 / 03 ppm pH* pH 49 Phosphate* 05 ppm
Test Range
$ 9.89 18.59 18.59 14.19 9.89 18.59 16.99 9.89 19.09
Ocean Master Saltwater Test Kits

AES has sold these test kits for years and found them to be accurate, dependable and very easy to use. Kits utilize a color chip comparator that is much more durable and easier to use than paper charts. The granular reagents (alkalinity test is liquid) are foil-packed to protect them from light and moisture. All kits and refills include enough reagents for 20 tests each, though alkalinty tests will be affected by water hardness. STK1 STK1A STK1B STK1C STK1D Multikit (pH, Alkalinity, Ammonia, Nitrite, Nitrate) pH Refill (7.88.6) Ammonia Refill (0.8 mg/L) Nitrite Refill (01; 010 mg/L) Nitrate Refill (0100 mg/L) $ 42.75 5.95 9.35 5.60 6.25
h27448
We offer a wide selection of test kits, from low-priced to expensive, all with proven reliability. Always be sure reagents are fresh. In hot climates, store them in the refrigerator to extend freshness. Note: mg/L (milligrams per liter) and ppm (parts per million) are interchangeable.
Pond Test Strips

No tablets or liquids.
Test ponds the easy way! Simply dip a test strip into the pond and compare the color of the pads to the color chart provided. Each bottle contains 25 tests. Pads on the strips test pH, alkalinity, nitrite and nitrate. The total ammonia strips test for ammonia only. 11252 11253 Pond Test Strips Total Ammonia Test Strips $ 15.65 13.68
11252
stk1
Tetra test Kits

Tetra test water quality kits are highly recommended for beginner aquarists, as they are very easy to use. Each kit contains all necessary apparatuses and instructions. All of the test kits (except pH) can be used in fresh and salt water. An excellent value!
Range
Test Strips by LaMotte

Chlorine, iodine, QAC and high-range chlorine.
Chlorine and iodine strips include a color chart and come in a waterproof vial. QAC ("quat") test strips come in an opaque vial with desiccant cap and read all types of quaternary ammonium cations. See test results in just 30 seconds with the high-range chlorine strips. LM2963lr-g Total Chlorine LM4250BJ Chlorine LM2948BJ Iodine LM2951 QAC LM3031 Chlorine, High Range
Strips per Vial Range
25 200 200 100 50
010 ppm 10200 ppm 12100 ppm 50400 ppm 0800 ppm
$ 5.50 5.60 5.60 5.50 16.15
16675 16676 16613 16617 16630
pH Fresh pH Salt Nitrite Ammonia Oxygen
5.07.0 7.510.0 .33.3 ppm 05.0 ppm 08 ppm
# Tests
50 50 45 25 30
$ 4.95 5.35 7.40 8.95 11.50
16613 lm2951 lm4250bj lm2948bj
88
Water Quality
Test Kits Copper
Copper as copper sulfate is often used in fish culture as an algaecide, but it can be lethal to fish at low levels, especially with low pH and alkalinity levels. It can be very toxic to juvenile clams and other invertebrates, particularly saltwater species. Testing takes one minute. Range: .05 to .5 ppm. LM6616 $ 84.45 LM6616RP 6.02
Test Kits by LaMotte

LaMotte brand water test kits have been in use for over 50 years. They are accurate, inexpensive and suitable for both fresh and saltwater testing (except when noted). Each kit (and replacement reagent) contains enough reagent to run between 50 and 200 tests, depending upon the amount of reagent used to reach the end point. All replacement reagents are sold with "RP" after the part number; e.g., LM4456RP. All single kits are approximately 2 lbs. Made in USA.
Dissolved oxygen
This kit provides an inexpensive alternative to a dissolved oxygen meter. Testing takes 5 minutes. 0 to 10 ppm. Note: These tests may not give accurate results when used with ammonia-reducing chemicals. LM7414 $ 49.95 LM7414RP 30.65
Hardness
The total hardness of water generally represents the total concentration of dissolved calcium and magnesium ions. Although closely related to alkalinity and the buffering capacity of water, high alkalinity may not always indicate high hardness. Hard waters (above 150 ppm) are generally more productive for fish than soft waters. The typical range for aquaculture is 50 to 200 ppm. Testing takes 2 minutes. 0 to 200 ppm. LM4482
lm3319
$ 41.80
LM4482RP
17.30
Iron
Alkalinity
Alkalinity refers to the quantity and type of compounds present in the water that shift the pH above 7.0. Water with high alkalinity tends to be more strongly buffered. Buffering will reduce the tendency of the pH to shift. Add sodium bicarbonate to increase alkalinity (buffering capacity) and calcium chloride for hardness. Testing takes 2 minutes. Range: 0 to 200 ppm. LM4491 $ 33.45 LM4491RP 14.80
Well water often contains high concentrations of ferrous iron (iron in solution). Concentrations as low as .2 ppm can be harmful to certain species of fish. To remove iron, aerate the water and then settle or filter out the resulting orange iron oxide particles. Testing takes two minutes. Range: .05 to 1 ppm. LM7787 $ 92.10 LM7787RP 18.45
Nitrate, low level
To know how toxic ammonia is to your fish, you must know the ammonia level, the pH level and the temperature. A total ammonia level of 10 ppm may not be harmful to trout at a pH of 6.0, but it would be deadly if the pH were 7.0. The test kits measure + total ammonia. Total ammonia consists of both nontoxic NH4 (ionized) and toxic NH3 (un-ionized) forms. The proportion of one to the other is variable. The toxic form increases in proportion as the pH and/or temperature increases. Ammonia builds up in the water primarily by the metabolism of protein (nitrogen). About 10% of the protein fed to fish will show up as ammonia in the water. Testing takes 5 minutes. LM3315 range: 1 to 8 ppm. LM3351-01 range: .2 to 3 ppm. Note: Water containing Ammo Lock and other ammonia-removing chemicals should be tested using an ammonia kit (LM3304) that uses the salicylate method (0 to 2.0 ppm). LM3351-01 LM3304 LM3315 $ 69.25 Hazmat Air 74.25 Hazmat Air 68.15 Hazmat Air LM3351-01RP LM3304RP LM3315RP 23.75 Hazmat Air 32.30 Hazmat Air 21.20 Hazmat Air
Ammonia-Nitrogen
This is the final nitrogen product formed by bacterial oxidation of ammonia. Although it is not usually considered a threat to freshwater fish, it is a plant nutrient and can harm marine invertebrates. Testing takes 12 minutes. Range: .25 to 10 ppm. LM3319 $ 77.90 Hazmat Air LM3319RP 28.00 Hazmat Air
Nitrite
This is an intermediate compound formed in the oxidation (nitrification) process of ammonia becoming nitrate. Nitrite can become toxic in recirculating systems. Nitrites interfere with the ability of the fish's blood to take up oxygen (levels as low as .2 ppm can cause "Brown Blood" problems with catfish). Testing takes 5 minutes. Range: .05 to .8 ppm. LM3352 $ 77.95 LM3352RP 23.90
Ozone
Calcium hardness
Ozone will destroy viruses and bacteria, oxidize most organics and remove color, leaving water crystal clear. Once the water is clear, high levels of residual ozone need to be removed before it reaches the fish. Remove ozone from the water by aeration, UV light, activated carbon or just give it time to revert to oxygen. For freshwater use only. Testing takes 2 minutes. Range: .01 to 1.0 ppm. LM3526 $ 109.15 LM3526RP 16.10
Because calcium and magnesium are both major components of the total hardness of water, measuring hardness by itself may not reveal enough. Recirculating aquaculture systems need calcium levels greater than 50 ppm to maintain a fully functional biofilter. Testing takes 2 minutes. 0 to 200 ppm. LM3609 $ 43.95 LM3609RP 18.45
pH
Carbon dioxide
This is a measure of hydrogen ion concentration, or more simply, whether the solution is acidic or basic. Units 0 to 6.9 are referred to as acid or acidic. Units of 7.1 to 14 are considered basic and pH 7.0 is neutral. Takes 2 minutes. Range: 5.0 to 10.0; LM2159-01 range: 7.7 to 8.4 (Cresol Red). LM3353 LM2159-01 $ 45.85 59.00 LM3353RP LM2159-01RP 6.30 13.65
Carbon dioxide (CO2) is present in water as a dissolved gas, like oxygen. High CO2 can stress and even kill fish. It also forms carbonic acid, which lowers the pH. Testing takes 2 minutes. 0 to 50 ppm. LM7297 $ 36.95 LM7297RP 12.40
Phosphate
Chloride
Chloride is one of the major anions found in water. When using salt, be careful where discharge occurs. Salt water is about 16,000 ppm chloride; it takes only about 500 ppm chloride to kill some plants, shrubs and trees. For freshwater use only. Takes two minutes. 0 to 200 ppm. LM4503 $ 43.40 Hazmat Air LM4503RP 26.35 Hazmat Air
Phosphates enter water supplies from wastewater treatment, sewage, soil runoff, fish foods, etc. Although necessary for biological processes, too much phosphate may cause excessive growth of algae and plants. Testing takes 2 minutes. Range: .5 to 100 ppm. LM3114 $ 89.00 LM3114RP 22.15
Salinity titration
Chlorine
For measuring both low and high salinity levels in ponds, recirculating systems, brackish waters, etc. Testing takes 5 minutes. 0 to 20 ppt (parts per thousand) in .4 increments. LM7459 $ 58.40 LM7459RP 34.85
Chlorine and chloramines (chlorine/ammonia complex) are toxic to fish, and the presence of one or the other can be expected in your municipal water supply. For aquaculture applications, chlorine should be removed chemically, by aeration or by aging. Chloramines must be removed chemically. For testing fresh water only. Testing takes 2 minutes. Range: .2 to 3.0 ppm. LM3308 $ 62.45 LM3308RP 14.74
Sulfide
For measuring hydrogen sulfide (toxic to fish), the most common form of sulfide. Testing takes 2 minutes. Range: .2 to 20 ppm. LM3322 $ 58.25 LM3322RP 21.60
Water Quality
Test Kit/Tech Talk
89
Aquaculture Analysis Laboratory
Hazmat Air
Highly recommended for the serious field professional, this kit includes most things a fish farmer needs to monitor water quality. The portable lab analyzes the 8 critical factors most commonly required by a fish farmer: dissolved oxygen, pH, temperature, salinity, nitrite, ammonia, hardness and alkalinity. Excellent for both fresh and saltwater analyses. Designed with field analysis as a priority, the outfit is packaged in a durable, waterproof Pelican case that is foam-lined and holds the components in place. See part numbers for individual reagents. AAL1
$ 1,394 Alkalinity test strips (H27448). Hardness test strips (H27452). Nitrite test kit (LM3352). Waterproof pH pen ( YPH10).

Each kit includes:

YSI 550A D.O. meter ( Y550A12). Salinity refractometer (SR5). Pocket dial thermometer ( TH4). Ammonia test kit (LM3315). Test Dissolved Oxygen Temperature pH Alkalinity Hardness Ammonia Nitrite
Range 0 to 20 mg/L; 0 to 200% Sat 0 to 230F, -18 to 110C 0 to 14.00 0 to 240 ppm 0 to 425 ppm 1 to 8 mg/L .1 to .8 mg/L
Tech Talk 47
Water Quality Guide
These are healthy growing tolerances, not limits for fatalities. Use this chart for guidelines only. Tolerance levels can vary greatly depending on a variety of factors. Some species are also sensitive to nitrite above 40 ppm. Fish will excrete about 14 grams of ammonia for each lb of food eaten (@ 35% protein). Test kits read total ammonia; this guide gives un-ionized ammonia levels. See chart for conversion.
Percentage of Un-Ionized Ammonia at Different pH Values and Temperature

7.0 7.4 7.8 8.2 8.6 9.0
pH
16C/61F
1% 1% 2% 5% 11% 23%
20C/68F
1% 1% 2% 6% 14% 28%
24C/75F
1% 1% 3% 8% 17% 34%
28C/82F
1% 2% 4% 10% 22% 41%
32C/90F
1% 2% 6% 13% 28% 49%
Equation: ppm un-ionized ammonia = ppm total ammonia (measured) x un-ionized ammonia (from above). These figures are percentages, so remember to move the decimal point two spaces to the left for the equation.
D.O. pH Alkalinity CO2 Temp mg/L Units mg/L mg/L Un-Ionized Ammonia mg/L
Trout Hybrid Striped Bass Tilapia Goldfish/Koi Shrimp (Freshwater) Shrimp (Saltwater) Minnows Shiners Tropical Fish (Freshwater)
4568F/720C 7085F/2129C 7590F/2432C 6575F/1824C 6880F/2027C 6075F/1624C 6075F/1624C 7284F/2229C
512 410 310 410 410 410 410 410
5.58 68 68 68 6.59 68.5 68 68
50250 50250 50250 50250 60100 50250 50250 50250
020 025 030 025 020 015 025 020
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.03
Nitrite mg/L
0.2 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.9 0.1 0.6 0.9
Hardness mg/L
50350 50350 50350 50350 60250 50350 50350 50350
01,500 01,500 05,000 02,000 01,500 13,00018,000 02,500 02,500
Chloride mg/L
Salinity ppt
03 03 015 04 03 235 05 05
Marine Reef Water Quality Guide

Use these numbers for guidelines only, not for water quality limits. These are healthy growing tolerances. Tolerance levels can vary greatly depending upon a variety of factors. Temperature: 7278F Redox: 350400mV Salinity: 2235 ppt pH: 8.2 Redox Calcium: 350*500 ppm Dissolved Oxygen: 57 ppm Boron*: 4.54.8 ppm Nitrate: <1.0 ppm Phosphate: <.1 ppm Strontium: 810 pp Alkalinity: 125160 mg/L** Iodine*: .06 ppm Silicate*: <2.0 ppm Ammonia: 0 ppm
Freshwater Plant Water Quality Guide

Use these numbers for guidelines only, not for water quality limits. These are healthy growing tolerances. Tolerance levels can vary greatly depending upon a variety of factors. Temperature: 7479F pH: 6.8 Dissolved Oxygen: 57 ppm Nitrate: <40 mg/L Carbon Dioxide: 5 10 15 Iron: 0 to 1.0 mg/L Phosphate: 0 to 5.0 mg/L Trace Elements: 0 to .5 mg/L Carbonate Hardness (KH): 3.5 to 5.0 dKH
If dKH level is:
Then CO2 level should be:

1015 mg/L 1530 mg/L 3040 mg/L
Recommended light levels: 46 watts/gallon in a 1:1 ratio of actinic blue to daylight.
*Level found in natural seawater. **Calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
90
Water Quality
LaMotte Test Kits
TF Hazmat Air
Fish Farm 9 Test Kit
Saltwater Fish Farm 9 Test Kit
Hazmat Air
Here are the most common water quality parameters tested by freshwater fish farmersin one rugged carrying case. The kit features deluxe octa-slide comparators by LaMotte. An armored thermometer (-5 to 45C) is included. Kit weighs 10 lbs, refill kit weighs .5 lb. LMAQ2 LMAQ2RP Fish Farm 9 Test Kit Reagent Refill Kit $ 235.00 135.25
This kit measures eight different parameters. Salinity can read to 40 ppt by diluting half the sample and doubling the final readings. Includes armored thermometer. Kit and reagent refill contains enough reagents for 50 tests each. Kit weighs 10 lbs, refill 1 lb. LMAQ4 LMAQ4RP Saltwater Test Kit Reagent Refill $ 285.00 146.75
Test Range Ammonia Nitrogen .23 mg/L Nitrite .05.8 mg/L pH 510 Alkalinity 0200 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 050 mg/L Chloride 0200 mg/L Dissolved Oxygen 010 mg/L Hardness 0200 mg/L Temperature -545C
Test Ammonia Nitrogen Nitrite Nitrogen pH Nitrate Nitrogen Alkalinity Carbon Dioxide Dissolved Oxygen Salinity
Range .23 ppm .2510 ppm 5.010.0 .0510 ppm 0200 ppm 050 ppm 010 ppm 020 ppt
lmaq4
Reagent Refills
For LMAQ2, LMAQ3 and LMAQ4.
lmaq2
Fish Farm 6 Test Kit
Hazmat Air
This is a good kit if you are using meters to measure pH, dissolved oxygen and temperature. The kit is the same as the LMAQ2 but without pH, dissolved oxygen and thermometer. Kit weighs 10 lbs, refill kit weighs .5 lb. LMAQ3 LMAQ3RP Fish Farm 6 Test Kit Reagent Refill Kit $ 193.00 108.65
LM1R LM2R LM3R LM4R LM5R LM6R LM7R LM8R LM9R LM10R LM3304RP
Alkalinity Ammonia Carbon Dioxide Chloride Dissolved Oxygen Hardness Nitrite pH Salinity Nitrate Ammonia for LMAQ4
$ 17.50 30.16 Hazmat Air 15.09 31.08 Hazmat Air 43.08 24.63 37.02 6.30 37.17 Hazmat Air 42.00 32.30 Hazmat Air
lm9r
Test Range Ammonia Nitrogen .23 mg/L Nitrite .05.8 mg/L Alkalinity 0200 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 050 mg/L Chloride 0200 mg/L Hardness 0200 mg/L
Limnological Water Test Kit

lmaq3
Hazmat Air
Kit includes individual tests for seven parameters. Kit and reagent refill include enough reagents for 50 tests each (nitrate only 40). For fresh and salt water. Kit also includes sampling bottles, three handbooks and analysis report forms. Kit weighs 18 lbs. Refill weighs 1 lb. All components contained in a weatherproof carrying case. LM5902 LM5902RP Limnological Test Kit Reagent Refill $ 440.00 141.70
Test Dissolved Oxygen Wide-Range pH Silica Total Hardness Nitrate Phosphate Carbon Dioxide
Range 010 ppm 3.010.0 .510 ppm 0200 ppm .21.0 ppm .21.0 ppm 050 ppm
AquaticEco.com
has been around for 15 years. It has seen dot-com booms, busts and new booms. We continually improve our site to make your shopping easier.
lm5902
Water Quality
Hach Test Kits
91
FF1A Aquaculture Test Kit
Hazmat Air
FF2A Aquaculture Test Kit
Hazmat Air
This popular freshwater aquaculture test kit includes all the necessary apparatuses and reagents for 100 tests each of nine critical parameters. The kit uses the drop-count method for titration tests and Hach color comparators for colorimetric tests. Colorimetric tests provide results directly in mg/L and drop-count tests require, at most, a simple multiplication or division step to determine concentration. Ship weight 10 lbs. FF1A $ 277
Similar to the FF1A , the FF2A has an additional test kit to measure for acidity. Designed for freshwater applications only, the kit uses convenient, concentrated titrant solutions in disposable cartridges and has an easy-to-read digital titrator that guarantees repeatability from test to test. Ship weight 12 lbs. FF2A $ 465
Test Range Alkalinity 6.4136 mg/L Ammonia* 03 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 5100 mg/L Chloride 5400 ppt Dissolved Oxygen* .220 mg/L
Test Hardness Nitrite pH Temperature
Range 17510 mg/L 0.5 mg/L 410 -30120F
FF3A Saltwater Test Kit
Hazmat Air
Test Range Acidity 1004,000 mg/L Alkalinity 1004,000 mg/L Ammonia* 03 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 10100 mg/L Chloride 10160 mg/L
Test Range Dissolved Oxygen* 010 mg/L Hardness 1004,000 mg/L Nitrite 0.5 mg/L pH 410 Temperature -30120F
Hach model FF3A test kit is designed specifically for saltwater applications. The kit uses a digital titrator and includes detailed instructions. Enough reagents and apparatuses for 100 tests each. Ship weight 10 lbs. FF3A $ 551 Test Range Dissolved Oxygen* 010 mg/L Hardness 1004,000 mg/L Nitrite 0.5 mg/L pH 410 Temperature -30120F
Replacement Reagents
(PP= Powder Pillows) 34932 39732 42432 42532 42632 67132 83699 85199 94299 94399 96799 98199 98299 98766 104399 105766 172533 189736 1407899 1437701 1437801 1437901 1438001 1438801 1438901 1439301 1439601 1439701 1455099 2105769 2106069 2106169 2107169 2119432 2329332 2393701 2395266 2395466 2408932 2515025 2620532 2653199 2653299 Starch Indicator Solution, 100 mL Silver Nitrate Solution Buffer Solution Hardness 1 Hardness 2 Test Solution Hardness 3 Test Solution Sodium Hydroxide .01N Diphenylcarbazone Reagent PP (FF2A) ManVer 2 PP, 50 mL Phenolphthalein PP Pack/100 Bromcresol Gr-Meth Red PP Diphenylcarbazone Reagent PP (FF3A) Dissolved Oxygen 1 PP* Dissolved Oxygen 2 PP 60 mL* Dissolved Oxygen 3 PP* Chloride 2 PP Chloride 2 PP, 100 mL Rochelle Salt Solution 2 Phenolphthalein Solution 15M NitriVer 3 PP, 5 mL Sodium Hydroxide .1600N Sodium Hydroxide .3636N Sodium Hydroxide 1.600N Sodium Hydroxide 3.636N Sulfuric Acid .1600N Cartridges Sulfuric Acid 1.600N Cartridges Mercuric Nitrate .2256M Silver Nitrate Std .2256N Silver Nitrate Std 1.128N Bromphenol Blue PP, 50 mL FerroVer, Iron Reagent PhosVer 3 PP, 10 mL Nitrate 6 PP, 10 mL NitraVer 3 PP, 10 mL Nessler Reagent Ex Alkaline, 100 Test Wide Range pH 410 Indicator, 100 mL Mercuric Nitrate Ammonia Salicylate Reagent PP Ammonia Cyanurate Reagent PP (FF3A) Sodium Thiosulfate Standard Dissolved Oxygen HR AccuVac* Sulfuric Acid Standard .030N Ammonia Cyanurate Reagent PP (H26879) Ammonia Salicylate PP Pack $ 9.25 19.15 12.55 13.65 7.65 13.35 35.69 13.79 13.99 13.99 23.29 15.35 15.35 6.15 16.29 17.65 11.19 8.95 19.85 17.35 17.05 17.05 17.05 15.59 15.85 29.73 26.81 17.05 19.89 18.99 26.95 34.19 30.35 20.49 15.95 19.45 28.19 17.79 12.99 25.95 10.59 37.85 56.59
Test Range Acidity 1004,000 mg/L Alkalinity 1004,000 mg/L Ammonia* 03 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 10100 mg/L Chloride 2100 mg/L
CEL/850 Portable Laboratory

This high-end test kit is a mini laboratory. The lab includes a Hach DR/850 colorimeter, EC10 pH/mV/temperature meter with electrode, TDS pen and digital titrator. The DR/850 colorimeter is chemical resistant, waterproof and capable of testing over 50 parameters. Internal data logging function has the ability to store up to 50 measurements in the field or laboratory. A detailed, illustrated procedures manual and all reagents are included. Ship weight 8 lbs. H26879 $ 1,995
Hazmat Air
Hazmat Air Hazmat Air Hazmat Air Hazmat Air
Hazmat Air
Test Range Alkalinity 104,000 mg/L Ammonia* 0.5 mg/L Carbon Dioxide 101,000 mg/L Chloride 101,000 mg/L Dissolved Oxygen* 015 mg/L Hardness 1004,000 mg/L Iron 03.0 mg/L
Test Nitrate Nitrite pH Phosphate TDS Temperature
Range 030 mg/L 03.5 mg/L -219.99 02.5 mg/L 101,990 mg/L -30120F
Hazmat Air Hazmat Air
Hazmat Air Hazmat Air
Hazmat Air
*Interference when AmQuel Plus, Ultimate or ClorAm-X has been used.
92
Water Quality
Photometers
Photometers by YSI
YSI photometers are sophisticated water quality analysis systems that measure a variety of parameters and provide simple on-screen instructions. Results are available within seconds. IP67-rated waterproof systems use easy-to-use reagent tablets for testing instead of liquids or powder packets. Reagent tablets have an indefinite shelf life when stored in their foil pouches. 5.8" L x 10.8" W x 3" H, ship weight 7 lbs. The Y9300 photometer includes carrying case, light cap, 8 test tubes, dilution tube, 10 crush rods, cleaning brush and instruction manual. Also has backlit graphic display, self-adjusting sample tube holder and on-screen instructions in multiple languages. The Y9500 includes all the above plus a waterproof USB connection, internal memory that holds up to 500 sample sets and a number of user-selectable options such as test units, sample number and dilution factors. Y9300 Y9500 YSI Photometer Photometer w/USB Connection $ 925.00 1,225.00
YSI Reagents:
Starter Kits include reagents, instructions and accessories for 50 tests. Replacement reagents only include chemicals for 250 tests. Alkalinity Methyl-Orange 0500 Alkalinity Phenolphthalein 0500 Alkalinity Total 0500 Aluminum 0.5 Ammonia 01.0 Bromine 06.0 Calcium Hardness 0500 Chloride 050 Chlorine HR 0250 Chlorine DPD-Free 05.0 Chlorine DPD-Free Mono & Dichl. 05.0 Chlorine DPD-Free Com. & Total 05.0 Chromium Hexavalent 01.0 Copper 05.0 Cyanuric Acid 0200 Fluoride 01.5 Hardness 0500 Hydrogen Peroxide LR 02.0 Hydrogen Peroxide HR 0100 Iron LR 0.003 Iron HR 010 Magnesium 0100 Manganese 020 Molybdate HR 0100 Nitrate 020 Nitrite-N 00.5 01,500 Nitrite-NaNO2 Organophosphate 020 Ozone 02.0 pH (Phenol Red) 6.88.4 Phosphate LR 04.0 Phosphate HR 0100 Potassium 012 Silica 04 Sulfate 0200 Sulfite 0500 Turbidity 5400 `Zinc 04.0
Range Starter Replacement Test/Method mg/L Kit Reagent
y9500
Photometer System, eXact Eco-Check

USEPA, DIN and ISO compliant for free and total chlorine testing
We offer a more cost-efficient, environmentally friendly meter at a better price than most other photometers. The eXact Eco-Check photometer system only uses a 4-mL water sample, so you're using 60% less water (and chemical reagent) per reading. There's no compromise on accuracy because the photometer was designed for a photocell with a 20-mm path length. The wavelength used is 525 nm. You can easily measure desired parameters in the field with the test strips created for this system. The standard kit contains test strips to measure the following (50 each): alkalinity, ammonia, calcium hardness, combined/total chlorine, nitrate, nitrite and pH. Kit also includes a factory-calibrated eXact Eco-Check handheld photometer, carrying case and cleaning brush. The photometer display reads 3 digits, and the meter operates on 4 AAA batteries (not included). IP-67 waterproof. Meter is 6.4" L x 2" W x 1.4" D (16.5 cm x 5 cm x 3.5 cm); weighs 5 oz (140 g). 5-year warranty.
Range
YPM250 $ 29 YPM251 32 YPM188 31 YPM166* 34 YPM152 45 YPM060 29 YPM252 31 YPM268 39 YPM162* 30 YPM011 10 YPM021 13 YPM031 23 YPM281 50 YPM186 52 YPM087 25 YPM179 42 YPM254 36 YPM104 19 YPM105 28 N/A YPM156* 24 YPM193* 36 YPM173 37 YPM175 36 YPM163 52 YPM109 20 YPM260 35 YPM262 81 YPM056 52 YPM130 14 YPM177 27 YPM114 37 YPM189 37 YPM181* 48 YPM154 17 YPM266 33 YPM269 69 YPM148* 49
YAP250 YAP251 YAP188 YAP166* YAP152 N/A YAP252 YAP268 YAP162* YAP011 YAP021 YAP031 YAP281 YAP186 YAP087 YAP179 YAP254 YAP104 YAP105 YAP155 YAP156* YAP193* YAP173 YAP175 YAP163 YAP109 YAP260 YAP262 YAP056 YAP130 YAP177 YAP114 YAP189 YAP181* YAP154 YAP266 N/A YAP148*
75 75 69 89 75 78 95 96 29 33 49 123 136 55 98 89 46 85 105 50 66 88 95 133 52 78 195 45 27 93 85 85 112 36 78 129
*Not recommended for saltwater testing.
486698K 486641 486654 486629 486638 486655 486623 486639
Standard Kit Repl. Alkalinity Test Strips, 50 Repl. Ammonia Test Strips, 50, Reagent Repl. Calcium Hardness Test Strips, 50 Repl. Combined/Total Chlorine Test Strips, 50 Repl. Nitrate Test Strips, 50 Repl. Nitrite Test Strips, 50 Repl. pH Test Strips, 50
$ 269.95 20180 ppm 6.95 06 ppm 12.95 20990 ppm 9.95 .0111 ppm 11.95 040 ppm 10.95 .053.5 ppm 5.95 6.28.4 4.95
YSI 5200 controlling/monitoring systems in use at AES.
Spectrophotometer/Colorimeter
Water Quality
93
SMART Spectrophotometer
This portable spectrophotometer is super easy to use and extremely accurate. It utilizes a unique optical system that uses 1,200 lines/mm grating, which provides an excellent range, greater accuracy and higher resolution. Includes an automatic wavelength selection, preprogrammed tests, menu-driven display and RS232 compatibility. Each spectrophotometer includes 6 sample tubes; 115/230V, 50/60 Hz adapter; battery charger; instruction manual; test procedures; and quick start guides. Weighs 11 lbs.

SMART2 Colorimeter Reagents

These easy-to-use reagent kits are produced from high-quality, ACS raw materials for high reproducibility. Reagents are designed to avoid test interferences, making results fast and dependable. Each reagent kit includes all necessary reagents and apparatuses. Note: Bromine, chlorine and iodine are sold together in one kit (LM3643SC). Shipping weight is 1 lb for each reagent. Aluminum Ammonia Nitrogen (Salicylate) Ammonia Nitrogen (Nessler) Bromine Chlorine Iodine Chlorine Dioxide Chromium, Hexavalent Copper (Total) Copper (Free) Cyanide Fluoride Hydrogen Peroxide Iron (Bipyridyl) Iron (Phenanthroline) Manganese (LR) Manganese (HR) Molybdenum Nickel Nitrate Nitrogen Nitrite Nitrogen Oxygen, Dissolved Ozone pH Phenols Phosphate (HR) Phosphate (LR) Potassium Silica (LR) Silica (HR) Sulfate Sulfide Tannin Turbidity Zinc
Test Factor # of Application Tests
Wavelength Range: 3501,000 nm Accuracy: 2 nm Resolution: 1 nm Displays %T, Abs, concentration $ 1,995.00 SMART Spectro Carrying Case 122.95 Rechargeable Battery Pack 170.00 SMARTLink 2 Interface CD 192.00 Sample Tubes, 6/Pk 19.55
LM2000 LM2000CS LM2000BP LM1912 0967
Lm2000
LM2000 shown with optional accessories.
SMART3 Colorimeter
New modelIP67 waterproof!
Eliminates human error from color interpretation. These electronic colorimeters measure the amount of light that travels through a reacted sample and convert the measurement to a digital reading as ppm, % transmittance or absorbance. Colorimeters offer some distinct advantages over test kits: a dedicated light source eliminates variable background lighting, automatic color measurement eliminates the need for visual interpretation and the electronics are capable of detecting faint colors in low ranges for greater accuracy. Any of the 80 preprogrammed or user-entered tests (up to 25) can be easily accessed through an alphabetical listing on the LCD display, which supports seven languages. Includes a simple menu-driven operation, self-diagnostics with error warning messages and a backlit Super Twist LCD display for easier readability. Data logging feature stores results in the field for later downloading to a PC via USB interface and software. Weighs only 2 lbs. The SMARTLink 3 program allows you to interface the colorimeter with any Windows-based computer programconnect using the included USB cable. The colorimeter comes with four sample tubes, instrument manual and test procedures, quick start guide, rechargeable lithium batteries and USB wall plug for recharging. Dimensions: 7.5" x 3.5" x 2.5". LM1910 LM1910CD 0290-6 SMART3 Colorimeter SMARTLink 3 Interface CD Sample Tubes, 6/Pk $ 899.00 150.00 27.85
50 25 Hazmat 50 Hazmat 100 100 100 50 100 100 50 50 50 100 50 50 50 Hazmat 50 50 50 Hazmat 20 Hazmat 20 200 100 100 50 50 Hazmat 50 Hazmat 100 100 50 100 Hazmat 50 50 Unlimited 50 Hazmat
Air Air
Air
Air Air
Air Air
Air
Air
LM3641SC $ 69.60 LM3659SC 45.00 LM3642SC 38.45 LM3643SC 51.35 LM3643SC 51.35 LM3643SC 51.35 LM3644SC 30.80 LM3645SC 30.80 LM3646SC 15.90 LM3640SC 25.65 LM3660SC 89.00 LM3647SC 45.65 LM3662SC 37.65 LM3648SC 37.60 LM3668SC 40.50 LM3658SC 56.45 LM3669SC 77.00 LM369901SC 51.35 LM3663SC 99.25 LM3649SC 42.05 LM3650SC 42.05 LM3688SC 37.65 LM3651SC 201.85 LM3700SC 45.60 LM3652SC 50.20 LM3655SC 20.45 LM3653SC 35.55 LM3639SC 53.05 LM3664SC 50.20 LM3687SC 37.65 LM3665SC 26.40 LM3654SC 59.30 LM3666SC 46.80 None Required LM3667SC 101.55
Lm3643SC
Lm1910
Lm3700SC
94
Water Quality
Dissolved Oxygen Meters

Q: Do I need an expensive oxygen meter? A: Maybe not. It depends on your frequency of use, your need for reliability and the importance of absolute accuracy. If you are taking readings for government monitoring, regulatory enforcement, wastewater treatment, research, commercial aquaculture or other high-value purpose, you do need to use one of the more expensive oxygen meters. If you are doing backyard aquaponics or occasionally checking your pond or lake, one of the low-cost meters will do fine. They are quite accurate above 3 ppm when calibrated correctly. If you will be measuring D.O. infrequently in surface water or an aquarium, a D.O. test kit will do a good job. They have a long shelf life and avoid D.O. meter probe maintenance. However, if you need to know what the D.O. is under the surface or in hard to reach locations, a D.O. meter with a suitable length probe cable would easily give you the data in place.
EcoSense DO200 by YSI

Pressure and salinity compensated.
The Ecosense D0200 is an economical version of the quality and results expected from YSI. The rugged housing is IP65 splash resistant, and the large LCD simultaneously displays ppm or percent saturation and temperature (C only). Easy-to-replace, screw-on cap membranes have a fast response time and are low-stirring dependent. Nine-volt battery life is typically 450 hours; indicator warns when battery level is low. Detachable probe and cable assembly sold separately below. One-year warranty on meter, six-month warranty on probe. YDO200 Y2004 Y20010 Y5908 Y200-BOD Meter Only 4-Meter Cable w/Probe Only 10-Meter Cable w/Probe Only Repl. Membranes w/KCl, 6/Pk BOD Probe $ 256 265 295 52 655
Ranges O2 Sat. Temp.
020 mg/L 0200% -646C .1 mg/L .1% .1C .2% .2% .3C
D.O. Meters by YSI

Great value.
TF
off 10% P !
MSR
S a ve u
p to
Resolution O2 Sat. Temp. Accuracy O2 Sat. Temp.
The Y55 series contains our most popular handheld meters. They feature easy push-button calibration, a probe storage chamber and a large simultaneous display of oxygen and temperature (C and F). They read in mg/L or percent of oxygen and offer built-in altitude (0-10,000') and salinity calibration (0 to 40 ppt). The large backlit digital display is easy to read in sunlight and darkness. They even have a low battery indicator. Expect 350 hours from the 6 AA alkaline batteries (included). On these models, probe and cable are not removable but, if you send them to our YSI Repair Center, we can replace them. The Y55D series dissolved oxygen meters (not waterproof) feature a detachable cable, making probe and cable changes a snap. They're accurate, durable and have long been considered the industry standardso reliable, in fact, that they are backed with a two-year warranty (one-year warranty on probes). Made in USA.
ydo200
Nondetachable Cable Models

Y5512 Y5525 Y5550 Y5520 Y5775

D.O. Meter w/12' Cable D.O. Meter w/25' Cable D.O. Meter w/50' Cable Carrying Case for Y55 30 Membranes & KCl Kit
Ship Wt
4 lbs 4 lbs 6 lbs 3 lbs 1 lb
$ 712.50 750.50 831.25 49.00 32.00
Detachable Cable Models

y2004
Y55D Y55D12 Y55D25 Y55D50
D.O. Meter Only 12' Cable & Probe 25' Cable & Probe 50' Cable & Probe
y55d
Ship Wt
$ 546.25 346.75 370.50 427.50 Splashproof Housing Stainless Steel Probe D.O. Ranges 020 mg/L 0200% air saturation Resolution .01 mg/L Accuracy .25 mg/L 2% air .4C Response Time 90% in 10 seconds 95% in 15 seconds
YSI Repair
Whether it is a yearly checkup or the complete replacement of a circuit board, you can count on AES to provide accurate, economical and timely service. This applies to all YSI meters that we carry, whether or not they were purchased from us. We honor all factory warranties, we stock a full inventory of replacement parts and our labor rates are significantly lower than the amount charged by most other YSI repair facilities. To obtain an estimate or to send a meter for repair, call us at 877-347-4788 for a Return Authorization Number (RA#). This number will allow us to identify your package and follow your instructions. You'll also need to fill out and send in our Return Form and Cleaning Certificate.
y5512
Low Labor Rates

Our electronics technicians are the best and our turnaround time is fast (12 weeks). If you wish to expedite turnaround, we can do that for a small fee. There is no charge for warranty repairs. Nonwarranty repair estimates typically require between 60 and 120 minutes before a repair cost quotation can be made. Therefore, we will have to charge for nonwarranty repair quotes, one-hour minimum.
D.O. Meters/Probes
Water Quality
95
D.O. Meter, YSI 550A

TF
Optical Dissolved Oxygen Meter by YSI

The Professional Series ProODO is YSI's first handheld optical dissolved oxygen instrument designed for sampling applications. The ODO (Optical Dissolved Oxygen) luminescent sensor has no flow dependence, making it the perfect choice for applications where stirring is difficult or undesirable. This also reduces the possibility of operator error, ensuring high quality data. Unit is resistant to probe fouling from hydrogen sulfide and other gases. The digital ODO probe stores calibration data so probes can be interchanged between instruments without recalibration. Stores 2,000 data sets, and USB connection allows interaction with Data Manager software. Supports English, Spanish, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese and French. IP67-rated case. Salinity input rate 070 ppt. Runs on two C batteries. 8.5" L x 3.25" W x 2.25" H, weighs 1 lb. Three-year warranty on instrument, two years on cable and probe. Y6262 Y62504 Y625010 Y625020 Y6263 ProODO 4-m Probe for D.O./Temp 10-m Probe for D.O./Temp 20-m Probe for D.O./Temp Repl. Sensing Element $ 650 610 675 725 100
Waterproof to 1 meter even with the battery door open. 2,000-hour battery life. Rugged aquaculture-grade cable. New PE membranes lessen stirring dependence.
This meter is field-rugged and sets the standard for aquaculture D.O. measurement. It is completely waterproof to 1 m (IP67-rated), impactresistant and measures dissolved oxygen to 50 mg/L and 500% saturation. It features a field-replaceable, polarographic D.O. probe that is weighted for quick sinking; easy-to-replace cap membranes, push-button calibration and temperature, salinity (to 70 ppt) and altitude (to 10,000') compensation. The large backlit display shows simultaneous readings of oxygen, temperature (C or F), and a low battery indicator. Includes four C batteries. Three-year warranty on meter, one-year on probe. Spanish manual available. Y550A12 Y550A25 Y550A50 Y550A100 Y5908 Y559 Y5060 Y5085
Ship Wt
YSI 550A D.O. Meter w/12' Cable YSI 550A D.O. Meter w/25' Cable YSI 550A D.O. Meter w/50' Cable YSI 550A D.O. Meter w/100' Cable YSI 5908 Cap Membrane Kit for 550A Replacement Probe for YSI 550 & 550A Soft-Sided Carrying Case Hands-Free Harness
7 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 3 lbs 1 lb
$ 812.25 840.75 888.25 946.00 52.00 180.00 100.00 28.00
y6262
System Specs
Dissolved Oxygen (% saturation) Range: 0500% air saturation Accuracy: 0 to 200% air saturation, 1% of the reading or 1% air saturation, whichever is greater; 200 to 500%, 15% of the reading Resolution: .1% air saturation Temperature Range: -5 to 70C Accuracy: .2C Resolution: .01C Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) Range: 050 mg/L Accuracy: 0 to 20 mg/L, 1% of the reading or .1 mg/L, whichever is greater; 20 to 50 mg/L, 15% of the reading Resolution: .1 or .01 mg/L (auto-scaling) Barometer Range: 375825 mmHg Accuracy: 1.5 mmHg from 0 to 50C Resolution: .1 mmHg
D.O. Ranges 050 mg/L 0500% air saturation Resolution .01 mg/L .1% saturation Accuracy .3 mg/L 2% saturation Temperature Range -545C
Find YSI's Y52 and Y58 D.O. meters and accessories at AquaticEco.com.
Technician Profile
y550a12
Gary Rogers
Gary graduated with a master's degree in microbiology from Brigham Young University and a Ph.D. in civil engineering from Colorado State University. He has over 20 years of experience in the areas of aquacultural and environmental engineering. His specialties include aeration, bacteria, biofiltration, coagulation/flocculation, hydraulics and fluid mechanics, oxygen systems, ozone, recirculating systems and wastewater treatment.
Calibration Chamber
BOD Probe
This popular biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) probe features a built-in stirrer and pre-tensioned cap membranes, which screw onto the sensor without wrinkles. Sensor tip is protected from accidental damage by a guard. It has a 5' cable and includes a package of six cap membranes and electrolyte solution. Use with Y52 or Y58. Six-month warranty.

Important
Y5905 Y5906
BOD Probe Cap Membrane Kit
Ship Wt
2 lbs 1 lb
$ 675.00 52.00
y5905
96
Water Quality
Dissolved Oxygen Meters/Kit/Tech Talk
D.O. Meter
Two-year meter warranty.
Featuring a high-performance oxygen probe, this oxygen meter is a very good value. Temperature-compensated from 050C (32122F) with an accuracy of .2 ppm. Measures 020 ppm or percent saturation. Each meter comes with a replaceable probe on a 5' cable (the 12' extension cable cannot be submerged). Uses one 9V battery (included). Meter measures only 3" x 5". The high performance DO62P probe is compatible with the old DO6 meters. Two-year warranty on the meter and probe (does not cover mishandling or water damage to meter). DO62 DO62P DO62M DO6A PA12 Oxygen Meter Replacement Probe Membrane Kit 12' Extension Cable AC Adapter $ 280.00 175.00 18.82 28.44 10.00
Dissolved Oxygen Meter Kit

Use this D.O. kit in environmental testing, labs, industrial and municipal waste water, aquariums and fish hatcheries. Its programming and functionality are easy to follow. It has automatic temperature compensation as well as compensation for salinity and altitude. Simultaneously displays D.O. (in ppm or mg/L), temperature readings (in C or F) and the date. Review 99 data points with time stamps directly on the large backlit LCD. Simple, one-button air calibration and adjustable membrane temperature coefficient. Transparent galvanic probe has built-in temperature sensor and a 4-meter cord. Comes in a hard carrying case complete with built-in RS232 port, probe, spare membranes, electrolyte with syringe and 4 AAA batteries. Weighs 14 oz (397 g). 63/4" L x 23/4" W x 11/4" H (170 x 70 x 33 mm). Five-year warranty.
do600
850041 850042 850043 850044 840052 840054 840090
D.O. Kit Repl. D.O. Probe Repl. Membranes & O-Rings (10 Each) Repl. Electrolyte Software RS232 Computer Cable Water-Resistant Instrument Pouch
$ 366.00 229.00 16.50 13.75 58.00 38.00 10.65
Waterproof ExStik II Dissolved Oxygen Meter

This IP67 D.O. meter features adjustable compensation for altitude (020,000 ft in 1,000-ft increments) and salinity (050 ppt). Memory stores up to 25 data sets and self-calibrates on power-up. Oxygen level displayed as 0200% saturation or concentration (mg/L [ppm]). Also has data hold, auto power off and low battery indicator. Meter comes complete, including D.O. electrode, protective sensor cap, screw-on spare membrane cap, electrolyte, 1.5V SR44W batteries (4) and 48" neck strap. D0600-K kit also includes sensor cap, seven replacement membranes with caps, two bottles of filling solutions, probe weight guard, four 3V CR-2032 batteries, 48" (1.2 m) neck strap and hard carrying case. One-year warranty on meter, six months on probe. DO600-K DO603 DO605 EXC3 EXC16 D.O. Kit $ 349.00 Membrane Kit (6) for DO600 and DO605 69.99 Repl. D.O. Electrode 149.99 Extension Cable w/Probe Wt, 3 ft, DO600 52.99 Extension Cable w/Probe Wt, 16 ft, DO600 84.99
850041
Unit of Measure D.O., ppm and mg/L Temperature F Temperature C
Range 019.99 32122F 050C
Resolution .01 .1F .1C
Accuracy 1.5% 2F 1C
Multiparameter Kit
This kit includes two waterproof ExStik testers (DO600 and EC500), which measure dissolved oxygen and either pH/conductivity/TDS/salinity or temperature. Both meters can store 25 data sets for recall and have auto shut-off. Kit also has conductivity standards, sample pH buffers and measuring cups. One-year warranty on meters, six months on sensors. Ship weight is 4 lbs. DO610 $ 409
Have a complaint?
Tech Talk 26
Dissolved Oxygen Meters and Probes
Model Manufacturer Parameters D.O. Range Resolution Backlit Warranty Oxygen (ppm or mg/L) Accuracy (ppm or mg/L) Waterproof Display Meter/Probe Memory/RS232
DO62 American Marine D.O. Only YDO200 YSI* D.O., Temp Y55D YSI* D.O., Temp Y52 YSI* D.O., Temp Y58 YSI* D.O., Temp Y550A YSI* D.O., Temp Y85 YSI* D.O., Temp, Sal Y5561 YSI * D.O., Temp, pH, ORP, Sal DO600 Extech D.O. Only Y60020 YSI* D.O., Temp, mmHg 850041 Sper D.O., Temp
020.0 020.0 020.0 019.99 019.99 050.00 020.00 050.00 020.0 050.00 019.99
.2 ppm 2% .25 .02 .03 .03 2% .5% .4% 2% 1.5
.1 .1 .01 .01 .01 .01 .01 .01 .1 .01 or .1 .01
No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No
No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
2-yr/2-yr 1-yr/6-mo 2-yr/1-yr 2-yr/6-mo 2-yr/6-mo 3-yr/6-mo 2-yr/6-mo 3-yr/1-yr 1-yr/6-mo 3-yr/2-yr 5-yr/6-mo
No No No Yes No No No Yes No No Yes
Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polarographic Polaro./Galv. Polarographic
Probe Type
*Aquatic Eco-Systems, Inc., is an authorized YSI Repair Center. Temp=Temperature. Sal=Salinity. ORP=Oxidation/Reduction Potential
Water Quality
D.O. Meter
97
Professional Series Instrument by YSI

(Meter Only)
Large, easy-to-read, backlit display and keypad. User selectable polarographic or galvanic D.O. sensors. 50 data set memory with date/time stamp. Rubber over mold case for durability.
Note:
Meter, probes, cables and calibration solutions are sold separately.
These meters are compact, waterproof (IP67rated) and can accommodate variable cable lengths. Instruments with temperature and a single parameter option include the Pro20. The graphic displays show detailed instructions and an analog power gauge that continuously displays the battery level. Meters measure 3.25" x 8.5" x 2.25" and weigh 1 lb. Use 2 C batteries (included). Three-year warranty on meters, two years on cables and one year on probes. Note: Order meter, probe, cable assembly and calibration solutions separately.
y60020 Probe Not Included
Instrument
Y60020 Y6202 Y6203
Pro20 D.O.
$ 525 165 165
Probes Cables
Galvanic D.O. Polarographic D.O.
System Specs (Instrument, Probe & Cable)

4-m Cable for Pro20 10-m Cable for Pro20 20-m Cable for Pro20 30-m Cable for Pro20 250 295 350 445 Dissolved Oxygen (% saturation) Range: 0500% air saturation. Accuracy: 2% of the reading or 2% air saturation. Resolution: 1% or 1% air saturation. Temperature Range: -555C (D.O. compensation range -545C). Accuracy: .3C Resolution: .1C. Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) Range: 050 mg/L. Accuracy: 2% of the reading or .2 mg/L. Resolution: .01 or .1 mg/L. Barometer Range: 400 to 999.9 mmHg. Accuracy: 5 mmHg (within 5C of calibration temp). Resolution: .1 mmHg.
(All cables include temperature sensor and weighted removable board.) Y624C Y6210C Y6220C Y6230C
Look online at AquaticEco.com to see additional cable and probe options.

YSI Handheld D.O. Selection Guide
DO200 (p.94) Waterproof Rating 1-Meter Drop Test Internal Barometer Memory PC Connection Cable Connector Membrane Type Graphic Display Backlit Display Backlit Keypad Aquaculture-Grade Cables Cable Warranty (years) Instrument Warranty (years) Battery Life (hours) Multiple Languages One Touch Cal Auto Stable Feature Sensor Response Time (sec) Flow Dependence User-Replaceable Cables User-Replaceable Sensors Additional Parameters IP65 Hiroshi Cap X 1 1 500 9 22% X 55 (p.94) IP65 Stretch X 1 1 180 20 45% 550A (p.95) IP67 X Cap X X 1 3 2,000 9 22% X
Pro20 (p.97) IP67 X X 50 Data Sets Military Spec. Cap X X Glow in Dark X 2 3 400 X 1 foot 9 22% X X
ProODO (p.95) IP67 X X 2,000 Data Sets USB MS Sensor Cap X X X X 2 3 80 X 1 foot 25 0% X Sensor Cap
Professional Plus (p.106) IP67 X X 2,000 Data Sets USB MS Cap X X X X 2 3 100 X 4.1 9 22% X X X
98
Water Quality
pH Pens/Meters/Tech Talk
Waterproof pH Testers
These floating testers have a large LCD, push-button calibration with buffer recognition (can be calibrated to 3 points), auto shut-off after 8.5 minutes, automatic temperature compensation and a user-replaceable double-junction sensor. The pHTestr 10 reads -1.0 to 15.0, the pHTestr 20 and 30 read -1.00 to 15.00 and the pHTestr 30 has simultaneous temperature display in C or F. All have self-diagnostic messages such as battery power indicator and a hold function to freeze values for future use. Measures 1.5" W x 6.5" long, weighs .3 lb. One-year instrument warranty, six-month electrode warranty. Calibration solutions sold separately. WD-35634-10 WD-35634-20 WD-35634-30 WD-35624-38 TP4 TRB pHTestr 10 pHTestr 20 pHTestr 30 Repl. pH Sensor Soft Carrying Case Repl. Batteries (6-pk) $ 92.00 99.95 112.00 68.30 24.00 15.50
wd35634-30
EcoSense pH100 by YSI

With electrode efficiency display.
The EcoSense pH100 measures pH and temperature (ORP requires separate probe) quickly and accurately. The electrode offset recognition function displays electrode efficiency and indicates when it is time to replace the pH electrode. Features include internal buffer recognition, auto/manual temperature compensation and a large LCD display that simultaneously displays pH or mV and temperature (C only). Electrodes with 3' (1 m) cables are available in pH or combination pH/mV. Two-point pH calibration. Cables are waterproof over their whole length. 9V batteries included. Measures 7" x 3". Order meter and probe separately. One-year warranty on meter, six months on probes. Calibration solutions sold separately. Y1000 Y1001 Y1004 Y1101 Y1201 Y1251 Y1111 Y1122 pH Meter only $ 250.00 pH/Temp Probe w/3' Cable 99.00 pH/Temp Probe w/12' Cable 125.00 pH Electrode w/3' Cable 55.00 Temp Probe w/3' Cable 40.00 ORP Electrode w/3' Cable 70.00 Piercing Probe Double Junction 98.00 Flat Glass Probe Double Junction 98.00
Tech Talk 30
pH Probe Care & Storage
Proper handling and storage of pH electrodes will not only help to prolong the electrode's life, but also will ensure fast, accurate readings. General guidelines include:
Probe Not Included
y1000
lectrodes should be rinsed between samples with deionized or E distilled water. ever wipe an electrode dry as this can cause erroneous readings due N to static charges. Never store electrodes in water; doing so will cause a sluggish response. lways keep the tip of the pH electrode moist. Electrode storage solution A is a solution of 4M KCl. If unavailable, a pH 4 buffer solution will also work temporarily. In general, pH buffers only have a two-year shelf life unopened. Once opened, the shelf life drops to 23 months. However open pH 10 calibration solution only has a 30-day shelf life.
Range
Resolution .01 1 mV .1C
Accuracy .1% .1% .3C
pH -216 ORP -1,5001,200 mV Temp -5125
EcoSense pH/Temp Pen by YSI pH Meter by American Marine

The PH370 is a great little pH meter at a very affordable price. The detachable probe with its 10' cable uses a BNC connector. It has built-in slope and calibration adjustments but is not temperature compensated (if you take measurements anywhere near room temperature, the temperature error will be negligible). Two-point calibration. The digital display is easy to read, even in full sun. Uses one 9V battery (included). Two-year warranty on the meter only. Measures 5.5" L x 3" W, weighs just .3 lb. Calibration solutions sold separately. PH370 PH370R PA12 Pinpoint pH Meter pH Repl. Probe AC Adapter $ 99.00 42.00 10.00
It floats!
This addition to the EcoSense line features one-hand operation, 50-set memory and low cost. Measures 0 to 14 with an accuracy of .02. The pen has IP67 waterproof housing; ATC; auto-buffer recognition with 1-, 2- or 3-point calibration; and a replaceable electrode. "Hold" feature locks reading on display, which has on-screen instructions. Has a belt clip and lanyard on the back and floats if dropped in water. Measures 2" W x 7.5" L, weighs .3 lb. One-year instrument warranty, six-month electrode warranty. Calibration solutions sold separately. YPH10 605113 605118 Y580 pH10 Pen Repl. Electrode LR44 Repl. Batteries (4) Carrying Case $ 95.00 48.00 4.00 24.00
yph10
ph370
pH Accessories/Tech Talk
Water Quality
99
Conductivity/TDS Calibration Solutions

HI7031L TD13 TD15 TD644

pH Calibration Solutions
4+
1,413 mS, 500 mL 1,382 ppm, 500 mL 1,500 ppm, 500 mL 6.44 ppt, 20 mL Sachets (25)
$ 14.00 14.00 14.00 28.00
Each
13.30 13.30 13.30 26.60

td13
500-mL bottles.

CAL4 CAL7 CAL10
pH 4.01 pH 7.00 pH 10.00
$ 12.50 12.50 12.50
Each
11.25 11.25 11.25

cal4 cal7 cal10
4+
pH Calibration Kits for Meters & Pens Tech Talk 67

Water Pollution
Any physical, biological or chemical change in water quality that adversely affects living organisms or makes water unsuitable for desired uses can be considered pollution. Kit PH47 consists of five 20-mL calibration pouches of pH 4.01 and pH 7.01. Kit PH71 consists of five 20-mL calibration pouches of pH 7.01 and pH 10.01.
Each 6+
PH47 PH71
$ 14.00 14.00
13.44 13.44
ph47
Common Impurities in Water

Dissolved: Cations, anions, organic compounds such as vegetative dyes and pesticides and gases such as hydrogen sulfide and chlorine. Suspended: Silt, clay, feces, organic and inorganic colloids and living organisms such as bacteria, viruses, protozoa and algae. Floating: Oils and grease, feces and debris.
Calibration Pouches
This is the easiest way to calibrate a pH pen or meter in the field. Each single pouch contains 20 mL of calibration solution. Rinse water singles contain 20 mL of deionized water for rinsing pH, ORP or dissolved oxygen probes. Each box contains 20 singles. MW5 is an assortment of all four liquids. Shelf life is one year.

Water Quality Characteristics

Physical: Total suspended and dissolved solids, turbidity, color, odors and temperature. Chemical: pH, alkalinity, hardness, conductivity, dissolved gases, etc. Biological: Algae and microbes (bacteria, protozoa, fungi, etc.).
Water Quality Indicator

The amount of oxygen dissolved (D.O.) in water is a good indicator of water quality commonly used in aquaculture. Water with a D.O. of 8 ppm will support game fish and other desirable forms of life. Water with less than 2 ppm oxygen will support only certain fish, worms, bacteria, fungi and other decomposers. Certain organic materials increase oxygen consumption by decomposers. This is measured by the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD). This is the amount of oxygen used by microbes, mainly bacteria, in the oxidation of organic materials. The standard test is for 5 days at 20C, and the value it yields is referred to as the 5 day biochemical oxygen demand, commonly shown as BOD5 (see Index for BOD meters). Another measurement is chemical oxygen demand (COD), which is the measurement of the organic materials in terms of the oxygen required to chemically oxidize them. It is measured by boiling and refluxing the sample with a strong oxidizing agent (potassium dichromate), then determining the amount of agent used.
MW0 MW4 MW5 MW7 MW10
Deionized Water pH 4.01 5 ea. pH 4.01, 7.00, 10.00 and H2O pH 7.00 pH 10.00
$ 24.55 24.55 24.55 24.55 24.55
Each
22.10 22.10 22.10 22.10 22.10
6+
mw5
Electrode Care Accessories

Electrode cleaning solution will safely clean pH/ORP electrodes. Use pH storage solution with the electrode saver bottle. Fill saver bottle with storage solution. Accepts probes up to 12 mm in diameter and protects the electrode. Use rinse solution between each reading for greater accuracy.

cs
Typical Treatment Processes for Organic Compounds

Anaerobic Digestion.
Biological oxidation of degradable organics by microbes under conditions where there is no molecular oxygen. These are mainly used for swine, poultry and beef industries. Digestion is done by anaerobic bacteria, organic-acid forming and methaneproducing heterotrophs. Advantages: Low operational costs, no need for aeration and self-sufficiency if managed properly. Disadvantages: Odors, sludge must be removed periodically, land space needed (long treatment time), and NIMBY (not in my back yard).
CS SS SBT VSDI
pH/ORP Cleaning Solution, 1 pint pH/ORP Storage Solution, 1 pint Saver Bottle Rinse Solution, 1 quart
$ 13.62 15.50 4.65 16.50
Each
12.26 13.95 4.19 14.85
4+
pH Calibration Capsules
Why ship water? If you have access to deionized water, just buy these color-coded calibration capsules. Simply dissolve the preweighed powder from each capsule in 100 mL of deionized water to make 100 mL of solution. Ten capsules per bottle.

Aerobic Digestion.
Biological oxidation of organics under conditions where there is molecular oxygen. Digestion is done by aerobic and facultative bacteria. Advantages: Less odor, reduction in pollution characteristics of the effluent and low treatment time. Disadvantages: Higher operational cost (equipment maintenance, electrical cost).
PH4 PH7 PH10
pH 4 pH 7 pH 10
$ 8.96 8.96 8.96
Each
7.61 7.61 7.61
6+
ph4
ph7
ph10
100
Water Quality
ORP Meters/AES Wastewater
EcoSense ORP/Temperature Pen by YSI Water-Resistant Instrument Pouch

This inexpensive, waterproof pouch is great for use with small field meters, documents, etc. Read and operate the instrument inside the pouch, while the probe extends outside. Has a Velcro top seal. Measures 9" x 7" outside, weighs .6 lb. 840090 $ 10.50 9.45/4+
Calibrate to an ORP standard!

Take absolute and relative ORP readings from -1,100 to +1,100 mV with this affordable waterproof instrument. Use the Zobell ORP calibration solution (sold separately) to recalibrate at any time. It has replaceable electrodes, automatic temperature compensation and auto shut-off. Use the 50-set memory (absolute/relative mV, temperature and a date and time stamp) and "hold" feature that locks readings on-screen. Easy-to-understand menus and IP67 housing. Measures -10C to 100C (14 to 212F). Uses GAP-76 batteries (included). One-year instrument warranty, six-month electrode warranty. Weighs .25 lb. YORP15 Y3628 Y605123 ORP/Temp Pen Zobell ORP Test Solution ORP Replacement Electrode Kit $ 155 29 69
yORP15
ORP Meter
This little meter offers ORP data at a very affordable price. Detachable probe with 10' cable uses BNC connector and is accurate to 1 mV. Epoxy-covered electrode with a platinum band and silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) tip. For calibration, it has an easy-to-use offset screw. Liquid crystal display. Powered by single 9V battery (included). Can be used in both fresh and salt water. Measures 2" x 5.5". Six-month warranty. Probe included. Calibration solutions sold separately. ORP3 ORP3R PA12 Pinpoint ORP Meter ORP Replacement Probe AC Adapter $ 135 70 10
ORP Check Solution by Vital Sine

Formulated to check the calibration of ORP meters; 460-mL bottles. Shelf life is 6 months. 7021 7022 SBT 240 mV 470 mV Saver Bottle $ 25.00 25.00 4.65 23.75/4+ 23.75/4+
ORP3 7022 7021
Wastewater Treatment Solutions Worldwide

Onsite Wastewater Treatment

AERO-tECh Aerobic treatment Units (AtUs). 500 gpd to 5,000 gpd systems. Residential and commercial systems. Retro-Fix kits for your existing systems. Clustered/decentralized onsite wastewater treatment systems. Disposal systems design, including subsurface drip systems. NsF-Certified to NsF/ANsI standard 40.
AEs Wastewater Inc. 2395 Apopka Blvd., Apopka, FL 32703 Phone: 407-598-1410 Fax: 407-886-0800 Email: Wastewater@AquaticEco.com Web: AES-Wastewater.com
Refractometers/Hydrometers
Water Quality
101
Salinity Refractometer by Vital Sine

TF
Largest and sharpest scale display available. Calibration ring for simplified calibration.
Rubber hood. Houses the focusable lens and prevents light from entering through the eyepiece during use.
Our SR6 refractometer features a magnifi ed scale for better visual accuracy. Other features include solid aluminum construction, a rubber-gripped body and temperature compensation between 10 and 30C (5086F). To calibrate, simply loosen the handset screw, place a few drops of salt-free water on the prism, turn the calibration ring until the shadowline is at zero and secure the set screwthat's it! It reads specific gravity (1.000 to 1.070) and salinity in parts per thousand (0100 in 1 ppt divisions). Refractometer includes a black vinyl zip case, transfer pipette and cleaning cloth. This is one of the highest quality refractometers we have found on the market. Measures 11/2" D x 7" L (4 x 18 cm), weighs .6 lb (285 g). One-year warranty. SR6 $ 129.89
Daylight Plate. Exceptionally durable with a double-hinge design allowing even thick samples to be easily measured.
Rubber Grip.
Do not dip a refractometer in water, as this will void the warranty. Use a dropper and place a few drops on the prism. The refractometer will provide many years of service if used this way.
Calibration Ring. For rapid calibrations.
Antiroll stand. Protects against rolling off a table.
scale view.
Salinity Refractometer, Low Cost

On a tight budget?
Here's a low-cost, automatic temperature-compensated salinity refractometer, similar to our high-quality model, but not as durable or well made. It has automatic temperature correction from 5086F (1030C) and a dual scale reading 0100 ppt and 1.0001.070 specific gravity. Each refractometer is tested to ensure an accurate instrument, even at this low price. Six-month warranty. Weighs .6 lb. Made in China. SR5 $ 52.03
Hydrometer
These inexpensive, all-plastic hydrometers are individually tested for accuracy. Weighs .2 lb. 4" W x 5" H.

Range: 1640 ppt (1.0101.030 SG). Accurate to 1.5 ppt. Direct reading in ppt and specific gravity. $ 9.50
HYD10
Important
scale view.
re Compaere h Elsew $ at 8 9
46
60
Economy Hydrometers
Designed for use in aquariums and seafood holding systems, both are standardized at 75F (24C). The standard model has a salinity range of 1.000 to 1.060, with a thermometer that measures from 10 to 40C and 15 to 105F. It is 8" long and has a body diameter of .5". The professional model has a salinity range of 1.000 to 1.060 and features a built-in thermometer that measures from 0 to 40C and 30 to 105F. It is 12" long and has a body diameter of .81". Weighs 1 lb. HYD6 HYD7 Standard Professional $ 6.10 10.95 5.49/12+ 10.04/12+
hyD6
HYD6 is shown in a graduated cylinder sold separately (see Index).
102
Water Quality
Salinity/Multiparameter Meters/Tech Talk
Salinity/Conductivity/Temperature (Meter Only) Meter by YSI

The YSI Model Y30 SCT meter is well suited to both field and lab applications. The large backlit display makes reading easy under all conditions. It is waterproof and, if dropped in the water, it floats! The display shows temperature in C along with temperature compensated conductivity (micro-ohms) and salinity in ppt. Accuracy is .5% conductivity, .1 ppt salinity and .1C temperature. Calibration is done with the push of a button. Comes with six AA alkaline batteries for about 100 hours of operation. Probes are not detachable. Measures 10" L x 4" W. Meter w/10' cable weighs 2 lbs. Two-year warranty on the meter and one-year on the probe and cable. Made in the USA. Calibration solutions sold separately.
Ship Wt
Salinity Meter
This salinity meter measures conductivity, giving a digital readout in mS (millisiemens). The table included will give the corresponding reading in both specific gravity and salinity to 62 ppt. The permanently connected probe has a 3' cable. This meter is temperature compensated for accuracy of 4%. Calibrating fluid included. Uses one 9V battery (included). Weighs only .6 lb and measures 5.5" L x 3" W. SM6 PA12 Pinpoint Salinity Meter AC Adapter $ 134 10
Y3010 Y3025 Y3050 Y3167-E Y3168-E Y3169-E
Meter w/10' Cable Meter w/25' Cable Meter w/50' Cable 1,000 S/cm, 1 pint 10,000 S/cm, 1 pint 50,000 S/cm, 1 pint
4 lbs 5 lbs 6 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 775.00 795.00 865.00 18.00 18.00 18.00
sm6
y3010
Have a complaint?
Tech Talk 28
Measuring Salinity
Salt Tester, to 10 ppt

Great for measuring salt levels in koi ponds.
This low-range tester is specifically designed for measuring those difficult low-salt concentrations in koi ponds. The tester is completely waterproof and measures salt levels between .110 ppt. Easy calibration trimmer is isolated inside the battery compartment to prevent accidental tampering. Sensor element is 316 SS and replaceable. Includes protective case and batteries. Uses 4 button cell batteries, 7" L x 11/2" dia., weighs .4 lb. Six-month warranty. Calibration solutions sold separately. SWT2 $ 89.95
When culturing saltwater organisms, less than a 10% variation in salinity (5% or 2 ppt) is often required. The measuring methods cover a wide range of cost, convenience and accuracy. Basically, salinity is the sum of all dissolved ions in the water (not just sodium and chloride), expressed as parts per thousand (grams per kilogram). One measurement method is to titrate chlorinity (chloride) and calculate the salinity based on the assumption that the composition is the same as seawater. Usually titrations are based on volumes, which can introduce a 2.5% error if not done correctly. This is much more time consuming than other methods and may be used as a means of checking other techniques. Density is the basis of the hydrometer measuring method. Salinity can then be determined from tables based on density (specific gravity) and temperature. Refractometers are also density based. They provide fast, accurate (1 ppt) salinity measurements. Generally, we suggest temperature-compensated models. Cost and care are the biggest drawbacks. Calibration using certified seawater is best; however, fresh water is a reasonable alternative for general aquaculture uses. Electrical conductivity is another method of determining salinity. Conductivity measurements are best at 25C and any difference from this requires compensation. If there is a question about temperature compensation, simply take a reading, change the temperature of the water by 5 or 10 degrees and measure again. It should give the same salinity. Some units give readings in millisiemens (mS) and require a salinity conversion table. Others read directly in salinity. Regular calibration with a standard solution is recommended. The information in this Tech Talk was provided by Thomas Frakes, Technical Consultant, Aquarium Systems, Inc.
Technician Profile
Ann Poholek
Ann has extensive technical sales work experience with water quality instrumentation using meters, probes and other test equipment. She has also completed the Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point (HACCP) program and is certified in fisheries products hazard control.
Multiparameter Pens/Meters
Water Quality
103
Calcium Monitor
Get accurate calcium measurements at an affordable price. Approximately 150 hrs of continuous monitoring on one 9-volt battery (not included). Two-point calibration. Calcium probe has BNC connector and 10-ft cable. Optional AC adapter available. Not waterproof. Two-year warranty on monitor, six months on probe. Weighs .5 lb. CMP1 CPA CPET CMFK PA12 Range 09,772 ppm Pinpoint Calcium Monitor Repl. Probe Assembly Repl. Probe Element Tip Calcium Fluid Kit AC Adapter Resolution .2 ppm $ 291 221 143 17 10
CmP1
Waterproof ExStik Conductivity/TDS/Salinity Meter

This meter has one high-accuracy, multirange sensor that measures four parametersconductivity, TDS, salinity and temperature. Plus, upon power-up meter does a self-calibration check to ensure calibration. Features: ATC, adjustable conductivity to TDS ratio factor from .4 to 1.0, conveniently calculates the TDS value, data hold, auto shut-off and low battery indication. The internal memory stores up to 15 labeled readings for recall. Temperature range: 32149F (065C). Calibration solutions sold separately. One-year warranty on meter, six months on sensor. EC400 EC405 EX006 EX007 CA895 ExStik Meter Spare Conductivity Cell* Weighted Base w/5 Solution Cups Spare Solution Cups (24 Pk) Small Vinyl Carrying Case $ 89.99 39.99 14.99 13.99 9.99
Accuracy 2% of Reading
*This conductivity cell is not interchangeable with other ExStik meters.
Conductivity/TDS Calibration Solutions

HI7031L TD13 TD15 TD644 1,413 S, 460 mL 1,382 ppm, 500 mL 1,500 ppm, 500 mL 6.44 ppt, 20 mL Sachets (25) $ 14.00 14.00 14.00 28.00
Each
13.30 13.30 13.30 26.60
4+
Range Conductivity 0199.9 S/cm 2001,999 S/cm 219.99 mS/cm
Resolution Accuracy .1 S/cm 1 S/cm .01 mS/cm 2% FS
TDS/Salinity 099.9 ppm (mg/L) .1 ppm (mg/L) 2% FS 100999 ppm (mg/L) 1 ppm (mg/L) 19.99 ppt (g/L) .01 ppt (g/L)
EC400
Combo Tester
This waterproof combination tester offers high-accuracy pH, EC/TDS and temperature measurements in C and F. Replaceable pH electrode cartridge has extendable cloth junction* and EC/TDS graphite electrode resists contamination by salts and other substances. Features automatic temperature compensation (ATC). Reads pH from 014, temperature 060C (32140F). Calibration solutions sold separately. Measures 2" W x 7" L. Weighs .2 lb. One-year warranty on meter, six months on probe.
Waterproof ExStik II pH/ Conductivity/TDS/Salinity Meter

This meter has a rugged combination, flat-surface pH electrode (with auto-ranging), high-accuracy conductivity cell. RENEW feature alerts users when the electrode needs replacing. Adjustable conductivity to TDS ratio from .4 to 1.0 and .5 fi xed salinity ratio. Meter also has ATC, auto shut-off and low battery indication. The internal memory stores up to 25 labeled readings for recall. Also available as a kit, which includes calibration solutions, weighted base, 3 sample cups and a carrying case. Measures 1.5" W x 7" L. One-year warranty on meter, six months on sensor.
hI98129
*When the cloth becomes dirty from routine testing, pull out a 1/8" section to rejuvenate electrode.
HI98129 73127 Combo Tester Repl. pH Electrode Range Conductivity TDS/Salinity pH 03,999 S/cm $ 149 46 Resolution 1 S/cm
Accuracy 2% FS 2% FS .05
EC500 EC510 EC505 EX006 EX007 CA895
ExStik II Meter $ 139.99 ExStik II Kit 179.99 Spare Electrode 59.99 Weighted Base w/5 Solution Cups 14.99 Spare Solution Cups (24 Pk) 13.99 Small Vinyl Carrying Case 9.99 Range Resolution Accuracy .1 S/cm 2% FS
02,000 ppm (mg/L) .1 ppm (mg/L) 0 to 14.00 .01
Conductivity
Combo Meter
Water-resistant pH/EC/TDS meter specifically designed for agricultural applications such as hydroponics, greenhouses, farming and nurseries. Extra-large LCD clearly displays the parameter being measured as well as calibration instructions. Calibration is fast and easy, with knobs located on the front panel of the instrument. Measures pH, mS/cm, ppm and 060C. CAL-CHECK feature lets you easily check the probe calibration status at any time. Includes combination probe, starter set of calibration and cleaning solution sachets, check solution sachet battery and instructions. 5.7" x 3.1" x 1.5", weighs 8.1 oz. HI9813-6N HI1285-6 Combo Meter Replacement Electrode Range Conductivity TDS/Salinity pH 04.00 S/cm 01,999 ppm (mg/L) 014.0 $ 211.67 99.00 Resolution .01 S/cm 1 ppm (mg/L) .1 Accuracy 2% FS 2% FS .1
0199.9 S/cm 2001,999 S/cm 219.99 mS/cm
TDS/Salinity 099.9 ppm (mg/L) .1 ppm (mg/L) 2% FS 100999 ppm (mg/L) 19.99 ppt (g/L) pH 0 to 14.00 .01 .01
EC500
Conductivity Meter
If you need to measure freshwater conductivity in S, this low-cost, two-range meter is an excellent choice. This scale is typically used for fresh water and low concentrations of salt. The LED reads in two ranges at the flip of a switch. Measures from 02,000 S or 020,000 S. Accurate to 4% of reading. 3' cable, 5.5" L x 3" W, weighs only .4 lb. Two-year warranty. Runs on 9V battery (included). Calibration solutions sold separately. CM6 PA12 Pinpoint Conductivity Meter AC Adapter $ 127 10
Cm6
104
Water Quality
Turbidity/Total Gas Pressure Meters/Saturometer
2020we Turbidity Meter

This portable, compact meter provides an extremely accurate way for taking turbidity measurements in the field. An ideal choice for regulatory monitoring, wastewater testing and environmental water analysis in the field or the lab with a 500-point data log. A multidetector optical configuration minimizes stray light and color interferences, assuring long-term stability of the reading. Readings are taken over a 3-second period, minimizing any fluctuations in readings attributed to large particles. The instrument meets or exceeds EPA design specifications for NPDWR and NPDES turbidity monitoring programs as specified by USEPA method 180.1. A compliance reading mode rounds the reading to meet EPA reporting requirements. Choose from seven user-selected languages: English, French, Spanish, Japanese, Italian, Portuguese and Chinese. The 2020we turbidity meter comes with 0, 1, and 10 NTU standards, sample bottle, 4 sample tubes, USB cable and USB wall plug. Measures 7.5" x 3.5" x 2.5" (case is 10" x 13" x 6"). One-year warranty. LM1870
ship Wt
Tech Talk 9
Supersaturation
The measurement of total dissolved gas pressure (TGP) can be required in aquaculture. When the total pressure of all gases in the water exceeds the ambient atmospheric pressure at the water's surface, supersaturation exists. The effect of excessive supersaturation on fish has been well documented and has caused massive fishkills. TGP as low as 103% can be lethal!
supersaturation can be caused by numerous man-made and natural sources:
Dam spillways can allow a high volume discharge to plunge air deep into the receiving water. Water pump inlets can suck air, putting that air under high pressure in the piping (this is all too common, even in aquariums). Naturally high levels of nitrogen can be found in well water. Algae blooms can cause supersaturated levels of oxygen. Temperature changes, which affect the saturation level. Simply heating the water can cause lethal supersaturation.
6 lbs
$ 925
Instrument Type Nephelometric Turbidity Range 0 to 4,000 NTU Resolution .01 on 010.99 range 0.1 on 11109.9 range 1.0 on 1104,000 range
g Comin in July
Total Dissolved Gas Pressure (TGP) Meter

Increasing water temperatures, injection of air in deep water, algal blooms, pressurized pumping and pump cavitation can all result in gas supersaturation, which can cause bubble trauma and lethal toxicological problems (gas bubble disease) for many aquatic species. As little as 103% TGP can be lethal. This meter provides rapid and accurate measurement of total dissolved gas pressure (TGP) in mmHg or % saturation. It also measures delta P (TGP-BP), barometric pressure (BP, in mmHg) and temperature (C). It has simple calibration menus and easy-to-understand operational menus. The handheld meter features a tough membrane keypad and digital display with a user selectable backlight. Internal rechargeable batteries with an AC adapter are included. Probe includes a 5-m (16 ft) cable. Meter measures 6.3" x 3.3" x 3.2". One-year warranty. 1SSA001 1SSA003 1SSA006 1SSA008 TGP Meter w/5-m Probe $ 1,515.00 Repl. TGP Cartridge 170.00 Car Charger 86.30 Data Transfer Cable, RS232, Software 227.00
Saturometer
Designed for measuring the total dissolved gases in water, this saturometer/ tensionometer is a must for monitoring deadly nitrogen gas supersaturation. Can be used for spot checking tanks where supersaturation is suspected. Not to be used for long term deployment. It is lightweight, water-resistant and measures delta P directly in mmHg. Features include an auxiliary output for data recording instruments, large 3-digit display and low-battery indicator. Meter includes a probe with 5-m cable, 9V batteries and waterproof case. Range: -600 to 700 mmHg. Accuracy: 1 mmHg. Maximum probe working depth 91' (31 meters). Meter and case weigh 5 lbs. One-year warranty. 300E $ 3,037
Range TGP BP Temp 01,550 mmHg 01,550 mmHg 040.0C
Resolution 1 mmHg 1 mmHg .2C 1 mmHg
This unit is also available for rent. $150 per week, plus shipping. Call for availability.
Delta P -1,5501,550 mmHg
1ssA001
Important
Price includes this waterproof case.
Multiparameter Meters/Cases
Water Quality
105
Multifunction D.O. Meter, Y85
(Meter Only)
The Y85 series meters measure dissolved oxygen, conductivity, salinity and temperature and are available in detachable or nondetachable models. Digital display is backlit and simultaneously shows temperature and your choice of dissolved oxygen, conductivity or salinity. Internal memory stores 50 sets of data. Equipped with automatic function check, temperature compensation and salinity compensation for D.O. readings. Two-year warranty on meter. One-year warranty on probe. Six AA batteries included for a battery life of 180 hours. Measures 4" W x 10" L with 10' cable. Weighs 3 lb. Made in USA. Spanish manual available. Calibration solutions sold separately.
D.O. Range 020 mg/L; 0200% air saturation w/ 2% accuracy Conductivity Ranges 0499.9 S/cm; 04,999 S/cm 049.99 mS/cm; 0200 mS/cm Salinity Range 080 ppt w/ .1 ppt accuracy Temperature Range -565C w/ .1C accuracy Response Time 90% in 10 seconds; 95% in 15 seconds
Nondetachable Cable Models

Y8510 Y8525 Y8550 Y85100 Y5906
Ship Wt
Meter w/10' Cable Meter w/25' Cable Meter w/50' Cable Meter w/100' Cable Membranes, 6/Pk
$ 1,375.00 1,395.00 1,425.00 1,525.00 52.00
Detachable Cable Models

Y85D Y85D10 Y85D25 Y85D50 Y85D100 Y3167-E Y3168-E Y3169-E
Ship Wt
Y85 Meter Only 3 lbs 10' Cable & Probe 1 lb 25' Cable & Probe 2 lbs 50' Cable & Probe 3 lbs 100' Cable & Probe 7 lbs 1,000 S/cm 1 pint 10,000 S/cm 1 pint 50,000 S/cm 1 pint
$ 925.00 525.00 575.00 595.00 695.00 18.00 18.00 18.00
y8510
Waterproof Outdoor Cases

These outdoor cases are perfect for tough outdoor use and are tested under extreme conditions. Able to withstand temperatures ranging from -4080C, they are stackable, airtight and waterproof. They are also crackproof and virtually indestructible. Cases are equipped with sturdy eyes for padlocks and an air pressure compensation valve. Foam insert consists of prepunched cubic elements, so you can customize your own interior. Each case includes carrying strap. Unlimited lifetime warranty. BW5CASE BW10CASE BW30CASE BW40CASE BW50CASE BW61CASE BW65CASE BW40BPS BW50BPS BW61BPS BW5STRAP BW10STRAP BW30STRAP BW40STRAP BW50STRAP BW61STRAP BW65STRAP

556 Multiprobe System (Meter Only) by YSI
TF
8.1" x 5.7" x 2.8" 1.1 9.8" x 7.1" x 3.15" 1.3 13.2" x 8.3" x 5.3" 3.8 15.2" x 10.4" x 5.9" 4.2 16.5" x 11.8" x 11.8" 6.6 18.9" x 14.2" x 8.3" 10.1 23.2" x 16.5" x 7.7" 16.5 Back Pack System for BW40CASE Back Pack System for BW50CASE Back Pack System for BW61CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW5CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW10CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW30CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW40CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW50CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW61CASE Repl. Carrying Strap for BW65CASE
Interior Dimensions
Wt (lbs)
$ 23.25 29.85 84.75 90.25 115.50 176.85 198.90 39.40 43.25 45.75 4.15 5.15 10.15 10.15 10.15 10.15 10.15
Rugged and reliable, this Multiprobe System combines the versatility of an easy-to-use, handheld unit with the functionality of a multiparameter system. Featuring an IP67 waterproof case, the YSI 556 MPS simultaneously measures dissolved oxygen, pH, salinity, conductivity, temperature and ORP. One-, two- or three-point pH calibration. Powered by four C cell batteries or an optional, rechargeable battery pack with fast-charge feature. Optional internal barometer can be user calibrated and displayed along with other data. The YSI 556 comes with a soft-sided carrying case for the meter, a 20-meter cable and calibration supplies. Measures 4.7" x 9". Three-year warranty on meter, one year on probe.
ield-replaceable D.O., pH and ORP probes. F Compatible with Ecowatch for Windows software. Internal memory has 35 file names and stores over 49,000 data setpoints.
Ship Wt (lbs)
y5561
Y5561 Y5562 Y55634 Y556310 Y556320 Y5564 Y5565 Y6118 Y5083 Y5909
556 MPS Meter 556 With Barometer Option 4-Meter Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity 10-Meter Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity 20-Meter Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity pH Kit pH/ORP Kit Rechargeable Battery Kit (w/charger) Flow Cell Membrane Kit, 2 mil PE, Each
4 4 5 7 10 1 1 1 1 1
$ 1,750.00 1,995.00 995.00 1,095.00 1,195.00 225.00 340.00 350.00 395.00 54.00
106
Water Quality
Multiparameter Meter
Note: Meter, probes, cables and calibration solutions are sold separately.
Multiparameter Instrument by YSI

Measure combinations of D.O., temperature, pH, conductivity, salinity, TDS, ORP, ammonium, nitrate, chloride and barometric pressure. Automatic temperature, salinity and barometric pressure compensation.
Instrument
Y60500 Professional Plus Instrument Galvanic D.O. Polarographic D.O. pH ISE ORP ISE pH/ORP Combination ISE (not to be used on dual ISE cables) Ammonium ISE (fresh water only) Chloride ISE (fresh water only) Nitrate ISE (fresh water only) $ 1,075 165 165 160 190 285 330 330 330
Test up to 11 different parameters with one meter and only a simple cable change! Meter has a backlit display and keypad, graphic display with detailed messages and instructions plus a gauge that continuously shows the battery level. The rubber over-molded case has an IP67 waterproof rating and is drop rated to 1 meter. Instrument can log data (2,000 data-set memory with site identity and GLP event logging) and download it to a PC. Data Manager desktop software, a communication dock and USB cable are included. Meter measures 3.3" x 8.5" x 2.3", weighs 1 lb. Uses 2 C batteries (included). Three year warranty on meters, two years on cables and one year on probes (six-month warranty on ammonia, chloride and nitrate ISEs).
Probes
Y6202 Y6203 Y6101 Y6102 Y6103 Y6104 Y6105 Y6106
Quatro
The Quatro cable holds four user-replaceable Professional Series sensors for temperature/conductivity, D.O. and your choice of any two ISEs (pH, ORP, ammonium, nitrate, or chloride).
Cables
(All cables include temperature sensor. Conductivity cables include a conductivity probe.) Y614C 4-m Cable for ISE/Temp 250 Y624C 4-m Cable for D.O./Temp 245 Y634C 4-m Cable for Conductivity/Temp 295 Y6114C 4-m Cable for ISE/ISE/Temp 535 Y6124C 4-m Cable for ISE/D.O./Temp 535 Y6134C 4-m Cable for ISE/Conductivity/Temp 425 Y6234C 4-m Cable for D.O./Conductivity/Temp 595 Y57904 Quatro 4-m Cable, ISE/ISE/D.O./Conductivity/Temp 1,295
System Specs (Instrument, Probe & Cable)

Dissolved Oxygen (% saturation) Range: 0500% air saturation Accuracy: 2% of the reading or 2% air saturation Resolution: 1% or .1% air saturation Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) Range: 050 mg/L Accuracy: 2% of the reading or .2 mg/L Resolution: .1 or .01 mg/L Temperature Range: -5100C (D.O. compensation range -545C) Accuracy: .2C (-570C), .3C (70 to 100C) Resolution: .1C Conductivity Range: 0200 mS/cm Accuracy: .5% of reading or .001 mS/cm (4-meter cable); 1% of reading or .001 mS/cm (20-meter cable) Resolution: .001.1 mS/cm (Range-dependent) Salinity Range: 070 ppt Accuracy: 1% of reading or .1 ppt Resolution: .01 ppt pH Range: 014 units Accuracy: .2 units Resolution: .01 units ISE Range: -1,9991,999 mV Accuracy: 20 mV Resolution: .1 mV Total Dissolved Solids Calculated from conductivity (variable constant, default .65) Range: 0100 g/L Resolution: 4 digits Barometer Range: 375825 mmHg Accuracy: 3 mmHg (within 15C of calibration temp) Resolution: .1 mmHg Units: mmHg, inHg, kPa
Look online at AquaticEco.com to see additional probes and cables.
y60500
y57904 (Quatro)
Probe Not Included
Important
Controllers/Monitors
PLCs
107
Controllers and Monitors by Aquatic Eco-Systems

Standard
If your needs are straightforward and unchanging, then our C150 series is the right choice for reliable control and monitoring. Use the C150 as a workhorse for applications ranging from blind device control to heater and pump control with built-in safety interlocking. Our systems have programming that we customize in-house to your desired parameters. Each box has a programmable momentary switch and 5 independent on/off toggle switches. LEDs indicate power, alarm and one programmed function. Audible alarm is also possible. Each model operates on 100230VAC, 50/60 Hz power. High-voltage models have 6 M23 quick-connect outputs at 100 230VAC, 10 A and 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC. Low-voltage models have 6 M8 quick-connect outputs at 24VDC, .5 A and 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC.
SCADA
Our CM1000 custom control and monitoring devices are perfect for supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). From system intelligence gathering to case-based decision making, we'll design a system that scales to your facility's needs. The CM1000 can be independent or multiplied based on system size or specification, so no concept is out of reach. Additionally, we can configure a system with multiple gateways to redundantly monitor and control systems that need backup or tie a CM1000 together with legacy systems to maximize your existing investment. These are just a few examples of what every CM1000 offers:

Secure access to control and monitor your system from remote locations. Data storage, analysis and charting. obust control algorithms using case-based structured text and ladder R programming.
When you purchase a CM1000 you're getting state-of-the-art technology that's expandable and upgradeable, allowing you to take advantage of future developments without significant interruption. Call 407-598-1401 to get the custom design and build started.
Advanced
For more flexibility and real-time visual feedback on parameter levels, our C350 series is an outstanding choice. We'll custom program each C350 model to your specifications, and if your needs change in the future, we can easily reprogram the system accordingly. The 256-color display not only allows instant analysis but also lets you quickly toggle through different readouts at the touch of a finger. Access live data remotely (LAN, WAN or Internet) via a built-in Ethernet connection and save the data logged for later analysis elsewhere on an SD card (not included). Each box has a programmable audible alarm. SMS modem expansion optional. Each model operates on 100230VAC, 50/60 Hz power. High-voltage models have 6 M23 quick-connect outputs at 100230VAC, 10 A, 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC and 6 M12 quick-connect inputs at 4-20 mA. Low-voltage models have 6 M8 quick-connect outputs at 24VDC, .5 A, 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC and 6 M12 quick-connect inputs at 4-20 mA.
Controllers and Monitors
C150L1 C150H1 C350L1 C350H1 CM1000
Low-Voltage System High-Voltage System Low-Voltage System High-Voltage System Call for a Custom Quote
$ 1,520.00 1,615.00 2,950.00 3,565.00
Custom Enclosed Control Panels

If your requirements are extensive, complex or extremely specialized, our team of engineers can design a robust control and monitoring system tailored to your requirements. For example, we perform:

Component selection. Control box design and layout. PLC programming. HMI design. System integration. System commissioning.
CMS001 CMS002 CMS003 CMS004 CMS005 CMS006 CMS007 CMS008 CMS009 CMS0010 CMS0011 CMS0016 CMS0012 CMS0013 CMS0014
Analog Sensors (4-20 mA)
Temperature, Polypropylene Temperature, 316L SS pH + Transmitter Pkg Conductivity, 10.0 Cell Constant ORP + Transmitter Pkg D.O., 0200%, Galvanic Sump Level, Ultra-Sonic, 010 m Sump Level, Ultra-Sonic, 01.25 m Sump Level, GWR Technology, 01.5 m Flow, Mag-Meter Flow, Temperature Flow, Temperature, Digital Switch Pressure (No Display) Pressure Total Dissolved Gas Monitor
305.62 255.55 601.76 762.55 707.75 577.09 726.55 370.00 584.67 715.00 421.25 405.24 198.89 768.48 708.33
Expect industry-leading accuracy and precision from our high-quality control panels and sensors. Our industrial shop is UL508A-certified, and we'll ensure that your solution meets IEC, UL and local specifications.
You guys rock! Products and customer service are top shelf. I only buy aquaculture products through you.
Renzo Fancellu
108
PLCs
Satellite Satellite Downlink
Control and Monitoring Systems
Information at Your Fingertips
WWW
Smartphone
Tablet
Computer
Remote Accessibility
GSM Radio
Of ce
Airplane
Car Versatile, Dependable Control and Monitoring

Aquatic Eco-Systems offers a full range of controlling and monitoring equipment to help you safeguard any water-based activity:

House
Wireless
Each model has an easy-to-read touchscreen interface that will tell you system status at a glance. If an alarm condition is detected, the device will text or email multiple cellphones to alert staffhelping prevent catastrophic failures and animal loss.
Scientific research and testing. Public aquarium life support. Recirculating aquaculture systems. Lake management. Koi pond maintenance.
Standard Equipment
AES has off-the-shelf controlling and monitoring models that are ready to ship today. If your needs are straightforward and unchanging, then our C150 series is the right choice for reliable control and monitoring. For more flexibility and real-time visual feedback on parameter levels, our C350 series is an outstanding choice. We'll custom program each C350 model to your specifications, and if your needs change in the future, we can easily reprogram the system accordingly. High-voltage models have 6 M23 quick-connect outputs at 100230VAC, 10 A and 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC (C350 also has 6 M12 quick-connect inputs at 4-20 mA). Low-voltage models have 6 M8 quick-connect outputs at 24VDC, .5 A and 2 M8 quick-connect inputs at 24VDC (C350 adds 6 M12 quick-connect inputs at 4-20 mA).
Our systems offer outstanding flexibility, so they can be configured to integrate with your existing systems or can be tailored to work as a seamless accessory with AES's in-house system designs. In addition, each controller and monitor is expandable and can be field upgraded. Expect AES equipment to operate with reliability, precision and responsiveness. Examples of water quality and system parameters you can control or monitor include dissolved oxygen, system temperature, pH dosing, carbon filter vessel pressure differentials, total dissolved gas pressure (TGP) and pump speed.
PLCs
109
Laboratory #1 Aquarium Laboratory #2
GSM Radio
LAN Radio Transceiver WAN LAN Municipal Lake
Satellite Uplink
Wireless Koi Pond
Aquaculture
Custom Equipment and SCADA

If your needs are complex and more extensive than our standard equipment can support, we can build a customized solution that will scale to any size system or varied demand, from system intelligence gathering to case-based decision making. Our CM1000 custom control and monitoring devices are perfect for supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). The CM1000 can be independent or multiplied based on system size or specification, so no concept is out of reach. Additionally, we can configure a system with multiple gateways to redundantly monitor and control systems that need backup or tie a CM1000 together with legacy systems to maximize your existing investment.
Information at Your Fingertips

Use your smartphone, laptop computer or tablet to access data and reports. You'll see real-time data displayed in an easily understood manner, enabling you to quickly respond to problems.
Data Collection
If you want historical data for recordkeeping or audits, our systems can provide you with a detailed history of sensors, alarms, maintenance performed and operational characteristics. All collected information may be saved as a .CSV file for manipulation in any statistical analysis software.
Many Ways to Access Data

You don't have to be physically present in the office or lab to keep track of your system's condition and alarms. Whichever method you use to log in to your network, through the Internet or via satellite uplink, and wherever you might be, traveling or in remote locations, we'll provide a means of connectivity.
Panel Shop and UL508A Certification

AES has an in-house panel shop and retains UL508A certification for the design and manufacturing of industrial control panels.
110
YSI 5200A
YSI 5200A Water Quality Monitoring System

the 5200 gets an upgrade.
TF
The YSI 5200 water quality monitoring system set new standards for versatility and reliability. Welcome to the next generation. Designed for aquaculture and other applications that require real-time monitoring, the 520 0A RSM measures dissolved oxygen, pH, ORP, conductivity, salinity and temperature! The 5200 RSM can accept additional inputs, including total dissolved gas sensors, water level sensors, pressure sensors, flow sensors, etc. It's also a controller and alarm system. When used with AquaManager software, it can email alarms if connected directly to a computer or phone alarms when connected to an internal modem. It will even network with other RSMs.
Advantages of the 5200A over the 5200:

Large graphic display allows for menu-driven operation. Shows all parameters simultaneously. System status history at the push of a button. No loss of data when power is lost. Four cascading, 10-event timers. Network speed is 20X faster. Improved diagnostic capability. AC or DC power. Provides data that can be used for better system management.
5200A
y5200 shown in action at our in-house test facility.
Rs485
5200A
Rs232 Alarm light Feeder Probe Assembly Aerator
5200A
5200A
Applications include:

Recirculating aquaculture systems. Wastewater monitoring. Zoological exhibits/Aquariums. Fish ponds and raceways.
Research and laboratory systems. Live hauling. Environmental monitoring. Remote cage monitoring.
Instruments and Probes

Y5200A Y5200A-DC Y55624 Y556210 Y556220 Y55614 Y556110 Y556120 Y5564 Y5565 Y5560 Monitoring Assembly, 115/230V w/115V cord Monitoring Assembly, 12VDC 4-m Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity 10-m Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity 20-m Cable with D.O./Temp/Conductivity 4-m Cable with D.O./Temp 10-m Cable with D.O./Temp 20-m Cable with D.O./Temp pH Kit pH/ORP Kit Conductivity & Temperature Probe
ship Wt
The Y5200A RSM utilizes a multiprobe sonde for simultaneous oxygen, temperature, conductivity, salinity, pH and ORP measurement (calibration solutions sold separately). The probe can be submersed directly into a tank or threaded into a gland for in-line measurement. The polarographic oxygen probe requires little water movement to provide extremely accurate oxygen readings. Two-year warranty on meter, 1-year on probes and cable. NEMA 4X enclosure. CE-approved and UL-listed.
System Specs
Dissolved Oxygen (% saturation) Range: 0500% Accuracy: 2% Resolution: .1% Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) Range: 060 mg/L Accuracy: .2 mg/L Resolution: .01 mg/L Temperature Range: 045C Accuracy: .2C Resolution: .1C pH Range: 014 Accuracy: .2 pH Resolution: .01 pH ORP Range: -2,0002,000 Accuracy: 20 mV Resolution: 1 mV Conductivity LR Range: 02,000 S Accuracy: .5% Resolution: 1.0 S Conductivity HR Range: 0200 mS Accuracy: .5% Resolution: .1 mS Salinity Range: 080 ppt Accuracy: .1 ppt Resolution: .1 ppt Differential TDGP Range: 400 mmHg Accuracy: 1.0 mmHg Resolution: .1 mmHg
10 lbs 10 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs
$ 1,895 1,795 995 1,095 1,195 510 545 595 240 340 410
Accessories
Y559 Y5204 Y6509 Y6510 Y6505 Y5209A Y5285 ESP901 Replaceable D.O. Module D.O. Membrane Kit, 2 mil Rail Mount Kit Panel Mount Kit Weather Shield Software, AquaManager, Single Network Use Opto-Isolator (not included)* Ethernet Server
ship Wt
2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 180 65 40 75 60 399 145 245
*Required if unit is connected directly to computer. Calibration solutions

Y3167-E Y3168-E Y3169-E Y3628 Y5580 1,000 /cm, 1 Pint (Fresh Water) 10,000 /cm, 1 Pint (Brackish Water) 50,000 /cm, 1 Pint (Salt Water) Zobell ORP Test Solution, 125 ml Confidence Calibration Solution, 1 Pint 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb $ 18 18 18 29 18
Controllers/Monitors Dissolved Oxygen (D.O.) Monitor by YSI

Designed specifically for aquaculture systems, the YSI 5400 continuous monitor for dissolved oxygen and AquaManager Software can be used to integrate process control, feeding, alarming and data management into one product or can be used to simply monitor one tank. Powerful enough to manage a full-scale farming operation from anywhere in the world, yet simple enough for anyone to use. The 5400 is perfectly suited for continuous D.O. monitoring of multiple locations. Up to 32 instruments per communications port can be configured on one local network, with each instrument capable of controlling four D.O. channels and additional inputs for temperature, level, pressure, CO2, TGP sensors and more. Can also be networked with YSI 5200A multiparameter monitors. Relay outputs can control heaters, chillers, aerators, pumps, lights, feeders, etc. Alarming options include email and SMS from 3 to 10 email addresses, depending on configuration. The YSI 5400 also features flexible monitoring and control software with graphic interface function for quick, reliable system status checks. Includes conditional feed timer with Feed Smart software. Y5400 Y54002 Y5424 Y54210 Y54220 Y54230 y5434 Y54310 Y54320 Y54330 Y5403 Y5402
Ship Wt
YSI 5400
111
System Specs
Dissolved Oxygen (% saturation) Range: 0500% Accuracy: 2% Resolution: .1% Temperature Range: 045C Accuracy: .2C Resolution: .1C Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L) Range: 060 mg/L Accuracy: .2 mg/L Resolution: .01 mg/L (010 mg/L); .1 mg/L (1060 mg/L)
D.O. Monitor, 12VDC D.O. Monitor, 115230VAC or 12VDC 4-m Cable, D.O. Only 10-m Cable, D.O. Only 20-m Cable, D.O. Only 30-m Cable, D.O. Only 4-m Cable, D.O. w/Temp 10-m Cable, D.O. w/Temp 20-m Cable, D.O. w/Temp 30-m Cable, D.O. w/Temp IP Phone Modem Module Serial to Ethernet Module
10 lbs 10 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 2,795 2,895 395 455 515 575 450 510 570 630 375 325
Y5200A and Y5400 can be used in the same network to provide a solution when multiparameter measurements are required.
5200A
5400
RS485
IP Device RS232 Wireless
Header Tank
Output
Return Combined Y5200A and Y540 0 Networking
5400
y5400
Example of one Y5400 controlling D.O. and feeding in four tanks.
Thank you Aquatic Eco-Systems for keeping customer service #1. Our personal acct rep is familiar with, and understands, our daily procedures and challenges. The random issues that may occur are resolved immediately. Product is superior quality every time. Plus, you are a lot of fun to work with!
Diane M. Minge
Bass Pro Shops
Have a complaint?
AES performs on-site repair of YSI equipment. See page 94 for more information.
112
Aquatronica/pH/ORP
Control Unit
The Aquarium Controller System is an easy-to-use electronic system that is capable of managing electric utilities as well as monitoring all the parameters of an aquarium. Compatible with fresh and saltwater aquariums. The control unit can control all the interfaces used for reading the chemical values of an aquarium and all the other accessories connected to the system. It's completely customizable, with a modern, functional design for many applications. The graphic display makes programming much easier and allows you to immediately and constantly check parameters and their trends. The control unit can also be reprogrammed with a PC, allowing data backup and system updates.
Koralia Wave Module

The Koralia wave module allows you to install and manage 12V Koralia pumps. Program connected pumps to create wave or tide effects using different combinations at different times of the day. Manage up to 4 modules simultaneously on the same system (16 Koralia pumps).
Dosing Pumps
Aquatronica also offers dosing pumps, which consist of three peristaltic pumps that function independently and allow multiple dosage functions. They can even be programmed to automatically adjust the water's biological balance.
Multitester
To maximize the capabilities of the control unit, add the Aquatronica Multitester, which measures a variety of water parameters, including temperature, pH, Redox, marine density, conductivity, level and flooding.
For more information about Aquatronica products, visit AquaticEco.com.
pH/CO2 Controller
Automate CO2 dosing to ensure your plants get the right amount for respiration. Just plug a 115V solenoid valve (not included) into the socket supplied for dosing and your CO 2 supply to the solenoid. The included pH electrode measures 0 to 14 pH ( .2 pH accuracy) and has manual 2-point calibration. Controller has a set point range of 5.5 to 9.5 pH and a visual LED alarm that activates when the reading goes above the set point. Uses a 115V/60 Hz to 12VDC adapter (included) and measures 31/4" x 51/2" x 11/2". Two-year warranty on the base unit, six months on the probe. Ship weight is 2 lbs. SM122 SM911 pH/CO2 Smart Controller Repl. pH Probe $ 118 42
ORP Controller
Plug an ozone generator into this Smart controller's power socket, and it will dose until it determines that the ORP set point is reached. Simply dial the set point from 0 to 600 mV. The controller will automatically switch on again if the ORP value falls below the set point, and a visual LED alarm will activate while the reading is low. Controller can measure 1,000 mV (5 mV accuracy). ORP electrode and 115V/ 60 Hz to 12VDC adapter are included. Dimensions are 31/4" x 51/2" x 1/2". Two-year warranty on the base unit, six months on the probe. Ship weight is 3 lbs. SM510 SM921 ORP Controller Repl. ORP Probe $ 120 45
Alarms/Switches
113
Auto Dialer Alarm Systems

Sensaphone alarms pay for themselves by preventing disasters and reducing man-hours. Built-in microphone monitors soundcall at any time and listen in from a remote location. Units call you when there is a problem and speak in plain English. Use your regular phone line (separate line not needed). They recognize and bypass all answering machines and continue dialing until they contact a person. Auto shut-down after the 16th attempt (four phone numbers, four dial attempts on rotationup to 255 attempts). A200 can contact up to eight people. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Liquid Level Switches

These float switches convert from normally open (N.O.) to normally closed (N.C.) circuitry by inverting the stem. Polypropylene construction. Mini switch is 21/4" OAL, 1" D with 1/8" NPT mounting; rated at 30 W. Larger switch is 33/8" OAL x 11/2" D with 1/4" NPT and is rated at 60 W. Each has 24" wires. Great pump switches when used with relays. One-year warranty. Made in USA. ST3M ST3 Mini Switch Large Switch $ 19.20 69.83
Important Features:
ontinues dialing numbers in sequence for C 16255 attempts. Most sensors can be mounted up to 150 feet away with 1822 gauge wire. Can dial out to beepers and pagers. Backup battery condition monitor. Built-in clock. Programmable security code access. Variable AC power failure alarm. Compatible with cellular telephones (for dialing out) equipped with an RJ11 telephone jack.
st3
Flow Switch
a2
Auto Dialer Alarm Accessories

Mount these sensors up to 150 feet away from the auto dialer!
A2B Water Detection Sensor: Set on the floor to alert if flooding occurs. Small sensors on bottom of unit will send a signal if water is detected. A2C Magnetic Reed Switch: Install on doors, windows, etc. Will cause dial-out when contacts are opened. AT5 Remote Temperature Probe: Measures water or air temperature up to 50' from unit. Triggers a dial-out when temperature passes high and low set limits. 50' of Teflon-jacketed cable included. Weighs .02 lb. A3 Remote Temperature Sensor: Monitors room temperature. Simply attach to a wall and run wire (not included) to a terminal. Triggers dial-out if temperature passes high or low set limits. Can also be used under water if wire connections are thoroughly sealed. Can be used with up to 150' of cable. Weighs .2 lb. A2S Smoke Detector: 115VAC photoelectric smoke alarm (85 dB) with two sets of alarm contacts. 5" diameter, 2.5" H. Weighs .5 lb. A3B Passive Infrared Motion Detector: Can detect movement within a facility to determine unauthorized entry. Weighs .4 lb. A2 A200 A2B* A2C* AT5 A3* A2S A3B* A3C*

Here is an excellent value on a UL-recognized flow sensing switch that can turn a heater, chiller, alarm, pump, etc., up to 2 hp (@ 230V) on or off. The ST9 is factory adjusted to close the circuit at 14 gpm and open it at 6 gpm but also field adjustable over a wider range. At 40 gpm, this flow switch causes only 6" of H2O pressure loss. A "flapper" (piston in ST12) moves with water flow, actuating a magnetic switch on the outside of the pipe. Water cannot reach the electrical section! Operates by sensing water flow only (not pressure). Plumbing is PVC slip. Use ST11 and ST12 for booster pumps; they have N.O./N.C. settings. Rated at 50 psi, 125VAC to 25 A (1-hp motor) or 250VAC to 25 A (2-hp motor). Switch is single pole, single throw with 1/2" FNPT conduit connections on both sides. One plastic plug (shown in black) is included. 6" x 6". One-year warranty. Made in USA. ST9 ST12 ST11

11/2" 1" 2"
$ 71.00 95.65 99.65
Each
64.07 86.74 89.96
6+
st9
Pressure Switch
Adjustable sensitivity.
Arrow shows direction of flow.
Max of 4 Sensors, Plastic Housing 3 lbs Max of 8 Sensors, Plastic Housing 5 lbs Water Detection Sensor Magnetic Reed Switch Remote Temperature Probe Remote Temperature Sensor Smoke Detector Passive Infrared Motion Detector Humidistat
Ship Wt
$ 473.98 713.00 112.50 14.00 75.00 30.00 78.13 106.84 41.00
Low-cost method to start backup equipment or trip an alarm or relay. 3/16" air/water line hose barb, connects normally open or normally closed. High-quality, snap-action (single-pole double-throw) switch will carry up to 3 amps at 115V. For low-pressure applications (do not exceed 40 psi). Factory set at 30" H 2O. Moisture-resistant. Only 1.5" long. UL-listed. B601 $ 29.65 26.95/4+
*Wires or cables not included. Use 1822 gauge wire.

a2c
a2b
a3b
I was very pleased with the response from customer service. Not only did they answer my question very thoughtfully, I was also given alternatives and the chance to place a special order for the item. The customer service was much better than I expected considering the quick response time. Many other companies that I contacted said that they couldn't get this item or that it wasn't in production. Keep up the good work!
Kevin H. Pang
at5
Research Assistant New Jersey Academy for Aquatic Sciences
114
Chemicals
Aquarium/Pond
R
(Cannot Be Sold in New York)
AlgaeFix for Aquariums
AlgaeFix

AlgaeFix is an EPA-registered clarifier that effectively controls many types of algae in freshwater aquariums. It clears up "green water" algal blooms, blue-green algae and most types of string algae. Can be used safely in freshwater tanks containing live plants and fish. Do not use AlgaeFix with crustaceans, including crabs, freshwater shrimp and freshwater lobsters. One 4-oz bottle treats approximately 1,200 gallons. A1125 $ 4.70
Effectively controls "green water" in ponds. EPA-approved herbicide.
AlgaeFix effectively controls many types of green water algae (Chlorella), blue-green algae ( Aphanizomenon), string and hair algae (Cladophora), and blanketweed (Oedogonium). Formulated to keep ornamental ponds and water gardens clean and clear, it can be safely used with aquatic plants and will not harm fish. Dosage is one teaspoon (5 mL) per 50 gal. Dilute with warm water before adding to pond. Cannot be sold into Canada. 16916 16964N 16 oz 64 oz
Ship Wt
2 lbs 5 lbs
$ 11.95 32.95
Each
29.66
4+
16916
Clear-UP Natural Water Clarifier for Ponds

This 100% natural water clarifier clears up cloudy, white water without the use the harmful chemicals. Its beneficial bacteria will remove small particles from the water. Add 5 mL per 10 gallons of water. May take up to 24 hours. KP644 KP646 32 oz 1 gal $ 44.95 159.95
EcoFix
EcoFix is formulated to make pond water clean and clear. It contains highly active strains of bacteria that break down dead algae and help increase the concentration of dissolved oxygen in pond water. Safe for all fish and plants, it helps create a healthy ecosystem and can be used in ponds containing salt. A 64-oz bottle treats up to 16,000 gallons. 147D 64 oz $ 33.75
kp644
SeaKlear Aquaria
Natural Clarifier clears up cloudy water by causing particulates to clump together and be easily caught on mechanical filters. It also removes excess oils to prevent scum at the water line. Biodegradable and usable with all sanitizers, it is safe for plants, animals, fish and the environment. 55-gal drum also available; call for price. SK0104 SK0101 SK0102 1 qt 1 gal 5 gal $ 16 47 215
Re-FRESH for Natural Sparkling Pond Water

Revitalize old, smelly brown pond water with a potent combination of beneficial bacteria that work together to maintain clear water, clean pond surfaces and eliminate unpleasant odors. Add 5 mL per 10 gallons of water on a weekly basis for best results. Caution: Re-FRESH may be harmful to snails and shrimp. Do not overdose on tanks containing these organisms. Wait 5 to 7 days after final dosing to add these organisms. KP654 KP656 32 oz 1 gal $ 57.95 119.95
kp654
Phosphate Remover eliminates phosphates by binding them in an insoluble form so they are no longer available for algae growth. Removes algae-causing orthophosphates and keeps salt generators working properly. Nontoxic100% safe for plants, animals, fish and the environment. 3,000 ppb. Note: Will cloud water when applied. 55-gal drum also available; call for price. SK0404 SK0405 SK0401 1 qt 1 gal 5 gal $ 40 112 430
PRS is a patented two-stage system proven to enhance filtration. Flocculates particles down to .5 microns and makes them rapidly filterable without causing the filter system to clog. EPA-approved to effectively trap algae, Cryptosporidium and E. coli in the filter, thereby reducing outbreak risk. 55-gal drum also available; call for price. SK1305 SK1301 SK1202 1 qt 1 gal 5 gal $ 46 137 430
Accu-Clear
Accu-Clear causes dirt particles, debris and bacterial blooms to clump together and settle to the bottom to be either vacuumed up or picked up by the filter. Safe for use with all fish and plants. 16 ounces treat 4,800 gallons. AC128 Gallon
Ship Wt
11 lbs
$ 57.95
Each
54.58
4+
Sk1305
Sk0104
Sk0404
Clarifiers/Tech Talks
Chemicals
115
Pond Clarifier
Removes phosphorous.
DePhos-A is a 2-part buffered alum water clarifier from Sweetwater Technology Corp. It is ideal for small recreational lakes, farm ponds, garden ponds and golf courses. It is safe for swimming (and drinking) and harmless to fish. Has no impact on rooted plants. It is not an algaecideit flocculates and removes phosphorus and particulate matter from the water (if water clarity is less than 24", use an algaecide first, then DePhos-A after the algae bloom subsides). One 40-lb (dry powder net weight) plastic pail of DePhos-A will treat 45,000 ft3 (equal to one acre, one foot deep or 1/4 acre, 4' deep). Make a slurry and spray it over the pond surface*. Ship weight 45 lbs. AL40 $ 118.00 105.84/4+
Phosclear
Phosclear (buffered aluminum sulfate) is a convenient phosphorus removal and water clarification solution for murky waters. Use in lakes, ponds and reservoirs. Simply broadcast the granules evenly across the surface of the water. Typical application rate is 80 lbs per acre-foot (25 ppm). A buffering agent prevents pH drops. Note: pH should be between 5.5 and 8.0, alkalinity between 50 and 200 ppm and salinity below 3 ppt. Large quantities ship from factory. Made in USA. PHOS15 PC40 PC40P 15-lb Container 40-lb Pail Thirty-six 40-lb Pails $ 43.90 82.86 2,440.00
pc40
*First test the flocculant treatment in a sample portion to determine whether the pond's water chemistry causes the floc to float or sink. If it floats, use a skimming device to remove it.
Pond and Lake Clarifier

New, improved formula!
BARACLEAR is a convenient phosphorus removal and water clarification solution for murky waters. It is the only alum treatment product that addresses the large amount of phosphorous that resides in the bottom sediment of many ponds. The pebbles are easy to usesimply scoop up the 3/8" pellets and scatter them over the surface of the water. They will sink, mostly intact, to the bottom and provide a time-release of alum into the sediment and water. Use in any size waterway, from one hundred to ten million gallons. The typical application rate for phosphorus removal in municipal lakes, golf courses and farm ponds is 1/2 lb per 1,000 gallons of water, or approximately three 50-lb pails of clarifier per acre-foot. The pH should be between 5.5 and 8.0, alkalinity between 50 and 200 ppm and salinity below 3 ppt. Large quantities are shipped from the factory. Call for a quotation. Made in USA. Note: BARACLEAR leaves a residual stone in the pond after the active alum ingredients have entered the water. Place the pebbles in a mesh netting to prevent residual stones. BAR40 50 lbs $ 82.00 77.90/4+
Tech Talk 115

Flocculation of Suspended Solids in Aquaculture
Polymers or polyelectrolyte flocculants can be used to concentrate waste solids collected from recirculating systems and other aquaculture applications. An example would be the concentration of backwash wastes from microscreen filters. The flocculation process involves the optimization of the electric charge of the wastes and bringing floc particles together to form larger particles that can easily settle in a sedimentation basin. A wide range of polymers are available. They include organic polymers that are cationic (positively charged), anionic (negatively charged) or nonionic (no charge). Because wastewater particles are generally negatively charged, cationic polyelectrolytes are more often used to neutralize or reduce the negative charge on the particles, thereby allowing aggregation and floc formation. Since everyone's water and waste chemistry is different, a jar test must be completed to determine the optimum flocculant dosage and the duration of mixing. The standard jar test apparatus uses several containers, each with a sampling port about 10 cm below the water line, so that samples may be taken during the test. A paddle stirrer is placed in each container. These stirrers are all driven by a variable speed motor from 0 to 300 rpm. Polymer solutions are prepared according to the manufacturer's recommendation and added in varied concentrations to the containers along with water being tested. The flocculation process includes 1) a period of rapid or flash mixing when flocculants are added to the wastewater and stirred at high speed, 2) a period of slow mixing when the wastewater is slowly stirred to form large flocs that can be easily settled and 3) a period of rest when the floc formed is allowed to settle. The jar test procedure is a small scale representation of the larger scale treatment system and is used to optimize flocculant dosage and time periods for mixing and settling. With this information you can design either a batch or a continuous flow sedimentation system. A control sample is included to evaluate the effect of the polymer addition. The percent reduction of the wastewater parameter of interest is calculated in relation to this untreated, unflocculated, wastewater sample. For most applications, the evaluation of the effectiveness of polymer treatment is completed by analyzing the percent reduction of turbidity, which is an indicator of suspended solids removal. In aquaculture and other applications, the percent reduction of phosphorus may also be used to evaluate effectiveness of treatment. It has been shown that the majority of the phosphorus discharged from intensive aquaculture systems (50-85%) is contained in the settleable solids. Thus, any method that removes solids will also reduce the total phosphorus.
Tech Talk 102

Alum Lake Treatments
Every lake/pond is unique. If the water is clear, with little submerged weed growth, we'd call it "clean" and its primary productivity would be low. You might think of it as starving for plant nutrients. If the water is turbid, due to planktonic algae, its productivity would be high. This would be considered bad if you wanted to swim in it. It could be considered good if you were using it for aquaculture. To some small farm ponds and fishing ponds that are 100% on private property, with no outflow, the owners actually add phosphorus to increase their productivity so they will grow more fish. If you want to have clear water, you must reduce the productivity. In short, you need to withhold nutrients that feed the algae. Phosphorus is typically the nutrient that can limit plant and algae growth in freshwater lakes. To reduce the phosphorus level is to reduce the plant and algae growth, resulting in clear water. Phosphorus, nitrogen and other nutrients enter the lake from four sources: 1. Watershed runoff. 2. Sediment nutrient cycling. 3. Atmospheric loading. 4. Point source (typically sources known by the ownercan be things such as fish food, cleaning stations, fertilizer additions, etc.). To identify and quantify the sources of phosphorus, it is necessary to do a total nutrient budget. Since most people can't afford that professional service, they typically ask a limnologist or other lake expert to "eyeball it" and give them their recommendation. Some remedial action can be inexpensive and other suggestions can be cost-prohibitive. If the low-cost fixes are not sufficient to bring about the desired improvement in water clarity, consider an alum treatment to reduce phosphorus in the water and reduce its cycling out of the sediments. It is probably cheaper than you think. Phosphorus binds tightly to the alum, which becomes incorporated into the sediments of the lake. It is totally safe from a human, animal and environmental standpoint. Aluminum, like silica sand, is one of the most common elements on the face of the earth. It is used in cooking and drinking water filtration.
116
Chemicals
Clarifiers/Tech Talk
Clarity Max Plus

This product combines activated barley, bacteria and 6 different enzymes into a single, dry packaged product for improvement and maintenance of garden ponds. It helps to break down organic materials and improves the natural nutrient cycling rate, resulting in clearer water with less muck buildup. Designed for ponds from 500 to 8,000 gallons, but can be used on larger ponds. Sprinkle over the surface or around the perimeter, taking care not to dust the plants (it won't work if it's not in the water!). The pond may become cloudy but should clear within 2448 hours. Treat pond every 1014 days until problem has been resolved; for severe problems double the dosage. Safe for all pondfish and plants, 9 oz treat 6,000 gallons. CCM25 2.5 lbs $ 40.43 36.39/4+
MICROBE-LIFT
MICROBE-LIFT is composed of several strains of bacteria that begin immediately to attack the materials in the water or soil that cause pollution and unpleasant odors. It is a nontoxic, biodegradable, nonpathogenic, USDA-authorized product that is extremely effective in the treatment and clean up of environmental waste. MICROBE-LIFT complies with even the strictest of environmental regulations. MICROBE-LIFT 4X is specially formulated for use in septic tanks. Use will enhance the breakdown of organic wastes and sludge and reduce hydrogen sulfide and odor problems.
Ml5
Barley Straw
Year after year, we hear good comments from barley straw users. A natural and ecologically sound method to clear water, use one 1/2-lb bag per 1,000 gallons. Works for up to 6 months. 1/2-lb bags are designed for easy placement directly in your pond, sump or filter. BST5
1/2-lb
MICROBE-LIFT IND is specially formulated for industrial and municipal wastewater systems. The highly concentrated formula can solve the most difficult waste management problems when used in a controlled maintenance program. It significantly reduces odors, improves BOD and COD removal efficiency, degrades hydrocarbons and volatile organic carbons and accelerates plant startups and recovery from upsets or shock loads. It has a high ability to improve organic removal efficiency and stimulate nitrification/denitrification. ML1 ML3 ML5 4X, pint 4X, quart IND, gallon
Ship Wt
1 lb 3 lbs 11 lbs
$ 8.95 13.95 41.75
Each
13.00 37.62
4+
Bag
$ 9.50
Each
8.30
4+
MICROBE-LIFT PL
For over 20 years, MICROBE-LIFT PL has been unique in the marketplace. It is specifically formulated for fish ponds, decorative ponds and lagoons. It is a mixture of beneficial bacteria, including nitrifiers and photosynthetic bacteria,that reduces ammonia levels, eliminates noxious odors and reduces the buildup of wastes. MICROBE-LIFT PL is completely safe and will help to maintain a balanced pond environment. For 501- to 1,000-gal ponds, Ml7 use 12 oz for first application, 4 oz/week for 4 weeks and 4 oz after that for monthly maintenance. For 1,001- to 5,000-gal ponds, use 16 oz for first application, 6 oz/week for 4 weeks and 6 oz after that for monthly maintenance. ML6 ML7
bE100
Barley Straw Extract, Concentrated

One gallon treats over 10,000 gallons!
This patented formula of barley extract works very well at clearing pond water and replaces the unsightly bundles of straw in your pond. The most effective method is to apply the liquid directly and evenly into the pond at a rate of 1 oz per 200 gallons of pond water. It is completely harmless to fish, plants and wildlife. BE100 BE101 8 oz 16 oz $ 10 13 BE102 BE103 32 oz 64 oz $ 24 42
Quart Gallon
$ 20 63
Ml6
Barley Straw Pellets

Barley straw pellets are made from concentrated, organic barley straw enriched with peat and humate. A 2.2-lb bag will treat 150 gallons for up to one year or 400 gallons for up to four months. For 150 gallons of clear water, apply 4 ounces every six weeks. For 150 gallons of turbid water, apply 9 ounces every six weeks. Each bag includes a graduated measuring cup. BSP4 BSP10 4.4 lbs 10.5 lbs $ 18.90 30.50
Tech Talk 37
How Barley Straw Works
Research through Aquatic Weeds Research Unit UK indicates that barley straw is highly effective in the control of algae. How about that? An organic approach to algae control! It takes six to eight weeks for barley straw to become active after it is placed in moving water. After that, barley straw will remain an active algaecide for approximately six months. Microbial growth, oxygen and warm water temperatures activate the decomposition of the straw. With sufficient water flow through the straw, lignins oxidize into homic acids and, with sunlight and oxygen, destroy algae, with no effect on higher plant and aquatic life. Barley straw decomposes slowly, so its oxygen demand does not cause problems unless an excessive amount of straw is used. Stagnant water will go anaerobic inside the straw bundle, killing the microbes, so be sure to keep the water moving.
bSp4
How much barley straw to use?
Eco-Balance Probiotic Bacteria

Probiotic bacteria are key to maintaining a balanced, healthy pond. Eco-Balance is a natural way to promote beneficial bacteria while reducing bacteria that can be damaging to your pond. Add 10 mL per 10 gallons of water on a weekly basis. Note: When using for the first time, use a half-dosethe potent bacteria in Eco-Balance may cause oxygen levels in the water to temporarily drop. KP664 KP666 32 oz 1 gal $ 26.15 79.95
kp664
Barley straw is most effective in shallow (1 m) water with sunlight and good circulation. Clear water needs less straw, but with turbid, muddy water and less sunlight, more straw is required. Low temperatures are less effective. Water surface area is used to calculate dosage. In still water ponds, the minimum quantity of straw needed to control algae is 2.5 grams (.09 oz) of straw per square meter of water surface. In water with a severe algae problem, high first treatments up to 50 grams (1.8 oz) per square meter may be required. Start with small quantities and monitor effects. Barley straw may be prestarted in nonalgae problem areas with good oxygenated water flows. The research unit suggests you tie the straw in small bundles, make flat sheaves or stuff it into net bags. Weight or stake them to the bottom in an area with water movement.
Bacteria/Tech Talk
Chemicals
117
Bacta-Pur Bacteria
Improves water quality!
Bacta-Pur offers one of the most concentrated bacterial cultures available. It has a 2-year shelf life. Each Bacta-Pur formula contains a balanced community of specially cultured bacteria to improve water quality safely and effectively. The use of Bacta-Pur assures the presence of the appropriate strains of beneficial microorganisms for fast and efficient nitrification (oxidation of ammonia and nitrite) and reduction of biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), phosphorus and organic sludge. It can improve fish flavor, reduce fish stress and disease susceptibility and increase feed conversion efficiency. BX1, BX1A Bacta-Pur KLEAR is a scientifically cultured to produce a powerful team of beneficial bacteria that improve water quality, Bacta-Pur KLEAR attacks both the solid and soluble organic pollution in ponds. These microorganisms use these wastes as food for their growth. The by-products of this natural water-cleaning process are water, carbon dioxide and bacterial biomass, which is rich in protein. In a pond with koi, goldfish, or snails, there is very little accumulation of bacteria because these animals eat them. Thus, waste is channeled into the animal side of the food chain. NK34, NK135 Bacta-Pur NUTRIPAK. We recommend a one-time application of Bacta-Pur NUTRIPAK to ensure that all of the essential nutrients for healthy bacteria growth are present in the pond. These nutrient growth enhancers should not be required again unless water changes greater than 30% are done. BX3 Bacta-Pur POND. This product contains 12 strains of bacteria to maintain water clarity, solubilize organic deposits and break down sludge and waste products into natural fish food. Recommended for bodies of water 8,000 gals to 24.7 acres. BN1A N3000 includes 12 strains of bacteria for ammonia and nitrite removal (nitrification) as well as for nitrate reduction (denitrification). This mixture accelerates start-up of biofilters for both fresh and salt water (up to 35 ppt). New benefit is reduced nitrite accumulation. BS1A Bacta-Pur XLG includes 16 strains of bacteria for decomposing organic sediments (sludge) in ponds, lakes and under cages. Includes activator packets #1 and #2. Freshwater and saltwater applications. DK1 Bacta-Pur KLEAN DRAIN includes 15 strains of bacteria specifically designed to break down deposits that accumulate in drain lines. It also does an excellent job of eliminating the causes of noxious odors associated with drain line buildup. Very useful for drains in laboratories, fish and meat processing facilities and anywhere that fats, oils and proteins are drained. Add one tablespoon (15 mL) per drain per week. It has a pleasant, fruity smell.
SD34, SD135 Bacta-Pur Sludgebusters is effective in biodegrading sludge wastes that accumulate on the bottom of ponds. The sludge layer resulting from uneaten feed and waste products can cause clogging of pumps and filters. Decomposing waste may also produce toxic gases, noxious odors and other problems. Bacta-Pur Sludgebusters contains beneficial bacteria that will efficiently biodegrade these wastes. Regular use prevents accumulation of organic sediments and eliminates causes of odor problems. The result is less pollution, ammonia, stress and disease. BX1 BX1A NK135 BX3 BN1A BS1A DK1 SD34 SD135

KLEAR, 1 liter KLEAR, 4 liters NUTRIPAK, 4 liters POND, 4 liters N3000, 4 liters XLG, 4 liters KLEAN DRAIN, 1 liter Sludgebusters, 1 liter Sludgebusters, 4 liters
Koi Pond Koi Pond Koi Pond Large Pond Lake Lake Aquaculture Koi Pond Koi Pond
Usage
Ship Wt
3 lbs 11 lbs 12 lbs 11 lbs 12 lbs 12 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 12 lbs
$ 21.50 68.90 68.90 70.58 51.00 52.00 12.50 21.50 68.90
48.23/4+ 48.23/4+ 59.99/4+ 48.24/4+ 49.26/4+ 48.23/4+
BS1A, BN1A, DK1, XLSW & BX3 should not be Ground shipped if a chance of freezing exists.
bx3
Application Rates
Bacta-Pur Klear (BX1) and Bacta-Pur NutriPak (NK34) for ponds
Volume Weekly Dose Rate
1,0004,000 liters (2501,000 gal) 4,000+ liters (1,000+ gal)

Surface Area
100 mL each/1,000 liters (1 oz/100 gal) 100 mL each/4,000 liters (4 oz/1,000 gal)
Bacta-Pur N3000 (BN1A) and Bacta-Pur XLG (BS1A) for ponds & lakes 1.252.5 acres 2.525 acres 25+ acres
Weekly Dose Rate
5 liters/2.5 acres 2.5 liters/2.5 acres 1 liter/2.5 acres)
Tech Talk 25
Bacteria Notes
What is their size? There are thousands of strains and two major groups. Heterotrophs use organic carbon (as we do). They are elongated, often rod-shaped bacteria, typically .2 (microns) wide and 46 long. Autotrophs use inorganic carbon (carbonate or carbon dioxide) as plants do. They are cocci-shaped (round to oval) bacteria, typically .2.4 in diameter. What do they do? Like all other living things, they have a biological directive to eat and reproduce. They must compete with each other and with predators. Each strain does only one job, so it takes a coordinated team of strains to purify water, for example. Bacteria work best when the following conditions exist: pH between 6 and no higher than 8.5 (optimal is 7.5), temperature between 34F (1C) and 104F (40C) (optimal is 86F/30C), alkalinity above 100 and oxygen above 3 ppm (optimum is above 5 for nitrification); some bacteria will utilize oxygen from any nitrate when there is no oxygen. What do they eat? An individual strain may digest a specific type of fat, certain proteins, carbohydrates, cellulose or hydrocarbons. Together the right team can eat sludge, animal wastes, etc. How fast do they grow? A population of heterotrophic bacteria can double every 20 minutes. Nitrobacter can double every 8 hours. This rapid reproduction (with mutations) quickly evolves new strains. Where can you buy them? From Aquatic Eco-Systems. Bacta-Pur bacteria are guaranteed to have a minimum of 10" cells/mL. That's 100,000,000,000 in a milliliter! (For instructions on counting method, contact AES or IET.) Do they move around? Some bacteria form floc, the slippery material one feels on a tank wall. Although many involved in water purification may get trapped in the floc they typically flow through the system. The bacteria on a biofilter are immobile, and water movement is essential to ensure that food is brought into contact with them. Where do they come from? Bacteria can live in most places, but all strains are not everywhere all the time. Water purification cannot be optimized if all the required strains are not present. Bioaugmentation with Bacta-Pur guarantees the presence of the balanced team. If a proper environment exists, they will multiply. How are they eliminated? Freezing can kill over 99% of some strains, such as Nitrosomonas and Nitrobacter. Spore-forming bacteria are less affected, at least the spores survive. UV light, disinfectants, heat, acids, bacteriacides and oxidizers (ozone, chlorine, hydrogen peroxide and potassium permanganate) will also kill them. What is the relation between light and bacteria? Light is not only unnecessary for the growth of beneficial bacteria that improve water quality, but also will inhibit the growth of nutrifiers, particularly Nitrobacter. Biological filters should be kept in the dark. Ultraviolet light is used to kill bacteria. The toxicity of the UV light is a function of the wavelength, intensity and exposure duration. Assistance on this Tech Talk was provided by IET, Inc.
118
Chemicals
Bacteria
Aquaculture Bacteria Concentrate by ProLine TF

Specifi cally formulated for ammonia emergencies! ProLine Bacteria Concentrate is a high concentration of live bacteria specifically formulated for ammonia emergencies. Live bacteria begin ammonia removal immediately, possibly saving an entire system from disaster. One gallon of freshwater concentrate can treat up to 4,800 gallons (use freshwater for salinity of 7 ppt or lower). One gallon of saltwater concentrate can treat up to 2,400 gallons. The concentrate must be refrigerated at all times and has a shelf life of 3 months. All concentrate ships Next Day Air, orders placed by early AM will either ship that day or next day. Weighs 11 lbs.
Biofilter Start-Up Kit by ProLine

Accelerate biofilter start-up by using the ProLine Biofilter Start-Up Kit. Each kit comes complete with ProLine Aqua Coat water conditioner, ProLine ammonium chloride, ProLine nitrifying bacteria, nutrients and trace elements required for optimizing the seeding of biological filters. Time of biofilter bacterial colonization and start-up can be reduced by weeks. Components of the kit may also be used for reseeding biofilters in cases of shock load or system upsets.
239310
239001
239310 239300
Freshwater, gallon Saltwater, gallon
$ 317 317
Ammonium Chloride by ProLine

the perfect food source for nitrifying bacteria.
This product is used as a source of ammonia to initiate the growth of nitrifying bacteria. Should not be used when fish or other culture animals are present in the water. Maintain 1 mg/L while seeding bacteria until nitrates appear. Do not exceed 4 mg/L and do not add fish until ammonia level is at zero. Not FDA-approved. Sold in 500-gram bottles. Made in USA. 239100 $ 13.39 12.05/4+
Biofilter start-up is initiated by adding the components of the kit to an offline biofilter. Instructions for use are included with each kit. Two separate kits are available. One kit is designed for use in fresh water and the other for saltwater applications. Each kit may be used with any biofilter with up to 50 cubic feet of media. Additional kits may be added for larger biofilters. All kits must ship by Next Day Air (shipping cost included in price). Orders placed by early AM will either ship that day or next day. The concentrate must be refrigerated at all times and has a shelf life of 3 months. 239001 239002 Freshwater Saltwater $ 225 271
"Bacteria in a Bag" by ProLine

Add to your aquarium to aid in the nitrogen cycle.
ProLine "Bacteria in a Bag" is a good product for elimination of fish waste and odors. It utilizes natural bacteria and comes in a handy-to-use, water-soluble bag. Simply calculate water volume and dispense at the rate of one 1-oz bag per 400 gallons of water or one 8-oz bag per 4,800 gallons in home or public aquariums. 239400 239410 239425 Six 1-oz Bags One 8-oz Bag One 25-lb Bag $ 13.75 10.00 347.00
Bacteria by ProLine
ProLine Nitrifying Bacteria is available in either freshwater or saltwater versions, in 16-ounce, 32-ounce or one-gallon sizes. It can be used to rapidly seed biological filters and correct ammonia and nitrite imbalances. Treatment rates are 4 ounces per 10 gallons for freshwater systems (use freshwater for salinity of 7 ppt or lower) and 8 ounces per 10 gallons for saltwater systems. For garden pond applications (fewer than 1,000 gallons), add four ounces per 20 gallons of water. For lightly loaded ponds or lakes, add two gallons per surface acre of water. For older or heavily loaded lakes, call an AES technician. 239201 239210 239211 Saltwater, gallon Freshwater, 16 oz Freshwater, gallon
Ship Wt
239410
8 lbs 1 lb 8 lbs
$ 42.90 10.25 44.68
Saltwater "Bacteria in a Bag"

Great for new aquariums, or when adding multiple fish, live rock or coral.
"Bacteria in a Bag" Saltwater Formula is the perfect choice for water quality improvement, sludge elimination and odor removal in high salinity applications (>18 ppt). Like the original ProLine "Bacteria in a Bag," this saltwater formulation is conveniently packaged into a one-step maintenance program for aquaculturists working in high salinity environments.
Should not be shipped Ground if chance of freezing exists.
239201
239211
239810
Simply calculate water volume and dispense at the rate of one 1-oz bag per 400 gallons or one 8-oz bag per 4,800 gallons in all home and public aquariums. 239805 239810 Six 1-oz Bags One 8-oz Bag $ 15.10 11.55
ProLine Bacteria works exactly as promised. Within two days, our main fishing pond was noticeably cleaner. In just four days, the clarity was improved enough that you could literally see six feet down to the bottom. This pond has not been this clean since it was constructed 40 years ago. Using ProLine every two weeks as recommended will now save us from dredging this 3/4 acre pond every year, saving us thousands of dollars. Please keep making this wonderful product. "Seeing is believing."
Jim Kaercher
Spring Valley Trout Farm Dexter, Michigan
Salts/Aquarium Equipment/Tech Talk
Chemicals
119
Super Salt Concentrate by ProLine

contains everything but the saltsave on shipping!
This synthetic salt mixture contains all the necessary elements and buffers (except sodium chloride) required to make up to 4,400 gallons of synthetic seawater. Each phosphate- and nitrate-free batch is individually tested to generate consistency and high quality. Because sodium chloride is a major component of most synthetic sea salt mixtures, it is also responsible for a large amount of the weight. This concentrated mixture contains everything but the sodium chloride, which you can add locally to save money on freight charges. ProLine Super Salt Concentrate is packaged in a semiliquid form and sold in resealable buckets. One bucket mixes with 80 lbs of noniodized, high-purity sodium chloride to make 400 gallons (1,514 liters) of salt water. Pallet quantities available. 239500 239510* Super Salt, 400 gallons Super Salt, 4,400 gallons 63 lbs 600 lbs
Ship Wt
Cichlid Lake Salt

A chemically sound blend of salts designed to simulate the natural environment of cichlids. It contains numerous essential elements, including magnesium, calcium, sodium, potassium, iron, manganese and iodine. Does not contain nitrate, phosphate or heavy metals. Use 15 grams per 10 gallons for Tanganyika conditions, 5 grams per 10 gallons for Victoria conditions and 7.5 grams per 10 gallons for Malawi conditions. 279 3.2 kg $ 53.10
$ 63.20 576.00
Each
57.58
4+
Pond Salt
Made from evaporated seawater, this all-natural sea salt replaces electrolytes such as potassium, sodium, chloride, calcium and magnesium. Pond salt can also temporarily block the toxic effects of nitrite. Ideal for all ornamental koi and goldfish ponds. PDS145 9 lbs $ 14.95
*Ships by motor freight.
Applications

Public aquariums. Saltwater fish holding systems. Aquarium stores. Recirculating systems. Seafood holding systems. Research labs.
239500
AquaDose Systems
These gravity drip systems are ideal for dosing marine reef supplements, pH adjusting solutions, or hydroponic nutrients. They feature an easy open cap for convenient refilling, fully adjustable valves, and require no air pump. Available in two sizes, the systems come complete with solution tank, control valves and tubing. KD2 KD5 KD6 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters) 5 gallons (19 liters) Replacement Hose Kit $ 47.00 59.00 14.60 44.06/4+ 55.78/4+ 13.46/4+
Chemi-Clean
Removes disease causing red slime from marine reef tanks. It also oxidizes trapped organic sludge and sediment found on the bottom of reef tanks as well as improves water clarity. Safe for reef tanks, inverts, nitrifying bacteria and ornamental fish. Contains no phosphates, algaecides or erythromycin succinate. For marine ornamental aquarium use only, not for use with food fish or freshwater fish. One bottle (2 grams) treats 300 gallons. BC23 $ 10.95 9.60/4+
kD2 kD6
Tech Talk 27
Mixing Artificial Seawater
Artificial seawater is a complex mix of many purified salts formulated to have a composition similar to natural seawater when dissolved in fresh water. Seawater cannot be evaporated to a dry salt and then be reconstituted by adding water. It just doesn't work, so artificial blends were developed. There are many formulas, each with its own characteristics. The quality of a brand of sea salt is dependent on the formula, the quality of the raw materials and the uniformity of the blending. The salinity is the sum of all of the dissolved ions. Natural seawater is generally considered to have a salinity of 35 parts per thousand (ppt) or grams of salt per kilogram of water. Several mistakes are common when calculating how much sea salt to use. First, do not assume that ppt is the same as grams per liter (g/L). Because seawater is heavier than fresh water, this assumption causes an error of about 2.5% lower salinity than expected. A second, more serious error is to assume that the salt mix is anhydrous (water free), since all brands of sea salt use some hydrated salts (for cost and solubility reasons). This causes an error of about 12% lower salinity than expected. A third source of error is adding the salt to the desired volume, as the volume increases about 1% after adding the salt. What this means is adding 35 g of sea salt to a liter of water (1,000 grams) will result in a 1.01 liter solution at 29.1 ppt salinity! Gallon designations for commercial brands are not calculated at 35 ppt. There is no standard. The weight per fi fty gallon package varies among brands from 13.7 lbs to 16 lbs, giving salinities between 27 and 32 ppt. For calculation purposes, it takes 41.8 grams of sea salt mix to one liter fresh water for 35 ppt salinity. To calculate salt needed for lower salinities, multiply the 41.8 g/L by the ratio of the desired salinity, divided by 35 ppt. Example 1: To mix at 32 ppt solution, solve: 41.8 g/L x 32 ppt/35 ppt = 38.2 g/L. Example 2: To mix a 1,000 gallon batch at 32 ppt, multiply the 38.2 g/L (from example one) x 3.78 (liters/gallon) x 1,000 to get 144,396 g or 318 lbs (144 kg) of sea salt. When purchasing and mixing sea salts, remember to base mix ratios on the weight of salt mix, not the advertised gallon ratings. The weight is the legal unit of measure.
the information in this tech talk was provided by thomas Frakes, technical consultant, Aquarium Systems, Inc.
120
Chemicals
Salts/Substrates
Instant Ocean Salts

Instant Ocean has been the preferred salt mix of public aquariums and home aquarists for many years. It is scientifically blended to contain every minor and major trace element required to make artificial seawater. Phosphate- and nitrate-free, it dissolves quickly without insoluble residue. Each package will make a 32-ppt salt solution at listed volume. Contains no chlorine remover. Pallet quantities available. IS50 IS160 IO200 50-gallon Mixture 160-gallon Mixture 200-gallon Mixture
Ship Wt
Crystal Sea/Forty Fathoms

No ammonia, nitrate, phosphate, silicate or EDTA added. Attains a proper pH of 8.3 upon hydration. Contains chlorine remover.
$ 17.25 49.95 49.95
Each
16.39 47.45 47.45
4+
45.07 (36)
pallet
Salt, like fish food, is not all the same! This product is a perfect mixture of essential compounds and trace elements to make seawater (contains no anticaking agents). Use it with confidence when setting up any saltwater ecosystem. Crystal Sea is preferred by many public aquariums, universities, biological research facilities and professionals. CM2B is a 150-gallon mixture specifically formulated for bioassay research. CM3 is a 150-gallon mixture that comes in a resealable bag and includes a bucket and a measuring scoop. Dissolve 1 lb of salt per 4 gallons of water to approximate seawater at 35 ppt (1.022 SG).
IS160
Quality Assured
Crystal Sea Marinemix is manufactured under the most stringent quality control guidelines using a superior computer control blending system. This ensures exact mixing of anhydrous ingredients throughout each batch.
IS50
CM2 150-gallon Mixture CM2B 150-gallon Bioassay Mixture CM3 150-gallon Mixture w/Bucket
Ship Wt
$ 38.85 42.95 54.50
34.95/2+ 38.64/2+ 51.78/2+
49.18 (48)
pallet
Making Salt Water?

Start by mixing at these levels, then aerate for over an hour before measuring salinity, pH, etc. Add more salt if needed. 41/2 cups per 10 gallons 1 kg per 10 gallons 36 oz per 10 gallons 21/4 lbs per 10 gallons 10 gallons = 37.5 liters All salts are available in pallet quantities. Call for quotation.
cM3
Seaflor Marine Substrates

Aruba Shell.
Great for marine reef and fish aquariums, Aruba shell is a mixed grade of crushed shells with a very high buffering capacity.
Reef Crystals Sea Salt
Developed for reef aquariums, Reef Crystals is an enriched blend of sea salt that contains extra levels of calcium, vitamins and selected trace elements that are commonly depleted in living reef aquariums. It has superior dissolvability and is compatible with all marine aquariums. A special additive helps to detoxify excess heavy metals, such as copper, that are often found at elevated levels in domestic water supplies. Every batch is carefully analyzed to guarantee composition, consistency and uniformity. Contains no chlorine remover. Biodegradable box includes four bags, each for a 50-gal mixture. RC200 200-gallon Mixture
Ship Wt
Flamingo pink Reef Sand.

Sized for most reef and marine fish systems, this high buffering sand (12 mm grain size) provides calcium and other trace elements.
tahitian Moon Sand.

Extra-fine grade sand will not alter pH. Can be used in both fresh and salt water.
Special Grade Reef Substrate

A mixed-grade aragonite substrate (11.2 mm grains) that works well in reef tanks with burrowing inverts or jawfish. 00418 000211 00821 RS18 RS40 Aruba Shell, 18 lbs Flamingo Pink, 15 lbs Tahitian Moon, 20 lbs Special Grade, 15 lbs Special Grade, 40 lbs $ 15.60 15.00 17.35 15.00 31.25
Each 4+
65 lbs
$ 54.95
50.47/4+
14.04 13.50 15.62 13.50 28.13
RS18
Aragamax
Sugar-sized sand.
Grain size is .21.2 mm diameter. Also known as "oolitic sand," this product is ideal for shallow beds, allowing denitrification in as little as a 1" depth of water. The fine grain size can pass easily through the gills of gobies and other sand-sifting organisms. The smooth round grains are gentle to soft-bellied sharks and rays. White in color and metal-free. No ash or silica. SS30 30 lbs $ 21.40 19.26/4+
Aruba Shell Flamingo pink Reef Sand
tahitian Moon Sand
Special Grade Reef Substrate
Chemicals
Sand/Buffers
121
Florida Crushed Coral, Coarse Grade

This crushed coral with aragonite provides up to 25 times the buffering power of other crushed corals, dolomite and oyster shell. Eliminate chronic pH problems and provide maximum surface area for bacteria. This crushed coral allows an increase in bioload by up to 50%, and it never needs replacement.

Arag-Alive Reef Sand

Contains stabilized marine bacteria. Composed of superior trace elements.
CC2 CC5
15 lbs 40 lbs
$ 12.10 24.35
Each
21.92
4+
Arag-Alive aragonite reef sand contains a full spectrum of bacterial species, including heterotrophic, autotrophic and chemolithotrophic bacteria that quickly reduce cycling time in new tanks. Provides unsurpassed buffering capability to maintain pH levels at 8.2. Elements provided by aragonite include calcium, carbonate, strontium, magnesium, molybdenum and potassium. Contains no phosphates, silicates or copper sulfate. It is ideal for all marine and reef tanks.
Available in five grades:

cc2
Fiji Pink Sand Indo-Pacific Black Bermuda Pink Sand Super Reef Sand Special Grade Sand

Grade (Size) Typical Applications
Extra Fine: .51.8 mm Fine: .22.0 mm Coarse: 24 mm Mixed Grades: .54 mm Fine: 1.22 mm
Berlin Systems Berlin, Plenum, Refugiums Fish Tanks Fish tanks Berlin, Plenum, Sump, Refugiums 15.57 15.57 15.57 15.57 15.57
4+
00780 00781 00782 00784 00785
Special Grade Sand, 20 lbs Super Reef Sand, 20 lbs Fiji Pink Sand, 20 lbs Bermuda Pink Sand, 20 lbs Indo-Pacific Black, 20 lbs
$ 17.95 17.95 17.95 17.95 17.95
Each
00785
Tank Bottom Surface Area
Lbs of reef sand required to make a 4" sand bed in reef tanks: 36" x 18" 48" x 12" 48" x 18" 48" x 24" 72" x 18" 72" x 24"
Amount of Sand
Buffers by SeaChem
Acid Buffer lowers and stabilizes pH in the acid range of 4.06.7 for freshwater and plant systems. 250 grams treat 1,600 gallons of fresh water. Alkaline Buffer raises and stabilizes pH in the alkaline range of 7.28.5. 250 grams treat 800 gallons of fresh water. Marine Buffer adjusts and maintains a pH of 8.3 for marine and brackish water tanks. 250 grams treat 800 gallons of salt water. Neutral Regulator adjusts and maintains pH at 7.0. Also removes chlorine and chloramines. 250 grams treat 800 gallons of fresh water. Reef Builder raises and maintains KH (carbonate alkalinity) without affecting pH. Supplies bioactive calcium, magnesium and trace elements. 600 grams treat 2,100 gallons of salt water. Pond Acid Buffer lowers pH and is especially useful in concrete ponds. AB243 AB233 MB343 NR303 RB363 P2817 Acid Buffer, 600 g Alkaline Buffer, 600 g Marine Buffer, 500 g Neutral Regulator, 500 g Reef Builder, 600 g Pond Acid Buffer, 1 liter $ 9.95 9.95 9.70 10.30 9.70 16.15
Indo-Pacific Black Fuji Pink 00784
Special Grade
Super Reef
Bermuda Pink
Blackwater Expert
Ideal for creating conditions much like those found in the Amazon region of South America. Tints the water a light brown or yellow color and will improve fish color, encourage spawning and aid the hatching process. Contains naturally chelated iron, vitamins and other organic compounds that accelerate plant growth. One teaspoon (5 mL) treats 10 gallons (38 liters).

kb64
1 oz = 28 g 1 lb = 454 g
KB64
64 oz (1.9 L)
Ship Wt
5 lbs
$ 25.90
23.57/6+
pH Up and pH Down
These liquid products:

Are fast actingno aging is required. Will not cloud water.
Application rate varies with water hardness, alkalinity, etc., but here's a guide:
rb363 mb343 ab243 nr303
pH Up: 4 drops per gallon raise pH 1 unit. pH Down: 2 drops per gallon lower pH 1 unit. Not for hydroponic use. Made in USA.

UP16 DN16
pH Up, 16 oz pH Down, 16 oz
$ 10.90 10.90
Each
10.02 10.02
6+ up16 dn16
122
calcion
Chemicals
Additives/Conditioners Strontion-p
High-purity powdered strontium incorporated by corals, clams and other reef-building invertebrates into aragonite. Stronger and more economical than liquid strontium solutions. Created for hobbyists maintaining multiple reef aquariums. We recommend the strontium concentration in the aquarium be determined using an accurate test kit prior to supplementing. Do not add this product directly to an aquarium containing live animals without first diluting in water as directed. 600-g container treats 24,000 gal. STRP600 $ 30.00
Additives by Brightwell Aquatics

This highly concentrated ionic calcium solution increases the concentration of calcium in marine aquariums to provide corals and other reef-building invertebrates with one of the most important elements required for growth. Free of phosphate, silicate and organic material. 500-mL bottle treats 5,000 gal. CAL500 $ 9.80
liquid Reef
Complete source of the elements and molecules that are directly used by corals, clams and other reef-building organisms to create skeletal material and grow. Provides calcium, strontium, magnesium and potassium in approximately the same ratios in which they occur in aragonite. Increases alkalinity to help stabilize pH. Free of phosphate, silicate and organic material. 500-mL bottle treats 5,000 gal. LRF500 $ 14.10
Garlic power
Delivers the nutritional benefits of raw garlic to fish by direct application to their food. Consists only of preserved extract of raw garlic with a small amount of vitamin C as a preservative. No refrigeration required. 60-mL bottle treats 600 gal. GAR60 $ 17.60
Magnesion
This highly concentrated ionic magnesium solution helps regulate the balance between calcium and carbonates in aquarium water. Magnesium is a component of aragonite, the mineral secreted by reef-building organisms to form skeletal material. Contains no unwanted organic material such as EDTA, gluconate or polygluconate. 500-mL bottle treats 2,000 gal. MAG500 $ 7.70
Zooplanktos-M
Provides zooplankton ranging in size from 5001,000 . Ideally sized for many stony corals, clams, tubeworms, larval crustaceans, juvenile fish and adult fish that feed on plankton and other microinvertebrates. Does not require refrigeration. Supplemented with a proprietary amino acid to aid in coloration of invertebrates and fishes. 500-mL bottle treats 5,000 gal. ZPM500 $ 12.80
Replenish
A unique complex that replaces 29 trace and minor elements commonly lost through chemical filtration, all of which are present in natural seawater ratios. Does not contain elements not expressly known to be used by marine organisms or take place in chemical interactions. Composed of purifi ed water and other high-purity materials. 500-mL bottle treats 5,000 gal. REP500 $ 17.60
phosphat-R
A regenerable phosphate adsorption resin that will also remove silicates. More effective than activated aluminum and granular ferric products, it will not negatively impact water quality or release phosphate or silicate once exhausted. Regenerable up to five times, which means great cost effectiveness. Synthetic polymer resin beads are durable and prevent channeling. May be employed in fluidized bed, canister or passive filtration. 500-mL bottle treats 500 gal. Note: Resin sold moist. Keep closed to prevent drying. Weight varies due to moisture content; therefore, product is sold by volume rather than weight. PHOR500 $ 44.20
kalk+2
Contains calcium, strontium and magnesium in the same ionic ratios found in aragonite. Useful for reef-building invertebrates such as corals, clams and calcareous algae. Provides temporary alkalinity and helps maintain pH within the desired range without adding chloride to the water. 450-g container. Create stock solution by dissolving 6 grams in 1 gallon of fresh water. KALK450 $ 12.90
lugol's Solution
An extremely powerful iodine solution that should only be used by advanced reef aquarists to dose iodine or to create a dip for corals and their allies. 60-mL bottle. 1 mL increases the concentration of iodine in 1 gallon of water by 18 ppm. LUG60 $ 17.60
NovAqua Plus by Kordon

Improve your fish's health, reduce nitrite toxicity, detoxify heavy metals and buffer tap water with NovAqua Plus's enhanced formula. This conditioner neutralizes chlorine (up to 3.75 ppm) and breaks the bond between chlorine and ammonia in chloramines (use AmQuel Plus to remove leftover toxic ammonia). New ingredients include organic herbs and vitamins, electrolytes and polymer colloids that combine to boost immune systems, reduce stress and build up stronger slime coatings on fish. Also removes iodine and promotes biofiltration. NovAqua Plus contains stabilizers for long-term storage and is compatible with other water conditioners. One 16-oz bottle treats 960 gallons; 1-gal container treats 7,680 gallons. Not FDA-approved. Why NovAqua Plus?
Pond PolyAqua by Kordon

This liquid water conditioner is formulated to reduce the possibility of disease outbreak among injured or sick fish. It is ideal for pond hobbyists as well as professionals (shippers, dealers, wholesalers) who transport and handle large numbers of fish that frequently incur physical damage during capture and handling. Using synthetic polymers, Pond PolyAqua provides a "bandaging effect" for damaged tissue that reduces the possibility of infection by bacteria or external parasites. It also contains Vitamin B12. Recommended dosage: 1 teaspoon per 10 gallons. Not FDA-approved. Not for food fish. PA17 PA64 16 oz Gallon
Ship Wt
2 lbs 11 lbs
$ 7.45 36.80
34.59/4+
pA17
New polymer colloids for fish protection. NA16p Increased ability to remove chlorine. New electrolytes for stress reduction. New remover of heavy metals, including increased ability to remove toxic zinc, iron, aluminum, copper, etc. New herbal ingredients for immune health aids and viral and protozoan infection inhibition. New vitamin ingredients for health aids.

NovAqua by Kordon
NovAqua is a unique combination of chemical compounds that safely neutralizes chlorine and heavy metals. Ideal for both fresh and salt water, NovAqua neutralizes up to 3.75 ppm of chlorine (free and combined) and up to 1.17 mg/L free copper ions. Able to detoxify other heavy metals, it also contains a unique blend of buffers that help prevent pH shock. A 16-oz bottle treats 960 gallons. Not FDA-approved. Not for food fish. NA16 NA64 NA5 16 oz Gallon 5 gallons
Ship Wt
NA16P NA5P NA64P
NovAqua Plus, 16 oz NovAqua Plus, 5 gal NovAqua Plus, 1 gal (128 oz)
$ 8.45 152.00 44.25
141.59/2+ 41.15/4+
2 lbs 11 lbs 45 lbs
$ 7.45 41.20 143.00
38.32/4+ 135.00/2+
NA16
Conditioners/Tech Talk
Chemicals
123
Ultimate
This convenient, fully functional water conditioner instantly removes chlorine, chloramines and ammonia from fresh or salt water. It also detoxifies copper and heavy metals, boosts alkalinity and adds essential electrolytes needed for proper fish growth. It is excellent for conditioning new water in ponds. Can also be used in shipping bags during transport. When testing for ammonia, a salicylate test kit must be used. One gallon treats approximately 7,680 gallons.

Stress Coat
Slime coat replacement.
Stress Coat replaces a fish's natural slime coat with a synthetic one, preventing loss of body fluids and electrolytes. This is very useful when hauling, handling or medicating fish. In addition, Stress Coat acts as a water conditioner, neutralizing chlorine and, when used during shipping, is an economical form of protection for your investment. Not FDA-approved. Use one teaspoon (5 mL) per 10 gallons for chlorine neutralization; double for fin/scale damage. Does not neutralize chloramines. Not FDA-approved. Not for food fish. SC1 SC2 SC5

UT32 UT1 UT5
32 oz Gallon 5 gallons
Ship Wt
3 lbs 11 lbs 50 lbs
$ 13.95 45.00 131.67
40.42/4+ 120.70/2+
ut32
16 oz Gallon 5 gallons
Ship Wt
2 lbs 11 lbs 50 lbs
$ 6.95 37.65 143.00
35.46/4+ 131.83/2+
sc2
Ammo-Lock Tap Water Conditioner

This tap water conditioner instantly neutralizes chlorine, which is toxic to fish. Either chlorine or chloramines will be present in water provided from public water supplies. This neutralizes only chlorine. Made in USA. Not FDA-approved. Use as little as one drop per gallon of water; one ounce for 588 gallons; one cup for 4,700 gallons.

Here is a product to keep handy at all times. Ammo-Lock is a liquid water conditioner that eliminates the toxic effects of ammonia in both fresh and saltwater systems. Lab tests have shown that Ammo-Lock actually locks the ammonia in a harmless state and does not release it from that state. It remains active to complex and neutralize ammonia for two weeks! What could be better for shipping fish and showing fish? One teaspoon (5 mL) of Ammo-Lock will instantly neutralize 3 ppm ammonia, 4 ppm chlorine or 1 ppm chloramine in 10 gallons of water. It's safe enough to be used with all medications and does not harm saltwater invertebrates. Filtration with activated carbon, zeolite or ozone does not affect its properties. One 16-oz bottle treats 960 gallons. Note: Ammo-Lock will alter ammonia test kit readings that are not the salicylate type. Not FDA-approved. Not for food fish.

CL16 CL128
cl128
16 oz Gallon
Ship Wt
2 lbs 11 lbs
$ 5.95 29.95
Each
5.61 28.17
6+
AML2
16 oz
Ship Wt
2 lbs
$ 7.95
Each
7.44
6+
Tech Talk 103 Start Right

Start Right crystals instantly neutralize chlorine, copper and other heavy metals from tap water. Use with koi, tropical fish and bait fish. It also stimulates the natural secretion of slime to protect fish from the harmful effects of handling, shipping and other forms of stress. Use 1 teaspoon (5 mL) per 5 gallons (19 L). Treats 4,320 gallons. Chlorine should be neutralized before tap water is added to an aquarium or pond. Not FDA- approved. Not for food fish. SR9 9 lbs $ 37.56 35.33/4+
sr9
FDA Regulations
Water Conditioners and Aquaculture
If you are involved with the production of aquatic organisms, at some point you will probably need to add one or more chemicals to your water. Finding and using the correct chemicals according to the labeled instructions is very important. You must always abide by the local, state and federal regulations that apply to your specific applications. Situations where organisms for human consumption are concerned require special consideration in the United States. Certain high regulatory priority drugs are approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to be used only under very specific circumstances. It is always advisable to seek the current regulatory status of each chemical before use, as the previous status is subject to change. Chemicals that are typically used as water conditioners (even ice) also have a regulatory status. These chemicals are determined by the FDA to be low regulatory priority aquaculture drugs because they have no significant animal or human drug uses. Both therapeutic and nontherapeutic chemicals have very specific requirements regarding their usage. We recommend that you conduct a thorough investigation into the regulatory status of the products you intend to use and then keep a complete log of the purchase and usage of these chemicals. For more information about specific regulations, contact the FDA. Food and Drug Administration Center for Veterinary Medicine Communications Staff 7519 Standish Place, HFV-12 Rockville, Maryland 20855 301-827-3800 http://www.fda.gov/cvm/aqualibtoc.htm#ApprovedDrugs
Prime
A complete water conditioner that removes chlorine and chloramines. It detoxifies ammonia and nitrite and enhances nitrate removal. Provides essential ions and stimulates natural slime coat on fish. Prime does not cause a pH drop or overactivate skimmers. 500 mL-bottle treats over 5,000 gallons (19,000 liters). Not FDA-approved. SC433 SC438 SC439
sc438
500 ml 2 liters 4 liters
Ship Wt
2 lbs 6 lbs 11 lbs
$ 10.10 39.00 68.85
Each
65.41/2+
124
Chemicals
Dechlorinators/Tech Talk
Dry Ammonia Remover by ProLine

Formulated in a highly concentrated powder, ProLine's complete dry ammonia remover is ideal for large volume applications. It works in the same way as AmQuel Plus. One level tablespoon treats 473 liters (125 gallons), 32 grams will treat 1,000 liters (264 gallons), 1 kg will treat 31,250 liters (8,250 gallons). APP1 APP5 APP25 1 kg 5 kg 25 kg
Ship Wt
AmQuel Plus
Considered to be one of the most effective dechlorinators on the market, AmQuel Plus instantly removes all forms of ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, chlorine and chloramine from both fresh and salt water. The active ingredient in AmQuel Plus reacts with nitrogen compounds like ammonia and nitrite to form a nontoxic, stable substance that does not interfere with benefi cial bacteria and can be oxidized by nitrifying bacteria in the biofilter. AmQuel Plus uses no sodium thiosulfate, contains no formaldehyde and is nontoxic to all fish and invertebrates (don't use with food fish). Water treated with AmQuel Plus cannot be accurately tested using Nessler's-type ammonia tests or Winkler-type D.O. kits. The amounts of toxic components removed by AmQuel Plus vary depending on water conditions. Recommended dosage is 1 teaspoon (5 mL) for each 10 gallons. This dose will remove chlorine, 1.2 ppm of ammonia, 2 ppm of nitrite, 13 ppm of nitrate. One 16-ounce bottle treats 960 gallons.
3 lbs 11 lbs 55 lbs
$ 20.00 97.00 407.00
87.30/4+ 386.65/2+
Pond AmQuel Plus

App5
A concentrated water detoxifier that eliminates ammonia, chlorine, chloramines, nitrates, nitrites and other nitrogen compounds. Does not affect beneficial bacteria. Compatible with other water conditioners and medications. 16 oz treat 2,400 gal (9,000 liters). 32 grams of Dry AmQuel Plus will treat 264 gal (1,000 L). Water treated with Pond AmQuel + cannot be accurately tested using Nessler's-type ammonia tests or Winkler-type D.O. kits. AM16P AM64P AM75P PQ16 AMD2P AMD3P AmQuel Plus, 16 oz AmQuel Plus, gallon AmQuel Plus, 5 gallons Pond AmQuel Plus, 16 oz Dry AmQuel Plus, 11 lbs Dry AmQuel Plus, 55 lbs
AM64p Ship Wt
1 lb 11 lbs 50 lbs 1 lb 11 lbs 55 lbs
$ 8.95 42.75 172.00 11.65 106.00 430.00
38.10/4+ 163.4/2+ 95.18/4+ 408.50/2+
Aqua-Coat by ProLine
pQ16
AMD2p
Safe to use with fish in the water.

This super-concentrated formula removes chlorine and chloramines while also detoxifying heavy metals commonly found in tap and well water. It greatly accelerates the attachment of nitrifying bacteria to biomedia, maximizing cycling speed. Natural ingredients help heal damaged scales and fins on fish (don't use with food fish). It is effective in both fresh and salt water. It even adds a protective slime coat to the fish's body, preventing future damage and reducing the risk of external parasites. Will not alter pH and contains no phosphates or formaldehydes. Dosage: 2 oz treat 240 gallons. Not FDA-approved. 239600 16 oz 239601 1 gallon 239602 5 gallons
Ship Wt AM16p
ClorAm-X
Safe for use on food fish and shellfish.
This highly concentrated powder completely neutralizes ammonia, chlorine and chloramines from fresh and salt water. It is nontoxic to fish and invertebrates. Dosage rate: 1 oz ClorAm-X per 235 gallons of water removes 1 mg/L of total ammonia. A 5-lb box treats 18,749 gallons. Note: Water treated with ClorAm-X cannot be accurately tested using Nessler's-type ammonia tests or Winkler-type D.O. kits. CAX5 CAX10 CAX25 5 lbs 10 lbs 55 lbs $ 70 117 442
2 lbs $ 8.30 11 lbs 40.55 33.91/4+ 50 lbs 124.00 114.50/2+
239602
cAx5
Dechlorinator, Sodium Thiosulfate

Sodium thiosulfate is the main compound in most chlorine neutralizers. Any time municipal water must be used for aquaculture, use sodium thiosulfate for instant neutralization of chlorine (don't use with fish in the water). Dosage rates vary with the pH of the water, but rates between 1.6 to 2.6 parts sodium thiosulfate per one part chlorine should be adequate (excess levels of sodium thiosulfate up to 100 ppm will not harm fish). Made in USA. ST1A ST1 4-lb Jar 50-lb Bucket $ 17.40 89.00
Each
Tech Talk 113

Ammonia Removers and Ozone
When using many ammonia removers (AmQuel , ClorAm-X, etc.) we recommend that ozonation be discontinued for a period of 48 hours from the time of treatment. These products contain reducing agents that cause the oxidation/reduction potential (ORP) to drop significantly. If ozonation is not turned off, then the decline in ORP can cause ORP controllers to "falsely" sense a problem and turn on the ozone equipment with a resulting overdose of ozone. Aeration, however, should be continued at all times.
16.07 82.50
4+
St1A
Activated Carbon/Media
Chemicals
125
Zeolite Ammonia Remover by ProLine

Fresh water only.
Clinoptilolite filter media, otherwise known as zeolite, is an effective means of removing ammonia. It also provides a large surface area for nitrifying bacteriain recirculating systems. ProLine high-performance zeolite may be regenerated several times by overnight immersion in a salt solution and/or oven drying (not effective in salt water). Made in USA. ZAR12 ZAR5 1.5-lb Jar 50-lb Bag $ 10.15 40.85 35.50/4+
ZAR12
Techno Carbon by ProLine
TF
This pellet-shaped carbon adsorbs ammonia and nitrite in addition to what normal activated carbon adsorbs. Not to be used in place of a biological filter but as a supplemental method for removing nitrogenous waste. Can be used in both marine and fresh water. 238100 238200 2.2 lbs (1 kg) 18 lbs (8 kg) $ 6.95 39.00
Each
35.10
4+
Low Price
Activated Carbon by ProLine

A superior, high-purity, bituminous coal-based activated carbon. Preferred by public aquariums, research centers and government fisheries. The small particle size (approximately 1/16" to 1/8") provides a large surface area for rapid uptake and reduces water travel distances to interior adsorption surfaces. Adsorbs full range of organic contaminants, pesticides, odors, colors, chlorine, dissolved organics, ozone and many heavy metals. Carbon is dry-packed. Can be retained using window screen size mesh. Approximately .625 m2 of surface area per gram. Bulk density is approximately 24 lbs/ft3. AC412A AC412 AC55 1.5-lb Container 15-lb Bucket 55-lb Bag $ 10.85 85.10 151.00
Each 238100 238200
76.59 135.90
4+
Ac412A
Diamond Filtration Media

black Diamond carbon
This is a premium, heat-activated, bituminous coal-based product and is far more efficient than many other types of carbon.
Chemi-Pure
A high-grade blend of activated carbon and ion exchange resins prepackaged in a convenient, nylon filter bag. It is an excellent chemical adsorption media and ion generator that will keep pH at a stable level, helping fish resist osmotic shock. Replace every six months. One 10-oz bag is ideal for tanks up to 50 gallons. 16705 10 oz $ 7.40 6.65/6+
White Diamond Zeolite

Highly efficient at removing ammonia from freshwater aquariums and ponds.
Diamond blend
Ideal for new aquariums, this special formulation (with 25% more carbon) cleans and conditions aquarium water, removing dissolved organic wastes, ammonia and chloramines. PA0372 PA0373 PA0382 PA0392 Black Diamond Carbon Black Diamond Carbon White Diamond Zeolite Diamond Blend 1.87 L 3.65 L 1.87 L 1.87 L
Size Ship Wt
$ 12.35 20.95 9.34 9.95
Reef Carbon
This high-grade carbon contains no phosphates and is excellent for removing dissolved organics, organic chemicals and heavy metals. Highly recommended for saltwater reef systems. Use 1/4 lb per 100 gallons. KC6 KC55 15 lbs 44 lbs $ 80.00 178.00 73.85/4+ 160.00/4+
kc6
pA0373
pA0382
pA0392
Sodium Bicarbonate by ProLine
Calcium Chloride by ProLine

Technical-grade calcium chloride can be used to raise the calcium hardness in recirculating systems. Depending upon the water's buffering capacity, it may raise or lower the pH. Normal calcium hardness levels should be maintained between 100250 mg/L, depending on the species. Fast-dissolving pellets. Made in USA. Note: Increases H2O temperature slightly when mixed in high concentrations.
Sc12A
Raise alkalinity and pH (when conditions are right) of fish-raising water. FCC food-grade complying with National Science Foundation Standard 60. Powdered to dissolve quickly and completely. To increase total alkalinity 10 ppm in 1,000 gallons of water requires .15 lb. Made in USA. Note: Increases H2O temperature slightly when mixed in high concentrations. SC12A SC12 4-lb Jar 40-lb Bucket $ 15.74 63.13
Each
57.28
4+
CC1AB CCB1
3.5-lb Jar 35-lb Bucket
$ 12.24 49.63
Each
44.67
4+
cc1Ab
126
Chemicals
Media/Bags/Fish Tranquilizer
Filter Bags
These polyester monofilament filter bags are excellent for retaining carbon, zeolite and other media. Perfect for sumps, trickle filters, pond filters and many other places with high water flow. Bags feature drawstring closing tops. Select 250- or 800-micron mesh size. Sold in packs of 10. MB01 MB02 MB3 MB4 MB7 MB8 MB9 MB10 250 microns 800 microns 250 microns 800 microns 250 microns 800 microns 250 microns 800 microns 3" x 4" 3" x 4" 8" x 12" 8" x 12" 12" x 18" 12" x 18" 16" x 24" 16" x 24"
lxW Ship Wt
Purigen
This is a premium, synthetic absorbent that is unlike any other filtration product. It is not a mixture of ion exchangers or absorbents, but a unique macro-porous synthetic polymer that removes soluble and insoluble impurities and exceeds all others by over 500%. Purigen removes proteins, ammonia, nitrates and a broad spectrum of organics, yet its impact on trace elements is minimal. It progressively darkens as it exhausts and is renewed by treating with household bleach. 100 mL purifies up to 100 gallons (400 L) of water for up to 6 months. Use with a fine mesh bag (included with P165). P165 P186 P187 100 mL 250 mL 1 liter
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 23.00 19.00 22.00 20.80 26.55 24.45 37.80 31.45
1 lb 1 lb 3 lbs
$ 7.39 12.40 42.95
p186
Mb01
Tranquil
CHEMICAL
Reduce injury and loss during shipping and handling of baitfish. Ship more baitfish per volume of water. Tranquil liquid fish calmer slows fish metabolism, so less oxygen is required. Great for bait holding tanks, hauling truck tanks and shipping bags. Six drops of Tranquil treat one gallon of water. Baitfish recover immediately upon removing them from Tranquil-treated water. SL141 SL142
Sl141
8 oz Gallon
$ 16.70 184.00
Sure-Haul
Poly-Filter
These unique adsorptive pads are highly recommended for use in trickle filters and canister filters. They will remove phosphates, medications and other impurities found in fresh and salt water. The pads change color when exhausted. 4948 4949 4" x 8" 12" x 12"
Ship Wt
Reduces stress and mortality caused by fish hauling and holding. Sure-Haul also reduces the accumulation of ammonia, nitrate and prevents foam buildup caused by hauling tank crowding. Safe for use on all freshwater fish, it has a low regulatory status and is safe for use on food fish. Ideal for fish transport, bait tanks, minnow farms and fishing/bass tournaments. This concentrated, salt-free formula will save you in shipping costs. Simply mix 2.5 kg container with 50 lbs of noniodized salt (purchased locally) to treat 2,230 gallons (8,441 liters). Not a dechlorinator. HL1 $ 21.35 19.65/6+
1 lb 1 lb
$ 6.65 31.60
Each
5.95 29.79
4+
Phosphate Sponge
Removes phosphates quickly from water.
4948
This ceramic media can be used in marine and freshwater systems, including koi ponds and recirculating aquaculture systems. One quart (650 g) of media will reduce 1 ppm phosphates or silicates to less than .5 ppm in 120 gallons of water. Media particle size is 25 mm and can be retained using an 800-micron or smaller mesh bag. Can be regenerated in a household oven. Made in USA. KPS5 KPS8 1 lbs (480 gal) 5 lbs (2,500 gal) $ 32.66 115.25 109.21/4+
Important
kpS8
Chemicals
Bait/Tech Talk
127
Tech Talk 22
Hauling Tanks
To successfully transport fish requires an understanding of the physiological aspects of what happens to the fish as well as their temporary environment the hauling box water. If the fish die shortly after delivery, it's usually the hatchery that takes much of the blame but, all too often, it is the hauler's fault. Typically, at least 24 hours before the fish are to be moved, they are taken off feed. This reduces fouling of the hauling tank water. The fish are then counted by weighing (a pretty accurate method) and placed into the appropriate chamber of the hauling truck. It is here that attention to detail can make the difference between a good delivery and a debacle. Overcrowding can describe symptoms that occur from having too much of something (ammonia or CO 2) or not having enough of something (oxygen). For average travel times, the general rule of thumb is no greater than 2 lbs of fish per gallon of water. Some fish, like muskie or walleye, do better at only 1 lb of fish per gallon. These densities typically require the use of pure oxygen systems over the agitator or compressor/diffuser aerators. However, short trips with cool water (55F or below) will allow higher carrying densities with just an aerator. We've heard of fish haulers carrying up to 5 lbs of catfish per gallon of water on short trips to the processors! Remember that these fish are not intended to live very long. Cooler water temperatures play an important part in keeping fish in their best condition. As cold-blooded animals, their metabolism slows as the temperature drops. This means oxygen intake decreases, along with ammonia and carbon dioxide. Of course, just the opposite happens as the temperature increases. To counter the stress associated with fish transport, many haulers rely upon salt to boost the fish's electrolytes and enhance mucous production, which will ward off bacterial infections and parasites. A rough rule of thumb for dosage rates is 3 lbs of noniodized salt per 100 gallons of water. For nonfood fish, haulers often use anesthetics, ammonia removers and defoamers.
Note:
ALL products on this page are for use with nonfood fish only. Our Chemical Waiver Form is required to purchase these products.
Better-Bait Holding Formula
CHEMICAL
This complete bait conditioner was developed for use on soft-scaled baitfish such as fathead and Missouri minnows. Its dark blue granular formulation readily dissolves and is ideal for bait holding tanks, raceways, hauling tanks, live wells and minnow buckets. The formula provides instant removal of chlorine, adds electrolytes, removes heavy metals and pesticides and stimulates the minnows' natural slime coat. One tablespoon treats 50 gallons. Turns water blue.
Pogey-Croaker Saver
Saltwater holding formula.
CHEMICAL
Specifically developed for use with saltwater bait, including pogey menhaden, croakers, mullet, mud minnows, shrimp and ghost shrimp. The formula removes chlorine, reduces water odor, stimulates a natural slime coat and removes harmful ammonia. One tablespoon treats 25 gallons. Recommended for closed recirculating systems.
Finer-Shiner
CHEMICAL
This holding formula is designed for use with wild shiners, hatchery shiners and hard-scaled baitfish. It is heavily formulated with potassium, which hardens fish scales and makes sure bait lasts longer during captivity. It also removes tapwater chlorine, removes harmful metals and pesticides and stimulates a natural slime coat. Finer-Shiner is commonly used in bait tanks, hauling tanks, holding vats, live baitwells and minnow buckets. One tablespoon treats 50 gallons.
Shrimp-Keeper
CHEMICAL
There are three main types of oxygen replenishment techniques:

Agitators/aspirators, compressors with air diffusers and pure oxygen. Agitators/ aspirators rely upon a mechanical disturbance to splash water or create bubbles to drive oxygen into the water. They are not very efficient, take up space in the tank and may have mechanical problems because of exposure to the elements. Compressors with air diffusers are the most popular method of aerating low stocking densities or for short haul trips. Easily sized for the situation, diffuser systems rely upon bubble size and bubble contact time to transfer oxygen. If more oxygen is needed, more diffusers are added. You can never "over aerate" by putting too much air into the water. The maximum stocking density for this type of aeration is 1 lb of fish per gallon of water. Pure oxygen systems are intended for high stocking densities, long trips and sensitive fish. To give you an idea of how well pure oxygen works, remember that bags of tropical fish are shipped around the world for periods of time up to 30 hours in a plastic bag containing 1/3 water and 2/3 oxygen. The key to pure oxygen efficiency in the hauling tank is in the diffuser. The finer the bubble, the better the diffusion into the water. The best micropore diffusers now on the market are less than 50% efficient in their ability to transfer oxygen into the water at these shallow depths. Simply put, for every dollar's worth of oxygen bought, you get fifty cents worth of it in the water. But it does allow very high carrying capacities, where the cost is far outweighed by the return in healthy fish delivered. Larger trucks and/or longer runs can benefit from the compact nature of liquid oxygen.
This saltwater conditioner will help keep saltwater bait alive, including shrimp, ghost shrimp, croakers, mullet, piggy perch and menhaden. The formula totally conditions salt water. It removes ammonia and surface foam, stimulates natural slime coat and reduces water surface tension so that more oxygen can enter the water. One tablespoon treats 25 gallons of salt water.
Please Release Me
CHEMICAL
Use in livewells and fishing tournament weigh-in tanks. This water conditioner helps keep bass alive! The formula calms bass so that injury in the livewell is reduced, replaces the slime coat and removes heavy metals and pesticides. One teaspoon treats 10 gallons. Turns water green. SL103 SL104 SL323 SL324 SL313 SL314 SL155 SL154 SL203 SL204
Treats (gal)
Better-Bait, 3 lbs Better-Bait, 10 lbs Pogey-Croaker Saver, 3 lbs Pogey-Croaker Saver, 10 lbs Shrimp-Keeper, 3 lbs Shrimp-Keeper, 10 lbs Please Release Me, 3 lbs Please Release Me, 10 lbs Finer-Shiner, 3 lbs Finer-Shiner, 10 lbs
2,400 9,600 1,200 4,800 1,200 4,800 2,400 9,600 2,400 8,000
$ 22.00 69.17 43.60 113.00 37.55 109.30 40.57 144.05 26.24 77.10
19.47/6+ 62.25/4+ 38.91/6+ 101.00/4+ 33.51/6+ 97.28/4+ 36.55/6+ 128.23/4+ 23.45/6+ 67.57/4+

Our customers are our first priority. We will provide extraordinary service to satisfy the needs of our customers. We will deliver our products and services on time and error free, conforming to the requirements of our customers. We strive to do it right the first time and eliminate any problem that prevents us from achieving complete customer satisfactions. We thank you for your patronage.
Note:
sl103
sl323
sl313
Never release baitfish into the wild! sl155 sl203
128
Chemicals
Disinfectants/Medications/Tranquilizers
CHEMICAL
Formalin by ProLine
Virkon Aquatic Disinfectant
TF
In use since 1909, formalin is an effective way to control and prevent external parasites. Also controls fungi on fish eggs. Ships via Hazmat Ground. 1-gallon container weighs 10 lbs. Not for food fi sh. Cannot ship when temperature is below 40F. FORM1 $ 37.95
Mb01
Virkon Aquatic is a highly effective disinfectant specifically formulated for use in aquaculture facilities. Generally used for cleaning equipment, instruments and in footbaths. Ideal for controlling a wide variety of viral, bacterial and fungal pathogens. Mix at a rate of 1.3 ounces per gallon of water. One gallon of solution treats 135 sq.ft., 10 lbs make 123 gallons of solution. Solution remains stable for seven days. EPA-registered (registration pending in California). VKS10 10-lb Container $ 98.00 86.24/4+
New Lower Price
Fish Medications
Keep your fish healthy with Pro Series powdered medications from Aquarium Pharmaceuticals. Treat a variety of fungi, bacteria, infections and diseases before they cause permanent harm to your fish. Box includes 10 packets, each of which treats 10 gallons.
55p
70p
E.M. Erythromycin
Parasite-S
An FDA-approved formalin (37% formaldehyde) that controls external protozoa, parasites and monogenetic trematodes on all cultured finfish, penaid shrimp and all finfish eggs. Protozoans controlled include: Ichthyophthirius spp. ("ich"), Costia spp., Chilodonella spp., Epistylus spp., Trichodina spp. and Scyphidia spp. Monogenetic trematodes controlled include Gyrodactylus spp., Dactylogyrus spp. and Cleidodiscus spp. NADA #140-989. Sold in 55-gallon (208 liters) drums only. Ships motor freight from factory, ship weight 502 lbs. Cannot ship when temperature is below 40F. PR55 55 gallons $ 475
Treats fin and tail rot, mouth fungus, open red sores, bacterial gill disease and hemorrhagic septicemia. Full course of treatment requires four doses. 55P $8
Furan-2*
Combats gram-positive and gram-negative bacterial diseases, including bacterial gill disease, open red sores, body slime, eye cloud, black molly disease and fin and tail rot. Full course of treatment requires four doses. 70P $ 5.25
Note: can only be sold to fish farms and fish hatcheries.
*This medication will cause a slight discoloration of water that can be removed with
activated carbon.
Povidone Iodine 10%

This product is an FDA low-enforcement priority fish egg disinfectant that works well when applied to the egg surface of salmonids. It is effective against a wide variety of fungi, viruses and bacteria. 1% minimum titratable iodine. 1 gallon (3.78 liters). Weighs 10 lbs. Made in USA. ID10 $ 30.20 27.48/4+
Tech Talk 51
Anesthetizing With CO2
High levels of dissolved carbon dioxide (CO2) can be used to anesthetize fish prior to handling for purposes such as weighing, injecting, vaccinating, inspecting and slaughtering. Caution: Carbon dioxide gas can cause drowsiness, blackouts and even death in humans and animals. Use only in well-ventilated spaces or outdoors. 1. Buffer the water with sodium bicarbonate (baking soda, NaHCO3) to a pH of 7.5 (or higher if normal for the ASN). 2. Using an ultra fine diffuser (or a downflow bubble contactor such as an AES oxygen saturator), bubble carbon dioxide gas into the buffered water (remember, any carbon dioxide bubbles that escape at the surface are wasted gas, so use either an ultra fi ne pore diffuser or a venturi at the greatest possible depth). 3. When anesthetizing for temporary handling, be careful not to supersaturate the water with gases, causing bubble gas disease. When in doubt, check with a saturometer, which measures total gas pressure (TGP, which above 103% may cause problems). A vacuum degassing tower may have to be used prior to carbon dioxide supersaturation. 4. When anesthetizing for temporary handling, run the carbon dioxide level up to about 75 ppm. When anesthetizing prior to slaughtering, 250 ppm or more is required. 5. Hold the fish in the high carbon dioxide water until the fish slow down or become immobile, as your requirements dictate. 6. To revive them, simply put them back into water without carbon dioxide.
Tricaine-S
This is an FDA-approved, ANAD #200-226, high-grade brand of MS-222 (tricaine methanesulfonate), which is an anesthetic/tranquilizer of fish and other cold-blooded aquatic organisms. When used properly, it induces a temporary state of immobilization that is rapidly reversed when the animal is placed back in clean water. It is commonly used when handling fish during manual spawning (stripping), tagging, measuring, weighing and surgical operations. It is a great sedative for transporting, sorting and grading fish. TRS4 TRS5 TRS1 TRS2 5g 10 g 100 g 1 kg $ 14.95 21.95 65.00 370.00
tRS5
Pond Medications
Chemicals
129
Defoamer by ProLine
Instantly eliminates foam.
Our defoamer is a high-quality, 5% food grade, silicone-based product that will instantly eliminate surface foam in tanks, ponds, hauling tanks, etc. Use sparingly, as one teaspoon treats 100 gallons or more. This is a great price on a high-quality defoamer. Made in USA. DFA DFB Pint Gallon
Ship Wt
Tricide-Neo
TF CHEMICAL
Goodbye to bacterial ulcers!

Tricide-Neo is a patented dip to aid in the treatment of superficial bacterial infections such as ulcer disease. It breaks the bacteria's resistant outer layer to allow the antibiotic to stop the bacteria. The product is shipped dry and mixed with distilled water. Fish can be dipped every other day for one week. Healed ulcers can typically be seen within 15 days. Also used as a prophylactic dip prior to introducing new fish. Ineffective against Mycobacterium spp. For external use on nonfood fish only! Try it! It works great! TN22 (22 grams) makes one gallon, TN110 (110 grams) makes 5 gallons. Not FDA-approved. TN22 TN110
dfB
1 lb 11 lbs
$ 9.40 32.90
30.30/4+
$ 30.80 68.60
tN22
dfA
Koi with ulcer infected with multiantibiotic resistant bacteria before and 15 days after 5 to 10 min dips in Tricide-Neo on days 0, 2 and 4.
MICROBE-LIFT Lice & Anchor Worm Pond Rid-Ich+

CHEMICAL
This is a combination of two powerful medications proven scientifically to be effective in the control of many diseases caused by freshwater external protozoan parasites, including ich, Costia, Trichodina and Chilodonella. Can also treat fungal infections in fish. Contains formalin and malachite green; 16 oz (473 mL) treat 960 gallons (3.6 cubic meters). Pond Rid-Ich+ is not FDA-approved for use on food fish. Cannot ship when temperature is below 40F. PR16 PR64 16 oz Gallon $ 10.25 43.95
PR16
Treats pond fish affected by common external parasites such as lice and anchor worms. Safe for use on all ornamental pond fish, reptiles, amphibians and mollusks. Will not harm pond biological filtration. Recommended dosage: 1 ts per 20 gallons. 16 oz bottle treats up to 1,920 gallons of pond water. FLAW16 $12.50
Debride Medicated CHEMICAL Ointment
Potassium Permanganate
Hazmat AG CHEMICAL
Technical grade KMnO4 (97% minimum potassium permanganate) is a strong oxidizer that works by oxidizing organic and inorganic materials that are major consumers of oxygen (does not add oxygen to the water). Sold in 5-lb (2.2 kg) plastic jars only. We can ship 6 jars in one carton for 1 Hazmat fee. Ships Hazmat Ground. Not FDA-approved. PTP5 $ 46.50 43.05/4+
Debride is a medicated ointment that promotes prompt and complete healing of ulcers, mouth rot, fin rot and tail rotall symptoms of Aeromonas and Pseudomonas infections. It is safe to apply to the mouths of fish and will not harm the gills. Debride contains corticosteroid and topical anesthetic in a butylester copolymer petroleum distillate carrier. Each tube contains 12 grams, good for approximately 20 applications. For use with koi only, not for food fish. DB1 $ 26.75
Chemical Note:
Use of any chemicals or medications is "at your own risk." Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. highly recommends the following:
Binox
CHEMICAL
Fish should ALWAYS be properly examined and diagnosed for disease by a licensed veterinarian or fish lab. ALWAYS double-check your chemical calculations and dosage rates. ONLY dose at rates prescribed by a licensed veterinarian or the manufacturer. NEVER mix chemicals or medications with other chemicals.
A broad range product that clears severe fungi and bacteria-related problems, including cotton fungus, gray slime, scratching, open sores, bloody spots and streaks, fin/tail/mouth rot, swim bladder disease, dropsy and cloudy eyes. One teaspoon (5 mL) treats 25 gallons. Not FDA-approved. NJ010 2 oz $ 4.30 3.76/4+
Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. is not liable for any damages or consequential damages resulting from any chemical or medication treatments.
130
Chemicals
Medications
Anti-Parasitic by Blackwater Creek

Praziquantel is an effective treatment for external and internal parasites such as flukes and tapeworms. Does not require water changes after use, and no damage is caused to the filter. For fresh or saltwater nonfood fish, including sharks and rays. The 50-g bottle treats almost 2,000 gallons. Warning: Read label carefully before use. PRAZI PRAZI-1 50 g 1 kg $ 79 450
PRAZI
KoiZyme
This patented blend of nonpathogenic bacteria, enzymes and micronutrients works on the established principle of competitive exclusion. When used as directed, KoiZyme will reduce the bacterial count of Aeromonas, Pseudomonas and other pathogenic bacteria to such low levels that they will not have an effect on koi. KoiZyme will not harm biofilters and has a 46 month shelf life (18 months if kept refrigerated). Use weekly at 4 teaspoons per 1,000 gallons. Not FDA-approved. KZ16 KZ32 16 oz 32 oz $ 25.00 48.00
Each
44.00 CHEMICAL
4+
KZ16
KZ32
ProForm-C Aquari-Sol
CHEMICAL
Considered one of the most effective preventatives and treatments against freshwater ich (Ichthyophthirius multifiliis), closed fins, body fungus and velvet. Can also be used as a net disinfectant, formulated for freshwater use only. 16 ounces treat 8,000 gallons. Not FDA-approved. Not for use with cyprinids, invertebrates and salmonids. AS31 16 oz $ 9.80 9.11/4+
AS31 P1002
ProForm-C is a broad spectrum treatment that is safe and effective for the control of diseases caused by Ichthyophthirius (ich), Costia, Trichodina, Chilodonella, Oodinium and fungal infections. It is a malachite green and formalin combination that is considerably less toxic to koi and goldfish than other similar products in the market. Required treatment time is generally three days and bypassing the biofilter is not required. One quart treats a 3,200-gallon system three times and one gallon treats a 12,800-gallon system three times. For use only with koi, not for food fish. Cannot ship when temperature is below 40F. P1002 P1003 1 quart 1 gallon $ 22.95 62.95
Methylene Blue
CHEMICAL
Aids in general disease prevention with tropical fish, fry and eggs. Also used for detoxification of fish suffering from nitrite or cyanide poisoning. One teaspoon treats 10 gallons (3 ppm concentration). Toxic to plants and bacterial beds; recommended for use in quarantine tanks. Not FDA-approved. 37344 4 oz $ 3.75 3.49/4+
PimaFix Antifungal Treatment CHEMICAL
A natural botanical remedy made from West Indian Bay oil, PimaFix rapidly treats fungal infections on fish bodies and fins and also treats internal and external bacterial infections. Works in both fresh and salt water, will not discolor water. Dosage rate is 16 oz per 960 gallons. Not FDA-approved for use with food fish, chemical waiver form required. 10K 64 oz $ 29.49 26.54/4+
Cupramine
CHEMICAL
A copper-based medication that safely and effectively eradicates parasites on fresh and saltwater fish. Unlike other forms of copper, it will not precipitate and damage the filter bed. Easily removed with chemical filtration, 100 mL treat over 500 gallons. Not FDA-approved. 565 568
565
11P
MelaFix
CHEMICAL
100 mL 2 liters
$ 6.65 105.45
5.99/4+ 100.18/2+
Clout
CHEMICAL
Rapidly repairs open wounds, damaged fi ns, red ulcers and cloudy eyes. Safe for freshwater and saltwater tanks. MelaFix contains all natural ingredients and is beneficial when introducing new fish. The 16-oz bottle treats 960 gallons; the 64-oz bottle is concentrated and treats 19,000 gallons. Not FDA-approved. 11J 11P
11J
Highly effective against parasitic and protozoan infections, Clout is commonly used to treat Lernaea (anchor worms), Argulus (fish lice) and leeches. Clears typical outbreaks within 72 hours, for use with fresh and saltwater fish. One tablet treats 10 gallons of water. Not FDA-approved. CL2 100 Tablets $ 18.95
16 oz 64 oz
$ 7.95 32.89
30.26/4+
PondCare MelaFix
Safe, natural treatment.
CHEMICAL
CHEMICAL Waiver Form Required This symbol designates those products that require a completed Chemical Waiver Form before purchase (see Index). Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. will only sell medications to those customers who certify that they will control the usage of these products. Medications are for use with ornamental fish only and are not for use with food fish or for human consumption.
Antibacterial remedy for the treatment of koi and goldfish diseases. Derived from the leaves of the tea tree (Melaleuca), this antibacterial remedy will treat ulcers, open wounds and fin and tail rot. It will also rapidly repair damaged fins. It has powerful antibacterial properties that treat wounds and promote rapid tissue growth. MelaFix will not harm biological filters, plants, snails or other invertebrates. Not FDA-approved. 17664 64 oz $ 38.95
Enrichments
Feed
131
Black Algae Powder by OSI

A microparticulate diet that contains a high concentration of black algae and Spirulina. Other nutritional ingredients are included to promote fast, uniform growth. The diet colors the water a rich black to help minimize cannibalism. Protein 60%, fat 12%. BL200 BL500 200 g 500 g $ 13.20 26.15
BL500
Vitamin Premix, Soluble

Formulated with 16 vitamins, this premix additive is good for blending in feeds or enhancing freeze-dried and flake foods. Average dosage is 1 lb (454 g) per 100 lbs (45.4 kg) of food. Dissolves well in water with little residue. Sold in 1-lb Ziploc bag. VMPS $ 39.65
Each
Guaranteed Analysis per Lb (454 grams)

Vitamin A, USP units ..... 325,000 Vitamin D 3, USP units ..... 65,000 Vitamin E, IU ................... 32,500 Vitamin K, mg ................. 793.65 Vitamin B12, mol .............. 10.08 Ribofl avin, mg ................... 3,250 p-Pantothenic Acid, mg .. 15,600 Niacin, mg ...................... 19,500 Choline, mg ...................... 2,600 Thiamine, mg .................... 2,600 Pyridoxine, mg .................. 2,600 Folic Acid, mg ...................... 780 Ascorbic Acid, mg ........... 87,100 Biotin, mg .............................. 40 BHT, mg .............................. 200 Inositol, mg ..................... 13,000
38.52
5+
36.25
10+
Vita Fish
Created for marine fish, corals and invertebrates, Vita Fish is a highly concentrated vitamin complex containing 10 essential vitamins. It is highly soluble, easily absorbed and can be used as a food additive to enhance the nutritional quality of dry or live food. Dosage rate is 2 drops per gallon. VF641
vf641
1 gallon
$ 84.29
Important
Though we have tried to make this catalog as comprehensive and factual as possible, errors occasionally occur. Additionally, prices, specifications and packaging may have changed since the date of publication. Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. reserves the right to substitute equivalent items and make other changes without notice. 1 oz liquid = 29.6 mL 1 oz dry = 28.4 g 1 mL H2O = 1 g grams x .0353 = oz grams x .0022 = lbs
Roti-Rich Invertebrate Diet

SE16
Selcon Concentrate
highly unsaturated fatty acids.
Only Selcon Concentrate contains omega-3 HUFA, Vitamin B12 and pure stabilized vitamin C. Highly concentrated, it is ideal for enriching rotifers and Artemia. Can also be soaked into freeze-dried foods. SE60 SE16 2 oz (60 mL) 16 oz (473 g) $ 12.75 82.65
RR6
A specialized microalgae/yeast diet that is fortified with a rich, full vitamin mixture and specifi c essential trace elements. It can be used with or without microalgae to feed a variety of invertebrates including rotifers, Artemia, Daphnia and filter feeders, such as scallops, clams, sponges and corals. RR6 RR32 RR01 6-oz Bottle 32-oz Bottle 1.1 lb Dry, Makes 1 gallon
Ship Wt
1 lb 3 lbs 2 lbs
$ 7.55 26.50 21.85
SE60
Vita-Chem
A prestabilized, multivitamin additive that is water and tissue soluble, ideal for closed systems. It contains many natural extracts that are lost in prepackaged foods. It is a great additive for fi n regeneration and preventing lateral line disease in marine fish. Can be put directly into the water at a dosage of 2 drops per gallon or can be mixed with foods. 16709 16716 16710 16715
16709
Your customer service is superb! I had sent a message to add an additional item to an order, and was surprised to find that the order had already been shipped (just hours after I submitted it online). The customer service person made another order for the additional item, and all is well. So nice to still have a company that believes in being prompt! We look forward to doing business with you again!
Ruth Olsen
Office Assistant U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service Klamath Falls Fish & Wildlife Office
Saltwater, 16 oz Saltwater, 1 gallon Freshwater, 16 oz Freshwater, 1 gallon
$ 24.59 155.00 24.59 155.00
132
Feed
Enrichments/Gel Food
Artificial Plankton-Rotifer
APR is a microencapsulated feed that can be used as a replacement for rotifers (Brachionus plicatilis), making it a great food for feeding larval shrimp and fish. Its high fat content and excellent fatty acid profile will produce post-larvae of uniform size. Approximate particle size is 100 microns. Application: to feed 4 million shrimp (Penaeus monodon), original stocking density, in a 50-ton water tank, add an average of 60 g/day during the zoel stages, 75 g/day during the mysid stages, and 50 g/day during the PL stages, until PL20 is reached. For fish feed, mix a small amount of water to create an emulsion. Feed small amounts 46 times per day.Sold in 300-gram can. APR1 $ 15.09 14.18/4+
Larval Feeds
Compare to BioKyowa!
Otohime larval feeds are specially formulated in Japan to meet the needs of marine fish. They have been used in both ornamental and food fish hatcheries around the world. Available in slow-sinking pellet sizes of 200 microns to 2.3 mm. Krill, fish and squid meal are the main protein sources, making it a nutritious diet. T2360 T2620 T2920 T2940 T3115 T3315 B1 Diet, 200360 microns, 4.4 lbs B2 Diet, 360620 microns, 4.4 lbs C1 Diet, 620920 microns, 4.4 lbs C2 Diet, 9201,410 microns, 4.4 lbs EP1 Diet, 1.5 mm, 22 lbs EP2 Diet, 2.3 mm, 44 lbs $ 42.88 42.88 33.87 33.37 88.63 153.30
t2360
t2940
t3315
Content Analysis Min crude protein................... 32% Min crude fat.......................... 39%
Krill Meal
Max ash (minerals)................... 7% Max moisture........................... 7%
Great for developing your koi's hi (red)

An excellent ingredient and feed additive, krill meal is composed of 100% Euphausia superba that has been freeze dried and ground into a powder. It is highly nutritious, protein rich and very high in the pigment carotenoid astaxanthin. Krill meal is widely used for feeding larval catfish and increases survival rates and health in trout, salmon, and other finfish. Contains 60% protein and is high in omega-3 fatty acids. It is in a powdered form with 80% of the particle size smaller than 500 microns. Food contains oxygen-absorbing packet to maximize freshness. FK45 FK46 1 lb 5 lbs $ 16.55 69.95
Larval AP100 Diet by Zeigler

Larval diet consists of very fine, granulated microcapsules scientifically formulated to feed fish and shrimp during larval and postlarval stages. It has been used to successfully raise larvae of penaid shrimp, trout, koi, catfish, lobster, shiners, many game fish and tropical fish. The formula consists of a highly digestible mixture of marine and animal proteins, vegetable protein, yeast, vegetable starches, fish and vegetable oils, vitamin and mineral premixes, pigments, antioxidants and biodegradable binders. Minimum protein content 50%. Sold in 500-gram (1.1 lb) cans with a 12-month shelf life. Includes Vpak to enhance disease resistance. LD50 LD100 LD150 LD250 LD400

<50 microns <100 microns 100150 microns 150250 microns 250400 microns
Zoea1 to Zoea3 Zoea3 to Mysis3 Mysis1 to PL23 PL1 to PL6 PL3 4 to PL8
Larval Stage
$ 40.90 31.45 34.26 21.53 19.95
Each
38.86 29.58 32.23 20.29 18.76
4+
Spirulina
Algae-Feast Spirulina is an excellent source of nutrition for marine and freshwater invertebrates as well as vertebrates. It can significantly improve survival rates and size uniformity. Farm-raised in California and spray dried into a fine powder to preserve nutrition. It remains naturally microencapsulated for hours when rehydrated and it also defilamentizes a few minutes after rehydration, making it easy for small larvae and zooplankton to eat. Filaments range from 8 to 100 microns in length. Deactivatedso it will not grow in your tanksand is free from harmful bacteria and toxins. Sold by the lb (454 g). SP1 $ 26.95 24.79/4+
Gel Fish Food

Add your own ingredients.
ld100 ld150 ld250 ld400
American BP Rotifer Replacement Diet

This microencapsulated feed can be used as a replacement for rotifers. High levels of protein (50%) and very high fat levels (30%) make this an excellent diet for fish and shrimp during early larval stages. The high fat level spares protein for growth and provides large amounts of highly unsaturated fatty acids (HUFA), which are necessary during the early stages of growth. BP500 500 g $ 26.35 24.24/4+
Hard-to-feed fish and invertebrates? Homemade gel food may be the solution to your problem. This 50% protein diet comes in powder form. Mix it 50/50 with water (add your own ingredients, including vitamins), let it set in the refrigerator and you have a semisolid gel that can be cut into feeding-sized portions. It's being fed to all kinds of fish and invertebrates at the MBL in Woods Hole, at SeaWorld and many other public aquariums. 8-oz (226 g) packages, when mixed with water, make 1 lb of gel food. Oxygen-absorbing packet included.

G61 G65
8 oz (226 g) 5 lbs (2.2 kg)
$ 11.45 87.00
Each
10.30 80.07
4+
Crude protein not less than. ............ 50% Crude fat not less than. ....................14% Crude fiber not more than...............1.5% Ash not more than.......................... 20%
Typical analysis: Protein 60-70%; carbs 1520%; lipids 47%; minerals 713%; moisture 37%; fiber 47%; L.A. 9.7 g/km; G.L.A. 13.5 g/kg; beta carotene 1.4 g/kg; total carotenoids 3.7 g/kg.
Fry/Tech Talk
Feed
133
Aquatox Food by Zeigler

Aquatox is a specially formulated diet for maintenance and growth of fish used in aquatic toxicology research and in biological and biomedical research. The ingredients and nutrient components are kept constant to minimize nutrient variability and are especially selected for low levels of recognized contaminants. Formulated as a complete diet, Aquatox contains "Stay-C," a stable form of vitamin C. Flakes are .1 mm thick and sold in 5-lb bags. Complete ingredient list, amino acid, mineral and vitamin concentrations are available upon request. Oxygenabsorbing packet included. AX5 $ 42.60 40.51/4+
Tech Talk 118

Calculation of Pond and Tank Volume
Determining the volume of your pond or tank accurately can be critical for many reasons, including sizing of pumps, piping, filters, etc., when calculating stocking rates and for correct chemical dosages. Volume is calculated by multiplying surface area times depth. Some geometric shapes are simple to calculate, e.g., squares, rectangles and circles. Unfortunately, many ponds are free form in shape and/or have variable depths. Their volume can be estimated by dividing the pond surface into simple geometric shapes, calculating the volume of each section based on depth and adding all sections. Be sure to include the water in filters, piping, waterfalls, etc. Alternative methods of determining the volume include: 1. Checking with the contractor who built the pond for records of pond area and volume. 2. Obtaining aerial photographs from which the pond area can be estimated. 3. Surveying the ponds using a transit to determine area (get depths from topography). 4. Drawing the pond on graph paper divided into squares of known size to calculate surface area. 5. Determining the area using CAD software. 6. Filling the pond using a totalizing water meter. 7. Estimating the volume by adding a known measure of salt, then determining the volume by salinity.
Each
Plankton by Hikari
Ideal for feeding fish fry, this plankton-based food hangs suspended in the water column where fry can readily feed. It is processed with a unique low-heat reduction method that eliminates nutrient loss. Vacuum-packed for freshness, it will help fry grow strong and healthy. Sold in 4.4-lb bags, minimum 48% protein. HK170 HK270 HK370
Larval Stage
Early Middle Late
Size (mm)
.2 .2.37 .37.61
80180 6080 3060
Mesh
The following tables present equations that are used to calculate the area and volume of various geometric shapes. Shape Circle Ellipse Rectangle Right Triangle General Triangle Regular Polygon Shape Cube Pyramid Cone Cylinder Elliptical Depression Sphere Segment Area Calculation r2 r1r2 lh 1/2 ab 1/2 hc 1/2 ns2 cot (180/n) Volume Calculation abc 1/3 abh 1/3 r2h r2h 4/9 abh 1/3 h2 (3r-h)
$ 54.85 54.85 54.85
avf7 avf6
avf8
Volume in Cubic Feet x 7.48 = Gallons
Area
r r1 r2 l h Circle Ellipse Rectangle s h a Right Triangle c General Triangle b a h b Cube r h Cylinder Pyramid a r Elliptical Depression h Sphere Segment Cone r h h n = # sides Regular Polygon r
We've got some great feeders that will handle many foods (including fine and moist foods). See more details on page 147.
Volume
c a
134
Feed
Tropical Fish/Flake
Tropical Fish Food

We offer four types of tropical fish food. F0A is a 40% protein staple flake diet with color enhancers added. F0C and F0D are also 40% protein flake diets that are a 33% mixture of brine shrimp flake, blood meal flake and Spirulina flakean excellent balanced diet which will enhance fish health, vigor and color. F1A is a powdered 45% high protein diet which is great for juvenile tropical fish or starting fry on a commercial diet. F2A is a 43% protein sinking crumble that is excellent for larger tropical fish, cichlids and fingerlings. Oxygen-absorbing packet included. F0A F0B F0C F0D F1A F1B F2A F2B Tropical Tropical Tropical Tropical Tropical Tropical Dense Dense 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 30 lbs (13.6 kg) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 30 lbs (13.6 kg) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.6 kg) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.6 kg)
Bag Size Minimum Protein
40% 40% 40% 40% 45% 45% 43% 43%
Flake Flake Flake Flake Powder Powder Crumble Crumble
Pellet Size
Floating Floating Floating Floating Slow-Sinking Slow-Sinking Sinking Sinking
feed type
f0A
f0C
$ 38.95 205.00 43.90 224.29 12.35 51.25 13.40 75.00
Each
35.00/4+ 194.75/2+ 40.71/4+ 213.08/2+ 11.09/4+ 48.69/2+ 12.22/4+ 71.25/2+
f1A
f2A
Flake Food
Whether you're a hatchery manager, breeder or fish hobbyist, what is more important than high-quality food? Flake food is a highly nutritional food packaged and priced for the professional. We offer eight varieties in two package sizes.
Beef Heart Flake Food

All AES foods are packaged in Mylar bags with O2 absorbers to ensure freshness.
Color Tropical Marine

Similar to tropical fl ake but with higher levels of color enhancers. Krill and shrimp meal are also added. 45% protein content. ZCT5 ZCT25 ZCT50 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.7 kg) $ 48.17 176.00 305.00
A 46% protein flake with trimmed beef hearts as the main ingredient. Excellent for breeder fish to stimulate egg and fry production. A good substitute for earthworm flake. F0G F0F F0E 1 lb (454 g) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) $ 14.64 57.42 208.00
Angelfish
Similar to tropical flake but with higher levels of color enhancers. 45% protein content. ZAF5 ZAF25 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) $ 40.00 152.00
Egg Yolk
Formulated from egg yolk, this food is a high protein/high fat flake. It is great for fattening juvenile/larval fish and thin fish. 45% protein. F01Y F05Y F25Y 1 lb (454 g) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) $ 15.90 53.40 180.00
Earthworm
A 42% protein fl ake with a primary ingredient of earthworms. Breeders have reported an increase in spawning of 610 times! F01E F05E F30E 1 lb (454 g) 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) $ 17.30 50.45 198.00
Koi and Goldfish Food

Zeigler Goldfish Flake is nutritionally balanced food for goldfish and koi. Increases digestibility and minimizes waste. Promotes healthy gill, fin and tissue development. Also enhances color. ZGF25 ZGF5 25 lbs 5 lbs $ 135.00 38.50
Plankton/Krill/Spirulina
A special formula of plankton, Antarctic krill (Euphausia superba), Pacific krill ( Euphausia pacifica) and Spirulina. A choice food with 44% protein. F01K F05K F30K 1 lb (454 g) $ 18.30 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 47.08 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 204.00
Tropical
Highly palatable and digestible, flakes are formulated as a balanced diet. Provides high levels of Spirulina and trace elements. 45% protein content. ZTF5 ZTF25 ZTF50 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.7 kg) $ 34.00 140.00 265.00
Brine Shrimp
Consisting primarily of baby brine shrimp, this flake formula has a protein content of 50%. Flakes are fortified with vitamins and minerals. Fat content at least 13% and low fiber content of 3%. ZBF5 ZBF25 ZBF50 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.7 kg) $ 65.00 258.00 480.00
Spirulina
Excellent source of vitamins and amino acids with Spirulina algae as the primary ingredient. Delivers a high protein content of 38% and is the choice food for fish requiring vegetation in their diet. ZSF5 ZSF25 ZSF50 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 25 lbs (11.3 kg) 50 lbs (22.7 kg) $ 42.75 157.00 286.00
Aquarium
Feed
135
Fancy Guppy Food

Formulated exclusively for raising and breeding species of fancy guppies. Vitamins are encapsulated into a small pellet that becomes soft quickly in water, yet does not dissolve. The feed is high in linolenic acid, which promotes growth and improves the guppies' natural breeding habits. HK41 22 g $ 3.14 2.89/12+
Tetra Veggie Algae Wafers

Staple diet and concentrated algae center are combined in one sinking wafer, perfect for sucker-mouth catfish. These large, easily digested wafers also contain health enhancing ProCare. This precise blend of immunostimulants, vitamins, biotin supplement and Omega-3 fatty acids helps strengthen your fish's immunity and improves resistance to disease and stress. 8.82 oz. 16449 $ 10.65 9.80/6+
Micro Pellets
Aquarium Foods by OSI

Premium tested formulations. Promotes rapid growth, high survival rates. High levels of natural color enhancers.
Specially formulated for tetras, barbs and other small tropical fish. Contains a high level of protein, vitamins and nutrients that are encapsulated in the pellets. Extremely small pellet size (<1 mm) makes it excellent for small tetras and larval fish. HK40 1 kg $ 65.45 62.11/6+
Ocean Stars International (OSI) has been supplying food products for the aquarium and aquaculture markets for over a decade. Backed by extensive research and development, OSI's wide range of flake and pellet foods has been formulated with exceptional nutritional advantages. All of the foods contain predigested ingredients for high nutrient absorption as well as natural color enhancers, feeding attractants and vitamins. 20031 10073 20033 20075 20035 6029 20032 Freshwater Flakes, 2.2 lbs Marine Flakes, 7 oz Marine Flakes, 2.2 lbs Spirulina Flakes, 7 oz Spirulina Flakes, 2.2 lbs Cichlid Flakes, 2.2 lbs Goldfish Flakes, 2.2 lbs $ 32.50 10.55 34.90 11.35 44.95 30.45 26.00 29.25/6+ 9.50/12+ 31.41/6+ 10.22/12+ 40.46/6+ 27.40/6+ 23.40/6+
Algae Wafers
This algae diet is specially formulated for plecostomus and other algae eaters. The sinking wafers are ideal for bottom feeders in ponds and aquariums. The formulation contains a high concentration of Spirulina algae, which provides excellent nutrition for plant-eating fishes. HK35 HK36 250 g 1 kg $ 9.50 42.40 8.97/12+ 40.23/6+
20035
6029
hk35
20032
20031 10073

Important
136
Feed
Tropical Fish/Tech Talk
TetraColor
Originally formulated as a complete discus diet, this granulated food will enhance color, increase growth and stimulate feeding. It is excellent for feeding midwater fish like catfish and cichlids. Not for sale outside of US. 16262 10.5 oz $ 12.45 11.45/6+
Tech Talk 17
Fish Food
The cost of fish food can represent 30 to 90% of the total cost of raising fish! In some situations (like indoor culture), feed must provide 100% of the complex nutritional requirements fish need. A less-than-complete diet will show up as poor feeding response, slow growth and/or disease problems. Poor water quality can also be caused by bad feed. All feed should be used within the normal 6-month shelf life. Do not overfeed. In general, give fish a little less than they will eat (stop feeding them before they stop feeding).
Cichlid Gold TetraMin Flakes

Widely known as one of the most nutritional flake foods, TetraMin can be used to feed almost any freshwater fish. It is formulated with over 40 special ingredients and is very high in nutrition. The 5.6-oz size features extra-large flakes. 16155 16106 16623 5.6 oz 7.0 oz 4.5 lbs $ 10.95 12.55 59.75
Each
Rich in color enhancers, Cichlid Gold is a specially formulated food for bringing out the brilliant, natural colors of fish. It is ideal for most species of carnivorous cichlids and works especially well for bringing out the colors in oscar, firemouth and red devil species. Highly nutritious, it's formulated in a floating pellet form that does not make water cloudy. HK25 HK26 HK27 HK28 HK29 HK30 Mini, 8.8 oz, 1/8" Mini, 22 lbs, 1/8" Medium, 8.8 oz, 3/16" Medium 22 lbs, 3/16" Large, 8.8 oz, 5/16" Large, 22 lbs, 5/16" $ 6.55 166.60 6.55 166.60 6.55 166.60 6.16/12+ 158.27/2+ 6.16/12+ 158.27/2+ 6.16/12+ 158.27/2+
10.12 11.68 55.56
6+
16155
hK25
JumboKrill by Tetra
Large pacific krill that is vitamin enriched and excellent for feeding large fish or mixing with foods. Rich in astaxanthin, it improves color and growth. 16200 14 oz $ 42.50
Each
Cichlid Staple
This cichlid food is specially designed as an economical daily food for most species of cichlids. Fortified with vitamins and minerals, it is formulated to provide complete balanced nutrition. Available in three pellet sizes. Pellets fl oat and will not make water cloudy. HK19 HK20 HK21 HK22 HK23 HK24 Mini, 8.8 oz, 1/8" Mini, 22 lbs, 1/8" Medium, 8.8 oz, 3/16" Medium, 22 lbs, 3/16" Large, 8.8 oz, 5/16" Large, 22 lbs, 5/16" $ 5.25 98.80 5.25 98.80 5.25 98.80 4.57/12+ 93.86/2+ 4.57/12+ 93.86/2+ 4.57/12+ 93.86/2+
38.25
6+
Slow-Release Feeders by Tetra

Feed your fish over extending periods without wreaking havoc on your water quality. Ordinary plaster feeders dissolve, but these innovative gel feeder blocks feed your fish on demand for up to 14 days. You can even leave them in the aquarium after regular feeding resumes. Vacation is a 1-pack; Weekend is a 2-pack. 77150 77151 Vacation (1.06 oz, 14 days) Weekend (.85 oz, 5 days) $ 1.85 1.95
77151 77150
grams x .0353 = oz grams x .0022 = lbs
hK19
Aquarium/Larval
Feed
137
Aqua Stab-L Food by Zeigler

A special diet for both freshwater and saltwater fish.
It contains high levels of protein (40% minimum), vitamins and minerals together with various preservatives and stabilizers that protect the feed against microbial degradation after being placed in the water. Aqua Stab-L is a 3/8" sinking pellet with excellent water stability. After wetting, it has a soft, doughy consistency which is ideal for incorporating hormones and medications. Typically used for bottom feeders, as bait in tropical fish and baitfish traps and for attracting fish for harvest and sampling. Sold in 5- and 44-lb (2.2 and 20 kg) bags. Made in USA. Held in cold storage. Oxygen absorbing packet keeps food fresh. AM5 AM50 5 lbs 44 lbs $ 16.00 71.67
Each
Concentrated Planktonic Feed

These products ship Next Day Air, FOB CA.
15.20 67.57
4+
AP32
PfC32
Rf32
Fish Food by Lucky Pond

This low-cost food is for supplemental feeding in natural, earthen ponds and is not recommended as the sole diet for recirculating aquaculture or lined ponds. We offer it in both floating and sinking. Can be fed to a wide variety of fish including catfish, bream, tilapia, carp and other species. The sinking type is a 1/8" (3.2 mm) pellet and contains a minimum of 3% fat and 32% protein. The floating type is 3/16" (4.8 mm) extruded and contains a minimum of 4% fat and 32% protein. Packed in nitrogenpurged HD Mylar bags for maximum freshness. KF05-S KF05-F KF10-S KF10-F KF25-S KF25-F Sinking, 5 lbs Floating, 5 lbs Sinking, 10 lbs Floating, 10 lbs Sinking, 25 lbs Floating, 25 lbs $ 5.15 5.15 8.80 8.80 19.95 19.95
Each
Provides a diversity of phyto-pigments, lipids, omega-3's, amino acids, carbohydrates and cell sizes. Proprietary harvesting and stabilizing processes keep cells intact and ensure nutrients get to your animals. This blend of the most important marine microalgae (Pavlova, Isochrysis, Thalassiosira, Tetraselmis and Nannochloropsis) will help your tank diversity improve, encourage your invertebrates to come out to feed and even help difficult-to-keep animals thrive. 32-oz bottle. Get superior color, vitality and growth rates! Roti Feast is a highly nutritious plankton feed perfect for hard corals, larval fish and other reef carnivores that feed on small zooplankton. Rotifers are a critical feed used in marine fish and invertebrate hatcheries around the world. Contains tens of millions of fully intact marine rotifers Brachionus plicatilis with millions of eggs. 32-oz bottle, .4 oz treat 100 gal.
Phyto feast
Roti feast
Arcti Pods
4.64 4.64 7.92 7.92 17.95 17.95
4+
Arcti Pods are large, nutrition-packed planktonic copepods (3,000 microns) harvested fresh from arctic waters. Great for fish and invertebrates such as LPS corals, anenomes, zoanthids and brittle stars. Rich in carotenoids, which bring out the color of your animals. Also contain protein, omega-3 and -6 fatty acids and waxy esters for growth. 32-oz bottle, 12 teaspoons treat 100 gal.
Kf25-S Kf25-f
PFC32 RF32 AP32
Phyto Feast Roti Feast Arcti Pods
$ 29.95 70.00 70.00
Cone Worm Feeder

Use with live worms or flake foods.
This large capacity worm feeder holds up to one ounce of bloodworms or Tubifex worms. It can be used as a free-floating feeder or attached to the tank wall using the large suction cup (included). The 4-way feeder features a removable cone that, when detached, allows the floating ring to hold flake food. Weighs 2 ounces. 10525 10526 Cone Worm Feeder 4-Way Feeder $ 1.75 1.75
Food Sticks
Oxygen-absorbing packet keeps food fresh. Spirulina sticks.
An excellent food for a wide variety of fish, these food sticks are formulated with a high amount of Spirulina, dried kelp and double stabilized with vitamin C. Ideal for bottom-feeding fish, catfish and cichlids.
Earthworm sticks.
Ideal for increasing the spawning behavior in many species of fish.
Brine shrimp sticks.

Relished by bottom feeders, catfish and cichlids, these sticks and bits are formulated from brine shrimp, plankton, shrimp, dried Spirulina and vitamins. F125A F125 F128A F128 F126A F126 Spirulina, 1 lb Spirulina, 5 lbs Earthworm, 1 lb Earthworm, 5 lbs Brine Shrimp, 1 lb Brine Shrimp, 5 lbs $ 15.95 69.25 15.95 69.25 15.95 69.25
10526
10525

f125A
f128A
f126A
f125A
138
Feed
Freeze-Dried
Freeze-Dried Foods
Plankton (Euphausia pacifica) contains the highest natural source of protein and omega-3 fatty acids essential for health and growth. Minimum level of protein is 70%, approximate size is 12 mm long and 2 mm wide. Krill (Euphausia superba) contains 60% protein, has high levels of omega-3 fatty acids and is very rich in astaxanthin (a carotenoid pigment that improves flesh and external fish coloration). Brine Shrimp ( Artemia salina) is an excellent protein source (minimum 56%) and is readily digestible. Tubifex Worms are processed to ensure they are free from contamination and pathogens. Oxygen absorbing packet included. SB124 SB950 SB134 SB850 SB113 SB154 SB142 SB675 Plankton, 4 oz Plankton, 1 kg Krill, 4 oz Krill, 1 kg Brine Shrimp, 3 oz Tubifex Worms, 4 oz Blood Worms, 1.75 oz Blood Worms, 1 kg $ 14.35 71.60 14.35 71.60 14.30 14.90 12.25 116.60 13.63/6+ 68.02/4+ 13.63/6+ 68.02/4+ 13.81/6+ 14.16/6+ 11.64/6+ 110.83/2+
Lookdown (Selene vomer ).
SB124
SB134
SB113
SB154
SB142
BIO-PURE Freeze-Dried Food

Excellent for many species of fish, Hikari foods benefit from a pharmaceutical grade freeze-drying technique that preserves the nutrition and palatability commonly lost in freeze-dried foods. Enriched with vitamins and free of parasites and bacteria.
SeaVeggies Clips
This unique plastic clip is used to securely hold marine algae, spinach or other leafy foods for herbivorous fish. The large suction cup attaches the clip easily and holds firmly to aquarium glass. Unlike other clips, it has no metal parts and fl oats if it becomes detached from the tank wall. SVC $ 2.05
33201
Blood Worms, .42 oz
$ 5.25 4.73
Each
6+
1 oz (dry) = 28.4 grams 1 gram = .035 ounce
SVC shown holding a piece of seaweed (SV100).
The quality, accuracy, and speedy turnaround of my question was outstanding. I believe you are EST, which makes business hours for PST customers difficult. Even though I did not get the answer the same day, it was waiting for me the next morning when I got in. The follow-up help was very quick and precise. I will definitely use your website in the future for the fish tank that decorates my office. It's nice to know that the answers to my questions are only a click away.
Crystal Lynn
Regional Account Manager Registered Representative Life, Health & Disability Insurance
Milletseed Butterflyfish (Chaetodon miliaris).
Koi/Goldfish
Feed
139
Saki-Hikari Koi and Goldfish Food

Koi
Choose from three kinds of professional koi food specifically designed for show-grade competition koi. Each contains a unique, benefi cial set of bacteria that protects against infection, improves digestion and reduces waste up to 40%. Color-Enhancing diet has pure-cultured Spirulina and high levels of zeaxanthin to promote bright red areas on koi without affecting the color of white areas. Growth diet has a mix of fats and nutrional components to help koi grow to competition size. Multi-Season diet is made up of easily digested ingredients, including wheat-germ kernel, for steady growth even when water temperatures are cooler (below 58F/15C). All Saki-Hikari koi food will float.
AES Baby Koi Starter Kit

We get numerous calls regarding what to feed newly hatched baby koi. We asked our resident expert for his custom blends and put together a group of foods designed to help babies fl ourish during the critical period. The kit contains enough food to grow approximately 1,000 fish up to 2" in size. Detailed instructions and secrets included. You will need a small aquarium air pump for the live food portion. 6339 $ 71.00
Goldfish
Saki-Hikari Fancy Goldfish Color-Enhancing diet gives you the same great color separation as above, but in a formula especially for goldfish! Also promotes improved growth while offering superior stress reduction and high immunity to infectious disease. 42204 42208 42284 42288 42364 42368 42553 Color-Enhancing, 4.4 lbs Color-Enhancing, 33 lbs Growth, 4.4 lbs Growth, 33 lbs Multi-Season, 4.4 lbs Multi-Season, 33 lbs Fancy Goldfish, 7 oz $ 49.56 259.58 47.01 227.97 55.74 286.21 14.30
42364 42204 42284 42553
Koi Foods
We believe Hikari is one of the best names in the business. Koi have been eating Hikari for over 100 years! We buy direct to give you the freshest food at the best price. Made in Japan. Wheat germ is 30% protein. Staple: Good for all-around general feeding. Includes all the premium nutrition your goldfish or koi need to grow strong. 35% protein. Excel: A specially prepared, floating color enhancer. A mixture of highly nutritious wheat germ and pure cultured Spirulina. 35% protein. Hi-Growth: Promotes fast and healthy koi growth. Floating. 34% protein. Gold: A daily diet developed to meet the nutritional needs of koi while providing outstanding color enhancement. 40% protein. Spirulina: A superior color-enhancing formula. 35% protein. Economy: A basic, well-balanced, nutritional diet high in vitamin C. 32% protein. Wheat Germ: Great choice for the cooler months. Helps prevent indigestion and improves resistance to stress and disease. Floating pellets are high in vitamins C and E and will not cloud water. 32% protein, 4% fat, 4% fiber. HK242 HK11 HK282 HK289 HK12 HK1 HK13 HK14 HK489 HK8 HK634 HK16 HK10 HK17 HK9 HK3 HK4 HK5 HK224 HK228 HK6 HK234 HK7 HK244 HK15 HK248 HK732 HK18 Staple, 17.6 oz Staple, 4.4 lbs Staple, 11 lbs Staple, 22 lbs Staple, 4.4 lbs Staple, 22 lbs Staple, 4.4 lbs Staple, 11 lbs Staple, 22 lbs Wheat Germ, 5 lbs Wheat Germ, 17.6 oz Wheat Germ, 4.4 lbs Wheat Germ, 11 lbs Wheat Germ, 11 lbs Wheat Germ, 33 lbs Excel, 11 lbs Hi-Growth, 4.4 lbs Economy, 8.8 lbs Gold, 17.6 oz Gold, 11 lbs Gold, 22 lbs Gold, 17.6 oz Gold, 22 lbs Gold, 17.6 oz Gold, 11 lbs Gold, 22 lbs Spirulina, 17.6 oz Spirulina, 11 lbs
Pellet Size
1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
3/16" 3/16" 5/16" 5/16" 5/16" 1/8" 3/16" 3/16" 3/16" 5/16" 5/16" 3/16" 5/16" 5/16" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 3/16" 3/16" 5/16" 5/16" 5/16" 1/8" 5/16"
$ 7.75 28.76 61.88 102.75 28.76 102.75 28.76 61.88 102.75 30.47 9.83 30.99 80.34 71.92 163.28 143.52 38.53 40.04 11.91 98.28 164.32 11.75 164.32 11.91 98.44 164.32 14.35 102.75
Each
27.03 58.17 96.59 27.03 96.59 27.03 58.17 96.59 28.64 29.13 75.52 67.60 153.48 134.90 36.22 37.64 92.38 154.46 154.46 92.53 154.75 96.59
4+
140
Pond and Water Garden

Building the Perfect Pond
AES Koi Pond

AES has all of the products you need to keep your water clean and safe for your fish. Our example pond shows some products in action. They are:
Commercial Filtration Packages

These prepackaged filtration systems are perfect for koi ponds and water gardens because they make a great life support system. Each provides mechanical and biological filtration as well as UV sterilization for crystal clear water. Package features include:

Salt water compatibility for each component. AquaDyne bead filter for mechanical and biological filtration. Emperor Aquatics UV sterilizer mounted vertically for easy lamp replacement. Energy-efficient centrifugal pump with strainer basket.
Components are properly sizedno guesswork needed! The equipment is premounted on a plastic base plate, which gives it a small footprint. No hassle installation; simply plumb the inlet, outlet and backwash. All packages are 115V/60 Hz with UL-listed components. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Small Pond Aeration Systems

Each system is complete with a UL-listed compressor, appropriate couplings, valves (on larger system), self-weighted tubing (dark blue for low visibility) and diffuser(s). All-weather linear compressors deliver air via self-weighted tubing to the ALP4 small pond diffuser. Just plug into a 115V power source. Two sizes of complete systems are available. The small system will provide oxygen for up to 100 lbs of fish (when diffuser is at a 48" water depth; less fish weight at a shallower depth) and circulate water in ponds of up to 8,000 gallons while using only 50 watts! The large system will handle up to 200 lbs of fish (when diffuser is at a 48" water depth; less fish weight at a shallower depth) and circulate water in ponds of up to 16,000 gallons while using only 90 watts! They are easy to install and come
Skimmer Filter
This heavy, molded plastic polymer pond skimmer has a large, internal leaf basket to trap large floating debris before it settles. Its integrated filter mat with removable frame provides finer filtration. This skimmer also permits single or dual 25-watt UV clarifiers (optional) for exceptional water clarity. The structure resists warping, will not bend and is big enough for large submersible pumps. A thick, nonskid cover has security lock-nuts. A unique one-click locking weir allows isolation of the pump for cleaning and winterization. Faceplates are required (sold separately); order size by pump or pond size. Pumps are not included. Five-year warranty.
Pond and Water Garden

Building the Perfect Pond
141
Vibratory Feeders by Aquatic Eco-Systems

Benefit from highly accurate feeding rates and times with these vibratory feeders from AES. They easily handle almost all different feed types (even extremely fine and moist feeds) and they are resistant to clogging from even the oiliest feeds. Perfect for applications where multiple accurate feedings per day would otherwise require a lot of manpower, such as in a hatchery. One-year warranty.
Living Pond Filters

equipped with tubing, 25' for the small and 50' for the large system. Compressors and air diffusers have a two-year warranty. Use poly tubing to pipe air up to 1,000' from the compressor (in place of running electricity to the pond). These pond filters have a built-in settling chamber with a bottom drain for easy cleaning. The large 3-cu.ft. filter chamber is filled with Springflo biofilter media (included) that provides 180 sq.ft. of surface area for biofiltration. A top filter mat polishes the water before it is gravity-fed back into the pond. The Waterfall model has a 22" wide weir that creates a waterfall or stream. The Versatile model has a 2" FNPT outlet that can be attached to a pipe or tubing for direct pond discharge or interconnected for other applications. Sturdy injection-molded housing will not warp, bend or collapse. Both filters have 2" FNPT inlets, 11/2" bottom drains. For ponds with heavy debris or fish loads, one unit per 3,500 gallons is recommended. Maximum flowrate is 140 gpm. Measures 22" in diameter x 301/2" high. Five-year warranty.
Vacuum Bottom Drain

This unique vacuum drain removes debris that settles at the lowest point in the pond. It can be retrofitted into existing ponds with ease, requiring no excavation. Connects to a pump or skimmer filter via 2" PVC or 2" swimming pool flex hose (not included).
142
Feed
Koi
AES Exclusive
Koi Food, Slow-Sinking
Koi Foods by Zeigler

Nutritionally complete diets for koi and goldfish that float. Marine proteins increase palatability, digestibility and reduce waste. Nutrient-dense pellets contain stable vitamin C and brewer's yeast for healthy gill, fin and tissue development. Koi Fancier is formulated for color enhancing, Koi Grower is formulated for promoting both color and maximum growth of smaller fish. K102 Pond Fancier with wheat germ is nutrientK104 dense for all pond fish and is the choice for koi during colder weather. Nitrogen flushed to preserve freshness. All contain Vpak additives to increase your koi's resistance to disease. K100 K106 K102 K107 K104 K108 Koi Fancier, 5 mm, 5 lbs Koi Fancier, 5 mm, 33 lbs Koi Grower, 3 mm, 5 lbs Koi Grower, 3 mm, 33 lbs Pond Fancier, 5 mm, 5 lbs Pond Fancier, 5 mm, 33 lbs $ 14.70 71.40 18.38 81.90 14.44 52.50
Each
Now you can feed your koi the way they naturally feed using this slow-sinking koi food, available only from Aquatic Eco-Systems. This koi food contains high-quality ingredients and is great for everyday use. Convenient 5-lb odorless, Mylar, Ziploc bags can be kept fresh by freezing until needed, so buy in quantity for a discount. Natural Choice koi food contains a minimum of 36% protein, minimum of 5% fat and maximum of 4% crude fiber. Made in USA. Bag contains oxygen-absorbing packet to maximize freshness. ZBS5 ZBS20 5 lbs (2.3 kg) 20 lbs (9 kg) $ 25.97 63.33
Each
23.37/4+ 60.17/2+
K100
ZBS20
13.97/4+ 67.83/2+ 17.55/4+ 77.81/2+ 13.70/4+ 49.88/2+
Blackwater Max Color Koi Food

Now your fish can have the best chance at fast growth and superb color. We've negotiated a deal with one of America's top koi farms to offer this custom blend to you. It's loaded with krill, Spirulina, extra vitamins, minerals and other ocean products.
Yummy Treats
Floating treats made with fresh ingredients and super food pellets to enhance growth and color. Contain shrimp (krill), carrots, broccoli, green peppers, bloodworms and apples. A great way to encourage hand feeding and a fine source of nutrition for your koi. KOIYUM $ 12.95
Simply giving this food to your fish for 610 weeks will help them become their best. Content: 38% protein, 6% fat. Great for other ornamental fish varieties as well! 5- and 10-lb bags are packaged in stay-fresh, resealable bags. Use spring through fall. 3-mm floating pellets suitable for fish over 5". BW251 BW252 BW253 BW254 5 lbs 10 lbs 20 lbs 40 lbs $ 16.60 28.75 55.45 85.10
Each
14.93/4+ 25.88/4+ 52.68/2+ 80.85/2+
BW251
Medicated Koi/Goldfish Food CHEMICAL Waiver Form Required

This food contains all the nutrients needed to help ornamental fish heal quickly. Contains four antibiotics and may help heal ulcers. Available in 1-, 5- and 10-lb bags. Must be fed continuously for 10 days. For use on ornamental and nonfood fish not intended for human consumption. Chemical waiver form required. 3-mm sinking pellet. 6441 6445 6449 1 lb 5 lbs 10 lbs $ 12.90 34.80 51.07
Blackwater Max Growth Koi Food

Now you can feed your koi the same diet the professionals do. Food is 38% protein, 6% fat and fishmeal-based. Available in medium (3 mm) and large (4 mm) floating pellets. 5- and 10-lb sizes are packaged in a resealable, stay-fresh foil bag. Use for other ornamental fish as well. BW255 BW256 BW257 BW258 BW41 BW42 BW43 BW44 5 lbs, 3 mm 10 lbs, 3 mm 20 lbs, 3 mm 40 lbs, 3 mm 5 lbs, 4 mm* 10 lbs, 4 mm* 20 lbs, 4 mm* 40 lbs, 4 mm* $ 14.70 26.65 46.65 85.10 14.70 26.55 46.65 85.10
Each
6441
13.23/4+ 23.99/4+ 44.32/2+ 80.85/2+ 13.23/4+ 23.99/4+ 44.32/2+ 80.85T/2+

BW256
*Note: Expands to 8 mm.
Blackwater GOLD-N Professional Koi and Goldfish Food

Bring your fish into top condition.
Serious koi collections deserve serious koi food. Blackwater GOLD-N was developed to improve nutrient uptake, therefore increasing growth and luster. This diet combines the best ingredients fishmeal, seaweed and wheat flourwith many other specialized ingredients, including beneficial bacteria to aid digestion. Made fresh in the USA. 40% protein, 10% fat.
BWG88
BWCS5
Blackwater Cool Season

In cooler temperatures a fish's metabolism slows, making digestion more difficult. Cool Season is a wheat germ-based formula blended to be easily digested when water temperature below 60F (16C). Use all year long if you want. Feed in the spring to help prevent "egg-bound" females. 32% protein, 4% fat, 4% fiber. 3-mm floating pellets. BWCS5 BWCS40 5 lbs 40 lbs $ 26.25 112.50 23.63/4+ 106.88/2+
BWG88 BWG40
8.8 lbs 40 lbs
$ 55.50 167.00
Koi/Culture/Maturation
Feed
143
Ultra Balance Premium All-Season Koi Food

An all-natural diet that gives your koi everything they need to stay healthy and colorful! Formulated for water temperatures 64F (18C) and above, this koi food is packed with digestible protein, vitamins, minerals and essential amino acids to maximize growth and vitality. It even includes stabilized vitamin C to help your koi's immune system. And it's made entirely in the USA without artificial colors or dyes. The extruded floating pellets help maintain water clarity and are available in medium (4.5 mmrecommended for fish 12" & under) and large (6.5 mmrecommended for fish over 12") sizes. Guaranteed analysis: 35% min protein, 4% min fat, 5% max fiber, 9.5% ash, 1.75% min calcium (2.14% max), min 1.32% min phosphorous; max .19% sodium. SM452 SM454 SM455 SM457 SM552 SM553 SM554 Med. Med. Med. Med. Large Large Large
Pellet Size
Pond Maturation Diet and Supplement by Zeigler

Get stronger, healthier broodstock and improved spawn size with Pond Maturation Diet. Superior quality ingredients to provide a complement of prime marine proteins and oils that are palatable to shrimp. Aids in female gonad development and dramatically reduces time to initial spawn. 2.4-mm pellets sold in 55-lb bag. Guaranteed analysis: 43% min protein, 12% min fat, 2.5% max fiber, 12% max moisture, 11% max ash. Shrimp Maturation Supplement helps eliminate the normal lag time between ablation and initial ovary maturation in female Penaeid shrimp. High-quality ingredients such as marine proteins and oils meet the dietary needs of broodstock. Get larger spawns and increased mating in maturation tanks, while the rapid growth allows increased generations. Use with automatic feeders to optimize growth and production. Contains Vpak to enhance disease resistance. 2.4-mm pellets sold in 20-lb bag. Guaranteed analysis: 40% min protein, 9% min fat, 3.5% max fiber, 12% max moisture, 10.5% max ash. SHRMP55 SHRMPSUP Pond Maturation Diet Shrimp Maturation Supplement $ 99.46 205.80
20 oz 5 lbs 22 lbs 40 lbs 5 lbs 22 lbs 50 lbs
Wt
$11.95 28.88 71.25 110.00 28.88 71.00 125.70
Each
26.57/4+ 65.55/2+ 101.20/2+ 26.57/4+ 65.32/2+ 115.64/2+
SM454 ShRMP55
ShRMPSUP
Ultra Balance Premium Wheat Germ Koi Food

Give your mature koi what they need to stay healthy and colorful year round! Formulated for water temperatures 41F (5C) and above, this koi food includes natural color enhancers and essential amino acids, vitamins and minerals to help your koi thriveeven in the cold season. And it's made entirely in the USA without artificial colors or dyes. The extruded floating pellets help maintain water clarity and are available in medium (4.5 mmrecommended for fish 12" & under) and large (6.5 mmrecommended for fish over 12") sizes. Guaranteed analysis: 30% min protein, 4% min fat, 5% max fiber, 9.5% ash, 1.60% min calcium (1.96% max), min 1.24% min phosphorous; max .17% sodium. SM652 SM654 SM655 SM656
Pellet Size
Finfish Starter Food and Treatment by Zeigler

Finfish Starter Food is a slow-sinking diet with the higher vitamin levels required for early development. It has a great emphasis on marine ingredient sources for increased digestibility and energy utilization. Carotenoid pigments enhance growth in early stages. Low nitrogen and phosphorous levels reduce nutrient discharge in effluent. Meets FDA requirements regarding restrictions on mammalian protein sources (ZM1ZC4 = 55% min; ZP1ZP3 = 50% min). Contains Vpak to improve survivability. Oxygen-absorbing packet included. Guaranteed analysis: 15% min fat, 2% max fiber, 12% max moisture, 8% max ash.
SM654
Med. Med. Med. Med
20 oz 5 lbs 22 lbs 50 lbs
Wt
$11.95 29.88 74.00 130.54
Each
27.49/4+ 68.08/2+ 120.10/2+
Dense Culture Food

Tanks Raceways Cages
We offer four styles of dense culture food. Each one contains fishmeal, poultry meal, blood meal and fish oil. Each can be fed to a wide variety of fish including catfish, tilapia, trout, salmon, hybrid striped bass and other cold and warmwater species. F2A is a 43% protein sinking crumble, which is an excellent starter feed for juveniles. F2C is a 40% protein, 1/8 3/16" fl oating pellet that works well for sub-adult fish in tanks or ponds. F2E is the same formulation as F2C but is a 1/4" floating pellet. F2G is a 3/16" floating pellet with 36% protein and a better choice for pond fish and larger tilapia. All of the dense culture foods are made by the extrusion method. The extrusion method improves digestibility with less protein degradation. Ascorbic acid (a stabilized form of vitamin C) is added to all of our dense culture feeds. Keep in mind that pellet sizes can vary by as much as 1/16". If you are unsure of the right size, order smaller rather than larger. Contains oxygen-absorbing packet to maximize freshness. F2A F2B F2C F2D F2G F2H F2E F2F 5 lbs 50 lbs 5 lbs 50 lbs 5 lbs 50 lbs 5 lbs 50 lbs
Protein
EZ Bio is a biological aquaculture treatment for hatcheries that combats pathogenic bacteria. This environmentally friendly formula is an easy way to improve your fishs health and make them more stress-resistant. 5-gram scoop of quick-dissolving powder treats up to 3 metric tons. 400-g bag. ZM1 ZM2 ZC1 ZC2 ZC3 ZC4 ZP1 ZP2 ZP3 EZB400 5 lbs 44 lbs 5 lbs 44 lbs 5 lbs 44 lbs 5 lbs 44 lbs 44 lbs EZ Bio Meal Meal #1 Crumble #1 Crumble #2 Crumble #2 Crumble Pellet, Slow Sinking Pellet, Slow Sinking Pellet, Slow Sinking .4.6 mm .4.6 mm .6.85 mm .6.85 mm .851.2 mm .851.2 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm
diameter
$ 12.85 82.00 12.85 82.00 12.85 82.00 12.85 57.00 57.00 28.48
Each
12.21/4+ 77.90/2+ 12.21/4+ 77.90/2+ 12.21/4+ 77.90/2+ 12.21/4+ 54.15/2+ 54.15/2+
ZM1
43% 43% 40% 40% 36% 36% 40% 40%
Pellet Size
Crumble Crumble 1/8 3/16" 1/8 3/16" 3/16" 3/16" 1/4" 1/4"
feed type
Sinking Sinking Floating Floating Floating Floating Floating Floating
$ 14.67 82.13 14.02 71.93 13.03 53.38 14.13 72.27
Each
12.22/4+ 73.92/2+ 11.50/4+ 64.74/2+ 11.04/4+ 48.05/2+ 11.64/4+ 65.05/2+
ZC1
EZB400
ZP1
144
Feeders
Scatter/Directional/Hanging
Scatter Feeder
This scatter feeder is widely used by state and federal wildlife departments because of its versatility, quality construction and unsurpassed performance. It features 20-gauge galvanized steel, weather-tight construction throughout and side rain channels that divert water away from the power control. Positive latching system keeps lid secure and a sight glass shows feed level reference. The digital power control unit/timer provides up to 8 feed times per day, each one adjustable from 1 to 90 seconds. The mounting bracket allows for easy feed circle adjustment and can disperse 1/8"1/2" pellets up to 60' away, 360 around the feeder. Feeder includes stub legs and angle braces. Uses a 12V battery (sold separately). Ships via motor freight. Four-year warranty. 400D
floating feed Capacity
Directional Pond Feeders

These free-standing feeders handle pellets 3/16" and up. Made of 22-gauge galvanized steel that is also available painted. Standard models include flared legs and angle braces for mounting on shore. They dispense feed up to 45' away in a band about 20' wide without dropping feed within 5' of the feeder. Capable of feeding up to 24 times per day with the built-in digital timer. Feeder "on" time is adjustable between 159 sec. A push button is included for manual feeding. Dock leg models are designed to be mounted to a dock. Feeders are 12V; rechargeable battery included. We recommend a solar charger (SX12 or SX12G) to handle the high power requirements. Made in USA. Three-year warranty. SF10 SF10G SF13 SF13G SF17 SF17G SF10LD SF10GLD SX12 SX12G 1808 Galvanized, Standard Hunter Green, Standard Galvanized Hunter Green Galvanized Hunter Green Galvanized w/Dock Legs Hunter Green w/Dock Legs Solar Charger, Galvanized Solar Charger, Hunter Green 6/12V Battery Charger
feed Wt (lbs)
200 lbs
53" x 60"
24"
footprint
height
68"
Ship Wt
110 lbs
$ 557
100 100 300 300 500 500 100 100
Ship Wt (lbs)
60' 48"
84 84 126 126 215 215 19 19 6 6 1
$ 700 750 800 875 1,000 1,100 700 750 130 130 20
18" 5'
68"
45'
15"
33" 20'
Sf10Ld
60"
SX12G
Batteries/Chargers
1807-6 1807-12 1808 1810 6V Solar Panel, 1 watt 12V Solar Panel, 1 watt 6/12V Battery Charger 12V/7A Gel Cell Rechargeable Battery $ 39 45 20 28
1808
35"
Three-year warranty on batteries and chargers.
Hanging Feeder
These hanging feeders are designed to scatter feed as small as #2 (1 mm) trout starter and as big as 3/8" pellets. Feeds up to 24 times per day; "on" time is adjustable between 150 seconds. Feed is scattered in a circle (the higher you mount it, the larger the circle) up to 60'. By adding homemade baffles you can block any part of the circle. Feeder is 12V and includes a rechargeable battery, hanging bracket, sight gauge, digital timer, reverse-battery hook-up protectors and a lockable lid. 15" x 15" x 24" high, holds 100 lbs of 1/4" pellets. Made in USA. Three-year warranty. SF3 SF3S SX12 Galvanized Stainless Solar Charger, 12V $ 450 1,000 130
60'
1807-12
1807-6
1810
Feeder Timer
The AquaPro digital timer is designed to be used as an upgrade or replacement. It can be used to control any 6V- or 12V-operated Stren feeder where the feeder battery powers this controller. It can be programmed for up to 6 daily feed times, each feed time adjustable from 1 to 90 seconds. Easy-to-read LCD display has auto shut-off and 100% solid state electronics. Weatherproof. One-year warranty on timer. 18612 $ 54.00 48.60/3+
Sf3
Programmable/Tech Talk
Feeders
145
Fish Sitter Auto Feeder

This handy UL-listed, clamp-on, automatic feeder draws only 2.7 W (that's less than $2 a year) and can feed 1 to 4 times daily. It can feed up to 4 months when feeding once per day. Includes a clear polycarbonate hopper which will hold up to 30 grams of flake feed (.25 g per feeding) or 100 grams of crumbled pellets (.85 g per feeding). It will mount on a tank or stand up to 7/8" thick. 115V/60 Hz only. Includes 51/2' power cord. Measures 61/2" x 41/2" x 41/2". Made in USA. One-year warranty. AF2 $ 61.90 56.66/4+
Fish Mate Fish Feeder

This small aquarium feeder serves up to 14 meals. It features an easy-to-use, 24-hour timer that provides 14 meals per day and slowly dispenses food over a 2-hour period to prevent overfeeding. Operates well in high humidity thanks to air line hookup (air line not included). Includes suction cups, mounting brackets. One AA battery required (not included). AF7 $ 28.00 25.20/4+
Programmable Feeder
The Aqua Chef will automatically feed your fish up to three times per day. It has a manual override button for immediate feeding and a programmable digital timer with a large display. Its patented design keeps moisture from spoiling the feed while also mixing and crumbling at each feeding. Dispenses fl ake, pellets and crumble. Hopper measures 2" deep x 3" dia. and is .25 liter in volume. Includes a mounting bracket, double-sided tape and two AA batteries. Weighs .4 lb. One-year warranty. C8024 $ 24.75 23.02/4+

Ekomixo Feeder
Battery-powered fish feeder has three different feeding programs and ten different dose settings. An antidrip system prevents humidity from entering the hopper, and a special mixing vibrator prevents food from clumping. The hopper holds approximately 90 mL of food and can connect to any small air pump to ventilate for dry, crisp food. Feeder must sit on tank hood as no mounting clips are included. Requires 2 AA batteries (not included). Measures 6" x 3" x 3", six-month warranty.
Tech Talk 21
Hand vs Automatic Feeding
Hand or automatic feeding which is better?
Automatic feeders save time. All business people know time is money. Most fish farmers are in short supply of both. The manual labor involved in feeding your fish every day by hand may seem small but over the period of a year can easily equate to thousands of dollars in man-hours. For example, an operation with 10 tanks, feeding 3 times a day for 3 minutes per tank, at $7 an hour will cost you $10.50 per day in manual labor. (# of Tanks) x (# Feedings/Day) x (Min/Tank) x (Cost/Hr) = Cost/Day
HF1201
$ 46.54
43.75/4+
Automatic feeders require only a minimal amount of manual labor, including weekly filling of the hopper and resetting feeding rates (and recharging batteries if not tied into a central power source). An estimate for this maintenance is 15 minutes per week/per feeder. That equals $2.80 a day in labor. Manual Labor $ 10.50/day 315.00/month 3,780.00/year Automatic Feeders $ 2.80/day 84.00/month 1,008.00/year Savings $ 7.70/day 231.00/month 2,772.00/year
Feeding Ring
Feed your fish, not the filters.
This small fl oating ring controls the dispersion of fish food within the pond or aquarium. Ring measures 9" diameter x 2" high and weighs 4 lbs. FR9 $ 4.40 3.61/4+
You can buy a lot of automatic feeders for $2,772!

Automatic feeders allow feedings to be tailored to the biological clock of each species. They are ideal for the multiple feedings required when raising fry. Implementing a schedule of several feedings spread throughout the day may help to cut down on size variance of the fish, improve feed conversion ratios and level the load on the biofilter.
146
Feeders
Belt/Koi
Most lt r be popula the in feeder with world ,000 0 over 10 ! sold
Belt Feeders
Now standard with stainless steel clocks!

Weather-resistant cover. Thick belts. Clear clock cover w/gasket.
These popular belt feeders are perfect for aquaculture! They slowly dispense almost any dry medication, chemical or feed over a 12- or 24-hour period. If shorter length or intermittent feeding is desired, the conveyor belt can be pulled back halfway or feed can be spaced on the belt. These feeders will reduce labor costs and improve growth rates. No electric power is required! Housed in a weatherproof case and powered by a spring-wound clock mechanism. The Baby Belt Feeder holds 5 lbs of feed and the Belt Feeder holds 10 lbs. These BFS versions feature corrosion-resistant clocks. All clocks are extremely durable and are made in Germany. The stainless steel replacement spring fits all models shown here. Setting the feeders is as easy as lifting the lid, pulling back the belt and loading the feed. Repair parts are available and repairs can be made easily on site. Feeders have one-year warranty. Baby Belt Feeder is 217/8" x 111/2" x 6". Belt Feeder is 277/8" x 15" x 6". Size of clock is included in widths shown. BFS12A BFS12 BFS12RC BFS24A BFS24 BFS24RC 4350SS 4420 4430 4398 4399
BFS24
BFS12
12-hr Baby Belt Feeder 6 lbs 12-hr Belt Feeder 8 lbs 12-hr Replacement Clock 1 lb 24-hr Baby Belt Feeder 6 lbs 24-hr Belt Feeder 8 lbs 24-hr Replacement Clock 1 lb Replacement Mainspring Clear Clock Cover Black Mainspring Cover Baby Belt Kit Large Belt Kit
Ship Wt
$ 209.25 156.94/10+ 230.77 196.15/10+ 81.82 74.70/15+ 219.25 197.96/10+ 242.99 218.69/10+ 89.24 76.69/15+ 11.44 10.01/15+ 10.32 9.29/10+ 10.32 9.29/10+ 61.33 53.66/10+ 67.14 58.75/10+
Belt kits are assembled and include belt, shaft, bracket and wipers.
Pond Feeder
Once-a-day feeder for small ponds.
Flake food or pellets are dispensed slowly over several hours each day (adjustable quantity and feeding time). This feeder can hold close to 2 cups (approximately 200 grams) of food. Fully weatherproof, it can be mounted on a pole by the edge of the water or suspended over the water. One AA battery (included) required for quartz-timed motor. Measures 63/4" x 33/4" x 71/4". Three-year warranty. PF21 $ 45.75 42.05/4+
Cuban Hogfish (Bodianus pulchellus)
Look online at AquaticEco.com to learn more about feeders.
Digital/Vibratory
Feeders
147
Digital Timer, Controller, Adapter

Features up to 24 feedings per 24 hours with a feeder "on" time of 159 seconds. The maximum output current is 10 amps, so each timer can control up to thirteen vibratory feeders without the need for an external relay. The SF41 12V digital timer must be used with the SF40. One controller is required for each feeder on the circuit. Three-year warranty.
Vibratory Feeders by Aquatic Eco-Systems

Benefit from highly accurate feeding rates and times with these vibratory feeders from AES. They easily handle almost all different feed types (even extremely fine and moist feeds) and they are resistant to clogging from even the oiliest feeds. Perfect for applications where multiple accurate feedings per day would otherwise require a lot of manpower, such as in a hatchery. For each feeder, use a 12VDC adapter such as the SF50 for 115VAC operation. You will also need a timer. We suggest either SF44 for 115V, SF41 for 12V or 18612 for 6V. One timer can be used for up to 13 feeders (all connected feeders will feed at once). One-year warranty. AVF6 AVF7 AVF8 AVF6RP AVF7RP AVF8RP

SF40 Controller
Allows the SF41 12V timer to operate with 115V power. Maximum power output is 15A/115V.
SF44 Adapter/Timer Kit

Combines the SF41 12V timer with the SF40 controller for 115V operation. Operate up to 13 feeders (more with relay). Use one adapter (SF50) for each feeder on the circuit. SF50 SF62 SF40 SF41 SF44

12VDC Adapter for 115VAC Speed Controller for 12VDC 115V Controller Only 12V Timer Only 115V Controller w/SF41, Timer
Ship Wt
$ 34.00 100.00 125.00 175.00 337.00
30.91/4+ 90.00/4+ 112.50/4+ 157.50/4+ 303.30/4+
.5 liter 51/2" x 9" 31/8" 1.75 liters 71/2" x 12" 51/4" 3 liters 9" x 123/4" 61/4" Repl. Vibratory Motor and Plate for AVF6 Repl. Vibratory Motor and Plate for AVF7 Repl. Vibratory Motor and Plate for AVF8
avf7
W x H
Lid
$ 89.00 145.00 175.00 38.64 47.10 54.15
Each
80.10 130.50 157.50 34.78 42.39 48.74
4+
avf8 avf6
sf44
sf50
Feeder Controllers
Invented Here
For single or multiple feeders. Easy to use, preassembled, extremely economical. These lightweight feeder controllers feature a reliable timer. Available in two models, each designed to handle:
Typical Installation for Vibratory Feeders

6/12V Operation
The SF41 timer can operate up to thirteen feeders without adding an external relay.
One to four FS4050 screw auger feeders. One to eight FS4059 screw auger feeders. One to eight vibratory feeders. One to eight FM4480 vibratory feeders.
One SF62 must be used with each feeder.
The controller is set to handle up to four feeders; however, the optional "Y" cable expands the capability to eight feeders (four "Y" cables would be required for eight feeders). The timer features safe 12V operation and is housed in a moistureresistant, ABS plastic case. Feeders connect to the feeder time controller with cables available in 2 wire lengths. No soldering or crimping, all components are interchangeable. Only one power supply is required for powering up to eight feeders. One-year warranty.
Basic
SF41 Timer SF62 Speed Controller
Features 8 feedings per 24 hours, adjustable from 2 to 59 seconds per feeding.
Deluxe
Up to 24 feedings per 24 hours, adjustable from 1 to 99 seconds per feeding. H1201 SF50 PA15 H1106 H1112 H1113
Ship Wt Each 4+
115V Operation
The SF44 controller/timer can operate up to thirteen feeders without adding an external relay.
Deluxe Feeder Controller 12VDC Adapter for 115V Power Supply, 12V Cable, 6' Cable, 12' "Y" Adapter
2 lbs 21 lbs
$ 419.00 34.00 39.95 8.95 11.60 8.15

h1201
400.53 30.91 36.62 6.96 11.02 7.52
h1101
SF44 Timer with Controller
An SF50 adapter must be used with each feeder.
148
Feeders
AES Services
AES Services
Call Center
Customer service is our first priority, so we have a team of customer service representatives and technicians to help you every step of the way. Whether you need help sizing a piece of equipment, troubleshooting a problem for an existing system or are starting from scratch and need some advice, we welcome your call! Because we understand the nature of aquatic life and how time sensitive some situations can be, we ship most orders the same day. If you live in the central Florida area, you can pick up an order at our walk-in counter as late as 4:30 PM EST MondayFriday. Our phones are open MondayThursday from 8 AM to 7 PM EST and Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM EST.
Repairs
Nothing lasts forever, but we both know that a little maintenance can often restore an expensive piece of equipment to like new performance. If you don't have the budget to buy replacements (and who does nowadays?), then put some of your hard-earned money into repairing what you've got. AES is fully certified as a YSI, LaMotte , Sweetwater and Kasco repair center. So whether it's a complex multiparameter meter, hard-working regenerative blower or constantly running fountain, just call 877-347-4788 to get the process started.
Tech Advice
Don't worry if you haven't got everything figured outwe're happy to give you some free advice on what might work best for you whichever way you prefer. You can call one of our technicians, chat with us live online or read one of our many Tech Talks found throughout this catalog. Our technicians have many years of experience across diverse fields and studies, so chances are we have just the expertise to help. Not only can we help with your equipment needs, but we can also assist with water quality and common health issues. From biology to engineering we have the experience you can rely on. At AES, we don't just sell equipment, we share the knowledge to make it work. Look for the Tech Favorites symbol [ TF ] to find our most trusted products.
Fountains
Besides adding a little aeration, a fountain may be just the spectacle to make neighbors take notice. Along with extensive experience improving thousands of lakes' health with aeration, we are skilled at enhancing the beauty of lakes with remarkable fountains. You don't have to choose from just one line; we carry many different fountains in the catalog and online. You can select the spray pattern, features, size and price that best suit your needs. Check out our Onshore fountain system, an AES exclusive. Run multiple fountains off one shore-mounted pump. This system circulates and aerates your body of water and, as a bonus, makes for easy maintenance.
AJ is ready to restore your meters to pristine condition.
International Design and Consulting

AES has provided integrated and comprehensive solutions for the entire aquaculture chain worldwide. Our talented staff of technicians is available for consultations on projects ranging from tilapia to shrimp. With our experience and vast inventory of equipment and supplies we can deliver the necessary components and expertise to help your project or business thrive.
Facebook & Twitter

Aquatic Eco-Systems is on Facebook and Twitter! Join us at Facebook.com/AES. AquaticEco and Twitter.com/AquaticEco for the latest company and product news, promotions and industry insights.
Join Us on
Desert Rain Onshore System running with 3 nozzles.
FOLLOW US ON TWITTER
@AquaticEco
Vibratory/Auger
Feeders
149
Feed Hoppers by Lucky Pond

Make your own feeder.
Available in four sizes, these high-quality polyethylene feed hoppers are extremely durable. They feature a unique three-point, twist-lock lid (included) that is wind and varmintproof. All have a 41/4" I.D. bottom opening. One-year warranty. FH22 FH44 FH88 FH132

Auger Feeder
These screw-style feeders are used throughout the world in commercial aquaculture facilities. They are very well built, durable and can be used both indoors and outdoors. Designed for highly accurate dispensing of feed, they feature a rheostat that can be set for both speed and duration. FS4050 includes a spreader plate with a rheostat adjustment for distance (to 8') and weighs 8 lbs. FS4059 weighs 5 lbs. Screw feeders are 12V and draw approximately .5 A. A power supply and time controller are needed but not included. One-year warranty. FS4022 FS4044 FS4088 FS4132 FS4222 FS4244 FS4288 FS4232 FS4059 FS4050 PA15 H1201 H1113

22 lbs (10 kg) 44 lbs (20 kg) 88 lbs (40 kg) 132 lbs (60 kg)
Capacity
17" 19" 27" 33"
12" 15" 19" 23"
41/4" 41/4" 41/4" 41/4"
Ship Wt
5 lb $ 115.00 7 lbs 138.70 10 lbs 178.33 30 lbs 210.42
Each
108.68 131.77 169.41 199.90
4+
A fh88 fh44
Feeder, 22 lbs (10 kg) 26" 10" 12" 21" $ 724.00 Feeder, 44 lbs (20 kg) 27" 12" 15" 21" 737.00 Feeder, 88 lbs (40 kg) 35" 15" 19" 30" 762.00 Feeder, 132 lbs (60 kg) 42" 19" 23" 36" 795.00 Feeder w/Spreader, 22 lbs 26" 10" 12" 21" 798.00 Feeder w/Spreader, 44 lbs 27" 12" 15" 21" 815.00 Feeder w/Spreader, 88 lbs 35" 15" 19" 30" 832.00 Feeder w/Spreader, 132 lbs 42" 19" 23" 36" 887.00 Auger Mechanism Only 624.00 Auger Mechanism w/Spreader Only 674.00 115V Adapter 40.00 Deluxe Feeder Controller 419.00 "Y" Adapter 8.15
Each
682.00 695.00 713.00 748.00 751.00 783.00 791.00 834.00 592.00 638.00 37.00 399.00 7.52
4+
C C
Vibratory Feeder
This 12V vibratory mechanism can be used with any of the Lucky Pond hoppers. It is fully adjustable for dispensing both dry and moist feeds (112 pellets) without clogging. Feeders are 12VDC and draw .5 A. A timer is required but not included. We suggest the H1101 or H1201 to operate one feeder and PA15 for 1 to 3 feeders. A 12V gel cell 1810 for up to 2 feeders or a 12V car/boat battery w/1808 charger is recommended. Each vibratory mechanism includes 3' of cable for timer. Weighs 1.7 lbs. One-year warranty. FM4422 FM4444 FM4488 FM4132 FM4480 PA15 H1201 H1113
B D FS4050 End View
Vibratory Feeder, 22 lbs (10 kg) 22" 10" 12" $ 361.67 325.50 Vibratory Feeder, 44 lbs (20 kg) 23" 12" 15" 398.33 358.50 Vibratory Feeder, 88 lbs (40 kg) 31" 15" 19" 438.33 394.50 Vibratory Feeder, 132 lbs (80 kg) 37" 19" 23" 467.08 420.37 Vibratory Mechanism Only 243.33 231.16 115V Adapter 40.00 37.00 Deluxe Feeder Controller 419.00 400.50 "Y" Adapter 8.15 7.52
Each
4+
Top View
FS4050 Auger with spreader.
fm4480
C B A pa15 FS4059 End View
FS4059
FM4480 shown with FM4422
See Page 150 for hanging suggestion.
h1101 or h1201
Small vibratory feeders (up to 8).

h1113 h1113 h1113 h1113
h1101 or h1201
Auger feeders with spreader (up to 4).
pa15 pa15 Large vibratory feeders (up to 8).

h1113 h1113 h1113 h1113
h1101 or h1201
h1101 or h1201
Auger feeders (up to 8).

h1113 h1113 h1113 h1113
pa15
pa15
150
Feeders
Insect/Demand/Instant Algae
Demand Feeders
Batteries not included ... or needed.
The unique twist-lock lid is wind and varmintproof on these high-quality, UV-resistant, polyethylene hoppers. All four sizes have the same pendulum demand feeding mechanism for #4 crumble to 1/4" pellets. One-year warranty. FH221 FH441 FH881 FH133 22 lbs (10 kg) 44 lbs (20 kg) 88 lbs (40 kg) 132 lbs (60 kg)
B
Instant Algae
Providing a cost-effective alternative to live algae can be the difference between profit and loss in a hatchery. Produced by Reed Mariculture, Instant Algae is a high quality, super-concentrated, liquid, marine microalgae feed for larval shrimp, fish and bivalves. It can be used to supplement or replace live algae in the hatchery. Instant Algae is 95100% as effective as live algae. Algae concentration is based on the density of the average live algae culture (i.e., one liter Premium 3600 is equal to 3,600 liters of an average algae culture). Weighs 3 lbs. Ships Next Day Air. PM36N Nannochloropsis Premium 3600 $ 70.00 PM18I Isochrysis Premium 1800 44.00 PM18P Pavlova Premium 1800 44.00 PM18T Thalassiosira Premium 1800 29.00 PM183 Shellfish Diet 1800* 44.00 *Shellfish diet is a mix of Isochrysis, Pavlova, Tetraselmis & Thalassiosira weissflogii.
23" 23" 23" 23"
12" 15" 19" 23"
17" 19" 27" 33"
Ship Wt
5 lb 7 lbs 10 lbs 30 lbs
$ 201.63 234.65 270.03 304.44
Each
189.53 220.57 253.83 286.17
4+
pM36N
FH441
pM18I
Feeder Hanging Suggestion

You can hang any of the molded polyethylene feeders (see photo above) by drilling 5/8" holes and using a length of 1/2" metal electrical conduit for a pivot rod.
Rigid Clear Tubing

Rigid tubing is ideal for microalgae and zooplankton culture tanks where aeration is required at the bottom of the tank. This is a thin-walled (only .020" to .030" thick), rigid, "straw-like" tube. Sold in 36" length. To extend length, use a piece of vinyl tubing as a coupler. 16005 16010 16015 16025 16035 16040 16045 16050
Length
Bug-O-Matic Fish Feeder

Flying insects are an excellent (and natural) source of fish food. This hanging insect attracter uses a "whip" to wound/kill the bugs, which then drop to the waiting fish. The fish quickly learn that this is a nighttime feeding station. A built-in photo cell will automatically turn the unit on at dusk and off at dawn. Hang it 68' above ponds, tanks, rivers, fish cages, etc. One-year warranty on unit, 90 days on bulb. 115V, 1 A, 60 Hz, 18" power cord. See Index for ground fault circuit interruptersalways recommended around water. Made in USA. BL BLR BLW Bug-O-Matic, 115V Bulb, Replacement Whip, Replacement $ 163.00 22.00 2.65
Each
36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36" 36"
1" 11/8"
3/16" 5/16" 3 / 8" 1/2" 5 / 8" 3/4"
O.D.
Fits Tubing
TP30 TV40 TV60 TP70 TV80 TV90 TV100 TV125
$ 2.75 2.85 2.95 3.85 5.30 6.65 7.15 7.70
Each
2.20 2.28 2.36 3.08 4.24 5.32 5.72 6.16
6+
1.93 2.00 2.07 2.70 3.71 4.66 5.01 5.39
24+
145.71 21.00 2.51
4+
BL
16045 16025 16015 16005
Algae/Accessories
Feeders
151
Polyester Mesh Bags

Bacteria Filters
Will filter air down to .3 microns. Autoclavable. Use for single species algal culture, bioassay work, experiments, etc. FL2 fits 6.35 mm through 9.5 mm tubing.

Pre-filters water. Zooplankton collector.
Ideal for collecting rotifers, Artemia, fish eggs and other small organisms, these polyester mesh bags are available in 18" and 31" (46 and 79 cm) lengths and a variety of mesh sizes. They can also be used for filtering particulate matter from tank inlets and overflows. Bag is equipped with a stainless steel ring 7" in diameter and a cotton handle. PMB1 PMB1L PMB2 PMB2L PMB3 PMB3L PMB4 PMB4L PMB5 PMB5L PMB6 PMB6L PMB7 PMB7L PMB8 PMB8L PMB9 PMB9L PMB10 PMB10L

FL2 MC14
Filter, 1/4 3/8" Hose Barb Check Valve
$ 8.80 8.95
Each
7.92 8.06
10+ fl2
75-micron x 18" 75-micron x 31" 100-micron x 18" 100-micron x 31" 125-micron x 18" 125-micron x 31" 150-micron x 18" 150-micron x 31" 200-micron x 18" 200-micron x 31" 250-micron x 18" 250-micron x 31" 300-micron x 18" 300-micron x 31" 400-micron x 18" 400-micron x 31" 800-micron x 18" 800-micron x 31" 1,500-micron x 18" 1,500-micron x 31"
$ 13.08 19.78 10.20 16.22 10.20 15.86 6.13 7.10 6.13 7.16 6.13 7.16 6.13 7.16 6.13 7.16 6.13 7.16 6.13 8.34
Each
11.77 17.80 9.18 14.60 9.18 14.27 5.52 6.44 5.52 6.44 5.52 6.44 5.52 6.44 5.52 6.44 5.52 6.44 5.52 7.50
4+
Marine Microalgae Disc Cultures

We offer several species of microalgae cultures on sterile agar in convenient petri dishes. They can survive over 6 months, eliminating the need to maintain liquid cultures. They are inexpensive to ship and extremely easy to use. Simply fill the petri dish with sterile salt water, cover and place the disc under moderate light for 12 to 24 hours. Algal cells can then be gently rubbed off the agar plate using a sterile cotton swab (LV4) and placed in 5002,000 ml of sterile, fertilized culture water. Store microalgae petri dish cultures in a cool (6075F), dark place and keep sealed until use. Weighs 4 oz. Ships Next Day Air.

MAD1 MAD2 MAD3
Nannochloropsis Tetraselmis Isochrysis
$ 15.66 15.66 15.66
Each
14.09 14.09 14.09

mad1
6+
Microalgae Density Measuring Stick

pmb1l
ProLine F/2 Algae Food
Based on the Secchi principle, this plastic stick helps to estimate algae density in seconds. Just lower the stick into the culture until the white circle disappears and use the depth reading to determine culture density with the chart that is provided. The chart includes conversions for Nannochloris, Chlorella, Isochrysis, Tetraselmis, Pyramimonas and Nannochloropsis. 13.5" long. MSM9 $ 11.85
or intensive algae culture in fresh or F marine water. itamin and mineral content ratios V equal to Guillard's 1975 F/2 formulation. Professional research concentration. Complete algae growth media.
239800
239802
Microalgae Grow Mass Packs

Save on shipping costs.
This commercial formulation of modified F/2 Guillard's formula is in a dry, powdered form for large-scale microalgae culture. The packs include major elements in powder form and minor trace elements, vitamins and minerals in liquid form. This stable wet/dry formulation assures long shelf life, yet is easily mixed. It can provide significant savings in shipping costs, as one box weighs 2.2 lbs and makes 2,645 gallons/ 10,000 liters. Commercially used in many shrimp and clam aquaculture facilities and public institutions. F2A7 includes silicate for diatom culture.

Larval fish, penaid shrimp, Artemia species, freshwater prawns, bivalve mollusks and other inverts require algae. Mass cultivation of algae requires a mixture of various vitamins and minerals for maximum algae growth. ProLine F/2 Algae Food provides these essentials in a complete, easy-to-use liquid form. When used as directed, allows fast growth rates and high densities to be achieved. One gallon each of solutions A & B will produce 7,680 gallons of growth media. For culturing diatomaceous organisms, sodium metasilicate must be added to the F/2 Formula.

f2a7
Air shipments require dry ingredients to be moistened with 100 mL of distilled water.
239800 239801 239802 239803 239804
F/2, Part A, 1 gallon F/2, Part B, 1 gallon F/2, Part A, 5 gallons F/2, Part B, 5 gallons Sodium Metasilicate, 1 kg
Ship Wt
10 lbs 10 lbs 52 lbs 52 lbs 2.5 lbs
$ 24.95 24.95 88.95 88.95 12.30
Each
23.70 23.70 84.49 84.49
4+
F2A6 F2A7
Without Silicate With Silicate
$ 15.98 16.66
Each
10.39 10.87
10+
8.79 9.16
20+
7.99 8.36
40+
100+
7.19 7.50
F/2 Algal Formula

This complete algal formula is an enhanced Guillard's F/2 nutrient media and is formulated for the commercial culture of microalgae and diatoms. Pro-Culture F/2 Algal Formula is properly preserved and stabilized to ensure potency. Concentrated liquid form eliminates the need for purchasing bulk chemicals. Formula is composed of a two-part solution, preventing decomposition of vitamins and precipitation of trace elements. The shelf life exceeds two years. One gallon each of solutions A and B will make 7,680 gallons of culture water. For culturing diatomaceous organisms, sodium metasilicate must be added at 20 grams per 1,000 gallons of culture water. F2A1 F2B1 F2A5 F2B5 239804
f2a1
Algae Plates
The plate method is a great approach to maintaining clean algal production with minimal time invested. These algae plates are produced under sterile lab conditions for clean stock cultures. To initiate a culture, individual colonies can be removed by scraping from the plate and then placing it in a test tube with sterile media. The strains come from production settings and are maintained at warmer temperatures; therefore, they are better adapted for warmer culture conditions. These plates can be stored for up to 5 months in the refrigerator. P100 P101 P102 P103 P104 P105 P106 P107 P108 Chaetoceros gracilis Plate Thalassiosira weissflogii Plate Amphora sp. Plate Dunaliella tertiolecta Plate Nannochloropsis salina Plate Pavlova sp. Plate Isochrysis (T-Iso) Plate Isochrysis (C-Iso) Plate Spirulina platensis Plate $ 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45 66.45
p103
p104
F/2 Solution A, 1 gallon F/2 Solution B, 1 gallon F/2 Solution A, 5 gallons F/2 Solution B, 5 gallons Sodium Metasilicate, 1 kg
Ship Wt
10 lbs 10 lbs 52 lbs 52 lbs 2.5 lbs
$ 27.64 27.64 93.50 93.50 12.30
24.86/4+ 24.86/4+ 84.15/2+ 84.15/2+ 11.04/4+
p107
152
Feeders
Brine Shrimp/Accessories
Brine Shrimp Eggs

AES offers brine shrimp eggs from the Great Salt Lake (GSL). Cysts (eggs) are sold in 15-oz, vacuum-packed cans. Prices subject to change. Supply is limited, so ask to verify price. Quantity pricing available.
Conical Hatching Jar
Invented Here
Molded from polycarbonate, this tank can be used for hatching both rotifers and Artemia. Tank measures 131/2" in diameter, 24" high and includes a clear lid. It produces up to 300 cc (20 tablespoons) of cysts in 5 gallons of water. The stand measures 131/2" in diameter, 19" high and features a bottom access port to the drain valve. The hatcher includes clear lid, rigid air tube, 8' aquarium tubing and drain valve. Air pump sold separately. Ships Oversize. CCH1 CCH2 CCH10 CCH12 AH801 $ 63.50 59.05/12+ Hatcher Only Stand Only Hatcher w/Stand Hatcher w/Stand x 2 Air Pump $ 135.23 103.95 219.45 418.95 8.95 124.42/6+ 95.63/6+ 8.06/4+
Actual Brine Shrimp
BS90
90% (Guaranteed Hatch Rate) GSL
Brine Shrimp Net

Made of a fine nylon mesh, including the stitching. Net basket size is 4" x 3". Handle is vinyl coated. BSN1 $ 2.35 1.97/12+
CCH10
Dry Brine Shrimp Feed

Developed using 20 years of Artemia culture experience, this dry brine shrimp feed is excellent for raising Artemia salina from nauplii to adults. The dry, powdered form is much easier to use than having to produce hundreds of gallons of live algae. Will equal or surpass any density and growth rate known for live algae diets. Recommended feed rate is 1/2 to 1 gram per gallon per day. Sold in 454-gram (1 lb) containers. DS16 $ 29.95 23.61/4+
Tech Talk 100

Artemia Decapsulation
Artemia or brine shrimp is commonly used as a larval feed for several aquatic species. In order to ensure the highest nutritional value, Artemia cysts should be decapsulated prior to hatching. This will disinfect the cysts, remove the chorion (the indigestible portion of the cyst) and will also reduce the amount of energy that the Artemia has to exert to hatch. The process increases the nutritional value and hatch rate of the Artemia and minimizes the risk of bacterial infections and gut obstructions by the chorion. There are two common methods used to decapsulate the cysts. For both of the methods described, the first step is to hydrate the cysts by soaking them in either fresh or salt water for one hour. Dry cysts have a "dimple" that makes uniform removal of the shell difficult.
Brine Shrimp Hatch'n Feeder

This one-of-a-kind submersible brine shrimp hatcher is great for both freshwater and marine aquariums. It is designed to hatch and continuously feed brine shrimp nauplii directly into your tanks. Connects easily with air line tubing and air pump. The shrimp nauplii will start hatching in 18 to 24 hours and then swim out into the tank. Includes measuring spoon, cleaning brush and collection syringe. BS119 $ 14.92
Culture Vessels
These plastic culture vessels are ideal for culturing microalgae or hatching rotifers and Artemia. They come complete with a 6" diameter access hole that is fitted with a removable, plastic globe for draining cultures. Each culture vessel includes rigid air delivery tube, air diffuser, decontamination cap, drain valve and tubing adapter. Optional white plastic stand measures 12" x 12" x 16". The do-it- yourself conversion kit includes everything except the culture vessel and the stand. ACV3 ACV5 ACV6 ACV7 AH801 Culture Kit, 3 gal Culture Kit, 5 gal Optional Stand Conversion Kit Air Pump
Ship Wt
Chlorine Method
This method uses household bleach (6% sodium hypochlorite solution) or industrial chlorine (11% sodium hypochlorite solution). Fifteen grams of hydrated cysts are placed in a container with 300 mL of 6% hypochlorite solution. The cysts are then placed on a magnetic stirrer in a container of the bleach or chlorine for approximately 35 minutes or until the cysts turn an orange/brown color. Immediately drain cysts into a 120-micron sieve and wash with fresh or seawater until no smell of chlorine remains (about 5 minutes). Hatch as usual.
Chlorine/Sodium Hydroxide Method

This method uses full strength seawater, sodium hydroxide (NaOH, 50% solution) and industrial chlorine (11% sodium hypochlorite solution). Since the chemical reaction that takes place is exothermic (it generates heat), the seawater and chemicals used should be very cold (4045F/47C) to prevent heat damage to the cysts. For each 100 grams of cysts to be decapsulated, place 15 mL of 50% NaOH, 550 mL of 11% chlorine and 800 mL of chilled seawater in a container with heavy aeration or a magnetic stirrer. Keep in mind that there can be a lot of foam and the container should be large enough to prevent overspill. Add the hydrated cysts and watch for the cysts to turn an orange/brown color (35 minutes). Immediately drain cysts into a 120-micron sieve and wash with fresh or seawater until no smell of chlorine remains (about 5 minutes). Hatch as usual.
ACV3 with ACV6
$ 39.92 46.38 40.70 26.31 8.95
Small Brine Shrimp Eggs

6 grams of brine shrimp eggs (about a million!). SB503 $ 3.25 2.91/6+
Hatchers/Algae
Live Feed
153
Brine Shrimp Hatcher

This small brine shrimp hatcher will hatch up to two tablespoons (35 cc) of brine shrimp eggs, can be used for rotifer culture or even as a McDonald type hatchery for a small amount of fish eggs. Each 2.5-liter, molded-acrylic cone hatcher comes with a molded-in plastic drain valve, 6' of 3/16" aquarium tubing, rigid air delivery tube, splash cap, air valve, collection cup and support stand. Made in USA. BS252 BS25C BS25L AH801 Hatcher Repl. Cone Repl. Lid Air Pump $ 43.72 27.54 2.00 8.95
RotiGrow Plus
An all-in-one diet that can be used for growout, enrichment and gut-loading. This microalgal blend meets HUFA requirements up to 40 mg/g d.w. and DHA:EPA ratio of 1.6:1. Produces rotifers rich in phospholipids DHA, EPA and ARA. Clean, effective and allows use of enrichment feeds that are nutritionally balanced for healthier rotifers. RGP $ 66.50
BS252
RotiGrow Nanno Mini Hatching Kit

This kit includes a molded base, one brine shrimp hatch mix (with salt) and air line tubing. Just screw a plastic 2-liter bottle to the base, connect it to an air pump and it's ready to hatch. Bottle and air pump not included. SB619 SB620 AH801 Mini Hatching Kit Hatch Mix, 3/Pk Air Pump $ 10.70 3.45 8.95 Nannochloropsis feed with a high biomass conversion rate and very little organic waste. Provides a high EPA and ARA pre-enrichment boost for use with high DNA enrichment protocols. RGN $ 66.50
N-Rich PL Plus Brine Shrimp Hatcher

This commercial hatchery is capable of producing 300 cc (20 tablespoons) of cysts in 5 gallons of water. Simply turn off the air pump (not included) after hatching and allow empty eggs to float. Move the light to the bottom and the hatched nauplii will travel to the bottom where they can be removed simply by opening the valve. The pyramid shape (12" square by 24" high) promotes hatching. Great for rotifer culture too! Includes weighted rigid air tube, diffuser and drain valve. The optional powder-coated aluminum and PVC stands make benchtop mounting easy. Overall height when hatcher is inserted into a stand is 321/2". Ships Oversize. Made in USA. BS6 HS1 HS2 AH801 Hatcher Stand, Aluminum Stand, PVC Air Pump $ 107.46 165.00 82.32 8.95 96.71/3+ 155.10/3+ 74.08/3+ 8.06/4+ Provides a host of nutrients typical of Isochrysis, Pavlova, Tetraselmis, and Thalassiosira including carotenoids, enzymes, and sterols. High protein and carbohydrate content maintains rotifer health throughout the enrichment process. Easy to measure and disperse, and produces minimal waste. NRICH $ 44.00
RotiGreen
A new greenwater feed that provides optimum DHA, EPA and ARA nutrition for gill-feeding larval fish and maintains high rotifer enrichment in the tank. Clean, nonsettling and nonfouling. RGG $ 70.00
Rotifer Sieve
Handheld collecting sieves are great for harvesting rotifers. These sieves have a 44-micron mesh bottom and are available in two sizes. Weight 1 lb. RC33 RC64 3" Dia. x 3" H 4" Dia. x 6" H $ 14.15 36.00

Our customers are our first priority. We will provide extraordinary service to satisfy the needs of our customers. We will deliver our products and services on time and error free, conforming to the requirements of our customers. We strive to do it right the first time and eliminate any problem that prevents us from achieving complete customer satisfactions.
RC33
We thank you for your patronage.
154
Live Feed
Rotifer Production Systems/Tech Talk

Invented Here
ar150k
Rotifer Production Systems

High-density systems.
Our intensive rotifer production systems are designed for high-volume production! These systems will save you a lot of money, space and work. Production densities exceed 5,000 rotifers per milliliter of Brachionus plicatilis. B. rotundiformis are also suitable for this system. Systems are complete, including culture tank, filtration system, pure oxygen diffuser, feed and ammonia neutralizer dosing system. Since these systems use Instant Algae marine paste, they eliminate the need for labor-intensive algae production. Only 30 minutes of tank maintenance per day is required to produce 100 million to 2.5 billion rotifers per day! Systems also include an operations manual and ClorAm-X. Three sizes are available: 150-liter, 450-liter and 1,000-liter systems. Available in 230V/50 Hz models; add "-H" to the part number. Note: See our Plankton Culture Manual on page 348. AR150K AR256K AR1000K

150 liters 450 liters 1,000 liters
Capacity
1 m x 1.6 m 1 m x 2.2 m 2 m x 2.2 m
Area
$ 2,982 3,740 5,692
Rugged, freestanding fiberglass tanks for years of production.
Protein Skimmer Biofilter
Culture Tank
Easy-to-turn ball valves for flow control.
ar1000k Harvesting Port
Unions and valves for fast set-up.
Drain
Tech Talk 109

Rotifer Culture, High-density vs Batch Methods
Rotifers are typically fed live algae and grown either in ponds or tanks when used as a commercial scale larval diet. A farm with the space and water available to use traditional pond rearing methods should keep doing so. A farm using live algae to grow rotifers in tanks should consider an alternative. Traditional batch culture requires the grower to have both live algae tanks and rotifer rearing tanks. The table compares the batch method to a new, high-density method that substitutes algae paste for live algae. The batch method requires a much higher investment in equipment and space. The high-density method only requires rotifer tanks and their filtration systems. Water is another cost of growing rotifers. Generally speaking, the batch culture method uses 75% exchange per day. The high-density method, using algae paste, requires about 20% exchange of water per day. Another cost factor is labor. Batch culture requires two full-time, live feed technicians, while the high-density method only requires one part-time technician. High-density rotifer culture systems can clearly reduce costs. However, these systems require a transition time and there is a learning curve. You will need a technician who is willing to learn the system and how to predict its production. Since more rotifers are being grown in one tank, it is best to have a backup system running at a lower production rate as insurance should a system fail.
Equipment Cost to Raise 100 Million Rotifers per Day

Batch Method High-Density Method
Density of Rotifers Tank Size Algae requirement per tank Total rotifers per tank Tanks needed for 1 week feed Estimated equipment cost *See Index.
500 per mL 100 liters 75 liters fresh algae 50 million 1014 tanks $ 12,000
2,000 per mL 100 liters 2.5 liters algae paste* 200 million 12 tanks $ 3,000
Enrichments/Tech Talk
Live Feed
155
Liquid HUFA
Ideal for brine shrimp.
Use Selco products to enrich zooplankton prior to feeding to increase omega-3 fatty acids and essential amino acids. Increasing the nutritional value of rotifers and Artemia can make a huge difference in larval survival. Easy Selco contains 200 mg/g dry weight. Recommended feed rate is .6 grams Selco per liter of salt water. Simply emulsify the enrichment for 3 minutes and add to the zooplankton tank at least 24 hours prior to feed out. Sold in 1-kg bottles. Ship weight 3 lbs. SE536 Easy Selco $ 54
S.parkle
A cost-effective, easy-to-use and natural culture diet for a sparkling, consistent rotifer culture. Selco S.parkle is formulated with high-quality, purified ingredients, and leaves no foam or flock formations. Suitable for short and productive cycles in any condition, allowing rotifer generations to be re-inoculated up to 50 consecutive times. Rich in HUFA (17 mg/g). Start feeding with .7 g S.parkle per million rotifers. ER6C 2.5 kg $ 123.75
Technician Profile
Yosuke (Yoshi) Hirono
Yoshi received his B.S. in aquaculture from Tokyo University of Fisheries. Upon graduation he moved to Miami, working with tropical fish and researching marine shrimp at the University of Miami and Ralston Purina. He then helped pioneer the shrimp industries in Ecuador and Tanzania. Presently, he is interested in recirculating aquaculture systems and koi culture.
Vitamin Premix, Soluble

Formulated with 16 vitamins, this premix additive is good for blending into feeds or enhancing freeze-dried and flake feed. For tanks use 1 lb (454 g) of vitamin mix with 100 lbs (45 kg) of feed. For natural ponds use 1 lb (454 g) of vitamin mix with 500 lbs (227 kg) of feed. When adding the vitamin mix to wet feed, use the recommended dosage and add water if necessary to coat feed. To make a gel blend the vitamin mix with dry ingredients at the recommended dosage, add warm water and refrigerate. Comes in a 1-lb resealable bag. VMPS $ 39.65 38.54/5+ 36.27/10+
Vita-Chem
A prestabilized, multivitamin additive that is water and tissue soluble, ideal for closed systems. It contains many natural extracts that are lost in prepackaged foods. It is a great additive for fin regeneration and preventing lateral line disease in marine fish. 16709 16716 16710 16715 Saltwater, 16 oz Saltwater, 1 gallon Freshwater, 16 oz Freshwater, 1 gallon $ 26.92 169.55 26.92 169.55
16709
Guaranteed Analysis per Lb (454 grams) Vitamin A, USP units ................ 325,000 Vitamin D3, USP units................. 65,000 Vitamin E, IU ............................. 32,500 Vitamin K, mg .............................793.65 Vitamin B12, mol...........................10.08 Riboflavin, mg ...............................3,250 p-Pantothenic Acid, mg ..............15,600 Niacin, mg ...................................19,500 Choline, mg.................................. 2,600 Thiamine, mg ............................... 2,600 Pyridoxine, mg ............................. 2,600 Folic Acid, mg ..................................780 Ascorbic Acid, mg....................... 87,100 Biotin, mg.......................................... 40 BHT, mg .......................................... 200 Inositol, mg .................................13,000
Tech Talk 20
Algae Culture
On-site algae culture is a necessity in most marine hatcheries. Algae is the primary diet for bivalves, larval shrimp and live larval feeds, such as rotifers and Artemia. Many different species of algae are cultured throughout the world and each batch is typically just a single species selected for its size and nutrient profile. During culture, it is crucial that steps are taken to avoid contamination, either from pathogens or from other species of algae or ciliates. Sterilization of all equipment and culture media is, therefore, necessary. They can be autoclaved, dipped in alcohol, chlorinated, etc. Contaminants are often waterborne; however, air can also be a pathway for contamination. Placing the air compressor intake in the culture room or an air-conditioned room reduces temperature fluctuations and contaminant load. Care should also be taken to avoid condensation in the air lines, which can lead to ciliate infestations. Installing an in-line desiccant filter can eliminate condensation. To eliminate a recurring contamination problem, sterilize the air delivery system and use the appropriate inlet air filter.
156
Live Organisms and Fish

Koi
Butterfly
Standard
Standard Big
Koi Stocking packs
Goldfish
Blackwater Creek Koi Farms
Aquatic Eco-Systems Koi Stocking Packs

For over 30 years, Aquatic Eco-System has been your best source of aquatic supplies and equipment. Aquaculture facilities and pond owners throughout the world use our Sweetwater pumps and air diffusers and have benefitted from our technical expertise. One thing we haven't offered, however, is a vital element of any farm or pond: fish.
Butterfly KoiA Great Mix of Colors
BUFU1 BUFU2 BUFU3 STND1 STND2 STND3
36" 610" 814" 36" 610" 814"
Small/Medium Medium/Large Large Small/Medium Medium/Large Large 7 Fish per Box
20 Fish per Box 9 Fish per Box 4 Fish per Box 20 fish per box 9 Fish per Box 4 Fish per Box $ 160 200 Fish per Box 1,200 Fish per Box $ 136
$ 226 347 268 $ 173 304 273
Standard Fin
That changes now.

AES has partnered with Blackwater Creek Koi Farms to offer several varieties of koi at reasonable rates. Blackwater Creek is an isolated group of three farms with high-quality fish that has maintained disease-free status for SVC through government testing and monitoring. The farms have not introduced fish from any outside sources in over 7 years, and the parent fish come from Japanese broodstock. We are sure you will enjoy the koi you receive. All prices include overnight shipping from Blackwater Creek.
Standard Fin Starter Fish (Big)
STNDBIG
1014"
STCKFF50 STCKFF400
Koi Stocking packs**Mix of Decorative, Select and Butterfly (No Guaranteed Ratio)
Mini Fish Farm (FF50) 24" Fish Farm II (FF400) 24" 34"
$ 356 1,715
Shipping Info
Freight is included in the price for the continental USA*. We ship on Tuesdays, shipments arrive Wednesdays. No shipping to PO boxescustomers should be home to accept package. Shipments during August will be heavier and cost more due to the warm weather. You must supply an email address with your order to receive a FedEx tracking number.
GoldfishMix of Sarassa, Shubunkins, Comets and Wakins
GOLDFISH1
50 Fish Per Box
*Sorry, koi cannot be shipped to Maine. In addition, certain rural addresses may incur additional shipping charges. **Receive an additional discount when ordering in conjunction with a Fish Farm.
Live Organisms and Fish Live Organisms

AES offers a wide selection of live organism cultures for laboratory biotoxicology research, educational studies or live food cultures. Due to availability and shipping requirements, please allow 5 days for shipment. All organisms ship Next Day Air. Organisms are guaranteed to arrive alive or we will refund the full purchase price of the lost organisms, excluding shipping. All organisms are shipped with an acclimation guide.
Bioassay
157
Freshwater Algae
285100 285101

Selenastrum capricornutum Selenastrum capricornutum
50 mL 4 liters
Qty
$ 50.00 50.00
Saltwater Algae
MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 LAC1Q LAC3Q Nannochloropsis Tetraselmis Isochrysis Nannochloropsis Isochrysis Microalgae Disc Microalgae Disc Microalgae Disc 1 quart 1 quart 15.66 15.66 15.66 19.35 19.35
Freshwater Invertebrates
285102 285103 285104 285105 285106 285107 285108 285109 285111 285113 285114 285115 285147 285116 285117 285118 285119 285120 Daphnia pulex Daphnia pulex Moina spp. Moina spp. Daphnia magna Daphnia magna Daphnia magna Copepods, Mixed Tubifex Worms Mosquito Larvae Mosquito Larvae Plankton Mix Rotifers Nematodes Nematodes Ceriodaphnia dubia Hyalella azteca, 3rd Instar Lumbriculus variegatus 100+ Mixed Age 100+ Gravid Adults 100+ 1,000+ 100 Eggs 100+ Mixed Age 100+ Gravid Adults 100+ 100+ 100+ 500+ 400 mL 200 mL 100 mL 1 liter 100 Gravid Adults 12-Day Culture Per gram 60.00 60.00 22.00 75.00 20.00 60.00 60.00 23.00 23.26 20.00 100.00 24.00 25.00 18.95 65.00 60.00 75.00 10.00
Daphnia magna Oryzia latipes (Medaka)
Saltwater Vertebrates
285129 285130 Menidia beryllina (114 Days Old) Cyprinodon spp. (Sheepshead Minnow) 20 10 20.00 25.00
Saltwater Invertebrates
285121 285122 LRC2 LRC3 285123 285124 285125 285126 285127 285128 Artemia, Adult, 1 lb 1,000 mL Artemia, Adult 200 mL Brachionus plicatilis 1 quart Brachionus plicatilis 1 gallon Ocean Copepods 1 liter Palaemonetes vulgaris 50 Palaemonetes vulgaris 200 Ampelisca abdita (Amphipod) 20 Mysidopsis bahia (>15 Days) 20 Paleomenetes pugio (Grass Shrimp, Juvenile) 20 55.00 30.00 19.35 39.95 58.50 48.00 127.00 20.00 16.00 20.00
Danio rerio (Zebrafish)
Redworm
Freshwater Vertebrates, Zebrafish

285131 285132 285133 285134 Danio rerio (Eggs) Danio rerio (< 60 Days) Danio rerio (61120 Days) Danio rerio (>121 Days) 20 10 5 5 20.00 20.00 15.00 20.00
Japanese Medaka
285135 285136 285137 Oryzias latipes (Eggs) Oryzias latipes (<90 Days) Oryzias latipes (>91 Days, Sexed) 20 10 5 20.00 20.00 20.00
Fathead Minnows
285142 285143 285144 285145 285146 Pimephales promelas (Eggs) Pimephales promelas (Ova to 10 Days) Pimephales promelas (1160 Days) Pimephales promelas (61180 Days) Pimephales promelas (>181 Days) 20 20 20 10 5 12.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00
Mosquito Larvae Daphnia pulex
158

Starter Cultures
Live S-Type Rotifers

Great starter culture!
Due to their small size (avg. 120 microns; range from 90150 microns), these S-type rotifers are perfect for the first feeding stages of aquacultured marine fish for both the hobbyist and commercial industries. They are also suitably sized for species with small mouthparts, such as mandarinfish, seahorses (adults and fry) and grouper and snapper larvae. S-type rotifers can also be fed to reef aquaria, including carnivorous invertebrates, LPS and SPS corals, soft corals and anemones. S-type rotifers should be kept in the refrigerator with the bag open. This allows for oxygen exchange that rotifers need to survive. Prior to use, gently swirl the water to resuspend the rotifers that have settled to the bottom of the bag. To obtain maximum effectiveness, we suggest acclimating the rotifers first by leaving the desired feeding amount out at room temperature for approximately 10 minutes. If you are concerned about water contamination, you can sieve the rotifers through a 55 or 75 mesh screen before feeding to your tank. Recommended rotifer density is 50,00080,000 rotifers per 50-gallon tank every 2 weeks, feeding directly to the tank. Studies show that more constant/greater feeding to a reef tank leads to a more healthy environment for corals. LRC5 LRC6 LRC7 LRC8 LRC9 LRC10 LRC11 LRC12 LRC13 LRC14 .75 million 1 million 5 million 10 million 20 million 30 million 50 million 60 million 70 million 100 million 60 80 200 400 600 900 1,000 1,200 1,400 2,000
Look online at AquaticEco.com to learn more about rotifers.
Instant Rotifers
Produced by Reed Mariculture, these live marine rotifer cultures of Brachionus plicatilis are the solution for short-term feeding in marine aquariums and as a starter culture. One-quart package contains approximately 600,000 rotifers, shipped in breathable bags and enriched with algae. Includes 15-oz rotifer diet algae mix of Nannochloropsis and Tetraselmis. These cultures can be refrigerated for up to 2 weeks or used immediately. Ship Next Day Air, FOB CA. RC6N $ 48 45.60/4+ 43.32/12+
Copepods
These live cultures of copepods are excellent for aquarium fish, invertebrates and larval fish diets or supplements. The Tigriopus californicus measure approximately 3,000 microns in size and are a great prey species for predatory aquarium fish. 6-oz bottles contain an avarage of 500 individuals per bottle. Ship Next Day Air. CP0D1 T. californicus $ 20.00
Mysid Shrimp
Live cultures of mysid shrimp Mysidopsis bahia are the perfect food source for sea horses, sea dragons and other aquarium fish. They measure 812 mm long. The cultures are mixed sex and contain 250 shrimp. Ship Next Day Air. MSC $ 72
Live Rotifer Cultures

Live cultures of the marine rotifer Brachionus plicatilis are an excellent food source for larval fish and invertebrates. Easy to culture, they are about one-half the size of Artemia nauplii and can be fed live microalgae or a dry rotifer diet. They are packed at a density of 510/mL and are available in quart and gallon sizes. Ship Next Day Air (freight not included in price). Although temperature fluctuations during transit are not generally a problem, live arrival is not guaranteed. See Index for Plankton Culture Manual. LRC2 LRC3 1 quart, 4 lbs 1 gallon, 10 lbs $ 19.35 39.95
Rotifer Eggs
These lab-cultured resting eggs are ideal for setting up cultures of the saltwater rotifer Brachionus plicatilis or the freshwater rotifer Brachionus calyciflorus. Simple to culture, just remove the cysts from the vial and place in water with low light. Hatching and feeding commences in 24 to 36 hours and reproduction about 18 hours after hatching. When properly stored, eggs will remain viable for up to 2 years. Small size contains 2,000 to 3,000 cysts (eggs) and large has 15,000 to 20,000. All sizes weigh 6 oz. RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Small Saltwater Small Freshwater Large Saltwater Large Freshwater $ 15.30 15.30 48.30 48.30
re1
Lab Equipment EZ4 Stereomicroscope by Leica

The Leica EZ4's high performance provides the optimum viewing experience for education and examination. Its crystal clear optics, 60 viewing angle and adjustable illumination ensure hours of comfortable observation. This durable and reliable microscope has no removable parts. The EZ4 has fixed 10X eyepieces, a 4.4:1 zoom ratio and a range of magnification from 8X35X. It is also one of the only microscopes in its class to feature a waterproof base plate and automatic shut-off. Built-in carrying handle allows portability. LED illumination system for incident and transmitted light is adjustable and provides 25,000 hours of service life. Five-year warranty. EZ4 $ 970.15
Microscopes
159
EZ4HD Stereomicroscope With Digital Camera by Leica

The EZ4hD has the same performance as the EZ4, with the added bonus of a 3-megapixel digital camera! Store photos on its 128 MB secure digital card, or export them to your Windows or Macintosh computer via USB 2.0. Connect directly to an HD display for detailed viewing. Use the included software or any third-party imaging program. The camera is preconfigured and its incident and transmitted light settings are predefined, minimizing setup. Content-sensitive help file ensures quick and easy troubleshooting. Five-year warranty. EZ4hD $ 2,014.93
Stereo Dissecting Microscope

Dual magnification (1X and 3X) stereo microscope with 10X wide field eye pieces suitable for low magnification diagnostic needs. Features 360 rotatable head, large field of view and long working distance. Rack and pinion large adjustment knob with slip clutch protection, adjustable diopter correction on one eyepiece, interpupillary distance adjustment, locked-on eye-pieces and dual LED lighting for both transmitted and incident light. Very useful scope at a very reasonable price. Includes dust cover. 115V, 9" L x 7" W x 13.5" H. Ship weight 12 lbs. Five-year warranty. M18SL Stereo Microscope $ 436.88
Binocular Microscope
This binocular microscope offers high performance and durability at an excellent price. Features 10X wide field eyepieces on a 360 rotating head, 4X, 10X, 40X and 100X (oil-immersion) achromatic DIN objectives. Large 110 mm x 115 mm mechanical stage with iris diaphragm, NA 1.25 Abbe condenser and coarse and fine focusing with a slip clutch mechanism. Built-in 20-W incandescent lamp (115V). Makes a great educational laboratory microscope from middle school to the university level. 8" L x 6" W x 14" H, ship weight 19 lbs. Five-year warranty. M12 M12B Binocular Microscope Repl. Bulb, 20 W $ 605.00 9.75
Binocular Scope by Vital Sine

E xcellent for koi hobbyists. Rechargeable LED light.
Monocular Scope by Vital Sine

This microscope uses an internal LED light that is bright and battery-powered (rechargeable NiMH batteries included), eliminating the hassles of a power cord! It features a triple objective turret with achromatic objectives with glass lenses, giving an excellent, clear image at a low price. It has a 10X wide-field eyepiece and 4X, 10X and 40X objectives. Both coarse and fine adjustment controls make focusing easy. Abbe condenser is .65 NA with iris diaphragm and blue filter. Microscope includes a transformer and cord for recharging. Five-year warranty on materials and workmanship; one year on electrical components. M76 $ 193.93
This binocular scope is designed to provide maximum image quality at an excellent price! It uses an internal LED light that is bright and battery-powered (rechargeable NiMH batteries included), which eliminates the hassles of a power cord. Fully rotatable 360 binocular head is inclined at 45 and has a pair of wide-field 10X eyepieces. DIN achromatic 4X, 10X, 40X and 100X (oil) objectives. Rack and pinion adjustment makes focusing easy. Abbe condenser has a NA of 1.25 with iris diaphragm, filter holder and blue filter. Includes transformer for recharging. Five-year warranty on materials and workmanship; one year on electrical components. M77 $ 353.66
Deluxe Microscopes
Precision optics and other advanced features make these reverse turret microscopes ideal for lab use. Both the binocular and trinocular (shown) are oversized for comfortable operation, and the graduated coarse and fine adjustments are crafted with precision gearing. Built-in, variable quartz halogen 115V illuminator. Four DIN achromatic objectives (4X, 10X, 40XR, 100XR) set in a reversed objective turret with high-grade lubricant and positive stops. Graduated mechanical stage with coaxial drive. Low position X-Y controls. Rack and pinion sub-stage with a centerable 1.25 NA Abbe condenser. Iris diaphragm and swing-in color filter. 10" L x 8" W x 16" H, shipping weight 18 lbs. Five-year warranty. 992ES 993ES Binocular Trinocular $ 1,600 1,800
Deluxe Laboratory Microscope

Excellent quality at a very affordable price! This binocular microscope features an interpupillary distance adjustment through 10X wide-field eye pieces; 4X, 10X, 40X and 100X (oil-immersion) fully coated achromatic optics; low position, coaxial drive stage slideways; and coarse and fine adjustment knobs. 20-W variable quartz halogen illuminator with 1.25 NA (numerical aperture) Abbe type condenser, tension adjustment ring and an autostop prefocusing system. 20X optional eyepiece available. 9" L x 7.5" W x 15" H. Ship weight 21 lbs. Five-year warranty. M14 M12B Lab Microscope Repl. Bulb $ 781.00 9.75
160
Lab Equipment
Microscope Accessories
Video Eyepiece
Ideal for teaching, this simple-to-use eyepiece is a portable video system that can be used on a microscope. It will fit any standard 23-mm or 30.5-mm eye tube and plugs into a TV or VCR for viewing. The kit includes a composite video output with NTSC system, 620 x 580 picture, auto gain control and 1/3" CCD sensor. Ship weight 5 lbs. One-year warranty. M28V $ 387
Slide Cases
These microscope slide cases hold standard (3" x 1") slides and feature a rust-resistant clasp. Heavy polystyrene construction with foam lining to prevent damage to slides. To ensure proper identification, each slide slot is numbered to correspond to the slide inventory sheet on the inside cover of the case.

MC25 MC100
25-Slide Case 100-Slide Case
$ 7.10 13.11
Each
6.38 11.80
6+
mc100
Microscope Cleaning Kit

This kit will keep optics clear and microscope parts clean. The kit contains 10 presaturated optic and lens cleaning pads, two individually wrapped packs of antistatic surface wipes, two premoistened germicide swabs and instructions. Additional presaturated optical pads are available (10/pk). MC8 MC9 Microscope Cleaning Kit Optical Pads, 10/Pk $ 71.03 12.90
Plastic Multiwell Slide Plates

These plastic slide plates are ideal for counting zooplankton, examining fish eggs and studying larval development under dissecting microscopes. Constructed of clear polystyrene, slides include cover which has a frosted area for marking. Raised rims reduce cross contamination. Slides measure 86 mm x 128 mm x 18 mm deep. MW6 MW12 MW24 6-Well 12-Well 24-Well $ 4.06 4.63 5.41 3.86/10+ 4.38/10+ 5.14/10+
mc8
Hand Counter Cytoseal Slide Mounting Medium Hazmat Air

Designed for preservation of slide samples, Cytoseal mounting medium is colorless, dries rapidly and will not yellow with age. Compatible with immersion oil. 4 oz. Ships Hazmat. M80 $ 42.12
Immersion Oil
This stable optical fluid is formulated of synthetic hydrocarbons that will not dry out or harden. One-oz bottle has an applicator rod built into the cap for easy dispensing. Safe for all microscope lenses. M81 $ 17.34
Easily fits in your hand to be thumb operated. The register advances by one digit, up to 999, each time the button is pressed. A turn of the side knob resets the register back to zero. It's a great tool for counting algae cells, zooplankton, fry, people, etc. M42 $ 11.75 10.57/4+
Multiple Counters
Ideal for counting algae, zooplankton, fence posts, etc. Devices count from 0999, knob on side resets counters back to zero. Tabs are provided for marking items counted. M44 and M45 include left and right reset keys and totalizer function. Bell signals each 100 counts for direct percentage reading of counts on the individual keys. Two-year warranty. Made in USA. M43 M44 M45 2-Unit Counter 6-Unit Counter 9-Unit Counter $ 125.94 409.23 515.38
4 oz
1 oz
Microscope Supplies
Lab Equipment
161
Slides, Glass Microscope

Clear glass slides with ground edges. Slides are 25 mm x 75 mm x 1.2 mm thick. 144 slides per box. M32 $ 7.96/Box 6.77/4+
Counting Cell, Sedgewick Rafter

These cells are commonly used for counting zooplankton. Each cell consists of a rectangular frame mounted on a slide and includes one cover slip. Cell size is 50 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm and volume is 1.0 mL. Cells are available in glass or plastic and contain a grid subdivided into microliters, allowing the user to count more accurately. Also available is a glass counting cell without a grid that includes two cover slips.

Slides, Depression
One- or two-well glass slides with depressions .5.8 mm deep x 1214 mm in diameter. Made of selected noncorroding glass, with ground and polished edges and spherical cavities. Slide size is 26 mm x 76 mm. Price shown is for packages of 12 slides. M30 M31 1-Well 2-Well $ 5.25/Pkg 7.00/Pkg 4.91/4+ 6.29/4+
M414 M415 M416 M38 M39
Glass Counting Cell w/Grid Plastic Counting Cell w/Grid Deluxe Glass Cover Slips Counting Cell Cover Glasses (12)
$ 247.00 55.00 18.85 50.25 30.90
Each
223.00 48.40 16.02 48.16 27.81
3+
m30 m415 m414
Cover Slips
Plain glass surface is free from irregularities. Choose from two sizes, M26 (40 mm x 24 mm with thickness .13.17 mm) or M27 (22 mm x 22 mm with thickness .13.17 mm). 100 per box. M26 M27 40 mm x 24 mm 22 mm x 22 mm $ 4.47/Box 2.95/Box 4.02/4+ 2.66/4+
Counting Cell, Palmer

Similar in appearance to Sedgewick Rafter cell but designed for counting phytoplankton and smaller zooplankton. Cell is a circular stainless steel frame with two charging channels mounted on a 76 mm x 25 mm glass slide. Cell size is 17.5 mm dia. x .4 mm deep; volume is .1 ml. Kit includes two cover glasses and a clear snap-lock case. Made in USA. PCC $ 95.85 86.27/3+
m26
Hemacytometer Counting Wheel, Zooplankton

Especially suited for low-powered microscopes, this counting wheel will hold 5- to 10-mL samples in the trough. Sample trough has a divider to mark start and finish. Count zooplankton while turning the wheeleasy and accurate. Precision-made from acrylic and includes a 4" (10 cm) base. 181080 $ 100.90 Count algae cells, blood cells and other small stuff with these pocket-size counting chambers and a microscope. Consists of molded glass compartment with H-shaped moat, forming two counting areas. Each counting area has double Neubauer rulings with 400 small squares in a central 1-mm square. The rulings appear as white lines on dark background when viewed through the microscope. The cover slips cover the moat region .1 mm above the ruled surface, which aids in precise loading and even cell distribution. V-shaped slashes help in loading by reducing overflow into the moat. Made in USA.

M36 267135
Hemacytometer Replacement Cover Slips
$ 314.08 59.00
Each
276.39 55.00
3+
m36
Important
162
Lab Equipment
Stands/Holders
Db51
Db51 Gmb1
Db52 Db55
Db55
Db62 b35
Db61
Support Stand
Designed for holding burets, beakers, flasks and separatory funnels. Stand includes vertical support rods. 10-cm triangular steel stand with 8 mm x 50 cm support rod weighs 4 lbs. DB62 Triangular Stand $ 12.35
Support Stand Accessories

The following accessories are designed to be used with support stand DB62. Double and single buret clamps have rubber-coated grips and aluminum construction. Extension clamps have plastic-coated jaws. Right angle clamps are made of cast aluminum. Support rings are zinc-plated cast iron and ideal for holding beakers and Erlenmeyer flasks. DB51 DB52 DB55 DB56 Single Buret Clamp Double Buret Clamp Support Ring, 2" Support Ring, 4" $ 6.35 11.25 5.20 5.46
Each
Micro Burner, Gas

Designed for use with propane or natural gas, this burner has a flame stabilizer and a fixed orifice. Serrated 7/16" gas inlet connection is nickel-plated brass, overall height is 31/2" (9 cm). Delivers 8001,200 BTUs. GMB1 $ 16.12
6.02 10.71 4.94 5.16
6+
Lamp, Alcohol
Glass alcohol lamp has a capacity of 150 mL and includes a metal cap to prevent odors and evaporation. Height with cap is 10 cm. Replacement wicks sold in packs of 12. B35 B35W Alcohol Lamp Wicks $ 8.14 3.69 3.48/12+
Tongs, Beaker
Chrome-plated beaker tongs for handling hot glassware. Tongs measure 10" and have plastic-coated jaws. DB61 $ 4.25 3.98/6+
Aquatic Eco-Systems' customer service was very helpful and quick. My teacher and I were afraid we weren't going to be able to get our aquarium to work for our Small Animal Care class. You were very helpful in telling me what I needed to know to start our filter. Thank you.
Important
Though we have tried to make this catalog as comprehensive and factual as possible, errors occasionally occur. Additionally, prices, specifi cations and packaging may have changed since the date of publication. Aquatic Eco-Systems Inc. reserves the right to substitute equivalent items and make other changes without notice.
Tim Talford
Beakers/Bottles/Flasks
Lab Equipment
163
Beakers
These graduated polypropylene beakers have a triangular fl ange that has three pouring spouts. They are autoclavable and nest for storage. Price is for pack of 10 beakers. PLB25 PLB40 PLB80 PLB100 250 mL 400 mL 800 mL 1,000 mL
Capacity
Sample Bottles
These HDPE (high-density polyethylene), wide-mouth square bottles are ideal for shipping and storing liquids and solids. Bottles are leakproof, and their square shape saves space. They have a hole in the cap edge for attachment of a tag. LSB250 LSB500 LSB1 250 mL 500 mL 1,000 mL
Capacity
Graduated Bottles, Polypropylene

High-performance, leakproof polypropylene construction with a full range of sizes, wide-mouth openings and strong chemical resistance. Contain large, white marker space for easy and safe labeling. Clearly printed graduations show milliliters and fluid ounces. 501060 501125 501250 501500 501100 60 mL (2 fl.oz) 125 mL (4.2 fl.oz) 250 mL (8.5 fl.oz) 500 mL (17 fl.oz) 1,000 mL (33.8 fl.oz)
Capacity Per Case
9 cm 11 cm 14 cm 15 cm
OAL
$ 8.16 8.58 9.20 12.01
Each
7.51 7.90 8.47 11.05
10+
11 cm 14 cm 18 cm
OAL
$ 2.32 3.24 5.15
Each
2.09 2.92 4.64
12+
Dispensing Bottle, Adjustable Volume

Convenient dispensing bottle will measure any amount from 5 mL to 25 mL. Low-density polyethylene storage bottle will hold 500 mL of liquid. Often used to dispense nutrients, chlorine and other common solutions used in aquaculture. 511654 $ 21.75 20.18/6+
Lab Pen
Markings withstand temperatures in excess of 347F (175C) and resist limited exposure to diluted acids and bases. Can be used on glass, metal, porcelain and plastics, including Teflon. Easily removed with rubbing alcohol. Packs of 4. Black ink. LP4 $ 25.22
12 12 12 12 6
$ 30.90/Cs 32.96/Cs 46.09/Cs 54.59/Cs 32.03/Cs
Wash Bottles
Made of fl exible LDPE, with polypropylene screw closure and fine bore dispensing tube. The tube is narrow at the end to allow a drop at a time. Cutting the end of the tube back will increase the flow. WB8 WB16 WB32 8 oz (237 mL) 16 oz (474 mL) 32 oz (948 mL)
Capacity
Graduated Cylinders
Molded of heavy-duty and chemically resistant translucent polypropylene, with permanently molded graduations that won't fade after repeated autoclaving. LGC100 100 mL LGC250 250 mL LGC500 500 mL LGC1000 1,000 mL
Capacity
Graduated Beakers
These autoclavable polypropylene beakers will withstand temperatures up to 120C. Graduated in both mL and ounces, with no-drip pouring spouts. LGB050 LGB100 LGB250 LGB500 LGB1
Capacity
$ 3.61 4.38 5.87
24 cm 31 cm 37 cm 45 cm
OAL
$ 6.98 8.08 11.67 14.22
Each
6.21/10+ 7.27/10+ 10.50/8+ 13.28/6+
50 mL 100 mL 250 mL 500 mL 1,000 mL
6 cm 7 cm 10 cm 12 cm 15 cm
OAL
$ 1.70 1.91 2.32 4.69 7.00
Erlenmeyer Flasks
Heavy, autoclavable polypropylene fl asks have permanently molded graduations. LFP125 LFP250 LFP500 LFP1 125 mL 250 mL 500 mL 1,000 mL
Capacity OAL Each 12+
Carboys
Nalgene 2318 series carboy includes a spigot sealed by two Teflon O-rings and a delivery spout 5/8" (16 mm) O.D. The 2.5-gallon and 5-gallon carboys have two molded handles. These heavy-duty carboys are excellent for storing and dispensing liquids both in the lab and on the farm. CB4 1 gallon (4 liters) 2 lbs $ 90.48 72.38/6+ CB10 2.5 gallons (10 liters) 3 lbs 130.00 CB20 5 gallons (20 liters) 5 lbs 171.60
Capacity ship Wt Each
Graduated Beakers w/Handle

Made of autoclavable, semitransparent polypropylene. These are made in a larger diameter than most beakers for stability. Graduated in milliliters and liters. LBH1 LBH2 LBH3 1,000 mL 2,000 mL 3,000 mL
Capacity
12 cm 14 cm 19 cm 23 cm
$ 5.77 7.52 10.82 14.94
5.20 6.77 9.74 13.45
Funnels
These funnels are steam-autoclavable to 250F. FN8-2 is polypropylene, FN16-2 is polyethylene. FN8-2 FN16-2
Capacity Dia. OAL Each
15 cm 17 cm 18 cm
OAL
$ 6.44 7.21 10.40
Each
5.80 6.49 9.36
6+
8 oz 16 oz
4.25" 13 cm $ 3.61 5.0" 15 cm 5.00
3.25/12+ 4.50/6+
Note: OAL = overall length

Lsb250
501060 PLb25
511654
LP4
Wb8
LGC100
Cb4
LGb250
LbH1 LfP125 fN8-2
164
Lab Equipment
Glassware
glb250
gc50
sf250
fbf28
ge125
vf250
Beakers, Graduated
These graduated beakers are made from sturdy borosilicate glass and feature heavy wall construction to resist breakage. Easy-to-read scales indicate volumes accurately to 5%.

Cylinders, Graduated
These all-glass cylinders have metric scales and sliding, hexagonal bumper guards to resist roll and breakage.
6+ Capacity Graduations OAL Actual Wt Each 6+
GLB50 GLB100 GLB150 GLB250 GLB400 GLB600 GLB1000 GLB2000
50 mL 100 mL 150 mL 250 mL 400 mL 600 mL 1,000 mL 2,000 mL
Capacity
Graduations
10 mL 10 mL 10 mL 25 mL 100 mL 50 mL 50 mL 100 mL
6 cm 7 cm 8 cm 10 cm 12 cm 13 cm 15 cm 19 cm
OAL
Actual Wt
2 oz 2 oz 3 oz 5 oz 5 oz 8 oz 11 oz 16 oz
$ 2.50 2.55 2.95 3.10 3.45 3.85 11.15 18.95
Each
2.39 2.43 2.82 2.91 3.23 3.63 10.58 17.98
GC10 GC25 GC50 GC100 GC250 GC500
10 mL 25 mL 50 mL 100 mL 250 mL 500 mL
.1 mL .2 mL .5 mL 1.0 mL 2.0 mL 5.0 mL
18 cm 21 cm 22 cm 24 cm 30 cm 36 cm
1.57 oz 1.65 oz 4.83 oz 8.76 oz 15 oz 30 oz
$ 6.50 9.20 10.05 11.30 15.35 28.00
6.14 8.65 9.44 10.62 14.36 26.30
Funnels, Separatory
High-quality, thick glass separatory funnels meet ASTM E-1096 Type 4 specs. The stopcock bores, body openings and stems are carefully aligned for even flow and cut-off. All sizes include a ground glass stopper. SF250 SF500
Capacity
Erlenmeyer Flasks
Made from high-quality borosilicate glass, these flasks have thick wall construction with metric scales. Ideal for culturing microalgae. GE125 GE250 GE500 GE1000 GE2000
Capacity Graduations OAL Actual Wt Each 6+
125 mL 250 mL 500 mL 1,000 mL 2,000 mL
25 mL 25 mL 50 mL 50 mL 50 mL
11 cm 14 cm 17 cm 22 cm 28 cm
3 oz 3.2 oz 8 oz 8.5 oz 16 oz
$ 3.45 4.20 6.35 10.85 30.75
3.25 3.97 5.94 9.51 28.91
250 mL 500 mL
30 cm 33 cm
OAL
Actual Wt
5 oz 6.4 oz
$ 28.75 34.35
Each
Volumetric Flasks
These flasks have machine-blown bodies and thick glass necks. The graduation lines are sharp and permanent, and a snap-on plastic cap is included. Flasks meet ASTM E-288 Class A specifications.

Fernbach Flask
A high surface area to volume ratio makes this 2.8-liter glass flask ideal for culturing algae (do not use on a heat source smaller than the base of the flask). FBF28 $ 75.40 71.63/6+
VF5o VF100 VF200 VF250 VF500 VF1000
50 mL 100 mL 200 mL 250 mL 500 mL 1,000 mL
Capacity
14 cm 17 cm 21 cm 23 cm 27 cm 31 cm
OAL
Actual Wt
1.6 oz 2 oz 3 oz 3.3 oz 6 oz 9.3 oz
$ 11.00 11.65 14.75 16.75 20.25 24.30
Each
10.34 10.49 13.27 15.07 18.25 21.87
4+
Sampling Containers
Lab Equipment
165
Jars, Clear Glass

These glass jars are priced by the case of 24. 13004C 13108C-S
OAL Per Case Precleaned & QA Analyzed
Imhoff Cone
A fully-graduated cone made of styrene-acrylonitrile that features a low-density bottom plug, which makes it easy to withdraw sediment. Markings are incremented as follows: 01 mL by .1 mL, 110 mL by .5 mL, 1040 mL by 1.0 mL, 40100 mL by 2 mL and markings at 250, 500 and 1,000 mL. The stainless steel rack holds 3 cones. Length is 46 cm. LIC1 LICR LICB

125 mL/4 oz 250 mL/8 oz
7 cm 14 cm
24 24
$ 59.85/Cs 67.55/Cs
Imhoff Cone Steel Rack Imhoff Brush
45 cm 45 cm 77 cm
OAL
$ 47.84 54.26 24.20
Each
43.06/4+ 48.83/3+ 21.80/3+
13004c
13108c-s
Settlometer Boston Bottles, Amber Glass

Round Teflon-lined, closed-top caps. Water sampling favorites where contents can be harmed by sunlight. 11201A 1,000 mL/32 oz 113500A 500 mL/16 oz 114250A 250 mL/8 oz
Capacity OAL Per Case Precleaned & QA Analyzed
An economical alternative to a glass kit, this Nalgene settlometer kit consists of a 2-liter jar with easy-to-read graduations; cover; polypropylene paddle; ten 15-mL, conical, polycarbonate, centrifuge tubes with molded-in graduations; ten polypropylene, friction-fit closures; instruction booklet; and data sheet. SK9857
lic1
$ 202.80
licb
22 cm 20 cm 15 cm
12 12 12
$ 45.30/Cs 40.30/Cs 35.35/Cs
sk9857
Boston Bottles, Clear Glass

Round, Teflon-lined, closed-top caps. Water sampling favorites. 11201C 1,000 mL/32 oz 113500C 500 mL/16 oz
Capacity OAL Per Case Precleaned & QA Analyzed licr
20 cm 17 cm
12 12
$ 50.50/Cs 46.25/Cs
Wide Mouth Jars, Polyethylene

Capacity OAL
11201a 113500a
114250a
11201c
15001 1,000 mL/32 oz 151500 500 mL/16 oz 157250 250 mL/8 oz 156125 125 mL/4 oz
19 cm 15 cm 12 cm 9 cm
Per Case
12 24 24 48
Precleaned & QA Analyzed
$ 46.35/Cs 70.20/Cs 62.10/Cs 91.70/Cs
15001 113500c
151500
Wide Mouth Jars, Amber Glass

12332A 12216A 12108A
Capacity OAL
1,000 mL/32 oz 500 mL/16 oz 250 mL/8 oz
18 cm 15 cm 13 cm
Per Case
12 12 12
156125 157250 14040a 14040c
$ 58.40/Cs 46.40/Cs 36.30/Cs
VOA Vials
Capacity
12108a 12216a
14040C 40 mL, Clear 14040A 40 mL, Amber 13920C 20 mL, Clear 13920A 20 mL, Amber
Per Case
72 72 72 72
$ 104.26/Cs 104.26/Cs 117.15/Cs 117.15/Cs

13920a 13920c
Dropper Bottles, Narrow Mouth

Screw-cap bottles with removable, bulb-type, dropping pipette inserted through the cap hole. Bottle and pipette are made of low-density polyethylene. Sold per pack. 17625 17626 17627
Capacity
12332a
30 mL 60 mL 125 mL
Per Pack
12 12 6
$ 39.52/Pk 53.04/Pk 53.04/Pk
17625
166
Lab Equipment
Microbiology/Hot Plates/Stirrers
Petri Dishes, Disposable

Sterile petri dishes made of polystyrene are conveniently disposable. 15 mm x 100 mm. Price is for a box of 25. LPD15 $ 8.79
Magnetic Stirrer
Here is an excellent value in magnetic stirrers, ideal for labs and hatcheries. All have speed controls, ABS or stainless steel housing and an internal VCO that stops the motor from accelerating as soon as the load is removed. One 25-mm (11/4") long magnetic stir bar is included. 115V, 50/60 Hz. One-year warranty. LMS2 LMS3 LMS4 5" x 5" x 2" 5" x 5" x 2" 7" x 7" x 3"
size
Lms2 ship Wt Each 3+
Applicators, Cotton-Tipped
Cotton-tipped applicators are ideal for transferring bacterial samples from fish to agar plates and for transferring algal samples. These soft-tipped applicators measure 6" long x 1/16" diameter and are made with straight grain white birch. Box of 1,000 applicators contains 10 sealed autoclave bags of 100 each. LV4 $ 36.56
ABS Plastic 316 Stainless 316 Stainless
Cover
Approx stir Capacity
1 liter 1 liter 2.5 liters
2 lbs 2 lbs 4 lbs
$ 83.00 172.00 213.00
74.70 153.08 191.70
Carboys
High-performance, autoclavable carboys made of heavy-duty PP. Rounded octagonal shape for increased rigidity when full, offset neck for easier filling and pouring. Blow-molded handles are end-sealed to prevent contamination. Durable, leakproof, heavy-duty stopcock with boss fitting for extra strength features removable tube fitting. Graduations are molded into the front for easy reading.
505634-1
26109-10 26195-10
Paddle Testers
505634-1 505634-2
Capacity
5 liters 10 liters
stopcock
Yes Yes
$ 49.59 69.78
These innovative paddle testers make it simple and safe to test liquids and solid surfaces for suspected bacteria, yeasts and molds. Every plastic paddle has a double-sided slide of agar (growing media) with a grid attached to the plastic cap. All three include a test for total aerobic bacteria (TAB). Sold in packs of 10. Made in USA. 26108-10 26109-10 26195-10 TAB/Yeast & Mold Paddle Tester, 10/Pk TAB/Total Coliforms, 10/Pk TAB/Disinfection Control, 10/Pk $ 38.60/Pk 38.60/Pk 38.60/Pk
Stirring Bars
These extra strength Teflon stirring bars are octagonal in shape. Sizes listed are diameter by length. Prices listed are for packs of 12 (single price is for 12 stirrers, 6+ price is for 72 or more stirrers). LTB05 LTB1 LTB2
5/16" 5/16" 5/16"
26108-10
(.8 cm) x 1/2" (1.3 cm) (.8 cm) x 1" (2.5 cm) (.8 cm) x 2" (5 cm)
$ 33.99 36.31 51.50
Each Pk
30.59 33.04 46.35
6+
Microbiological Media Stirring Bar Retriever

A powerful magnet sealed in this polyethylene rod is useful for retrieving stirring bars from samples (and screws from sink drains!). Measures 45 cm (18") x 1 cm (3/8"). MSR73 $ 15.15 DF158 DF176 DF174 DF178 TSA, 100 g TSA, 500 g TCBS Agar, 500 g Marine Agar, 500 g This dehydrated culture media is ideal for preparing fresh media for bacteriological culture. Tryptone soy agar (TSA) is commonly used for culturing organisms from freshwater fish. TCBS agar is ideal for culturing and isolation of enteropathogenic Vibrio. Marine agar is routinely used for isolation, cultivation and enumeration of heterotrophic marine bacteria. Ships dry. Made in USA. $ 45.60 73.84 136.24 208.00
Each
42.86 67.56 124.60 190.32

Df174
4+
Inoculating Loop
This loop is made with twisted Nichrome wire, with a 1/8" (4 mm) diameter loop on a 21/2" (6 cm) stem and an 8" aluminum handle. 7010 $ 5.20 4.82/6+
Df178
Closeup of Loop
I was very pleased with the response from customer service. Not only did they answer my question very thoughtfully, I was also given alternatives and the chance to place a special order for the item. The customer service was much better than I expected considering the quick response time. Many other companies that I contacted said that they couldn't get this item or that it wasn't in production. Keep up the good work!
Kevin H. Pang
Research Assistant New Jersey Academy for Aquatic Sciences
Autoclave/Dissection/Desiccator
Lab Equipment
167
Autoclave Indicator Tape

This self-adhesive tape will tell you if your autoclave is performing correctly. The indicator bars will change from white to dark brown after 15 minutes of exposure to steam heat at 250F. Sixty yards per roll. AT12
1/2"
Dissecting Equipment
All of these instruments are high-quality steel. Most are stainless; LSHB1 and LSHB2 are carbon steel. LSH1 LSHB1 LSHB2 LS1B LS1S LFC1 LFS1 LFS4 LFC4 BS81 IG48 ANG N31 N32 SS8 9M
Each 10+
Tape
$ 5.20
4.68/6+
Autoclave
These aluminum autoclaves only require a small amount of water for proper sterilization. At a temperature of 250F, the dry steam can sterilize in 2030 minutes. Ideal for most small lab applications. Equipped with pressure gauge, pressure relief valves and safety plug, which releases pressure at 35 psi in the event of failure. la831 LA830 is for use with external heat source. LA831 has a built-in 1,000-W heater with thermostat and 6' cord (115V, 60 Hz, 7.8 A). Made in USA. LA830 LA831

Scalpel Handle Blades #10, 6/Pk, Rounded End Blades #11, 6/Pk, Slanted End Scissors, Bent End, Curved w/Fine Sharp Points Scissors, Straight End, 1-Fine & 1-Blunt Point Forceps, Curved End, Medium Fine Points Forceps, Straight End, Fine Points Forceps, 4" Straight End, Super Fine Points Forceps, 4" Curved End, Super Fine Points Bone Shears, 8" Fine Point Cutters Angle Probe Teasing Needle, 6/Pk Bent Teasing Needle, 6/Pk Large Scissors, 8" Microdissection Scissors
$ 30.23 9.55 9.55 10.00 12.05 14.65 8.74 4.60 6.25 22.55 15.65 1.95 2.22 2.22 6.50 8.75
27.20 8.60 8.60 9.00 10.85 13.19 7.87 4.16 5.64 20.30 12.74 1.76 1.98 1.98 5.85 7.88
12" 17"
Height
Diameter
13" 12"
Capacity Volume Ship Wt
9 liters 14 liters
551 cu.in. 831 cu.in.
25 lbs 32 lbs
$ 497.12 1,015.04
Deluxe Dissecting Kit

An excellent choice for teachers and students!

lsh1
lshb1
lshb2
ls1s
ls1b
lfc1
lfs1
Dissecting teasing needle, angular with metal chuck. Dissecting teasing needle, straight with metal chuck. Dissecting iris scissors, 4.5". Dissecting forceps, medium point, 4.5" with guide pin. Cartilage knife with 2" blade. 1 x 2 tissue forceps. issecting scissors, one point sharp D & other point blunt, 5.5". Dissecting scalpel handle, #3. Dissecting mall probe, chrome. No. 10 blade. Vinyl, zippered case with linen. $ 20.45
Desiccant (Silica Gel)

Silica gel with indicator is an all-purpose desiccant. Can be used with our drying tubes. As the silica gel absorbs moisture, the color changes from blue to pink. Can be regenerated by heating in an oven. DR2 DR3
Ship Wt
3 lbs 10 lbs
$ 13.35 35.85
Each
12.24 32.78
3+ Before Use After Use
Tygon Tubing
Specifically formulated for lab use, Tygon 3603 tubing works with almost any inorganic chemical. Flexible and clear, it is noncontaminating, autoclavable and ideal for liquid and ozone gas transmission. Sold per foot and in 50' rolls. Add an "F" after part number for per foot.
Foot Roll 1/8" I.D. $ 1.24 TT18 51.00 TT316 3/16" I.D. 1.82 72.00 1/4" I.D. TT14 2.14 88.00
10GS
Dissecting Tray
These inexpensive, polyethylene dissecting trays include a long-lasting vinyl pad. Great for use in labs and with juvenile fish.
Each 10+
TT18 Foot Roll
TT38 TT58 TT34
3 / 8" 5 / 8" 3/4"
I.D. $ 3.59 148.00 I.D. 4.83 193.00 I.D. 7.55 345.00
DT9003 DT9005
11" x 7" x 11/2" 13" x 9" x 11/2"
$ 20.00 22.50
18.00 20.25
Drying Tubes
dt9003
Straight tubes made of unbreakable polyethylene are useful for desiccants, carbon, zeolite, cotton, etc. (not included). Can be used in low-pressure or vacuum applications with air or water. Each tube includes two end cap adapters that can be used with 1/4" to 3/8" I.D. tubing.

19960 19961 19962
4" (102 mm) 6" (152 mm) 8" (203 mm)
Overall Length
$ 1.75 2.00 2.51
Each
1.60 1.84 2.26
12+ 19961
168
Lab Equipment
Racks/Tubes/Stoppers
Wire Rack
These tough wire racks are coated with epoxy and are unaffected by organic solvents, salts, weak acids or weak bases. Epoxy coating will withstand a temperature range of -223 to 121C and can be autoclaved. Racks are three-tiered and hold up to forty 20-mm diameter tubes. Dimensions are 93/8" L x 41/2" W x 3" H. LTTW $ 31.93 30.01/6+
Foam Plugs
Autoclavable and chemical-resistant foam plugs are used for applications that require a breathable stopper. Typically used for algal cultures or any time air is being introduced into a container. Will not deform after repeated use. Diameters listed are maximums. Sold in packs of 25. FP525 #5, 16 mm $ 5.92 5.03/16+ FP625 #6, 35 mm 10.33 8.78/8+ FP725 #7, #9, #10, 44 mm, Mix 16.41 13.95/4+
Pack
Droppers
Made of polyethylene, these one-piece droppers are low priced for disposal or easily cleaned for reuse. The bellows-shaped bulb is easy to use. Graduations show the amount of liquid drawn. Sold in packs of 100. Ship weight 3 lbs. LD15 LD4 1.5 mL 4.0 mL $ 22.50 23.90
Quick Disconnects
Polyethylene quick disconnects can be used in low-pressure air applications. These allow for easy tubing disconnect. Sold in packs of 12. D727 D728 D729

1/8"1/4" (36 mm) 1/4" 3/8" (69 mm) 3/8"1/2" (913 mm)
Culture Tubes Three-Hole Stoppers

Autoclavable, natural rubber stoppers can be used as a solid one-, two- or three-hole stopper by removing the twist-off seals. HST5 HST6 HST7 HST9 HST10
Max Dia.
$ 28.33 28.33 28.33
Pack
26.63 26.63 26.63
6+
These borosilicate glass test tubes have a rubberlined screw cap, combination marking and reference spot for orientation. Caps are resistant to autoclaving and most chemicals. Perfect for microalgal and bacterial cultures. Sold in packs of 12.
Size (mm)
Test Tube Rack

Autoclavable plastic that folds flat for storage and shipping make these easy-to-assemble racks a practical choice. They don't float in water baths. Hold up to 40 tubes. 20 mm. LTTR $ 12.88 11.59/5+
#5 #6 #7 #9 #10
27 mm 32 mm 37 mm 45 mm 50 mm
$ .88 1.14 1.56 2.34 2.55
Each
.79 1.03 1.40 2.11 2.30
10+
LTT17 LTT21
16 x 150 20 x 150
Each Pack
$ 7.94 10.53
7.15 9.48
10+
Mortar and Pestle Culture Tubes

Made of borosilicate glass, these test tubes can withstand high temperatures and they reduce pH changes. Smooth rim top. Sold in packs of 25. LTT16 16 mm x 159 mm $ 5.67 4.45/10+ LTT20 20 mm x 150 mm 10.76 9.68/10+ AC79 16-mm Cap, Pk of 25 5.04 AC79-C 16-mm Cap, Cs of 1,000 82.16 AC92 20-mm Cap, Pk of 25 6.08 AC92-C 20-mm Cap, Cs of 500 83.20
Pack
Screw Clamp
Autoclavable and chemical-resistant screw clamps provide fine control of air or liquids. Can replace stopcocks. Hinged sides allow for installation without disconnecting the tubing. Accepts tubing up to 1/2" (13 mm) O.D. Sold individually. SC212 $ 6.90 6.49/5+ 5.87/25+
Constructed of heavy-duty porcelain, this set is perfect for grinding dry materials into fine powders like medications and feed additives. Mortars have a pouring lip and are glazed on outside only. Pestles are oversized for comfortable use and are glazed down to the grinding surface. MP135 MP300 MP600
Ship Wt
135 mL 300 mL 600 mL
1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs
$ 7.50 10.50 17.50
sc212 lttw
fp525
hst5
ld15
ltt17
ltt16 lttr d727 mp135
Lab Equipment
Pipettes/Bulbs
169
lpb15 ldp5
plp1 lpt1 lpt5 lpt2 lpt10
lpm1
lpt25
lp3
pr4 lpp10
Pasteur Pipettes, Disposable

Disposable glass pipettes are ideal for transferring algal cultures, etc., avoiding the risk of contamination. Ungraduated with capillary tips of approximately 1-mm inside diameter. LDP5 is 6" (15 cm) long overall and narrow portion is 5 cm; LDP9 is 9" (23 cm) long overall and narrow portion is approximately 12 cm. Sold in packs of 250. Weight 1 lb. LDP5 LDP9 15-cm Pipettes 23-cm Pipettes $ 14.87 17.11
Rubber Bulbs, High Quality

These large rubber bulbs are made to use with pipettes.
Size (mm)
LPB15 LPB35
38 x 60 45 x 66
Overall Capacity
15 mL 35 mL
Diameter
4 mm 6 mm
$ 10.94 10.94
Each
9.85 9.85
6+
Pipette Pump
Easy-to-use, easy-to-clean and very accurate. The rotating wheel can be moved forward or backward for precise filling or emptying. For rapid emptying, depress the plunger on top. Each size (16 cm is about 6") is a different color. All pumps will accept pipette diameters from 4 to 8 mm. Pumps should be selected to match the volumetric capacity of the pipette to be used.

Serological Pipettes
These polystyrene serological pipettes are both accurate and economical. The one-piece design eliminates mouthpiece and tip breakage. Pipettes feature highly legible graduations and contamination-free cotton plugs. Sold in packs of 25.

PLP1 PLP2 PLP5 PLP10
Capacity
1 mL 2 mL 5 mL 10 mL
27 cm 27 cm 30 cm 30 cm
OAL
$ 9.98 13.47 12.22 22.10
Pack
9.28 12.53 11.36 20.55
10+
LPP2 LPP10 LPP25
Capacity
2 mL 10 mL 25 mL
16 cm 16 cm 19 cm
OAL
$ 19.83 20.00 24.17
Each
18.05 18.20 21.99
12+
Pipette Rack
Designed for drying and storing glass and plastic pipettes in a vertical 5" x 10" space. Top and middle racks have 5/8" (16 mm) diameter holes, bottom deck holes are tapered from 16 mm to 6 mm. Autoclavable. PR4 $ 33.11
Transfer Pipettes
These unbreakable pipettes are made of translucent polypropylene. Highly resistant to most chemicals and have Class B-rated accuracy. LPT1 LPT2 LPT5 LPT10 LPT25
Capacity OAL Diameter Each 12+
Measuring Pipettes
Made of translucent polypropylene. Easy to read and highly chemical-resistant. Delivers to tip, last drop must be blown out. LPM1 LPM2 LPM5 LPM10
Capacity OAL Each 12+
1 mL 2 mL 5 mL 10 mL 25 mL
30 cm 30 cm 33 cm 44 cm 47 cm
5 mm 6 mm 5 mm 7 mm 8 mm
$ 11.13 11.83 21.51 28.33 28.85
10.02 10.65 19.36 25.50 25.97
Transfer Pipette, Disposable Graduated

One-piece plastic pipette with clearly marked graduations in 1-mL increments. The stem narrows down to a fine tip. 500/pack.
Capacity OAL
1 mL 2 mL 5 mL 10 mL
31 cm 36 cm 33 cm 30 cm
$ 10.00 11.00 12.00 5.20
8.70 9.57 10.52 4.42
AquaticEco.com
LP3 LP5
3 mL 5 mL
14 cm 15 cm
$ 53.65 54.46
170
Lab Equipment
Calipers/Calculator/Timers
Dial Calipers
These Swiss-made, 6" (15 cm) dial calipers measure inches on dial to .01" and in 1/64" plus mm on venier to 1.0 mm. They're made of fiberglass-reinforced nylon for use in corrosive environments. They measure outside, inside, depth and step. CD6 $ 44.25 39.83/4+
Metric Conversion Calculator
TF
This compact calculator instantly converts US to metric and metric to US for measurements of volume, area, length, temperature or weight. Unique feature allows conversion of one measurement into every other unit of measure in the same category with the press of a button. Has automatic power-off and comes in a hard carrying case. Batteries included. Measures 53/8" x 33/8" x 1/2", weighs 4 oz. MC2 $ 50.50
Stopwatch, Water-Resistant
Counts up to 24 hours in 1/100 second resolution for the first 30 minutes and a one second resolution thereafter. Also has a 12/24-hour alarm clock, calendar and an hourly chime option. Includes neck strap and battery. Dimensions: 21/2" x 2" x 1/2". 8112 $ 8.50 7.65/4+
Benchtop Draining Rack

This polystyrene/metal lab rack provides drying and storage of laboratory glassware of most any type or size. The bottom drainage tray can hold pipettes, glass rods and test tubes, and the rack also has 26 pegs. Measures 19" H x 61/2" D x 163/4" W. LD2 $ 98.62
Simultaneous Start Timer

This is the only multichannel timer on which different channels can be set independently but start simultaneously. Has one of the loudest alarms availableuseful around high background noise. Four channels count 100 hours either up or down with 1-second resolution, a fifth channel works as a calendar and alarm clock and a sixth channel is a 10-hour stopwatch with 1/100 second resolution. The timer has a built-in stand for benchtop use, clips to a pocket or sticks to any metal surface with a magnetic back. Uses one AAA battery (included); measures 21/2" x 27/8" x 1/2" and weighs 2 oz.
Each 4+
Kimwipes EX-L
Single-ply wipes are soft, nonabrasive and safe for most delicate surfaces. Wipes clean, providing extra low lint and high extractable performance. Packaged in pop-up dispenser. KW48 15" x 17", 140/Box
ship Wt
810027
$ 23.25
20.93/4+
2 lbs
$ 17.25
16.04
Timer, Extra-Extra-Loud Traceable

An easy-to-read timer that can be used in the noisiest plant or lab. One-hundreddecibel alarm clearly penetrates highnoise areas. Massive display is 3/4" high. Set any time from 99 hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds to one second. When zero is reached, timer starts counting up to show time elapsed since alarming. Additional features include stopwatch, time-out and time-of-day. Delivers accurate timing demanded by government regulations and ISO9000 requirements. Includes 2 AAA batteries. NIST-certified. Size 4" x 2" x 1/2", weighs 5 oz. 5014 $ 25.45
Aqualife Multi-Duty Cleaner

super concentrateddilute up to 20 times!
A high-quality cleaner designed for use in fish hatcheries, aquaculture facilities and fish and food processing plants. Quickly loosens organic soiling, allowing easy removal of biofilm, grease, oils, waste and more. Biodegradable, nonhazardous, phosphate-free and contains no volatile organic compounds (VOCs). NSF-certified for use in food processing facilities. AQU128 1 gallon $ 25
24.18/4+
LN1
Pail, 5-Gallon
These heavy-duty 5-gallon pails with tight fitting lids make excellent all-purpose containers. High-density polyethylene with sturdy wire bail and plastic handles. Each pail weighs under 2 lbs. Available separately or in packages of 12 in a 70-lb box that can be shipped Ground. ZBK5 BK5 Pail Pail, 1 Doz $ 9.54 115.38
Zbk5
Liqui-Nox
Liqui-Nox is a special formulation of anionic and cationic detergents and wetting agents. It has high cleaning power, yet is mild to skin and contains no phosphates. Used for cleaning glass, metal, rubber, plastic and hard-surface materials. Has a pH of 8.5 and a biodegradable base. LN1 LN4 Quart Gallon
ship Wt
3 lbs 11 lbs
$ 20.07 70.72
LN4
Alconox
Ideal for general laboratory use, Alconox cleaner is excellent for glassware, plastic, metal, porcelain and rubber. Removes grease, blood and tissue and is odorless and nontoxic. Usual dilution rate is one tablespoon to one gallon of water. Weighs 4 lbs. AX4 $ 42.64 40.08/4+
Parafilm
Used for covering the mouth of Erlenmeyer flasks, culture tubes and petri dishes. Waterproof film is .005" thick and conveniently provides transfer resistance to air, gases, alcohol and common acids. Sold in 4" wide by 125' (10 cm x 38 m) roll. Packaged in dispenser carton. Weighs 1 lb. P35 $ 25.48
Lab Equipment Scales, Hanging

to 200 lbs
These have been around for years and with good reasonthey're reliable. Three models come with a 12" x 13" x 6" deep galvanized steel scoop (shown) and all have covered faces. SB7 is "Legal for Trade." SB8, SB9 and SB90 come with an "S" hook only. One-year warranty. Made in USA. SB6 SB7* SB8 SB9 SB80 SB90 20 lbs x 1 oz, 2 revolutions 20 lbs x 1 oz, 2 revolutions, Legal 60 lbs x 1 oz, 3 revolutions 200 lbs x .5 lb, 1 revolution 20 kg x 50 g, 2 revolutions 100 kg x 500 g, 1 revolution $ 257 221 311 387 221 356
Scales
171
Scales, Spring
to 50 lbs
sb92
No more fish stories with these scales around! Brass construction with cad-plated steel spring. Guaranteed accuracy. Deeply embossed black graduations for easy reading in both lbs and kg. Made in USA. SB91 SB92 SB93 SB94 SB95
sb8
*When weighing products for sale, use a scale labeled "Legal for Trade."
sb7
2 lbs x 1/2 oz (1 kg x 20 g), 6" L 4 lbs x 1 oz (2 kg x 50 g), 61/8" L 10 lbs x 4 oz (5 kg x 100 g), 65/8" L 25 lbs x 4 oz (12.5 kg x 100 g), 83/8" L 50 lbs x 8 oz (25 kg x 250 g), 81/4" L
Each
$ 79 79 79 79 79
72 72 72 72 72
4+
Scales, Digital Hanging

to 500 lbs
These weather-resistant (not 100% waterproof) scales have 1" digital readouts and are accurate to .1%. They are mounted in aluminum cases and measure in both kg and lbs. Scales use six D batteries that can last up to one year. Weigh 8 lbs. One-year warranty. CS71 CS73 CS7 100 lbs x .05 lb 300 lbs x .1 lb 500 lbs x .2 lb $ 945 945 945
Scales, Digital Hanging

sb9
to 250 lbs
These scales are mounted in heavy plastic cases, well-suited for aquaculture uses. Shock-resistant and weather-resistant (not 100% waterproof), they measure in both kg and lbs. 1" digital readout has .1 resolution. Include stainless steel hooks and hangers. Use 9V battery (included). Weigh 2 lbs. One-year warranty. CS25 CS225 50 lbs 250 lbs $ 595 595
Scales, Electronic
The SB200, SB2 and SB5 portable balances feature full capacity tare and high-contrast LCD display reading in grams or lbs. They have a 51/2" diameter platform and operate on 3 AA batteries or AC adapter (both included). One-year warranty. The SB120 features autocalibration and a 43/4" x 61/2" platform with an AC adapter included (or use 8 AA batteries, not included). One-year warranty. SB200 SB2 SB5 SB120 SB2A Top Loading, Portable, 200 g x .1 g Top Loading, Portable, 2,000 g x 1.0 g Top Loading, Portable, 5,000 g x 2.0 g Top Loading, 2,100 g x .1 g Weigh Pan, 61/2" x 61/2" x 2" Deep
ship Wt Cs73 Cs25
Scales, Top Loading

mechanical dial type, to 132 lbs

$ 108 108 127 786 26
Dual graduation avoirdupois and metric. Shatterproof acrylic face. Rust-resistant internal parts. Manual zero-adjust knob for tare weight (10% of capacity). Polished chrome body. Platforms are 202 stainless steel. 8" face. 22 lbs x 1 oz (10 kg x 50 g), 91/2" x 91/2" Platform 44 lbs x 2 oz (20 kg x 50 g), 91/2" x 91/2" Platform 132 lbs x 8 oz (60 kg x 200 g), 12" x 12" Platform
ship Wt sb20A
sb120
sb200
SB20A SB40A SB100A
8 lbs 8 lbs 24 lbs
$ 69 69 89
172
Lab Equipment
Scales
Balance, Triple Beam

Features 3-tiered, notched beams, magnetic clamping and zero adjust compensator. Scale capacity is 610 grams, can be increased in .1 gram increments to 2,610 grams with optional weight set (set weighs 6 lbs). 18" L. Weighs 8 lbs. Made in USA. SB12-2 Triple Beam $ 155
Bench Scales
reads in kg, lbs and oz, to 440 lbs
They have a large platform with leveling feet, large LCD, membrane keypad, autozero tracking and stability indicator. The 3-way mounting bracket allows the indicator to be mounted to the scale base, above the scale platform or on any vertical surface. Powered by a 9V adapter (included) or six AA batteries (not included). Indicator stand is 4". ES6R through ES50R platforms measure 12.2" x 10.8" x 1.5", ES100L and ES200L measure 20.5" x 15.7" x 3". Platforms are stainless steel with baked enamel finish. One-year warranty. ES6R ES30R ES50R ES100L ES200L 6 kg x .002 kg 30 kg x .01 kg 50 kg x .02 kg 100 kg x .05 kg 200 kg x .1 kg
ship Wt
sb12-2
$ 545 545 545 584 584
Es6r
Es100L
Platform Scale
to 300 lbs
Detecto has a 10" dial face and 101/2" x 141/2" platform. 300 lbs x 1 lb, 3 revolutions. Overall height 36", weight 38 lbs. Shipped via motor freight. One-year warranty. Made in USA. SBP2 $ 901.67
Scale
to .001 gram.
This economically priced scale is ideal for general laboratory, industrial and educational applications. It has a capacity of 150 grams and also measures in carats, kg, mg, newtons, lbs, oz, troy oz, grains, pennyweight, mommes, mesghals, taels (3) and ticals. The diameter of the stainless steel measuring pan is 3.9". A protective draft shield ensures accuracy. 115V, comes with adapter. 13" L x 9" W, weighs 15 lbs. One-year warranty. SB1530 150 g x .001 g $ 1,136
Scales
High accuracy at an affordable price.
Large .7" LCD display reads in grams, ounces, dwt and quantity for parts counting. They have a stainless steel 41/2" weighing surface. Use 115/230V, 50/60 Hz adapter (included) or four AA batteries (not included). Auto-calibrated. Weigh 4 lbs. One-year warranty. SB41 SB42 SB43 200 g x .01 g 400 g x .1 g 600 g x .1 g $ 355 196 290
sb41
Balance, Twin Beam

Here is an inexpensive, plastic, pocket-sized, portable balance. It is perfect for use in the field or in the lab. It's accurate, dependable and requires no assembly. Balance includes dust cover and aluminum peg weight. Capacity: 4 g. Sensitivity: .05 g. Calibration: .025 g. Measures 41/2" x 13/4" x 1". Actual weight .1 lb. Made in USA. SB99 $ 11.00
Scale Weighing Boats

These rubberized weighing boats resist temperatures to 200F (93C) and fl ex readily for easy pouring. Flat bottom and shallow shape resist tipping. Biologically inert and resistant to weak acids, aqueous solutions, alcohol and chemicals. Sold in packs of 100. WP2 WP3 9 x 9 x 2.5 cm 14 x 14 x 2.2 cm $ 6.50 9.25
Pack
Scales, Handheld
the perfect portable!
Both models have energy-saving shut-off feature and a large LCD display. The weigh pans measure 3". Both units run on two AAA alkaline batteries (included). Weigh in grams, ounces, troy ounces and pennyweight (dwt). The SB564 features a backlit display and protective cover. Ship weight 3 lbs. One-year warranty. SB563 SB564 120 g x .2 g 320 g x .1 g $ 135 167
sb564
5.84 8.32
10+
WP2
Lab Equipment
Safety/Cleaning
173
Gloves, Low-Cost Nitrile

This is a 100% nitrile, nonlatex, utility-grade glove, lightly dusted with USP-grade cornstarch. N-DEX Original gloves are ambidextrous, 91/2" long, 4-mil and sold 100 gloves to a box. Not sterile. Weigh 2 lbs/box. GL701 GL702 GL703 Medium Large X-Large $ 15.76/Box 15.76/Box 15.76/Box
GL701
Hardwood Handle, Threaded

Use it with our 10" deck brush (BD1) and other threaded brushes, squeegees, etc. Has wooden threads. BH1 $ 6.85 6.42/4+
Hardwood Handle, Tapered Gloves, Nitrile

Nitri Master gloves feature nitrile strength, durability and chemical resistance in a flexible, low-modulus glove that is lower in cost than traditional gloves. These gloves are manufactured using special ergonomically designed forms to reduce fatigue and GL801 enhance comfort. The embossed tractortread finish gives a vice-like grip in wet and dry situations and actually helps channel away hazardous chemicals from the surface of the 11-mil glove. Sold in packs of 12 pairs. Ship weight 2 lbs. GL801 GL802 GL803 Medium Large X-Large $ 21.32/Doz 21.32/Doz 21.32/Doz 11/8" in diameter and 60" long. Use it with our 24" (BS2) and 36" (BS3) squeegees and others. BS1 $ 7.75 6.98/4+
Floor Squeegees
Heavy Neoprene blade for rough use. Galvanized steel frame and handle socket. Uses tapered wood handle (BS1), sold separately. BS2 BS3 (24") (36") $ 30.00 38.00
bs3 bs2 Each 4+
28.27 35.38
Gloves, Thick Nitrile

CrG1
Nitrile, solvent-resistant gloves will not weaken or swell like rubber and Neoprene in many solvents. Good wet grip and embossed finish help make wet handling easier and safer. Resistant to many solvents, acids, caustics, alcohol, oils, fats and grease. Gloves are 13" in length and 11 mil thick. Available in small, medium and large in packs of 12 pairs. Weigh 2 lbs. CRG1 CRG2 CRG3 Small Medium Large $ 33.28 33.28 33.28
Utility Brushes
These are excellent acidproof brushes for all types of scrubbing, including fish tanks, wheels, floors, boats, sumps, etc. The fill (bristles) are 2" long for deep cleaning and the handles are solid plastic. BU1 BU2 9" OAL 20" OAL $ 6.20 9.25
Each
5.56 8.27
4+ bU2
Apron
This PVC apron is 20 mil thick with extra long cloth neck and waist ties. PVC grommets are welded to apron for greater strength and longer wear. FDA-accepted. Measures 35" x 45". 05-157GR $ 9.00 7.65/10+
bU1
Deck Brush
This is a 10" wide, heavy-duty scrub brush with 17/8" plastic fill for wet cleaning of floors and tanks. Waxed wood block has one threaded hole. BD1 $ 8.60 7.88/4+
Corner Brush Safety Goggles

Comfortable protection at a low price! PVC frames with polycarbonate lenses. Meets ANSI Z87.1-1989. Splash and Impact $ 4.85 4.37/6+
The corner brush is designed to clean corners, crevices, and other hard-to-reach areas. It has synthetic bristles and the handle has a 45-degree angle design. For a long reach, the brush has a connection that allows attachment to a male threaded broom handle or telescopic pole. CB003 $ 10.25 9.23/4+
GL2218
174
Cleaning
Brushes/Sanitation System
Foam Brushes
A variety of sizes and shapes makes these foam brushes ideal for delicate labware. Acid-resistant foam bristles will gently scrub glassware without scratching. Use with acrylic or any other delicate material. BR55 BR60 BR130

Carboy Brushes
A hinged joint and a wooden handle make the CBR8 great for use in carboys and flasks as well as other glassware. The 7" brush is made of nylon bristles, while smaller brushes are made of hog bristles. CBR8 CBR12 CBR16
br55
Glassware Brush Short Glassware Brush Long Lab Brush
7/8" 23/4"
Dia.
OAL
3"
16" 10" 19"
$ 6.45 5.12 6.18
Each
5.94 4.72 5.67
12+
7" x 13/4" Dia. Brush 31/2" x 11/2" Dia. Brush 4" x 15/8" Dia. Brush
OAL
22" 16" 14"
$ 17.68 8.58 11.96
Each
15.92 7.73 10.77

cbr16
12+
br60
cbr12
cbr8 br130
Assorted Brushes
These brushes can be used for any cleaning application, including glassware. A wide variety of shapes and sizes provides a brush for every need. The snake brush is great for cleaning pipes and the smaller brushes are useful for hard-to-reach fittings. The 3-piece kit (BR122) has one brush 5" x 11/2", 14" OAL; one brush 1" x 11/4", 8" OAL; and one brush 5/16" x 1", 8" OAL. Made in USA. BR25 BR33 BR68 BR80 BR87 BR122 BR129 BR225

Pipette Brush
Tapering bristles from 1/4" to 3/4" x 71/2" L. Overall length is 17". B17 $ 4.55
Deluxe Bottle Brush 11/2" x 5" 14" 3/8" x 3" Spout Brush 13" Brush w/10' Snake 4" x 2" 120" 5/8" x 1/2" Brush w/10" Snake 15" Long Handle Brush 2" x 6" 22" 3-Piece Brush Kit (see above for specs) 2-in-1 Brush 11/2" x 4" 14" 5/8" x 6" Test Tube Brush 8"
Dia. x Length
OAL
$ 3.60 3.60 10.45 4.70 4.75 7.35 3.80 3.80
Each
3.24 3.24 9.41 4.23 4.28 6.62 3.42 3.42
12+
Bottle Brush
Bristles mounted on galvanized wire handle for use with cylinders, large tubes and bottles. Brush is 5" L x 2" dia. Overall length is 16". B16 $ 4.68
br25
Tubing Brush
br33
Galvanized wire handle with white bristles for cleaning burets, pipettes and long tubing. Brush is 51/4" L x 11/2" dia. Overall length is 36". B36 $ 3.95
br68
Test Tube Brushes

Radial tufted tip and tapered design for cleaning test tubes and bottles. B9 B10 3" L x 7/16" Dia. (9" Overall Length) 31/2" L x 3/4" Dia. (10" Overall Length) $ 2.55 2.55
b9 br122
br129
My question was answered quickly and thoroughly. You guys run a great operation. With your outstanding prices and attentive customer service, I'll definitely be a repeat customer. Thanks so much.
br225
Joshua Ramirez
Cleaning Gravel Vacuum by Python

No more need for heavy, messy buckets!
The Python No Spill Clean 'N Fill system simplifies water changes and tank maintenance. It connects to most water faucets for use with aquariums, ponds, bioassay tanks and small recirculating systems. The unique faucet pump enables the siphoning of water efficiently without spills. Unlike garden hoses, the Python system uses UV-stabilized tubing, which eliminates the possibility of adding hose-borne toxins to fish tanks. Each Python system is completely assembled, ready to use and includes hose, 10" gravel tube, hose connectors, faucet pump and faucet adapters. Made in USA. PY25 PY50 PY75 PY100 PY10X PY20X PY13B PY07F PY06F PY13C PY13A PY69HD PY24 Python System, 25' Python System, 50' Python System, 75' Python System, 100' Extension Hose, 10' Extension Hose, 20' Pump Male Connector Female Connector Flow Switch Faucet Adapter, Plastic Faucet Adapter, Brass Repl. Gravel Tube, 24" $ 35.50 59.00 82.00 104.00 10.95 17.50 5.50 2.95 3.85 4.15 2.95 4.00 11.75
Aquariums
175
Siphons
These gravel vacuums are great for cleaning out detritus from aquarium tanks. They have a 6' x 1/4" I.D. hose, angled tube and easy grip handle. GS1 GS2 GS3 GS4
tube Diameter tube Length
1" 15/8" 17/8" 17/8"
12" 11" 14" 24"
$ 5.60 6.95 8.95 12.55

Gs1
Magi-Klean Pump and Accessory Cleaner

Safely removes lime/calcium deposits in 3 simple steps. Can be used anywhere where deposits have formed, including pumps, skimmers, heaters, filters and pipeworks. Removes even the toughest deposits simply and efficiently. Suitable for decalcifying any piece of equipment that can be removed from the aquarium. Includes three single-dose pouches; each creates 1/2 gallon of soaking solution. D10101 $ 9.95
PY25
Glass/Acrylic Cleaner
Clean the inside of your aquarium without getting your hands wet!
These super-strong magnets are lined with a soft felt for the outside and a cleaning material that won't scratch the inside. Mag-Floats scrape away tough algae stains, stay together around corners and float if knocked apart. MF41 MF32 130A 360A 4" x 1" 3" x 2" 4" x 1" 3" x 2" Glass Glass Acrylic Acrylic
Use on
$ 12.75 24.90 11.90 24.65
Each
11.48 22.41 10.64 22.19
4+
mf41
Important
bubble wall installed to deflect floating aquatic debris.
176
Cleaning
Disinfectants
Hazmat AG
Potassium Permanganate
Virkon Aquatic Disinfectant
TF
Technical grade KMnO4 (97% minimum potassium permanganate) is a strong oxidizer that works by oxidizing organic and inorganic materials that are major consumers of oxygen (does not add oxygen to the water). Sold in 5-lb plastic jars only. We cannot ship more than six jars per carton. Must ship with hazardous label. Ships Ground. PTP5 $ 46.50 43.25/4+
Virkon Aquatic is a highly effective disinfectant specifically formulated for use in aquaculture facilities. Generally used for cleaning equipment, instruments and in footbaths. Ideal for controlling a wide variety of viral, bacterial and fungal pathogens. Mix at a rate of 1.3 oz per gal of water. One gallon of solution treats 135 sq.ft.; 10 lbs make 123 gal of solution. Solution remains stable for seven days. A 1% solution is an effective disinfectant against VHS. EPA-registered (registration pending in California). VKS10 10-lb Container $ 88.00 77.44/4+
Povidone Iodine 10%

This product is a buffered, FDA-registered fish egg disinfectant that works well when applied to the egg surface of salmonids. It is effective against a wide variety of fungi, viruses and bacteria. One gallon (3.8 liters) ship weight is 11 lbs. Sodium thiosulfate (ST1/ST1A) can be used to neutralize iodine disinfectants. Made in USA. ID10 $ 30.20 27.48/4+
Chloramine-T
Typically used as an antiseptic and odor control agent. It can also eradicate parasites and bacteria when cleaning tanks and equipment. Chloramine-T is stable in aqueous solutions for many months when kept in the dark. It can inhibit nitrifi cation and should not be used in systems with a biofilter unless the biofilter is taken offline first. Remove with activated carbon before putting the biofilter back online. Not FDA-approved for use on food fish. CHT55 55 lbs $ 399.36 379.39/4+
Sanitizing Door Mat

This rubber mat holds 1 gallon of liquid sanitizing solution. Ship weight 11.3 lbs. RM2 $ 76.85
Aquatic Habitats Cyclobio in a recirculating system used by a major restaurant.
Lab installation in the northeast.
Algae Removal/Vacuums
Cleaning
177
Algae Twister
Conveniently remove filamentous algae (string and blanket algae) from fish and ornamental ponds. Simply rotate the circular head in a twisting motion to scrape algae from rocks and liners. The aluminum head is 3.5" in diameter and has ridged teeth. Plastic handle is 24", adjustable up to 43". ATW100 $ 26.55 24.78/4+
Ultra Pro Wet/Dry Vac by Shop-Vac

This vacuum has a built-in pump and float switch combination that automatically pumps itself out using a standard garden hose. It has a tank capacity of 14 gallons and is rated at 5.5 hp. Vacuum includes 8' x 21/2" diameter flexible vacuum hose, two 21/2" extension wands, a 14" floor nozzle with brush, squeegee, 8" utility nozzle, crevice tool, concentrator nozzle, elbow grip, hose holder and accessory basket. Foam sleeve, cartridge filter and disposable filter bag are also included. Vacuum is 115V/60 Hz with an 18' power cord. Weighs 20 lbs. Four-year warranty. SVU100 $ 207
Cordless Pond Cleaner

Remove waste and debris from your pond with this lightweight, cordless pond vacuum from Laguna. Its adjustable telescopic shaft extends from 57" to 92.5" (145 cm to 235 cm), and its two rotating blades break up debris before it enters the attached bag. Rechargeable lithium battery with charger included. 18.5VDC, 61 W. PT945 $ 399.79
Muck-Vac
Vacuums muck, fish waste, etc., from ponds and fountains and discharges the waste water to a garden area or lawn, making an excellent fertilizer. Built with no moving parts, each system includes a Muck-Vac head vacuum, extendable (3' to 6') telescopic pole, waste hose (81/2' long), garden hose adapter and brush. Requires a hose pressure of 50 psi to operate. MV25 $ 82.45
Patriot Cleaner
This economical, automatic vacuum is an easy and efficient way to keep your water sparkling clean. Ample vacuum hose provides superior cleaning range, and the universal skimmer fitting allows it to adapt to most skimmers. Also has a buoyancy ring for precise vacuuming. One-year warranty.
After just one pass with the muck-vac!
PATVAC
$ 115.38
Will lift 3' high once a siphon is established. rake out leaves first, then clean up with a muck-vac.
before cleaning.
Pool Hose
This pool hose can be used for pools (yes, really!), cleaning fish ponds and siphoning water, etc., because it will not collapse. Hose cuffs fit snugly on a 11/2" barbed fitting and swivel to prevent kinking. 11/2" diameter. Made in USA. HP525 HP535 HP524 HP526 HP527 Pool Hose, Residential, 25' Pool Hose, Commercial, 35' Replacement Cuff Replacement Swivel Cuff Replacement Hose Mender $ 32.55 60.25 3.02 5.95 6.00
Each
Leaf Trap
Designed for in-line applications, this leaf trap will catch debris when vacuuming the bottom of ponds and/or siphoning, etc. The housing is clear plastic. The screw-off lid and internal bag are easily removed for cleaning. An internal strainer basket supports the 1/16" mesh bag (included). Fits standard 11/2" pool hose. LT6 $ 39.75
29.72 55.18
4+
Clear Leaf Trap

This heavy-duty, in-line leaf trap collects leaves and other debris when vacuuming ponds. The clear plastic housing allows you to see debris collected. Features a snap open/close lid and large handle. Traps include a standard polyester bag (1/16" mesh) and 3' of fl exible 11/2" hose. The optional sand/silt bag (about 150 microns) is designed to collect fine material. The canvas bag retains material down to 50 microns. The basket is vinyl-coated metal with 1/8" openings and works well when you only want to trap larger debris. Dimensions 20" long x 6" diameter. Ship weight 4 lbs. Fits standard 11/2" pool hose. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 Clear Leaf Trap, 11/2" Standard Mesh Bag, 1/16" Sand/Silt Fine Mesh Bag Canvas Bag for Leaf Trap $ 93.00 9.25 12.50 31.65
hp525
Technician Profile
marcela hincapie
Marcela has a B.S. degree in marine biology from UJTL in Colombia and an M.S. degree from the University of Maine. She has worked in the marine and freshwater aquaculture field raising different species of shrimp and fish in flow-through and recirculation systems in warm and coldwater environments. Her specialties include hatchery and growout phase.
Lt1
178
Tongs
Cleaning
Tongs/Scrapers/Scrubbers
Algae Scrubber
Perfect for cleaning algae from aquarium and tank walls. Handle is approximately 15" long. For use with acrylic and glass aquariums. AG5B $ 6.95 6.26/4+
Handy tongs allow you to pick up and move objects in your tank without your hands ever touching the water. Great for replanting, moving rocks, etc. Plastic tongs are 18" long. TG18 $ 4.35 3.70/4+
Algae Scrapers Aqua Tongs

These powerful tongs feature a 4.5" squeezable grip for grabbing rocks, corals and other decorations out of tanks. Built with stainless steel and plastic components, so they will not rust. Keeps hands out of water to reduce contamination. AF9502 AF9501 AF9500

Designed for removing tough algae from aquarium tanks, these nonmetallic algae scrapers will not scratch glass or acrylic. The PR24 has a 20" fiberglass handle and the PR35 has a 32" handle. PR24R will replace blades for both PR24 and PR35. PR2 PR3 PR24 PR35 PR2R PR24R Pr3-mop

22" 28" 34"
OAL
$ 30.95 31.95 35.50
Each
27.24 28.12 31.60
4+
af9502
ProScraper, Small ProScraper, Medium ProScraper, 20" ProScraper, 32" Replacement Blade, 11/2" Replacement Blade, 3" Mop Attachment
$ 4.50 4.10 18.50 25.00 2.10 2.55 4.15
Each
4.04 3.69 16.65 22.50 1.89 2.30 3.74
4+
pr2
pr3
11/2"
7"
Oil Boom
Protect aquatic animals and the environment by using these oil-absorbing booms in boat bilges, around machinery or where oil may flow to the water. Each 4" x 15" boom is held in a net bag ready to absorb up to 2 quarts of oil. Does not absorb water. SX20 $ 15.95 13.93/6+
pr24 3"
Heavy-Duty Scrub Pad

This heavy-duty scrub pad is acrylic safe and mounted on a molded ABS back for tough cleaning. Swivel-joint handle keeps the pad flat on the surface regardless of the anglegreat for hard-to-reach spots. Perfect for large tanks and public displays. Pad is 10" L x 41/2" W x 1" thick. See p.179 for Snap-Adapt poles.

Algae Pads
These handheld algae pads are ideal for removing unsightly algae from tanks, aquariums, etc. Material is easily washed and long lasting. White algae pads will not scratch acrylic and plexiglass tanks. Blue algae pads are very coarse and will scratch acrylic surfaces; however, they are ideal for glass, polyethylene and hard surfaces. AG3 AG3c AG3A AG3Ac AG4 AG4c AG4A AG4Ac 3" x 3" Blue (Glass) 3" x 3" Blue (Glass), 24-Pk 3" x 3" White (Acrylic) 3" x 3" White (Acrylic), 24-Pk 4" x 6" Blue (Glass) 4" x 6" Blue (Glass), 24-Pk 4" x 6" White (Acrylic) 4" x 6" White (Acrylic), 24-Pk $ 2.50 54.00 2.50 54.00 5.00 108.00 5.00 108.00
ag4
MP5 111561
Multipurpose Scrubber Replacement Pad
Ship Wt
2 lbs 1 lb
$ 18.85 2.65
Each
2.38
12+
mp5
Brush with Nylon Bristles

These curved, heavy-duty brushes are ideal for cleaning tanks, ponds and raceways. Made of ABS plastic, they feature UV-resistant bristles and have Snap-Adapt handles to fit our poles (see Index).

BU18
18" Brush
Ship Wt
2 lbs
$ 8.85
Each
8.27
4+
ag3
ag3a
Cleaning Mini Pond Vacuum

Small jobs don't need a pump, just a garden hose.
Designed for use with a garden hose, this mini vacuum is a great gadget for cleaning koi ponds and small tanks. The vacuum comes with a silt bag/leaf trap, hose adapter, shutoff valve and Snap-Adapt handle. Includes brush attachment for soft surfaces like liners and a nozzle/wheel attachment for rougher surfaces. Fits any of our Snap-Adapt poles (pole not included). Ship weight 2 lbs. VAC4 Pond Vac $ 23.25 201696 Repl. Leaf/Coarse Bag 6.55 201716 Repl. Silt/Fine Bag 6.00
Vacuums
179
Commercial Vacuum Head

This commercial-duty, chrome-plated, brass vacuum head is sure to shorten your cleaning time for raceways, fish tanks and ponds. Overall unit width is 12" with a suction width of 101/2". It features a "Balanced Design" and a unique four-wheel suspension system, utilizing Delrin wheels on height-adjusting eccentrics. The nonmarking wheels and the internal brush adjust to control the height and the amount of suction. Use any suction tubing (pool hose works best) with a 11/2" I.D. and bolt it to a handle measuring 11/4" O.D. Made in USA.

AV17 AV17R
Vacuum Head Replacement Wheels (Set of 4)
$ 226.00 18.35
Each
17.25
4+
vac4 av17
Extending Poles
Designed for use with pond and tank vacuums, scrub brushes and other attachments with plastic locking bi-pins. Snap-Adapt PVC poles are three-piece, 11/4" O.D. in size, so you can make a 2', 4', 6', 8' or 10' pole. Telescoping aluminum pole is twopiece, 71/2' with 11/4" O.D. Made in USA.

Vacuum Heads
Constructed of polyethylene with lead weights molded in, these flexible vacuum heads are ideal for bottom cleaning of koi ponds, tanks, raceways and swimming pools. The suction chamber converges the suction velocity equally from both ends. The heads have adjustable wheels to control vacuum velocity. Each includes a Snap-Adapt handle to fit our poles and 11/2" vacuum hose swivel connection. VAC12 VAC14 VAC22 VAC11

BH75 BH10
Telescoping Aluminum Snap-Adapt PVC
$ 14.40 20.45
Each
12.96 18.41
4+
Vacuum Head, 12" Vacuum Head, 14" Vacuum Head, 22" Replacement Wheels
Ship Wt
5 lbs 7 lbs 9 lbs 1 lb
$ 75.00 76.95 100.00 9.59
vac12
bh10
Pick-Up Vac
For quick little cleanups.
This vacuum is simple and inexpensive. It needs no pump and no water hookups. Simply place your thumb over the end cap hole, place the vac into the water, release your thumb and watch the sand, pennies and even small pebbles float into the 31/4" diameter clear polycarbonate chamber. Remove the lower cup assembly to empty the contents and rinse. It's that easy! The overall length is 57", which extends to 90" with an anodized aluminum pole (included). The vacuum inlet is 3" x 1/4". Weighs 2 lbs. PV03 $ 49.30
Leaf Eater
The Pond Leaf Eater removes leaves and other debris from ponds with power provided by a garden hose! Swivel wheels for easy turning. Filter bags slip on and off quickly. Standard bag (included) is for leaves and detritus, sand/silt bag is a finer mesh bag for smaller particulates. The Snap-Adapt handle fits our poles. LF1 LF2 LF3 LF4

Pond Leaf Eater Sand/Silt Bag Replacement Bag, Standard Replacement Wheels for LF1
Ship Wt
4 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 38.95 9.90 16.50 4.90
lf1
LF4 replacement wheels.
180
Predator Control
Repellent/Scaring Devices
Scarecrow
Motion-activated sprinkler.
The patented Scarecrow keeps unwanted animals out of the garden and away from ponds. When its motion detector detects movement, the Scarecrow instantly sprays a 3-second pulsating burst of water from your garden hose. Animals quickly get out of the area and avoid it in the future. It uses only 3 cups of water per activation and will detect animals day and night. Easy to install. It has a detection range of 35' and 105 of coverage. Uses one 9V battery (not included). Weighs 2 lbs. CR101 $ 79.95
Sonic Cannon
This cannon provides regulated sonic blasts to frighten and disorient birds. Operates unattended continuously for 40 seconds to 30 minutes, depending on pressure setting. Can only be fired via the timerno remote firing is possible. Use the optional hand-wound timer for running durations of 10 hours minimum to 18 hours maximum per day. Timer must be wound at least every 9 days. Blast is generated by propane gas. A 20-lb tank (not included) will provide approximately 17,000 detonations. Volume of blast is adjustable from 100125 dB. Optional tripod elevates the cannon and allows the unit to rotate approximately 60 degrees with the impact of each blast. Must be 21 or older to purchase. Made in USA. ZM3 ZM4 ZM5

Animal Deterrent
Wireless!
Animal Away utilizes powerful, high-pitched frequencies to deter animals from a given area. Inaudible to humans, animals find it very uncomfortable and quickly move away. Unlike other systems that emit constant sound, this gadget has an infrared motion detector that activates when animals approach within 45'. Wireless operation allows it to be used almost anywhere. Operates on a 9V battery (not included). Weighs 3 lbs.
7810
Cannon Tripod Timer
Ship Wt
21 lbs 13 lbs 7 lbs
$ 359 166 125
zm3
zm5
Gator Guard
This life-size replica of an alligator head is what every pond owner needs to keep geese, ducks and fish-eating birds away. The rubber gator head is wrapped around a floating frame that stays completely on top of the water. Its mirror-backed eyes flash in the sun. Can be free-floating or tethered (cord not included). 25" long. 2214G $ 75.90
7810 B-9V 9V Battery
$ 43.80 40.81/4+ 3.20
Mosquito Dunks and Mosquito Bits

Used by professionals for more than a decade, Mosquito Dunks kill mosquito larvae before they mature. They are all-natural, environmentally safe and easy to use. Simply place the Mosquito Dunks in a pond, water garden or standing water. They work for more than 30 days! Each dunk will treat up to 100 sq.ft. of surface area, regardless of depth. Mosquito Bits kill fastwithin 24 hoursand are environmentally sound for biological mosquito control. Simply sprinkle in any standing water or water gardens. They last up to 48 hours. One tablespoon treats up to 75 sq.ft. Bacillus thuringiensis israelensis is a naturally occurring soil bacterium for control of mosquito larvae. It is an EPA-registered insecticide that is safe for mammals. Made in USA. DK6 MOS36 Mosquito Dunks, 6/Pk Mosquito Bits, 36 oz $ 10.75 12.90 9.64/4+ 11.61/4+
dk6
Polyclips
These unique fasteners are ideal for attaching predator netting and shade cloth to support rope and wires. Constructed of tough polypropylene, they can be used over and over again. Simply snap over the edge of the material and attach to 3/8" support wire. Recommended spacing is one polyclip per 2' (depending on load). Bulk quantity available. PC1 Each $ .60 / pc125 25-Pk 13.50
mos36
Shade Cloth
Our premium shade cloth is the knitted type, which will last over 15 years in the tropical sun. This cloth is useful for shading tanks to reduce algae, prevent sun damage to fish and reduce water temperature. It is also useful for predator control, visibility screening and, of course, shading plants. Offered in 3 densities to block 30, 50 or 70% of the sun. Made of UV-resistant plastic. We stock 12' wide rolls that are sold in 10' L increments or full 300' rolls only. 10' and 20' widths are also available in full rolls. SC30 SC30R SC50 SC50R SC70 SC70R
te2 Full Roll Shade Length
Bird Scaring Device

Now 6" larger.
Controls sea gulls, crows, blackbirds, pigeons, sparrows and others. Its low price will be paid for many times over through a reduction in losses. This 20" diameter "predator eye" has been widely used with a great deal of success. Six reflective eyes surround the ball mimicking owls and hawks. The number to install per acre varies with each application. Colors may be mixed for quantity prices. TE2 TE3

30% 30% 50% 50% 70% 70%
300' 300' 300'
Width
12' 2.8 lbs/120 ft2 12' 83 lbs/3,600 ft2 12' 2.8 lbs/120 ft2 12' 83 lbs/3,600 ft2 12' 4.6 lbs/120 ft2 12' 138 lbs/3,600 ft2
Ship Wt
$ 36/10' 690/Roll 42/10' 887/Roll 54/10' 1,205/Roll
621.00/2+ 798.00/2+ 1,145.00/2+
Yellow White
$ 7.85 7.85
Each
6.95 6.95
6+
sc30
sc50
sc70
Predator Control
Netting
181
Square Mesh Netting

Predator barrier.
Predator control can be a significant problem for outdoor fish farmers. After years of experimenting for long term solutions, the industry has determined that only a physical barrier can guarantee that predators are kept out. That is why we offer this animal barrier netting. Lightweight, black plastic netting is easily supported by plastic wire, forming a low-cost bird and small animal barrier (the larger the mesh, the lower the wind load). UV-resistant to last at least four years in the tropics. Select from 3 mesh sizes. Average strand diameter (ASD) in inches is shown. N22 N22L N1677 N1678

1/2" x 1/2", 1/2" x 1/2", 5/8" x 3/4", 5/8" x 3/4",
Polypropylene Netting
This black, woven polypropylene netting can be used for many applications, including fish cages and predator control. The knotless design prevents injury to fish. The square mesh predator netting is one of the highest quality made. Whether covering a large pond or small raceway, this netting will provide a good physical barrier. It is highly UV-resistant. Smaller mesh sizes may be used for predator control but also make ideal material for fish cages. BN series netting is lightweight and has a tensile strength of 30 lbs. BX series netting is heavy-duty and has a tensile strength of 60 lbs. All sizes can ship Ground. Ask for a sample before you order, and we'll mail it to you for free. Made in USA. BN1* BX7 BX8 BX6 BN3 BN4 BX9 BX11 BN5 BX12 BX13
Mesh Size
1/6" 1/2" 1/2" 3/8"
Width x Length
14' x 50' 14' x 100' 14' x 50' 17' x 100'
.018 .018 .015 .015
ASD
Ship Wt
1 lb 2 lbs 5 lbs 8 lbs
$ 108.17 211.78 52.69 94.28
1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 2" 2"
7'8" x 150' 6' x 100' 12' x 100' 6' x 100' 12' x 100' 25' x 100' 25' x 100' 25' x 150' 50' x 150' 25' x 150' 50' x 150'
$ 219 214 366 206 102 182 388 552 538 277 534
*Ships Oversize.
N22
N1677 bx7/bx8 bn1 bx6 bx9/bx11
Nylon Wire
This nylon wire can be used for controlling birds. At one-eighth the weight of steel wire, yet just as strong, it will not stretch or sag under hot or cold temperature extremes the way fishing line will. Sun-resistant and not affected by chemicals or pesticides. Blends in well with the environment. The aluminum sleeves are excellent for securing the ends of the wire. Wire tensioners (1 per wire) are optional for getting wires very tight. NW12-1000 NW12R-8000 NW8-500 NW12S NW8S NW349 NW549

Netting for Garden Ponds

This lightweight netting is designed to protect ponds from leaves, debris and small animals. 3/8" mesh. Average strand diameter is .01".
Ship Wt
Wire, 12 Gauge 1,100' 522 lbs Wire, 12 Gauge 8,000' 522 lbs Wire, 8 Gauge 500' 1,130 lbs Sleeves for 12- & 14-Gauge Wire, 100/Pk Sleeves for 8-Gauge Wire, 100/Pk Wire Tensioner (In-Line Tightener) Nylon Wire Cutters
Spool Tensile Length Strength
Ship Wt
02307 02314 02328
7' x 10' 14' x 14' 28' x 28'
1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs
$ 14.85 23.46 72.13

02307
6 lbs 25 lbs 23 lbs 1 lb 1 lb .2 lb 1 lb
$ 58.55 424.00 72.80 24.90 37.25 7.10 32.60
Premium Predator Netting

This 2" x 2" square bird netting is truly top shelf. Its woven nylon material is easier to work with than solid strand materials. Orders larger than 2,000 ft2 are custom cut to your exact specifications, so you won't buy what you don't need. It's rated at approximately 100 lbs of tensile strength and can last five years or more! Ship weight 9 lbs. Average strand diameter is .05". Made in USA. NP1 NP2 14' x 50' 2,000 ft2 or More $ 169.00 .20/ft 2
Simply create a grid (from 1' to 6' on center) above the pond or area to be protected, and it will strongly deter birds.
No. 12 knotted nylon, dyed black. For custom sizes allow two weeks for delivery.
182
Nets
Traps
Animal Tongs
These lightweight aluminum tongs are like an extension to your arm! Easy to squeeze cast aluminum handle and jaws. Use for feeding, retrieval and handling. Weighs 1.6 lbs.
Tech Talk 107

Getting Started in Aquaculture
How Do I Get into the Aquaculture Business?
By coming up with a business plan that can't fail and having a lot of money, skill, patience and energy. As you know, most new businesses don't make it. Aquaculture businesses are especially difficult because of the slim margins, burdensome government regulations, lengthy start-up time, live animal constraints, diseases, power outages, unreliable vendors and fluctuating market prices. A beginner in aquaculture must first learn as much as possible about the needs of the species to be cultured. Use books, videos, publications, extension agents, schools and especially other people in the same business. Only if you think of a way to make a lot of money should you go to the next step, which is doing a detailed business plan. After you have included everything you can think of, have the plan carefully scrutinized by a minimum of three businessmen who are knowledgeable in that type of business. Do not dismiss their objections! Here are some things to address in your business plan specific to aquaculture:
Animal Grabbers
This cast aluminum grabber is a horizontal rubber covered jaw for moving animals with ease. Maximum jaw opening is 35/8", minimum is 1". Weighs 1.5 lbs.
Snake Hook
Handle snakes at a safe distance with this professional lightweight tool. Hollow chrome golf club shaft and nonslip rubber grip. The hook is aluminum. Weighs .5 lb.
Snare Pole
For a more heavy-duty tool, use the snare pole. It can be used to handle wild or domestic animals safely. The pole is aluminum tubing with rubber handgrips and a spring-loaded 5/8" diameter cable locking/release system. Capture loop measures 12" in diameter and closes to 1" diameter. Weighs 2.2 lbs. HT25 HT40 HT52 AG384 SH40 SP48 Cage Tongs, 25" Handling Tongs, 40" Extra Long Tongs, 52" Animal Grabber, 38" Snake Hook, 40" Snare Pole, 48" $ 69.95 69.95 86.15 89.60 34.00 127.00
ack of funding is the number one cause of business failure. This applies L to aquaculture. Time and expense to meet government regulations before even beginning. Site selection. Don't try to make a bad location work. Include cost for crop insurance, if available. onsider starting small, even at the hobby level, to learn all husbandry C aspects, growth rates, costs, etc., and to get a feel for marketing. onsider niche businesses that do not sell product at commodity prices C but rather specialty or value-added products at higher prices.
ht25
ht40
If you do come up with a plan that shows the business can be highly profitable, you can only proceed if you will have enough money to operate the business with zero income until after the first successful crop has been sold and paid for and that could be a long time.
ht52
This is not a pessimistic view of the aquaculture business but rather a realistic one. Don't become a statistic; only start a for-profit business if your business plan is rock solid and you really love the business.
ag384
sh40
sp48
Various species can be grown for profit.
Crustacean Farming: Ranching and Culture, Second Edition

Investigates all cultivated crustaceans of commercial significanceshrimp, prawns, crayfish, lobsters, crabs and spiny lobstersand examines the criteria by which both the feasibility and desirability of farming proposals are assessed. The characteristics and production methods are described in detail. The text covers bloodstock acquisition and management, the operation of hatcheries and nurseries and on-growing units. John F. Wickins and Daniel O'C. Lee. Hardcover. 464 pages. WQB92 $ 239
An example of a small commercial hatchery. Please see the Index for our complete selection of fish farming products.
Nets Fish Trap, Plastic

This trap has a longer life than comparable metal traps in alkaline, brackish and salt water because it is all plastic with no sharp edges. The two halves hinge together. Measures 17" long x 9" wide at largest diameter with 3/16" (4.8 mm) square mesh for minnow-sized fish, 7/8" (22 mm) diameter entrance hole. MT1 $ 9.25 7.29/12+
Traps
183
Minnow Traps, Large

You don't have to seine your pond for small fish or minnows. Just place one or more of these high-quality, handmade minnow traps in the water and come back when it's convenient to harvest them. Made from galvanized steel, wood frames (with a waterproof sealer), zinc-coated screws, and steel and aluminum rivets. The 1/4" galvanized wire will last for years. Easy-slide doors are located for rapid unloading. These traps are large, but very light in weight. To avoid Oversize charges, we will only ship by US Postal Service (USPS). Order early as it could take up to 3 weeks for delivery in some seasons. Trap styles may be mixed to get the quantity price. Made in USA.

Traps, Galvanized
These fish traps are made of heavily galvanized wire. The traps are 16" (42 cm) L x 9" (23 cm) wide at largest diameter and have a 7/8" (22 mm) diameter entrance hole. The MT2 1/4" (6.4 mm) square mesh traps minnow size fish and the MT28 1/8" (3.2 mm) square mesh is for smaller fish. The MT21 measures 31" long and has a removable 15" center piece, making it ideal for large minnows and eels. The crawfish traps (MT22) are similar to our MT2 minnow traps; however, the entrance hole is enlarged to 21/4" diameter. They have 1/4" mesh and measure 31" long. The minnow keeper (MT23) is a small cage that is similar in design to the MT2 minnow traps; however, it has flat ends to keep aquatic animals in their environment. Measures 31" long with 1/4" mesh. Ship weight is 2 lbs each. MT28 MT2 MT21 MT22 MT23

CL1528 Cloverleaf
15"
A B
28"
Ship Wt
70 lbs
226.72
Note: Other types available via special order.
Spat Bags
These bags are very commonly used for collecting scallop larvae and as oyster nursery bags. They have knitted polyethylene mesh with a drawstring. SCB4 is used in heavy fouling conditions. Bags measure 153/4" x 311/2" (40 x 80 cm). Bulk pricing available.

Fish Trap, 1/8" mesh Fish Trap, 1/4" mesh Eel Trap, 1/4" mesh Crawfish Trap, 1/4" mesh Minnow Keeper, 1/4" mesh
16" L 16" L 31" L 31" L 31" L
$ 30.60 13.90 23.25 23.55 23.25
Each
27.48/6+ 12.37/6+ 20.93/4+ 21.20/4+ 20.93/4+
SCB1 SCB2 SCB3 SCB4
.75 mm 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 2.7 mm
$ 6.50 4.15 3.95 3.50
Each
5.85 3.74 3.56 3.15
12+
scb4
scb2
mt28
Minnow-Napper
Similar to our galvanized MT2 fish traps, the Minnow-Napper features a vinyl coating with 1/4" mesh. Measures 16" long and 9" in diameter. Optional extender extends the total length of the trap to 31". MT13 MT13E Minnow-Napper Extender $ 10.31 10.95 9.28/6+ 9.86/4+
Fish Basket
Industrial strength.
mt13
This durable basket has multiple aquaculture applications. Its thicker bottom (with drain holes), tapered form and molded-in handles give it superior strength and durability. 19" diameter top and 17" high, rated at 40 lbs (18 kg) carrying strength but will physically hold 7580 lbs when stationary. Nestable. Holes are approximately 3/8" diameter on sides and bottom. Actual weight 31/2 lbs. Ships Oversize with up to 10 baskets in one carton. FBK3 $ 23.75 19.86/10+

184
Nets
Cage Equipment
Cage Fittings, PVC

Special, hard-to-find PVC fittings for the construction of floating cages, framework, etc. Use inner caps to seal off air-filled sections from water-filled sections. Available in 1/2", 1", 11/4" and 11/2" sizes. Three-way, 4-way and 5-way cross compatible with standard Schedule 40 PVC and Schedule 160 PVC. Inner caps compatible with Schedule 40 PVC pipe and all fittings. UV-resistant. Made in USA.
Plastic Mesh Screening

High-quality, extruded plastic netting is offered in both square and diamond configurations for a wide variety of aquaculture applications. Made from a pliable, yet durable semirigid polyethylene that is great for outdoor use (N3236 not for outdoor use; does not contain UV stabilizers). All screening is nontoxic. This netting is characterized by a smooth surface and heavy-duty construction. The surface minimizes algae growth, making cleaning easier and less frequent. The products are made with more weight than many competitive netting products, providing for greater durability and longer life. And the material is produced to high quality standards for consistency, uniformity and flatnessmaking fabrication into cages, traps and trays all the easier. Made in USA.
Mesh Size Width x Mesh Mesh Length Shape Opening* Weight per Roll Each 4+
Inner Cap

PPF15 PPF4 PPF5 PPF6
Size
1/2"
1" 11/4" 11/2"
$ .82 .77 .83 1.05
Each
25+
.72 .69 .73 .92

ppf15
3-Way
Size
Head of cap fits inside fittings. Skirt of cap fits inside Schedule 40 pipe.
1/2"
1" 11/4" 11/2"
$ 1.12 2.20 2.50 2.95
1.00 1.99 2.22 2.67
25+
N3236 1/16" N1670 1/8" N1130 1/8" N1170 1/4" N1020 1/2" N0350 3/4" N1133 11/4"
41" x 50' Square 48" x 50' Square 36" x 50' Diamond 49" x 50' Square 49" x 50' Square 48" x 50' Square 48" x 50' Diamond
1/16" (1.6 mm) 5/32" (2.4 mm) 5/32" (4.0 mm) 5/32" (4.0 mm) 7/32" (14 mm) 15/16" (24 mm) 15/16" (33 mm)
$ 62.69 80.38 76.18 127.14 162.87 142.38 148.37
56.42 72.34 68.56 114.43 146.58 128.14 133.53
*The mesh opening refers to the widest space across the opening.
4-Way "L"
Size
1" 11/4" 11/2"
1/2"
$ 1.30 2.30 2.50 3.35
1.12 2.06 2.40 2.92
25+
5-Way Cross
PPF13A 1" $ 2.85 PPF14 11/2"** 5.25
Size
2.48 4.73
25+
n1130
n1670
n1170
**11/4" cross with 11/2" in center socket.
n1020
n0350
Make your own cage frame!
Cable Ties
These high-quality, US-made ties are built with carbon black for the best protection against UV light. Use for cage construction, bundling wires, hanging air lines, etc. Releasable ties are just as strong but can be reused, perfect for extension cords and rope storage. Keep different sizes on hand. Tensile strength can be doubled by wrapping the tie around the object twice, tripled by wrapping 3 times, etc. Sold per package. USA. T18R T30R T40I T120R T21081 T21084
Dry Max Bundle Strength Diameter Length
All black for longer life. Use the T120R for tying bricks to tubing underwater.
Cable Ties Cable Ties Cable Ties Cable Ties Releasable Tie Releasable Tie
3/4" 11/4"
3" 4" 5" 10"
4" 6" 111/2" 151/2" 20" 35"
Width
.10" .14" .15" .30" .50" .50"
100/Pk 100/Pk 100/Pk 50/Pk 25/Pk 25/Pk
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 4 lbs
$ 3.30 4.35 10.30 12.24 28.00 53.33
Pliers/Mesh
Nets
185
"C" Ring Pliers and Fasteners

Stainless steel "C" rings are used with the coated wire mesh to make traps and cages. You may also find many other uses around the farm for this item. These pliers can be used with both the 3/8" and 1/2" rings. WWP WWF1 WWF2 "C" Ring Pliers 3/8" Ring (850 Count) 1/2" Ring (750 Count) $ 22.85 12.00/lb 12.00/lb 10.74/5+ 10.74/5+
Hog Ring Pliers

Ideal for fastening netting and making fish cages fast. The pliers use a feeder spring to load each staple one at a time. 5/8" rings are 16 gauge stainless steel, have a closure range of 5/16" to 3/8" and are sold in packs of 2,500. Pliers weigh 3 lbs. BF128 BF129 Hog Ring Pliers Stainless Steel Rings $ 72 64/Pk
bf128
wwf1
bf129 wwp Closed bf129
Important
Galvanized Wire Mesh

Use this PVC-coated wire so you won't have to build another cage for a long time. For a strong and long-lasting cage, trap or net material, you won't find a finer product. The smooth, fuse-bonded PVC coating adheres tightly to the galvanized steel wire, providing durable strength and corrosion resistance. We offer the most popular size of high-tensile strength wire material. Gauges measured before plastic coating (other widths and sizes are available, please call). Four feet wide, 100' long rolls. Larger quantity discounts available. Must be shipped via motor freight. FOB manufacturer. Made in USA.

WW8 WW13 WW14 WW16*
1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 1"
Size Gauge
1" x 1" 1" Hex
16 16 16 20
Ship Wt
$ 665 577 384 228
*Roll length is 150 feet. Ships motor freight only.

Note: Be aware that most plastics absorb moisture over time, weakening them in submerged applications.
ww13
Hi Amy, I just wanted to let you know that Drew Tubb did an outstanding job in a very short period of time. I shudder to think what our project would look like had we done the work ourselves. Drew's professional skills resulted in a rehabilitation area that all here are proud of. Drew interacted very well with staff and myself to get the tasks required completed most efficiently. I would be happy to highly recommend Drew to any other facility that would need the setup of aquatic tanks. Budgeting money for his assistance was one of our better decisions. Thank you both for all of your help. I look forward to working with you in the future.
Kirt Rusenko, PhD

Marine Conservationist Gumbo Limbo Nature Center
Basic life support (LSS) room.
186
Nets
Net Coating/Cages/Net Boxes
Fish Cage Kit

If you have a pond, you can raise fish in cages.
Net Soak
Here is a time-proven net-soaking compound used to keep net fabric soft, resulting in less stress on the fish. 8-oz bottle. Concentrated: use 2 oz for 10 gallons of water (1.5 mL per liter). Made in USA. NS8 $ 6.65 6.05/3+ 5.45/12+
Whether you are raising fish as a hobby, for profit or just to stock your pond, cages may be what you need. Cage culture provides many advantages over general pond culture. Since the animals are confined, harvesting is a simple matter of raising the cage in the water and dip netting the fish. Cages allow large quantities of fish to grow in a small area. Feeding is simple, observation of the fish is easy and, perhaps most importantly, predators cannot get to the fish! Lakes, rivers and streams can be used for aquaculture. Easy to set up, user-friendly, long-lived and gentle on the fish. Each is all plastic and has feed retaining rings to prevent feed from floating out of the cage. 11/2 2 lbs/ft3 is our recommended carrying capacity (at harvest) without aeration or circulation in good water. Maximum fish capacities are higher and assume adequate aeration/circulation.
Fish Cages
If you need cages for fish inspection, introducing small fish into a pond with larger fish or to keep different sizes of fish separated, try these. Made of 1/4" polyester netting with a 3/4" PVC top frame, floating lid and aluminum bottom frame.

c13
4' diameter, 4' deep. Produces up to 300 lbs. Complete, including cage culture manual. 1/2" mesh. 50 ft3 (1.5 m3). Weighs 25 lbs. Made in USA. C2 $ 188.38
C13 1' x 3' x 2' C23 2' x 3' x 2' C33 3' x 3' x 2' C43 4' x 3' x 2'
L x W x H
Ship Wt
$ 98.45 109.85 124.40 139.15
Technician Profile
Kevin Quinn
Kevin received both his Bachelor of Science and master's degrees in zoology from Eastern Illinois University. He has experience in mushroom cultivation and as an aquaculture technician. His specialties include aeration, diffusers and the control of zebra mussels.
Net Boxes
These net boxes are perfect for holding fish prior to shipping, during spawning or any time fish need to be separated. They are made of ace mesh netting with an open top. Custom sizes are available in 12+ quantity. PVC pipe and fittings not included. NB4228 NB4428 NB4448 NB4224 NB4424 NB4444 NB4824 NB4844
Mesh Size
1/8" 1/8" 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4"
Tech Talk 31
Cage Culture Suggestions
Cages may be the best method of fish culture in nonseinable water bodies. But there are peculiarities to cage culture that must be considered. As Bismarck said, "... it is better to learn from the mistakes of others." 1. S eek help from people in your area who have successfully cage-raised the same species. Your State Aquaculture Extension Service is an excellent source of information. 2. Your fish will be totally dependent on you for food and water quality. Still, no-wind periods are the worst without aeration. 3. Build a cage that's easy to handle and harvest, and consider the possible need for sun shading. 4. Consider feed waste potential and waste buildup below cages. Keep cage bottom at least one foot above lake bottom. 5. C age position is very important for water quality, feeding access, etc. Use an aerator or a current inducer for no-current periods. 6. Y ou may need to aerate the entire impoundment if it is, or will become, eutrophic as production (nutrient enrichment) continues. 7. Inspect fish for mortalities, condition and, depending on where you are, loss to poachers! 8. Inspect cages for turtle holes, overall condition and biofouling (algae, bryozoans, invertebrates, etc.) that can restrict circulation. 9. B e prepared for foul weather with heavy waves and strong currents. Also cloudy weather, plankton die-offs, overturns, etc.
4' x 2' x 2' 4' x 4' x 2' 4' x 4' x 4' 4' x 2' x 2' 4' x 4' x 2' 4' x 4' x 4' 4' x 8' x 2' 4' x 8' x 4'
LxWxH
$ 44.67 61.08 80.58 40.58 55.17 72.83 84.17 109.42
nb4228
Aquarium
Nets
187
HD Aquarium Nets
Tired of flimsy wire nets?
These nets are so strong you can use them to scoop and lift wet gravel, plants, rocks and coral. The soft, seamless 1/16" mesh is gentle to fish and molded into a rugged, 1/4"-thick ABS plastic frame that won't bend or scratch the tank. 1/8" stainless steel shaft is 3" long. Nets can be boiled or bleached for sterilization. The small one has a 2" deep bag, the others are 3" deep. NET10 NET275 NET90

Pro Series Nets

Are you looking for a durable net that can withstand constant use in a commercial environment? Raising fish for profit puts unique demands on nets, and most assembly line models are simply too fragile to handle the strain. So invest your money wisely. These aquaculture-duty nets are tough, long-lasting and well worth the price. All are handmade in the USA with 12" stainless steel frames and handles. F10121 F10122 F10123 F12161 F12162 F12163 F15211 F15212 F46 F8101 F8102 F8103 10" x 12", 1/16" Mesh 10" x 12", 1/8" Mesh 10" x 12", 3/16" Mesh 12" x 16", 1/16" Mesh 12" x 16", 1/8" Mesh 12" x 16", 1/4" Mesh 15" x 21", 1/8" Mesh 15" x 21", 1/4" Mesh 4" x 6", Brine Shrimp Mesh 8" x 10", Brine Shrimp Mesh 8" x 10", 1/16" Mesh 8" x 10", 1/8" Mesh
f8103
2" x 41/4" 33/4" x 41/2" 71/2" x 61/4"
W x H
$ 2.00 2.50 3.00
Each
1.70 2.15 2.50
12+
$ 44.62 44.62 46.80 53.85 53.85 58.45 83.85 83.65 33.85 44.62 38.46 38.46
Value Nets
Here are some low-cost nets that are excellent for handling small fish. Their handles are plastic-coated wire and the fine mesh is 1/16". AN4 AN5 AN6 AN8 AN10
Frame Bag Size Depth
f46
Picking Nets
24+
3" x 4" 4" x 5" 5" x 6" 6" x 8" 7" x 10"
45/8" 51/2" 6" 71/4" 91/4"
Overall Length
131/2" 141/4" 163/4" 173/4" 201/2"
$ 1.25 1.55 1.65 3.60 4.70
Each
.98 1.27 1.30 2.91 3.76
These high-quality handmade nets are popular with tropical fish farmers. The frames are nonrusting 1/8" diameter wire. The hardwood handles are 12" long, 1/2" in diameter and have hanging eyes. The nets all use a fine 1/32" mesh. Add a "B" after part number for black mesh. PN6F PN8F PN10F PN12F PN14F PN16F
Frame Bag Depth
Soft Mesh Aquarium Nets

These inexpensive nets have a white, super-soft, extra-fine mesh (1/64") suitable for small fish, and they work especially well for delicate fish. All with 12" handles. EN6 EN8 EN10
Each 12+
6" x 4" 8" x 6" 10" x 7" 12" x 10" 14" x 10" 16" x 11"
4" 7" 8" 9" 9" 9"
$ 6.00 8.00 9.00 11.00 13.00 16.00
Each
4.50 5.72 6.00 7.48
12+
6" W x 4" 8" W x 6" 10" W x 6"
$ 1.65 2.60 3.75
1.48 2.15 3.30
pn12fb en8 en6 en10 pn6f
Brine Shrimp Net

Made of a fine, 350-micron nylon mesh (including stitching), this small net has a vinyl-coated wire handle and measures 4" x 3". BSN1 $ 2.35 1.97/12+
Transparent Collecting Nets

Our guarantee: You will catch more fish with these nets!
We chose these collecting nets because they are virtually transparent underwater and have less drag than the plastic bag types. The soft monofilament netting won't harm fish. The larger nets have 8" handles made of aluminum and include a wrist loop. The small nets' square-shaped frame and handle are made from solid acrylic and can be used for catching fish in an aquarium. All have 1/4" mesh.
Frame Overall Dimensions Length
Aquarium Net Packs

Buy a lot and save a lot! These inexpensive aquarium nets are sold 12 to a package. The mesh is approximately 1/16", and may be green or white. They feature extra-strong, 3-ply, vinyl-covered wire handles. Sold per dozen. 29001 29002 29003 29004 29005

3" x 2.5" 5" x 4" 6" x 5" 8" x 6" 10" x 7"
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1.2 lbs 1.5 lbs 1.5 lbs
$ 8.58 9.17 11.46 15.64 20.00
TFN101 TFNF107 BD200 LD1000
Teardrop Flat Top Square Square
15" x 18" 16" x 16" 9" x 7.5" 6" x 5"
28" 25" 23" 21"
$ 46.80 45.95 30.25 25.58
29002
29005 tfn101 tfnf107 ld1000
188
Flex Nets
Nets
Specialty
Extending Poles
Designed for use with pond and tank vacuums, scrub brushes and other attachments with plastic locking bi-pins. Snap-Adapt PVC poles are three-piece, 11/4" O.D. in size, so you can make a 2', 4', 6', 8' or 10' pole. Telescoping aluminum pole is 8' with 11/4" O.D. Made in USA. BH75 BH10 Telescoping Aluminum Snap-Adapt PVC $ 14.40 20.45
Each
These nets provide the flexibility that everyone wants. If you need a small net with a big handle or a big net with a small handle, simply unscrew the head and screw it onto another handle. Handles have a foam grip. Order one handle and net of each size to be sure you always have the one you need. Ship weight 1 lb each. FH6 FH18 FH36 FN814 6" Foam Grip Handle 18" Foam Grip Handle 36" Foam Grip Handle 8" x 14" Net Head, 1/8" Mesh, 3" Deep $ 4.95 7.95 11.95 15.55
Each
13.98
6+
12.96 18.41
bh75
4+
fh6
bh10 fN814
Koi Net, Small

This small net is designed for catching small- to medium-size koi and goldfish. Measures 11.5" across end, 12" from end to handle; has 13" long aluminum handle with rubberized grip. 6" bag depth, 1/8" soft black mesh. 2" rope loop for hanging on end of handle. Skimmer net has micron netting with extra deep bag. PT811 $ 12.15 10.94/4+
Solid Bottom Dip Net

This deep bag fish net features a vinyl bottom that holds water. It is an excellent net for moving endangered fish or specialty fish you don't want the net to touch. A stainless steel frame ensures the net will last for years. Net measures 10" x 10", with a 12" handle, and has heavy-duty 1/8" knotless mesh sides. Ship weight 5 lbs. NT101 $ 112
Bucket Net
This high-quality net is designed to be set onto a 5-gallon bucket for transferring fish. The net measures 11" diameter x 11" deep and is made with a stainless steel frame. Heavy 1/4" knotless netting is gentle on fish. Net will last for years. Weighs 3 lbs. NT102 $ 72.51
Net Stand
Tired of having your nets rip when they hang on the wall? This all-plastic storage stand is better than wood, unaffected by water and easy to clean. It is sturdy, lightweight and requires minimal floor space. Stand holds up to 24 nets with handles up to 13/8" in diameter. Measures 18" x 18" x 18" H. Weighs 7.5 lbs. N0071 $ 32.50 28.99/3+

beni kikokuryu koi
Koi/Protective/Spawning
Nets
189
Deluxe Koi Net With Telescopic Handle

This 25" diameter net has 3/8" polyester mesh coated to resist barb penetration and scaling. Shallow bag depth of 6" allows easy access. A net guard surrounds the aluminum frame to prevent fish abrasion. The 6" stub handle accepts the 48' telescopic aluminum handle (included). Ship weight 4 lbs. Made in USA. KO8 $ 118.00
Koi Nets, Economy

We have two short-handled, economy koi nets. The KO15 is 12" in diameter, has an aluminum frame and 12" long wooden handle. The net is a soft, fine mesh with a 3" deep bag. We also call it a racket net for obvious reasons. Made in China. Our KO9 is a 15" diameter, round net with aluminum frame and 18" long aluminum handle, with a bag depth of 5". Made in USA. KO9 KO15 $ 28.85 18.00
KO9
ko15
Nets With Telescopic Handles

Extendable handles take up less storage space while still allowing a long reach. Our 12" and 20" diameter, telescoping handle, aluminum koi nets are a real value. Two-piece telescopic handle is 1" dia.; net is 3/25" soft, black mesh. The 12" model has a 5" deep bag and the 20" has a 10" deep bag. Handles telescope from 3162". These are lighter-duty versions of our KO8 deluxe koi net. Their long-reach handles are perfect for herding and catching fish up to 3. These are good-quality, lightweight nets at a very good price. Imported. KO30A 12" Diameter, 5" Deep KO50A 20" Diameter, 10" Deep $ 44.00 49.00
Koi Kastles
If you are having problems with predators or if you want to protect smaller koi, these tunnels may be what you need. Fish will use them for protection and shade. Made of fiberglass mesh with an aluminum frame; sit on the bottom. Style may vary.

KK1 KK2
18" x 10" x 9" 24" x 11" x 12"
L x W x H
Ship Wt
3 lbs 5 lbs
$ 33.45 36.85
ko30A
ko50A
Koi Sock Nets

Sock nets are a "must have" net for koi keepers. We have both the net and water-holding socks. Each has a 12" diameter aluminum frame and 12" long wooden handle. KS44 and KS45 have 40" long black socks. The KS45 has a very fine mesh that will allow water to pass through. The KS44 is a much tighter weave, very soft and will not pass water quickly (not watertight). After netting the fish, pinch the mesh end closed and the fish are held within a sock of water, which is much easier on them. Made in China. KS44 KS45 $ 42 42
ks44
Fish Spawning Incubator

This incubator is great for hobbyists who want to try their hand at spawning koi but are limited in space. The incubator is constructed of fish-friendly polyethylene netting with a polyethylene floating ring. The incubator may be anchored to desired depths or may be left floating. Spawning material hanging from the sides can be turned inside to protect the eggs and fry after spawning. Style may vary. Weighs 1.5 lbs. IC18 $ 67.95
Important
ks45
190
Nets
Specialty
Fry, Fingerling and Bait Nets

These nets are excellent for handling small fish. Each net has an all-wood handle (great for cold weather) with a heavy-duty, galvanized steel frame. Steel net guards are standard on the front of each (except the skimming net DN29). All mesh is knotless nylon. Select: 7" or 12" bag depth, 1/4" or 1/8" mesh, and 20" or 35" handle. All nets are 16" W x 12" H. If you desire nets without guards, a quantity of 12+ must be ordered (or use a hacksaw to remove the guard). Replacement bags are not available. Made in USA.
dn29
Dip Nets, Extra Heavy-Duty

This could be the last dip net you'll ever have to buy! These extra heavy-duty, triple-reinforced, aircraft aluminum dip nets are the finest in the aquaculture industry. Lightweight, yet very strong; 13/8" handles are painted green and plugged for flotation. When working fish all day, you'll appreciate their light weight. A plastic guard laced around front and sides of the 17" W x 13" H frame provides protection against abrasion. Bags are made of nonabrasive, white, Atlas knotless nylon (1/4" or 3/4" open spaces) with flat bottoms for easy fish removal. Handles attach to the frame head by a heavy-duty, snap button coupler (included with frame) for quick change or breakdown. Order handles separately. Replace net protector each time net is changed. Made in USA.
dn2
dn1
Heavy-Duty Harvesting Nets

These nets are heavy nets for heavy loads. They'll carry up to 100 lbs! A hand grip at the frame throat makes lifting heavy loads easier. DN11 (shown) and DN12 are generally preferred for catfish and DN13 for fish with scales. Painted steel frame with galvanized steel handles. The nets ship Oversize at the 30-lb rate, so four can ship for the same price as one. DN21 16" x 12" DN22 16" x 12" DN23 16" x 12" DN24 16" x 12" DN25 16" x 12" DN26 16" x 12" DN27 16" x 12" DN28 16" x 12" DN29 16" x 12" DN1 Frame & Net Only DN2 Frame & Net Only DN3 Aluminum Handle DN5 Aluminum Handle DN6 Replacement Coupler DN1P Net Protector DN11* 22" x 18" DN12* 19" x 15" DN13* 19" x 15"
Frame Size Bag Depth Mesh Handle
7" 7" 12" 12" 7" 7" 12" 12" Flat 12" 18" 24" 12" 12"
20" Wood 20" Wood 20" Wood 20" Wood 1/8" 35" Wood 1/4" 35" Wood 1/8" 35" Wood 1/4" 35" Wood 1/8" 35" Wood 1/4" 3/4 " 30" 48" 1" #42 Poly w/Knots 42" 1/4" Dipped Knotless 31" 1/4" Knotless 31"
1/4" 1/8" 1/4" 1/8"
Ship Weight
2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 8 lbs 5 lbs 5 lbs
$ 29.23 30.71 32.17 33.89 32.08 30.42 37.42 35.55 29.08 207.00 223.00 42.00 68.00 37.00 19.00 93.95 78.90 75.70
Each
26.31/4+ 27.64/4+ 28.95/4+ 30.50/4+ 28.87/4+ 27.38/4+ 33.68/4+ 32.00/4+ 26.17/4+ 193.98/3+ 209.69/3+ 39.43/3+ 63.44/3+ 34.65/3+ 17.68/6+ 84.56/3+ 71.01/3+ 68.13/3+
dn11
Replacement Bags
Fits Net #
DN1R DN2R DN11R DN12R DN13R
DN1 DN2 DN11 DN12 DN13
$ 33.00 50.00 24.15 22.15 22.15
Each
30.99 47.07 21.74 19.94 19.94
3+
*Oversize, Exposed: ships @ 30-lb rate (add'l $5.00 charge).
Big Fish Net

This net has exaggerated width and depth to allow secure handling of large fish. Aluminum handle has been enlarged to 11/2" for added strength. Netting is 11/2" square mesh, heavy nylon, treated with green Net Guard preservative. A connecting block allows the handle to slide into the net frame for storage. Ships Ground in 2 boxes, one Oversize at the 70-lb rate, one with $5 over 60" charge. So four ship for the same price as one.
Bow Size Handle Length
Monorail Nets, Tangle-Free

These monorail nets are coated to eliminate hang-ups of fish barbs. The nets are not replaceable, but the coating will increase net life dramatically. 3/16" mesh.
Frame Handle Bag Size Length Depth
NT12 NT16
12" x 13" 16" x 16"
18" 60"
3" 4"
Ship Wt
2 lbs 4 lbs
$ 30.00 33.33
Each
27.00 30.00
4+
nt12 Net Depth
FN36
36" x 37"
72"
52"
$ 63.95
Monorail Net
The Handler is 16" with 1/4" Ace nylon mesh, 4' aluminum handle, a net depth of 4" and sponge end. Well suited for handling most medium-size fish. Weighs 2 lbs. Made in USA. KN164 $ 25.50 22.95/4+
Landing Nets
Could these be perfect all-purpose nets? Heavyweight netting, fiberglass sliding handles, bows and foam grips designed for a modern look. 1" mesh. Four-year unconditional warranty. Made in USA. LN16 LN17 LN20 LN22
Bow Handle Net Size Length Depth
ln16 Each 4+
16" x 18" 17" x 20" 20" x 24" 22" x 27"
18" 24" 30" 36"
24" 24" 27" 27"
Ship Wt
$ 30.85 35.00 42.63 47.46
27.77 31.50 38.37 42.71
Monorail
Nets
191
Monorail Nets
buy more and save on shipping!
These nets do not need any edge protection because their unique monorail frame is a natural guard. The frame is made of lightweight, yet strong, extruded aluminum. Bag replacement is simple. These nets have 1" aluminum handles (also see nets w/ fiberglass handles). Nets with 36" handles and larger ship Oversize/Exposed and up to six nets can be packaged together to save shipping costs. DN36 landing net is not a monorail style. Its handle is made of 11/8" diameter aluminum and is excellent for landing fish at fee fishing operations. Shipped in 2 boxes. Made in USA. Replacement bags available, add "R" after part number in most cases (see list below). Note: MH516P and MH54P have the same dimensions as MH516 and MH54 but have pool quick connects to fit pool style handles. DN35M DN35A DN35 DN36M DN36A DN36C MH516 MH516P MH54 MH54P DN34 DN34B DN34ML DN34AL DN34L DN34BL DN34A DN34M DN31M DN31A DN31 DN31D DN31B DN32M DN32A DN32 DN32B DN33M DN33A DN33D DN33B DN32ML DN32AL DN32D DN32BL DN33ML DN33AL DN33 DN33BL DN36 AK-2 AK-3 AK-5 FH48 BD1HOOP
1/32" 9" x 6" 1/8" 9" x 6" 1/4" 9" x 6" 1/32" 9" x 6" 1/8" 9" x 6" 1/4" 9" x 6" 1/8" 9" x 6" 1/8" 9" x 6" 1/4" 9" x 6" 1/4" 9" x 6" 1/4" 12" x 13" 1/2" 12" x 13" 1/32" 12" x 13" 1/8" 12" x 13" 1/4" 12" x 13" 1/2" 12" x 13" 1/8" 12" x 13" 1/32" 12" x 13" 1/32" 16" x 16" 1/8" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/2" 16" x 16" 1/32" 16" x 16" 1/8" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/2" 16" x 16" 1/32" 16" x 16" 1/8" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/2" 16" x 16" 1/32" 16" x 16" 1/8" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/2" 16" x 16" 1/32" 16" x 16" 1/8" 16" x 16" 1/4" 16" x 16" 1/2" 16" x 16" 1/2" 22" x 27" Repl. Monorail Handle Repl. Monorail Handle Repl. Monorail Handle Telescoping Handle Hoop, 16" x 16"
The Monorail System

Features an extruded aluminum net frame which encases the net, guarding it from abrasion. It makes a smooth, strong, attractive net, and replacing the net bag is simple. All nets are 100% nylon knotless weave, which reduces abrasion to the fish.
frame Size
mesh
bag depth
4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 6" 6" 6" 6" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 6" 6" 6" 12" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 12" 6" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 6" 12" 24"
18" 18" 18" 36" 36" 36" 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 60" 60" 60" 60" 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 36" 36" 36" 36" 60" 60" 60" 60" 36" 36" 36" 36" 60" 60" 60" 60" 72" 18" 36" 60" 48"84"
handle Length
2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 3+1 lbs* 3+1 lbs* 3+1 lbs* 3+1 lbs* 2 lbs 2 lbs 2+1 lbs 2+1 lbs 2+1 lbs 2+1 lbs 2+1 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+3 lbs* 2+3 lbs* 2+3 lbs* 2+3 lbs* 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 4 lbs* 4 lbs* 4 lbs* 4 lbs* 3+3 lbs*
Ship Wt
$ 16.16 17.14 14.54 17.23 18.57 18.57 20.98 22.21 20.98 23.80 21.25 24.38 22.14 24.02 23.13 27.77 20.89 19.20 21.07 24.91 21.79 23.48 29.29 24.55 26.16 22.95 30.54 26.16 27.86 26.07 32.23 26.16 27.86 24.64 32.86 27.86 29.55 24.38 32.86 55.09 8.00 8.95 11.67 19.33 7.10
Each
14.54 15.43 13.09 15.57 16.71 16.71 18.88 19.99 18.88 21.42 19.13 21.94 19.93 21.62 20.82 24.99 18.80 17.28 18.96 22.42 19.61 21.13 26.36 22.10 23.54 20.66 27.49 23.54 25.07 23.46 29.01 23.54 25.07 22.18 29.57 25.07 26.60 21.94 29.57 49.58 7.20 8.06 9.81 16.10 6.39
4+
knotless
knotted
Monorail Nets with Fiberglass Handles

These nets feature 1" diameter fiberglass handles. They are popular with Fish and Game Commissions, hatcheries and universities. Handles are capped on the net end and have a 5" foam grip on the other. Handles are easily removed with a pushbutton. The net bags are 1/4" mesh. Made in USA. Replacement bags available below. DN32F DN32DF DN33F DN33DF FK-5 CB-1 16" x 16" 6" 16" x 16" 12" 16" x 16" 6" 16" x 16" 12" 60" Handle Frame Adapter
frame Size bag depth handle Length
36" 36" 60" 60"
2+2 lbs 2+2 lbs 2+3 lbs* 2+3 lbs*
Ship Wt
$ 31.35 32.95 37.45 38.95 23.90 7.95
Each
22.22 29.66 33.71 35.06 21.51 7.16
4+
*Additional $5.00 shipping charge.

cb-1
dN32f
Replacement Bags for Monorail Nets

DN35MR DN35AR DN35R MH54R MH516R DN34MR DN34AR DN34R DN34BR DN31MR DN31AR DN31R DN31BR DN32MLR DN32ALR DN31RD DN32BLR
frame Size
*Additional $5.00 shipping charge.
9" x 6" 9" x 6" 9" x 6" 9" x 6" 9" x 6" 12" x 13" 12" x 13" 12" x 13" 12" x 13" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16" 16" x 16"
mesh
1/32" 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 1/8" 1/32" 1/8" 1/4" 1/2" 1/32" 1/8" 1/4" 1/2" 1/32" 1/8" 1/4" 1/2"
bag depth
4" 4" 4" 6" 6" 3" 3" 3" 3" 6" 6" 6" 6" 12" 12" 12" 12"
$ 7.67 7.67 7.67 11.67 11.67 8.33 8.33 8.33 10.00 10.25 10.25 10.25 12.67 11.42 11.42 11.42 14.67
Each
6.90 6.90 6.90 10.50 10.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 9.00 9.23 9.23 9.23 11.40 10.28 10.28 10.28 13.20
6+
mh516
dN34
dN36
dN35 dN33AL
192
Nets
Economy/Super Scoop/Tech Talk
Tech Talk 84
AES Number
AES stands for aeration efficiency standard. AES Numbers ( aes ) indicate how many pounds of fish an aeration device can support. They are a quick reference for sizing aeration systems. If your system parameters differ significantly from the AES Number standard conditions listed below or if you are designing an aeration system for a commercial facility, call our Technical Department at 407-598-1401 for assistance. Numbers may seem overly conservative because they are based on heavy oxygen demand conditions. AES Numbers assume the following conditions: half-pound catfish or tilapia in tanks (nonsoil bottoms) at 80F (27C) at sea level, stocking densities from .1 to .7 pounds of fish per gallon of water (12 to 84 kg/m3), recirculating system with a .82 alpha factor, 5.2 mg/L (67 percent of saturation) dissolved oxygen (D.O.) concentration, feeding rate at 3 percent of standing crop weight per day, pelleted feed at 40 percent protein, continuous solids removal, under 3 ppt salinity and a low algal population. If you stock at or below the rate indicated by the AES Number, your D.O. level will remain above 5.2 mg/L under these water quality conditions. We've chosen warm water for our AES Number standard conditions because the oxygen consumption rate goes up with the water temperature. Keeping your fish weight below the AES Number value will ensure a D.O. above 67 percent of saturation, which is generally considered adequate (while being very cost effective) for most species raised in recirculating systems. If 50 percent of saturation were acceptable, you could support about 50 percent more fish with your aerator than the AES Number indicates. At 82 percent of saturation, you could support about 50 percent less (see aeration Tech Talks for details). AES Numbers are not practical to use where heavy algal populations are present because algae oxygen consumption (plant respiration) at night has not been taken into account.
Economy Dip Net, 18"

Inexpensive net with extendable handle can be used for collecting smaller fish, debris from the surface of ponds and field studies. The aluminum handle is 26" long and extends up to 57". The wire aluminum net frame is 18" in diameter; net is 1/8" blue mesh and 12" deep. Net frame can be unscrewed for transport. Ship weight 6.2 lbs. LN19 $ 12.32
Technician Profile
Ricardo Arias
Ricardo graduated from the University of Tampa with a Bachelor of Science degree in biology and minor in chemistry. He completed aquaculture training in Pusan, South Korea, and then worked in shrimp culture, tilapia culture and tropical fish breeding. Ricardo was also in charge of developing the Aquaculture Experimental Station at the Universidad Central del Este, Dominican Republic.
Air and Oxygen Diffusers

Submerged diffuser AES Numbers assume diffuser placement at a depth of 3' and that air or oxygen flows to the diffuser at the average recommended rate. Oxygen transfer is proportional to bubble size and contact time. Small bubbles have a greater air-to-water contact surface area than the same volume of gas in fewer large bubbles. Although fine pore diffusers may produce finer bubbles, they will require more pressure and they must be cleaned much more frequently. Regenerative blowers work best with medium pore diffusers. Medium-sized bubbles (13 mm diameter) rise at about one foot per second in water, which means that a bubble released at a depth of 3' will exchange gas with the water for 3 seconds. So, if you are operating your diffusers at 1.5' instead of 3', divide the AES number by 2your diffusion system can only support half as many fish. If your diffusers are 4' deep, you can support 33 percent more than the AES Number shown. When using air with a diffuser that is rated for pure oxygen, divide the pure oxygen AES Number by twelve.
Super Scoop Nets

Two people can scoop out up to 300 lbs of fish! Heavy galvanized steel frames available in either 1" or 1/4" dipped nylon mesh. Dimensions: 3' x 4' x 15" deep. Ship motor freight only.

NS14 NS14R NS10 NS10R
Net, 1/4" Mesh Repl. Net, 1/4" Mesh Net, 1" Mesh Repl. Net, 1" Mesh
Ship Wt
$ 196.61 66.15 196.61 66.15

ns14
Pure Oxygen
Pure oxygen AES Numbers are rated at 100 percent saturation (7.9 mg/L D.O.) rather than 5.2 mg/L (67 percent saturation). Oxygen purity near 100 percent, as you would get from a liquid or gas oxygen cylinder, is also assumed. For oxygen generators, multiply the AES Number by the oxygen content of your generator gas output. For example, if your oxygen generator delivers 90 percent pure oxygen, multiply the AES number by .90. If you are using pure oxygen with diffusers that are rated for air, multiply the AES Number by twelve.
Splash Type Aerators

Surface aerator AES Numbers assume that the water is being circulated efficiently from the point of aeration to where the fish are located and back to the aeration device; that is, the device is not re-aerating the same water.
3'
AquaticEco.com
4'

Netting/Buoys
Nets
193
Nylon Netting, Knotless

Ace mesh netting is strong, nonabrasive and will not scale the fish. It is ideal for minnows, fry and other fish that are easily damaged. This material is excellent for bait bags, dip nets, bait nets, holding pens or any other application where a strong, soft, small mesh is required. Will not rot or mildew, can be stored wet. The netting is 4' wide and sold by the running yard (1 running yard = 12 sq.ft.). NA2 NA3 NA4
1/8" Ace Netting 3/16" Ace Netting 1/4" Ace Netting
Buoys
These heavy-duty buoys can be used as warning buoys, anchor buoys, cage buoys, boat fenders, etc. Made of heavy vinyl with air valves, so they can be deflated for compact shipping and storage. Norfloat brand. Flotation is approximate based on 2/3 submergence. BY9 BY12 9" (23 cm) 12" (30 cm)
Flotation
Per Yard
$ 8.25 7.35 9.70
7.45 6.55 8.72
6+
9 lbs 22 lbs
case Qty
20 16
Ship Wt
2 lbs 3 lbs
$ 29.17 41.45
Each
26.22 37.52
6+
bY9
bY12 nA2 nA3 nA4
Net Mending Tools

No. 12 nylon twine has 90-lb strength and No. 21 twine has 192-lb strength. NT6 NT8 NT10 TW12 TW21 6" Steel Bent Needle 3/8" x 8" Nylon Needle 5/8" x 10" Nylon Needle No. 12 White Braided, 1,900'/lb No. 21 White Braided, 740'/lb
tW12
$ 5.02 3.95 4.95 19.00/lb 14.25/lb
17.47/4+ 13.42/4+
nt8 nt6
Polyethylene Floats
Rigid polyethylene fl oats are UVresistant and extremely durable. They are ideal for use with seines, nets and traps. NF7 floats are footballshaped and fit 1/2" rope. NF8 floats are football-shaped and fit 3/4" rope. NF9W floats are sphere-shaped and fit 3/4" rope. Ship weight 1 lb each. NF7 NF8 NF9W 3" x 5" 5" x 9" 7" Dia.
Size Hole
1/2" 3/4" 3/4"
nF7
case Qty
100 24 20
Blue/White Blue/White Solid White
color
$ 4.00 5.18 8.49

Hawksbill turtle (Eretmochelys imbricata).
Net Floats
Evafloat net floats are the highest quality net floats we could find. Made of ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), which offers high tensile strength; durability; resistance to pressure, sunlight and abrasion; buoyancy; and a much longer life expectancy than PVC net floats. Each Evafloat has internal nylon grommets and will give years of worry-free service as your seine float, rope barrier or marker buoy.
nF5 Length Diameter Hole Size Average Flotation case Qty Actual Wt nF6 nF4
NF4 NF5 NF6
Evafloat, White Evafloat, White Evafloat, White
5.0" 6.0" 5.0"
31/2" (9 cm) 311/16" (10 cm) 43/8" (11 cm)
(16 mm) (16 mm) 1.0" (25 mm)
5 / 8" 5 / 8"
17 oz 23 oz 32 oz
147 108 120
.15 lb .18 lb .26 lb
$ 2.15 2.57 4.60
194
Nets
Seines
Seines, Small
These small-mesh, commercial-grade seines are ideal for gathering fish in tanks and small ponds. They are made of lightweight knotless nylon with 1/4" diamond mesh (62 mm). Lead line and float line are 450-lb (204 kg) test braided nylon. Sponge floats. Seine handles not included. DNS4 DNS6

Cast Nets
Monofilament cast nets are useful for sampling ponds and tanks and are convenient for partial harvesting of fish as small as 4" long. These economical nets come with a 20' long polyester rope. Mesh size is 3/8" (9.6 mm) and stretches to 7/8" (23 mm). Imported. CN4 CN5 CN7 CN8

4' H x 10' L 6' H x 20' L
Ship Wt
6 lbs 9 lbs
$ 52.60 93.00
Each
8' Dia. 10' Dia. 14' Dia. 16' Dia.
Ship Wt
$ 39.50 48.57 68.64 85.11
Each
cn4
Seines, Light-Duty
These seines are made of square mesh nylon netting that travels through the water easily. They are offered in mesh sizes small enough to net even two-week-old koi fry (1/8"). Seines include floats and lead weighted bottoms.

LDS1 LDS2 LDS3 LDS4
1/8", 8' D x 20' L 1/4", 8' D x 20' L 1/8", 8' D x 40' L 1/4", 8' D x 40' L
Ship Wt
$ 151.48 115.21 281.54 220.02
Each
Custom Seine Nets

Made to your specifications.
AES can supply seine nets custom made to your specifications. They are made of knotless nylon netting and are available in most mesh sizes. Seines are secured to 3/16" diameter nylon rope with 3" x 11/2" Spongex floats and Number 9 leads placed every 12". Bags are available. Made in USA. Provide us with the following details for pricing:

Mesh size desired. Total length desired. Height of seine.
Pond bottom type (dirt, lined, concrete, etc.). Distance between floats and weights. Bag/pocket size, if desired.
Seines, Heavy-Duty
These seines will stand up to the rigors of daily commercial use. Foam floats are sewn on 12" centers along the 3/8" braided float line. A braided lead line with internal leads (.16 lbs/ft), plus 4-oz external leads over the lead line on 8" centers, holds nicely to the bottom. 1/8" through 3/8" are knotless nylon, 1/2" is knotless polyester. Made in USA. HDS1 HDS2 HDS3 HDS4 HDS5 HDS6 HDS7 HDS8
Mesh Size
1/8" 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 1/2"
Note: In general, the length of the seine should be at least 1/3 greater than the widest area to be seined. If you are seining catfish, the seine should be treated with a liquid plastic, tar or rubber to prevent fish from hanging fins and heads in the seine fibers.
4' x 10' 7' x 20' 4' x 10' 7' x 20' 4' x 10' 8' x 20' 4' x 10' 8' x 20'
H x L
$ 192.31 440.81 206.66 446.92 215.26 464.62 217.98 503.35
Each
Quarantine/Egg Sampling
Hatchery Supplies
195
Fish Net Breeder, Fine Mesh

Netting allows free-flowing water movement yet isolates sick, weak or pregnant fish. 61/2" x 5" x 51/4" H, 500-micron mesh. A934 $ 5.25 4.73/12+
Mini Separation Cell

This miniature tube can be used to separate basslets, gobies, shrimp and other smaller organisms. The removable plastic ends are mesh (11/16" openings) to allow water to flow through the tube. Can be placed on the bottom of tank or attached to the side wall with suction cups (included). One end piece has a flip-open door with hinge and lock. Tube measures 4" long and is 11/2" in diameter. AZ38016 $ 2.65 2.33/12+
Fish Cube
Used to quarantine sick fish or used in aquarium stores to segregate shrimp, basslets and small angelfish that commonly need separation from each other. Cube measures 4" x 4" x 4" and has 3/16" holes in all six sides to allow water flow. Can be placed at the bottom of a tank or can hang from the side of a tank wall using four suction cups (included). Patented cube is clear plastic. AZ38018 $ 4.96 4.36/12+
Aqua-Nursery
Automatic circulating hatchery.
This small hatchery automatically and gently separates mother fish from fry, protecting the fry from hungry parents. Features adjustable hangers for in-tank placement and detachable nursery section. The circulation provided by an air pump (not included) pulls water through the sides and also creates suction that draws babies from the parent's chamber into the integrated fry chamber. 8" L x 4" W x 5" H. AN2 $ 12.20
Specimen Container
Multipurpose clear container is commonly used in aquarium stores for holding fish collected from a tank before putting them in a bag. Can also be used for medicating sick fish or observing fish. The 1" wide handle allows the container to be hung on the inside or outside of an aquarium tank. Tanks measure 51/8" x 21/4" x 41/2" (small) and 7" x 31/4" x 6" (large). 10515 10523 Small Large $ 6.90 15.26
Each
Aquarium Breeding Equipment

2-in-1 Fish Hatchery
This small hatchery has two enclosed areas for live bearing fish, separated by a removable divider. The bottom compartment safely collects and protects falling fry. 8" L x 31/2" W x 4" H. A931 $ 5.65 5.20/6+
6.22 13.73
6+
3-in-1 Fish Hatchery

10515
Features a floating safety chamber for pregnant live bearers. Also makes an ideal isolation chamber for sick or weak fish. 61/2" L x 31/4" W x 31/2" H. A933 $ 4.75 4.37/6+
Multibreeder With Lid

This multipurpose chamber attaches to the side of the aquarium. Floating safety chamber for live bearers; bottom compartment safely collects and isolates falling fry. 8" L x 4" W x 41/4" H. A936 $ 8.00 7.36/6+
Important
A931 A933 A936
196
Hatchery Supplies
Spawning
Koi Spawning Brushes

Made from a soft nylon that will not harm fish, these brushes are commonly used in koi ponds to encourage fish to spawn. Simply place the brushes just below the water level, one on top of the other, at the edge of your pond. The internal SS wire allows them to be shaped to your needs. As the fish spawn on the brushes, the eggs will attach to the soft bristles, allowing the eggs to be separated from the broodfish so they will not be eaten. The brushes can then be placed in clean filtered water and eggs will hatch in 36 days. Brushes measure 59" long x 51/2" diameter and are sold 2 per pack. 19002 $ 59.75
Ovaprim
This spawning agent is the first legally marketed FDA-indexed drug for ornamental finfish broodstock. Designed to promote and facilitate reproduction, induce maturation within a spawning season and coordinate and synchronize spawning times. OVA10 10 mL $ 32.00
Technician Profile
Hernan casasbuenas
Hernan received his Bachelor of Science in biology from the University of Nevada and his Fisheries Scientist Certification from the American Fisheries Society. Hernan's design and management experience includes hatcheries, floating cage cultures and fish culture farms, with concentration on rainbow trout and tilapia.
Tricaine-S
This is an FDA-approved, ANAD #200-226, high-grade brand of MS-222 (tricaine methanesulfonate), which is an anesthetic/tranquilizer of fish and other cold-blooded aquatic organisms. When used properly, it induces a temporary state of immobilization that is rapidly reversed when the animal is placed back in clean water. It is commonly used when handling fish during manual spawning (stripping), tagging, measuring, weighing and surgical operations. It is a great sedative for transporting, sorting and grading fish. TRS5 TRS1 TRS2 10 g 100 g 1 kg $ 21.95 70.00 370.00
My question was answered quickly and thoroughly. You guys run a great operation. With your outstanding prices and attentive customer service, I'll definitely be a repeat customer. Thanks so much.
Joshua Ramirez
Spawntex Spawning Mat
This unique product is asked for specifically by breeders of shiners, goldfish and similar shore-spawning fish. Spawntex is one of the finest reusable spawning mat materials on the market. Made of all-natural coconut fibers with a latex binder (black) on a polyester net backing. Its 11/2" thickness ensures more strength for easy cleaning and exceptional durability. Pond installation is easy: cut the media to size, attach a wire mesh backing and place in the pond. Another method is to simply stake the mats along the pond bank. Spawntex is sold in 24" widths (SM2) and 18" widths (SM3) by the linear yard or in full rolls 11 yards long. Made in USA. SM2 SM2R SM3 SM3R 24" 24" 18" 18"
Ship Wt
Catheter Tubing
This Teflon tubing is commonly used for sampling egg stage development in brood stock. It has a wall thickness of .15 mm (150 microns) and is safer than glass capillary tubes. Sold by the foot (30 cm). Diameters in mm. TT86 TT97 TT119 TT173 .86 .97 1.19 1.73
I.D.
1.16 1.27 1.49 2.03
O.D.
$ 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.81
Each
2.16 2.16 2.16 2.51
10+
3 lbs 30 lbs* 3 lbs 30 lbs*
$ 13.00/Linear Yard 94.00/Roll 10.43/Linear Yard 73.85/Roll
88.36/2+Rolls 70.19/2+Rolls
*Rolls ship Oversize at 70-lb rate.

SM2
Oxygen/Shipping/Temperature Packs
Hatchery Supplies
197
Oxygen Regulator
This economy oxygen regulator is a single-stage, mediumduty regulator, rated at 0100 psi with 540 CGA connections. Use in applications where slight delivery pressure changes (due to decreasing cylinder pressure) won't affect the job being done. Not for use with liquid O2. Ship weight 4 lbs. OX3 $ 125
Air Filling Kits

Designed for use with oxygen cylinders, these complete air filling kits include everything required to rapidly fill fish shipping bags with oxygen. They are great for pet stores, hatcheries, fish shows, fish wholesalers and anyone who ships fish in bags. Each kit includes a single-stage oxygen regulator, oxygen delivery hose, a flexible air nozzle and all connection fittings. Simply thread the regulator onto an oxygen cylinder (not included) and it's ready to begin filling. Oxygen cylinders can be purchased or rented at a medical or welding supply store. OXF1 includes one air nozzle and 10' of delivery hose, weighs 5 lbs. OXF2 has a "Y" fitting and includes two air nozzles with 10' of delivery hose each, weighs 8 lbs. OXF1 OXF2 Single Nozzle Dual Nozzle $ 146 198
Air Nozzle
This handy air nozzle is perfect for oxygenating fish bags. The nozzle features a flexible rubber tip that is easily bent to release oxygen. Nozzle measures 4" long, 1/4" MNPT. OX11 $ 17.40
OXF1
Bag Filling Gun

This nonrestricted blow gun is ideal for oxygenating fish bags. Does not meet OSHA Safety Act requirements for use with air. OX9 $ 17.50
Fish Carrying Capacities for Transport in Sealed Bags with Pure Oxygen
Bags are 4-mil polyethylene containing 2 gallons of water at a temperature of 60F and 4 gallons of pure oxygen (1/3 water, 2/3 oxygen). Use these numbers as estimates only. Experiment with your own fish, using oxygen, ammonia and pH tests to determine safe bag carrying capacities.
Live Fish Shipping Bags

We've expanded our line of fish bags to include a variety of sizes to fi t every application. The bags are either 3- or 4-mil linear polyethylene and are either single-sealed on the bottom (like standard pet shop bags) or triple-sealed to form a square bottom (to fit the 90 corners of the shipping box). Due to the strength of these bags, it is not necessary to "double bag" as with most others. For a quick closure, try our banding tool on this page. Custom sizes available in case quantities. Sold in packs of 20 (order a quantity of one to receive 20 bags). When ordering cases, add a "C" to part numbers to indicate case quantity. Made in USA. FSB1 FSB2 FSB3 FSB4 FSB5 FSB6 FSB7 FSB14 FSB18 SB81 SB82 Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Bottom-Sealed Bag, 3-mil Square Bottom Bag, 3-mil Square Bottom Bag, 3-mil Square Bottom Bag, 4-mil Square Bottom Bag, 4-mil 6" x 12" 6" x 20" 8" x 16" 8" x 20" 10" x 20" 20" x 30" 20" x 40" 6" x 8" x 20" 4" x 6" x 18" 15" x 15" x 22" 16" x 8" x 22"
Width x Length Pack Qty (20)
Carrying Capacity in Lbs for Transport in Hours

Eggs 13 Swim Up Fry 1/2" 1" 2" 3" Large Fish 99.75 149.10 163.80 181.65 224.70 139.65 216.30 144.90 112.35 271.95 226.80
Fish Size 1 Hr
$ 7.46 8.56 8.87 9.24 9.71 17.85 24.83 18.43 15.44 34.81 29.93
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 250 250 250 250 200 200
case Qty
12 14 25 25 27 27 49
12 Hrs
11.5 13 1.54 1.74 1.86 1.86 36
24 Hrs
.51 .82 1.23 1.34 1.54 1.74 25
48 Hrs
.41.4 .61.5 .72 .72 .72 12
Fish Bag Banding Tool

No more sore fingers! This handy tool is fast and easy. Using extra heavy-duty rubber bands, this tool seals oxygen-filled bags in one quick motion. FBT FBT1 Banding Tool Bands, 100/Pk $ 21.80 3.95
Each
19.90/4+
Oxygen Tablets
Over the years we tested three different "oxygen tablets" and none of them added a significant amount of oxygen to the water. Then we rediscovered OTabs. Pet shops, koi dealers, fish hatcheries, etc., selling fish to be carried a long distance can use OTabs as an alternative to bagging with pure oxygen. The tablets come in a metal canister, approximately 11/4" in diameter with a metal lid. They have an unlimited shelf life, so keep some on hand for emergency use. OX2 Box of 36
Ship Wt
Warm Pack
Warm packs can be used for keeping hands and feet warm and for shipping fish and other products in winter. The warm pack will last approximately 24 hours. The average temperature is between 135158F (5770C). Not reusable. Not submersible. Sold in packs of 10. WPK2 Warm Pack $ 9.35
1 lb
$ 25.85
One OTab keeps two 2" fish or one 4" fish alive for 11/2 hours. Two tablets will keep one 4" fish alive for 3+ hours. They work in both fresh and salt water.
198
Hatchery Supplies
Trays/Tech Talk
Handling Trays and Boxes

Handling harvested fish is a lot easier when you have the right tools. These injectionmolded, high-density, polyethylene trays and boxes both stack when full and nest for storage just by turning them the other way. The box has no holes and the trays have drain holes.

Tech Talk 24
Shipping Live Fish
The art of shipping live fish has been mastered by the tropical fish industry, which ships over one hundred million dollars worth of live fish around the world annually. Before the fish are packed, many factors must be considered. Are warmwater fish being shipped to a cold climate or vice versa? What is the duration of the shipment before the box is unpacked? Are the fish aggressive, needing isolation? Do they have sharp spines which require double or triple bagging?
TB3015 TB5015
Box Tray
31" x 18" x 11" 24" x 18" x 7.5"
L x W x H Capacity
100 lbs 60 lbs
Ship Wt
9 lbs 4 lbs
$ 24.48 16.90
Each
22.03 15.19
10+
tb3015
Techniques for shipping live fish:

1. Only ship healthy fish that have not been fed for 24 days. 2. If the fish are cold-tolerant, such as trout, bluegill, striped bass, etc., temperatures should be lowered gradually to 60F or 16C (the metabolic rate of the fish will be reduced). 3. K now the chemistry of the water the fish will be released into at their destination. The quality of your water should be adjusted slowly to the same pH, alkalinity, salinity, etc. 4. The clean water used for shipping should be held separate from the fish before packing. Salt is typically added to the water at a rate of 1 to 5 ppt (parts per thousand). That is .8 to 4 lbs of salt per 100 gallons or 3.8 to 19 grams per gallon. This reduces osmotic stress on freshwater fish. 5. Various conditioners such as zeolite, activated carbon, pH adjusters and ammonia-locking solutions may be used. 6. Fill shipping bags 1/3 full with the pretreated aerated water and gently place fish into the bags. 7. Compress the bag to remove all air and refill with pure oxygen. The typical ratio is 1/3 water, 2/3 oxygen. 8. Double bag and seal with rubber bands, heat, etc.
tb5015
9. Place the bags in insulated containers and add heat or cool packs to maintain temperature.

AES offers a wide selection of live organism cultures for laboratory biotoxicology research, educational studies or live food cultures. Choose from rotifers, algae, copepods and more.
Danio rerio (Zebrafish)
Goldfish
Mosquito Larvae
Butterfly Koi
And as a brand new service, we've partnered with Blackwater Creek Koi Farms to offer several varieties of koi at reasonable rates. See page 156 for more information.
Hatching Jars/Pressure Chamber
Hatchery Supplies
199
Mini Egg Hatching Jar

Commonly used for keeping pelagic and loose benthic fish eggs in circulation during the incubation period. The 2-liter jar has a smooth domed bottom and sides to ensure eggs do not get damaged while tumbling. Designed to hang on the side of a tank, or it can be used with the optional PVC stand. The complete kit includes a submersible water pump, valve assembly, larval collector, 5-gallon acrylic aquarium and the egg hatcher. Measures 12" H x 6" diameter. J32 J32H J32K

Hatching Jar
This McDonald-type hatching jar has become the industry standard. One-piece molded design allows a smooth interiorno lips or gaps for eggs to get caught on or bacteria to grow. It is a high-impact, all-plastic egg hatching system. Simply direct about 1 gpm of water (depending on the weight of the eggs) into the center. The eggs will be uniformly rotated. The fish hatching jar comes with a 1,000-micron top screen that prevents the loss of eggs. When the fish hatch, remove the screen to let the fish swim out. Use it for trout, salmon, hybrid striped bass, catfish, tilapia and many others. Height 18", diameter 61/4", 6 liter capacity for approximately 100,000 trout eggs. Case quantity is 4. Price breaks available up to 12+ (call). J30 J6 J8
j32
Hatching Jar Only PVC Stand Complete Kit
$ 34.44 17.40 105.28
Each
31.00 15.66 100.01
4+
Larval Collector
Hatching Jar 4 lbs Tube, Replacement 1 lb Screen, Replacement
Ship Wt
$ 85.00 15.30 10.00
Each
76.90/4+ 12.20/6+ 7.55/6+
Pump j32k
Jar Hanger
The all-plastic hanger allows above jars to be used without a bench or stand. Accepts up to 11/2" hanging lip. JH $ 15.45 13.75/6+
j30
jh
re Compaere h Elsew $ 10 9 at
85
Top Screen (j8) Hatching systems using J30 at a West Virginia high school. Find fiberglass troughs on page 229.
Hydrostatic Pressure Chamber

Reproductive sterilization (triploidy) and sex selection in some species can be induced by subjecting fertilized eggs to high pressures. Triploid fish typically have increased growth rates since energy is not expended on gonad development and breeding behavior. Our HPC is the right tool for the job. This specially designed, high-pressure vessel will pressurize approximately 24 oz of eggs up to 10,000 psi. Precision-made with a solid piece of stainless steel and a double O-ring brass piston. Requires a 5-ton press with 23" minimum working height. Overall height with gauge is 191/2". Weighs 40 lbs. 30-day warranty. Made in USA. HPC Hydrostatic High Pressure Chamber $ 1,800 HPC1 Replacement Seal Kit 21
Pressure gauge, air bleed valve and instructions are included.
3"
Jar and hanger sold separately.

Our customers are our first priority. We will provide extraordinary service to satisfy the needs of our customers.
17"
We will deliver our products and services on time and error free, conforming to the requirements of our customers. We strive to do it right the first time and eliminate any problem that prevents us from achieving complete customer satisfactions. We thank you for your patronage.
200
Hatchery Supplies
Graders
TF
Floating Fish Graders
Many species of fish can be graded much faster with these graders because they feature both side and bottom bars (some species won't try to escape from the bottom). These popular, time-tested fish graders have been used to grade just about every species of fish. The aluminum frame (choose from two sizes) is polystyrene filled for flotation. Interchangeable grader racks are made from 3/16" hard aluminum rods. Grader spacing is by 1/64" (.4 mm). Order the grading rack by part number (small or large size) and spacing desired from the size chart. Order frame and graders separately. Made in USA.

G2 G2B G4 G4B
Frame, Small Grader Rack, Small Frame, Large Grader Rack, Large
19" x 23" x 10" Deep Specify 23" x 39" x 10" Deep Specify
Size
Actual Wt
10 lbs Varies 20 lbs Varies
$ 269 195 373 263
g2
g2b
Grader Spacings
1/64"
8/64" 18/64" 28/64" 38/64" 54/64" 88/64"
= .4 mm
10/64" 19/64" 29/64" 40/64" 58/64" 94/64" 12/64" 20/64" 30/64" 42/64" 62/64" 96/64" 13/64" 21/64" 31/64" 44/64" 66/64" 14/64" 22/64" 32/64" 46/64" 70/64" 15/64" 23/64" 33/64" 48/64" 74/64" 16/64" 25/64" 36/64" 50/64" 78/64" 17/64" 27/64" 37/64" 52/64" 84/64"

Floating Fish Graders, Adjustable

Here are two easy-to-use, floating fish graders built to last a lifetime. Sturdy aluminum construction will stand up to rough handling and tough fish. The grader floats at the right depth and the large diameter grader bars pass undersized fish damage-free. Size adjustments are quick and accurate from a single lever with locking handle position. In seconds, select any of 30 gradations between 1/4" (6.4 mm) and 11/8" (29 mm) for the G1 and 50 gradations between 5/32" (4 mm) and 13/8" (35 mm) for the G1B. Grader bars are 11/16" (27 mm) diameter. The G1B ships Oversize. Made in USA. G1 G1B

Michael H. Comet
17" L x 15" W x 111/2" D 28" L x 21" W x 16" D
Inside Dimensions
Depth to Bars
71/2" 11"
Actual Wt
16 lbs 36 lbs
$ 625.52 951.24
Each
Tech Talk 69
Grading Fish
Commercial aquaculture requires periodic size grading of most species to prevent cannibalism, reduce growth rate variation and improve yield. When fish are not graded it is common to have a harvest with 25% of the fish being undersized. This is due to the larger fish dominating the others and consuming more food. Efficient management requires knowledge of growth rates, stocking densities, feed requirements and general healthall of which can be learned through grading and counting. Graders can be species specific. Selecting the wrong grader type for your species and fish size can make the grading process inefficient and/or damage the fish, so ask others for their experience before you buy.
AquaticEco.com
g1
Hatchery Supplies Fish Graders by Faivre

Graders
201
Over 1,000 models in use worldwide! rade trout, Atlantic and Pacific salmon, eel, sea bass, sea bream, carp, sea trout, G cod, tilapia and other species.
Pronounced "Favor"
The high capacity and excellent workmanship of these live fish graders is what makes them so popular worldwide. Graders use a patented SPS grading technology that is very reliable and accurate. They have a graduated stainless steel channel through which the fish are lead by nylon finger rods running underneath the channel. As soon as the gap between the two side walls is wide enough, the fish fall down into one of the sections. Graders are light, compact and easy to move about a farm or hatchery. Made from aluminum and 316 stainless steel, they are both fresh and salt water compatible. Graders are available in both 115/230V, 50/60 Hz and ship via motor freight. Prices start around $9,000. Please call for quotation.
Helios 4
Helios 4 Graders
Helios 4 models have a channel length of 51" and a maximum grader opening size of 1.1". They have a maximum capacity of one ton per hour and require a water flow of 53 gpm to operate. Graders measure 99" L x 20" W x 49" H and weigh 243 lbs. Species Model # Outlets Fish Size (min/max) Trout/Salmon Helios 4 3 x 5" 1 g/150 g Bass/Bream Helios 4S 3 x 5" 2.5 g/100 g Tilapia Helios 4T 3 x 5" 1 g/100 g
Helios 30
Helios 30 Graders
Helios 30 models have a channel length of 79" and a maximum grader opening size of 1.65". They require a water flow of 176 gpm to operate and have three grading speeds and two telescopic legs with crank. Measure 138" L x 39" W x 52" H and weigh 420 lbs. Species Trout/Salmon Model Helios 30 # Outlets 6 x 6.25" Fish Size (min/max) 5 g/1,000 g Flow (fish per hour) 10 g 60,000 Flow (fish per hour) 100 g 40,000 Flow (fish per hour) 200 g 30,000 Bass/Bream Helios 30S 6 x 6.25" 5 g/600 g 30,000 25,000 20,000 Tilapia Helios 30S 6 x 6.25" 2 g/600 g 50,000 35,000 30,000
Helios 40
Helios 40 Graders
Helios 40 models have a channel length of 98" and a maximum grader opening sizeof 2.56". They require a water flow of 176 gpm to operate and have three grading speeds and two telescopic legs with crank. Measure 154" L x 39" W x 52" H and weigh 420 lbs. Species Trout/Salmon Model Helios 40 # Outlets 8 x 8" Fish Size (min/max) 5 g/1,500 g Flow (fish per hour) 10 g 60,000 Flow (fish per hour) 100 g 40,000 Flow (fish per hour) 200 g 30,000 Bass/Bream Helios 40S 8 x 8" 5 g/800 g 30,000 25,000 20,000 Tilapia Helios 40S 8 x 8" 2 g/800 g 50,000 35,000 30,000
Helios 50 Graders Helios 50 models have a channel length of 98" and a maximum grader opening size of 2.95". They require a water flow of 176 gpm to operate and have three grading speeds and two telescopic legs with crank. Measure 154" L x 48" W x 59" H and weigh 665 lbs. Species Trout/Salmon Bass/Bream Bream Tilapia Model Helios 50 Helios 50S Helios 50S Helios 50S # Outlets 8 x 10" 8 x 10" 8 x 10" 8 x 10" Fish Size (min/max) 5 g/2,500 g 5 g/2,000 g 5 g/2,000 g 5 g/2,000 g Flow (fish per hour) 10 g 60,000 30,000 50,000 50,000 Flow (fish per hour) 100 g 40,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 Flow (fish per hour) 200 g 30,000 20,000 30,000 30,000
Helios 50
202
Hydroponics
Systems
Invented Here
Deep Nutrient Trough System
NatureGrowth System by Sweetwater
Invented Here
Great for classrooms and hobbyists, the Deep Nutrient Trough (DNT) System is used for growing plants with large roots like tomatoes, peppers, beans, cucumbers, etc. The DNT tray features two 10" wide troughs, 48" long and 5" deep. These heavy-duty trays are made of fiberglass with a smooth, black gel coat surface that will last for many years. The two-trough design allows the use of two types of media side by side, making this an ideal system for students and experimenters. The stand is heavy-duty aluminum. The adjustable light stand allows the light to be raised as plants grow. The DNT System is easy to assemble and includes complete instructions. Ships motor freight. Made in USA.
Designed with the highest quality materials, this system can grow virtually any type of plant including lettuce, herbs, tomatoes and flowers. It is an ebb and flow system, using gravity and a pump to periodically flood and drain the growing media. It measures 4' x 2' and can fit into most classrooms. The stand is heavy-duty aluminum. The light stand adjusts easily as plants grow. Add-on kits with larger light systems are available. Rockwool starter cubes, Hydroton growing media, net pots and 16 oz of nutrient solution are included. System is complete, easy to assemble and instructions are included. Weighs 130 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. NG1 $ 1,088.85
the complete Dnt System features:

Fiberglass deep nutrient trough. 400-W metal halide lighting system. 20-gallon nutrient reservoir with cover. Submersible pump with timer. All fittings, hoses, clamps and 16 oz of fertilizer. Each tray holds 1.4 cubic feet of media. All UL-listed components. $ 1,728.30
DNT1
Lettuce in an nFt system.
12' rotating tower farm.
Photos courtesy of Future Growing LLc, Apopka, FL.
Floating raft system.
Accessories/Systems/Tech Talk
Hydroponics
203
Shade Cloth
Our premium shade cloth is the knitted type, which will last over 15 years in the tropical sun. This cloth is useful for shading tanks to reduce algae, prevent sun damage to fish and reduce water temperature. It is also useful for predator control, visibility screening and, of course, shading plants. Offered in 3 densities to block 30, 50 or 70% of the sun. Made of UV-resistant plastic. We stock 12' wide rolls that are sold in 10' L increments or full 300' rolls only. 10' and 20' widths are also available in full rolls. SC30 SC30R SC50 SC50R SC70 SC70R
Full Roll Shade Length
Aeroponics System, Tower Garden

Grow your own food in your backyard year-round!
Say goodbye to weeding, tilling, kneeling and getting dirty. The Tower Garden is a closed system hydroponics tower that will grow almost any vegetable, fruit or flower. Grow 20 plants on a single tower (up to 36 with add-on kits) in half the time it would take to grow them in the ground. Made from USDA-approved, UV-stabilized, food-grade plastic. 2.5' x 2.5' footprint. Made in the USA. AERO2 includes everything you need to start growing, including gourmet lettuce seeds, seed starter enviro-dome, 20 rock fiber starter plugs, 20 net pots, pump, drain tube, plant fertilizers, pH Test Kit, pH Up, pH Down and 100-mL measuring cup. AEROADD will add 8 additional planting spaces. Use up to two. AEROWHLS is a wheeled pot that allows easy mobility. AEROCAGE is a cage that supports tomatoes and other large vegetable crops. AEROSEED kit includes seed starter enviro-dome, 20 rock fiber starter plugs and 20 net pots. The AEROTONIC Tower Tonic pack includes 2 gallons of mineral solution for superior plant growth. Makes 200 gallons of nutrient solution. AERO2 AEROADD AEROWHLS AEROCAGE AEROSEED AEROTONIC Complete Tower Garden Kit $ 499.00 Additional Net Pots, Extension 59.95 Wheeled Pot 149.95 Tomato Cage 78.46 Seed Starter Kit 14.95 Tower Tonic Pack 49.95
30% 30% 50% 50% 70% 70%
300' 300' 300'
Width
12' 2.8 lbs/120 ft2 12' 83 lbs/3,600 ft2 12' 2.8 lbs/120 ft2 12' 83 lbs/3,600 ft2 12' 4.6 lbs/120 ft2 12' 138 lbs/3,600 ft2
Ship Wt
$ 36/10' 690/Roll 42/10' 887/Roll 54/10' 1,205/Roll
621.00/2+ 798.00/2+ 1,145.00/2+
sc30
sc50
sc70
Tech Talk 38
Hydroponics vs Soil
Hydroponics has many advantages over soil culture. The most obvious advantage is having complete control of the growing environment. In addition, plant spacing is only limited by available light (which can be increased), virtually any plant can be grown in the same geographical location, small quantities of fertilizers are easily distributed to all plants with no leaching beyond the root zone, plant maturity is reached quickly, there are no weather disasters, pesticide use is reduced or eliminated, harvest cost is reduced and harvest time can be planned for seasonal high prices. Hydroponics also produces a much higher yield than standard soil culture. For example: soil culture of tomatoes may yield 510 tons of product per acre per year, whereas hydroponic tomato production can exceed 200 tons per acre per year!
Photo courtesy of Future Growing LLC, Apopka, FL.
Emily's Garden
Grow flowers, herbs, and vegetables together in Emily's Garden! This 16" x 24" garden is very easy to use. The individual planters allow rotation of plants or addition of new plants. Each planter (filled with geolite growing medium) rests in a pump-aerated nutrient solution. Pour in a little nutrient and water every week and that's it! Emily's Garden will fit just about anywhere: on a bench, a shelf or table. It's a satisfying way to discover the ease and fun of hydroponic gardening in just 21/2 sq.ft. Weighs 20 lbs.
System includes:
Pump.
Tech Talk 130

Hydroponics vs Aquaponics
Hydroponics refers to using a nutrient solution to grow plants in a recirculating (closed) system. Open nutrient systems were used in the past but not much anymore. Two different ways hydroponic systems work are:
pH test kit. Formed cover. Six planters. Geolite growing medium. Seed starter cubes. All-purpose nutrient16 oz. HGS1 $ 119
Aggregate, which uses a solid medium (sand, Rockwool, gravel, perlite,

vermiculite, peat moss, coconut husks, etc.) for support of plant roots.
Liquid, which uses no supporting medium for plant roots.

Aquaponics refers to growing a fish (or any aquatic animal) and plant crop together in a recirculating system. So aquaponics is really the marriage of aquaculture and hydroponics, aggregate or liquid, in a closed system. Hydroponics and aquaponics offer these advantages over traditional farming: high productivity for the space used, conservative water usage, low environmental impact and the ability to grow plants out of season. The primary disadvantage to both is the high startup cost involved.
Polyclips
These unique fasteners are ideal for attaching predator netting and shade cloth to support rope and wires. Constructed of tough polypropylene, they can be used over and over again. Simply snap over the edge of the material and attach to 3/8" support wire. Recommended spacing is one polyclip per 2' (depending on load). Bulk quantity available. PC125 Pack of 25 $ 13.50
204
Net Pots
Hydroponics
Accessories/Media
Perlite
Coarse perlite (siliceous rock) is one of the best hydroponic media commonly used. It has high water-holding capacity and fertilizer retention. It has neutral pH, is sterile and weed-free. Ideal for tray systems, bag systems and deep nutrient trough systems. Sold in four cubic foot bags. Weighs 20 lbs. Made in USA. PR40 $ 15.95 13.69/4+
Excellent for classroom science projects.

These plastic net pots have slits in the sides and bottom to allow root development and promote oxygen transfer. Ideal for ebb and fl ow systems and NFT systems, pots can be used for starting seedlings and propagation. The 2" size is ideal for use with Rockwool and oasis cubes or Hydroton to start seedlings which will then be transplanted to the growing system. Plants are left in the net pot when transferred, which avoids transplant shock. Larger size net pots are perfect for use with Hydroton media. NP12 NP13 2" H x 2" Dia., 25/Pk 21/2" H x 31/4" Dia., 25/Pk $ 6.15 10.45 5.45/4+ 9.02/4+
Hydroton
This lightweight clay aggregate is an excellent growing medium for any hydroponic system. Clay aggregates are heated at 1,200C, creating an inner pore structure and ceramic shell that holds moisture for roots and helps minimize the buildup of salts and nutrients. The aggregate wicks the water/nutrient solution upward, pebble by pebble, releasing it to the plant roots as needed. The round-shaped structure provides excellent root aeration and will not compact. Clay aggregate is chemically inert, odorless, will not degrade and has a neutral pH of 7.0. It's easily washed, completely reusable and will last indefinitely. Excellent in systems with potted plants and in ebb and fl ow system trays. It readily accepts transplanted seedlings started in oasis cubes, Rockwool or other planting media. CA2 CA4 4.75-liter Box 45-liter Box
Ship Wt
Repeat Cycle Timer

This 115VAC, 15-amp (load capacity) timer has adjustable "on time" from 30 seconds to 30 minutes and adjustable "off time" from 7 minutes to 8 hours. Automatic reset feature allows function synchronizing with other system controls. Simply plug into a 115VAC, 15-amp outlet and it will continue to cycle on and off until power is removed. Adjustments are made using the two knobs located on the front. Ship weight 5 lbs. CT22 $ 132.30
5 lbs 75 lbs
$ 16.45 43.75
15.41 40.80
4+
Drip Emitter
Drip emitters can be used in most any application. They have an infinite adjustment up to 2 gph, and will screw into a 10-32 thread or 3/16" tubing. Use of a riser (50075, sold separately) is recommended. Emitter screws into the open end of the riser tube. 42115 $ 1.60 1.43/50+
Floating Tray for Aquaponics & Hydroponics 18" Riser With NPT Adapter
Used in conjunction with the drip emitters, these 18" risers can be cut to any length. The emitter screws into the open end of the tube. The base has a molded 1/2" MNPT threaded connection. 50075 $ 1.98 1.78/50+ This tray is a great way of turning your fish tank into a fully functional aquaponics or hydroponics system. Thanks to the mutually beneficial interaction between plants and animals, you can grow lettuce, herbs, flowers and other plants in your existing fish aquariumfish waste acts as fertilizer while the plants act as biofilters. With one simple device you get healthy plants and a clean tank! Rest the clear plastic tray across the top of your tank or let it float. Fits perfectly inside the lip of a 20-gallon tank. Each of the tray's 12 holes accommodates a 2" net pot, and the unit can be split into two 6-hole sections. AFT1 Floating Tray, 233/4" x 8" $ 9.99 8.99/4+
Seedling Heat Mats

Seedling Heat Mats provide the ideal, constant rooting temperature for sensitive seedlings and cuttings. The 10" x 20" mat fits perfectly in our TY1 trays. Available in 17-watt and 45-watt sizes. Optional Heat Mat Thermostat provides a 7090F control range. Mats are 115V/60 Hz. HM10 HM18 HM20 10" x 20" Heat Mat, 17 Watts 18" x 20" Heat Mat, 45 Watts Thermostat
HM10 AFt1
Rockwool Mini Blocks

These small blocks are ideal for both seed and cutting propagation. They are designed to be transplanted directly to other media and not intended to be used with larger Rockwool blocks. Blocks are 11/2" square and sold in strips of 15. RMB1 $ 3.45/Strip 3.17/10+
$ 31.30 47.00 43.00
Each
HM20
Hydroponics Rockwool Propagation Blocks

Once seedlings have developed in the propagation cubes, the entire cube can then be transferred to these propagation blocks. Propagation blocks have a hole in the center that will accept the 11/2" propagation cubes. The 3" blocks are sold in strips of 8. The 4" blocks are sold in strips of 6. Larger quantities and sizes available. PB3 PB4 3" x 3" x 21/2" Strip 4" x 4" x 21/2" Strip $ 6.05 6.15
Each
Substrates/Trays
205
Cocogro Substrate
This premium coir fiber has a low salt content and no chemical treatment. Its double-sleeved 3/4" long fibers provide an optimal air-to-water ratio and reduced dust, which means stronger root development. Cocogro fiber is aged at least 18 months, so it has longer usability. And it has excellent drainage properties. 100% recyclable. COCOB Brick $ 4.20 3.78/10+
5.43 5.54
10+
Pb4
Pb3
Rockwool Propagation Cubes

These small cubes are ideal for starting seedlings and cuttings and fit nicely into 2" net pots, seedling trays or directly into a growing media. Cubes are 11/2" square and have a small hole in the center for seed placement. Sold in a slab of 98 cubes. PC112 $ 12.00/Slab 10.80/10+
Hydroponic Trays
These heavy-duty hydroponic trays are well suited for both commercial and hobby systems. Ebb and flow trays are made of 3/16" thick ABS plastic and feature molded depressions at ends for fill/drain fittings. They are extremely versatile and can be used for growing almost any type of plant. TRAY1 ships Oversize at 70-lb rate. TRAY2 ships via motor freight (add $100 crating charge per shipment). TRAY1 TRAY2 4' x 2' x 5" Tray 4' x 8' x 5" Tray
tRAY2
$ 77.00 179.00
Each
69.30 161.10
4+
Rockwool Propagation Slabs and Tray

After plants have outgrown propagation blocks, they can be placed on a Rockwool slab for further growth. Slabs are covered with a white plastic sleeve, which promotes strong roots and inhibits algae growth. Rockwool slabs perform best in areas that provide proper drainage. They are very popular with tomato, cucumber and pepper production. Slabs are 36" long. The leach tray is rigid plastic. RK8 TRAY3 36" x 8" x 3" Slab Leach Tray, 40" x 7" x 4" $ 11.00 22.90
Each
9.90/12+ 20.61/4+
tRAY1 tRAY3
Fiberglass Trough
Rectangular troughs are used for hatching fish eggs, coral propagation, baitfish, larval rearing (use with McDonald-type hatching jars), invertebrate holding and many other culture applications. Although not as thick as our reinforced fiberglass tanks, it is still quite durable. Inside gel coat is light blue. Troughs are stackable and ship via motor freight, FOB Orlando. 96" L x 24" W x 12" H, 35 lbs. Custom sizes available in quantity. Crating charges apply. FT120L2
New r Thicke G el C oat
Seedling Tray
This small seedling tray is designed for a slab of our PC112 Rockwool starter cubes. The tray has a solid bottom and a clear dome. Ideal for our Seedling Heat Mats. Measures 20" L x 10" W x 91/4" H (with dome, 21/2" without); weighs 4 lbs. TY1 $ 10.20 9.18/4+
$ 269.26
242.33/4+
206
Hydroponics
Fertilizers/Chemicals/Accessories
Fertilizers
Recognized as one of the most advanced hydroponic nutrient lines developed, the Flora Series is a three-part system that enables you to custom blend your own hydroponic formula. It allows the mixture of a huge range of nutrient solutions to satisfy the needs of practically any type of plant and its phase of growth. FloraGro, FloraBloom and FloraMicro can be used with all types of media. Ideal for beginners, advanced gardeners and educators who want to experiment with various formulas for growth studies. Instructions and recommendations for different plants are found on the labels. Only one teaspoon of each will make one gallon of nutrient solution. For vegetative growth, a combination of 1 part FloraBloom, 2 parts FloraMicro and 3 parts FloraGro is ideal. For fruit production and flowering, combine 1 part FloraGro, 2 parts FloraMicro and 3 parts FloraBloom. These combinations provide a simple way to achieve powerful nutrient solutions for fast growth and high yields. Larger quantities available. Made in USA. G716 G732 G764 G786 G816 G832 G864 G886 G916 G932 G964 G986
N-P-K
FloraMicro, 1 pint FloraMicro, 1 quart FloraMicro, 1 gallon FloraMicro, 2.5 gallons FloraGro, 1 pint FloraGro, 1 quart FloraGro, 1 gallon FloraGro, 2.5 gallons FloraBloom , 1 pint FloraBloom, 1 quart FloraBloom, 1 gallon FloraBloom, 2.5 gallons
5-0-1 5-0-1 5-0-1 5-0-1 2-1-6 2-1-6 2-1-6 2-1-6 0-5-4 0-5-4 0-5-4 0-5-4
Ship Wt
2 lbs 3 lbs 11 lbs 27 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 11 lbs 27 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 11 lbs 27 lbs
$ 10.60 16.90 34.40 78.00 9.95 12.28 30.50 61.33 9.95 12.28 30.50 61.33
Each
30.28/4+ 70.19/2+ 27.44/4+ 55.20/2+ 27.44/4+ 55.20/2+
Yellow Sarcophyton sp.
Have a complaint?
pH Solutions

Hazmat Air
High-quality pH solutions specifically designed for hydroponics. Solutions are formulated from nutrients that plants can use. Super concentrated! PHL1 PHL2 PHR1 PHR2 pH Down, quart pH Down, gallon pH Up, quart pH Up, gallon
Ship Wt
$ 11.90 31.30 11.90 31.30
Each
28.17/4+ 28.17/4+
FloraMicro
FloraGro
FloraBloom
N-P-K refers to the level of nutrients: NitrogenPhosphorusPotassium.

phl1 phr2
Seed Dispenser
Ideal for handling small seeds, this handy dispenser distributes seeds more accurately to reduce the need for "thinning." It operates much like a syringe and includes a cap that allows seeds to be retained inside for storage. The dispenser measures 1" in diameter and 4" long. SD25 $ 5.95
Electrical Conductivity (EC) measures the rate at which a small electrical current flows through a solution. Usually measured in micromhos per centimeter (mho/cm) or microsiemens per centimeter (S/cm), 1.0 mho/cm = 1.0 S/cm. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) measures the dissolved solids in water using conductivity. Measured in milligrams per liter (mg/L) or parts per million (ppm), 1.0 mg/L = 1.0 ppm.
Vine Clips
These vine clips are commonly used for growing tomatoes, cucumbers, peppers and other tall plants. Clips easily attach plants and vines to strings or trellis support wires. Sold in packs of 500. PC2 $ 12.15/Pkg
General Guidelines
Stage Fruiting Plants EC (mho/cm) TDS (ppm) Leafy Plants EC (mho/cm) TDS (ppm)
Seedling Average Fruiting
1,6001,800 2,500 2,4002,600
1,1201,260 1,750 1,6801,820
1,4001,600 1,800
9801,120 1,260
Meters/Plant Supplies
Hydroponics
207
Hydroponics Combination Kit
Hazmat Air
pH/TDS/Temp Monitor by Hanna

Continuously monitor pH, TDS and temperature with this easy-to-install instrument. Measurements are simultaneously displayed on three backlit LCDs that can be easily viewed at a distance even in low light. There's no need to switch between parameters. The gel-filled pH electrode is provided with a waterproof sheath to protect the BNC connector, providing longer life in aggressive solutions. The TDS probe is easy to clean and requires little maintenance. Can be calibrated at one or two points for pH and at a single point for TDS. Temperature range is factory calibrated. Includes pH electrode, TDS probe, temperature probe, TDS sachet, two cleaning solution sachets, screwdriver, 12VDC power adapter and instructions. HI981504 $ 194
Ideal for commercial growers, this kit will measure nutrient solutions. Tests include pH (4.87.6), nitrate nitrogen (5200 ppm), ammonia nitrogen (18 ppm), phosphorus (330 ppm), sulfate (0200 ppm), calcium (02,000 ppm), magnesium (01,200 ppm), potassium (0250 ppm) and spot detection of iron at .25 ppm. Kit and reagent refill includes enough reagents for 50 tests per parameter. Manual and 75-page handbook included. Kit weighs 15 lbs, refill weighs 1 lb. LM5406 Hydroponics Combo Kit $ 566
Range pH 0.0 to 14.0 01,990 ppm (mg/L) -10.0 to 60.0C (-14.0 to 140.0F) TDS/Salinity Hazmat Air Temperature
Resolution .1 10 ppm (mg/L) .1C (.1F)
Accuracy .2 2% FS .3C ( .5F)
Hydroponics Mini Kit
Ideal for schools and hobbyists, this kit will measure nutrient solutions. Measures pH (4.58.0), nitrate nitrogen (5200 ppm), phosphorus (330 ppm), and potassium (0250 ppm). Kit and refill reagents include enough reagents for 50 tests per parameter. Packaged in sturdy foam mounted carrying case. Instructions and 75-page hydroponics handbook included. Weighs 15 lbs. Refill weighs 1 lb. LM3561 LM3561RP Hydroponics Mini Kit Reagent Refill $ 295.00 96.15
Combo Meter
Water-resistant pH/EC/TDS meter specifically designed for agricultural applications such as hydroponics, greenhouses, farming and nurseries. Extra-large LCD clearly displays the parameter being measured as well as calibration instructions. Calibration is fast and easy, with knobs located on the front panel of the instrument. Measures pH, mS/cm, ppm and 060C. CAL-CHECK feature lets you easily check the probe calibration status at any time. Includes combination probe, starter set of calibration and cleaning solution sachets, check solution sachet battery and instructions. 5.7" x 3.1" x 1.5", weighs 8.1 oz. HI9813-6N HI1285-6 Combo Meter Replacement Electrode Range Conductivity TDS/Salinity pH 04.00 S/cm 01,999 ppm (mg/L) 014.0 $ 211.67 99.00 Resolution .01 S/cm 1 ppm (mg/L) .1 Accuracy 2% FS 2% FS .1
Plant Baskets
These baskets can be used as vegetable filters, hydroponic containers, pump strainers and, of course, plant baskets. PBK73 PBK95 PBK11 PBK14 PBK5 PBK9 Square, Small, 7" x 7" x 3" Square, Medium, 9" x 9" x 5" Square, Large, 11" x 11" x 7" Square, X-Large, 14" x 14" x 10" Round, Small, 51/8" D x 37/8" H Round, Medium, 85/8" D x 5" H $ 2.95 2.85 3.64 5.95 2.95 3.20
Each 24+
2.36 2.28 2.92 4.76 2.36 2.56
Flourite
This specially fracted, iron rich, stable, porous, clay gravel is used in plant aquariums. It can be used as a sole substrate or mixed with other gravels. Not chemically coated or treated and will not alter the pH of the water. Recommended use is 1 kg for each 200 cm2 (31 in2) of tank bottom. Sold each in 7-kg (15.4 lb) bags. F1255 F1266 Red Brown $ 15.10 15.10
F1255
PbK95
PbK9
208
Hydroponics
Plant Supplies
Aquatic Plant Food Tablets

These tablets are specifi cally formulated to encourage blooms in water garden plants. They strengthen plant stems and leaves, promote growth and provide necessary trace elements without adding excess nutrients to the pond water. Excellent for water garden lilies. 18560 60 count, 9.8 oz $ 9.95
Flourish Tabs
Growth-stimulating tablets for plant roots that contain essential trace elements, amino acids and vitamins. Rich in iron, manganese, magnesium, calcium, potassium, inositol, choline, vitamin B12, biotin and other nutrients. Contain no phosphates or nitrates. Sold in packs of 10 tabletsenough to treat a 12" x 30" plant bed twice per year. SC505
18525
10 Tabs
$ 6.55
CO2 Regulator w/Bubble Counter

Dual gauges show psi and kg/cm2. The left gauge measures tank capacity and the right gauge indicates flow. Includes a flow regulator, needle valve, electronic solenoid and bubble counter. Needle valve control allows precise measurement. Solenoid valve has 5-ft power cord. CO 2 bottle not included. One-year warranty. Ship weight 2 lbs. PR957 $ 113.00
Iron
Flourish Iron is a highly concentrated (10,000 mg/L) iron gluconate supplement. When used, the iron is maintained in the ferrous (Fe2+) state for an extended period through a special iron complex. Plants are able to extract iron with little physiological energy. SC473 SC478 500 mL 2 liters $ 8.15 30.80 27.72/4+
Sc478
Important
Plant Pack: Fundamentals

Excellent for beginning aquatic gardeners. This comprehensive offering of planted aquarium essentials contains Flourish, Flourish Iron and Flourish Excel. Flourish is a growth stimulator for aquarium plant stems and leaves that contains a broad spectrum of essential trace elements, vitamins and amino acids. Flourish Iron is ideal for iron maintenance in a natural planted aquarium. Flourish Excel is a simple source of readily available organic carbon. SC1105 $ 11.45
Pond Flourish
Pond Flourish is a liquid growth stimulator for pond plants that will not promote algae growth. Provides a broad spectrum of vitamins, amino acids and essential trace elements. Rich in manganese, iron, magnesium, calcium and potassium, it contains no phosphates or nitrates. Two liters treat over 26,000 gal (100,000 L). Ship weight 6 lbs. S2545 2 liters $ 31.07
Hobby Hydroponics DVD

Designed for beginners, Hobby Hydroponics is a 30-minute video that presents the basics of hydroponic gardening through colorful video, helpful graphics and an informative narration. The video explains the different methods of hydroponic gardening, shows how to set up and successfully garden using hydroponic methods, demonstrates many hydroponic kits that are available, explains nutrient and pH testing and introduces you to the business of commercial hydroponic growing.
topics covered include:

The advantages and history of hydroponic gardening. Growing methods and media. Various hydroponic systems. Introduction to commercial hydroponics. $ 31.67
Photo courtesy of Future Growing LLc, Apopka, FL.
HHDVD
Tech Talk/Underwater/Hydroponic/LED
Lighting
209
Tech Talk 124

Compost Tea
Looking for an inexpensive way to improve plant growth? Try compost tea. Compost tea is exactly what it sounds likea liquid extract prepared by steeping compost in water. Sounds delicious, right? Don't worry, it's for your plants. Just spray it on and watch them grow healthier and less susceptible to disease. Compost tea can be used on trees, shrubs, houseplants, vegetables, flowers and lawns. It can also help with seed germination and starting new plants. Compost tea has been shown to be a source of beneficial microorganisms that protect plants and provide better nutrient availability to the plants while also improving soil condition. Several types of compost teas can be made, and they vary in the method of preparation and in the ways they are used. Examples include anaerobic compost teas, aerobic compost tea, compost leachate, manure tea and Bokashi tea, among others. One of the most popular of the compost teas is aerobic compost tea (no, it has nothing to do with jumping jacks). Aerobic compost tea is made by using an air pump or blower to supply your mixture with oxygen while brewing. The process enhances the production of beneficial bacteria, protozoa, fungi and other microbes. You can even add food and/or other additives to further encourage the growth of microorganisms in the tea. For example, add molasses for bacteria growth; kelp and humic acid for fungi; and peat moss and hay for protozoa. Brewing aerobic compost tea is easy. Many commercial compost tea brewers are available, but if you take pride in your DIY ethic you can easily build your own brewer. All you need is a bucket, an air pump or blower, an air hose with check valve and a diffuser. Simply wrap the compost in cheesecloth or place it in a mesh bag (avoid fine meshit may keep some beneficial fungi from the tea). Fill a bucket with clean water and drop the bag in (one part compost to four parts water). Then throw in your choice of additives. Aerate the liquid for several hours. While it brews, make sure you provide enough aeration to maintain dissolved oxygen (D.O.) content around 6 ppm. This will support the growth of aerobic microorganisms that enhance plant growth. Aerate the extract between 12 and 48 hours, depending on the type of microbes that are desired. A period of around 12 hours will favor the growth of fungi, while a 24-hour period of aeration will favor the growth of bacteria. Longer periods (3648 hours) will favor the growth of protozoa and other microorganisms. After aerating, pour the liquid through a strainer or cheesecloth to filter. Then dilute the concentrated tea with clean water at a ratio of 1 to 10 before dispensing in sprayers or spray bottles. One gallon of your diluted mixture will cover 800 ft2 of planted area. For best results, apply the tea to plants and soil once every week. The whole plant and surrounding soil may be thoroughly wetted. Tea may be stored up to two weeks in a closed container before applying to plants. To consistently make great compost tea, consider the following: Aerate or chemically treat clean water to remove chlorine or chloramines from water prior to adding compost. Keep the brewer between 70 and 75F while brewing tea. The pH should be near neutral (6.5 to 7.5). Maintain the D.O. concentration around 6 ppm throughout the brewing cycle.
Using these methods, you can routinely make tea with high numbers of beneficial bacteria, fungi, protozoa and nematodes, time after time. The result will ensure healthier plants and better growth.
Sources of additional information on compost tea:

The National Sustainable Agriculture Information Service (ATTRA) website: http://www.attra.org/attra-pub/compost-tea-notes.html The Compost Tea Brewing Manual, 5th Ed., 2005. Dr. Elaine Ingham, Soil Foodweb Inc., Corvallis, Oregon 97333.
Large Underwater Lights

These commercial-quality 115V, 250-W underwater lights are great for ponds, small lakes and spotlighting fountains. Featuring a bright, tungsten halogen bulb, they will operate in water as shallow as 6" deep. The lamp is mounted in a stainless steel case and has a heavy cast brass grill that acts as a rock guard; swivel stand allows for easy positioning. They are UL-listed, thermally protected and include a clear lens and power cord. Optional colored lens available. For use underwater only. 90-day warranty on light fixtures, no warranty on bulbs. Lights are 5" high. To order colored lenses, add letter to part no. UL25: B (Blue), G (Green), R (Red), A (Amber). Made in USA. UL2520 UL2530 UL2550 UL25 12015 Light With 20' Cord Light With 30' Cord Light With 50' Cord Colored Lens Repl. Gasket
Ship Wt
Reflective Mylar
Mylar is an easy-to-use product designed to ensure that no light is wasted around hydroponic systems. Almost 98% of the light that strikes this sheet is refl ected! Mylar can be taped or tacked to any surface or wall and can also be hung from the ceiling for use as a wall divider. The 2-mil thick sheet is preferred where durability is important. Sold in 4' wide rolls. MY125 MY150 MY225 MY250 1 mil x 4' x 25' 1 mil x 4' x 50' 2 mil x 4' x 25' 2 mil x 4' x 50'
Ship Wt
8 lbs 9 lbs 10 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 331.76 340.08 358.80 27.25 7.18
$ 19.27 29.13 26.27 49.73
Each
Multi-Light Transformer With Photocell and Timer

Enhance the beauty of any water garden with the Alpine multi-light transformer with photocell and timer. Connect up to four Alpine lights, or use with any other garden products that need transformers. Photocell and timer will automatically activate when it gets dark. Adjustable timer for settings of auto, 4, 6 or 8 hours. $ 139.95 108.95 100WT 300WT 100 Watts 300 Watts $ 69.75 138.95
Color-Changing Super Bright LED Lights

These pond lights include waterproof in-line controller, outdoor transformer and 33' power cord. LED144 LED72 144 Super Bright, 8 W, PVC Housing, Red/White/Blue 72 Super Bright, 5 W, Aluminum Housing, Red/White/Green
300WT
Transformer w/Photocell & Timer Sensor Control

This photocell timer is versatile in a wide range of applications use it for your lights, pumps or any electrical accessory. The timer range is from 1 to 9 hours with dusk to dawn settings (it automatically turns on at dusk and off at dawn). Handles up to 1,000 watts and/or 8.3 amps. 1000WT 1,000-Watt Transformer w/Photocell & Timer $ 34.95
Super Bright White LED Lights

These Super Bright White LEDs with photocell are a great choice for outdoor ponds. Stake, PVC housing and 23' power cord included. LED2 and LED3 also come with outdoor transformer. LED1 LED2 LED3
LED1
12 Super Bright White, 3.2 W, 4 Colored Lenses 36 Super Bright White, 4.8 W Set of Three 12 Super Bright White, 9.6 W, 12 Colored Lenses
$ 44.75 59.75 78.95
210
Lighting
Hydroponic/Aquarium
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting Systems

For vigorous, year-round plant growth.
Proper light quality, intensity and duration all have a huge influence on plant growth. Natural sunlight is generally considered the best light with a duration of 1216 hours. Depending upon the time of year, your geographical location and where you want the plants to grow, natural sunlight may be limited or even nonexistent. High-intensity lighting systems can replace or extend natural sunlight, providing vigorous plant growth year round.
Sun System Grow Lights

SunGro light systems.
Reflectors have an adjust-a-socket mechanism that allows the lamp to be moved up and down within the reflector to widen and narrow the beam of light. Their steel construction makes them very durable, and they are powder-coated for rust resistance. The polished internal aluminum reflector increases usable light output up to 30%. Can easily be converted into air-cooled with optional fittings. Each reflector includes a glass lens, lamp, hooks and remote ballast. Remote ballasts have louvered sides for cooling and a powder coating for rust resistance. Ballasts are 115V/60 Hz and have 15' lamp cords and 8' power cords. Two-year warranty on unit, one-year warranty on bulb. UL-listed, CSA-approved. Reflector measures 201/2" L x 203/4" W x 10" H. 6330 6155 7325 7170 710120 750000 MH, 400 watts MH, 1,000 watts HPS, 600 watts HPS, 1,000 watts Adjustable Hanger SS Cables $ 383.00 434.00 422.00 454.00 27.82 35.17
Hydrofarm brand heavy-duty lighting systems.

Well suited for both hobbyists and commercial growers, heavy-duty lighting systems combine commercial, greenhouse technology with simple hydroponics to create a high-quality, highly efficient HID system. These Hydrofarm systems are UL-listed and suitable for damp locations. They are ideal for school systems, hobbyists and commercial growers. Available in small and large sizes and two types: metal halide and high-pressure sodium. All systems have a five-year warranty and a one-year warranty on the bulbs. Each system below includes bulbs, hanging hooks and power cords for 115V/60 Hz; other voltages available.
Metal halide (MH) lamps.

Preferred for indoor applications where no sunlight is present, these lamps emit a blue-white light. Lights work well for most house plants and vegetable crops like peppers and tomatoes.
Ballast
High-pressure sodium (HPS) lamps.

Primarily used to induce flowering in mature plants, these lamps emit an orange-yellow light. Ideal as a supplemental light in greenhouse systems where sunlight is not always available.
Daystar Systems
Available in 400- and 1,000-watt sizes, these lights are recommended for larger indoor home and school systems. Horizontal reflectors include a tempered glass lens and a reflector that produces an average of 30% more usable light. Patentpending, total double-wall design runs up to 75% cooler than others. These systems feature a remote, detachable ballast, making them extremely easy to mount and move around. Reflector measures 21" x 21" x 9.5" and has a 15' cable to connect to the remote ballast. Each fixture includes a high-intensity Agrosun bulb, hangers and 8' power cord. UL-listed. Eight-year warranty on system, one-year warranty on bulbs. DA400 DA1000 MH, 400 watts MH, 1,000 watts 35 lbs 44 lbs $ 454 564
DA1000
Recommended Coverage Area for Metal Halide or Sodium Lamps

Primary Light Secondary Light
250 watts 400/430 watts 600 watts 1,000 watts 3' x 3' 4' x 4' 6' x 6' 8' x 8' 5' x 5' 6' x 6' 9' x 9' 12' x 12'
Vertical Burning Light Systems

These highly reflective units feature a brushed aluminum back and a mirror-like finish on the inside (where the lamp is located). Each system includes a parabolic reflector, socket, lamp, hanging brackets and remote ballast. Ballasts are 115V/60 Hz and have 15' lamp cords and 8' power cords. Two-year warranty on unit, one-year warranty on bulb. Note: These systems do not include a glass lens, so they are not UL-listed. 6935 6985 6660 8285 7955 7780

Ballast
MH, 400 watts MH, 400 watts MH, 1,000 watts HPS, 400 watts HPS, 600 watts HPS, 1,000 watts
Reflector
4' 3' 4' 4' 4' 4'
$ 333 319 368 347 503 478
Ballast
Sunburst Grow Light

This compact unit has an angled back to ensure even light distribution and a double wall in the ballast compartment to allow the light to run cooler. Measures 20" x 16" x 6". Tempered glass lens and 6' power cord included. Weighs 21 lbs. DM250 MH, Compact, 250 watts $ 328
Parabolic Reflector
VHO/Light Rail
Lighting
211
URI VHO Lamps, T12

Very high output (VHO) lamps produce a much higher intensity light than standard wattage lamps, making them ideal for marine invertebrate systems. When used with electronic ballasts, VHO lamps use up to 40% less electricity, run much cooler and produce up to 3 times more light than standard wattage lamps. These VHO lamps feature a 180 internal reflector, are T12 bi-pin and 1,500 mA. Actinic 03: 420 nm; Actinic 50/50: 12,000K; AquaSun: 10,000K. These lamps require a VHO ballast and VHO end caps.
Light Rail
This light rail features a state-of-the-art clutch drive (no pulleys or chains), ball bearing wheels and a totally sealed, instrument-grade motor that only draws 5 watts. A sliding switch automatically reverses the motor when it gets to the end of the track-rail. The motor travels at 1 foot per minute, so it would take 6 to 7 minutes to travel down a 6' rail, depending on how you set the delay. An adjustable time delay from 2 to 60 seconds causes the motor to pause at the end of the track before reversing for even light distribution. Maximum load is 50 lbs (22 kg). The system is complete with motor, 6' track and a Smart Box. The 3' extender rail turns it into a 9' system. The Add-A-Lamp kit allows the 6' system to be expanded into a twin lamp 12' system, moving two lights with only one drive motor, with a 10' power cord. 115V/60 Hz, 230V/50 Hz available in quantity. Two-year limited warranty. Made in USA.

V324
V324 VHO Actinic 03 V336 VHO Actinic 03 V348 VHO Actinic 03 V360* VHO Actinic 03 V372* VHO Actinic 03 V524 VHO Actinic 50/50 V536 VHO Actinic 50/50 V548 VHO Actinic 50/50 V560* VHO Actinic 50/50 V572* VHO Actinic 50/50 A575 VHO AquaSun A5951 VHO AquaSun A5110 VHO AquaSun A5140 VHO AquaSun A5160 VHO AquaSun *Ships from Factory.
Length
24" 36" 48" 60" 72" 24" 36" 48" 60" 72" 24" 36" 48" 60" 72"
Watts
75 95 110 140 165 75 95 110 140 160 75 95 110 140 160
$ 25.05 26.79 28.46 41.79 49.23 25.05 26.79 28.46 41.79 49.23 29.83 33.85 34.62 48.16 49.23
LR3A LR3 LR6
Light Rail System Extender Rail, 3' Add-A-Lamp Kit
Ship Wt
5 lbs 1 lb 3 lbs
$ 225.00 14.60 50.34
Efficiently moves metal halide fixtures over tanks or plants up to 12 feet in length!
T5, T8 or T12?
The number after the letter "T" denotes the lamp diameter in 1/8 of an inch. T5 is 5/8", T8 is 1" and T12 is 11/2".
Small Polyp Stony (SPS) Corals

The term "stony corals" refers to the hard, calcerous skeleton beneath a coral's tissue. SPS corals are different from other stony corals because they have small polyps that extend from their skeletons, as opposed to the large polyp variety such as Elegance Coral (Catalaphyllia jardinei ). Some different types of SPS are Montipora, Acropora and Pocillopora. SPS corals can be some of the most difficult corals to keep because they have high demands that some hobbyists are not prepared for. With proper lighting, flow, filtration and husbandry, SPS corals can be great additions to reef aquariums. SPS corals like Acropora require high light levels produced by either metal halide or T5 high output (HO) bulbs. Some have been successful in keeping SPS in aquariums with very high output (VHO) or power compact (PC) lighting, but flow, feeding and water quality must be impeccable. The zooxanthellae within the coral's tissue provide it with food in the form of photosynthetic products. The nutrients supplied by the zooxanthellae cause corals to grow. In exchange for this, the coral provides protection and light for the zooxanthellae. High flow, achieved by power heads or return pumps, is also a must for SPS corals. A random flow blowing across the corals seems to provide better growth than just constant flow from one side. It is important to stay on top of water changes and filter maintenance to keep phosphates to a minimum. Some hobbyists run bare-bottom systems with 50+ turnovers per hour, employing UV, ozone and carbon filtration 24/7 to maintain perfect clarity and water quality. The high flow and bare bottom prevent detritus from settling in the aquarium, keeping nitrates and phosphates at a minimum. Although this method seems to be effective, it is not the only way to successfully keep SPS. SPS corals do not require feeding, but the addition of food in the form of zooplankton or Cyclop-eeze can be beneficial in a closed system. These can be added via a large syringe directed at the corals.
A calcium level of 400500 mg/L is recommended for SPS corals to provide for skeleton growth. Alkalinity and magnesium also play a vital role in SPS growth. Alkalinity of 1012 dKH (178214 ppm CaCO3) and a magnesium level of 1,2001,500 ppm are ideal for SPS growth. There are many parasites that can kill SPS without proper treatment, no matter how good your water quality is. Red bugs and Acro-eating flatworms are two parasites that are currently spreading throughout the reef aquarium industry. Use caution when purchasing coralseven from local fish storesbecause they may not know how to detect these parasites. Do research and become familiar with them before shopping for your next SPS addition.
Ocean Blue Aquarium Winter Park, Florida
212

Lighting
Compact Fluorescent/T5
Reef Optix I
Compact design. For 175-W, 250-W and 400-W lamps. The Reef Optix I is a high-quality, metal halide, pendant fixture. The housing is powder-coated and has an internal polished 95% aluminum reflector. Slotted sides provide excellent ventilation. Fixtures include a 15' detachable lamp-to-ballast cord and chrome wire hangers. Fixtures measure 15" L x 91/2" W x 41/2" H. Tempered glass lens (recommended), ballasts and lamps sold separately. Galaxy ballasts are 115V/60 Hz pulse-start and have a 5-year warranty. AL00945 AL00946 902487 902490 902480 Reef Optix I Pendant Reef Optix I Tempered Lens Galaxy 175-W Ballast Galaxy 250-W Ballast Galaxy 400-W Ballast
Ship Wt
TrueLumen T5 HO Lamps
TrueLumen T5 HO lamps feature remarkable color consistency and rendition and promote maximum coral and plant growth. An energyefficient way to simulate the wavelengths of natural light found on living reefs. Proprietary blend of Nichia Phosphors creates colors that replicate those found in the natural aquatic environments. Available in 12,000K Power White, Freshwater Flora and Actinic Blue 460 nm & 420 nm Actinic Purple wavelengths. C2300 C2301 C2302 C2303 C2304 C2305 C2306 C2307 C2308 C2309 C2310 C2311 C2312 C2313 C2314 C2315
Watts
8 lbs 1 lb 11 lbs 14 lbs 16 lbs
$ 134.00 17.25 AL00945 147.95 157.95 181.95
Each
902480 AL00945
20 20 20 20 24 24 24 24 39 39 39 39 54 54 54 54
12,000K Power White 460 nm Blue Actinic 420 nm Purple Actinic Freshwater Flora 12,000K Power White 460 nm Blue Actinic 420 nm Purple Actinic Freshwater Flora 12,000K Power White 460 nm Blue Actinic 420 nm Purple Actinic Freshwater Flora 12,000K Power White 460 nm Blue Actinic 420 nm Purple Actinic Freshwater Flora
Style
Actual L (Pin to Pin)
163/8" 163/8" 163/8" 163/8" 221/8" 221/8" 221/8" 221/8" 34" 34" 34" 34" 453/4" 453/4" 453/4" 453/4"
Fits Standard Fixtures
20" 20" 20" 20" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48"
$ 14.95 14.95 14.95 14.95 15.95 15.95 15.95 15.95 17.95 17.95 17.95 17.95 19.95 19.95 19.95 19.95
Lamps
SunPaq replacement lamps provide 3 times the light output of other compact fluorescent lamps with double the life (12 months). Lamps are square pin (10Q, Japanese) confi guration only. Overall length does not include pins. Three-month warranty. 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2060
Watts
High-Output T5 Systems
Nova Extreme fixtures use SlimPaq T5 HO lamps that generate the best spectrum for living reefs. A proprietary blend of Nichia tri-phosphors in each lamp provides maximum lumens per watt output, which promotes coral growth and reveals color. Fixtures use an advanced electronic ballast that ensures long lamp life. Integrated reflectors* increase light output, while a quiet fan cools lamps and ballasts. Each fixture comes with both 10,000K Daylight and Actinic 460 nm T5 HO lamps, splash lens tank docking mounts and 6-ft power cords for independent lamp control. C1123 includes Moon White Lunar Lights that simulate nocturnal light. 3 0 0% 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty. German parabolic reflector. C1120 C1121 C1122 C1123
Size
18 18 18 32 32 32 40 40 40 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96
10" 10" 10" 12" 12" 12" 163/4" 163/4" 163/4" 20" 20" 20" 20" 20" 20" 20" 34" 34" 34" 34" 34" 34" 34" 34"
OAL
Dual Actinic 420 nm/460 nm Dual Daylight 6,700K/10,000K SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic Dual Actinic 420 nm/460 nm Dual Daylight 6,700K/10,000K SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic Dual Actinic 420 nm/460 nm Dual Daylight 6,700K/10,000K SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic 460 nm Actinic 420 nm Actinic 10,000K Daylight 6,700K Daylight Dual Daylight 6,700K/10,000K SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic Dual Actinic 420 nm/460 nm 460 nm Actinic 420 nm Actinic 03 10,000K Daylight 6,700K Daylight Dual Daylight 6,700K/10,000K SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic Dual Actinic 420 nm/460 nm Quad SmartPaq 10,000K/460 nm Actinic
Wavelength/Color Temperature
$ 12.00 12.00 12.00 14.95 14.95 14.95 17.57 17.57 17.57 22.09 22.09 22.09 22.09 22.73 22.73 22.73 32.55 32.55 32.55 32.55 33.20 33.20 33.20 36.49
*C1120 C1122 have single lamp reflectors (SLR); C1123 has

Daylight 10,000K Actinic 460 nm LEDs Dimensions
More Lignt
24" 36" 48" 48"
2 x 24 W 2 x 39 W 2 x 54 W 4 x 54 W
2 x 24 W 2 x 39 W 2 x 54 W 4 x 54 W
2 3 4 4
24" x 7.25" x 2.5" .84 36" x 7.25" x 2.5" 1.34 48" x 7.25" x 2.5" 1.86 48" x 14" x 2.5" 3.72
Amps Weight
8 lbs $ 189 12 lbs 219 14 lbs 275 20 lbs 485
2045 C1120 2060
Square Pin Configuration
Lighting Single Bright LED Lighting System

LED lights are energy-efficient and provide higher output than typical fluorescent bulb lighting. The light output in these units is equal to a single fluorescent lamp. 60-mW white lights mimic the underwater effect of sunlight, with a nighttime mode (60-mW blue) that replicates lunar light. System never requires bulb replacement and has a lifetime of about 17,000 hours. A specially designed polycarbonate lens helps focus and protect LED lights. LEDSB18 LEDSB24 LEDSB36 1824" 2436" 3648"
# of White LEDs
LED
213
High-Output LED Lighting System

LED lights are energy-efficient and provide higher output than typical fluorescent bulb lighting. The light output in these units is powerful enough to light a reef aquarium. 1-W white lights mimic the underwater effect of sunlight, with a nighttime mode (1-W blue) that replicates lunar light. System never requires bulb replacement and has a lifetime of about 17,000 hours. A specially designed polycarbonate lens helps focus and protect LED lights. LEDRF18 LEDRF24 LEDRF36 LEDRF48 1824" 2436" 3648" 48" $ 199.99 299.99 379.99 469.99
51 68 102
# of Blue Lunar LEDs
3 4 6
Lumens
300 400 600
$ 59.99 89.99 99.99
LEDSB24
LEDRF36
Double Bright LED Lighting System

LED lights are energy-efficient and provide higher output than typical fluorescent bulb lighting. The light output in these units is equal to a double fluorescent lamp setup. 1-watt lights mimic the underwater effect of sunlight, with a nighttime mode that replicates lunar light. System never requires bulb replacement and has a lifetime of about 17,000 hours. A specially designed polycarbonate lens helps focus and protect LED lights. LEDDB24 LEDDB2436 LEDDB36 1824" 2436" 3648"
# of White Daylight LEDs
TrueLumen LED Strips

These powerful LED strips create the shimmering effect found on natural coral reefs while producing virtually no heat and consuming very little electricity. They promote strong and healthy coral, invertebrate and plant growth. Link up to 3 LED strips off one transformer using the optional 3-way splitter. All systems feature high-output LED chips mounted on a flexible, water resistant strip that can be installed using strip adhesive or mounting screws (both included). Each strip measures 10" x .5" wide. Three types available: 12,000K Daylight, 453 nm Actinic and a 12,000K/Actinic combination. Require a 12V transformer for use (not included). C1660 C1661 C1662 C1664 C1666 C1670 C1671 Actinic Blue LED, 4 x 453 nm Mixed LED, 2 x 12,000K/2 x 453 nm Daylight LED, 2 x 12,000K 3-LED Linking Module, 453 nm Lunar Blue 3-LED Linking Module, 12,000K Lunar White 12V Power Supply 3-Way Splitter Cable $ 47.95 47.95 47.95 9.95 9.95 12.50 14.50
6 8 16
# of Blue Lunar LEDs
3 4 8
Lumens
450 600 1,200
$ 89.99 119.99 169.99
LEDDB2436 C1662
Panorama LED Fixtures

Lighting so bright it supports your reef tank, but without the heat. This sleek fixture eliminates the need for fans and other unsightly components sitting around your tank. 453 nm Stunner LED strip light, 24V Stunner transformer and 3-way splitter included. LEDPAN17 and LEDPAN23 include tank stand mount and all hardware; LEDPAN17KIT and LEDPAN23KIT include wall mount and all hardware. Pendant hanging kit sold separately.
Panorama LED Modules

These modules have 12 powerful LED lights, so you get superior light while running about 50% of the power of your existing lamp. And they produce virtually no heat. In fact, if you have an all-in-one, chances are you can turn off your fan! Each Panorama LED module comes with hardware, mounting bracket and 12-watt power supply. EC8200 EC8201 EC8202 EC5021 10,000K White / 453 nm Actinic Blue 453 nm Actinic Blue 8,000K White 36" Extension Cable $ 99.00 99.00 99.00 3.95
LEDPAN17
Hanging Kit for Panorama LED

Give your Panorama LED light fixture a sleek, modern look using our suspension wire hanging kit. A great option for frameless aquariums, this hanging kit securely suspends the Panorama LED fixture from the ceiling over your aquariumproviding a clean, professional installation appearance. LEDPAN17 LEDPAN23 LEDPAN17KIT LEDPAN23KIT LEDPANHNG LEDPANSTND 17.5" LED System w/Stand Mount 23.5" LED System w/Stand Mount 17.5" LED System w/Wall Mount 23.5" LED System w/Wall Mount Hanging Kit for Panorama LED Stand Mount (Fits Both 17.5" & 23.5") $ 649 799 599 749 25 79
EC8200
214
Lighting
Metal Halide/LED
Reef Aquarium Lighting Guide

MH, 175 W S, LPS, C, SPS S, LPS, SPS* S, LPS S MH, 250 W S, LPS, C, SPS S, LPS, C, SPS* S, LPS, SPS* S, LPS MH, 400 W C, SPS LPS, C, SPS LPS, C, SPS* LPS, C, SPS* HQI, 150 W S, LPS, C, SPS S, LPS, SPS* S, LPS S, LPS HQI, 250 W LPS, C, SPS LPS, C, SPS LPS, C, SPS* LPS, SPS HQI, 400 W C, SPS C, SPS C, SPS C, SPS* Power Compacts S, LPS S, LPS S, LPS S VHO S, LPS, SPS* S, LPS S, LPS S, LPS NO S S S S MH = Metal Halide HQI = Mercury Quartz Iodide VHO = Very High Output NO = Normal Output SPS = Small Polyp Stony Corals, e.g., Acropora or Montipora LPS = Large Polyp Stony Corals, e.g., Heliofunia or Euphyllia C = Tridacna Clams, e.g., Maxima or Crocea S = Soft Corals, e.g., Zoanthids or Leathers
1218" Tank Depth 1824" 2430" 30"+
Metal Halide Lamps

Recommended for reef systems.
Metal halide lamps can be one of the most important factors in a successful reef system. Higher Kelvin color temperatures closely replicate that of sunlight (10,000K30,000K) and are generally recommended for reef systems. As they drop in output by approximately 30% after 12 months, yet continue to use the same amount of power, we recommend changing lamps at least every 12 months.
Double-Ended HqI Lamps

M15010H M15020H M2510H M25014D M1755 M1710 M17510 M1714 M17520 M2565 M2510 M25010 M2511 M25020 AL00810 M4055 M4065 M4010 AL00815 AL00820
Watts
Mogul Base Lamps

175 175 175 175 175 250 250 250 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 1,000
150 150 250 250
10,000K 20,000K 10,000K 14,000K 5,500K 10,000K 10,000K 14,000K 20,000K 6,500K 10,000K 10,000K 14,000K 20,000K 20,000K 5,500K 6,500K 10,000K 20,000K 20,000K
Temp
XM XM Ushio Hamilton Venture Ushio XM Hamilton XM Iwasaki Ushio XM Hamilton XM Radium Venture Iwasaki Ushio Radium Radium
Brand
$ 81.95 81.95 98.50 74.90 53.40 82.50 71.48 84.95 71.48 81.80 109.95 81.95 84.90 98.50 115.00 55.44 60.00 122.95 115.00 280.00
Each
73.76 73.76 88.65 67.41 48.95 74.25 64.33 76.46 64.33 77.71 98.95 73.76 76.41 88.65 103.50 49.90 54.00 110.66 103.50 252.00
4+
*SPS corals need to be kept high in the water column under these conditions.
Metal Halide Pendants

These pendant lights are perfect for hanging over reef tanks and touch tanks and for enhancing zoological exhibits. The well-ventilated aluminum reflector features a UV-absorbing splash lens on the 175- and 250-watt models (the 400-watt does not have a splash lens) and is completely corrosionproof. Fixtures are 115V with remote ballasts and 18' power cords. Lamps sold separately (right). 9.5" dia. x 14" H. One-year warranty. MP175B MP250B MP400B 175 W, Black 250 W, Black 400 W, Black $ 268 299 379
MP175B
PAR38 Aquarium LED Lights

Adding lighting effects to your aquarium without adding to your electric bill. These powerful spotlights not only focus light energy, they will bring out colors and produce ripples you've never seen before. Each lamp features 5 high-power Cree LEDs with focusing lenses, allowing light to penetrate deeper in depth while producing stunning color and shimmer effects. Now you can deliver light into your aquarium only where needed, reducing wasted light and lowering your energy costs. PAR38 LED lamps are designed to fit into standard E26/E27 screw-in sockets. Each lamp includes LEDs, lenses and integrated LED ballast. 21 watts. EC6850 EC6851 12,000K White 455 nm Royal Blue $ 119 119
EC6850
Double-Ended
Mogul
Mogul
Stunner LED Strips

Put beautiful, shimmering light right where you want it with a simple, super-efficient, linkable LED fixture designed to easily retrofit into your existing set up. Available in four colors: 8,000K (white), 453 nm (blue), 8,000K (white) with 453 nm (blue) and 403 nm (UV). Linkable design allows you to run up to six strips off of one 24V power supply (not included). Double your light output by snapping on a polished reflector, or use an extension cable and 4-way splitter. 6 watts, 12.5" L x 0.6" W x 0.4" H. EC8010 EC8011 EC8012 EC8013 EC8009 EC5021 EC5020 EC5022 453 nm Blue LED Strip 18 x 8,000K / 6 x 453 nm Blue LED Strip 8,000K White LED Strip 403 nm UV LED Strip 24V Power Supply Extension Cable Stunner Reflector 4-Way Splitter w/Switches $ 49.00 49.00 49.00 49.00 19.00 3.95 6.95 12.95
Cannon LED Pendants

The Cannon LED aquarium pendant is a cool, energy-efficient lighting solution. Compact and powerful, the high-density, 50-watt LED multichip works with the polished reflector to produce an intense, sharp beam of light that penetrates water more effectively than metal halides. Packaged inside an IP65-rated circular module with glass lens. Includes adjustable hanging kit. EC6800 EC6801 12,000K White 453nm Blue $ 549 549
EC6800
EC8010
Fluorescent Lamps/Light Meters
Lighting
215
Fluorescent Lamps, Super Actinic 03, T12

These 100% blue spectrum lamps are an excellent source of longwave ultraviolet light required for growth in marine invertebrates. The lamps' spectral energy peaks at 420 nm, simulating the blue chlorophyll absorption peak used in photosynthesis by zooxanthellae. The lamps have a color temperature of 8,000 Kelvin, are T12 bi-pin and feature a 180 internal reflector to maximize light output. Available in standard wattages and very high output (VHO). We recommend that Actinic 03 lamps be used in combination with Actinic 50/50 lamps. A336 A348
Length
Lunar Lights
Low voltage. Linkable LEDs. Three color choices. Very low wattage. Research studies show that using rhythmic moon luminance is helpful in spawning captive animals. These low-voltage Lunar Lights can be used for spawning and/or creating a nocturnal environment for viewing animals without disturbing them. Can be added to an existing hood or canopy for a complete, 24-hour lighting solution. Customize coverage by adding Lunar Links (sold separately). White replicates the glow of a full moon. Ideal for use in all freshwater, saltwater and reef tanks to simulate that lunar glow of a tropical summer night. Also great for terrarium use.
A324
36" 48"
Watts
30 40
$ 26.20 27.65
The Blue light casts a mysterious nighttime glow over a tank, creating a viewable nocturnal environment. Blue is ideal for all freshwater, saltwater and reef tanks. Easy to installjust plug a Lunar Light (with 115VAC to 6VDC power adapter, included, and 6' cable) into a 115V, grounded power outlet. Then attach the light to your aquarium canopy or internal reflector with the mounting screw. Lunar Lights measure 1.5" x 1.5" x 1" and have two 1-watt LED lights. C1664 C1666 C1660 C1661 C1662 C1670 C1671 453 nm Blue Module 12,000K White Module 4 x 453 nm Blue Strip 2 x 12,000K / 2 x 453 nm Combo Strip 4 x 12,000K White Strip 12V Power Supply Three-Way Splitter Cable $ 9.95 9.95 42.95 42.95 42.95 12.50 14.50
Actinic 50/50, T12

These lamps provide excellent color rendition for both saltwater fish and invertebrate systems. They contain a 50/50 mixture of actinic blue and ultralume white, producing an excellent light spectrum required for marine tanks. They feature a 180 internal reflector, have a color temperature of 12,000K, and are T12 bi-pin. They can be used alone or in combination with Actinic 03 lamps.
Length Watts
C1664
A536 A548
36" 48"
30 40
$ 26.65 27.80
A524
Light Meter, Economy
Waterproof
Weighted sensor settles face up in water every time!
AquaSun, T12
Recommended for use with fresh and saltwater tanks to enhance colors in fish and plants. Features a wide spectrum color rendition that is excellent for deep-water tanks or stony coral tanks. Lamps are T12, color temperature is 10,000K, 100% white spectrum with 180 internal reflectors. Q318 Q324 Q336 Q348
Length
18" 24" 36" 48"
Watts
Quickly and accurately measure light levels at the bottom of your tank using the waterproof sensor. Ranges: 01,999 lux, 2,00019,999 lux and 20,00050,000 lux. Easy- to-use meter has three buttons for manual range selection; accuracy is 6% of reading 1 digit. Sensor is salt water compatible and measures a peak wavelength of 560 nm. Meter is splashproof with auto shut-off. 31/2-ft cord connects sensor to meter. One 9V battery (included) gives 150 hours of use. Two-year warranty. SM700 $ 80
15 20 30 40
$ 30.25 31.15 35.80 36.60
q318
Light Meter
Light readings are displayed on an extra large LCD (1" high) with bar graph, low battery and over-range indications. The color and cosine corrected sensor is connected to the meter with a flexible 36" cable. Also features RS232 computer output, max/min and external zero adjustment. Includes 9V battery, case and a detachable sensor (not for submersible applications). Measures 8" x 2" x 1", weighs 9 oz. Five-year warranty. 840020 $ 142 Range: 0400,000 lux, 040,000 fc Resolution: .01 / 1 lux, .001 / 1 fc
Lamp, T12
Provides a wavelength similar to natural daylight (12,000K). T12. 40WR
Length
48"
Watts
40
$ 21.60
216
Tanks
Aquarium/Accessories
Sinks in water
Malaysian Driftwood
Acrylic Aquariums
Fine cell cast acrylic is 17X stronger, 4% clearer and 20% better insulated than glass. Acrylic is also much lighter and can withstand shock much better than glass. All tanks include a single fluorescent light fixture (lamps not included) mounted in an enclosed ABS plastic hood. Light hoods are UL-listed. AT tanks are rectangular; AX tanks are hexagon-shaped. Tanks 55 gallons and larger ship FOB factory. AT29 AT30 AT40 AT50 AT55 AT60 AT66 AT76 AT90 AT100 AT125 AT126 AT135 AT180 AT240 AT300 AX28 AX34 AX55 AX75 AX95
Gallons
A preferred driftwood for plant tanks and garden aquariums. Each piece is unique in shape and measures from 7" to 23". Unlike other driftwood, it sinks when placed in water and requires no slate bottom. For best results, presoak the driftwood for 2448 hours before placing in aquarium. Depending on size, some pieces may take longer to sink. TK1501 710" $ 5.00 TK1502 1117" 8.00 TK1503 1321" 13.75 TK1504 1723" 16.75
TK1501
Scratch Removal Kit

Ideal for public and home aquariums, this kit removes scratches from acrylic, Lucite and Plexiglas. Includes eight sheets of progressively graded crystal polishing pads, cotton flannel, sanding block and 3 /4 oz of polishing liquid abrasive. Molded case and instructions included. Weighs 1 lb. SK1 $ 28.95
29 30 40 50 55 60 65 75 90 100 125 125 135 180 240 300 28 34 55 75 95
30" x 12" x 18" 36" x 12" x 16" 36" x 15" x 16" 36" x 15" x 20" 48" x 13" x 20" 48" x 13" x 18" 36" x 18" x 24" 48" x 18" x 20" 48" x 18" x 24" 60" x18" x 20" 72" x 18" x 20" 60" x 18" x 24" 72" x 18" x 24" 72" x 24" x 24" 96" x 24" x 24" 96" x 24" x 30" 18" x 20" Hex 18" x 23" Hex 25" x 24" Hex 25" x 30" Hex 25" x 36" Hex
Dimensions (L x W x H)
24" 24" 24" 24" 18" x 2" 36" 24" 18" x 2" 18" x 2" 24" x 2" 24" x 2" 24" x 2" 24" x 2" 24" x 2" 24" x 3" 24" x 3" 15" 15" 18" 18" 18"
Fixture Length
Ship Wt (lbs)
21 25 29 39 45 46 55 69 76 85 99 85 103 122 150 250 19 20 30 42 68
$ 227.86 233.28 276.48 319.71 313.54 324.20 489.25 551.37 679.15 625.89 783.85 861.94 944.00 1,137.05 1,777.72 2,714.82 195.38 231.91 241.02 331.29 597.51
Vertical Aquatic Display System

The vertical display system is a four-foot module ideal for fresh or salt water, and can be heated or refrigerated. System framework is composed of sturdy, powdercoated tubular steel, and the 11-gallon glass tanks allow great visibility and easy access. Filtration system is centralized and flowrates are preset, so no adjustments are necessary. A bi-level water skimmer removes bottom and floating debris from each holding tank and delivers it to the BIO-Wheel filtration module, where the water is filtered mechanically, chemically and biologically. Once filtered, water is directed by the system's high-output recirculation pump to the ultraviolet (UV) disinfection unit and 1000-watt submersible titanium heater and then back to the holding tanks. Service panels give you convenient access to filtration media, heating or refrigeration units and electrical components. Fish feeding timers enable automatic shutdown of the system pump for feeding; system restarts after a preselected time has elapsed. Sump replenishment valves allow for addition of water to sump when water level drops too low. 5,000K fluorescent lamps are energy-efficient, cool and protected from moisture by a polycarbonate shield. To ensure maximum safety, the power cord is routed inside the system framework. 20" D x 511/2" L x 94" H, weighs 490 lbs. Capacity is 98 gallons. 115V/60 Hz. Filtration current is 10.5 amps, lighting current is 2.2 amps. VDS4FT $ 5,525
Decorations and filter not included.
Tank Dividers
Perforated with tiny holes to allow water flow, these dividers can be installed in glass aquariums to separate sick or fighting fish and for breeding. 10600 fits 10-gallon tanks; 10605 fits 15/20 long; 10610 fits 20 high; 10615 fits 29/55-gallon tanks. 10600 10605 10610 10615 95/8" x 111/4" 113/8" x 111/4" 113/8" x 155/8" 113/8" x 171/4"
WxH
$ 9.20 10.15 11.90 14.25
Each
8.56 9.44 11.07 13.25
4+
10600
Polyethylene
Tanks
217
Polyethylene Tanks
100% recycled material.
These heavy-duty tanks are durable and UV-resistant. Lots of uses, from water storage to biofilters to quarantine tanks. All are nestable for compact storage and lower shipping costs. OT = oval tub, CT = circular tub, DM = drum w/lid. Most units ship motor freight; see price block for exceptions.
Cone Bottom Tank

This cone bottom tank can be used as everything from a filter to a brine shrimp hatcher. Features a screw-top lid (not watertight) and UV-resistant polyethylene for use outdoors. Has a flat bottom that may be fitted with a bulkhead of up to 11/2". 25 gallons, weighs 14 lbs. Ships Ground. CB25 $ 209.23
241/2"
23"
41/2"
Koi Show Bowls

Size Capacity (Gallons) Ship Wt
OT110 CT25* CT37** CT54** DM35** DM52 DM64 DM155
52" L x 37" W x 21" H 28" Dia. x 13" H 32" Dia. x 15" H 33" Dia. x 21" H 24" Dia. x 24" H 27" Dia. x 27" H 31" Dia. x 31" H 37" Dia. x 40" H
110 25 37 54 35 52 64 155
33 lbs 11 lbs 18 lbs 22 lbs 13 lbs 18 lbs 26 lbs 53 lbs
$ 147.80 56.40 69.80 89.70 74.70 99.00 105.90 221.30
These low-cost, polyethylene koi bowls come in three styles: light-duty (191/2 gallons) for the koi hobbyist, medium-duty (23 gallons) for serious hobbyists or small farmers and heavy-duty (23 gallons) for the commercial farmer. The royal blue color is excellent for showing koi colors. Ship Oversize.

KB4 21" Dia. x 11" KB7 27" x 12" MD KB9 27" x 12" HD
Ship Wt
4 lbs 7 lbs 9 lbs
$ 61.06 91.07 99.98
*Ships Ground. **Ships Oversize.
KB4 OT110
Instant Fish Tank

You can rent a 22-foot, 20 cubic yard (4,400-gallon) roll-off waste container just about anywhere in the US for $100 to $200 per month, including pick-up and delivery! With the addition of our 22' roll-off liner, you have an instant watertight fish tank. Great for beginners. If the fish don't make it, just tie off the bag and call for a pick up. The liner is 8- mil thick, 22' long, 8' wide, 66" deep, virgin polyethylene (white) and weighs 28 lbs. Features a patented form fit design that fits squarely in the corners to virtually eliminate tearing and gives triple thickness leak protection at the bottom of the tailgate. Tape over any protrusions prior to installing liner. Guaranteed against manufacturer's defects but not guaranteed to notleak as we have no control over installation. In stock! LR22 $ 130.00 122.20/2+
CT25
AES Technician Profile

Ryan Karcher
Ryan received his A.S. degree in aquaculture from Hillsborough Community College. His technical experience includes ornamental hatchery management, hormone-induced spawning and aeration and recirculating system design. He also has experience in home aquarium design and maintenance.
218
Tanks
Polyethylene/Fiberglass
Rectangular Sealed Tanks and Filter Sumps

Made of molded polyethylene, these are right from the mold. The tanks have not been cut open or drilled and are completely sealed. This allows for customization with the use of a drill, router or jigsaw. Make sumps, storage tanks, hauling tanks, filters, etc. The 86-gallon tanks and larger ship via motor freight; others can ship Oversize. Wall thickness is approx. 3/16"; all other dimensions are also approximate. The sumps feature precut open tops with a center brace for support (in larger tanks only). Add "S" to the beginning of the part number for the precut sump option. We will drill holes for $12.50 each. Send us an exact drawing. Note: Allow 10 days lead time.
Dimensions Gallons L W H Actual Wt Each 3+ Actual Wt (S Option) Each (S)
Fiberglass Tank
90-gallon fiberglass tank with 1/2" thick tempered glass viewing window, blue gel coat interior, white exterior, 36" L x 24" W x 24" D. S390-2 $ 797
102020 103020 207020 103028 103030 207030 120040 208040 207045 208052 207055 209055 300086 207095 103110 103150 103200
20 20 20 28 30 30 40 40 45 52 55 55 86 90 110 150 200
24" 28" 16" 21" 30" 42" 33" 27" 44" 36" 32" 42" 31" 55" 89" 65" 85"
16" 111/2" 18" 18" 12" 10" 15" 17" 16" 15" 20" 15" 24" 18" 14" 29" 20"
12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 16" 18" 20" 16" 24" 20" 20" 28" 22" 21" 20" 28"
12 lbs $ 113.89 15 lbs 113.89 12 lbs 113.89 18 lbs 133.33 20 lbs 145.33 18 lbs 145.33 27 lbs 201.98 19 lbs 201.98 28 lbs 218.18 30 lbs 296.66 29 lbs 296.66 30 lbs 296.66 40 lbs 343.10 44 lbs 365.29 61 lbs 462.37 63 lbs 512.20 90 lbs 716.09
103.63 103.63 103.63 121.33 132.25 132.25 183.77 183.77 198.55 269.96 269.96 269.96 312.22 332.42 420.76 466.10 651.64
11 lbs $ 145.57 15 lbs 145.57 11 lbs 145.57 15 lbs 158.55 17 lbs 174.38 15 lbs 174.38 24 lbs 238.27 17 lbs 238.27 24 lbs 256.17 26 lbs 319.19 25 lbs 319.19 26 lbs 319.19 35 lbs 379.86 40 lbs 395.70 54 lbs 498.88 55 lbs 557.59 80 lbs 775.46
AquaticEco.com
S102020
207020
Have a complaint?
AES's Yoshi Hirono with the Secretary General of Aquaculture in Malaysia.
Storage/Culture/Mixing
Tanks
219
Tanks, Transparent
Transparent culture tanks are ideal for raising brine shrimp, microalgae, phytoplankton, rotifers and more. Lightweight, corrosionproof tanks are made of .04" polymer fiberglass with 90% transparency. Used also for trickle filters and stripping towers. The conical bottom tanks are fitted with a 2" FNPT bottom hole and can be supported by bricks around the edge. T4, T8, T9 and T11 are stock tanks and ship Ground. All tanks are handmade; therefore, measurements are approximate and may vary. Made in USA.
Poly Tanks, Inexpensive

These lightweight rectangular and cylindrical tanks are excellent for water storage, biofilters and nutrient tanks. Made from UV-resistant polyethylene, they can also be used outdoors. Tanks include covers and are self-supporting when placed on a level surface. All can ship Ground.
BT12 Each 4+
BT12 Square Tank, 12.5 gal, 11" x 11" x 34" Almond BT20 Square Tank, 20 gal, 14" x 14" x 34" Blue BT44 Cylindrical Tank, 44 gal, 18" x 40" Blue
Color
Ship Wt
5 lbs $ 45.00 39.81 7 lbs 55.00 48.89 30 lbs 74.00 65.93
T4 T8
Conical Bottom Tanks, Free-Standing

Their semiclear fiberglass construction allows 90% light transmissionmaking them perfect for algal culture. An integrated, skirted stand supports the tank and requires no assembly. Conical base slopes from 45 to 30 at bottom. An access port is cut out for the 2" NPT elbow located at the bottom of the tank. Reinforced bottom and top edges prevent cracking and breakage. All tanks ship completely assembled and include 2" NPT bottom fittings. Special sizes available, please inquire. CBT25 and CBT68 ship Oversize; CBT129 and larger ship via motor freight.
Gallons Diameter Height
T4 Flat 12" 4' 23/87 25 lbs $ 139.62 109.00** T12 Flat 12" 8' 47/178 12 lbs* 167.00 158.65** T185 Flat 18" 5' 66/250 15 lbs* 184.00 174.80** T1810 Flat 18" 10' 132/500 19 lbs* 243.00 230.85** T11 Flat 18" 4' 44/166 25 lbs 235.69 179.00** T30 Flat 30" 5' 185/700 32 lbs* 370.00 351.50** T58 Flat 58" 5' 725/2,744 52 lbs* 708.00 672.60** T8 Conical 12" 41/2' 25/95 25 lbs 348.62 287.00** TC185 Conical 18" 5' 47/178 18 lbs* 360.00 342.00** T9 Biofilter Tank 12" 4' 23/87 25 lbs 353.85 307.00** T4C Cap 12" 1 lb 25.39 24.12** T18C Cap 18" 2 lbs 42.00 39.90** T30C Cap 30" 3 lbs 67.00 63.65** T58C Cap 58" 6 lbs 304.00 288.88** *Ships from factory and has additional crating chargesallow 23 weeks. ** For 4 or more of these items, add a "D" to the part numberyour discounted order will ship factory direct (additional crating charges apply).
Style
Diameter Volume (approx.) Height (gal/liter)
Ship Wt
Each
(4+)
CBT25 CBT68 CBT129 CBT291 CBT500
25 68 129 291 500
12" 18" 24" 36" 48"
63" 80" 83" 82" 87"
$ 355 438 570 900 1,595
Storage Tanks
These vertical, bulk storage tanks are ideal for mixing and storing make-up water, chemicals to be added, liquid waste, etc. Made of polyethylene, they offer excellent chemical resistance and can be used inside or outdoors. All tanks have a screw-on, sealed lid (manway) on the top. It is in the center on the 65180 gallon sizes but is offset to the side on the 1,200 gallon and larger tanks for easy access. Tanks ship via motor freight only. Allow 10 days lead time.
Graduated Tanks
Graduated containers are especially useful when mixing products. Semitranslucent, natural polyethylene allows the liquid level to be seen from outside the tanks (the resin used for these tanks meets FDA standards). They handle temperatures up to 140F. The 25- ( T25) and 45-gallon ( T45) tanks are lightweight and nestable for tank storage and shipping. The 55-gallon tank (T55) comes with a 3/4" spigot valve already fitted and is not nestable. All tanks have 5/32" thick walls and may be shipped Ground (Oversize charged at rate of 30 lbs each). Covers are ordered separately. T25 25 gal, 18" W x 28" D $ 94.45 85.00 T45 45 gal, 22" W x 32" D 105.15 94.63 T55 55 gal, 21" W x 36" D 149.95 94.89
Each 4+ Cover
T25L $ 28.30 T45L 44.40 T55L 45.65
Each
25.47 41.23 41.09
4+
900065 900100 900165 900200 900350 900500 900850 901200 901600 901750 902200
Gallons
65 100 165 200 325 500 850 1,200 1,550 1,700 2,150
Dia.
23" 31" 31" 47" 47" 47" 56" 76" 76" 76" 76"
Tank H
39" 32" 52" 26" 43" 64" 74" 54" 73" 81" 102"
Total H
43" 37" 57" 31" 50" 71" 82" 66" 85" 93" 114"
Manway
8" 8" 8" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16" 16"
$ 192.00 234.85 342.84 340.00 440.36 598.98 848.28 1,160.52 1,284.14 1,663.78 1,990.20
T25
T45
T55
220
Tanks
Fiberglass
FRP60 60 liters 17" 14" FRP163 163 liters 26" 24" FRP300 300 liters 341/4" 31" FRP500 500 liters 421/2" 38" FRP1000 1,000 liters 55" 511/8"
A B
Fiberglass Larval Tanks

In stock for immediate shipment.
These rugged, circular fiberglass tanks are ideal for Artemia/rotifer culture, hatcheries and small holding system larval growout. Made of reinforced fiberglass with a smooth, gel-coated interior. Flat bottom with vertical sides and a center drain port. PVC couplers are molded into the base of the tank to allow varying tank heights. Tank legs over 20" are not recommended. Tanks ship motor freight, FOB Orlando.
22" 213/4" 215/8" 215/8" 291/2"
2" 2" 3" 3" 4"
1" $ 300.00 1" 472.73 11/2" 584.75 11/2" 725.45 11/2" 1,254.39
Each
270.00 425.45 493.88 652.90 1,128.95
4+
AES Custom Fiberglass Tanks

AES, in conjunction with Johnson's Custom Fiberglass, is pleased to offer custom fiberglass products. Whether it is a small intricate aquarium, a transport tank or a 200,000-gallon exhibit pool, we can turn your aquatic dreams into reality. Aquariums and tanks can be custom built to form fit available space or create eye-catching designs that will enhance any exhibit. These custom-made products are backed by 20 years experience in custom fiberglass molding and are built to last. All products are made from high-quality materials. Premium resins and glass fiber produce high-strength, durable laminates. All built-in fittings are made with female fiberglass couplers to ensure a better bond than PVC couplers. PVC foam core construction adds rigidity to larger tanks. Urethane foam, with twice the R-value of Styrofoam , can be used when temperature control is a factor. Viewing windows of tempered, laminated glass or acrylic are available. Two-year warranty on materials and workmanship. Ships motor freight, allow 6 weeks build time. Call for a quotation on large quantities. Crating charges not included in prices. FOB Orlando.
Capacity (Gallons)
To: Huy Tran Let me take the opportunity to thank you for all the hard work on the blower quotation. You are by far the most helpful and responsive vendor we deal with in the business. I am pleased to give you our business on this order and hope we can continue to purchase a volume of supplies through AES.
Michael Buchal
Bodega Bay, CA
FT1152 FT293
Round Rectangle
96" I.D. x 36" D 54" L x 33" W x 38" H
1,128 293
$ 3,942.86 2,640.40
Other custom devices can also be fitted to make the tank work for your application. Tanks can be foam covered for insulated applications, tank covers with solid tops or screen tops can also be fitted. Larger tanks, such as 20', 30' and 40' round or oval tanks are also available. Due to
the many variables associated with tanks of this size, please contact us for pricing.
Behind the scenes at an aquarium store.
Fiberglass
Tanks
221
Fiberglass Tanks, Value Buy

Ready to shipno waiting!
These tanks are used all over Southeast Asia in hatcheries and farms raising tilapia, shrimp, tropical fish, etc. Rigid, thin-wall fiberglass is gel-coated and easy to clean. The blue color does show scratches, but we guarantee that they will hold water. They are offered at an excellent price and are nestable for economical shipping. Turn these tanks into an instant system by adding a filtration module. The top-mounting filter has multiple chambers and a lid and can turn the tank into a quarantine system, holding system or even a small growout system. Tanks ship motor freight. Usually in stock for immediate shipping. FOB Orlando. Crating charges not included in prices.

FT81
FT391 FT811 FT1221 FT2351 FT5231 FFB81 FFB122 FFB235 FFB523
Tank, 39 gallons Tank, 81 gallons Tank, 122 gallons Tank, 235 gallons Tank, 523 gallons Filter Box for FT81 Filter Box for FT122 Filter Box for FT235 Filter Box for FT523
36" x 24" x 12" 48" x 30" x 15" 60" x 30" x 18" 72" x 36" x 24" 96" x 48" x 30" 30" x 8" x 10" 30" x 8" x 10" 36" x 8" x 10" 48" x 10" x 16"
L x W x H
$ 125.40 319.33 410.30 730.36 1,561.28 10.00 83.33 102.74 216.20
Each
112.86 287.40 369.27 657.33 1,405.15 63.00 74.99 92.46 194.58
4+
These tanks are excellent for use in hatcheries for holding live rock, marine invertebrates, etc.
FFB81 Filter Box
Fiberglass Trough
Rectangular troughs are used for hatching fish eggs, coral propagation, baitfish, larval rearing (use with McDonald-type hatching jars), invertebrate holding and many other culture applications. Although not as thick as our reinforced fiberglass tanks, it is still quite durable. Inside gel coat is light blue. Troughs are stackable and ship via motor freight, FOB Orlando. 96" L x 24" W x 12" H, 35 lbs. Custom sizes available in quantity. Crating charges apply. FT120L2
New r Thicke G el C oat
$ 296.26
266.64/4+
Rectangular Tanks Fiberglass Tanks With Window

New models are gel-coated and have thicker sidewalls!
Similare to the fiberglass tanks above, but with a window for easy viewing. Raise tilapia, shrimp, tropical fish, etc. Rigid, 5-mm fiberglass is easy to clean. Blue color shows scratches, but the tanks are sturdy and nestable for economical shipping. Add a filtration module (see "Filter Boxes" above) to instantly turn the tank into a quarantine, holding or growout system. Tanks ship motor freight. Usually in stock for immediate shipping. FOB Orlando. Note: Add 5" to each L and W dimension below for outside dims. Crating charges not included in prices. FT128W2 FT160W2 FT235W2 FT336W2 FT523W2 FT632W2
Capacity (Gal)
Can be moved with a pallet jack.

These tanks are often used for holding live rock, vegetation, tropical fish and lobsters. Made for use with fork lifts and pallet jacks, so they do have uneven interiors. Lead time two weeks. Schooner is only 14" H (outside), but can be just the right thing for your aquaculture applications. It can hold 400 lbs, is stackable and no lid is available. Middy is an extra-heavy-duty tank that can hold 1,200 lbs. There is no optional lid, but they can be stacked when holding lighter loads (not nestable). Mini is capable of holding 650 lbs. Stackable, but not nestable. The optional heavy-duty lid (L100) weighs 17 lbs.

150 180 270 405 600 720
Inside L x W x H
48" x 30" x 24" 60" x 30" x 24" 72" x 36" x 24" 72" x 36" x 36" 96" x 48" x 30" 96" x 48" x 36"
$ 430.18 560.00 804.16 1,064.00 1,630.30 2,004.66
KA100 KA101 KA102 L100
Schooner Middy Mini Lid
47" x 47" x 14" 12.5 50" x 38" x 22" 16.0 55" x 30" x 24" 16.5 55" x 30" x 2"
Outside L x W x H
Cubic Feet
Holding Wt (lbs)
400 1,200 640
Ship Wt (lbs)
37 85 45 17
$ 275.00 324.00 259.00 150.00
KA100
FT632W Stack of KA102
KA102
222
Tanks
Above-Ground Pools/Portable Tanks
Above-Ground Pools
Easy-to-assemble, 6" rugged top rails.
You can probably find less expensive above-ground pools, but they won't be "aquaculture duty." If you've been looking for a low-cost, easy-to-ship tank, you just found it. Sand Dollar above-ground pools are the most reasonable low-cost alternative to traditional tanks because they are mass-produced. If you are just getting into aquaculture and either your final design is not yet set or your finances are tight, these may be the tanks for you. The warranty on these pools is 20 years on the liners, frames and walls! Their structural design is in full compliance with ANS for above-ground residential swimming pools. The steel used for frames and walls is copper-bearing steel that is hot-dip galvanized, then covered with zinc phosphate, chromate, primer and a two-part baked enamel finish on both sides! Liners are a full 20 mil (we suggest you put a micrometer to what other people call 20 mil) in a solid dark blue color only. Sides are 48" high. Pools are shipped with frames and liners. Liners can also be purchased separately (their wall height is 52"). When ordering 6 or more pools and/or liners (sizes can be mixed to qualify for discounts), please add "D" to the part number. Each price FOB Orlando, 6+ FOB factory. Entirely made in USA. Tanks do not include skimmers, filters or pumps. P12S P16S P18S P21S P24S PL12S PL16S PL18S PL21S PL24S PLRK P16S-S

12' Pool 3,375 266 lbs 16' Pool 6,000 340 lbs 18' Pool 7,600 400 lbs 21' Pool 10,500 450 lbs 24' Pool 13,500 525 lbs 12' Liner Only 40 lbs 16' Liner Only 60 lbs 18' Liner Only 75 lbs 21' Liner Only 85 lbs 24' Liner Only 110 lbs Liner Repair Kit 1 lb Skimmer & Return Assembly (Fits All)
Approx. Gallons
Ship Wt
$ 1,100.00 1,543.00 1,730.00 2,013.00 2,317.00 187.00 265.00 300.00 367.00 445.00 5.00 106.00
p12s
Centennial Pool Package

This package contains everything you need for full swimming enjoyment and maintenance. Includes 24' x 52" Centennial pool, 24' heavy-duty UD liner, 1-hp high-efficiency pump (UL-listed), 16" Value-Line sand filter with 6-position valve and thru-wall skimmer. CENT24 $ 2,195
Portable Tanks
Hold 750 Gallons for $743!
Round portable tanks are suitable for many permanent tank uses. These high-quality tanks are designed for showing koi, so they set up quickly. The top support is rigid. They feature 22-mil Hypalon vinyl-coated industrial fabric liners carrying a 30-day replacement warranty. Side height is 30" (90 cm), 6' and 8' diameter. Choose dark blue or black. Includes supports and 11/2" FNPT side drain with inside cap. Made in USA.

QT502 QT902
6', Dark Blue 8', Dark Blue
450 gallons 750 gallons
Capacity
Ship Wt
21 lbs 67 lbs
$ 644.62 743.00
Use portable tanks for:

Home aquaculture. Fish medication. Nursery tanks. Temporary holding. Emergency storage. Fish collecting. Fish shows. Harvesting. Education.
qt502
750 s Gallon
$
743
Round/Liners/Covers
Tanks
223
Tanks, Cone Bottomed

These round tanks have a 20 sloping bottom with 14" diameter center drain area (drain hole not cut out). You will need to construct a support frame or place the tank in a bed of sand or dirt. Ships by motor freight from factory.
Tanks, Flat Bottomed

Tanks have a flat depression molded into the side near the bottom for a bulkhead fitting. Ships by motor freight from factory.
tp800
TP650 TP950 TCB250 TCB450 TCB1500 TP655 TP800 TP830 TP1000
Cone Bottom Cone Bottom Cone Bottom Cone Bottom Cone Bottom Flat Bottom Flat Bottom Flat Bottom Flat Bottom
85" 96" 60" 75" 102" 79" 90" 94" 92"
30" 36" 28" 26" 60" 34" 38" 30" 44"
Nominal Wall
1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4"
Capacity (Gallons)
650 950 250 450 1,500 650 800 830 1,000
Capacity (Liters)
2,461 3,596 946 1,703 5,678 2,461 3,028 3,142 3,785
Ship Wt
$ 587 969 294 559 1,175 588 662 792 862
Steel Tanks
If you want reasonably priced tanks that may or may not be relocated later, our galvanized steel tanks are right for you. Round steel tanks are unsurpassed for strength. You can carry the sections through a pedestrian doorway, bolt several tanks together in one day with only two people and take them down just as quickly. Use liners where portability is important. Bolts included.
Tank Liners
Decimal to Gauge Chart
.036 inch = 20 gauge .047 inch = 18 gauge .053 inch = 17 gauge .058 inch = 16 gauge .071 inch = 14 gauge .100 inch = 12 gauge .130 inch = 10 gauge With just a little care to prevent punctures, these 6' tall tank liners can be used for many years. If you don't purchase a good liner, however, you may be in for some trouble. Vinyl is a good liner material and is typically used in tank applications because it can be custom-fitted to round tanks. These heavy-duty liners are 30-mil thick and sold in black or sky blue. Blue is standard, so add a "B" after part number for black. LZ76 7' Dia. LZ96 9' Dia. LZ126 12' Dia. LZ156 15' Dia. LZ186 18' Dia. LZ216 21' Dia. LZ246 24' Dia. LZ276 27' Dia. LZ306 30' Dia. LRK* Black Repair Kit LRK-BE* Blue Repair Kit *Ships Hazmat.
Ship Wt
A sloping concrete bottom can be poured, complete with drain and heating coils. Its high strength allows many possibilities, including very large yet economical tanks (sizes available up to 105'). Deep tanks (to 14') can be built by bolting panels two or more high (please request engineering assistance). Tanks may be partially buried to conserve heat and make fish observation easier. Many trout farmers use these tanks without liners or interior paint when their pH is near neutral. Our Sweetwater epoxy products or PVC liners are recommended for use wherever the galvanized surface is undesirable (galvanized steel has been used to water livestock and hold potable water for years; however, at high and low pH, zinc may be given off into the water and could pose a problem in some situations). Never use copper sulfate in unprotected galvanized tanks. Prices include nuts, bolts and lap joint caulking and are FOB manufacturer. Note: Allow at least a two-week lead time and additional time for shipping. Call for shipping charges. TS0717L TS0918L TS0920L TS0920H TS1220H TS1520H TS1817H TS2117H TS2415H TS2715H TS3015H
Gauge
38 lbs 51 lbs 74 lbs 100 lbs 130 lbs 162 lbs 236 lbs 271 lbs 314 lbs 1 lb 1 lb
$ 292.67 423.17 612.27 827.97 1,072.57 1,346.87 1,648.57 1,700.00 1,978.71 11.54 11.54
18 18 20 20 20 20 17 17 15 15 15
331/2" H x 7' 331/2" H x 9' 331/2" H x 9' 46" H x 9' 46" H x 12' 46" H x 15' 46" H x 18' 46" H x 21' 46" H x 24' 46" H x 27' 46" H x 30'
Dimensions
Gallons
720 1,190 1,190 1,750 3,110 4,860 6,990 9,530 12,450 15,754 19,450
136 lbs 230 lbs 160 lbs 190 lbs 250 lbs 310 lbs 508 lbs 610 lbs 936 lbs 1,000 lbs 1,085 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 625 651 549 711 945 839 1,445 1,684 2,244 2,524 2,805
lz76
Tank Covers
Keep fish in and birds out!
Made of black polyester, 1/4" mesh netting, these covers are great for preventing fish from jumping out of tanks. They feature a drawstring and locking device to hold covers firmly. TC14 TC16 TC17 TC19 TC13

tc14
Ship Wt Each 6+
AquaticEco.com
Fits 3'4' Round Tank Fits 5'6' Round Tank Fits 6'7' Round Tank Fits 8'9' Round Tank Fits 3' x 4' Rectangular Tank
$ 35.23 56.38 70.38 83.97 30.54
29.95 47.93 59.82 71.37 25.95
224
Tanks
Polyethylene
Rectangular Tanks
These rectangular polyethylene tanks are great for a variety of applications, including sumps, filter boxes, bait tanks and holding tanks. Larger tanks will bow slightly when full of water. All have UV inhibitors for outdoor use. These heavy-duty tanks are nestable. RT37 and RT16 and smaller ship Ground, RT58 and larger ship motor freight. Dimensions do not include top wide lip. RT16-B RT37-B RT58-B RT74-B RT89-B RT150-B RT180-B

Semi- Square Poly Tanks

If space is a consideration for tank layout, these semi-square, rounded-corner, polyethylene tanks will provide a greater volume of water than round tanks, while still providing very good self-cleaning capability. They are sloped for complete tank drainage. Standard color is blue, with black and gray available on special order. The nominal wall thickness is between 3/16" and 1/4", making a nice sturdy tank. TP50 ships Ground; others ship motor freight.
A B
16 gallons 37 gallons 58 gallons 74 gallons 89 gallons 150 gallons 180 gallons
Volume
12" x 18" x 18" 12" x 24" x 30" 15" x 30" x 30" 20" x 24" x 36" 24" x 24" x 36" 30" x 36" x 32" 33" x 49" x 24"
L x W x H
Ship Wt
$ 77.64 120.74 152.24 170.02 196.08 306.92 39270
Each
72.98 108.66 137.01 152.18 176.48 276.22 353.43
4+
Above dimensions are approximate.
TP50 26" 22" 22" 4" TP180 42" 38" 26.5" 4.5" TP450 62" 58" 37" 9" TP50S Stand for TP50 TP180S Stand for TP180 TP450S Stand for TP450
$ 147 323 734 244 298 427
RT16-B
s Many Size me Sa r fo le b Availa ing Day Shipp
TP450
Polyethylene Tanks
Inexpensive polyethylene tanks are gaining in popularity because of their low cost and long life expectancy. The smooth surface makes for easy cleaning, and their light weight allows for quick set-up and relocation. Most of these tanks are nestable, which reduces their relatively high shipping cost. We stock these lightweight tanks in a marine blue color, but other colors are available on orders of 6 or more. All tanks have ultraviolet inhibitors for outdoor use. Black has the greatest UV resistance, providing a life expectancy of 25 years. All colors (except black) and materials used are FDA-approved. Another feature of polyethylene tanks is that they can be repaired. Just use heat to soften and reshape. TP31 and TP55 ship Ground; TP90 and larger ship motor freight. TP31 TP55 TP90 TP110 TP130 TP210 TP250 TP400F TP440A
I.D. x Depth
TP440A
TP250
Round 21" x 22" Round 21" x 38" Round 39" x 20" Rectangular 55" x 31" x 18" Mortar Style 73" x 36" x 12" Round 48" x 30" Round 60" x 22" Round 70" x 30" Round 60" x 34"
Wall Thickness
3/16" 3/16" 3/16" 1/8" 1/8" 3/16" 3/16" 3/16" 3/16"
Nominal Gallons
30 55 90 110 130 210 250 460 410
9 lbs $ 124.00 12 lbs 134.95 30 lbs 207.89 35 lbs 239.37 35 lbs 242.23 50 lbs 272.41 60 lbs 392.54 80 lbs 533.40 85 lbs 506.09
Ship Wt
TP400F
TP55 TP110 TP90
TP130 TP31
Insulated
Tanks
225
Insulated Tanks
No sweat!
Insulated tanks are built from ABS plastic sheets with 2" thick insulated walls and bottoms. Ideally suited for research, seafood holding, bait tanks, touch tanks and display tanks. Double-pane acrylic windows (optional) will not "sweat" with cold water. The tanks listed below are only a fraction of the 100 + configurations available. Special sizes (up to 96" x 48" x 36"), colors, tanks with dividers, bulkhead fittings, etc., are available on a custom order basis. Tanks listed below are priced in white or black (specify when ordering). Add a "W" to part number to order one dual-pane window; call if you want two or more. Allow two weeks for production. Tanks ship via motor freight, FOB factory. TT100 TT101 TT102 TT103 TT104 TT105 TT109
Outside Dimensions (L x W x H)
Live Transport Insulated Container

Whether your valuable fish product is being shipped from the hatchery to the growing site or to market, the Live Transport Container (DX333) is the smart choice. It is a lightweight, versatile, cost-effective solution for transporting live fish. This molded polyethylene, insulated container is built for long-term durability, providing an R18 insulation factor. The Live Transport Container is designed to make your work easier with quick connect air attachments, sloped base and gate for easy release of fish. The optional insulated lid (DC-18-35L) with Neoprene seal prevents spillage during transportation while its 8" cam-lock cap ensures leakproof transportation. Ships from factory.
Optional Lid
24" x 24" x 12" 36" x 24" x 24" 48" x 24" x 24" 48" x 24" x 36" 48" x 48" x 18" 72" x 24" x 24" 96" x 48" x 24"
Volume (Gal/Liters) Each
17/66 61/231 84/317 130/490 134/508 130/490 386/1,459
$ 229 486 623 934 791 934 2,120
w/One Window
DX333
299 664 834 1,395 959 1,250 2,915
On-Board Handling Box

The On-Board Handling Box (D337L), with its three-section lid and optional gate dividers, allows you to conveniently sort and grade shellfish. It can hold eight 70-liter tote trays or 12 rebox trays, and the spill-resistant lid also doubles as a work shelf when closed. Three holes allow water to circulate and its durable, seamless construction ensures hygienic handling of seafood products. The sloped base facilitates cleaning and the molded-in handles aid maneuverability. Once it's on-board, you'll wonder how you ever got along without it. Ships from factory.
D337L
Double-pane acrylic windows (optional).
Insulated Tanks
These heavy-duty, insulated containers (B1800 B2545) feature 2" thick polyurethane foam insulation. Use them for hauling fish, shipping seafood or as a holding tank. The containers are stackable up to three high when full of water and have an adjustable "Y" clip tie-down system that secures the lid (included). Smooth interior is seamless, easy-to-clean, molded polyethylene with a 2" threaded drain plug. USDA/FDA-approved. Ship from factory, freight collect only. DX333 268 48" x 42" x 46" 44" x 39" x 39" 160 D337L 264 72" x 41" x 30" 68" x 37" x 27" 141 DC-18-35L Lid for DX333
Capacity (gal) Outside (L x W x H) Inside (L x W x H)
Sideview cutaway of TT101. 2" thick insulation.
B1800 Ship Wt (lbs)
Crystal Schalmo
Sacramento Zoo
$ 2,071.43 1,642.86 267.14 9.90/6+
Angler Livewells
Designed for both offshore and inshore bait holding, these tanks have the same rugged construction as ProFlow models. Made from UV-stabilized polyethylene, all tanks come with a lid and molded recessed handles.
Dimensions Ship Wt
B1800 67 42" x 24" x 28" 70 B1545 179 48" x 43" x 38" 190 B2300 172 48" x 40" x 30" 138 B1745 179 48" x 43" x 29" 170 B2545 411 80" x 48" x 40" 350 B1760DP Repl. Drain Plug
Capacity (gal)
Overall Dimensions (L x W x H)
Ship Wt (lbs)
$ 540.00 786.00 780.00 761.00 1,743.00 11.00
Each
KA50
Hauling Tank, Low-Cost

With occasional use, this will last for years. Aeration for up to 2.5 pounds of fish is provided by an included 12V agitator. Holds 10 gallons when full. Can be shipped Ground. One-year warranty on agitator only. Made in USA.
KA26 KA30 KA50
Oblong, 26 gal Round, 30 gal Round, 50 gal
30" L x 28" H x 16" H 23" Dia. x 17" H 29" Dia. x 18" H
$ 149 154 179
HT6
25" x 16" x 12"
Approximate Dimensions (L x W x H) Ship Wt
10 lbs
Weight Full of Water
83 lbs
$ 200
226
Tanks
Liners/Hauling
Pond Liner, EPDM

Save money when you buy Firestone's industry-leading pond liner from AES. This fish-safe liner has become the gold standard for pond keepers and commercial water features, and with good reason. First, it has a 20-year warranty ! It's puncture-resistant and very resistant to sunlight and UV. It stretches around rocks and small irregularities and is much easier to work with than the more rigid liners. SZ22 SZ23 SZ24 SZ31 SZ32 SZ33 SZ34 SZ35

Liner, Patching Tape

The double-sided adhesive seaming tape is 3" wide, made of extruded black rubber and designed to join pieces of EPDM liner together to form a watertight seal. The patching tape is 6" wide, has single-side adhesive and works great for patching holes and covering seams. For Sweetwater and EPDM liners only. ST3F ST3R PT6F PT6R Double-Sided, per foot Double-Sided, 100' Roll Single Sided, per foot Single Sided, 100' Roll $ 1.65/Ft 126.41/Roll 3.75/Ft 356.07/Roll
20' x 30' 25' x 30' 30' x 30' 8' x 10' 10' x 15' 10' x 20' 15' x 20' 20' x 25'
Size
Approx Wt
$ 358.67 446.67 534.67 53.60 94.67 124.00 182.67 300.00
Seaming Tape, Poly

The 4" tape has adhesive on one side (weighs 9 lbs). Use it to patch liners or join pieces for complex shapes. For use on polyethylene tarps only. Cure for 24 hours. ST475 4" x 75' $ 55.00
Our black, 45-mil thick, rubber-like liner with excellent weatherability has unsurpassed puncture and abrasion resistance.
Filter Cells Linear Polyethylene Liners for Large Ponds

These heavy-duty pond liners offer superior strength as well as puncture and tear resistance at an excellent price. This is the liner we selected for our 2-acre fire pond here at AES. They are resistant to most chemicals, salt and acids. The material will remain flexible at -70F. Available in width increments of 10 feet and any length up to 50,000 square feet as one piece. Panels are accordion-folded every 4 to 5 feet and tightly rolled on a heavy core for ease of handling and installation. Sold by the square foot (2,500 ft2 minimum). Allow 20 days for production. Ships from factory. Call for pricing.

Complete biological and particulate filtering in one compact package. Connect to any submersible or centrifugal pump on the intake side and drop into a tank or pond for instant filtration. All plastic construction with 31/2" O.D. (4" w/sleeve) and 1" PVC pipe ends. Use PVC pipe and fitting to make your own multifilter manifold. For heavy-duty biological filtering, we recommend one inch of filter length per gpm. Add your own media to the empty cells. Made in USA. AFC3 24" 12 lbs $ 48.40 10.80 Use part number shown for empty cells; add "S" for Dacron sleeve only. Dacron sleeves can be easily cut to fit filter cell length.
Length Weight w/Media Empty Dacron Sleeve
PE20 PE30 PE40
20 mil 30 mil 40 mil
Ship Wt per 1,000 ft 2
100 lbs 150 lbs 200 lbs
Maximum Panel Size
50,000 33,000 25,000
AFC3
Tech Talk 41
Repairing Liners
When the need arises to repair a cut or hole in a liner, this basic rule applies to all the liner types we carry: Clean and dry the surface of the liner so the adhesive will adhere to it. Use the right type of repair materials for the type of liner being repaired.
PVC
LRK is a repair kit containing a 12" x 12" piece of liner and a special liner adhesive. Mention liner color when ordering this kit.
Firestone PondGard Liner (EPDM)

The ST3F and ST3R are double-sided tape for patching or overlapping two pieces of liners. The PT6F and PT6R are single-sided for patching or covering holes and going over seams.
Woven Poly
ST475 is a 4" tape with adhesive on one side to patch, cover holes or reinforce seams.
Baby Loggerhead Turtles (Caretta caretta)
Mechanical Filtration
Filter Media
227
Washable Filter Material (PF11/PF17/PF2/PF16)

Replace your worn-out material with one of these. They are made of polyester and are washable for repeated use. Measured by the yard (91.4 cm). Please note width and length of each part number.
Blue Bonded Filter Pads

Precut for small trickle filters, plate filters or for use in canister filters. Each pad measures 13" x 24" x 1" thick. BBFP $ 4.50 4.05/6+
Blocksom Filter Material

This high-quality 1" thick filter material is constructed of all natural coconut fibers and a latex binder on a polyester net backing. Its durability allows for frequent cleaning. Often used in garden pond filters. Sold in 24" widths by the linear yard (2 lbs) or in full rolls of 12 yds (30 lbs). Made in USA. SM1 SM1R 24" x 36" 24" x 12-Yd Roll $ 9.45 92.50 86.03/2+
Enkamat , Poly (PF12/PF13)

Very similar to our PF4 and PF5, but this product is made of polyethylene fibers so it costs less. It can be used to construct DLS media for biofiltration, for soil erosion control, splash control, etc. PF12 has .025" diameter fibers bonded to a felt underlay. PF13 has .030" diameter fibers and is 1" thick. Not UV-resistant.
Enkamat , Nylon (PF4/PF5)

Enkamat is a matrix of semirigid nylon monofilaments fused at their intersections. This product is the best reusable egg-laying material. Also useful for filter media support, biofiltration material, soil erosion control, etc. PF4 has .020" dia. fibers, PF5 has .025" dia. fibers.
Spawntex Spawning Mat

This unique product is asked for specifically by breeders of shiners, goldfish and similar shore-spawning fish. Spawntex is one of the finest reusable spawning mat materials on the market today. Constructed of all natural coconut fibers with a latex binder on a polyester net backing. Its 11/2" thickness ensures more strength for easy cleaning and exceptional durability. Pond installation is easy. Cut the media to size, attach a wire mesh backing and place in the pond. Another method is to simply stake the mats along the pond bank. Spawntex is sold in 24" widths (SM2) and 18" widths (SM3) by the linear yard or in full rolls* 11 yards long. Made in USA. SM2 3 lbs $ 13.00/Linear Yd SM2R 30 lbs 94.00/Roll SM3 3 lbs 9.85/Linear Yd SM3R 30 lbs 73.85/Roll *Rolls ship Oversize at 70-lb rate. 88.36/2+ 70.15/2+
Disposable Filter Media (PF8)

This fine polyester fiber material offers high quality at a low price. It will sustain one or two cleanings before disposal. With no fire retardants or dyes, it is safe for fish. Don't let the price fool you; it's good stuff.
Carbon Filter Material (PF3)

The PF3 filter material features polyester fibers heavily coated with activated carbon to provide an ideal mechanical, chemical and biological filtering media. It's a fine pore material suitable for clear water applications.
Just ask and we will include a small sample along with your next order.
PF11A Fine PF11C Fine PF17A Medium PF17C Medium PF2A Coarse PF2C Coarse PF16 Coarse PF16C Coarse PF8A Fine DSP PF8C Fine DSP PF3 Carbon PF3C Carbon PF4A Enkamat PF4C Enkamat PF5 Enkamat PF5C Enkamat PF12A Enkamat PF12C Enkamat PF13A Enkamat PF13C Enkamat *Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate.
Filter
Thickness
.30" .30" 1" 1" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 2" 1" 1" .40" .40" .25" .25" .50" .50" .40" .40" 1" 1"
Width
29" 29" 28" 28" 28" 28" 28" 28" 36" 36" 29" 29" 39" 39" 39" 39" 39" 39" 39" 39"
Length
2 yds 11 yds 2 yds 4 yds 2 yds 7 yds 2 yds 4 yds 2 yds 10 yds 2 yds 8 yds 2 yds 8 yds 2 yds 5 yds 2 yds 6 yds 2 yds 7 yds
Ship Wt
4 lbs 11 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 4 lbs 10 lbs* 4 lbs 7 lbs 3 lbs 11 lbs* 4 lbs 10 lbs 4 lbs 6 lbs 4 lbs 6 lbs 4 lbs 7 lbs 4 lbs 11 lbs*
$ 16.90 81.95 29.55 47.60 30.00 92.85 38.00 69.90 16.50 66.65 31.50 115.00 28.95 96.65 33.15 77.85 24.90 61.45 29.50 88.95
Each
76.21 44.27 83.57 65.01 61.98 106.95 89.88 72.40 57.15 82.72
4+
Filter Foam, Reticulated

A great biofilter media!
This 1" thick foam is true "fish grade," long-life, reticulated foam with a pore size of 20 ppi (pores per inch). It contains no fire retardants or germicides (be careful with low-cost, air filter foam, as it can be toxic). Sold in 2' x 6' sheets (rolled) only (equal to 1 cu.ft.). Weighs 5 lbs. Made in USA. PF7 $ 48.00 45.62/6+
228
Micron Screening
Stainless Steel Screening

304 stainless steel screening can be used for the same applications as nylon but offers better rigidity and durability. All stainless screening is 48" (121 cm) wide and sold in increments of 1 foot (30.4 cm). Each foot increment equals 4 sq.ft. (.37 m2). MS105 MS125 MS180 MS250 MS500 MS1000
Microns
Nylon Screening
Nylon screening material is an excellent choice for many aquaculture and laboratory uses, including filtration of unwanted organisms; brine shrimp culture; larval fish and clam culture; pipe screens, filter bags and nets. Nylon is resistant to bacteria, cleaners, acids and insects. This screening is 36" wide and is sold by the yard length (1 yard = 36" = 91 cm). 1 linear yard = 9 ft 2 = 1 yd2. Contains no UV inhibitors! 3-20/14 20 .0008" 14 $ 52.52 47.27 M35 35 .0015" 27 55.18 49.66 M46 41 .0016" 31 50.72 45.65 M55 55 .0022" 29 34.14 30.72 M64 64 .0025" 32 35.75 32.18 M75 75 .0029" 45 37.60 33.84 M105 105 .0041" 36 24.07 21.66 M125 125 .0049" 41 23.00 20.69 M150 150 .0059" 51 18.80 16.90 M200 200 .0079" 35 17.43 15.66 M250 250 .0098" 37 19.50 17.56 300 .0118" 46 15.58 14.01 M300* M335 335 .0132" 46 17.43 15.69 M400 400 .0157" 47 17.43 15.69 M500 500 .0197" 49 17.14 15.41 M600 600 .0236" 51 17.14 15.41 M670 670 .0264" 53 27.69 24.92 M750 750 .0295" 54 19.23 17.31 M800 800 .0315" 55 19.23 17.31 M1000 1,000 .0394" 58 17.14 15.41 M2000 2,000 .0787" 53 25.06 22.55 M5000 5,000 .1969" 72 28.46 25.61 * Similar to the 52" x 52" twill Saran filter cloth used in fine mesh nets and inlet water filters.
Mesh (Microns) Opening % Open Area Per Yard 10+
105 125 180 250 500 1,000
Inches
.0041 .0049 .008 .010 .020 .039
% Open Area
37 31 32 30 37 48
Per Foot
$ 25.12 24.15 18.11 19.77 19.77 18.65
10+ Feet
22.61 21.74 16.30 17.80 17.80 16.79
ms105
ms500
ms1000
Polyester Mesh Netting

High-quality, polyester mesh netting is commonly used for shrimp culture, larval fish and fish nets. It has excellent chemical, UV and bleaching resistance and works great in applications where the netting must be sterilized often. Mesh size is 1/32" (approximately equal to 800 microns), sold per yard of length.

M8844
100" Wide
$ 18.00
Yard
16.15
10+
Call for free samples of micron screening with your next order.
m200
m500
m1000
m5000
This Vlamingi tang appreciates good biofiltration.
Filter Bags
229
Filter Bags With Poly Ring Mouth

Aquaculture filtration is a huge problem. Flowrates are high and the filtrate is delicate, slimy, organic and can easily become liquified, turning a solid waste problem into a liquid waste problem. Bag filters are very effective at removing organic particulate matter. The monofilament type is single-ply nylon resembling a piece of cloth or window screen. The felt type is polypropylene, thick and fluffy, giving it three-dimensional filtering ability. Both are washable, but the felt type should be washed gently. All bags are 32" long with a 7" diameter mouth and polypropylene ring that fits the optional Celcon adapter (FBH) perfectly. Made in USA.
Filter Bags With Drawstring

The same materials as the nylon monofilament bags but with a drawstring top. This allows attachment directly to any open water line. If you are presently using adapter heads, these bags will also fit over them. Bags are 32" long with a 7" diameter mouth. Made in USA. BAG1 BAG5 BAG10 BAG20 BAG40 BAG75 BAG100 BAG200 BAG300 BAG800

Nylon Monofilament Bags, 32" x 7"

FB1N FB5N FB10N FB20N FB40N FB75 FB100N FB200 FB300 FB800 1 micron 5 microns 10 microns 20 microns 40 microns 75 microns 100 microns 200 microns 300 microns 800 microns $ 65.41 54.61 52.02 21.88 21.22 11.33 9.67 8.63 8.19 7.54
Each Each
58.87 49.15 46.82 19.69 19.10 10.20 8.70 7.77 7.37 6.79
10+
10+
1 micron 5 microns 10 microns 20 microns 40 microns 75 microns 100 microns 200 microns 300 microns 800 microns
$ 56.85 48.05 43.00 22.05 20.22 10.10 10.00 8.25 8.65 8.30
Each
51.17 43.25 38.70 19.85 18.20 9.09 9.00 7.43 7.79 7.47
BAG800
10+
Also use them for:

FB10
Pump bags, to increase filter area. Removable inlet screen filters. Discharge strainers, to prevent fish or fish egg migration.
Felt Bags, Polypropylene, 32" x 7"

FB1 FB5 FB10 FB25 FB50 FB100 1 micron 5 microns 10 microns 25 microns 50 microns 100 microns $ 7.60 6.22 6.31 6.58 5.96 6.33 6.84 5.60 5.68 5.92 5.36 5.70
Filter Bags
These polyester monofilament filter bags are excellent for retaining carbon, zeolite and other media. They are perfect for placing in sumps, trickle filters, pond filters and many other uses. Bags feature drawstring closing tops. Select 250- or 800-micron mesh size. Sold in packs of 10. MB01 MB02 MB1 MB2 MB3 MB4 MB5 MB6 MB7 MB8 MB9 MB10 250 microns, 3" x 4" 800 microns, 3" x 4" 250 microns, 6" x 10" 800 microns, 6" x 10" 250 microns, 8" x 12" 800 microns, 8" x 12" 250 microns, 12" x 15" 800 microns, 12" x 15" 250 microns, 12" x 18" 800 microns, 12" x 18" 250 microns, 16" x 24" 800 microns, 16" x 24" $ 23.00 19.00 21.00 19.00 22.00 20.80 25.00 21.00 26.55 24.45 37.80 31.45
Filter Bag Adapter

This plastic (Celcon) adapter will thread onto 11/2" male thread and provide support and quick bag changes. Fits 7" diameter bags with polypropylene rings. FBH $ 24.45 20.01/10+
Water to Be Filtered
Direct overflow back to tank in case bag filter becomes clogged.
Adjust length of pipe as necessary to have filter bag at correct water level. Male Adapter Part FBH Filter Bag Adapter
MB1
Filter Bags
These inexpensive filters are just right for many do-it-yourself applications. Available in two styles, all of the bags have plastic Polyloc collars that allow them to be easily held in a hole 33/4" in diameter.
Water Level Felt Filter Bag
Standard bags are nylon material and are 81/4" long. Polyweld bags are 6" long and made of smooth, nylon mesh with a solid plastic bottom. Ideal for holding media.
Standard
Filter Floss
Soft, fine fiber ideal for wet/dry filters, canister filters, most power filters and pond filtering units. Polyester floss provides the ideal mechanical and biological filtering media for all fresh and saltwater tanks. 100% polyester. PLY14 PLY10 14 oz 10 lbs $ 7.25 65.00
N2100 N2150 N2200 N2300 N2600 N2800
100 microns 150 microns 200 microns 300 microns 600 microns 800 microns
$ 6.18 6.28 4.64 4.27 4.02 3.91
Polyweld
Glazed Felt
N1025 N1055 N1100 N1200
25 microns 55 microns 100 microns 200 microns 100 microns
11.90 10.20 9.79 8.34 6.64
AS14B
Polyweld
PLY14
Standard
230
Cartridges/Bags
Filters, 20"
This 20" filter housing is NSF-listed and doubles the fl owrate of the 10" housings. Housings are rated at 125 psi and temperatures to 125F (52C), have EPDM and silicone O-rings with 3/4" FNPT inlet/outlet, polypropylene plastic, weigh 3 lbs. Fit pleated, polypropylene filter cartridges listed and other standard 20" filters. Made in USA. FH800 FH803 FH801 FH805 FH820 FH850 Filter Housing, 20" .35-micron Filter 1-micron Filter 5-micron Filter 20-micron Filter 50-micron Filter $ 36.67 24.80 24.70 17.00 17.00 17.00
Each FH800
Filters, 10"
Our FXC filter housing tops are made of polypropylene with 3/4" FNPT ports and feature acrylonitrile, shatter-resistant filter housings. FXB has a unique bypass valve built into its top, which allows the cartridge to be changed without interrupting the flow. Both models are rated to 150 psi, accept all standard 10" filter cartridges and weigh 5 lbs each. The canister cartridge (FX6) is sold empty for filling with your own media (zeolite, resin or carbon, etc.) and includes gaskets, pre-filter and post-filter. Most made in USA. FX6 FXC FXB Canister, Empty, 10" Filter Housing Bypass Filter Housing $ 9.35 29.28 45.31
Each
33.74 22.82 22.72 15.64 15.64 15.64
6+
26.35 40.78
6+
FH850
Pleated Filters, 10"

97535
These polypropylene filter cartridges fit 10" housings and provide a much larger filtering surface area than wound cartridges, and these are washable (5 microns and up). Approximately one psi pressure drop @ 10 gpm. Temperature range 40140F (4560C). Made in USA. 97535 9751 9755 97520 97550 .35 micron 1 micron 5 microns 20 microns 50 microns $ 13.98 12.01 10.00 9.40 9.20
Each
FX6
FXB
FXC
13.20 11.41 9.50 8.92 8.73
6+
Polyester Mesh Bags

Pre-filters water. Zooplankton collector. Ideal for collecting rotifers, Artemia, fish eggs and other small organisms, these polyester mesh bags are available in 18" and 31" (46 and 79 cm) lengths and a variety of mesh sizes. They can also be used for filtering particulate matter from tank inlets and overflows. Bag is equipped with a stainless steel ring 7" in diameter and a cotton handle.
PMB1L
Matrix Carbon Filter, 10"

This high-capacity, extruded carbon filter provides superior filtration and chemical absorption. It provides 99.6+% reduction of 12 micron particles, lead reduction to below NSF and EPA guidelines of 15 ppb, Cryptosporidium cysts and other diseasecausing bacteria removal and NSF Class 1 chlorine and turbidity reduction standards compliance. Made in USA. FX3 $ 21.50 20.43/6+
FX3
Doulton Ceramic Cartridge, 10"

Ceramic, self-sterilizing filter is capable of removing 99.99% of suspended solids and 100% of Cryptosporidium, Giardia lamblia cysts and other disease-causing bacteria. Designed to comply with the most stringent potable water standards and can be cleaned and reused. FX2 $ 40.34 35.50/6+
PMB1 PMB1L PMB2 PMB2L PMB3 PMB3L PMB4 PMB4L PMB5 PMB5L
FX2
75 x 18" $ 13.08 11.12 75 x 31" 19.78 16.82 100 x 18" 10.20 8.67 100 x 31" 16.22 13.79 125 x 18" 10.20 8.67 125 x 31" 15.86 13.49 150 x 18" 6.13 5.22 150 x 31" 7.16 6.09 200 x 18" 6.13 5.22 200 x 31" 7.16 6.09
Each
10+
PMB6 250 x 18" $ 6.13 PMB6L 250 x 31" 7.16 PMB7 300 x 18" 6.13 PMB7L 300 x 31" 7.16 PMB8 400 x 18" 6.13 PMB8L 400 x 31" 7.16 PMB9 800 x 18" 6.13 PMB9L 800 x 31" 7.16 PMB10 1,500 x 18" 6.13 PMB10L 1,500 x 31" 8.34
Each
5.22 6.09 5.22 6.09 5.22 6.09 5.22 6.09 5.22 7.09
10+
Polymicro Filters, 10"

These cartridges are made through an exclusive process that thermally bonds 100% pure polypropylene microfibers with lower density at the outside surface and progressively higher density towards the center. Made from FDA-compliant, NSF-certified materials, they are ideal as pre-filters. Fit standard 10" filter cartridges. PFCM PFC5M PFC10M PFC25M PFC50M PFC75M PFC100M 1 micron 5 microns 10 microns 25 microns 50 microns 75 microns 100 microns $ 3.66 3.66 3.66 3.66 3.66 3.66 3.66
Each
Granular Carbon Filter, 10"

Activated carbon cartridge removes chlorine, odors, taste and organic contaminates and contains 100 g of carbon and FDA-approved polypropylene support. High-quality coconut shell. FHX4 $ 10.25 9.74/6+
FHX4
3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
10+
PFCM
Bag/Cartridge Filters
231
Bag Filter
TF
Bag/Cartridge Filters
This combination bag/cartridge filter is compact in size and works well in low-profile spaces. Handles a flowrate up to 80 gpm (we recommend cutting the flow by 50% for heavy-laden aquaculture applications) with a low pressure drop. Polypropylene housings have an easy locking ring system lid with air purge valves and Buna-N seals. Maximum pressure is 60 psi. 1.5" inlet/outlet slip fittings. Filter measures 10" in diameter and 28" high. When using filter with felt bags, an ABS bag retaining basket is required ( TBC52). 10-year conditional tank warranty. TBC50 TB05 TB25 TB50 TP05 TP10 TP20 TBC52 LPG30 Filter Housing 5-micron Bag 25-micron Bag 50-micron Bag 5-micron Cartridge 10-micron Cartridge 20-micron Cartridge Replacement Bag Basket Gauge
Wt (lbs)
This reasonably priced polypropylene filter vessel is designed to allow high flowrates through a single reusable bag filter. It is rated at 75 gpm for clean water (for particulateladen water and/or to extend time between cleanings, we recommend a design flowrate below 40 gpm). For higher flows, use two or more in parallel. To further extend time between cleaning, place a larger micron filter before a smaller micron filter in series. The vessel is made of UV-inhibited polypropylene with a threaded lid, O-ring and removable internal basket for easy bag removal. This vessel has 2" FNPT inlet and outlet and 1/4" FNPT lid vent and weighs 10 lbs. Optional pressure gauges for lid vent are below.
Choose from 10 levels of filtration.

Bags are 6" dia. x 20" length with 2 ft2 of surface area. They are fitted with a Polyloc ring, which seals directly against the filter housing, eliminating any chance of bypass. Vessels include housing, lid, retainer basket and 2 plastic leg/foot assemblies, easily cut to required height. Conical base (36049) highly recommended. Maximum pressure is 100 psi @ 110F. Made in USA. One-year warranty.
Differential Pressure Gauge

Designed exclusively to supplement pressure gauges used on our FV1 bag filter. It mounts on the mounting pad's bag vessel located on the opposite side of the inlet port. The window turns red, indicating "time to change." Requires a 3/16" drill to install portholes; use only screws provided. 2" long. FV1 36049 BG15 LPG30 BG61A VF65 DPG8 DPG20 FV1S FVV1L 36002 FV1F VB1 VB5 VB10 VB25 VB50 VB100 VB200 VB300 VB600 VB800 Bag Filter Vessel Conical Base Gauge, 015 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 030 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge, 060 psi, 1/4" NPT Gauge Adapter & Air Bleed Differential Pressure Gauge, 68 psi Differential Pressure Gauge, 1520 psi Replacement Lid O-ring Replacement Threaded Lid Replacement Internal Basket Replacement Legs (2) FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 1 FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 5 FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 10 FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 25 FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 50 FV1 Bag Filter (Felt), 100 FV1 Bag Filter (Mesh), 200 FV1 Bag Filter (Mesh), 300 FV1 Bag Filter (Mesh), 600 FV1 Bag Filter (Mesh), 800 $ 300.76 108.77 11.88 24.05 12.29 8.25 25.75 25.75 8.03 79.41 85.18 36.15 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75
Each
10 .2 .2 .2 2 2 2 .5 .5
$ 385.80 27.77 27.77 27.77 82.45 82.45 82.45 103.49 24.05
TBC52
270.68/6+ 7.23/6+ 71.47/6+ 76.66/6+ 32.54/6+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+ 6.08/10+
TP10
TBC50
DPG8 36002 w/Bag
FV1 w/Optional Base (36049) and Pressure Gauge FV1
Filter install at NY Ferry terminal.
232
D.E. Filters
D.E. Filters
These ver tical grid D.E. (Diatomite) filters are made of injection-molded, highstrength Duralon. The highimpact grid elements are designed for up-flow filtration and top-down backwashing for maximum efficiency. A heavy-duty, tamperproof, bolted center flange securely fastens tank top and bottom and allows easy access to all internal components without disturbing piping or connections. Filters include pressure gauge, air-relief valve and 11/2" drain plug. 11/ 2 "
In-Line Filters/Strainers
These clear in-line filters are convenient for many line filtering applications, such as separation of sand from well water. When used with a drain valve (1/2" NPT), filtrate can be emptied without interrupting the flow. Not recommended for use with organics, as "sliming" of the screen will result. Sorry, replacement cartridges are not available. 11/2" or 2" sizes. Ship weight 3 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
DE48
50-gpm Models
FSA40 FSA60 FSA100 FSA250 FSA500 FSA1000 FSB40 FSB60 FSB100 FSB250 FSB500 FSB1000
Microns
The DE48 and DE72 models include a 6-position control valve and are shipped Ground. DE4 is a 2" 4-position multiport valve and must be ordered when purchasing DE96 and DE120, both of which ship motor freight. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Effective Filtration Area Design Flowrate Lbs D.E. Req Dim W/H Ship Wt
380 254 152 60 30 15 380 254 152 60 30 15
Inlet/Outlet
11/2" Slip 11/2" Slip 11/2" Slip 11/2" Slip 11/2" Slip 11/2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip
$ 53.95 57.60 57.50 63.00 63.00 63.00 89.10 92.20 93.30 96.50 106.50 103.50
100-gpm Models
$ 655.00 701.67 680.43 752.83 168.12 11.00 7.00
FSB40
DE48 DE72 DE96 DE120 DE4 DE10 DE1
D.E. Filter 24 ft2 D.E. Filter 36 ft2 D.E. Filter 48 ft2 D.E. Filter 60 ft2 2", 4-Position Valve D.E. Material, 10 lbs D.E. Scoop, 1 lb
48 gpm 72 gpm 96 gpm 120 gpm
3 41/2 6 71/2
23"/32" 23"/38" 23"/44" 23"/50"
61 lbs 71 lbs 80 lbs 90 lbs 9 lbs 11 lbs 1 lb
D.E. Filter Systems with Pumps

These D.E. filter systems feature injection-molded tanks of rugged ABS plastic. They have an exclusive V-Grid design that provides balanced fl ow during filtering and backwashing. An internal, automatic, air-relief system eliminates the hazards of trapped air under pressure. These filters feature one-piece tank covers with rotary valves and pressure gauges, drain plugs, stainless steel hardware and two 8' long 11/2" inlet/outlet hoses. Systems include Power Pak pumps that are UL-listed, 115V/60 Hz, with 6' power cords. Filter rates shown are maximum for clean water. 10-year warranty on tanks. Ships from factory. DE12 DE20 12.5 20.0
Filter Area (ft2) Lbs D.E. Required
Clear Lexan housing. Select 11/2" or 2" PVC size.
200-psi working pressure. No tools needed to open.
1.5 2.5
Pump Hp
3/4 3/4
Full Load Amps
9.5 9.5
20 gpm 36 gpm
Filter Rate
Ship Wt (lbs)
54 68
$ 713.33 815.00
Sweetwater blower in action at commercial aquaculture facility in Florida.
DE12
Ruth Olsen
External Aquarium/Canisters
233
External Aquarium Filters by Filstar

Here are four self-contained, fish tank filter systems that can be placed under or behind your tank. They are complete with quick-release valves, water pump, tubing, inlet strainer, outlet assembly, filters, biological filter media, carbon, etc. To clean, simply lift one handle, remove the hose/valve assembly and carry the unit to a sink, where it can be opened and washed. You are back in service in about three minutes. These canister power filters work well for small tanks and aquariums. Filtration includes foam pads, Bio-Chem Zorb and a microfiltration pad. See below for optional filter medias and replacement items. Tank sizes listed are for typical aquariums. Filters are 9.5" L. Pumps are 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty. FC720 FC721 FC722 FC723
Tank Size
External Aquarium Filters

Versatile filter packages for small fish tanks.
These well-designed, self-contained filter systems can be placed under or behind your fish tank. They are complete with valves, water pump, tubing, inlet strainer, filter, primer, media, etc., and provide optimum filtration in a small footprint. Cleaning is very quick and easy for their built-in, quick-release hose valves, primer and nesting media baskets. Include foam filters, carbon and Bio-Max media. Filters are 7" W. Pumps are 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty.
Tank Size LxH AES/B Watts Pumps Ship Wt
H205 H305 H405 A222 A226
40 gal 8" x 19" 1.3 9 70 gal 10" x 19" 2.3 15 100 gal 10" x 22" 3.3 21 Foam Block for H205 and H305, 2/Pk Foam Block for H405, 2/Pk
3 gpm 4.3 gpm 5.6 gpm
$ 130.00 170.00 225.00 5.42 6.25
45 gal 70 gal 100 gal 260 gal
8.5" x 13" 8.5" x 15" 8.5" x 18" 8.25" x 20"
WxH
AES/B
1.5 2.5 3.8 8.6
Watts
18 23 28 31
4.1 gpm 5 gpm 5.8 gpm 8.5 gpm
Pumps
Ship Wt
Canister Filter
$ 125 139 175 229 The Magnum 350 is a powerful mechanical filter for aquariums and small tanks. Each filter includes a 350-gph pump and a micron cleaning cartridge (MGC, 61/2" L) that can be used to polish the water crystal clear. The 15-oz media container and foam sleeves are optional. The M635 includes hoses and fittings to fit filter under an aquarium tank. 115V/60 Hz, weighs 8 lbs, 14" H x 7" diameter. UL-listed. Six-month warranty. M635 SLV1 MG65C MGC Canister Filter Foam Sleeve Media Container Replacement Micron Cartridge $ 140.00 4.50 11.00 10.75
Our AES/B Number indicates the lbs of fish that can be held in filtered clear water, lightly fed tanks.
Canister Power Filter Accessories by FilStar

Ceramic Rings
High-porosity rings for biofiltration. Sold in 1-liter boxes. FC732 $ 18.95 17.06/6+
Bio-Chem Stars
A high surface area biofiltration media. Box of twenty 1" x 1" stars. B10520 $ 10.60 9.54/6+
M635 Micron Cartridge
Zeolite Ammonia Remover

Removes ammonia from fresh water. One 350-gram bag. FC730 $ 3.95 3.55/6+
Bio-Chem Zorb
Removes organic waste from fresh and salt water. One 283-gram bag. FC725 $ 7.45 6.70/6+
Microfiltration Pads
For ultrafine polishing. Box of 3 pads. FC733 $ 4.45 4.00/6+
Foam Pads
Removes fine debris particulates. Box of two 30-ppi pads. FC724 $ 6.20 5.57/6+
Chemical Media Container
Foam Sleeve
Activated Carbon
Removes dissolved organic wastes, foul odors and colors. One 150-gram bag. FC729 $ 4.85 4.36/6+
Nitra-Zorb
For complete removal of ammonia, nitrite and nitrate from fresh water. One 210-gram bag. FC726 $ 8.95 8.06/6+
The level of service was extremely responsive. In this day and age of poor service and belligerence, it was enjoyable to experience a company who prides themselves on taking care of the customer. I am very satisfied with Aquatic EcoSystems' professional and rapid service, as well as the quality and value of the products. I will certainly make them one of my go-to companies. Thank You,
Bill Ashling
234
Power Filters
Power Filters, AquaClear

These aquarium filters are powerful, yet compact in size. They offer mechanical, biological and chemical filtration by using a foam filter insert and activated carbon bag. The foam insert can be easily rinsed and reused without eliminating the bacteria. Optional Amrid bags aid in removing ammonia from freshwater tanks. Each unit includes sponge filter and carbon media bag. Filters are 115V/60 Hz, with a six-month warranty. ACF1 ACF15 ACF20 ACF30 ACF50 ACF1B ACF15B ACF20B ACF30B ACF50B ACF1F ACF15F ACF20F ACF30F ACF50F ACF1C ACF15C ACF20C ACF30C ACF50C ACF1A-1 ACF15A-1 ACF20A-1 ACF30A-1 ACF50A

Power Filter
This power filter is great for saltwater systems It provides chemical, mechanical and biological filtration and features a built-in protein skimmer to remove organics. The large filter housing allows ample room for additional media. Bio-Matrix filter pads are included. S250 S400 FP8 250 gph 400 gph Bio-Matrix Pads (8) $ 65.80 77.69 7.62
Mini (to 20-gallon Tank) 150 (to 30-gallon Tank) 200 (to 50-gallon Tank) 300 (to 70-gallon Tank) 500 (to 110-gallon Tank) Mini BioMax, 1/Pk 150 BioMax, 1/Pk 200 BioMax, 1/Pk 300 BioMax, 1/Pk 500 BioMax, 1/Pk Mini Foam, 3/Pk 150 Foam, 3/Pk 200 Foam, 3/Pk 300 Foam, 3/Pk 500 Foam, 1/Pk Mini Carbon, 3/Pk 150 Carbon, 3/Pk 200 Carbon, 3/Pk 300 Carbon, 3/Pk 500 Carbon, 1/Pk Mini Amrid, 1/Pk 150 Amrid, 1/Pk 200 Amrid, 1/Pk 300 Amrid, 1/Pk 500 Amrid, 1/Pk
$ 27.00 34.00 40.00 54.00 87.00 2.70 2.96 3.50 5.05 8.87 2.85 2.90 3.85 6.24 6.24 5.60 6.15 7.30 10.00 6.95 1.76 2.19 2.54 4.00 6.95
Each
24.30 30.59 36.00 48.59 78.32
4+
S400
H.O.T. Magnum Filter

Compact and powerful, the H.O.T. canister filter is designed to hang on the side of an aquarium tank. It has the efficacy of larger canister filters with the convenience of "hang on" power filters. Includes a micron polishing filter, a carbon/media container, foam sleeve, activated carbon and a cleaning brush. Only 61/2" wide, it will pump and filter up to 250 gph. Overall height is 13". Weighs 5 lbs. 115V/60 Hz. Six-month warranty. M625 $ 84.92
13"
ACF20C
ACF50A
ACF1 ACF20F
Power Filters by Whisper

Extremely popular for maintaining aquariums, these highquality power filters are long lasting, reliable and VERY quiet. The waste is filtered through replaceable Bio-Bags that provide both mechanical and chemical filtration. WPF0 WPF1 WPF2 WPF3 WR0-1 26163 Power Filter, to 20 gallons Power Filter, to 30 gallons Power Filter, to 40 gallons Power Filter, to 60 gallons Bio-Bags for 20-gal Filter, 12/Pk Bio-Bags, 8/Pk $ 19.99 23.99 28.99 39.99 10.85 10.25
Bio-Wheel Filters
These "hang-on" power filters are designed to provide chemical, mechanical and biological filtrationto small aquariums. They feature a rotating bio-wheel (RBC) that provides up to 10 times more biological filtration than other power filters. The wet/dry design increases gas exchange. Adjustable intake system draws water from the bottom and mid-level for total water circulation and filtration. Clear two-piece design gives you unobstructed view and convenient access to easy-change, longerlasting, Rite-Size mechanical/chemical filter cartridges. Units also have noise-reducing vented covers. PG12 features an additional media slot for optional media basket(s) to customize filtration. Filters are 115V/60Hz and have a six-month warranty. UL-listed.

wpf1
PG12
Tech Talk 44
System Flowrate
When people say that they exchange 100% of the water in a tank every hour, they typically are not doing that at all. If a tank holds 120 gallons, they are probably pumping 2 gpm into the tank. Their math is correct, but their English is not. To "exchange" all of the water suggests that none of the original water is still there after one hour. That would only be true if all the water were drained (dry) and then refilled; otherwise, it is constantly being mixed and only about 60% is being exchanged with each equal volume of water.
PG10 PG12 PG11RF
Bio-Wheel 100 100 Bio-Wheel 350 350 Rite-Size C Cartridge, Fits PG12, 1/Pk
Gph
$ 24.25 52.75 3.29
Each
21.83 47.48
4+
Tech Talk
235
Tech Talk 65
Mechanical Filtration and Biofiltration
In the world of aquaculture, mechanical filtration and biofiltration are very distinct and separate entities, and they must be treated as such. Mechanical filtration is the removal of solid waste, whereas biofiltration is the biological process that converts toxic nitrogenous wastes to low toxicity nitrate. Solid waste is typically categorized by its size and specific gravity. Settleable solids are those solids which have a relatively high specific gravity compared to the water in which they exist. They will settle to the bottom. Suspended solids are those in a category that have a specific gravity the same as, or slightly higher than, the water. They tend to stay in suspension and will only "drop-out" over a long period of time. Dissolved solids are those which actually become a part of the water. The dissolved solids are eliminated by reverse osmosis, anion and cation resins, activated carbon, etc. One method of removing solid waste from a round fish tank is to use a double drain. It will direct the settled solids to a separate area from the main flow. The settled solids can be directed into a small clarifier, much smaller than one sized to handle the entire flow of recirculating water. The other drain takes the suspended solids along with the nitrogenous waste. Suspended solids can be removed by several methods. One is the bead filter, which incorporates the use of small polyethylene beads that have a positive electrostatic charge. These beads have an affinity for the negatively charged suspended solids. As the particles pass these beads, they are "statically" drawn to them. When the beads are loaded with solids, it is time to backwash them. Suspended solids can also be removed by mechanical means such as bag filters, drum filters and vegetative filters. Biofiltration is the aerobic (with oxygen) breakdown of dissolved nitrogenous fish waste. The process is accomplished by two or more strains of autotrophic bacteria. These bacteria are naturally occurring and will ultimately colonize the biomedia in the biofilter as well as the tank and pipe walls. The speed of this process is dependent on temperature, pH, salinity, surface area, flowrate, etc. The autotrophic bacteria use oxygen in a two-step process to first convert the ammonia (NH 3 or NH4+) to nitrite (NO2-). Another strain of bacteria converts nitrite (NO2-) to nitrate (NO3-). Nitrate is much less toxic and typically tolerated by most cultured species until it reaches very high levels. Controlling nitrate is accomplished by diluting with clean water or by using a denitrification chamber that converts nitrate into nitrogen gas (this is an anaerobic process that uses a group of heterotrophic bacteria). A third method to keep nitrate levels in check is the use of plants. You can have a green water system (using algae), a vegetative filter or even use a hydroponic plant system to remove nitrate. Regardless of which type of filtering equipment you decide to use, the one thing to keep in mind is to stage the filtration. It is a common mistake to design a system that relies too heavily on a single filtering device to provide all of the filtering requirements of a recirculating system. By staging filtration components, the system will perform at or near its peak.
236
Cartridge Filters
Cartridge Filters
These tall cartridge filters were designed to pre-filter water for UV sterilizers, but they can be used anywhere. Each comes with a replaceable, 20-micron pleated filter, cartridges, 30-psi pressure gauge w/adapter, air bleed and four female ports ( VF11 and VF12 have two slip female ports). All PVC construction.
Max Flow (Gpm) Repl. Filter Length No. Cart Req'd Approx. Dimensions (H x W x D)* Port Sizes Ship Wt VF3
VF11 4 9 3/4" 1 14" x 7" x 43/4" 11/2" in/1" out VF12 8 191/2" 1 24" x 7" x 43/4" 11/4" in/1" out 1 391/2" x 81/2" x 51/2" 11/4" FPT VF125 12 291/4" VF25 24 291/4" 2 391/4" x 14" x 53/4" 11/4" FPT *Height is w/o gauge, which adds approx. 4". Width and depth are base dimensions.
$ 65.85 72.90 98.90 162.00
VF65
Cartridge Filter Accessories

VF11R VF12R VF4 VF11RS VF12RS VF4S VF3 UV0 VF5 BG15 VF2 VF65

VFL25 Each 12+
VF11R
9 3/4" Filter Cartridge, 20 191/2" Filter Cartridge, 20 291/4" Filter Cartridge, 20 9 3/4" Filter Cartridge, 100 191/2" Filter Cartridge, 100 291/4" Filter Cartridge, 100 Canister Replacement Cap Canister Cap O-Ring O-Ring Lubricant, 3/4 oz 15-psi Gauge 35-psi Gauge Gauge Adapter & Air Bleed
$ 9.40 11.86 16.38 14.70 18.38 25.78 10.34 2.55 3.65 11.88 12.49 8.25
8.46 10.68 14.75 13.23 16.55 23.21 9.31 2.30 3.29
VF25
VFL25B Height Ship Wt
VF12
Cartridge Filters, Large

Here is a very good value on 25- and 75-sq.ft. cartridge filters that were originally designed for spas and swimming pools, using 2" female in/outlets. The outside diameter is 81/2", has an easy on/off lid, a free-standing base, a bypass option should the filter (included) become clogged, and a 100-sq.ft., 20 (micron) pleated, polyester filter cartridge. We offer replacement filters in 20 or a 100 screen, which are good pre-filters or pond filters, respectively. The base shown is optional.
VFL25 VFL75 VFL25R VFL75R VFL251R VFL751R VFL25B
Cartridge Filter Assembly, 25 sq.ft. 18" Cartridge Filter Assembly, 75 sq.ft. 25" Replacement Filter, 25 sq.ft., 20 13" Replacement Filter, 75 sq.ft., 20 20" Replacement Filter, 25 sq.ft., 100 13" Replacement Filter, 75 sq.ft., 100 20" Filter Base, Fits All
7 lbs 8 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb
$ 134.00 179.00 26.10 57.28 43.48 65.94 7.17
Each
23.49 51.55 39.13 59.35 6.45
4+
An Exceptional Classroom
Waterlife Design Group knows your toughest challenge is getting students engaged. Why not bring the real world into your classroom to get students' attention? With the right aquatic system, students will enjoy learning through hands-on interaction and keep coming back for more. Whether you're teaching biology, chemistry, physics, or math, aquaculture and aquarium systems are useful for translating theory into real-life knowledge for your students. Give us a call and we'll analyze your requirements and deliver dependable aquatic systems that keep your focus on the science you're teaching, not troubleshooting. We use superior equipment and size components properly to prevent leaks, inadequate circulation, biofilter failure or worse. And because with Waterlife you get single-point accountability, you'll enjoy lower freight costs and better communication than when dealing with multiple vendors. Contact Waterlife Design Group today to find out how we can help you.
Web: www.WaterlifeDesign.com Email: Info@WaterlifeDesign.com Phone: 407-472-0525
Canister/Poly-Bead/Cartridge Filters
237
Ocean Clear Canister Filters by Red Sea

Ocean Clear filters have become popular because they are so well-designed. They don't leak, they are easy to clean and, of course, you can see what's going on inside. The Ocean Clear filters on this page all share the same clear, PVC, plastic canister. They are rated to a maximum of 16 psi. (Note: Exceeding 16 psi will void warranty and result in damage). They use a screw-off locking ring, with O-ring, as shown. They have 3/4" FPT in/out and on the bottom centermounted drain. The drain also has a valve with MGHT and a cap. 1" and 3/4" barb elbow adapters are also included. The minimum dimensions are 11" diameter x 11" high, but with fittings in place the maximum diameter is 14". They are all suitable for fresh and salt water. We rate them at 16 gpm maximum flow. The inlet is near the top on the right side and the outlet near the bottom on the left side. The air vent (in lid) and gauge port (top center) are 1/4" FPT with plugs included. Made in USA.
Canister Filter
The canister filter J319 includes 205 ft2 of polystrand dual filter pads and 1.25 lbs of activated carbon in a reusable nylon mesh bag. The top 100-micron pad pre-filters incoming water and the 50-micron pad provides particulate and biological filtration. Pads may be cleaned and used many times. A very cost-effective filter, suitable for ponds to 1,000 gallons or aquariums up to 150 gallons. The J318 has 205 ft2 of filter pads and no carbon. Weighs 12 lbs. J318 J2318 J319 J2319 82301 J2354
j318
Polystrand Filter Replacement Filter Pads for J318 Polystrand Filter with Carbon Replacement Filter Pads for J319 Replacement Lid Activated Carbon, in Mesh Bag, 1.25 lbs
$ 140.00 20.73 140.00 17.55 25.00 12.17
Poly-Bead Filter Chemical Filter

This chemical filter is designed to hold media that removes chemicals from water. The filter includes 7.5 lbs of premium activated carbon and a reusable nylon mesh bag. The filter can also be used with zeolite, desiccants, etc. Weighs 10 lbs. J320 $ 177 This poly-bead filter traps particulates and provides surface area for nitrifying bacteria. It will handle small fish loads, so it is suitable for small koi ponds, recirculating systems, quarantine systems, etc. A grid- and funnelshaped bottom evenly distributes water through 7 lbs (31 ft2) of polyethylene beads. The filter is self-cleaning by backwashing through the drain valve. Dimensions are 15" H x 15" W. Weighs 13 lbs. J354 AB1 Poly-Bead Filter Repl. Beads (55 lbs) $ 192.00 100.00
Cartridge Filters Mechanical Filters with UV Sterilizer

This filter comes in two styles. Both include a built-in 18-W ultraviolet sterilizer. J375 uses a 25-micron pleated cartridge to mechanically filter water. J380 includes polystrand filter pads for both mechanical and biofiltration. Both units weigh 13 lbs, are 22" H x 14" diameter, with 6' power cords. J375 J380 J2325 J2480 82380 82381 Filter w/25-micron Cartridge Filter w/Polystrand Filter Pads Replacement Cartridge for J375 Replacement Poly Pads for J380 UV Lamp Replacement Quartz Sleeve $ 320 327 49 20 74 49 These cartridge filters come in two styles. J325 has a 25-micron pleated filter cartridge with a core of activated carbon (1.25 lbs included). The filter has 25 ft2 of surface area. J340 has a 40-ft2 filter cartridge with a core of polystrand biomedia. Shipping weight is 11 lbs. J325 J2325 J340 J2340 J2354 Micron Filter, 25 ft2 Replacement Cartridge for J325 Micron Filter, 40 ft2 Replacement Cartridge for J340 Activated Carbon, in Mesh Bag, 1.25 lbs $ 184.00 49.00 190.00 62.00 12.17
J380
j325 j2325
238
Cartridge/MultiCyclone Filters
Clean & Clear Predator Cartridge Filters

Get top-end filter performance with low maintenance! The single-piece base/tank is constructed of fiberglass-reinforced polypropylene for improved strength and chemical resistance. The high-flow manual air relief valve and continuous internal air relief work together to maintain optimum filtration efficiency at all times. The units innovative clamp ring design makes it easy to remove and rinse the cartridge, and the cartridges surface is designed to block and trap as many solids as possible. 11/2" drain and washout allow quick and convenient maintenance, and 2" plumbing provides maximum flow. One-year limited warranty.
Flowrate Vertical Clearance* Ship Weight Price
160314 160315 160316 160317 160318 160314C 160315C 160316C 160317C 160318C
Cartridge Filter, 50 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 75 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 100 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 150 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 200 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 50 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 75 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 100 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 150 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 200 ft2
30 39 61 76 76
15 lbs $ 189.09 26 lbs 286.00 33 lbs 358.80 35 lbs 478.40 35 lbs 563.20 3 lbs 53.48 5 lbs 67.60 7 lbs 98.64 10 lbs 102.36 12 lbs 153.92
160314
Cleaning Wand
This cleaning wand gets into and blasts away dirt from: Cartridge filters. Clogged sand filters. D.E. filters. Aquaculture filters. Clogged pipes. This plastic wand connects to any standard garden hose, includes an on/off valve and is excellent for algae removal. Weighs 1 lb. CW3 $ 12.45
MultiCyclone Pre-Filter
Revolutionary design greatly reduces filter backwashing and maintenance by capturing particles before they reach the filter. Easily installed on any existing filtration system ideal as a pre-filter to extend the life of your existing filter. The MultiCyclone works on the basis of centrifugal water filtration. There are no moving parts to wear out and no filter media to clean. Reduces backwash frequency for sand filters and extends media life. Also reduces maintenance and extends the life of the cartridge in cartridge filtration systems. Traps sediments between 10 to 100 microns. UV-resistant and corrosionproof. Minimum flowrate is 50 Lpm; max is 500 Lpm. Max pressure is 400 kPa (58 psi). 2" unions, 1" purge valve. Two-year warranty. WC200370 $ 380
Cartridge Filters
Cartridge filters are ideal for multitank systems, lobster tanks, large aquarium displays and many commercial type fish and shellfish holding systems. This model features an exclusive Ring-Lok access opening for fast servicing, safety tab lock, 1" fast drain and a patented sediment catcher that prevents filtrate from falling into the tank when filter is removed for cleaning. Cartridges are 20-micron Reemay filter elements, ideal for most fish keeping uses (and they clean easily). These are low-profile filters, 121/2" in diameter, enabling installation in low vertical space areas. One-piece body has 2" threaded inlet/outlet. Body is made of glass-filled thermoplastic, rated up to 50 psi. Twelve-year warranty, excluding freeze damage. Maximum aquaculture flowrate shown is about one-half that of the rate for clean water. We suggest ordering at least one replacement cartridge so you can quickly switch them and dry the cleaned one. Made in USA. CF50 CF80 CF120 CF160 CF200 CF50R CF80R CF120R CF150R CF160R CF200R CF50AV CF50-O SFPG Cartridge Filter, 50 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 80 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 120 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 160 ft2 Cartridge Filter, 200 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 50 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 80 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 120 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 150 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 160 ft2 Repl. Cartridge, 200 ft2 Air Vent Valve (Fits All) Body O-Ring (Fits All) Pressure Gauge
Flowrate CF80
Chemical/Media Filters
Use these slim-design filters as high-capacity media filters in almost any application. Each filter includes a media cartridge that can hold any media, rice-grain size or larger. The cartridge can easily be removed for cleaning or refilling and requires no additional retainer bag. Capacity is approximately 15 lbs of granulated carbon or equivalent. The housing is high-impact polypropylene and features an easy-to-remove lid with a 30-psi pressure gauge and air purge valve. The combination filter also includes a 30-micron pleated cartridge and media basket. Both filters have 11/2" slip inlet/outlet union fittings, 10" dia. bodies and a maximum pressure of 87 psi. One-year warranty. 18" 26" 31" 35" 41"
Ship Wt
Maximum Height
19 lbs 25 lbs 27 lbs 30 lbs 52 lbs 3 lbs 5 lbs 8 lbs 10 lbs 12 lbs 12 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 271.67 329.17 388.65 505.62 567.10 65.00 104.00 127.00 125.00 139.00 169.00 4.00 18.69 14.20
TCF50-A TCF75-A TC25R TC20C LPG30
Filter Type
Chemical 10 Combination 35 Repl. Pleated Cartridge Repl. Media Basket Gauge, 130 psi
Max Gpm
Height
28" 38"
Ship Wt
$ 319.67 262.87 58.75 59.40 24.00
TCF75-A TC20C TC25R
Sand Filters/Tech Talk
239
Tech Talk 45
Sand Filters
Sand filters may not be practical when filtering water containing organic material (fish waste, dissolved and solid, is organic) because bacteria grow on the sand grains, causing them to stick together. The bacteria will adhere so strongly that the sand bed will not expand when put in a backflush mode. The backflush water will "channel" in one place only, leaving a hard clump or "cake" composed of a mixture of sand, waste material and bacteria on the top of the sand bed. This can take as little as one week to form in a new sand filter and must then either be broken up or the sand must be replaced. If backflushing can be done as many as three times per day (either manually or automatically) to avoid the caking problem, then a sand filter may indeed be a good choice for your fishkeeping situation. The bacteria floc that forms on the sand can provide additional biofiltration. Note: Discharge a minimum of two tank volumes of water with each backflush cycle to achieve 90% waste removal. This chart shows head loss (a measure of flow resistance) for clean AES filters as a function of fl ow rate through them. Refer to this chart when sizing pumps as follows: using the design flow rate and filter, find your head loss on the vertical axis. Realize that as your filter collects material, the head loss will increase and your fl ow rate will diminish. Add the filter head loss to the lift and other fl ow resistances to compute your total dynamic head (TDH). Select a pump that will provide the design flow at the TDH.
Do not exceed manufacturer's rated maximum filter pressure.
Sand Filters
Triton sand filters feature the unique GLASLOK process that creates a one-piece, reinforced fiberglass shell with a UV-resistant surface finish. Multiport valves, if needed, can be purchased separately. NSF-approved, 50 psi maximum pressure. 10-year tank warranty, one-year standard warranty. Ship via motor freight. Made in USA.
Tank Dia Filter Area (ft2) All Sand Pea Gravel + Sand* AES (JF1) Max Filter Rate (gpm) Media (lbs)
Sand Filters, Value Buy

High quality at a low price. All models include threaded, top-mount multiport valves. If you have been searching for a low-cost reliable sand filter with multiport valving, your search is over. These filters come with a 10-year warranty on the filter tank. All inlet/outlet ports are 11/2" slip. Maximum 50 psi. One-year manufacturer's warranty against material defects or workmanship. We suggest using a section of clear PVC pipe on the filter drain connection. Sand and/or lightweight media (JF1) not included. Can ship Ground in 2 boxes. TA50 ships Oversize. Made in USA. TA35 TA40 TA50
Tank Dia. TA35
TR100 30" 4.91 600 150:450 100 TR140 36" 7.06 925 275:650 150 *Pea gravel 1/4"1/2" diameter. Sand @ No. 20 silica.
98 141
56 lbs 72 lbs
$ 806 1,066
Multiport Valves (use with either filter)

SMV1 SMV2 11/2" NPT Multiport 2" NPT Multiport
Ship Wt
8 lbs 9 lbs
$ 104.88 163.28
Ship Wt
16" 19" 21"
Area (ft2)
1.4 1.8 2.3
Sand (lbs)
100 175 225
AES (JF1)
16 25 35
Max Flowrate
35 gpm 40 gpm 50 gpm
20 + 9 lbs 22 + 9 lbs 26 + 9 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 275.60 471.12 511.68
Tandem Plumbing Kits

TRK3 TRK4 3" Two-Filter Kit 4" Two-Filter Kit
Max Filter Rate
200 gpm 300 gpm
55 lbs 90 lbs
$ 1,988.48 2,517.84
Sand Filter by Jacuzzi

This one-piece Jacuzzi molded tank is complete with six-way valves. Features service ports and large top access for inspecting media. Connections are 2" FPT. Purchase sand or our lightweight media separately. The filter rate shown below is maximum used for clean water applications. We suggest using a section of clear PVC pipe on the filter drain connection. Sand and/or lightweight media (JF1) not included. Weighs 51 lbs. Ships motor freight. Made in USA. TM26
Tank Dia.
TR100
SMV1
Tandem plumbing kits include flanges, butterfly valves and PVC fittings.
Value-Line Filter System

This highly efficient sand filter/pump combination offers exceptional filtration with minimal effort. Free-standing filter design with 1.4 sq.ft. surface area and 100-lb sand capacity. System includes 16" polyethylene tank, 1-hp pump, 6-position valve, two 11/2" x 8' filter hoses and 11/2" x 32" pressure hose. Pump has precision-balanced impeller, thermally protected motor, stainless steel hardware, clear acrylic strainer cover, 11/2" hose connections, strainer assembly and a 6' outdoor electrical cord. VLF14 $ 535
26"
Area (ft2)
3.14
Sand (lbs)
350
AES (JF1)
50
Flowrate
60 gpm
$ 550
Automatic Bypass Valve

This automatic bypass valve provides a unique solution to filter-sizing problems in large recirculating systems. Installed in parallel with a filter, the bypass valve will begin to open when the pressure across the filter reaches 10 psi. When fully open at 15 psi, the valve permits the excess water volume to bypass the filter and return to the system downstream. Noncorroding with a 11/2" slip inlet/outlet. Weighs 1 lb. BHV4 $ 37
240
Carbon Media/Tech Talk
TF
Techno Carbon by ProLine
New lower pricewe're passing our manufacturing discount on to you!

This pellet-shaped carbon adsorbs ammonia and nitrite in addition to what normal activated carbon adsorbs. Not to be used in place of a biological filter but as a supplemental method for removing nitrogenous waste. Can be used in both marine and fresh water.

Tech Talk 42
Activated Carbon in Aquaculture
We typically use activated carbon in three different facets of aquaculture: taking impurities out of water as it is brought into the facility; removing halogens such as ozone, chlorine and bromine; and removing color and metabolic by-products in recirculating systems. Activated carbon is the generic term used to describe the family of carbonaceous adsorbents with an extensively developed internal pore structure. A wide variety of activated carbon products are available, exhibiting markedly different characteristics. They are commonly made from wood, coal, lignite and coconut shell. In activated carbon's manufacture, the material is first subjected to a heating process called carbonization, which forms a fixed carbon mass full of tiny pores. It is then activated by a second heat/steam treatment (2001,600C) while regulating oxygen level, which creates an even larger internal pore network and imparts surface chemistries that give carbon its unique filtering characteristics. Some carbons are activated with phosphoric acid, potassium hydroxide or zinc chloride, which makes them unsuitable for use in aquaculture. When selecting an activated carbon, consider the adsorptive characteristics of that carbon on the chemicals to be removed.
238100 238200
2.2 lbs (1 kg) 18 lbs (8 kg)
$ 6.95 39.00
Each
35.10
4+
238200 238100
Activated Carbon by ProLine

A superior, high-purity, bituminous coal-based activated carbon preferred by public aquariums, research centers and government fisheries departments. The small particle size of 1/16 to 1/8" (1.7 to 4.7 mm) exposes more adsorption surfaces for maximum utilization. Keeps water crystal clear. Adsorbs full range of organic contaminants, pesticides, odors, colors, chlorine, dissolved organics, ozone and many heavy metals. Carbon is dry packed. Can be retained using window screen size screening. The 15-lb plastic bucket has a resealable lid. Approximately .625 m2 of surface area per gram. Bulk density is approximately 24 lbs/ft3. Cannot be shipped by air. Made in USA.

Activated carbons adsorptive characteristics are based on the principle that the greater the surface area, the higher the number of adsorptive sites available. The pore size and the pore size distribution are extremely important, as they affect the efficacy of the carbon. The macropores (larger than 25 nm) are used as the entrance to the carbon, the mesopores (125 nm) for transportation and the micropores (less than 1 nm) for adsorption. It is a generalization to say that the porosity of an activated carbon can be measured by adsorption of iodine from solution, but this measurement may not at all predict its ability to adsorb other chemicals. The finer the particle size of an activated carbon, the better the access to the surface area and the faster the rate of adsorption. Small pore size must be weighed against pressure drop, as this will affect energy cost. Careful consideration of particle size can provide significant operating benefits. Activated carbon will adsorb the following from water: chlorine and some chloramines, many dissolved organic contaminants, trihalomethanes (THM) and phenolics, total organic carbon (TOC), oil and hydrocarbon contamination, ozone, bromic acid and total organic halogens (TOX), adsorbable organic halogens (AOX) including chloroform, colors, pesticides, odors and more. Activated carbon will also reduce biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and chemical oxygen demand (COD). It is important to be able to measure the contaminant that the carbon needs to adsorb in order to know when the saturation capacity of the carbon is reached. Particle size, water flowrate, carbon bed depth and, in recirculating systems, the number of passes through the bed must be optimized for every system design. Typically, for a single pass system, a deep bed with very slow flowrates would be required, so that removal of dissolved organics can take place in the top portion of the bed. Change the carbon before it becomes saturated. If the carbon is not replaced, it could desorb what it has already removed. This can cause a nasty, toxic release. Always backwash the filter before use. In backwashing, a bed expansion of at least 25% should be used to remove any carbon dust. If it is absolutely necessary to remove a contaminant from the water, use a series of activated carbon filters and do water sampling after the first filter. The second filter will act as guard bed. Carbon, like all surfaces in recirculating aquaculture, will support bacteria that consume some of the adsorbed organics and, if left too long, can slime over the surfaces. Ozone and chloramines oxidize the carbon's surface, and they do not accumulate in the carbon structure.
AC412A AC412 AC55
1.5-lb Jar 15-lb Bucket 55-lb Bag
$ 10.85 85.10 76.59 151.00 135.90
Each
4+
AC412A
Sinking Beads
You asked for them, so we found them! Use these sinking beads as a replacement for sand in sand filters, or use them in a fluidized bed or as inert hydroponics media. These beads come in assorted colors (no choice) and are sold per cubic foot. Weight is 52 lbs. Dimensions are typically 1/16" x 1/8" in an oval shape. When used in sand filters, backwash water flow should be reduced, as beads fluidize easier than sand. Beads have a specific gravity of 1.7 (sand is 2.0 to 2.8). AB145 $ 109.00 98.10/4+
Floating Beads
Similar to above but they float! These elliptical, polyethylene beads are about 3/16" in diameter, with a .92 density. Sold in 55-lb (1.65 cubic feet) packages. Not recommended for sand filters. AB1 $ 106.00 95.40/4+
Sand Filter Media/Tech Talks
241
Tech Talk 43
Sand Filter Media
There are numerous choices of media for sand filter vessels other than sand. For instance, you can use plastic beads, granular media of mixed size or lightweight filter media for particulate removal. Activated carbon can be useful for the removal of dissolved organics, chlorine, antibiotics, ozone, etc. Be sure care to replace carbon before it becomes saturated with the material it had previously adsorbed. Sand filters can also be used with zeolite, which is an ionic exchange mineral with the ability to adsorb ammonium ions from fresh water. Regardless of the media chosen, always backwash or rinse new material prior to operation to remove dust and fines that could irritate fish or cloud the water. Sand filter housings can also hold biofilter media and perform as pressurized biofilters. This works well when using only one pump to cycle water from the culture tank through the filters to a height appropriate for spraying or degassing and then back. Filters can be put in series where two or more are used: one for particulates, one for dissolved organics, one for biofiltration, one for carbon, etc. Be aware that the published maximum clean water flowrate through a sand filter is typically much too high for aquaculture sizing. A flowrate less than half of the filter's maximum is what we recommend when selecting a vessel. In aquaculture, particular attention must be paid to backflushing frequency and volume. Recirculating aquaculture water's high organic content makes most media (especially sand) stick together and usually requires backwashing two or more times per day. Remember that sand filters are designed for sand media, which has a small grain size and heavy specific gravity. The use of any other media will require experimentation to find the best backflush water volume.
MM1 Mixed Media

Our mixed media contains 4 sizes of media that will greatly enhance a filters performance, reduce backflush frequency and prevent channeling. The coarse top layer is carbonite with sizes between 2.0 and 2.2 mm. This material can remove iron and manganese that adhere loosely to the angular carbonite particles and backwashes easily. Ratios of each media are based on years of use in other industries. Our media is premixed in 1-ft 3 containers, which weigh approximately 80 lbs each. The specific gravity of mixed media is between 1.6 and 4.2 (sand is 2 to 2.8), so the backwash pressure or volume may have to be adjusted. MM1 $ 67.20 61.15/4+
Mixed Media
Different grain sizes segregate solids throughout the bed.
Mixed media filtration greatly surpasses the performance of single media filters. The drawback to a single media filter is that the first one inch of media is trapping most of the solids and the bottom portion is just wasted space. A sand filter that uses a single size sand grain will have an average size space between the grains that varies only slightly. A mixed media filter uses different grain sizes to segregate solids throughout the bed. A large media is used first to "pre-filter" large solids. Beneath that is a finer size and then a very fine media on the bottom. Each media used is a different specific gravity, designed so that it will return to the ideal stratified layer after backwash. During backwash the entire media bed is expanded, "fluidized" and rinsed. Upon return to normal operation, the media that is the smallest and heaviest settles first to the bottom. The largest is the lightest and settles on top.
Out In Waste Out In Waste
Tech Talk 46
Iron Removal
If iron is in your water, you can either move to another location or spend some effort to remove it. The presence of iron above .1 ppm is considered detrimental to most freshwater fish-keeping (.5 is lethal). Iron-bearing water, when fresh out of the ground, is usually clear because iron is in the soluble ferrous iron form. As soon as it reacts with a little oxygen (.14 ppm per part of iron), the iron is changed to the ferric state and turns brown or orange. Then, it either drops out (precipitates) or remains suspended as a colloid. There are three general classes of iron-bearing ground water: Those that precipitate immediately after aeration. Those that do not precipitate (acid waters) Those that precipitate only part of the iron. To remove iron that precipitates readily, simply aerate or spray water into the air using the well pump's pressure. Hold the water in a settling basin, followed by a slow rate sand filter of about two gallons per square foot per minute. For removing more difficult iron, the aerated water may be passed over coarse contact media (lava, stones, coke, etc.) in a multilevel tray. The media soon becomes coated with iron hydroxide, which promotes catalytic precipitation of iron and manganese from the water. All three classes of iron can be removed by the lime-softening process and/or the zeolite process, sometimes called greensand.
Mixed Media Single Media Particles are captured throughout the mixed media filter instead of primarily on the top.
Lightweight Sand Filter Media

Particulate removal down to the 2040 micron range.
Backflush channeling occurs when heavy sand media doesn't fluff up (bed expansion) as it should because organics and bacteria make it stick together. Our lightweight media minimizes the problem because it expands 3050% with only 810 gpm per square foot backflush (if the flowrate is in excess of 10 gpm per square foot of area, a restricting valve on the backflush drain may be needed to prevent the loss of media). Weighs only 25 lbs/ft3 (sand is about 100 lbs per cu.ft.) and comes in bags. The irregular shape of the lightweight media provides more void space, resulting in less pressure loss. Made of anhydrous silicon dioxide and approved for potable water.

Important
JF1
1 ft3
25 lbs
Wt
$ 31.00
Each
28.52
4+
242
Parabolic Screen Filters
Parabolic Screen Filters by FIAP

These semi-self-cleaning filters are designed to remove solids from water with only occasional cleaning attention. They use a wedge wire, 304 stainless steel screen set in a parabolic shape to take advantage of the Coanda effect*. This wedge wire shape encourages solids-free water to drop between the screens and solids to be left on the surface. The solids are then pushed toward the waste trough and washed into a waste tank automatically. This filter is ideally suited for a gravity-flow system. It has a 200-micron, removable screen. The inlet and filtered water exit are 6", the waste port is 4". Rubber couplings with clamps are included. Made in Germany. 2875 2873

25" x 10" x 32" + Fittings 25" x 20" x 32" + Fittings
L x W x H
Max Flowrate
70 gpm 150 gpm
$ 1,476.92 1,708.66
Weir
Cover
Inlet
Deflector 200-micron Screen Waste Port
Inlet Waste
Overflow Protection (Weir)
Filtered Water
Stopper
Outlet
Clean Water
Float (2873 only)
Operation: Slurry is gravity fed or pumped into headbox. It overflows weir, starts downward on screen. Most free fluid is stripped from bottom of stream on the 25 slope. More fluid is removed on the 35 slope, and solids roll downward, stopping on the 45 slope. With free draining material, practically all free fluid is removed in one pass. As the solids build up, water pushes them into the waste channel.
UV Skimmer
2873
2875
Liquid Waste Stream
Bottom Drain Water Level Controller Pump
Liquids
Waste
Sump
Liquids
Inside of 2873.
*Coanda effect: the tendency of a stream of fluid to follow a curved surface (if the angle is not too sharp) rather than follow a straight line in the original direction of flow.
Solids
The parabolic shape promotes the Coanda effect*, stripping liquid from the bottom of the waste stream.
Filtering out algae.
Dewatering/Peristaltic Pumps
243
Geotube Dewatering Technology

Geotube containers have been used for removal of solids from aquaculture waste, industrial waste, municipal sludge and dredged materials, thus eliminating the need for mechanical dewatering. They have also been used in breakwater applications to protect and enhance beachfronts and coastlines or as dikes to preserve and reconstruct eroding embankments. Geotube systems are fabricated from a strong, woven geotextile material with special high-strength sewing techniques. The geotextile fabric is permeable to water while retaining solids, sludge or dredged materials. Excess water drains from the Geotube container through small pores, resulting in effective dewatering of the contained material. This volume reduction allows for repeated addition of solids to the Geotube system. After dewatering, the dried solids can be used to fertilize crops, burned or disposed of in a landfill. Three standard sizes of Geotube systems are available: Mobile Dewatering System (MDS) tube and two MuniTube containers. Custom sizes are also available based on flowrates and/or volume. Please call for more information. The MDS tube fits in a 30-yard, roll-off container or can be placed on the ground. If used in a roll-off container, the weight limit is about 1415 tons to be legally hauled over highways(check with your local authorities for more information). The tube has standard 4" flange fittings, can be moved from location to location in the roll-off container and can serve as a temporary onsite dewatering system. The MuniTube dewatering container is delivered to the jobsite on a wooden pallet. It can be placed on an existing drying bed, in a dewatering basin or on a layer of sand with an underdrain system for collection of the effluent water. GE01 MDS Tube, 11' x 26', 30 cu.yds GE05 MuniTube Container, 5' x 50', 100 cu.yds, GE09 MuniTube Container, 15' x 90', 180 cu.yds Geotube is a registered trademark of Ten Cate Nicolon.
Ship Wt (lbs)
Peristaltic Pumps
These fixed-speed, general purpose pumps can be used for dispensing nutrients, chemicals and liquid feeds. Features: self-priming to 29 feet, act as a check valve when off, fluid touches only the tube and easy to service. Controlled by an on/off switch. If required, they can run for hours or along with a repeat cycle timer for variable flowrates. Pumps come with four sizes of Norprene tubing that can also be used to vary the flowrate. One-year limited warranty. 907-014 907-036 907-058 907-172 907-282 14 rpm 36 rpm 58 rpm 172 rpm 282 rpm $ 172 181 189 211 262
907-058
907-014 907-036 907-058 907-172 907-282
Flowrate mL/min Tubing ID: inch (mm) .062 (1.6) .125 (3.2) .187 (4.9) .250 (6.3) Amps
3 8 12 36 60
12 30 49 144 237
28 72 116 344 564
48 126 208 602 987
.37 .90 1.2 2.2 3.3/2.2

CE854
Weight Lbs (kg)
4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3) 6 (2.7)
Hyperfloc
$ 1,733 1,853 3,202 Hyperfloc flocculants are well suited for aquaculture applications. They are very high molecular weight, polyacrylamide polymers with a high degree of cationic charge. The clarified water is suitable for reuse with your fish. The dry form comes in bags or by pallet while the liquid comes in pails or drums. For initial ordering purposes we suggest assuming a dosage of 20 mg/L. Freshwater use only. Do not use with fish present in water. CE854 CP911H Liquid, 5-gallon Pail Dry, 55-lb Bag $ 118 272
155 175 325

Purple rim Montipora capricornus with a pair of black-footed skunk clownfish.
Have a complaint?
Michael H. Comet
244
Rotary Drum Filters
Rotary Drum Filters

Self-cleaning to 12,000 gpm.
All stainless steel and high-density polyethylene (HDPE) construction. Replaceable multipiece 20- to 100-micron () screens. These high-quality, self-cleaning rotary drum filters are an excellent choice for high-volume solids removal. They are especially well-suited for low head loss and high-volume applications common to aquaculture and industry. System water flows by gravity to the drum filter and then through the screen. Solids are removed by the screen and then from the screen with a water washbar and directed to the sludge drain. Filter also includes an overflow drain. Complete models include power backwash, water level switch, stainless steel screens and lid. We recommend 304L SS for freshwater and 316L SS for saltwater applications. Call for our questionnaire in order to receive a price quotation; specify with or without sump, screen pore size, control panel and other options. Allow 8 weeks for delivery.
Pronounced "Favor"
We are now combining the Faivre mechanical drum and AES control panels for more complete capabilities and faster customer service. The state-of-the-art control panels include a programmable logic control (PLC) device that enhances the functionality of the system and provides extended capabilities for control, data collection, monitoring and alarming. These new systems are UL- and CSA-certified and highly serviceable anywhere in the world.
Applications include:

Recirculating aquaculture Flow-through aquaculture. Zoological exhibits/Large aquariums. Industrial filtering Waste water.
Drum Filter PLC Filtration of inlet water at 60.
Sprayjet Cleaning Unit Rinse Water Spray Drum Drive Motor
New!
Discharge of Solids
Model 1-40 HDPE Tank
Filtered Water Out Inlet Call for pricing.
Model 12-160 HDPE Tank
Water flow (gpm) with maximum 10 mg/L of waste.

Filter Model 1-40 2-60 2-80 4-80 3-120 6-120 9-120 4-160 8-160 12-160 16-160 20-160 24-160 28-160 32-160
20 Screen 30 Screen 40 Screen 60 Screen 80 Screen 100 Screen

Filter Model
55 103 111 174 158 190

1-40
127 222 238 317 349 428

2-60
206 365 412 539 602 713

2-80
412 729 824 1,078 1,205 1,427

4-80
317 555 666 808 935 1,110

3-120
634 1,110 1,300 1,664 1,760 2,061

6-120
983 1,617 1,950 2,457 2,853 3,329

9-120
444 713 888 1,110 1,268 1,506

4-160
872 1,490 1,775 2,219 2,600 3,091

8-160
1,300 2,219 2,695 3,329 3,868 4,597

12-160
1,744 2,917 3,519 4,439 4,914 5,865

16-160
2,156 3,646 4,439 5,548 6,182 7,292

20-160
2,600 4,439 5,231 6,658 7,450 8,719

24-160
3,012 5,231 6,182 7,609 8,719 10,304

28-160
3,487 6,024 7,133 8,719 10,145 11,889

32-160
Water flow (gpm) with maximum 25 mg/L of waste.

30 Screen 40 Screen 60 Screen 80 Screen 48 71 111 174 111 159 238 301 206 285 396 507 412 571 793 1,015 285 380 523 666 650 856 1,205 1,458 951 1,300 1,839 2,283 428 587 793 1,030 872 1,173 1,617 2,457 1,268 2,314 3,170 3,963 1,775 2,933 4,042 5,073 2,140 3,567 4,756 6,103 2,616 4,439 5,231 6,658 3,012 4,042 5,548 7,133 3,408 4,597 6,341 8,085
Mechanical Filtration Bubble Bead Filters

Constructed of heavy-duty plastic (BBF1, BBF2P, BBF4) or food grade fiberglass (BBF6, BBF10). Both will give dependable fresh or saltwater service for many years. They are well suited for koi ponds and the smaller recirculating system. They are easy to clean and require very little energy to operate. Ship from factory. Made in USA.
Maximum Max Pressure Bead Capacity (Ft3) Height Diameter Flowrate (Psi) * Inlet Pipe Outlet Pipe Backwash Water Loss (Gal) Ship Wt BBF4 Crating Charge**
Bead Filters
245
BBF1 16 gpm 10 1 45" 17" 1" 1" 12 BBF2P 30 gpm 10 2 59" 24" 1.5" 1.5" 25 BBF4 65 gpm 10 4 78" 32" 2" 2" 40 BBF6 90 gpm 15 6 76" 361/2" 2" 2" 60 BBF10 150 gpm 15 10 82" 421/2" 3" 3" 150 AB1 Replacement Beads, Flattened Oval, Approximately 1/32" x 3/16" Dia., 1.65 cu.ft. *Do not exceed maximum pressure. **Crating charge not included in price.
$ 923 1,203 1,814 2,998 3,760 106
20 25 45 55 55
Polygeyser Pneumatic Drop Bead Filters

Automatically backwashno moving parts or electronics!
Designed as "bioclarifiers" these filters are capable of handling biological loads 50 to 100% higher than bubble or propeller-washed bead filters. Very resistant to clogging and caking-they backwash automatically every few hours using a burst of air from the charge chamber. PR Series filters (pump inlet/pressurized discharge) come with plumbing to accommodate a water pump (10 psi max). AL Series filters (gravity inlet/airlift discharge) are set up for airlift pumping. Water and air flow into the vessel continuously. Water goes in the lower pipe, up through the media and back to the fish. Air is pumped into the charge chamber where it accumulates to a critical volume and releases the air in a burst, knocking the debris off the media. The debris then settles to the bottom and is removed through the 2" sludge drain every 23 days. Nitrotech media (included) gives 50100% better nitrification rates than standard round bead media. An air pump is required but is not included; it must produce more pressure than the water pump/system head. A check valve (228225) must be used in the air line. Max pressure 10 psi. Ship via motor freight, FOB factory. One-year warranty.
Maximum Discharge Type Flowrate Max Pressure (Psi) * Bead Capacity (Ft3) Height Diameter Inlet Pipe Clean Water Out Clean Water Out Water In
Water In
One ft3 of beads has approximately 400 ft2 of surface area. Air In Hose Barb Sludge Drain Outlet Pipe DF3P
Charge Chamber
DF3P Pump 45 gpm 10 3 36" 34" 3" 3" DF3A Airlift 45 gpm 10 3 36" 34" 3" 3" AB1 Replacement Beads, Flattened Oval, Approximately 1/32" x 3/16" Dia., 1.65 cu.ft. *Do not exceed maximum pressure. **Crating charge not included in price.
Backwash Water Loss (Gal) Ship Wt
40 40
$ 3,172 3,172 106
Crating Charge**
45 45
Propeller-Washed Bead Filter

Improve the capture of small particles.
Solids capture is one of the most important processes in a recirculating system. Although sedimentation/settling basins are generally effective for settleable solids larger than 80 microns, space constraints may render them impractical. If this is your situation, then an expanded granular biofilter (EGB), specifically, a bead filter, may be the best alternative, as it reduces the retention time and improves the capture of small particles. These bead filters can provide both filtration and biofiltration in a single device. These bead filters employ low-density polyethylene beads (included) for their filter media in a pressurized up-flow configuration. The filter physically traps suspended solids while providing a large surface area for the growth of bacteria. Titaniumenhanced screens and automated backwash controllers available by quote. Made from heavy-duty food-grade fiberglass, this filter will give dependable fresh or saltwater service for many years. Designed for larger recirculating aquaculture systems, the propeller-washed bead filters are easy to clean, easily automated, compact and very energy-efficient. Internal beads are cleaned by a motor-driven propeller. Prop wash models available with higher pressure capacity. Please inquire. Ships from factory. Made in USA. One-year warranty.
Maximum Flowrate Max Pressure Bead Capacity (Ft3) Height Diameter (Psi)* Inlet Pipe Outlet Pipe
PBF10 PBF3 Backwash Crating Water Loss (Gal) Ship Wt Charge**
PBF3 30 gpm 10 3 63" 33" 1.5" 2" 510 PBF10 100 gpm 20 10 87" 42" 1.5" 3" 1030 PBF25 200 gpm 20 25 107" 60" 2" 3" 3060 PBF50 300 gpm 20 50 110" 72" 3" 4" 50150 AB1 Replacement Beads, Flattened Oval, Approximately 1/32" x 3/16" Dia., 1.65 cu.ft. *Do not exceed maximum pressure. **Crating charge not included in price.
425 lbs 750 lbs 1,750 lbs 3,250 lbs 55 lbs
$ 3,774 8,328 12,577 21,535 106
70 100 125 375
246
Bead Filters
AquaDyne Bead Filtration Systems

These specialized bead filters have been engineered specifically for koi ponds and water gardens. Available in five sizes, they feature a central diffuser column that reduces internal friction loss. Standard features of these systems include:

Full rinse cycle prerinses the floating media in its normal filter cycle just after a backwash and discharges the rinse water to the waste line. Bottom sludge drain allows heavy sludge and settled waste to be discharged from the bottom of the filter without disturbing the media. omplete filter bypass allows complete isolation of the filter media from the pond without disturbing the normal water flow. Ideal for medicating the pond without killing the C beneficial bacteria.
Part numbers that end in B and BL use a blower for air-assisted backwashing. This reduces the amount of water needed for backwashing and improves biological filtration capacity by approximately 30%. Maximum 50 psi for all filters. 115V, 50/60 Hz. Systems include beads, ship Ground in multiple boxes and have a one-year warranty; BF44B & BF88B ship by motor freight.
Inlet Backwash
Outlet
BF60BL
Important
Thom Blischok's pond filtration room.
BF60 BF60BL BF11 BF11B BF22 BF22B BF44B BF88B AB2LB
1,200 gallons 1,200 gallons 2,500 gallons 2,500 gallons 5,000 gallons 5,000 gallons 2" 10,000 gallons 2" 20,000 gallons Replacement Beads
Inlet/ Outlet
11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2"
Maximum System Size
Lbs Fish Supported
30 30 55 55 120 120 240 480
Bead Media Capacity

3
.60 ft 16" x 33" .60 ft3 16" x 33" 1.1 ft3 18" x 34" 1.1 ft3 18" x 34" 2.2 ft3 24" x 42" 3 2.2 ft 24" x 42" 4.4 ft3 30" x 46" 8.8 ft3 36" x 48" 1.4 ft3
Dimensions (Dia. x Height)
Recommended Flowrate
35 gpm 35 gpm 50 gpm 50 gpm 5065 gpm 5065 gpm 50100 gpm 50100 gpm
30+20 lbs 30+25 lbs 40+45 lbs 40+50 lbs 50, 50+50 lbs 50, 50+65 lbs 80, 55, 55, 55, 50 lbs 108, 55 (x6), 22, 12, 11, 8 lbs 50 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 943.54 1,252.24 1,238.32 1,571.68 1,822.30 2,241.76 3,181.46 5,416.31 282.50
Commercial System Paks
247

Applications:
Public aquariums. Retail holding systems. Research systems. Aquaculture systems.
Invented Here
Multitank rack systems. Seafood holding systems. Residential systems. Koi ponds.
These skid-mounted filtration systems provide complete filtration and circulation for larger recirculating systems. Each system is completely assembled and water-tested before shipping. Systems ship on plastic pallets via motor freight, FOB Orlando.
Pumps
Supplied with magnetic drive pumps or centrifugal pumps. All pumps are suitable for use in fresh and saltwater applications.
Filters
Supplied with a combination of mechanical and chemical filters that are specifically sized for the system and flow rate of the pumps. The mechanical filter is available in a pleated 20-micron cartridge, in-line bag with sizes from 1 to 800 microns (bags not included) or sand filter. Chemical filters hold carbon, zeolite or other chemicalremoving media. UV sterilizer providing a minimum of 33,000 Ws/cm2 included on each model.
AES systems at Tropicana Field, home of the Tampa Bay Rays.
Fittings
Systems are plumbed with Schedule 40 pipe (Schedule 80 available at added cost). Heavy-duty, true union and single union ball valves are plumbed throughout the system for easy disassembly. All filters and UV sterilizers have bypass lines to facilitate filter or lamp replacement.
Power
Standard systems are 115V/60 Hz. 230V/50 Hz models are available for export.
Optional Features
Can be used with in-line heaters, water chillers, protein skimmers, stands and monitoring/control systems. You must add a "B-2" for bag, "C-2" for cartridge or "S-2" for sand filter to the part number. Pricing shown below is for "B-2" option. Call AES Tech Support for sizing assistance, options, etc.
Max Flow (Gpm) Inlet/ Outlet Amps @ 115V/230V Dimensions (L x W x H) Ship Wt (lbs)
CSK5S-2
CSK4 CSK4.5 CSK5 CSK6
30 45 60 100
2" 2" 2" 2"
9.4 8.8/4.4 16.8/8.4 21/10.5
48" x 40" x 54" 48" x 40" x 54" 48" x 40" x 68" 48" x 40" x 68"
365 397 520 570
$ 4,230 4,291 4,867 6,824
CSK6B-2 CSK5C-2
248
Commercial System Packages/Tech Talk
Tech Talk 106

Biofilter Performance Standards
"AES/B" stands for absolute efficiency standard for biofilters. AES/B numbers indicate how many lbs of fish a biological filter can support in an exemplary recirculating system. They are only a quick reference for comparing our biological filters. Note that as much as 50% additional ammonia conversion occurs on other wetted surfaces like tank walls and pipes but, since these nitrification surfaces are often eliminated by cleaning and chemical therapeutants, it is unwise to count on them (see Tech Talk 95biofilter sizing). AES/B numbers take into account the bio-film diffusion and oxygen availability characteristics specific to the biofilter type (bead filter vs rotating biological contactor, for example). Be aware that feed rate, feed protein content, pH, ammonia concentration, temperature, solids pre-filtration and other variables have a pronounced effect on biofilter performance. Actual field performance can stray from the AES/B number by a factor of 3 or more, based on these factors alone. Management skill and even timing are other variables, particularly for bead filters utilized for nitrification rather than solids removal. AES/B numbers hold for the following conditions only:
1/2-lb
tilapia or catfish in indoor tanks.
Nonsoil bottoms, low algae concentrations. Warm water (80F, 27C). Recirculation rate of at least one system volume per hour. 7.2 pH. 3 mg/L total ammonia-nitrogen (TAN) concentration. 2% body weight per day feed rate, pelleted feed at 40% protein. Effective solids pre-filtration (except for bead filters).
Commercial Filtration Packages

These prepackaged filtration systems are perfect for koi ponds, water gardens and multitank fish culture systems. They are self-contained filtration units that provide everything needed for a complete life support system. Each provides mechanical and biological filtration as well as UV sterilization for crystal clear water. Made in USA.
Details:

te, Comple ined ta n o C Self on Filtrati s System
CSK3
Every component is salt water compatible. No hassle installation; simply plumb the inlet, outlet and backwash. AquaDyne bead filter provides mechanical and biological filtration. Emperor Aquatics UV sterilizer. Mounted vertically for easy lamp replacement. Energy-efficient centrifugal pump with strainer basket. Each component is properly sized, eliminating guesswork. All equipment is premounted on a plastic base plate. Fits in a small footprint.
Outlet to Tank Emperor Aquatics UV Sterilizer
All are 115V/60 Hz, with UL-listed components, and ship via motor freight (crating charge not included). One-year warranty.
Backwash
Energy-Efficient Centrifugal Pump AquaDyne Bead Filter
Inlet
CSK3 Phets, a 22-year AES staff member, packs a CSK3 for shipment. Flowrate Filter Size (Ft3) UV (Watts) Pond Size (Gal) Lbs of Fish Inlet Outlet Ship Wt LxWxH Outdoor-Rated Plastic Skid
CSK1 CSK2 CSK3
30 gpm 60 gpm 90 gpm
.6 2.2 4.4
50 120 150
1,200 5,000 10,000
30 120 240
1.5" 1.5" 2.0"
1.5" 1.5" 2.0"
36" x 24" x 35" 48" x 36" x 56" 48" x 36" x 70"
$ 3,109.13 4,551.88 5,666.67
Radial Flow/MultiCyclone/Vortex/Tech Talk
249
Radial Flow Settler

The Radial Flow Settler provides a costefficient method for settling and removing lightweight solids. Liquid enters the center of the tank vertically and flows down through the stilling well, causing lowdensity solids to be easily settled out of the water column. Filtered water overflows a weir into a collection trough for distribution. Works great with in-ground applications, or can be manufactured with an optional support skirt. Call for technical specifications and pricing.
Optional Skirt With Access Ports
Wave Vortex Chambers

Filters up to 150 gpm.
Vortex swirl separators are popular solids filters for use with koi ponds and fish tanks. They are very good at removing heavy particles and wastes. You can gravity-flow water from a bottom drain or pump it to the vortex chamber. These stand about 51/2 ft high with the 2-ft high base. All connections are 3" slip.

Sturdy double-wall base support. Three outlet ports allow body to be connected in any direction. Domed lid keeps it clean. Coned bottom allows complete drainage. Rubber connections eliminate the need to precisely align filter with pipes. Comes with drain valve, rubber couplings, bulkhead, lid, body and base.
Collection Trough
MultiCyclone Pre-Filter
Revolutionary design greatly reduces filter backwashing and maintenance by capturing particles before they reach the filter. Easily installed on any existing filtration system ideal as a pre-filter to extend the life of your existing filter. The MultiCyclone works on the basis of centrifugal water filtration. There are no moving parts to wear out and no filter media to clean. Reduces backwash frequency for sand filters and extends media life. Also reduces maintenance and extends the life of the cartridge in cartridge filtration systems. Traps sediments between 10 to 100 microns. UV-resistant and corrosionproof. Minimum flowrate is 50 Lpm; max is 500 Lpm. Max pressure is 400 kPa (58 psi). 2" unions, 1" purge valve. Two-year warranty. WC200370 $ 380
We recommend using the WLS2 pump trap listed below if pumping to the filter. Ship motor freight or Ground (at 70-lb rate each) in two packages from factory. One-year warranty on body. WLT24 WLF36 WLF36F WLS2 Vortex Tank, 24" Vortex Tank, 36" Vortex Tank, 36" (Body & Lid Only) Pump Trap
Ship Wt
$ 588.00 1,088.00 729.00 75.00
WLS2 WLT24
Tech Talk 33
Filtration Spectrum
Fish and invertebrate wastes are comprised of uneaten feed, fecal material, algae, fish scales, organic debris, etc. The solid wastes are characterized by particle size and density. Aquaculture wastes vary between species and applications. Even a change in fish food brands, or going from sinking to floating food, can make profound changes in waste characteristics. Removal of fish wastes is especially important in recirculating systems, as suspended solids can cause disease, damage gills, foul biofilters, increase oxygen demand, raise ammonia concentrations and cause off-flavor. The removal of suspended solids can be done by gravitational settling (sedimentation tanks, tube settlers, etc.) and physical separation (granular filters, screening, cartridge and bag filters), plus affinity bead filtration, vegetable filters and others. The smallest solids may be removed using foam fractionation, diatomaceous earth filtration or membrane filtration.
250
Pond Skimmers/Filters
Surface Skimmers
Great for ornamental ponds.
A simple method of removing leaves, scum and other surface debris while reducing surface tension. Inlet weir always floats just below the surface, so fluctuating water levels of up to 5" will not affect performance. S750 skimmers are made from black or white ABS plastic. Internal catch basket holds about two handfuls of leaves and lifts out easily for cleaning. Skimmers work between 20 and 55 gpm. 11/2" female pipe thread in the base (not included) allows for easy installation when building or retrofitting. 81/2" Dia. x 10" H. Made in USA. S750B S750W S750RB Black White Replacement Basket $ 93.44 68.80 18.37
Pond Filter by Sweetwater

Cover Included
Invented Here
Engineered by pond experts for small ponds flowing up to 5 gpm!

Overflow Feature
S750B
Heavy Duty w/Lid Particle and Biofiltration High Surface Area Easy to Clean Only 33" x 20" x 18"
Simple design principles make this filter very effective and simple to clean. Rugged, two-compartment, molded, black polyethylene tank with cover is only rated for 5 gpm, but you can use two or three in parallel for higher flows.
Top View
Procedure: Pump up to 5 gpm. Water flows through an easy-to-clean pre-filter pad and then down through finer filter pads. The water then flows up through biofilter media before gravity flowing back to the pond or through a UV light. If you neglect to clean a dirty pre-filter, water will bypass it through the overflow feature. Cleaning is simple. Each compartment has layers of easily removed media and at the bottom of each is a 11/2" quick drain (can be fitted with an optional valve). The biofilter media is 1 ft3 of Bio-Fill. Inlet is 1" FNPT, outlet is 11/2" FNPT. A heavy black molded lid is included. Made in USA. FBX FBX1 Filter w/o Media Filter w/Media $ 274.60 439.95
Tech Talk 48
Sedimentation
1. Do whatever is possible to allow fish feces to drop intact into the waste collection area or self-cleaning bottom with minimal breakage. Minimize the use of pumps, aerators and air diffusers wherever feces are present. 2. Do not pump the waste prior to separation. Design for gravity flow (or siphon) into a sedimentation tank or basin. Splashing and turbulence can attach air bubbles and break apart solids. Feces and food particles smaller than 40 microns may not settle without chemical flocculent. 3. Always locate the biofilter after the solids removal system. Solids provide carbon for heterotrophic bacteria, which can foul a biofilter and reduce its performance.
Goldfish farm in Asia.
4. Clean both the settling area and filters at least once a day, even if they contain little waste. 5. If further filtration is required after sedimentation, pump the water to an affinity bead clarifier, particulate filter or foam fractionator.
R4411
Submersible Pond Filters

Designed to be used with Quiet One pumps (see p. 324) and other submersible pumps, these pump pre-filters combine mechanical and biological filtration to clean water. The biological sponge can be removed and replaced with other types of media like carbon, zeolite, ceramic media, etc. No tools are required for assembly; each strainer includes a modular pond filter. Available in single, double and triple capacity for use in small, medium or large ponds.
Height Max Pond Size
R4411 R4412 R4413 R4424
4" 1,000 gal 6" 1,700 gal 8" 2,500 gal Replacement Sponge
$ 52.65 71.00 77.00 15.00
Here is a good sedimentation basin design: wide inlet (to reduce velocity), a surface area of .7 to 1.4 ft2 of basin per gpm flow (for feces with a specific gravity of 1.01 or greater), wide outlet weir (never a stand pipe), no baffles (which increase velocities) and a simple waste drain. A depth of just a few inches is enough for most designs.
Pond Filters
251
Skimmer Filter
Stilling Well
Living Pond Filters

For ponds to 5,000 gallons.
These pond filters have a built-in settling cone with a bottom drain for easy cleaning. Sturdy injection-molded housing will not warp or collapse. The large 3-cu.ft. filter chamber is filled with Springflo Bio Filter Media (included) that provides 180 sq.ft. of surface area for biofiltration. A top filter mat polishes the water before it is gravity fed back into the pond. The Waterfall model has a 22" wide weir that creates a waterfall or stream and 11/2" oulet. The Versatile model has a 2" FNPT outlet that can be attached to a pipe or tubing for direct pond or stream discharge. Both filters have 11/2" FNPT inlets, 11/2" bottom drains. For ponds with heavy debris or heavy fish loads, one unit per 3,500 gallons is recommended. Maximum flowrate is 140 gpm. Lid will support 200 lbs. Five-year warranty.

This sturdy pond skimmer is made of heavy, molded plastic polymer. The structure resists warping, will not bend and is big enough for submersible pumps up to 53/4" in diameter and 19" tall. A thick, nonskid cover has security locknuts. A large, internal leaf basket traps floating debris. An integrated filter mat with removable frame provides finer filtration. S15013 A unique one-click locking weir allows isolation of the pump for cleaning and winterization. These skimmers also permit single or dual 25-watt UV clarifiers (optional) for exceptional water clarity. Faceplates (required) sold separately below, order size by pump or pond size. UV light is 115V/60 Hz with a 6 power cord. Pumps are not included. Five-year warranty. For S15014, add "L" or "R" to part number to indicate left or right. S15012 4504 4505 4503 S15014 S10116 RS003

Skimmer 6" Faceplate 8.5" Faceplate 16" Faceplate 26-Watt UV Repl. Filter Mat Repl. Leaf Basket
Flowrate (Gpm)
841 3083 83142
Ship Wt
43 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 4 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 471.45 36.75 45.68 51.45 269.85 23.63 45.62
Each
4500 4501 4508
Waterfall Filter Versatile Filter Repl. Filter Mat
5,000 gph 3,000 gph
Max Flow
Ship Wt
50 lbs 50 lbs 1 lb
$ 523.95 523.95 25.83
Each
27.75" Sturdy, Nonskid Cover With Locknuts
4501
11/2" Inlet
24.25" Strong Media Grate
Strong Polymer Housing Resists Warping
19.38"
Faceplate Size 6" 8.5" 16"
Max Pump Flowrate 58 gpm 83 gpm 130 gpm

27.75"
Max Pond Area 500 sq.ft. 900 sq.ft. 1,200 sq.ft.
4501
Biofilter Frame With Filter Mat
Durable InjectionMolded Housing
30.5"
23.5"
Settling Cone Collects Debris 22"
Molded Leaf Basket
Pump Location
Optional UV Location
252
AHAB Systems
We're dedicated to providing researchers with the finest systems and support available. With an exclusive focus on systems for husbandry of aquatic species and a strong partnership with our customers, we're able to continue our leadership in providing new systems, features and services. Call us at 407-886-7575 (toll free 877-900-2422) to find out more about how we can help you achieve the results you want. Here are some examples of biologist-designed rack and embryo production systems specifically for aquatic species. Each AHAB system includes an unconditional 2-year warranty and 24/7 emergency support.
Benchtop System
Oversized, 5-stage, state-of-the-art filtration ensures optimal water quality. Low water level safety shut-off and alarm with optional programmable logic controller (PLC) control panel. and UV bypass allow you to service units while still running system. Central PLC control panel (optional).
Filter
XR Systems
Shelving improves overall environment, providing contrast for feeding, reducing algae growth, improving biosecurity and reducing maintenance time. Five-stage filtration for the highest water quality; UV disinfection rate is among the highest in the industry, designed for a 12-month service interval. NEMA 4X electronic controller is designed in accordance with CE Marking and UL specifications and provides a single plug installation that is neater and safer than alternatives. Includes integrated safety features, timer and LED time and temperature display. Effective for a variety of applications: Warm, freshwater environments or cold, marine environments, small holding tanks or large holding tanks.
Multi Glass Tank System
Oversized, 5-stage, state-of-the-art filtration ensures optimal water quality. Low water level safety shut-off and alarm with optional programmable logic controller (PLC) control panel. Pressure relief valve helps maintain consistent water flow to culture tanks. Filtration bypass allows service while system runs.
Mass Embryo Production System (MEPS)

Designed
Stand-Alone System
Oversized,
5-stage, state-ofthe-art filtration ensures optimal water quality. water level safety shut-off and alarm with programmable logic controller (PLC) control panel. relief valve helps maintain consistent water flow to culture tanks. and UV bypass allow you to service units while still running system. water exchange saves time and reduces labor.
expressly for the production of large numbers of zebrafish embryos for drug screening, toxicology assays/ experiments or propagation of fish. for the housing and maintenance of thousands of fish in a single tank, reducing labor required for husbandry and system maintenance. spawning sites, adjustable to optimal depths and locations within the tank, maximize embryo production. light cycle dome with dimmable light cycle timer allows for the collection of embryos at any time of the day. filter on incoming water line ensures optimal water quality, reduces possibility of chemical inhibition affecting spawning success and enhances embryo production.
Allows
Low
Multiple
Pressure
Optional
Filter
Carbon
Automatic
2395 Apopka Blvd. Apopka, FL 32703 USA Phone: 407-886-7575 Fax: 407-886-1223 Email: Habitats@AquaticEco.com Web: AquaticHabitats.com 398 Essex St. Beverly, MA 01915 USA Phone: 978-927-8720 Fax: 978-921-0231
Reverse Osmosis/Tech Talk
Chemical Filtration
253
R/O Systems, 3-Stage

Dolphin R/O systems have a high-efficiency 1-micron sediment pre-filter, 2-micron carbon block pre-filter and a high-flow/high-rejection Dow R/O membrane providing excellent water purification. The 160-psi pressure gauge and clear 10" filter cartridge housings allow full system monitoring. Quick disconnect fittings, filter wrench and hose bib attachment are included. In-line TDS meter included; shut-off valve optional. Add a "C" to the part number for the Plus model with Chloramine Blaster filters. Ship weight is 15 lbs. AFX350 AF3100 AF3200 AF3300
Max Flow (gpd)
AquaFX R/O Accessories

AFXWR AFXPG AFXTDS AFXASO AFXBLCART AFX10C AFXDI Filter Wrench Gauge & Tee, 1/8" MNPT, 160 psi TDS Meter Shut-Off Valve Filter Refill (+ Models) Replacement Canister Replacement Deionization Cartridge $ 3.15 19.00 45.00 55.00 18.50 21.00 21.10
Each
50 100 200 300
$ 149 169 218 287
Plus
AFX350C
Tech Talk 18
Reverse Osmosis
There are two general categories of reverse osmosis (R/O): low-pressure R/O for fresh water (less than 100 psi) and high-pressure R/O for making drinking water from seawater (over 1,000 psi). This Tech Talk discusses only the low-pressure category, which uses thin film composite (TFC) membranes. R/O removes dissolved ions by forcing water through a semipermeable membrane. As water flows over the membrane under pressure, about 33% passes through and exits the center as purified water, permeate or R/O water. The remaining 67% rinses the outside of the membrane and removes contaminants as concentrate. Rejection of dissolved ions is about 92% efficient if the system is in good condition. For additional filtering, the permeate can then be sent through a deionizing filter (DI) for another 6% or 7% polishing of the water. R/O is not recommended for removing viruses or bacteria since a cut in a seal or membrane could allow the organisms to pass. In addition, very small organic compounds such as trichloroethylene or trihalomethane will not be removed by this process.
209 229 278 347
R/O DI Systems, 4-Stage

Barracuda R/O DI systems have a high-efficiency 1-micron sediment pre-filter, 2-micron carbon block for VOC reduction (Barracuda+ models have Chloramine Blaster filters), high-flow/high-rejection Dow R/O membrane and color-indicating deionization resin for lab grade water. The 160-psi pressure gauge and clear 10" filter cartridge housings allow full system monitoring. Quick disconnect fittings, filter wrench and hose bib attachment are included. In-line TDS meter included; shut-off valve optional. Add a "C" to the part number for the Plus model with Chloramine Blaster filters. Ship weight is 18 lbs. AFX50 AFX100 AFX200 AFX300
Max Flow (gpd)
Performance Checks
Source water should be at least 50F (10C) and 40 psi. Do not connect to hot water or pressure over 100 psi. If the pressure is below 40 psi, a booster pump is required. A pressure gauge is essential to monitor the backpressure from your membrane and will indicate clogging. The gauge will also indicate prefilter loading, as the pressure will decrease as the prefilter becomes clogged. Total dissolved solids (TDS) levels will affect performance of R/O units. R/O membranes require more pressure to overcome the osmotic pressure as the TDS increases. The higher the level of TDS, the shorter the membrane life. The R/O unit is engineered to receive potable municipal water. In areas with very hard source water, a household water softener should be added to extend membrane life because the membrane rejects sodium better than either calcium or magnesium. Measure TDS to determine if the membrane has failed. Use a TDS or conductivity meter to monitor your permeate water. For example, if the tap water reading is 100 ppm and the permeate water is 8 ppm, you know all is working well.
50 100 200 300
$ 219 239 288 357
Plus
279 299 348 417
AFX50C

Mako R/O DI systems have a high-efficiency 1-micron sediment pre-filter, 2-micron carbon block for VOC reduction (Mako+ models have Chloramine Blaster filters), high-flow/high-rejection Dow R/O membrane and two color-changing deionization resins for the highest water purity. The 160-psi pressure gauge and clear 10" filter cartridge housings allow full system monitoring. Quick disconnect fittings, filter wrench and hose bib attachment are included. In-line TDS meter included; shut-off valve optional. Add a "C" to the part number for the Plus model with Chloramine Blaster filters. Ship weight is 27 lbs.
AFX51C Max Flow (gpd) Plus
Maintenance
Membranes will clog quickly and stop producing permeate water without proper protection; usually a 1- or 5-micron () pre-filter is used to remove solids and activated carbon is used to adsorb chlorine (specialty carbons must be used for chloramine removal). When the carbon filter is exhausted, chlorine will pass through and destroy the TFC membrane. The sediment and carbon pre-filters should be replaced every 3 months or after production of every 1,000 gallons of purified water. The TFC membrane should be changed every 13 years or when TDS readings in the permeate water are above 30 ppm. After installing a new membrane, discard all permeate for the first two hours (a new membrane is coated with a solution to prevent microbiological growth and must be rinsed thoroughly). Until it is fully hydrated, a new membrane may take up to 10 days for full production. DO NOT allow it to dry out. If you are not going to use the filter for more than 4 weeks, remove the membrane, place it in a sealed bag with 2 tablespoons of filtered water and store it in the refrigerator. Membranes and pre-filters are usually interchangeable between brands.
AFX51 AFX101 AFX201 AFX301
50 100 200 300
$ 279 289 348 417
339 349 408 477

Octopus R/O DI systems have a high-efficiency 1-micron sediment pre-filter and Chloramine Blaster filters, high-flow/high-rejection Dow R/O membrane and two color-changing deionization resins for the highest water purity. Microprocessorcontrolled 1:1 waste-to-water ratio helps conserve water, and the booster pump increases pressure to maximize filter efficiency. Cyclic membrane flush upon startup and shutdown prolongs DI life and prevents scaling. The 160-psi pressure gauge and clear 10" filter cartridge housings allow full system monitoring. Quick disconnect fittings, filter wrench and hose bib attachment are included. In-line TDS meter and high- and low-pressure kill switches also included. Ship weight is 35 lbs. AFXOCT50 AFXOCT100 AFXOCT150 AFXOCT200
Max Flow (gpd)
Use and Storage

Your R/O water should be stored in food-grade containers. R/O water is so pure that it acts as a solvent and will dissolve metals like copper or brass. If it is not stored in a food-grade container, the purified water will leach the chemicals out of the container within 24 hours. R/O water is too pure to be used by itself for fish and plants. Additives are needed to replace essential minerals. Most marine mixes contain these minerals. For freshwater systems, use an additive such as R/O Right (see Index). The average cost to produce R/O water is 5 to 10 cents per gallon. This includes the cost of the filter and maintenance.
50 100 150 200
$ 479 489 499 549

AFXOCT50
254
Chemical Filtration
DI/Accessories
Deionization Filter
This canister is filled with a mixed bed of cation and anion resins which, when added after an R/O unit, will increase water purity significantly. Ideal for creating laboratory grade reagent water and ultra-pure water. Resins are purplish in color and will turn a tan color when replacement is required. Not for use with salt water. Weighs 5 lbs. Made in USA.

R/O and DI Pre-Filters and Accessories

Carbon Pre-Filters

13"
FX3 FHX4
Matrix Granular
$ 21.50 10.25
Each
20.00 9.74
6+
DEC1 Deionization Filter AFXDI Replacement Cartridge
$ 56.50 21.10
Each
19.00 5"
6+
Doulton Ceramic Cartridge

FX2 $ 40.34 35.50/6+
FX1 FX3
Wound Polypropylene
Accessories
For R/O units & deionization canisters.
Faucet Adapter: Faucet to 1/4" hose barb. RV2 RV3 $ 13.50 $ 8.00
RV3 RV2
FX1 FX5 FX10 FX25 FX50
1 micron 5 microns 10 microns 25 microns 50 microns
$ 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75
Each
6.08 6.08 6.08 6.08 6.08

FXC AFX50M
12+
Garden Adapter: Garden hose fitting to 1/4" tube. Float Valve Kit: ABS high-density plastic float valve fits directly to R/O feed lines and is rated for city water pressure (to 60 psi). Kit includes solenoid valve and fittings. This is an ideal kit for connecting R/O units to tap water systems. Water tank not included. Rated for up to 50 gpd. RV6 $ 55.60
Replacement TFC Membranes

RV6
AFX50M AF100M
50 gpd 100 gpd
$ 45.90 49.90
AFXWR
R/O Fittings and Tubing

These compression fittings are designed for use with R/O tubing with a special, molded tube sleeve as an integral part of the nut, eliminating the need for a two-piece assembly. All fittings are manufactured with FDA- and NSF-listed nylon. Fittings are for 1/4" O.D. R/O tubing. 14452 14453 14454 14455 14456 11457F 11457F-1
1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 1/4"
R/O Accessories
AFXWR AFXPG AFXTDS FXC Filter Wrench Gauge & Tee, 1/8" MNPT, 160 psi TDS Meter 10" Filter Housing, 3/4" FNPT With Adapters and Gaskets $ 3.15 19.00 45.00 25.20
Tube x 1/4" MNPT Tube x 1/4" FNPT Tube x 1/4" MNPT Elbow Tube x 1/4" Tube Tube x Tube x 1/4" MNPT Tee R/O Tubing, 10' Rolls R/O Tubing, 1' sections (up to 500')
$ .90 1.18 1.35 1.10 2.01 2.38 .24
Mineral Replacement
This specially formulated mixture of minerals reproduces the natural water chemistry lost from R/O, distilled or deionized water. Provides a balanced electrolyte system for all freshwater fish, including discus. Contains all major, minor and trace elements, and contains no phosphate, silicates or organic chemicals. Not for saltwater use. 250 grams. RVR $ 7.09 6.03/12+
14452
14453
14454
14456
14455
R/O Booster Pump

Designed specifically for reverse osmosis systems, this inline pump boosts incoming tap water pressure that is too low for optimal R/O performance. The pump adds about 50 psi to your line pressure. Pump comes with sound dampening material for quiet operation. It is 24VDC and includes a 115VAC power transformer, 1/4" quick disconnect fitting and adjustable pressure switch. The maximum flowrate is 300 gpd (gallons per day). Weighs 10 lbs. BP8800 ZG439052 R/O Pressure Pump 3/8" x 1/4" TXT Bushing $ 147 2
Ruth Olsen
Chemical Filtration
Media Filters/PureStart
255
PureStart
Perfect for recirculating and replenishment water! This system removes herbicides, insecticides and other suspected carcinogenic compounds that can be found in both municipal and well water. It removes color, odor, taste and impurities transforming even the greenest water into crystal clear, usable water. And the filtration media meets the ANSI/NSF standard 61 for drinking water applications. PSAB25 also inactivates or removes up to 99% of viruses, bacteria, algae, Cryptosporidium and E. coli (not NSF-approved). Made of schedule 40 PVC, withstands over 75 psi. Up to 25,000 gallons at 2 gpm. 3/4" hose bib. PSA25 PSAB25 PureStart PureStart Bio $ 129.95 144.95
PSAB25
PSA25
MetalTrap
Now you can protect your system from unsightly stains and equipment damage commonly associated with metals such as iron, copper, magnesium and manganese. MetalTrap is a water filtration unit that selectively filters out stain-causing metals found in recirculating and replenishment water. Just attach to a garden hose, flush and fill. Typical flowrate is 57 gpm. Made of schedule 40 PVC, withstands over 75 psi. 3/4" hose bib. MT25 $ 108.85
Dual Sweetwater blowers working at a fish farm in Central America.
Media Filters
These filters are very easy to service (media not included). They can be banked in series to repeatedly treat the water or parallel to treat higher volumes. Inlet size is 11/4" slip. Outlet size is 1" slip. VF9 VF7 VF6 172014 14" H x 7" W x 4" D 24" H x 7" W x 4" D 37" H x 7" W x 4" D Retention Plug
Dimensions Media Capacity
.5 lb 1 lb 1.5 lbs
$ 62.85 72.90 105.25 3.50
VF9
A large capacity cartridge made from a hard plastic screen that will hold carbon, zeolite or other material over 1/8" in diameter.
Media Filter, Compact

This chemical filter is constructed of heavy, clear PVC and is an ideal chemical/media filter for small recirculating systems, aquariums, hatcheries and small ponds. The filter includes 7.5 lbs of premium activated carbon and a reusable nylon mesh bag. Although carbon is included, the filter can be used with zeolite or other media. Maximum flowrate is 20 gpm, maximum pressure is 16 psi. Filter includes both 3/4" and 1" inlet/outlet hose adapters and a drain valve with garden hose threads. Dimensions: 11" dia. x 11" H. Weighs 15.5 lbs. Made in USA. J320 $ 177
Nursery tanks with protective screening in use at an aquaculture facility.
Important
256
Chemical Filtration
Calcium Reactors/Jetstream
Professional Calcium Reactors

Calcium reactors provide invertebrates in marine systems with a constant supply of calcium hydrogen carbonate, which plays a critical role in seawater buffering and coral growth. Made in Germany, the Schuran calcium reactors are considered to be the most advanced and efficient in the market today. A water pump (included) circulates water within a reactor that is filled with calcium media and saturated with carbon dioxide. The carbon dioxide creates an acidic environment that dissolves the coral media into calcium hydrogen carbonate.
SC2456
Jetstream Series
The Jetstream Series of calcium reactors sets a new standard of functionality and effi ciency. The gas/water separator offers the optimum use of carbon dioxide: not a single bubble of gas can leave the reactor unused. The residual gases are also dissolved, accelerating turbulence within the reaction chamber. This highly efficient reactor makes it possible to dissolve coral media with equal amounts of carbon dioxide; i.e., one kg coral sand with one kg CO2!
t s t r ea m Th e Je s provide Series able u n b e a t c e! an per form

Calcium media before (left) and after (right) use of 2 kg CO2 .
Jetstream Pico
Suitable for aquariums up to 158 gallons (600 liters). The reaction chamber holds .8 liters of calcium media (not included) and has a max output of 60 mL/min. Includes bubble counter and pump. Measures 5" L x 6" W x 16" H, weighs 6 lbs. Two-year limited warranty. SC2452 $ 575.00
Commercial Calcium Reactors

These large, professional calcium reactors are so efficient that they utilize 100% of the carbon dioxide injected into them. Carbon dioxide enters through a unique injection system and is repeatedly recirculated through the reaction chamber until it is used up. The CR series produces up to 105 gph of water with calcium hydrogen carbonate (inlet water 6KH, outlet water 2829KH). Reactors include 115V/60 Hz pumps and bubble counters. Media and optional pH controller (see Index) sold separately. All units are 55" high. Ship via motor freight. Two-year limited warranty.
Dia. LxW Media Capacity (Liters) Outlet Flowrate Tank Capacity (Gallons) Ship Wt (Lbs)
Jetstream 1
Suitable for systems up to 800 gallons (3,000 liters). Vertically mounted on an ABS board. Reaction chamber holds 2.5 liters of coral sand (not included) and has a max output of 120 mL/min. Includes bubble counter and 115V/60 Hz pump. Measures 13" L x 6" W x 24" H. Weighs 14 lbs. Two-year limited warranty. SC2453 $ 810.00
Jetstream 2
Suitable for systems from 800 to 2,500 gallons (3,000 to 9,400 liters). Reaction chamber holds 7.5 liters of coral sand (not included). Includes bubble counter and 115V/60 Hz pump mounted on board. Measures 18" L x 8" W x 36" H. Weighs 20 lbs. Two-year limited warranty. SC2454 $ 1,230
Jetstream Pico
SC2455 10" 24" x 24" SC2456 15.7" 30" x 30" SC2457 19.6" 34" x 34"
40 100 160
26 gph 2,6005,200 225 50 gph 5,20018,000 250 105 gph 13,00026,000 280
$ 4,875 5,009 6,770
Calcium Reactor Media

Specially made for calcium reactors, ReBorn dissolves completelyit will not break down and clog your system. Also a safe, natural way to stabilize pH and increase calcium in reef aquariums. Made of fossilized coral harvested from the Western Pacific Ocean, ReBorn replenishes calcium, carbonate alkalinity, strontium and trace elements. Allows unrestricted water flow and easy diffusion of carbon dioxide due to its porous nature. TLRB8 TLRB44 8.8 lbs 44 lbs $ 31.35 111.35
Jetstream 1
Jetstream 2
Chemical Filtration
Tech Talk
257
Tech Talk 128

Biological Filters: Pros and Cons of Different Types
In aquariums and fish farms biological filtration is required to prevent the build up of toxic ammonia excreted by the animals. Ammonia can be lethal to some species in concentrations less than .5 mg/L. It's well known that certain bacteria can oxidize ammonia first to nitrite and finally to nitrate under the proper conditions (called nitrification, where each compound gets converted to something less toxic). Setting up these ideal conditions is the main focus of biological filtration design. In simplest terms, all that is needed for biological filtration is an appropriate material (substrate) for the nitrifying bacteria to grow on. Creative people have used everything from hair curlers to lava rock to plastic army men for homemade biofilters. The real science of biofilter design is optimizing the process to get the biggest usable surface area for bacterial growth in the smallest possible space (footprint). Other considerations are choice of substrate, oxygen utilization, biofouling and flowrates. There are two general classes of biofilters: moving beds and static beds. The static bed is the traditional "trickle filter" where water is sprayed over a bed of stationary substrate. Moving bed filters have the media suspended in the water column inside a container, and the media is kept in constant motion by air, water or a combination of both. The pros and cons of both types: Resistance to biofouling. Moving media is constantly bumping into itself, a natural "scouring" action that causes the older, thicker biofilms to slough off. This sloughing also removes the older bacteria, which get rid of ammonia and nitrite slower than younger bacteria. So you don't have to clean the media, which could stress or kill the bacteria, and the biofilter runs at higher efficiency. Flowrates. Moving bed filters can typically handle higher flowrates than similarly sized static biofilters.
Cons
Capital cost. Being more complex, moving bed filters are usually more expensive, but this cost must be weighed against the added efficiency of the filter. Oxygen depletion. Since they are so efficient and contain higher densities of bacteria, moving bed filters tend to use more oxygen and generate more CO 2, which can require additional gas balancing in the water after it passes through the biofilter. Filter crash potential. Because of the higher oxygen use in moving bed filters, they can become rapidly oxygen starved or go anaerobic should the air pump fail for more than a few hours. Substrate selection is very important in biofilters. To get the most bacteria in the smallest volume, the surface area to volume ratio of the media needs to be optimized. Smaller particles have more surface area for their volume than larger particles and will support more bacteria in a given container. In addition to size, surface profile of the media is a consideration. Bacteria stick more easily to rough media with lots of nooks and crannies than smooth media, but only to a point. Some media manufacturers make claims of huge surface areas on their media by giving it many openings and lots of internal structure. However, once this type of media is covered and filled with bacteria, much of this internal structure can be plugged up by the mucus that the bacteria make and therefore lost as usable surface area.
Static Bed Filters

Pros
Cost. Static bed filters can be made out of lengths of pipe, garbage cans, buckets or almost anything to hold the media. Gas exchange. Typically, static bed filters use media with a lot of empty space for oxygen and carbon dioxide (CO2) exchange. While the empty space reduces the surface area available for bacterial growth, it does promote gas exchange for CO2 and supersaturated gas stripping. Simplicity of design. There's really not much to break or go wrong with a filter that can be as simple as a Rubbermaid garbage can filled with lava rock.
Cons
Optimization. The empty spaces in static bed filters that are great for gas exchange give them less than ideal usable surface area. Also, spraying water randomly over the media typically leaves some of the surface area dry (the water evaporates) and therefore unused. Biofouling. Because the media doesn't move, layers of bacteria (biofilms) will tend to build up on the media. These can result in lost usable surface area. If pockets of anaerobic bacterial activity form in the thicker biofilms where oxygen exchange is low, you'll have to clean the media occasionally, which can stress or even kill the bacteria in the filter.
Common Biofilters
Static Bed
Most static bed filters are variations of the packed column (trickle filter)simply an open container filled with biomedia, bio balls or barrels, lava rock, crushed shell or corrugated media (Brentwood). Water enters at the top and drips down over the media. Plenty of gas exchange but relatively low available surface area to volume ratio (SA/V) for its size (30150 ft2/ft3).
Moving Bed
Fluidized bed sand filter. An up-flow filter that fluidizes a bed of silica sand, keeping it suspended. Extremely high SA/V ratio (1,500 ft2/ft3). The largest amount of nitrification in the smallest package. Also the biggest oxygen user. Unlike static bed filters, can be pressurized. Bead filter. A hybrid mechanical/biological filter. Bed is not constantly moving but can be backwashed like a sand filter to scour media. Can also be pressurized. Good SA/V ratio (400 ft2/ft3). Low Space Bioreactor. Intermediate SA/V ratio (260 ft2/ft3) between the static bed and fluidized sand filters. Air is introduced into the media bed, preventing the low oxygen conditions common in fluidized bed filters. The aeration also strips CO2 from the treated water, which is a real innovation in biological filtration. Unlike in a fluidized bed sand filter, the bioreactor's aeration will keep the filter from crashing if the pump fails.
Flowrates. Trickle filters are named that for a reason. If water goes into a static bed filter at too high of a speed, the bacteria can actually be blown right off the media.
Moving Bed Filters

Pros
Optimization. Moving bed filters tend to use smaller media (to keep it in motion) with better surface area to volume ratios. Since the media is submerged, all available surface area can be colonizeda much more compact footprint than for static bed filters.
Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: .877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401
258
Chemical/Biological Filtration
Nitrate Filter/CO2 Regulators/Grating
Nitrate Filter
Removes nitrates in tanks up to 800 gallons!
Nitrate accumulates in saltwater systems from the bacterial breakdown of ammonia and nitrite. High nitrate levels in reef systems not only cause excessive algae growth, but also inhibit the growth of stony corals and many other delicate animals. In place of frequent significant water changes, you can use the Nitratfilter. The Nitratfilter reduces the level of nitrate in saltwater systems by using denitrifying bacteria, which grow on media in a chamber. The reaction chamber holds 1.5 liters of media and is designed to use sulphur balls or Siporax ceramic media. Sulphur balls serve as both a substrate and a nutrient for bacteria. When using Siporax, the bacteria must be fed regularly with diluted alcohol (1% or less). The Schuran Nitratfilter is capable of reducing 30 mg/L of nitrate to 5 mg/L in an 800-gallon tank. The filter includes an Eheim 1250 pump that is 115V/60 Hz. Suitable for aquariums between 80 and 800 gallons in size, measures 4" L x 10" W x 18" H. Two-year limited warranty. SC245 BF820 SC246

Undergravel Filters
Considered to be the most efficient undergravel filter designed, these multilevel plate filters are excellent for both freshwater and saltwater aquariums. Each filter includes adjustable uplift tubes, diffusers and water flow spouts. 372005
372005 Size Ship Wt
Schuran Nitratfilter Siporax, 1 liter Sulphur Balls, 1.5 liters
Ship Wt
12 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 750.00 31.95 40.80
Each
27.80/4+
372005 373002 373606 374801 383001 383605 384800 386002 387207 414804 417201 SA1507 SA1518 16005
20" x 11" 30" x 11" 36" x 11" 48" x 11" 30" x 18" 36" x 18" 48" x 18" 60" x 18" 72" x 18" 48" x 24" 72" x 24" Flow Spout Filter Cap 36" x 3/16" Rigid Tube
2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 5 lbs 6 lbs 7 lbs 8 lbs 8 lbs 9 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 13.00 19.29 24.38 26.95 31.25 36.25 46.75 48.95 52.80 47.90 65.15 .90 .40 2.75
Support Grating, 11/4" Thick

Floor grating. Filter shelves. Screen filters. Greenhouse benchtops.
This grating will support 1,000 lbs if supported every 12". The 2" x 2" grid pattern is molded of polypropylene for superior strength and a long service life. Its nonskid walking surface makes it ideal for foottraffic and safe for employees. It works great for supporting biofilter media. Easy to install. Self-guiding connections join panels together. Panels are 24" x 24", 11/4" thick and weigh 3.3 lbs each. Made in USA. ACG2
SC245 w/BF820 SC245 w/SC246
$ 16.65
14.15/12+
CO2 Pressure Regulator
TF
Designed to connect to CO2 bottles, this regulator can be used for plant tank carbon dioxide injection, reef tank calcium reactors, hydroponics, etc. All chrome-plated, features an industrial grade precision needle valve that can release as few as 6 bubbles per minute and a 115V solenoid valve. Outlet is 1/4" compression. Use our tubing TP30HD from the outlet to the diffuser. Compatible with most US and Canadian bottles and our CO 2 bottle (AZ19010). Use beverage or medical grade gas sold locally.

24 "
24"
AZ19009 AZ19010
Pressure Regulator CO2 Bottle, 2 lbs (empty)
Ship Wt
2 lbs 3 lbs
$ 64.00 59.00
Each
Grating, 1/2" Thick

This food-grade polypropylene is molded to support filters, false tank bottoms or media. It can be used as benchtops in greenhouses, where it will hold 200 lbs if supported every 18 in. It is very easy to clean and disinfect. Each plate measures 36" L x 18" W x 1/2" H and is composed of 1" x 1" grid squares. Durable, lightweight and very resistant to sagging. Interlocking assembly is convenient for connecting grates together. Grates are UV resistant. Each piece weighs 2 lbs. Ships Oversize. SPG1 $ 17.26 14.66/12+
AZ19999
CO2 Regulator w/Bubble Counter

Dual gauges show psi and kg/cm2. The left gauge measures tank capacity and the right gauge indicates flow. Package includes a flow regulator, needle valve, electric solenoid and bubble counter. Needle valve control allows precise measurement. Solenoid valve has 5-ft power cord. CO 2 bottle not included. Ship weight 2 lbs. One-year warranty. PR957 $ 113
18"
36"
Biological Filtration
Trickle Filters/Aquarium
259
Baitfish Biofilter
Inlet
Economy Pre-Filter Boxes

These inexpensive overflow assemblies are designed to siphon water from an aquarium to a trickle filter. Each siphon box comes with an internal pre-filter, a clear siphon tube and an external downflow box. Outlet fits standard 11/4" I.D. wet-dry hose. 625000C has two outlets. 675128C 625000C 692347 962 gph 2,200 gph Repl. Pre-Filter
Tank Size
Bait shop owners who handle live minnows, shiners, shrimp and crabs can deal with water quality issues in one of two ways. Either exchange bad water for good (sometimes impractical or expensive) or install a biofilter to greatly reduce the water exchange rate. This is why Captain Mark's Bait Tank Biofilter was developed. Only 12" square by 24" high, it contains over 250 ft2 of Bio-Fill media for bacteria to colonize. It is plumbed for easy cleaning of the pre-filter and easy adjustment of the water Outlet level. A 1" barbed fitting at the top and bottom handles a maximum 10 gpm. At 8 gpm @ 68F (20C) with acclimated bacteria, the BTF2 will support 15 lbs of minnows with only 20% per day water exchange. If you don't already have a water pump, we recommend our MD7 submersible pump. Weight when full of water is approx. 160 lbs. Cover included. Ship weight 16 lbs. BTF2 MD7 Bait Biofilter Submersible Pump $ 247.00 78.50
Each
675128C
75 250
Ship Wt
4 lbs 5 lbs 1 lb
$ 49.00 82.00 5.25
680153
73.79/6+
Wet/Dry Accessories
680139 Siphon "U" Tube 680146 Directional Return 680153 Hose, 11/4" I.D. x 36" $ 7.75 8.50 12.50
680146
Wet/Dry Trickle Filters

Designed for aquariums and small recirculating systems, these trickle filters can provide mechanical, chemical and biofiltration for both fresh and saltwater systems. Made of cast acrylic, they can be used with either submersible or external pumps. Large sump provides ample room for protein skimmers, heaters and media. Drip plate and vented lid will not warp. Filters include 11/2" Bio-Spheres and 11/4" I.D. x 36" hose for each inlet. Pre-filters, micron bags and pumps sold separately. Ship Oversize. 712762 781263 792016 793013 692002
Tank Size (gal) Inlets
680139
Surface Skimmer, Small

791767
75 1 20" x 8" x 18" 125 1 20" x 10" x 18" 200 2 27" x 12" x 18" 300 2 35" x 12" x 18" Replacement Foam Block
Dimensions
Flowrate (gph)
300 450 900 1,200
Ship Wt (lbs)
12 13 18 20
$ 123.00 152.00 235.00 250.00 13.00
This unique skimmer removes organic film from the surface of the water and helps improve gas exchange. It can be connected to power filters and small pumps, features a 360 floating intake and includes flexible hose and suction cup mounting brackets. Weighs 12 oz. 1138 $ 8.80
Sump
$ 59 Was 1
ProFlex Wet/Dry Trickle Filters

ProFlex filters are manufactured using extremely durable materials, and include a lifetime warranty against leaks. As water enters the ProFlex, it flows through a bubble diffuser chamber where bubbles are expelled, significantly reducing noise. After water flows through the bubble chamber, it flows through two 200-micron filter socks to remove large particulates. Great for use in freshwater and fish-only saltwater applications to provide advanced biological filtration for a heavy fish load. Can also be used as refugiums and Berlin skimmers. PROFLEX1 PROFLEX2 PROFLEX3 PROFLEX4 MOD1BIO MOD2BIO MOD3BIO MOD4BIO 197/8" x 97/8" x 171/4" 297/8" x 97/8" x 187/8" 251/2" x 133/4" x 17" 36" x 133/4" x 187/8" Bio Media Pack for PROFLEX1 Bio Media Pack for PROFLEX2 Bio Media Pack for PROFLEX3 Bio Media Pack for PROFLEX4
Size
Made of 1/4" thick acrylic, this sump has two large $ top openings for easy access. It also features three baffles for bubble control and a rack to hold chemical media and/or polishing filter. Sump has two 1" filter inlets. Bag filter not included. Rated up to 150 gal. 24" L x 14" W x 16" H. AS415 $ 99
n oW
99
Refugium
W Take advantage of this tank's slow-flow design n oW to use it as a refugium, a predator-free area $ ideal for growing plants. The plants can remove phosphates and nitrates from the water and then be harvested to feed fish. This 1/4" thick acrylic sump maintains at least 9" of water height, allowing all types of macroalgae to be grown. 5" wide return area fits most submersible aquarium pumps. Single 1" drain. Rated up to 100 gal. 24" L x 14" W x 15" H. AS38 $ 99
$ as 159
99
$ 220.00 288.35 311.65 380.00 43.99 58.39 63.99 67.99
Filter Foam, Reticulated

Also a great biofilter media!
This 1" thick foam is true "fish grade," long-life, reticulated foam with a pore size of 20 ppi (pores per inch). It contains no fire retardants or germicides (be careful with low-cost air filter foam, as it can be toxic). Sold in 2' x 6' sheets (rolled) only (equals 1 cu.ft.). Ship weight 5 lbs. Large quantities can be shipped flat. Made in USA. PF7 $ 48.00 45.62/6+
MOD1BIO PROFLEX1
260
Sponge Filters/Media/Corner Filter
Sponge Filter, Extra Large

This extra large sponge filter works as a biological filter and clarifies water through solids capture. A nice filter for small ponds, water gardens and fish holding tanks. The reticulated sponge is 9" x 9" x 9" and is easily cleaned or replaced without tools. The 20" tall PVC chimney is sealed at the bottom and can be shortened if needed. Requires .25 cfm of air to operate and 1 lb of weight to submerge it (pour a cup of sand or gravel down the chimney). Includes 20' of 1/4" I.D. tubing and a Sweetwater AS3 air diffuser. FP3 Sponge Filter $ 55.25 FP3F Repl. Sponge 42.70
Each
Sponge Filters
HydroSponge filters are perfect for aquarium and small tank filtration. They are capable of moving more water than other sponge filters, are self-weighting and act as mechanical and biological filters. Simply attach to aquarium air line tubing, supply .05 cfm and filtering begins. For higher filtration rates, a powerhead pump may be attached in place of air power. Stacking doubles filtering capacity. Easy to clean. 1" diameter tube. Overall height may be shortened by cutting tube. HF1 HF3 HF5 HF1R HF3R HF5R 10 gallons 80 gallons 125 gallons Sponge Refill/HF1 Sponge Refill/HF3 Sponge Refill/HF5
Approximate Tank Size Sponge Diameter
37.96
6+
33/4" 41/2" 53/4" 33/4" 41/2" 53/4"
9" 111/2" 111/2"
OAH
$ 7.30 10.15 10.85 2.15 3.10 4.55
Each
6.57 9.14 9.77
6+
Matala Filtration Media

This filtration media is expensive, but definitely worth it for some applications! Made of flexible fiber compounds, it is used in many applications in the aquaculture and koi pond markets. It is excellent for removing solid wastes and, unlike other filter padding, totally resists compression! The solid fibers are very resistant to sludge build-up and clogging, making cleaning easy. It also features a lot of surface area, so it is very good for biological filtration. Great for low-pressure, gravity-fed filters and skimmers, Matala is positively buoyant and may require anchoring in submersed applications. Sold in 391/2" x 24" x 11/2" sheets only. Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate. FM97 FM96 FM98 FM99 Black Green Blue Gray
Surface Area (sq.ft/cu.ft.)
HF5
62 96 124 170
Fiber Dia. (mm)
1.65 .81 .56 .51
$ 30.00 32.00 33.00 38.00
Each
27.60 29.44 30.36 34.96
5+
Sponge Filters, Vertical

The vertical design of these sponge filters provides a high amount of surface area for mechanical and biofiltration. Unlike in other sponge filters, the internal tube is slotted for uniform filtration and has a diffuser inside to lift the water. Inlets are 3/16", measure 8" tall and require approximately .05 cfm air for operation. SF01 SF02 SF03 Round Square Triangular $ 4.55 4.25 4.25
Each
SF02
FM96 (Medium Density)
FM97 (Low Density)
FM98 (High Density)
FM99 (Super High Density)
4.00 3.74 3.74
12+
SF01
SF03
Important
Economy Corner Filters

These inexpensive filters can be used for hospital tanks, breeding tanks or smaller holding tanks. The internal baskets can be filled with any type of media, including carbon, zeolite or filter floss. The Triple Flow corner filters have 3 intake vents and an internal diffuser (included) for higher efficiency. Both filter styles have a 3/16" inlet tube and require .05 cfm to operate. Filter Floss is 100% polyester filter media. 13402 13445 13410 13415 PLY14 PLY10 Economy Corner Filter Triple Flow, 45 gallons Triple Flow, 75 gallons Triple Flow, 100 gallons Filter Floss, 14 oz Filter Floss, 10 lbs 3" L x 3" W x 3.5" H 3" L x 2.75" W x 5" H 3.5" L x 3.5" W x 4.5" H 4" L x 4" W x 4.5" H
Dimensions
Tech Talk 29
Sponge Filters
Air-powered sponge filters operate on the airlift principle to induce flow, so the taller the chimney, or lift pipe, the greater the vacuum and the flow of water. Sponge filters do an excellent job of capturing solids. Unfortunately, a lot of these collected solids drain out of the sponge when it is lifted out of the water for cleaning. An easy way to avoid this is to use a sponge-sized plastic bag or bucket. Gently place the sponge in it while under water, then remove the entire package. Squeeze out the fouling material, but do not clean too thoroughly because that will eliminate too much of the good, nitrifying bacteria.
$ 2.97 4.90 6.00 7.48 7.25 65.00
13402
13410
PLY10
Media/Tech Talk
261
Biofilter Media Bags

You will appreciate media bags after you have to clean or relocate your biofilter! Just pour loose biofilter media into the bag and tie it off. When it is time to clean, lift them all out at once. Large bag has drawstring and measures 35" L x 23" W when flat. Small bag measures 18" x 2". Both are 1/4" mesh nylon. Made in USA. BF165 BF167 ft3 1 ft3
1/4
Biofilm Carrier Elements

These patented biofilm carrier elements are real Kaldnes K1 media. They are ideal for moving bed biofilter applications. With a surface area of 259 ft2/ft3, this polyethylene biomedia is positively buoyant. In nitrifying applications, use a blower to continuously circulate the elements, while simultaneously oxygenating the water and stripping the CO2. The self-cleaning action allows for the exfoliation of the older, less active bacterial layer and eliminates the need for backwashing. The elements are 7 mm (5/16") long, 10 mm (7/16") in diameter and natural in color. Sold by the cubic foot. Ship weight is 10 lbs/cu.ft. BF150 $ 52.00 48.23/5+
$ 3.76 10.05
Each
3.39 9.05
10+
BF165
Biomedia
TF
This biomedia is a premium choice for your moving bed biofilters. Made of black polyethylene, it's perfect for use in nitrifying biofilters where a dark environment is preferredparticularly for Nitrobacter. Slightly buoyant and fluidizes well in a shorter time than similar products. Specific surface area is approximately 540 m2/m3 (165 ft2/ft3). In a moving bed reactor, the media is self-cleaning, never needing backwashing. 12 mm Dia. x 12 mm L. Sold by the cubic foot. Ship weight 12 lbs. BBC500 $ 41.67
Kaldnes Biochip
The Biochip is much more than just a different shaped media. In addition to having a total protected surface area more than 2.4 times that of Kaldnes K1, the protected area in Biochip is a great environment for micro animals, not just bacteria. Micro animals feed on small particles such as fish waste, dead bacteria and algae. There are many different types of these micro animals, and they produce high levels of filtration. For example, Vortecilia filter 10,000 times their own volume per hour and feed on particles up to 5 microns in size. A hydrophilic layer in the Biochip creates extremely quiet zones in which micro animals can flourish, whereas other types of media would flush them out. Add to existing K1 moving bed at a ratio of one part Biochip to four parts K1. KALDCHIP $ 129
Bio Chem Stars

Bio Chem Stars are made from a porous polymer with a patented process that forms a very fine 5070 micron internal pore network. Bacteria grow within the star, colonizing the entire structure. One Bio Chem Star has 33 times more bacteria growing area than the leading plastic ball. The stars can be used to float on the water surface in external power filters, creating a wet/dry filter effect. Stars are 1" long and 1" in diameter. Packed 20 stars per box. B10520 $ 10.60/Box 8.95/4+
Tech Talk 95
Biofilter Sizing
Biofilters consist of surface-providing media for attachment of microorganisms that remove wastes from the water. The media can be commercial products like Bio Barrels, Bio Balls, Bio Strata, Bio-Fill, Biofilm Carrier Elements and Siporax among others. Sand, rock, shells and other natural material can be used as biofilter media. The relative amount of usable surface area (square feet surface area/cubic foot of media) and their weight are important. In aquaculture, biofilters are used to convert ammonia to nitrite, and ultimately nitrate, through an oxidation process called nitrification. The bacteria attach to the media surfaces where they use ammonia and nitrite as energy sources and carbon dioxide as a carbon source. These bacteria are aerobic, requiring oxygen for the conversion process. The biofilter sizing process can be roughly summarized as follows: 1. Determine the maximum expected ammonia loading rate and the allowable total ammonia-nitrogen (TAN) concentration. Ammonia loading is a function of feed loading, protein content and digestion efficiency. The TAN limit is primarily a function of culture water pH and fish tolerance for un-ionized ammonia (see Tech Talk 47). High water replacement rates dilute culture water ammonia while impacting pH and other water quality parameters. Mass balance analysis is essential for determining the biofilter load, if any, for these partial recirculating and flow-through systems. 2. Select the best kind of biofilter for the application. Many types of biofilters have been used in aquaculture, including rotating biological contactors (RBCs), trickling filters, submerged filters, fluidized beds, bead filters and low-space bioreactors (LSBs). One may be better than another for a given application. 3. Calibrate the biofilter standard nitrification rate to the field water quality conditions. These conditions include hydraulic loading rate, TAN concentration, oxygen availability and temperature. Poor solid waste pre-filtration will reduce biofilter performance and require a larger biofilter. 4. Calculate the biofilter size based on the biofilter surface area, projected field nitrification rate and the maximum expected ammonia load. Biofilter surface area requirements can range from 3 to 30 square feet per lb of fish depending on the biofilter type and the factors described above. For this reason, we recommend that the AES/B Numbers (lbs of fish supported, Tech Talk 106) as well as the feed and TAN limits listed in this catalog be used for comparison purposes only and not for biofilter sizing.
262
Media
Bio Strata
Black PVC sheets glued in a block form 12" x 12" x 48" long (longer when ordered in 96+ ft3 quantities). It is negatively buoyant and preferred where loose media is not acceptable. Low in cost and well suited for submerged and trickling biofilters as well as degassing applications. Choose 68 or 110 ft2/ft3 and 8- or 10-mil PVC thickness. Made in USA. See prices below.

Siporax Bio-Fill
A PVC ribbon with a high surface area, Bio-Fill is our lowest cost media. It is negatively buoyant and very easy to clean. Gross, fouling heterotrophs can be rinsed off with a little squeezing. Sold in 1 ft3 bags (BF250) and 12 ft3 (BF250B) boxes only. Made in USA. A high-performance, fine-pore biofilter media with unbelievably high surface area (82,000 ft2/ft3) and the ability to perform both nitrification and denitrification under certain conditions. Siporax works best with well-filtered, clear water (otherwise heterotrophic bacteria will cover the surface). Conveniently packaged in one-liter mesh bags. Made in Germany.
edia Great M ar e for Cl r e Wat ns! tio p Ap lica
Bio Barrels
A polypropylene media available in five sizes. Remember the importance of void space with both heterotrophic fouling and degassing applications. The 1"2" barrels are natural in color, the 31/2" are black. Positive in buoyancy. Made in USA.
Bio-Spheres
A compact polyethylene media. Select either 98 ft2 (CBB15) or 160 ft2 (CBB1) of surface area per ft3. Round shape with positive buoyancy. These balls, with their small void spaces, are popular for clean water applications like tropical fish aquariums. Add an "-F" for floating or "-S" for sinking.
7/16" BF820 Siporax 82,000/4,100* BF250 Bio-Fill 250 Ribbon CBB15 Bio-Sphere, 11/2" 98 11/2" CBB1 Bio-Sphere, 1" 160 1" BF64A Bio Barrel, 1" 64 1" BF44A Bio Barrel, 11/2" 44 11/2" BF33A Bio Barrel, 2" 33 2" LS110A Bio Strata, 8 mil 110 4' Length LS688A Bio Strata, 8 mil 68 4' Length *We've used 1/20 of actual surface area for this comparison.
Surface Area (ft2/ft3)
Size
1 lb/liter 4 lbs/ft3 12 lbs/ft3 12 lbs/ft3 6 lbs/ft3 5 lbs/ft3 4 lbs/ft3 5 lbs/ft3 4 lbs/ft3
Ship Wt
Min Order
1 liter 1 ft3 1 ft3 1 ft3 1 ft3 1 ft3 1 ft3 4 ft3 4 ft3
$ 31.95/liter 49.00/ft3 42.55/ft3 57.68/ft3 43.85/ft3 33.90/ft3 22.25/ft3 41.46/ft3 19.53/ft3
27.80/4+ 42.63/4+ 36.40/4+ 51.91/4+ 39.47/4+ 30.51/4+ 20.03/4+ 39.39/12+ 18.56/12+
These items are sold in large quantities for commercial purposes; most ship motor freight. Note the minimum order quantities.
BF250B BF64 BF44 BF33 BF26 LS110 LS688 LS68 Bio-Fill Bio Barrel, 1" Bio Barrel, 11/2" Bio Barrel, 2" Bio Barrel, 31/2" Bio Strata, 8 mil Bio Strata, 8 mil Bio Strata, 10 mil 250 64 44 33 26 110 68 68 Ribbon 1" 11/2" 2" 31/2" Any Length Any Length Any Length 35 lbs/12 ft3 6 lbs/ft3 5 lbs/ft3 4 lbs/ft3 4 lbs/ft3 5 lbs/ft3 4 lbs/ft3 5 lbs/ft3 12 ft3 box 20 ft3 30 ft3 40 ft3 50 ft3 96 ft3 96 ft3 96 ft3 367.00/box 37.70/ft3 (20+) 28.80/ft3 (30+) 18.50/ft3 (40+) 15.60/ft3 (50+) 22.96/ft3 (96+) 13.10/ft3 (96+) 13.68/ft3 (96+)
Fluidized Bed Biofilters
263
Fluidized Bed Biofilters by QuikSand

US and foreign patents.
Fluidized bed biofilters are simple, extremely compact, self-cleaning, quiet and easy to use. Water is pumped up through a bed of sand, "fluidizing" the sand media and providing excellent water/media contact. Fluidized bed biofilters virtually eliminate the need for internal void space, allowing them to pack a lot of surface area into a small space. QuikSand biofilters will create very little back pressure (never more than 6 psi), allowing the use of low pressure pumps and even powerheads. UV sterilizers can easily be added after pressurized QuikSand filters. QuikSand offers all sizes, from a small aquarium size to a 75-gallon per minute (gpm) commercial unit. All units are made in the USA and come with a one-year warranty against defects. Pressurized models are pressure rated to 40 psi. We have very conservatively rated the QuikSand biofilters at .8 grams of ammonia removed per lb of media per day.
QuikSand Media Size Requirements

It is very important to use the correct size sand and gravel in a fluidized bed biofilter. Order our premixed gravel and sand (FB80) or use 25% gravel, 75% sand by weight. Gravel should be 1/4" to 1/2" quartz or equivalent. Sand must be washed #40 screen.
FB91, FB92, FB93
These high-grade filters are self-supporting, as they are mounted to a solid PVC plate. The FB91 has a clear chamber. The FB92 and FB93 have opaque chambers with clear viewing ports. These models are pressurized, come with threaded ports for mounting oxygen and temperature probes, if desired. Media is not included, see FB80 below.
FB89
FB89
This model is designed for ammonia removal where low cost and low maintenance are important. Nonpressurized, so its water return must be able to gravity-flow back to the sump, tank or pond. This is the most economical filter you can buy. Media is not included in price, see FB80 below.
Flowrate (Gpm 20%) Dia. x H Ports (FNPT) In/Out
FB91
Note: A check valve must be used between the pump and filter any time the filter inlet is higher than the pump outlet.
3/4" FB91 Clear 10 6" x 70" 25 FB92 Opaque 15 8" x 80" 1" 50 FB93-2 Opaque 45 12" x 80" 11/2" 100 FB89 Opaque 75 24" x 50" 2" 200 FB80 Filter Media 40 *Uses #40 screen sand (ships in three boxes). **AES/B number is a conservative amount of fish (lbs) supported. See Tech Talk 106.
Required Media (Lbs) AES/B**
65 127 260 515
Capacity Feed (per Day)
1.25 lbs 2.5 lbs 5 lbs 10 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 650.00 890.24 1,118.00 448.35 35.78
Each
Fluidized Biofilters by QuikSand

These small, see-through, fluidized bed filters have more biological surface area than conventional biofilters many times their size. The FBK2 kit includes a pump (submersible or nonsubmersible), 10' of 1/2" tubing, valve and plumbing to hook up easily to FB82 and FB83 (order separately). Always use a valve on the outlet to control flowrate and bed expansion levels. Price includes media. Ships Ground. One-year warranty. Media Specifications 25% gravel, 75% sand by weight. Gravel is 1/4"1/2" quartz or equivalent, 40 screen sand.
FB82 FBK2
Tech Talk 112

Fluidized Sand Biofilters
The purpose of a biological filter is to convert ammonia to nitrate. Fish excrete ammonia in proportion to the amount of food they eat. In the AES catalog, you will see a "Feed per Day" rating based on a 40% protein content, 10% moisture content feed, with typical digestibility. Fluidized bed biofilters using sand media are extremely compact and very inexpensive compared to other biofilters because the media is sand. Water flows upward through the sand causing the sand grains to float or "fluidize." When the water flow is too low to fluidize the bed it is called a "collapsed bed." When the proper amount of water is flowing, the sand expands upward, a condition referred to as an "expanded bed." If too much water is flowing, the bed will over expand and the smaller grains will be carried out of the biofilter in the outflow water. There are three important aspects of fluidized sand biofilters. The first is the water inflow diffuser at the bottom. The diffuser creates a uniform, lowturbulence sand flow pattern. Excessive turbulence can erode the biofilter vessel and scour nitrifying bacteria from the sand grains. The second aspect is water flow velocity. A narrow water flow range must be maintained to keep the sand properly fluidized. Flow variations caused by pre-filters can result in collapsed or "blown-out" sand beds. The third aspect is refluidization. At start-up, a little extra pump pressure and an effective water diffuser design are required for initial fluidization.
FB82 FB83 FBK2 FM05
1.7 2.5" x 23" 1" 3 lbs 6 3.0 3" x 36" 1" 5 lbs 11 Hose and Pump Kit Sand Media (5 lbs)
Flowrate Ports Ship (Gpm) Dimensions (FIPT) Included Wt 20% (Dia. x H) In/Out Media AES/B (Lbs)
8 15 5 5
$ 153.40 199.68 99.36 14.71
Each
264
Low-Space Bioreactor/Kaldnes Media

Invented Here TF
Low-Space Bioreactor by Clearwater

Fully automatic, self-adjusting and continuously self-cleaning.
There are many types of biofilters used in aquaculture, including trickling, submerged, rotating biological contactors (RBCs) and fluidized beds. AES has introduced the revolutionary Clearwater Low-Space Bioreactor (LSB). While other biofilters manage an average of 3 kilograms of feed per cubic meter of biofilter volume per day, the lowspace bioreactor manages as much as 12 kilograms of feed per cubic meter. That is 440 grams of total ammonia-nitrogen (TAN) per cubic meter of media per day. Our smallest LSB will handle a standing stock of fish up to 119 lbs. This is a robust, nonpressurized biofilter that is much less sensitive to flow rate variations and power interruptions than fluidized bed sand biofilters. When operated in low-head recirculating systems, it can easily be sunk into the floor to reduce the pump pressure. When installed this way, only a few inches of head loss will occur across the LSB. Because air is used to circulate the media, the LSB both adds oxygen and strips carbon dioxide! A hood can be placed over the bioreactor to vent the CO2 outdoors. We have colored them blue/green to prevent algae growth inside and provide the dark environment preferred by the Nitrobacter bacteria. Air diffuser depth can be adjusted for compatibility with your blower/compressor. LSBs are complete with media. Compressed air connections are 1/2" slip. Air pump not included. All you need are male-threaded pipe connections. We can also custom build larger sizes.
Packs a huge amount of usable surface area into a small volume.
LSB25 and Phets, a 22-year employee.
Media with no flow. Tank Vol (Gal)
Media with water flow. DxH (Inches) Media Max. (Ft3)
Media in bioreactor. Flowrate (Gpm) Req'd Air Flow (Cfm)
In/Out (Inches) AES/B* Feed (Lbs/day) Ship Wt (Lbs)
LSB2.5 35 18 x 33 2.5 39 1 LSB3 40 18 x 36 3 310 1 LSB5 70 23 x 43 5 720 1.5 LSB7 94 21.5 x 62 7 1030 2 LSB8 105 31 x 37 8 1030 2 LSB12 170 31 x 57 12 1750 3 LSB25 323 47 x 50 25 2590 4.5 LSB35-2 480 47 x 71 35 40200 4.5 *AES/B Number is a conservative amount of fish (lbs) supported. See Tech Talk 106.
1.25 1.25 2 3 3 3 4 6
119 142 236 339 376 579 1173 1730
1.53 24 36 49 510 715 1530 2045
40 55 140 170 175 280 380 535
$ 503.49 565.38 901.25 1,134.00 1,194.90 1,683.00 2,769.00 4,297.00
Biofilm Carrier Elements

AKA biofilter media.
These patented biofilm carrier elements are made by Kaldnes. They are ideal for moving bed biofilter applications. With an unbelievable surface area of 259 ft2/ft3, this polyethylene biomedia is positively buoyant and self-cleaning. In nitrifying applications, use a blower to continuously circulate the elements, while simultaneously oxygenating the water and stripping the CO2. The self-cleaning action allows for the exfoliation of the older, less-active bacterial layer and eliminates the need for backwashing. The elements are 7 mm (5/16") long and 10 mm (7/16") in diameter. Sold by the cubic foot. Ship weight is 10 lbs/cu.ft. BF150 $ 52.00 48.23/5+
Fluidized Bed Biofilter/Tech Talk
265
CycloBio Fluidized Bed Biofilter

The CycloBio is a fluidized bed biofilter that dramatically improves upon the traditional pipe and lateral approach to fluidized bed designs. By eliminating the need for an internal piping systemand all the associated head loss and electrical costsit provides all of the benefits of a fluidized bed biofilter with lower operation and maintenance costs. The internal design eliminates the small pipe orifices that can lead to vessel scouring and are prone to back-siphoning on shutdown. No internal piping means no header system, ladders, walkways or other parts to install and maintain. Can be operated at various hydraulic loading rates. Best for cool to cold water (<60F). Call for technical specifications and pricing.
Optional Outlet Box
CycloBio, LHO and Radial Flow Settler installed in recirculating system.
Tech Talk 125

Biological Filtration Basics
Biological filtration is one of the most important aspects of filtration design for aquatic animal welfare. There are actually 3 distinct processes that fall under the heading of biological filtration: mineralization, nitrification and denitrification. Nitrification is typically the most commonly discussed and widely known facet of biological filtration and is undoubtedly the most critical since it deals with the breakdown of strongly toxic animal wastes, but all aspects of biological filtration are important and must be considered when designing a functional life support system for aquatic habitats. Mineralization is a fancy word for decomposition, where complex organic material is degraded by bacteria into its simplest parts. In aquariums and aquaculture, this organic material is typically derived from fecal material and uneaten food from the animals. Heterotrophic bacteria digest this material, preventing it from building up to unsafe levels in displays or farms. The end products of mineralization are mostly inorganic nitrogen and phosphorus. Mineralization is not the only source of nitrogen in aquatic systems. The direct production of ammonia as a waste product from fish (urine) also contributes to the nitrogen load in aquatic systems. Ammonia nitrogen can be toxic to aquatic life (some species will die at levels as low as .5 mg/L). This is why nitrification is so critical. It's important to understand that it is the un-ionized form of ammonia, NH 3 , that is so toxic. By dropping the pH of a tank, it's possible to convert toxic ammonia, NH 3 , to NH4+, ammonium, a much less toxic compound. This is easier to do in freshwater systems with pH near or below neutral than it is in marine systems with pH in the 8 to 8.2 range. It's important to realize that pH manipulations are just a "band aid" fix for ammonia management, and a well designed biofilter is still essential. Several strains of bacteria can use the ammonia nitrogen for food. Nitrosomonas, Nitrosococcus, and Nitrobacter are the best-known organisms responsible for this process. Ammonia is the most toxic end product of mineralization and fish metabolism. Nitrosomonas and Nitrosococcus convert the ammonia (NH3) to a less toxic compound, nitrite (NO2). While less toxic than the ammonia, nitrite can still be lethal to fish in very small amounts (in the 15 mg/L range). Finally, Nitrobacter converts the nitrite to nitrate, the least toxic form of nitrogen. Each of these forms of nitrogenNH 3 , NO2 and NO3is progressively less toxic to the animals. The final end product, NO3 , is well tolerated by fish but, unless managed, will tend to build up. This brings us to the last biological filtration process, denitrification, where bacteria remove nitrate from the system water. While nitrate is not strongly toxic, animals don't live with elevated nitrate levels in nature, so keeping nitrate levels low is important in reproducing natural conditions for aquatic life. Historically this was done with periodic water changes in closed systems, but more recently this practice has been frowned upon by local municipalities wanting to limit the discharge of excess nitrogen into natural waterways and sanitary sewer systems. Instead of water changes, there are two primary methods for denitrification, the carbon fed digester and the sulfur bed digester. Some strains of bacteria known as facultative anaerobes can use the oxygen in the nitrate (NO 3) for energy, converting NO3 into atmospheric nitrogen (N2). The carbon digesters require the addition of an organic carbon source to feed the bacteria, typically a short chain alcohol (methanol or ethanol) or a simple sugar. This method has the drawback of having to measure the addition of the carbon compound. Over- or under-dosing can upset the balance of the process or, worse yet, carry unreacted alcohol back to the tank. The sulfur-based method relies on the activity of several bacteria strains that consume sulfur and nitrate without adding other chemicals. Thiobacillis denitrificans and other similar bacteria can use the oxygen in nitrate for energy. The trend in the industry is the sulfur bed digester because of its simplicity. The NO3 to N2 reaction (called "reduction") consumes alkalinity, so the sulfur is typically mixed with crushed oyster shell or aragonite (a source of carbonate for buffering) to keep the pH stable. Monitoring D.O. is especially important since the environment inside the filter should be oxygen-poor, but not oxygen-free. If too much oxygen is present, the bacteria will respire aerobically (with oxygen) and no nitrate reduction will occur, but if too little oxygen is present, the filter can go anaerobic (without oxygen) and produce toxic hydrogen sulfide.
266
Specialty Filtration
Degassing Columns/Tech Talk
High-End Counter-Flow Degassing Columns

Get high levels of stripping efficiency in a small footprint. Designed and manufactured to ASTM standards, these units are ready for a wide variety of environments and applications. Come complete with distribution plate and nozzles and large void space packing media. Standard options include covers, blowers with integrated mounting plates, demisters, and cone bottom for capture of settleable solids (e.g., sand and bio-flock) with support skirt. Call for technical specifications and pricing.
Optional Blower With Support
CO2 Stripping Columns, Freshwater Institute.
Optional Cone
Optional Skirt With Access Port
Tech Talk 33
Removing Carbon Dioxide
Did you know that for every 1 lb of oxygen consumed by fish they exhale 1.38 lbs of carbon dioxide? Carbon dioxide does cause problems in recirculating systems without aeration or degassing. This can be the case, for example, where pure oxygen is used in place of aeration. Carbon dioxide must be removed, or it can build up to dangerous levelsdangerous to the fish and to humans if the fish are raised in a closed building. Here are some numbers to keep in mind. Oxygen is about 20.9% of the air and, because it is only slightly soluble in water, it becomes saturated at a level of about 9 ppm at 68F (20C). Carbon dioxide is .033% of the air and is saturated in water at about .5 ppm (the ratio is higher because it is more soluble than oxygen). The comparative concentration of these two gases in blood is similar to that of water. Therefore, a lot of carbon dioxide in the water means there will also be a lot of carbon dioxide in the blood of the fish. An excess of 5 ppm carbon dioxide in the water will affect the ability of the fish to breathe. If intensive aquaculture operations are being conducted outdoors, a splash aerator or aeration with air diffusers will drive the carbon dioxide into the air. If the operations are in a closed building, very high levels of carbon dioxide can accumulate in the air (we've seen levels exceeding 4,000 ppm in the air in closed aquaculture facilities!). It then has to be removed from the building. Air ventilators can also remove a lot of heat along with the carbon dioxide. We suggest that carbon dioxide be stripped with a degassing column that is ventilated to the outdoors. Outdoor air can be drawn directly into the bottom of the degassing tower, forced up through the downflowing liquid, then directed back outdoors separate from the inlet. In cold weather, there will be a significant cooling effect on the water because it is being degassed through cold, dry air. A simple air-to-air heat exchanger will help.
Degassing in a tilapia facility in Central America.
Important
Degassing/Spray Nozzles
267
Degasser by Shearwater, to 150 gpm

The Shearwater degasser is rugged, roto-molded using high-density polyethylene and is designed for stacking (note that when stacking units, only one lid is necessary). Removes carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and other volatile gases from the water while adding oxygen.
Invented Here
Degassing Columns
Nitrogen gas can kill fish at only 3% above saturation!
Degassing columns are used for removing nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide, carbon dioxide or other gases from water. They also add oxygen to undersaturated water. In most areas, well water (ground water) is low in oxygen and too high in nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide. In recirculating aquaculture, where pure oxygen is used, carbon dioxide levels can rise to noxious or toxic levels. Degassing columns are the best way to strip out undesirable gases. The hydraulic design and high surface area of these units make them very suitable for "tricking biofilters" for ammonia removal. Our unique segmented packed columns are the result of extensive research and development by the Canadian government. They are simple, economical and will last for many years. Each segment is made of heavy-duty, UV-resistant polyethylene for outdoor use. They are engineered to produce the ideal flow pattern to prevent wall channelization while exchanging air at each segment. Install just the number of segments to give the water quality needed. Each segment can receive as much as 150 gpm with excellent aeration and gas stripping results. Each segment (16" D x 18" H) has a molded bracket that fits onto an optional hanger. The 6' H x 4" W hanger is a fiberglass I-beam, predrilled for 4 segments (bolts included). Snap the segments onto the hanger and either hang it from the ceiling, attach it to the tank wall, or to a post, so the water goes in the top and exits directly into the tank. Each segment should be filled with .6 cubic feet of biomedia (sold separately, see Index). We recommend BF44A.

Setup is simple: Attach the water input lines using flexible couplings. Three 2" water inlets (provided) will handle up to 50 gpm each. Vinyl dryer hose connects the air blower (4" outlet, 3" inlet), which provides required airflow for up to 150 gpm (minimum of 5:1 ratio of air to water). One blower may be used with one degasser at 150 gpm, or with three degassers if the water flowrates are 50 gpm each. Sold with 4 SS mounting eyes. Each unit requires 4 cubic feet of Bio Barrel media (BF44A). We suggest placing the media in three mesh bags (BF167) to simplify maintenance. An optional, 17" long stainless steel hanger (DGB17) and cables facilitate hanging from above. Overall height of unit is 38". Estimated max weight in operation is 8090 lbs. Our DGBlower (not included) is a high-quality, marine-duty unit with a pipe-fitting inlet and outlet (4" hose), that can be mounted virtually anywhere. 115V/60 Hz, 173 watts. Note: The Shearwater degasser has been designed for typical clean water aquacultural conditions. When using in unusual casessystems with high levels of alkalinity, heterotrophic and green water applications, etc.you may want to oversize the system by adding an appropriate safety factor. Call AES if you have questions. DG4 DG41 DGB17 DGBlower BF44A

AB12 AB12A
Packed Column Segment Optional Hanger
Ship Wt
5 lbs 15 lbs
$ 54.29 150.00
Each
48.83/6+
Degasser w/Lid Degasser w/o Lid 17" Hanger Blower Bio Barrel Media (per ft3)
Ship Wt
$ 325.00 275.00 90.00 348.00 33.90
Spray Nozzles, High Flow

These high-flow, low-pressure nozzles distribute water uniformly and are clogresistant. They are used in cooling towers, trickle biofilters, spray aeration and foam knockdown. Unlike the CES15 and CES2, the LHD2 spray pattern is "open cone," meaning most of the water is thrown to the outside of the pattern. Add one of the following letters to the part number to indicate orifice size: A = 3/4", B =7/8", C =1", D=11/8", E=11/4", F=11/2". See below for thread size.

CES2 CES15 LHD2
Cone Pattern
Square Round Square
2" MNPT 11/2" MNPT 11/2" MNPT
Inlet
$ 16.05 5.75 4.55
% Oxygen
Inlet Water Outlet Water After 1 Segment
CES15 LHD2 CES2
% Nitrogen
110 106 104 103 102 101
57 76 84 89 92 94
Outlet Water After 2 Segments Outlet Water After 3 Segments
Orifice Diameter (in.) Head Pressure (ft water) 1 CES15 (gpm) CES2 (gpm) LHD2 (gpm)
7 8
3/4
7/8
1 6 1 6
11/8 1 6
11/4 1 6
11/2 1 6
Outlet Water After 4 Segments Outlet Water After 5 Segments
17 10 25 13 33 17 42 22 52 18 12 28 16 38 23 52 26 58 37 93
10 23 12 27 15 35 19 46 24 58 35 86
% refers to % of saturation. Nitrogen varies with season, so we suggest designing for the worst case. As low as 103% nitrogen can kill fish. AB12 results are from a formal study conducted by the Canadian government.
268
Protein Skimmers/Tech Talk
Power Filters, Skilter

With a built-in protein skimmer!
This power filter provides chemical, mechanical and biological filtration and features a built-in protein skimmer to remove organics. The large filter housing allows ample room for additional media. BioMatrix filter pads are included. Powered by low wattage 115V/60-Hz powerheads, 260 gph on the S250 and 400 gph on the S400. 90-day warranty. S250 S400 FP8

Protein Skimmers, SeaClone

Superior to air-driven protein skimmers, the SeaClone features an exclusive Turbo-Venturi injector system that swirls water and air in a tornado-like motion. This motion dramatically improves skimming efficiency and gas exchange, rapidly removing organic wastes. The new snap fittings make it easy to clean and a new air injector provides accurate adjustments. Can be used in a sump or as a hang-on skimmer. Each skimmer includes a powerful Maxi-Jet pump. 115V/60 Hz. Weighs 3 lbs. 18353 18354 Up to 100 gallons (18" H x 31/2" Dia.) Up to 150 gallons (25" H x 31/2" Dia.) $ 99 116
18353
Filter, 250 gph Filter, 400 gph BioMatrix Pads (8)
$ 65.80 77.69 7.62
Each
6.86
4+
EV Series Protein Skimmers

S400 fms4
Foam Separator
The cost to operate this foam separator is only a small amount of air (mount directly in the fish tank or sump), so water pumping is not required. A small ozone generator (not included), used in combination with a foam separator, will further increase the removal efficiency. 1/4" I.D. air inlet requires .4 cfm @ 1.5 psi. We recommend one, operated continuously, for every 500 lbs of fish. Ship weight 3 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA.

The AquaC protein skimmers employ a patented "spray injection system" that draws in much more air than any other on the market. The more air, the more work that gets done. This injection system is coupled with a compact mixing box that has an internal baffling systemincreasing contact time and removing more waste from the water. The skimmers are designed to run in sumps without being raised, and the output valve is at a height of 9" (EV120 EV180 models), which means that as long as the sump level is 9" or lower it will eliminate water level fluctuation effects on skimming. EV240 EV2000 can sit in water as deep as 10". The "Twist-Lock" collection cup and cap creates a secure, quick-release connection. Skimmers are very quiet and include precision airflow valves. All skimmers come with a JG Guest fitting for ozone or to bleed off excess CO2 from a calcium reactor. Units also have outlet gate valves (EV120/180 have 1" valves, EV240/400/1000/2000 include 11/2" valves). Pump is not included. EV120 EV180 EV240 EV400 EV1000 EV2000
Hose Inlet
3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
FMS4
Foam Separator, 4"
Length
20"
Min Water Depth
16"
$ 48
1" 1"
40150 8.5" x 5" x 18" 5 gpm 60200 9" x 6" x 20" 7 gpm 80350 11" x 7" x 26" 12 gpm 100450 11" x 7" x 32" 16 gpm 3001,000 12" x 9" x 32" 24 gpm 5002,000 12" x 9" x 42" 34 gpm
Tank Size (Gal)
Dimensions L x W x H
Flow @ 2 psi
MD5 MD7 MD12 PM26 PM27 PM28
Sugg. Pump
Ship Wt
$ 324 374 429 512 699 839
Tech Talk 72
Protein Skimmer/Foam Fractionator
Ammonia, feces and carbon dioxide are not the only waste products in a recirculating fish system. There are also complex organic substances from decomposing feed, urea, fish slime and metabolic by-products. Added to that are algae, phenols and saprophytic bacteria that irritate the fish's gills, affect growth rate and increase disease susceptibility. These dissolved and suspended materials make up the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), color, odor, taste, turbidity, etc., that a foam fractionator can remove. Foam fractionation (also referred to as protein skimming and protein fractionation) works best in salt water where foam production is easier, but it can be done and is becoming more popular in freshwater systems (call for details). The process uses air bubbles from a fine bubble diffuser or venturi to create the foam. The foam adsorbs and entraps the above pollutants, along with the surface active compounds that make foam production possible, all of which are then expelled through a discharge tube or into a holding chamber. The use of ozone can enhance this process. It will also aid in the control of bacteria, protozoa and viruses. In general, a protein skimmer should be sized to give a time of residence between thirty seconds and two minutes in the contact chamber. Longer periods are needed to remove smaller particles. In general, the higher the pH and salt level, the better they work. We offer no guarantee on these and they are not returnable because we have no control over your water's ability to produce foam. Learn a lot more from the book Recirculating Aquaculture ( WQB109, see Index).
EV240 EV400
EV180
EV120
Protein Fractionators
269
Commercial Protein Fractionators by RK2 Systems

All RK2 fractionators are built of high-quality, long-lasting, salt water- and ozonecompatible materials. They feature dedicated venturi pumps, ozone-resistant Kynar injectors, washdown sprayers with electronic interval timers, EPDM flange gaskets, level control valves and unions or flanges at all ports. Motors available with any electrical configuration. AC models have clear bodies. PE models have high-density polyethylene (HDPE) bodies. All have clear, acrylic reaction chambers. Ozone systems (with air dryers and oxygen generators) are sold separately. Ships motor freight, FOB factory. Crating charge is included in price. One-year limited warranty. Made in USA.
RK2 ozone systems are optional.
5PE , C, R K 2 A 0 1 K R E RK75P H F PE & RK75 ar e
ck In sto
Pump on the right is the culture water pump and is not included in price.
RK75PE with optional ozone.
RK1000PE
RK2 skimmer in fish holding system.
3-Phase Equipment
Recommended Ozone
The flowrates shown are the rates at which culture water can move through a foam fractionator with a two-minute residence, or dwell time.
Flow at 2-Min Dwell
RK10AC IN STOCK 10 gpm 1.15 83" RK25PE IN STOCK 25 gpm 1.5 78" RK50PE 40 gpm 1.5 82" RK75PE IN STOCK 70 gpm 4.45 99" RK75HFPE IN STOCK 105 gpm 6.3 99" RK150PE 155 gpm 8.2 107" RK150HFPE 210 gpm 8.2 107" RK300PE 290 gpm 6.0 110" RK300HFPE 375 gpm 5.6, 3-Phase 110" RK600PE 600 gpm 6.0 (x2) 148" RK1000PE 1,000 gpm 6.0 (x4) 144" RK2000PE 2,000 gpm 5.6, 3-Phase (x4) 168" *Minimum clearance. Additional clearance for servicing is highly recommended. **Dryer not included.
Amps @ 230V/60 Hz Height* Diameter Base Dimensions Ship Wt
10" 14" 20" 24" 24" 36" 36" 48" 48" 60" 84" 84"
14" x 36" 14" x 32" 20" x 48" 33" x 48" 33" x 48" 42" x 66" 42" x 66" 48" x 72" 48" x 72" 60" x 84" 84" x 108" 84" x 108"
154 lbs 150 lbs 240 lbs 260 lbs 270 lbs 450lbs 450 lbs 440 lbs 450 lbs 650 lbs 1,700 lbs 2,000 lbs
$ 3,128.33 3,848.33 6,177.00 6,978.00 7,913.00 8,948.00 10,384.00 11,085.00 12,304.00 20,785.00 34,625.00 48,348.00
RK200MG RK200MG 6009 6009 6014** 6014** 6018 6018 6018 RK8G
$ 454.00 454.00 3,839.00 3,839.00 4,359.00 4,359.00 5,922.00 5,922.00 5,922.00 6,865.00 Call Call
270
Ozone/Venturi Injectors/Tech Talk
Ozone Generators
These compact, corona discharge ozone generators provide dependable, lowmaintenance operation. Cabinets are made of extruded aluminum with molded plastic end caps and are wall-mountable. Electrodes are rated for 15,000 hours of operation at over 80% capacity. Power supplies are rated to operate for the life of the generator under normal conditions. Generators may be operated in a vacuum or with positive pressure. When using O2 as feed gas, you can expect approximately twice the concentration than with air as feed gas. Air compressor not included. All models require .25 cfm feed gas (air or oxygen). 1/4" hose inlet and outlet. UL-listed, CE-approved. 115V/ 60 Hz. One-year warranty. Accessory packages include 20' of tubing, ozone-safe check valve and flowmeter. EC116 EC216 EC416 90150E 90210E
Avg O 3 Conc. (Ppm) O 3 Output (Grams/hr) Amps @ 115V Dimensions (W x H x D) Ship Wt (Lbs)
Venturi Injectors
Widely used for the injection of air, oxygen, and ozone. Also compatible with liquids. Tests have shown that when installed properly, injectors can transfer ozone into water with efficiencies as high as 99%. These are constructed of PVDF Kynar and are ozone compatible. Mazzei venturis have no moving parts and provide trouble-free operation. All except V514 include a 1/4" barbed ozone-safe check valve. Maximum operating pressure at 100F (38C) is 400 psi. Made in USA.
V1584 Venturis offer an efficient and reliable way to inject virtually any gas or liquid into water.
450 .25 .06 7.8" x 8" x 2.5" 700 .5 .12 7.8" x 14" x 2.5" 1,350 1 .24 7.8" x 24" x 2.5" Accessory Package w/o Mazzei Injector Accessory Package w/Mazzei Injector
11 14 20
$ 350 530 810 35 138
V384 V584 V584-2 V978 1" MNPT V1584 11/2" MNPT V514 2" MNPT
Inlet/Outlet
1/2" MNPT 3/4" Barb 3/4" MNPT
Approx Flow @ 15 psi in/5 psi out
1 gpm 4 gpm 4 gpm 7 gpm 31 gpm 57 gpm
Air Suction (cfh) @ 15 psi in/5 psi out
1 5 5 9 72 394
Each
$ 67 54 56 125 170 370
61 49 51 112 153 348
4+
Turbo-Venturi Injectors
These inexpensive venturis are ideal for small protein skimmers, koi ponds, etc. They are ozone resistant and made of ABS plastic. FNPT inlets and MNPT outlets. V12 V34
1/2" 3/4"
Injector Injector
$ 20.30 22.25
V3 4
FLOW
Tech Talk 72
Ozone Sizing: Know Your Goal
In sizing an ozone system the most important design factor is getting the correct ozone dose for your specific application. Ozone is used mainly to achieve two different goals: sterilization/oxidation and microflocculation. Maximizing mass transfer (getting the ozone from the gas phase into the water) is of primary importance for both. The most efficient method of dissolving ozone (or any gas) is achieved by using a venturi educator, a device that passively pulls in ozone under a vacuum using the physical (motive) force of the water flowing in a pipe. The water enters the venturi where the velocity rapidly increases due to a cone-shaped restriction in the venturi throat. This increase in velocity causes a low pressure area to form at the point of maximum restriction (see diagram below), generating suction that pulls the ozone into the water stream. The venturi then rapidly expands in diameter, slowing the water down instantaneously, causing the water and gas to crash into each other at very high velocity and driving the gas into solution. The higher the pressure in the venturi and downstream piping, the more gas can be driven into solution. Air diffusers and pressurized injectors are also sometimes used but have lower transfer efficiencies. The real advantage in using a venturi from a safety standpoint is that with positive pressure ozone delivery systems (where the ozone is pumped into the system under pressure) a leak in the delivery hoses or piping can let ozone leak into the environment. With a properly sized venturi, if a leak occurs under vacuum, surrounding (ambient) air will be drawn into the delivery tubing, so there's no chance of affecting nearby people with ozone. Ozone has long been known to be a very efficient oxidant. In typical aquarium/ aquaculture applications ozone can greatly reduce total organic carbon (TOC) levels by direct oxidation of the organics or indirect oxidation by other powerful oxidants that naturally occurs when ozone reacts with water (free radical oxidation). Applied ozone doses for oxidation and disinfection are similar and fall witin .1 to 1.0 mg/L. Another rule of thumb for ozone sizing for oxidation is based on food loading. An ozone dose of 1520 grams of ozone per kg of food fed is recommended by Doctors Timmons and Ebling for aquaculture systems. The other use of ozone not nearly as well known in aquatic systems is as a microflocculent. When dosed at rates roughly 1/10 of the oxidation dose (.01.1 mg/L), ozone can act as a flocculent, causing very small particulates that normally pass through mechanical filters to clump into larger particles that mechanical filters can capture. The ozone does this by causing electrical charges on the surface of the particles so that they become attracted to each other like microscopic magnets. This type of ozone dose is typically used in foam fractionators (protein skimmers), so the flocculated particulates are carried out of the system water in the foam column.
Suction
Water Flow
Tech Talk/Ozone/Desiccan
271
Tech Talk 71
Ozone Notes
AES has offered ozone generators to the aquaculture industry for over 15 years. Slow to catch on, ozonization is gaining in popularity for the following reasons:

Types of Ozone Generators

Ultraviolet lights with a specific ozone-generating wavelength are generally used to produce low levels of ozone. The slower the gas moves through the UV-reaction vessel, the higher the percent of ozone. The corona discharge (CD) type uses an electric arc similar to sparks or lightning to produce higher percentages of ozone by weight. A small CD reaction vessel can produce a relatively large volume of ozone. The greater the percentage of ozone, the faster the oxidizing reactions take place.
It is highly effective in removing organics, pesticides, color and nitrates. It reverts back to oxygen quickly. Unlike chlorine, there are no detrimental residuals (except in salt water). It is produced on site, with no electricity near the water. It is economical and nonpolluting, when used correctly. It can be used as a sterilizer before, during and after water is used for aquaculture. Ozonization improves biological filtration and particulate filtration. It can remove the biological oxygen demand in the water. It oxidizes long chain molecules, which biofiltration cannot do. zone is very unstable. It will revert back to oxygen within 24 hours, even if O there are no organics in the water for it to oxidize. emperature, pressure and shear cause it to revert back to oxygen. When T ozone (O 3) molecules collide, they recombine as oxygen (O 2), so it is virtually impossible to get ozone to the tank above 10% (by weight). When under pressure or traveling a long distance in the tubing, it can revert considerably. se dry air or oxygen to produce ozone. Humidity can reduce ozone U production by 70%, form scale in the corona discharge (CD) reactor and produce nitric acid. o ensure sterile (germ free) water, there is nothing better than ozone. For T sterilization, pre-filter to 5 microns and maintain ozone levels above 600 mV for a minimum of 8 minutes. SHA says that it is harmful to breathe ozone above .1 ppm in the air (most O people can smell ozone above .05 ppm). Vent gas outdoors or into an ozone destruction device, such a UV light or activated charcoal. Downflow bubble contactors such as cones and saturators are recommended so the gas cannot escape. High levels of ozone may cause a single species biofilter to develop, due to the ozone oxidizing the nitrite. This is not bad unless something goes wrong with the ozone system, causing nitrite to spike!
Where to Use It
Ozone can be used in a protein skimmer (foam fractionation device), where it helps the process, while the vessel allows capture of the off gas for venting or ozone destruction. Ozone works very well in oxygen saturators for the same reasons. We do not recommend its use in lakes or ponds, unless the water is pre-filtered and treated in a reaction vessel. Just bubbling it into the water is not effective.
Basic Ozone Information
How Much to Use

In a small home aquarium, .1 mg/L may be used (300400 mV). A sterilizing system for drinking water may need 1 mg/L+ with a 10-minute contact time. In recirculating aquaculture, with high BOD and COD loads, the ozone requirement can be more than 20 mg/L. The dosage is impossible to determine because aquaculture conditions are always changing. Therefore, we recommend either the use of a side stream, where the water is treated as much as possible with ozone before it is mixed back into the main water body, or the use of a redox controller, which will automatically adjust to the changing conditions.
How to Handle It
Ozone is a very strong oxidizer and must be handled with special materials. The best is stainless steel for tubing, valves and other components (certain Sweetwater air diffusers are made for use with ozone). The second best material is pure Teflon, then Kynar , CPVC and HDLPE, in that order. Be careful using vinyl air tubing, as the ozone will leach out the potentially toxic plasticizer (it will look like oil on the inside of the tubing).
Safety
A whiff of low concentration ozone will not kill you. If you smell ozone in the air in your building, turn off the ozone generator and vent the air space. Note that OSHA requires an ambient ozone monitor on any generator that produces over 5 g/hr.
How It Works
Ozone is generated by passing air or oxygen through a reaction vessel, where either an electric arc, CD or an ultraviolet (UV) lamp "excites" the oxygen. In this reaction, oxygen molecules separate into atoms of oxygen, which then temporarily recombine with each other to form ozone. When ozone oxidizes organics only one atom of oxygen is used, leaving one molecule of oxygen.
Ozone System Design Service

Due to the complex nature of custom ozone system design, please call the Waterlife Design Group at 407-472-0525 for engineering services.
Ozone Test Kit

Ozone in water will destroy viruses and bacteria, oxidize most organics and remove color, leaving water crystal clear. Once the water is clear, high levels of residual ozone need to be removed before the water reaches your fish. Remove ozone from water by aeration, UV light, activated carbon or just give it time to revert back to oxygen. Fresh water only. Test time 2 min. Range .011.0 mg/L. LM3526 LM3526RP Kit Reagent $ 109.15 16.10
Desiccant
When stored, desiccant media should be placed in an airtight container. It changes color from blue to pink when regeneration is due. To recharge, simply place desiccant on a baking sheet and heat at 350F (176C) for approximately 20 minutes. Replace after 25 rechargings.

Air Dryer
These dryers offer a low-cost alternative for ozone experiments and applications with very low flowrates. The desiccant (included) changes color from blue to pink when regeneration is due. Both ends have 1/2" NPT with 1/4" barb adapters. Made in USA.

DR2 DR3
11/4 lbs 51/2 lbs
$ 15.00 38.30
Each
13.50 34.47
4+
Before
After
OZD2 OZD3
2" x 12" 3" x 24"
Overall Length
17" 32"
Volume
38 in3 170 in3
Ship Wt
5 lbs 14 lbs
$ 62.25 118.00
OZD2
272
Ozone
Mini Ozone Generator

Our smallest unit, this corona discharge ozone generator is great for aquariums up to 100 gallons. It should be used with an ozone reactor or protein skimmer. Air pump required, but not included (.05 to .1 cfm @ 1.5 psi). Use ozone test kits to monitor residual levels or use an ORP meter. Weighs 1 lb. One-year warranty. OZ30 $ 88.15
Best Bu y
Ozone Generator
Specifications:

Ozone production w/oxygen: 6.0 g/hr. Ozone production w/air: 1.5 g/hr. Feed gas flow: 10 cfh.
The O1 Series corona discharge ozone generator is extremely compact and lightweight. It has a unique "dual reaction" reactor cell that incorporates a patented floating plate technology in a titanium and ceramic reaction cell. The O1 is ideal for any small job that requires dependable ozone production. Features include variable control 0100%, LED visual ozone indicator and a 020 cfh feed gas flow meter. The unit measures 11" x 9" x 6" and is 115V, 50/ 60 Hz (add an "H" after part number for 230V/50 or 60 Hz). Unit draws 180 watts, maximum pressure 5 psi. One-year warranty. Unit weighs 12 lbs, ships from factory. 0120 $ 2,085.94
Ozone Generators
The complete solution to effective and safe aquarium ozonization.
Ideal for quarantine systems, aquariums and smaller recirculating systems, these ozone generators are compact and easy to use. Utilizes high frequency corona discharge technology to generate concentrated ozone. Features include variable output controls, UL 1018 listing and no regular maintenance. OZ10C and OZ20C have a built-in ORP controller that automatically controls the flow of ozone according to a preset ORP level. Easy to read digital backlit display shows current ORP levels (ORP probe not included). Can be used with either an air pump or venturi injector. Inlet/Outlet is 1/4" barb fitting (use only ozone-compatible tubing on outlet side, see Index). 115VAC adapter included. Weighs 2 lbs. One-year warranty. OZ10 OZ20 OZ10C OZ20C OC648 Generator, 100 mg/hr Generator, 200 mg/hr Generator w/Controller, 100 mg/hr Generator w/Controller, 200 mg/hr ORP Probe $ 280.00 340.00 419.00 514.00 116.00
Technician Profile
Darryl E. Jory
Darryl received his Ph.D. in marine biology and living aquatic resources from the University of Miami. He has 28 years of experience in aquaculture, agriculture and environmental business development and management, R&D and teaching in the US, Latin America, Europe, SE Asia and Africa. He is Adjunct Professor of Aquaculture at the Rosenstiel Graduate School of Marine and Atmospheric Science at UM and is certified as a Professional Animal Scientist (PAS).
OZ10
OZ10C
Ozone Tubing
This ozone-resistant Norprene tubing will not crack or harden and is much more flexible than Kynar tubing and Teflon . It is 3/16" I.D., 3/8" O.D. TN8 TN25 TN50 8' Coil 25' Roll 50' Roll $ 14.44 34.30 63.27
High-Frequency Ozone Generators

These quiet-running ozone generators are reliable and UL-rated. They have a nonmetallic enclosure with cabinet filter, silent 25 kHz inverter and precise linear turn down to 1%. Gives you full local control, or operate remotely via interlock or 4-20 mA signal. All models are 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz, with 1/4" inlet and outlet connections, supply pressure range of 5100 psi. Other features include: Plasma block technology. High feed gas dew point protection. Feed gas flow and pressure switches. HMI display. Inverter high temperature switch. OWS10 OWS20 OWS30 4.2 scfh, 10 g/hr @ 5% 8.5 scfh, 20 g/hr @ 5% 15 scfh, 30 g/hr @ 5% $ 3,870 4,075 4,250
TN8
Teflon Tubing
Ozone resistance is the reason most people select Teflon tubing. It is a flexible thermoplastic, highly resistant to oxidizing agents. A nearly complete resistance to alcohols, acids, bases and chlorinated solvents makes it excellent for the delivery of ozone. It remains flexible at extreme temperatures and is nontoxic. We recommend using brass or stainless steel fittings with this tubing. Sold by the foot and by full 50' rolls. Add an "R" to the end of the part number for full roll lengths. Made in USA. 8069 8135
1/4" I.D. 1/2" I.D.
OWS10
$ 3.30 15.75
Each
131.62 718.00
Roll
8069
Tech Talk
273
Tech Talk 96
Ultraviolet (UV) Sterilizers
In order to protect aquatic livestock held in aquariums or holding tanks, biologically treated water should be adequately disinfected before returning it from the filter system. Mechanical and biological filtration does not provide inactivation of pathogenic bacteria, protozoa and viruses. Ultraviolet radiation (germicidal) energy is unmatched in its efficiency, simplicity and dependability when applied as a microorganism disinfectant! It is most effective for its germicidal value in a clear water application at a wavelength of 265 nanometers. With proper exposure, ultraviolet radiation energy (ultraviolet light) penetrates a microorganism's cell wall. It then destroys the nuclear material, causing abrupt modification and quickly bringing about its destruction. At AES we hear from a lot of people who have ultraviolet (UV) sterilizers and are still experiencing disease problems. That is because the disease is living on the fish and all of the tank, pipe, biofilter and net surfaces. It can almost always be traced back to inadequate UV irradiation. Because it is so difficult to measure the intensity of UV energy hitting the water, many buyers have improperly sized their UV sterilizers by simply following the maximum gpm flowrate published by the UV manufacturer for 15,000 Ws/cm2 * (who said aquaculture was easy?). This is the problem! You cannot compare UV sterilizers by the watt ratings alone. That would be like comparing cars by their engine size alone. The watt rating is just the starting point for comparisons. The full amount of UV energy required to kill a microorganism must hit the organism after the energy leaves the lamp, after it leaves the quartz sleeve, after the lamp has aged and after it has passed by any turbidity and color that block light. Low-pressure mercury type UV lamps are best suited to germicidal action because the primary radiation generated by these lamps consists almost exclusively of a spectral wavelength of 254 nanometers, which is close to the maximum peak germicidal effectiveness wavelength of 265 nanometers. This gives the low-pressure mercury type lamps an exceptional 40% UV energy efficiency rate between input watts and UV output watts. UV-A lamps produce some amount of ozone and UV-C lamps do not. Medium- and high-pressure mercury-type lamps are best suited for treatments involving chemical byproducts associated with industrial waste water or for the drying of printing inks, paints and adhesives, not germicidal action. The bulk of their power is in the 320440 nm range, well outside the germicidal range. Ultraviolet light can be very effective at eliminating viruses, bacteria, algae and fungi. The required UV exposure rate to irradiate common bacteria is 15,000 Ws/cm2, while the required UV exposure for waterborne algae is 22,000 Ws/cm2. Since it is the intensity of light that is doing the killing, we must know how much light energy to use and how much is reaching the target. Just as some sunglasses and sunscreens reduce UV intensity, so do discolored water, turbidity, dirty quartz sleeves and even some dissolved salts, such as sodium thiosulfate. Lamp temperatures may even reduce output when operated in cold water (110F gives maximum UV output). To ensure sterile water using UV light, first start with clear water, and have a lamp and flowrate that are sized to deliver the correct amount of irradiation for the target organism (see exposures list). If a UV light is flow-rated for 15,000 Ws/cm2 and you want 30,000, either double the number of lamps or reduce the flow by half, and so on for higher dosages. Be aware that some lamps age rapidly, and the manufacturer probably states the watts produced when the lamp is new. This wattage can be reduced by as much as 40% in as few as six months! We suggest oversizing the UV sterilizer by at least 40% to be sure of getting the killing power required when the lamp has aged. We also suggest changing lamps at six-month intervals. For a more in-depth look at UV sterilization and system design, consult the books Aquaculture Engineering and Aquatic Systems Engineering (see Index).
*Ws/cm2 = exposure to ultraviolet light of 253.7 nm wavelength in microwattseconds per square centimeter.
Exposures Needed to Kill 99.999% of Microorganisms

Microorganism Aspergillus niger (mold) Bacillus subtilis (spores) Chlorella vulgaris (algae) Clostridium tetani Dysentery bacilli E. coli (coliforms) Fungi Icthyophthirius sp. (ich), tomite Influenza (virus) Mycobacterium tuberculosis Nematode eggs Paramecium (protozoa) Penicillium digitatum (mold) Pseudomonas aerugenosa Saccharomyces sp. (yeast) Salmonella sp. Salmonella typhimurium (ave) Saprolegnia sp. (egg fungus), zoospore Sarcina lutea Shigella paradysenteriae Staphylococcus aureus Streptococcus lactis Tobacco mosaic (virus) Trichodina nigra Trichodina sp. Yeast cells (brewer's) Ws/cm 2 330,000 22,000 22,000 23,100 4,200 6,600 45,000 336,000 6,800 10,000 92,000 200,000 88,000 10,500 17,600 15,200 15,200 35,000 26,400 3,400 6,600 8,800 440,000 159,000 35,000 6,600
Low-Pressure vs Medium- & High-Pressure UV Lamp Performance Comparison

Lamp Life Typically 2,5009,000 hrs UV Energy Efficiency 40% Lamp Operating Temp. 3249C
Low-Pressure Medium- and High-Pressure Mercury-Type UV Lamps Mercury-Type UV Lamps
Typically 1,000 hrs 79% 600900C
274
UV Sterilizers
High-Output Stainless Steel UV Sterilizers

Quality craftsmanship meets superior design to deliver years of dependable, trouble-free operation. The high-output stainless steel (HOSS) UV sterilizer has a 4-way bracket for versatile mounting capabilities, an easy-toservice lamp/quartz sleeve configuration and a watertight, NEMA 4X power supply enclosure. Single-end access lets you service and replace the lamp and quartz sleeve with ease. 2" threaded inlet/outlet. Lamps are 80-watt T5. 316 SS housing. Unit size is 48" H x 10" D; power enclosure is 10.5" H x 10.5" W x 7.5" D. Max pressure is 50 psi. 115/230VAC, 50/60 Hz.
COM480HOSS shown with premium controller. Call for details. Input Output Watts Watts No. of UV-C Lamps Gpm @ Gpm @ 30,000 Ws/ 180,000 Ws/ 2 cm * cm2**
SMART High-Output UV Sterilizers

These commercial sterilizers feature high-output (HO), T6-style lamps that offer approximately twice the UV output of standard low-pressure UV lamps with the same arc length. SMART HO units operate safely in a wet environment and are UL-listed. UV vessels are built of a UV-resistant, high-density plastic with removable end caps to provide easy access. Internal viewing ports allow visual indication of lamp status. Units have 2" slip unions and 53/4" dia. housings. 10' cable to ballast and 6' cord to plug. 115V/60 Hz. 230V, 50/60 Hz available for export: add "-230" to the part number. Standard " S" models include an in-line, sealed watertight power supply for wet applications. For maximum safety and efficiency, premium "X" series include NEMA 4X power supply with clear cover, lamp hour meter, lamp status light, main power light and on/off switch. Place "S" or "X" after the part number to designate unit desired. One-year warranty does not include lamps or sleeves. UV housing carries lifetime warranty. E50 and E80 models ship Ground, all others ship motor freight. FOB factory. Made in USA.
E50S W I/O Size Gpm @ 30,000 Max Size Ws/cm 2 * Aquarium
COM480HOSS 80 26 1 COM4160HOSS 160 52 2 COM4240HOSS 240 78 3 COM4320HOSS 320 104 4 *Recommended flowrate for algae and bacteria. **Recommended flowrate for protozoa.
38 70 99 135
6 12 17 23
$ 2,366.43 2,677.77 3,126.43 3,500.36
Thanks for helping me with my UV light problem. My pond has never been so beautiful, and I have shared my news with friends and relatives. You have one grateful and very satisfied customer.
E50 50 2" 33/26 500 g 28" $ 615.00 2,299.22 E80 80 2" 60/45 900 g 43" 684.00 2,363.52 E120** 120 2" 77/64 1,200 g 56" 845.00 2,389.42 E150** 150 2" 106/84 1,600 g 70" 1,020.00 2,540.06 * First flowrate listed is for new lamps at 100% rating; second flowrate is based on end of lamp's useful life at 9,000 hours at 60% rating. ** Ships Oversize @ 50-lb rate.
"S"
"X"
Vanna Wu
Lihue, HI
SMART UV High-Output Replacement Parts

Watts Lamp Each 4+
UV Sterilizers
Vecton ultraviolet sterilizers are well designed for reliability and long life. They are particularly useful with aquariums that have a high biological load, such as marine fish tanks, coldwater tanks and cichlid communities. Easy to install, they feature bi-pin bulbs, quartz sleeves and date-indicator dials that remind you when to change the lamp (every six months is recommended). Vecton UV sterilizers are not for outdoor use. The units are 115V/60 Hz and are CE-approved. Units include sleeves, lamps, 5/8", 3/4" and 1" (15, 20 and 25 mm) inlet/outlet barb fittings and a 6' power cord. One-year warranty on units, six-month warranty on lamps. Flowrate shown is based on 15,000 Ws/cm 2.

50 80 120 150
20050 20080 200120 200150***
$ 86.67 77.92 92.92 117.50
78.00 70.13 83.63 105.74
EQ258 $ 35.98 EQ408 42.92 EQ120 60.06 EQ658*** 83.43

4-Pin Lamp Connector
Quartz Sleeve
Watts
50 20375 $ 26.25 80 20375 26.25 120 20375 26.25 150 20375 26.25 *** Ships Oversize @ 30-lb rate.
Seal Kit Ballast
20105 $ 120.00 20105 120.00 20105 120.00 202150-1 225.41
UV4 UV4 UV4 UV4
$ 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
U5606 U5207 U5208 U6052 U6053 U6054 U5275 U5276 U5280 U5281 U894 U1594
8-W Sterilizer 3 gpm 15-W Sterilizer 5.5 gpm 25-W Sterilizer 7.4 gpm Replacement Lamp, 8 W Replacement Lamp, 15 W Replacement Lamp, 25 W Replacement Quartz Sleeve for 8 W Replacement Quartz Sleeve for 15 & 25 W O-Ring (Set of 2), 8 W O-Ring (Set of 2), 15 & 25 W Compression Fitting, 8 W Compression Fitting, 15 & 25 W
Flowrate
ProClear Pond Clarifier

This UV sterilizer uses a 30-watt UV lamp. It can be mounted either on its base on a flat surface, or attached horizontally to a vertical surface using the brackets provided. Universal barb fittings are included to take 1", 11/4" and 11/2" flexible hose. ProClear clarifiers require virtually no maintenance other than the normal annual lamp replacement, and these 30-watt lamps are inexpensive. Translucent hose connectors glow to show that the UV lamp is working. Suitable for ponds up to 6,000 gallons, maximum flowrate 20 gpm. Not UL-listed. UV30 U6055 Pond Clear Clarifier, 30 W Replacement Lamp $ 190.89 18.48
$ 106.00 117.00 135.00 12.33 17.52 21.19 13.93 19.04 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17
U5606 uv30
Specialty Filtration UV Sterilizers

These economical UV sterilizers are made of PVC and are well-suited for aquaculture and pond use. They are easy to connect with PVC pipe and have convenient bottom drains, easy-cleaning quartz sleeves and see-through screw-off caps that indicate when lamps are working. When used outdoors, the ballast, wires and connections must be protected from the weather. Order UVBK, which is a waterproof connector and a weathertight ballast enclosure. One kit required per lamp/ballast connection. The maximum gpm rates shown below are based on 15,000 microwatt seconds per square centimeter (for 30,000 Ws/cm2, reduce flowrate by 50%). The water must be pre-filtered to achieve the advertised performance when used as a sterilizer. Rated to 80 psi. 115V/60 Hz is standard, with 2' cord to ballast and 7' cord to plug end. 115V and 230V/50 Hz are also available by special order. Select either horizontal or vertical style. One-year warranty does not include lamp or quartz sleeve. Note: Lamp life is typically 5,000 hours (78 months) of continuous operation. At that point, they only reach about 80% of their original output. We recommend oversizing when new to allow for this diminishing irradiation, then replace lamps at that time.
Splash Boot & Cap Creates water resistant seal around electrical connection. Clear View Port Solid cap features clear view port to allow visible light (no UV) to pass through and indicate bulb is operating. Quartz Sleeve Test tube style isolates UV bulb from water contact allowing it to operate at the optimum bulb temperature for maximum UV output. Highest quality pure hard quartz material allows maximum UV transmission. Internal Overflow Pipe Replaceable pipe automatically vents air from chamber and directs 100% of the water flow past UV light. Inner Protective Sleeve Replaceable sleeve protects outer housing from long term UV damage. Acts as an internal reflector maximizing UV efficiency. Modular Construction Allows simple connection to any Lifegard Modular filter system or outside canister filter.
UV Sterilizers
275
Ease of Replacement Unique 4-pin connector design for easy bulb replacement without shutting down the system.
Compression Coupling & Gasket Seals quartz sleeve to cap. Ballast 8, 25 or 40 Watt UL- and CSAlisted (230V, 50 Hz ballast available). UV Bulb Highest quality pure hard quartz material allows maximum UV transmission and longer bulb life. End cap wire design drops bulb further into unit for maximum output and keeps heat away from sealing area. Sleeve Guide Guides quartz sleeve into proper position for accurate assembly.
UV16 UV32 UV5 UV65 UV195
UV97
UV5 UV16 UV32 UV65 UV97 UV130 UV195
Gpm @ 15,000 Ws/cm2
4.0 12.6 25 50 75 100 150
Total Watts
10 25 40 80 120 160 240
Style
V V V V V V V
Lamps
1 1 1 2 3 4 6
Bulb Wattage
8 25 40 40 40 40 40
11/4" Slip 11/4" Slip 11/4" Slip 11/4" FPT 11/2" FPT 2" FPT 2" FPT
Port Size Inlet
1" Slip 1" Slip 1" Slip 11/4" FPT 11/2" FPT 2" FPT 2" FPT
Outlet
Approximate Dimensions Height Length Width
17" 27" 35" 46" 46" 46" 46"
8" 8" 8" 6" 6" 12" 12"
5" 5" 5" 16" 22" 18" 24"
Ship Wt
$ 146 181 229 455 677 872 1,285
UV Replacement Parts
UV8 UV25 UV40 UVP8 UVP40 UV2 UV2A UV2B UV1 UV0 UVBK-B UV3A UV4 UV6 Quartz Sleeve for 10 W & 15 W Quartz Sleeve for 25 W Quartz Sleeve for 40 W Ballast for 10 W Ballast for 25 W and 40 W 10-W Lamp 25-W Lamp 40-W Lamp Lamp Gasket, Fits All O-Ring for All UV Caps Weatherproof Ballast & Connection Kit, 12" x 4" Threaded Cap With Compression Coupling, Fits All 4-Pin Female Connector, Fits All Splash Boot, Fits All When Needed When Needed When Needed When Needed When Needed After 8 Months After 8 Months After 8 Months After 8 Months After 8 Months
Replace Ship Wt
UV3A
1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 3 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 24.48 37.80 74.35 53.74 59.50 46.85 52.90 66.80 3.60 2.55 35.00 16.00 7.00 2.40
Each
22.02 33.97 66.50 48.92 53.99 42.03 47.59 60.14 3.24 2.24 31.50 14.00 5.95 2.18
4+
UVP8
UV2 UV8 UV0 UV1 UV4 UV6 UV7
UVBK
276
UV Sterilizers
SMART UV Sterilizers by Emperor Aquatics

Indoors or outdoors.
These high-quality ultraviolet sterilizers feature a watertight sealed design and can be used safely both indoors and outdoors. They are UL-listed and compact, making them an excellent choice for everything from small koi ponds to large recirculating systems. Units can be operated in any position and feature GPH/T5 lamps with 9,000 hours (375 days) of effective life. These SMART UV units feature remote-style ballasts with 16' power cords. Units are 115V/60Hz, with a one-year warranty on ballasts, lifetime warranty on the 3" housing and 90 days on lamps. CE/UL-listed. Made in USA.
EU130P EU40
EU25-U Gpm @ 30,000 Ws/cm 2 * Watts/ # Lamps Inlet/ Outlet Overall Size Actual Wt
EU65P
EU25-U EU40 EU65P EU80P EU130P
13/7.8 26.2/15.7 47.5/28.5 52.4/31.4 95.1/57
25/1 40/1 65/1 80/2 (40 W each) 130/2 (65 W each)
11/2" Slip Union 11/2" Slip Union 11/2" Slip Union 11/2" Slip Union 11/2" Slip Union
30" 44" 71" 45" 72"
14 lbs 22 lbs 28 lbs** 56 lbs** 72 lbs***
$ 321.37 333.87 520.00 837.90 1,040.43
* Both flowrates are based on exposure time. The first number denotes flow when lamp is new. The second is when lamp is 13 months old (continuous use) and output
has reduced to 60%. Maximum pond recommendation is based on the total volume of water passing through the unit once every 4 hours @ 22,000 Ws/cm2. Maximum aquarium recommendation for protozoa is based on the total volume of water passing through the unit at least one time per hour at 90,000 Ws/cm2. ** Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate. *** Ships motor freight.
Emperor Replacement Parts

Black plastic body SMART UV.
Watts Lamp Each 4+ Quartz Sleeve
SMART UV Lite
The SMART UV Lite features the same durable "UV-resistant" construction as the SMART UV, but utilizes a smaller diameter body (2"). They are watertight and can be used indoors or outdoors in any position. Units include standard GPH/T5 style UV lamps, remote power supply and instructions. All UV lights have 11/2" slip inlets/outlets. Units are 115V/60 Hz and have a one-year warranty on ballasts, lifetime warranty on the housing and 90-day warranty on the lamps. CE/UL-listed. Made in USA. EU18-2 6/3.6 18/1 EU25-2 9.2/5.5 25/1 EU40-2 16.3/9.8 40/1 EU80-2 32/19.6 80/2 *Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate.
Gpm @ 30,000 Watts/ # Lamps Ws/cm 2
18 25 40 65 80 130
EB18 $ 53.40 EB25 60.00 EB40 61.00 EB65*** 99.89 EB40 x 2 61.00 EB65 x 2 99.89
48.06 54.00 54.90 89.90 54.90 89.90
EQ188 $ 31.54 EQ258 35.98 EQ408 42.92 EQ658*** 83.43 EQ408 x 2 42.92 EQ658 x 2 83.42
4-Pin Lamp Connector
18 25 40 65 80 130
Watts
20375 20375 20375 20375 20376 20376
Seal Kit Ballast
75 gallons 110 gallons 200 gallons 350 gallons
Max Size Aquarium
Overall Length
211/2" 291/2" 441/2" 441/2"
8 lbs $ 247.33 14 lbs 263.17 22 lbs 300.00 56 lbs* 550.00
Ship Wt
Each
$ 26.25 26.25 26.25 26.25 28.89 28.89
20240 20240 20240 20240 20240 x 2 20240 x 2
$ 85.17 85.17 85.17 85.17 85.17 85.17
20078 20078 UV4 UV4 UV4 x 2 UV4 x 2
$ 14.97 14.97 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
SMART UV Lites use the same parts except seal kit (20264). For the old style, white PVC body made before 1998, please call. ***Ships Oversize at 30-lb rate.
20375
EQ128
EU18-2
20078 EB12
Specialty Filtration UV Sterilizers by Tetra Pond

These small sterilizers are completely weatherproof and easy to install. For use on smaller ponds, the sterilizers use a high-efficiency UV-C lamp that controls free-floating algae and helps destroy diseases. Units are 3" in diameter, have 1/2" barb inlets/outlets and are 115V/60 Hz. Six-month warranty. 16795 16788 16789 19522 25074 16791 16792 16793 29540 29541 29542 Mini 5 W UV1 9 W UV2 18 W UV3 36 W Mini 5 W UV1 9 W UV2 18 W UV3 36 W UV1 UV2 UV3 5.5 gpm 15 gpm 36.7 gpm 73.3 gpm
Max Flow
UV Sterilizers/Tech Talk
277
Tadpole Submersible UV
No plumbing required.
This submersible ultraviolet sterilizer is ideal for adding UV to a pond after it is built. The Tadpole UV is a complete filter system that requires no plumbing, is easy to install and will service ponds up to 2,000 gallons. The system utilizes an efficient, 121/2 gpm, mag-drive submersible pump to draw water through its large pre-filter, then into its internal 25-watt UV chamber. It is all plastic that is easily concealed. Complete servicing and cleaning can be accomplished in less than 10 minutes. Outlet size is 1/2", dimensions 9" dia. x 36" L, with 10' power cord. Replace lamp after 9 months of use. TPS2 EB25 Tadpole UV Replacement Lamp
Ship Wt
660 gallons 1,800 gallons 4,400 gallons 8,800 gallons
Pond Size
Length
8" 11" 13" 19"
$ 121 158 228 305 33 33 56 72 37 59 78
Replacement Lamps
25 lbs 2 lbs
$ 475 60
Replacement Quartz Sleeves
TPS2
16790 16795
Replacement UV Products by Purely UV

Purely UV is the leading brand of 100% quartz replacement ultraviolet bulbs on the market. Note: Replace at least once a year. For maximum effectiveness, replace every six months.
Replacement Lamps
AUV8 AUV15 AUV25 AUV40 AUV57 8W 15 W 25 W 40 W 57 W $ 51.50 47.75 63.33 63.50 70.88
Each
47.90 44.41 58.90 59.05 65.92
4+
Quartz Sleeve
QS15 QS29 QS36 15" 19" 36" 33.50 36.75 57.50
Each
31.16 34.18 53.48
4+
Features: Highest quartz quality available. Last 9,000 hours under normal operation. Guaranteed to fit. 200120x 200150x 20050x AUV15x AUV57x C1323x EB25x EB40x EB65x EQ408x EQ658x Bulb, 120 W, for Emperor SMART High-Output UV Bulb, 150 W, for Emperor SMART High-Output UV Bulb, 50 W, for Emperor SMART High-Output UV Bulb, 15 W, for Aqua Ultraviolet UV Bulb, 57 W, for Aqua Ultraviolet UV Lamp, 25 W, for Gamma UV and Aqua Ultraviolet UV Bulb, 25 W, for Emperor SMART UV Bulb, 40 W, for Emperor SMART UV Bulb, 65 W, for Emperor SMART UV Quartz Sleeve, 40 W, for Emperor SMART UV High-Output Quartz Sleeve, 65/150 W, for Emperor SMART UV High-Output $ 71.99 81.99 51.99 35.99 45.99 42.00 48.99 48.99 78.99 36.29 51.99
Tech Talk 90
Algae Control in Garden Ponds
We need to first understand algae before we can understand how to control it. Planktonic algae are very small suspended particles that color water various shades of green, brown, olive and even orange. Pollen from trees and other terrestrial plants is sometimes mistaken for planktonic algae, but pollen usually floats on the surface before sinking. Filamentous algae, commonly referred to as string algae, hair algae and black algae, typically grow on the bottom and float to the surface when sunlight and photosynthesis provide oxygen bubbles that get trapped in them. At the surface, the algae are unsightly and can clog pumps and filters. Attached algae are referred to as periphyton. They cover the surfaces of shallow stones and other submerged objects. There are thousands of species of algae, each with its own personality. All are plants, using chlorophyll for photosynthesis. They all need, to varying degrees, water, light and nutrients, and there is usually no shortage of any of them in a fed fishpond. Which of the thousands of species of algae will become dominant in your pond? Over a five-year period, you may never have the same dominant species of algae twice. A slight change in water chemistrypH, hardness, nitrogen/phosphorus (N/P) ratio, etc.can bring about a change in species. The seasons, sunlight, shade, turbidity and many other factors will also allow one species of algae to outcompete the others.
Here are some algae-control methods:

RakeFilamentous algae is easily raked out of small ponds. LightIf you reduce sunlight by shading the pond with trees, shade cloth,
arbors, etc., there will be a corresponding reduction in algae. 50% shade is significant, but 70% shade should provide fairly clear water. Water can also be shaded with dye (such as Black Vail), but fish will be hard to see well. and other plants, there is no scarcity of nutrients for algae. The biological filter has no effect on the nutrient level because a biofilter only converts ammonia to nitrate, which is still nitrogen. Water exchange has a limited effect and is typically not feasible. One nutrient needed by the algae is phosphorus, and it can be removed (or tied up) by Phosclear, when added on a regular basis. Phosclear is an inexpensive water clarifier. For more information on algae control, see Tech Talk 102.
NutrientsIt doesn't take much. When fish are fed, or fertilizer is added to lilies
Algaecides, CommercialIn the right dosages, these can selectively kill the
algae without harming the other plants or animals. However, their effect may be short-lived, as another crop of algae can "bloom" when the algaecide wears off. effect because they remain active in the water.
Algaecides, NaturalThings like barley straw and barley extract have a longer UV IrradiationA UV sterilizer will disrupt the reproductive process of planktonic
algae and keep your pond clear. Use at least 22,000 Ws/cm2 and flow the entire pond's volume through the unit at least six times per day.
278
Heaters
Pond De-Icers/Tech Talk
Submersible Heating Cables

Designed to efficiently distribute heat throughout the substrate in plant tanks, Hydor Hydrokables minimize heat pockets commonly found in aquariums. The 5 mm thick silicone cables are double insulated to ensure safety. Each heating cable includes mounting suction cups for installation. Control the cable with the external Hydroset electronic thermostat (sold separately) that displays temperature in both F and C. Flame symbol indicates when heating.
Thermo-Pond De-Icer
This energy-efficient, floating pond heater uses only 100 watts, costing about 1 cent per hour. The patent-pending design is intended to keep only the isolated center of the unit free of ice, allowing oxygen in and toxic gases out. It will even melt its way through ice up to 2" thick. Recommended for ponds 300 to 1,000 gallons; use additional units for larger ponds. 100 watts, 115V, 50/60 Hz with 10' power cord. UL-listed. Weighs 3 lbs. TPH $ 49.95+
T04107 T04207 T04307 T04407 T03203
Watts
25 14 ft 1020 gallons 50 20 ft 1535 gallons 75 25 ft 3050 gallons 100 33 ft 4065 gallons Hydroset Thermostat
Length
Tank Size
$ 27.50 31.06 35.00 38.25 78.26
Great Buy!
Floating Pond De-Icer

Perfect for small fish ponds.
This 1,250-watt floating heater is designed to prevent your pond surface from freezing over during the winter months. The heater turns on/off automatically during times of freezing temperatures (approximately 40F water temperature), and it can be safely positioned around plants or other objects in the pond. 115V/60 Hz, 10' power cord, UL-listed. Ship weight 4 lbs.
Patio Pond De-Icer

This sinking heater is designed for small patio ponds up to 50 gallons. It operates automatically in freezing temperatures (approximately 40F water temperature) and delivers 500 watts of heat. 115V/60 Hz, UL-listed, one-year warranty. Ship weight 5 lbs. P500 $ 37.95
P418
$ 42.00
See the Index for our larger de-icing systems.
Pond De-Icers
Choose from either the floating or sinking style. The floating version will just keep a hole open in a large pond and the sinking model will keep a very small pond or tank up to 80% ice-free. These pond de-icers have a nonadjustable thermostat, an automatic shut-off for safety (should it be removed from the water, it cannot start a fire) and a 15' power cord. The heaters automatically turn on at about 40F water temperature. The optional guard (not included) is required when the floating de-icer is used in ponds with liners. The guard is included with the sinking de-icer. One-year warranty.

Tech Talk 56
De-Icing Lakes
Most of us are aware that aeration systems are primarily required in summer, when the oxygen consumption rate is highest and stratification is most severe. In some lakes and ponds, winter fishkills are also quite common. When ice covers a lake, oxygen transfer from the atmosphere is eliminated. If there is a significant accumulation of snow on top of the ice, the photosynthetic oxygen production can also be virtually eliminated. If the ice and snow cover persists long enough and the oxygen consumption rate underneath the ice is great enough, there will be a fishkill. Clean lakes, that is, those with a low trophic state index, may not require winter aeration. During the summer, thermal stratification occurs when warmer water floats above cooler, heavier water. Near freezing, the situation is reversed. As water approaches the freezing point, it expands and floats on top of warmer water. The oxygen consumption that takes place in a lake is the result of biological and chemical reactions. Since the rate of these reactions is related to temperature, the winter aeration system needs to be only about 20% of the size of a summer aeration system.
PD1 PD3 PD1A
Floating De-Icer, 1,500 W Sinking De-Icer w/Guard, 1,500 W Guard for PD1
Ship Wt
4 lbs 6 lbs 4 lbs
$ 57.23 57.35 13.90
pd1
Thermo-Cube
Commonly used for stock tank de-icers, pond de-icers, pump houses and greenhouses, it plugs into a standard electrical outlet and turns power on and off automatically, according to the outside temperature. It has two receptacles and turns on at 35F and off at 45F. Maximum 15 amps total, 115V. CU3 $ 13.99
nergy S a ve E ting by H e a he n Only W Needed
If it is acceptable to have an open hole in the ice, the simplest way to prevent a winter fishkill is to keep a small area ice free, either by using air or an electric de-icer. The electric de-icer may work best at the shoreline, perhaps mounted on a dock, while air-powered systems seem to be preferred where longer distances are involved. When the air compressor is mounted on the shore, the air line is buried below the frost line into the lake and directed to the area that is to remain ice-free. Caution must be taken due to the hazards of open water in the winter, where people or animals may be on the ice. Also, be careful not to open too large a hole in the ice, which can result in the loss of too much of the lake's heat. Experience is necessary when designing de-icing systems, so we recommend contacting the AES Lakes Department for assistance.
Easy Plug/Tech Talk
Heaters
279
Easy Plug Heaters

Easy Plug heaters offer the convenience of preplug wiring. To install, simply mount heater, plug it into controller, and plug controller into a wall receptacle. Choose between 115V straight or "L" style or 230V straight or "L" style, both with digital controller. Choose 316 stainless steel for fresh water or titanium for salt water. Prices include heater and controller, 10' cord from heater to controller and 10' cord from controller to wall outlet. We also include an 8' temperature probe (from controller) at no extra charge. Easy Plug heaters come standard with Safety Protector I, so keep a replacement (PTpI for straight and "L" style) on hand. Not outdoor-rated. CE-certified, UL-listed and works with both 50 and 60 Hz. Made in the USA.
Length
LEP18T Straight Style "L" Style EP10
Length Hot Hot
Easy Plug 115V Heaters With Digital Controller

1,000 Straight 115 8.4 7" 11" 6 + 3 lbs EP10 1,800 Straight 115 15 12" 17" 9 + 3 lbs EP18 1,000 "L" 115 8.4 11" 24" 8 + 3 lbs LEP10 1,800 "L" 115 15 16" 24" 11 + 3 lbs LEP18 PTp1 Protector 1 Replacement Element, Fits All 115 & 230V Easy Plugs 35.00 DRAE15-1 Replacement 115V Digital Controller
Watts Style Volts Amps Hot Length Ship Wt 316SS
$ 294.00 306.11 432.00 446.00 158.00
EP10T EP18T LEP10T LEP18T
Titanium
$ 339.00 374.00 527.00 549.00
Easy Plug 230V Heaters With Digital Controller

1,000 Straight 230 4.2 7" 11" 1,800 Straight 230 7.5 12" 17" 1,000 "L" 230 4.2 11" 24" 1,800 "L" 230 7.5 16" 24" drae15-2 Replacement 230V Digital Controller
Watts Style Volts Amps Hot Length
6 + 3 lbs EP11 9 + 3 lbs EP19 8 + 3 lbs LEP11 11 + 3 lbs LEP19
Ship Wt
316SS
$ 369.00 381.00 507.00 521.00 233.00
EP11T EP19T LEP11T LEP19T
Titanium
$ 414.00 449.00 602.00 624.00
Each
Tech Talk 33
Heater Sizing
If you are bringing water into your facility that must be heated, you can use an electric heater for all or just a portion of your heating. For instance, you may use solar, waste heat or room heaters first and use thermostatically controlled electric heaters as the final temperature control. To determine the approximate size heater to order, choose ONE of the three categories then follow the calculation.
Quick Heater Sizing Guide for Non-Flow-Through Calculation

It's difficult to simplify something that is complicated, but use this quick reference chart to estimate the size of an electric heater. A tank with 1,000 gallons is in a room that will stay around 60F, and you want the water temperature to be 87F. If 4 W per gallon are needed for every 9F, then: DT = 27, 27 9 = 3, 3 x 4 W = 12 W per gallon, 12 W x 1,000 gallons = 12,000 W. Assumes one large, uninsulated, uncovered fish tank plus one peripheral (such as a sand filter) and a pump with no extreme water/air interface (such as splash aerator or degassing tower). Minimize heater size and power use by insulating and covering. Follow the chart to keep the water at desired temperature, but if a few degrees of temperature loss is tolerable during brief periods of cold weather, use that temperature on the chart. For more accurate sizing, contact our technical department at 407-598-1401.
1. Recirculating
In a nonflowing system, heat is only lost to the surrounding air. The temperature difference between the ambient air and the water is the biggest factor. Also, the open area of the tank, the amount of agitation and the heat loss through the tank walls should be considered. All external pipes, filters, pumps, etc. will further cool the water. For every 9F (5C) difference, there should be 4 W of heat per gallon (3.8 liters) of water. Elevated, uninsulated tanks with a large amount of surface agitation, could require as much as 12 W per gallon per 9F. For small glass aquariums use 8 W per gallon per 9F.
2. Temperature Raising Only

Cool water is used to fill tanks, and the water needs to be warmed before the fish are added. Time and ambient temperature will be considerations. For every 1,000 gallons (3,800 liters), 1,200 W (1.2 kW) are needed to raise the temperature 10F (6C) in 24 hours (this assumes ambient temp is the same as the water).
Tank Size Temperature Difference (F) (gallons) 9 13.5 18 22.5 Watts 250 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 400 550 700 850 1,000 1,600 2,200 2,800 3,400 4,000 2,400 3,300 4,200 5,100 6,000 3,200 4,400 5,600 6,800 8,000 4,000 5,500 7,000 8.500 10,000
27 3,000 4,800 6,600 8,400 10,200 12,000
3. Flow-Through Heating
A flow-through system has cool water entering and warmed water leaving (this is very wasteful and expensive without heat exchangers). Determine the maximum gallons per minute that you expect and the greatest temperature difference. 1,000 W ( 1 kW ) will raise the temperature of 6 gallons of water (23 liters) 1F (.55C) per minute.
Example: 6 gpm with a 10F difference = 10 kW.
Round up when in between wattages.
280
Heaters
"L" Style/Tech Talk
Heaters, "L" Style

These high-quality, in-line, "L"-style heaters feature corrosionproof titanium heating elements! Heater housing is fiberglass-reinforced polyamide. The dial type thermostat allows control of temperature from 61104F (1640C). All heaters include a built-in safety flow switch that shuts off the heater if water flow gets too low. Minimum flow is 22 gpm; maximum flow is 88 gpm. Inlet/Outlet sizes are 2" slip union. CE-approved. 230V units require an electrician. Titanium heating element guaranteed for five years. Ship weight 7 lbs.
Tech Talk 123

Heating Garden Ponds
Koi, goldfish, catfish, minnows, bluegills and many other fish are capable of living in ice-covered ponds in their natural conditions. But when you put a lot of fish in a small pond, a fishkill will result if the ice cover persists too long. To prevent a fishkill, all you need to do is keep a very small percentage of the surface ice-free for gas transfer. Use one or more small heaters with thermostats built for the purpose.
le3115
Water temperatures below 65F (18C) can stress fish, reducing their resistance to disease. Rapid and extreme fluctuations can also cause disease. If your fish are extremely important to you, and you want to keep the temperature above 65F, you will need to both insulate and heat your pond in most locations in the US. Unless you don't mind spending a king's ransom for heating, you will need to insulate and turn off all fountains, waterfalls and other water-chilling devices. Insulation can take the form of floating styrofoam sheets, swimming pool cover, greenhouse structure, plastic sheeting, etc. Keep in mind that when water evaporates it has a significant cooling effect. This effect can account for as much as 80% of the total heat loss from open ponds. Be prepared to open the insulation on warm days; otherwise, excessive heating of the water can take place, shocking the fish. It may be more cost-effective to transfer fish to indoor tanks with recirculating filter systems for the winter. This also allows for winter pond draining and maintenance. The heat loss in BTU/hr per square foot of pond surface is approximately 15 times the temperature difference between the desired water temperature and the coldest average air temperature. Example: If you wanted to maintain water temperature at 65F, and you knew that the air temperature was going to drop to 35F (24-hour average), you would have a 30 temperature difference x the surface area (which, in this case, we will say is 100 sq.ft. x 15) = 45,000 BTU/hr. If you insulate 80%, your heat loss will be less 80%.
Filter
Power Panel
Disinfection Device
Pump
Inlet
LE3322 LE6322 LE9322
3,000 6,000 9,000
Watts
Volts
230 230 230
Phase(s)
3 3 3
Height
22" 22" 29"
$ 1,052.00 1,111.00 1,117.00
What are the heating equipment options? Immersion heaters that are outdoorrated or submersible may be used, as well as the electric flow-through type. Gas heaters of the type used on hot tubs and swimming pools typically are more cost-effective for the large heating loads. Beware of copper or cuper nickel piping, which makes them incompatible with most fish cultures. They can be used, however, with stainless steel or titanium heat exchangers. The water should be filtered prior to entering the heater to avoid biofouling.
3-Phase Equipment

Thanks for helping me with my UV light problem. My pond has never been so beautiful, and I have shared my news with friends and relatives. You have one grateful and very satisfied customer.
Vanna Wu
Lihue, HI
Local koi pond in Florida.
Temperature Controllers
Heaters
281
Standard: The standard is a "nonindicating" (shows set point only) style. All controllers and heaters will operate on 50 or 60 Hz power sources. To set the water temperature on nonindicating units, determine water temperature with a separate thermometer and adjust the temperature setting (by turning the knob) until heater shuts off at desired temperature. The nonindicating controller will maintain that temperature 5F. Digital: Digital controllers have a 1.5F accuracy rating. These controllers provide a digital temperature display that indicates both the set and actual temperatures of the water. They can be set to display F or C. All are manufactured with UL-listed components. All controllers are equipped with a vinyl-sleeved sensor tube (5' standard on nonindicating models and 8' on indicating models and come with Protector I safety option standard). All heaters and controllers are UL-listed and CE-certified or are manufactured with listed components. Made in USA.
Digital NA15D
NA30
Nonindicating
Safety Options Protector 1, Standard

Standard on all heaters, including Easy Plug, unless an upgrade (P2) is ordered. Consists of a temperature sensitive protector installed in the heater, which will shut down electricity (usually from low water level) to the heater element. Once activated, the protector must be replaced to restore power to the heater, so keep a spare one on hand.
To determine which protector fits your heater, see the model number on the head of the heater. The protector replacement part number will be listed at the end.
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY, USA

M O D E L
ETA1.8117-PTp1
Heater/Controller Selection Chart

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER NA25 H10 H10T H11 H11T H18 H18T H19 H19T H25 H25T H35 H35T H50 H50T H60 H60T 3H30 3H30T 3H55 3H55T 3H75 3H75T 3H105 3H105T 3H150 3H150T 3H180 3H180T LH10 LH10T LH11 LH11T LH18 LH18T LH19 LH19T LH25 LH25T LH35 LH35T LH50 LH50T LH60 LH60T 3LH30 3LH30T 3LH55 3LH55T 3LH75 3LH75T 3LH105 3LH105T 3LH150 3LH150T 3LH180 3LH180T NA15D NA30X NA50X NA30 NA30DX NA50DX
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Protector 1 Replacement
PTp1 Protector 1 $ 35.00
pt-I
Protector 2, Optional Upgrade

An upgraded safety option that includes an audible alarm and manual reset button. During periods of high heater temperature or low water levels, an alarm will sound and electricity to the heater will be disconnected. The manual reset button will deactivate the alarm and reconnect electricity to the heater. Repeated alarm conditions may eventually cause the protector to fail, which will disconnect power. Restoring power will require a replacement protector. Both the controller and your heater need to be ordered with Protector 2. pii
HEATER
Ptp2 Protector 2 $ 35.00
X X X X
Heater Controllers with Protector 1

NA25 115/230 1 NA30 115 1 NA30X 230 1, 3 NA50X 230 1, 3 NA15D 115 1 NA30D 115 1 NA30DX 230 1, 3 NA50DX 230 1, 3
Volts Max Amps Type*
15 30 30 50 15 30 30 50
NI NI NI NI D D D D
4" x 6" x 4" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14" 4" x 3" x 8" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14"
Size Ship (L x W x H) Accuracy Wt (lbs)
5.0F 5.0F 5.0F 5.0F 1.5F 1.5F 1.5F 1.5F
3 15 15 16 3 16 16 16
$ 102.00 224.00 276.00 290.00 133.00 449.00 501.00 527.00
Heater Controllers with Protector 2

NA30XA 230 1, 3 NA50XA 230 1, 3 NA30DXA 230 1, 3 NA50DXA 230 1, 3 *NI= Nonindicating, D=Digital
Volts Max Amps Type*
30 50 30 50
NI NI D D
10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14" 10" x 6" x 14"
Size Ship (L x W x H) Accuracy Wt (lbs)
5.0F 1.5F 1.5F 1.5F
15 $ 356.00 16 370.00 16 586.00 16 612.00
282
Heaters
Immersion
Heavy-Duty Immersion Heaters

Heavy-duty, UL-listed electric heaters can handle almost any immersion water heater need through a wide selection of styles, materials, sizes and controls. These industrial type heaters are perfect for automatic "set it and leave it" applications. Use our heater sizing guide (see Index) to select the heater size in watts. Select the style you need and then consult the heater/controller compatibility chart. Choose type 316 stainless steel for freshwater applications and titanium for salt water. Titanium is more expensive, but it offers the utmost in salt water corrosion resistance. The "L"-style locates the hot zone along the bottom of your tank. The straight style is easily positioned on the side of the tank. Never allow the water level to drop below the hot zone dimension shown, as heater failure and/or fire could occur (also, keep the hot zone clean of scale buildup). Protector 2 is available on all models. For Protector 2, add an "A" after part number. The price is the same. Be sure to order a compatible controller (units will not operate without controller). In addition to the sizes shown, custom sizes can be ordered at additional cost. Almost every heater is available in 480V at the same price as 230V. Your controller and heater need to be the same, either Protector 1 or 2. Electrical cable is not included with these heavy-duty heaters and controllers. An electrician will need to wire the heater to the controller and the controller to the power supply. All heaters and controllers are guaranteed for one year. Due to the custom nature of our heaters, allow a minimum of one week for production. Made in USA.
Single Tube Triple Tube h10
AES recommends that you purchase replacement fuses with the heaters to avoid long downtime.
Hot Hot
Single-Tube Straight Heaters, Single-Phase

1,000 1,000 1,800 1,800 2,500 3,500 5,000 6,000
Watts Volts Max Amps Hot Length Ship Wt 316SS Titanium
115 230 115 230 230 230 230 230
8.4 4.2 15.0 7.5 10.4 14.6 20.9 25.0
7" 7" 12" 12" 17" 23" 32" 40"
11" 11" 17" 17" 23" 29" 39" 47"
H10 H11 H18 H19 H25 H35 H50 H60
$ 106 106 121 121 134 144 197 212
H10T H11T H18T H19T H25T H35T H50T H60T
142 142 169 169 202 234 303 322
3h30
3-Phase Equipment
Triple-Tube Straight Heaters, 3-Phase

3,000 5,500 7,500 10,500 15,000
Watts Volts Max Amps Hot Length Ship Wt 316SS Titanium
230 230 230 230 230
7.3 13.3 18.1 25.3 36.1
7" 12" 17" 23" 32"
11" 17" 23" 29" 39"
3H30 $ 277 3H55 333 3H75 380 3H105 409 3H150 476
3H30T 3H55T 3H75T 3H105T 3H150T
411 517 573 651 827
PTp1 Protector 1 $ 35.00 31.50/4+
PTp2 Protector 2 $ 35.00 31.50/4+
Protector 2 is available on all models. For Protector 2, add an "A" after part number. The price is the same. Be sure to order a compatible controller.
Single Tube "L" Shaped Heaters, Single-Phase

Watts 3LH30 lh10
1,000 1,000 1,800 1,800 2,500 3,500 5,000 6,000
115 230 115 230 230 230 230 230
V Max Amps Hot
8.4 4.2 15.0 7.5 10.4 14.6 20.9 25.0
11" 11" 16" 16" 21" 27" 36" 44"
24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 48" 48"

L
Ship Wt 316SS Titanium
LH10 $ 234 LH10T LH11 234 LH11T LH18 250 LH18T LH19 250 LH19T LH25 259 LH25T LH35 271 LH35T LH50 310 LH50T LH60 325 LH60T
325 325 348 348 362 396 507 529
Triple Tube "L" Shaped Heaters, 3-Phase

length
Length
Watts
Triple Tube "L"
Single Tube "L"
3,000 5,500 7,500 10,500 15,000 Ptp1
230 230 230 230 230
V Max Amps Hot
7.3 13.3 18.1 25.3 36.1
11" 16" 21" 27" 36"
24" 24" 24" 24" 48"
Ship Wt
316SS Titanium
3LH30 $ 431 3LH55 457 3LH75 486 3LH105 555 3LH150 596
3LH30T 3LH55T 3LH75T 3LH105T 3LH150T $ 35.00
586 656 713 774 970
Protector 1 $ 35.00
Ptp2 Protector 2
Hot Hot
Even though these heaters are very reliable, we advise using two or three small heaters rather than one large heater that, in the event of a failure, could allow severe temperature drops. Replacement fuses, sensors, heaters and controllers are from Process Tech.
Submersiblek
Heaters
283
Titanium Heaters
Salt water compatible
These submersible heaters offer excellent corrosion resistance. They are 11/2" in diameter, very durable and will not crack if accidentally dropped. The 300-W and 500-W have 5' power cords; the 800-W has a 7' cord. The external controller (must be purchased separately) has an operating range of 7293F and includes a temperature sensor for submersible mounting. This built-in, temperature-sensing switch will automatically cut off power if exposed to air. The controller is 115V and 50/60 Hz, not UL-listed, with a 64" cord length. Ship weight 3 lbs. Six-month warranty. Length listed does not include rubber bumpers. JH300 JH500 JH800 JTC Heater, 300 W, 7.5" $ 34.00 Heater, 500 W, 9" 37.60 Heater, 800 W, 12.5" 46.45 Temperature Controller 27.50
Each JH300
Stealth Pro Submersible Heaters

Accurate, shatterproof performance in a sleek aquarium heater design. Fully submersible heaters shut off automatically when removed from water and restart automatically when in water. Injection-molded thermal plastic casing protects against wear and damage. Mesh heating element with mica core used in conjunction with epoxy fill ensures efficient transfer and eliminates rattling coils and tubes. Temperature select dial has 1F accuracy and is lit by bi-color LEDs. Easy to set and install. UL-listed for fresh and salt water use. ETP25 ETP50 ETP75 ETP100 ETP150 ETP200 ETP250 ETP300
Watts
JTC
ETP25
30.08 34.34 42.68 25.10
4+
Heaters
Completely submersible, these Visi-Therm heaters have proven to be dependable and accurate. They deliver the ultimate in direct-set control, compact double-sealed durability and certified accuracy to within one degree. A simple "click" of the dial chooses the ideal water temperature, while easy-to-view sliding scale tells the exact setting and new top view shows the setting at the dial. Advanced mounting bracket attaches to glass and provides three window positions to see temp display. Thermostat reads in both F (6589) and C (1832) and is Triac-equipped to switch on and off with lower voltage. Mesh heating element with mica core used in conjunction with epoxy fill ensures efficient transfer and eliminates rattling coils and tubes. Heaters work in fresh and salt water and are UL-listed. Cord length is 3' (1 m). One-year warranty. VT25 VT100 VT200 VT300 VT400 25 W, 10" 100 W, 113/4" 200 W, 15" 300 W, 161/2" 400 W, 18" $ 19.74 20.68 23.25 25.43 42.95
Each
25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300
81/4" 81/4" 10" 10" 133/4" 133/4" 15" 161/2"
OAL
Aquarium Size (gal)
8 15 25 30 45 55 75 100
$ 22.00 22.00 22.00 24.27 25.16 26.30 27.54 32.54
17.76 18.60 20.92 22.88 38.64
10+
Submersible Heaters
These Hydor Theo heaters are the safest submersible heaters we could find in the market today. They are completely submersible, UL-approved, salt water compatible and shatterproof! Instead of the typical metal element in a breakable glass tube, these heaters utilize a polymer sheet that uniformly heats a shatterproof glass tube. The temperature is controlled and maintained by a highly precise micro-switch controller, adjustable from 70 to 89F. Heaters are 115V/ 60 Hz with a 6' cord. One-year warranty, made in Italy. T11702 T11102 T11202 T11602 T11302 T11402 T11502
Watts
VT25
C F
10 50
15 59
20 68
22 72
24 75
26 79
28 83
30 86
35 95
In-Line Aquarium Heaters

Completely safe, Hydor in-line heaters take advantage of a patented thermal technology (PTC) that uses a polymer sheet to uniformly heat water, rather then metal heating elements encased in glass. The thermostat is mounted directly on the heater, so when a low water flow situation occurs, the heater shuts off. The temperature setting is controlled with a dial (6593F) with indicator light. Mount in vertical position only. Both heaters have 3" diameter housings and barbed inlet/ outlet. Safe for use in salt water. UL-listed and CE-approved. 115V/60 Hz with a 6' cord. Made in Italy, one-year warranty. ETH201 ETH300 200 W 300 W
1/2" 5 / 8"
25 50 100 150 200 300 400
Length
8.9" 7" 8.9" 12" 12" 15.5" 15.5"
$ 18.75 20.50 21.79 23.50 24.25 28.00 30.55
Each
17.03 18.92 20.06 21.86 22.56 26.09 28.74
4+
T11102
Submersible Heaters, Economy

These completely submersible heaters can be used singly in small tanks and aquariums or in multiples for larger heat requirements. A glowing lamp indicates on/off condition. Heaters are 115V/60 Hz with 3' (1 m) cord length. Built-in thermostat reads 2034C only. One-year warranty. VT101 VT201 100 W 200 W
OAL
Inlet/Outlet
ETH201
(13 mm) (16 mm)
$ 59.00 62.00
12" 14"
$ 11.02 11.88
Each
10.27 11.02
10+
Heating Tip
Use several small heaters in place of one large (expensive) heater. Plug them into two different circuits, in case one becomes overloaded. Always use GFCIs when electricity is used in or near water.
VT101
284
Heaters
Gas/Controllers/Tech Talk
Water Heaters, Gas

These digital heaters are an economical choice for generating a lot of heat. Raypak commercial heaters use a patented copper tube heat exchanger for excellent thermal efficiency (in some aquaculture applications copper may not be compatible, requiring the use of an intermediate heat exchanger). Their spark ignition pilot safety controls only turn on when heat is needed. These heaters have microprocessor-based thermostat controls and onboard diagnostic controls. Other features include stainless steel burners, outdoor flue stack and rugged, coated, galvanized metal construction. One-year warranty. Made in USA. Heaters located indoors must vent exhaust gas outdoors. For indoor use, add the indoor stack. Note: Standard heaters cannot be sold for use in TX or CA. Contact AES technical staff for Low NOx options compatible with those states' regulations. Add an "N" to the heater part number for natural gas; add a "P" for propane. GH199 GH266 GH332 GH399 IS199 IS266 IS332 IS399 199,500 BTUs/hr 266,000 BTUs/hr 332,500 BTUs/hr 399,000 BTUs/hr Indoor Stack for GH199 Indoor Stack for GH266 Indoor Stack for GH332 Indoor Stack for GH399
Min Gpm Max Gpm Ship Wt (Lbs)
Aqua Logic digital temperature controllers can be used in a variety of applications where a device needs to be turned on/off based on temperature rise or fall. A three-button touch keypad selects F or C, set point temperature, differential and operating mode (heating or cooling). NEMA 4X, rated for outdoor use. Temperature range for the controller is from -30 to 220F (-22 to 105C). The differential adjustment range is 1 to 30F. Power cord lengths are 40" (1 m) each. The temperature sensor probe is encased in titanium and has an 8' cable. Single stage controllers operate one device, either a chiller (1/2 hp and smaller) or a heater (1,000 watts or smaller). Dual stage controllers can be connected to both a chiller (1/2 hp and smaller) and heater (500 watts and smaller). Dual stage controllers will only allow one device to be "on" at a time. Example: stage 1 heating set point at 74F with 1F differential will have the heater come on when the temperature drops to below 73F, then turn off at 74F. One-year warranty. TC11 TC12 EC115R EC230R TC11S Controller, Single Stage Controller, Dual Stage Controller, Single Stage Controller, Single Stage Repl. Sensor (Fits All)
Sensor
20 25 35 40
125 125 125 125
187 210 230 240 12 15 17 20
$ 1,839 2,001 2,227 2,393 98 98 98 98
Wt
Volts/Amps
115/10 115/8 115/20 230/15
$ 129.33 192.19 209.23 209.23 73.85
Each
120.28 178.74 194.59 194.59 68.69
4+
EC115R
TC11
GH266
Sensor
Technician Profile
Ryan Chatterson
Ryan attended the University of Central Florida, where he majored in biology. In his 5 years at AES, he has worked with hydroponics, aquaponics, lighting, home aquariums, water gardens and aeration system sizing. Contributing to AES's quality control, he has also built apparatuses for pump testing purposes.
Tech Talk 16
Fish Metabolism
We refer to fish as being "cold-blooded" (some people fit that description, too). That doesn't mean they don't give off heat. It works as follows:
100 lbs of fish fed @ 5% of weight per day. 5 lbs of feed x 700 kcal/lb feed = 3,500 kcal/day. 3,500 kcal/day = heat that would raise a 400-gallon culture tank's temperature (perfectly insulated) 23C. This explains how fish metabolism, together with pumps, lights, etc., can raise a tank's temperature.
Important
In-Line/Tech Talk
Heaters
285
Heaters, Straight
In-line, straight-style heaters are perfect for small recirculation systems where space savings is a necessity. Designed for indoor or outdoor use, Red Line heaters have been proven reliable and dependable all over the world. The titanium heater element is corrosionproof in salt water and is housed in an injection-molded polyamide body. The digital control features an on/off switch and accurately monitors and controls temperature 61104F (1640C). An internal safety switch automatically shuts off the heater in the event of low water flow. Minimum flowrate is 22 gpm; maximum flowrate is 132 gpm. Inlet/Outlets are 2" slip. Titanium heating element is guaranteed for five years. 230V units require an electrician. CE-approved for indoor/outdoor use. Shipping weight 7 lbs. DE3322 DE6322 DE9322 3,000 6,000 9,000
Watts Volts
Heater
11,000 watts!
This adjustable in-line heater is perfect for freshwater use and safe for indoor and outdoor applications. Two internal 5.5 kW (11 kW total) cuper nickel heating elements deliver up to 37,532 BTUs of heat. Heater comes with an adjustable, nonindicating thermostat (60104F, 2F) and an indicator light. An internal pressure switch automatically shuts off the heater in the event of low water flow or pump failure. Minimum recommended flowrate is 12 gpm, maximum flowrate is 60 gpm. Heaters are 230V (power cord not included) and can be wired to operate either one or both heating coils. Heater draws 23 amps per 5.5 kW coil. Maximum working pressure 60 psi. Inlet/outlet 11/2" MNPT. No check valves or water shut-off valves should be installed in the piping from the outlet. All air must be bled from the system, and it should be mounted in a location that does not permit air accumulation. 7" L x 7" W x 12" H. Ship weight 15 lbs. One-year warranty. LH55 LH55E Heater Repl. Element (2 Req'd) $ 669.00 48.00
230 230 230
Phase(s)
3 3 3
$ 1,178.00 1,261.90 1,241.27
dE6115
In-line Heater
This easy-to-install in-line heater has a pure titanium flowtube and elements, ensuring its suitability for use on all kinds of aquatic systems. Highly resistant to fatigue and erosion, it comes fully equipped with digital temperature control, flow switch, safety thermostat and integral contractor/relay. Water can be flowed from either direction. Stainless steel models are not recommended for salt water use.
316 Stainless Steel Models

SSIL1 1.5 SSIL2 2 SSIL3 2
kW Volts
115 115 230
Phase(s)
1 1 1
Amps
13 17.4 9
23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5"
LxWxH
Bolt-On Center Width
12.5" 12.5" 12.5"
$ 560.00 560.00 560.00
3-Phase Equipment
Pure Titanium Models

TIL1 TIL2 TIL3 TIL4 TIL5 TIL6 TIL7 TIL8 TIL9 TIL12 TIL13 TIL15 TIL18 1.5 2 2 3 4 6 6 8 8 12 12 15 18
kW Volts
115 115 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
Phase(s)
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 3
Amps
13 17.4 9 13.6 18 27 24 36.4 33 53 31 38 46
23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 23" x 6" x 8.5" 27" x 6" x 8.5" 27" x 6" x 8.5" 27" x 6" x 8.5" 30" x 6" x 8.5" 30" x 6" x 8.5" 30" x 6" x 8.5" 30" x 6" x 8.5"
LxWxH
Bolt-On Center Width
12.5" 12.5" 12.5" 12.5" 12.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5" 16.5"
$ 730.00 730.00 730.00 763.00 796.00 912.00 1,197.00 945.00 1,229.00 1,397.00 1,355.00 1,397.00 1,544.00
Tech Talk 55
How to Extend Heater Service Life
Heaters are, of course, hot! The very high heat on the skin of the heater causes dissolved minerals like calcium to precipitate out of solution. The precipitant attaches itself to those hot spots, insulating the heater casing from the cooling water. Heat that can't get out builds up inside and, if it gets hot enough, heater failure will occur. Always make sure the heater has a rapid flow of water over its hot zone. Never let the water get too low or let a crust build up on the casing (this will void your warranty). Heater life can be greatly extended by removing insulating deposits as soon as possible. In hard water, inspect heaters for deposits once weekly initially and then as experience dictates. It doesn't take very much to cause a serious problem. To clean the heater, unplug the power and allow heater element to cool. Remove heater from the water and treat with a diluted bath of nitric acid (rust remover), citric acid or other lime and scale deposit remover. Be sure to wear eye protection and rubber gloves when working with acid. The heater should only require this bath for several minutes. When the scale deposits begin breaking up or dissolving, remove the heater from the acid and wipe down with a cloth. Rinse with water. Place heater back into service. If an acid solution is not handy, use a steel wire brush to brush off the deposits. Be sure to clean the area where the small diameter tube rests behind the heater tube, as this area is especially vulnerable to deposit buildups. Care should be taken not to scratch, gouge or wear away the metal surface of the heater when using the brushing technique.
286
Heaters
Heat Exchangers
Ti-Tech Heat Exchangers

Freon to waterheating or cooling applications.
Salt water use. Heaters. Fishing boats. Aquariums.
Tube-In-Shell Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger

These high-efficiency, compact heat exchangers are perfect for installations where space is limited. Constructed of high-quality, corrosion-resistant stainless steel (AISI 316), these units are designed for low head loss and reduced pumping costs. Pressure rated at 140 psi. Connections are FNPT. Call for sizing assistance. One-year warranty.
Boiler Loop Connection In/Out In/Out
3/4"
Chillers. Heat pumps. Lobster tanks. Marine condensers.
These Freon to liquid coils have become very popular. With applications in aquaculture, air conditioning, petrochemical and numerous other industries, Polar Eyes heat exchangers have proven to be incredibly resilient. The use of pure titanium has completely eliminated the most significant problem to face heat exchangers corrosion. Titanium is virtually impervious to saltwater corrosion. The refrigerant tube joints of all HX series heat exchangers come complete with transition swage fittings, titanium to copper for ease of installation. This transition joint is achieved by way of a flareless swage fitting and can withstand 1,000-psi test pressure. The joint can be subjected to brazing-type temperatures (with suitable heat sinks) within 4" of the joint. The top plate consists of a plenum manifold, precision seal retainer groove and quality titanium welding. The coils are housed in a compact 6" diameter polyethylene case (shell) that can withstand pressure up to 30 psi. The case features a removable titanium flange for easy internal cleaning and 11/2" slip fittings are built in for attaching PVC pipe or PVC unions. The flange features a port for a temperature probe. Polar Eyes titanium heat exchangers are priced well below the competition by virtue of their novel design and proprietary manufacturing techniques. With prices this low for titanium, you'll never go back to coated copper, copper/nickel or stainless steel coils again. Maximum flowrate is 30 gpm. One-year warranty. These are the "E" Series, featuring a modified manifold and plenum, with the addition of a venturi to equalize pressure in the coils. This improves efficiency by 40% over standard units!

IHX80 IHX135 IHX200 IHX260 IHX400
1" 1" 1" 1"
11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2"
Rec. Flow (Gpm)
40 55 65 80 95
Head Loss BTU L x W (Ft H2 O) Input/hr
.3 2.7 4.5 6.0 8
80,000 135,000 200,000 260,000 400,000
17" x 7" 6 $ 435.00 14" x 6" 8 698.53 19" x 6" 11 831.00 24" x 6" 14 977.00 42" x 6" 24 1,400.00
Ship Wt (lbs)
Each
HX10E HX16E HX23E BKF6
# of Coils Hp
1 2 17" 23" 4 lbs 2 3 17" 23" 5 lbs 3 4 24" 30" 7 lbs Replacement Inlet/Outlet Fitting
Length
OAL
Ship Wt
$ 668.85 771.75 927.15 9.55
ihx80
C F
10 50
15 59
20 68
22 72
24 75
26 79
28 83
30 86
35 95
Titanium exchangers carry a one-year warranty on all parts. HX cases have a lifetime warranty!
Titanium Heat Exchangers

Designed to be used in conjunction with boilers, these in-line heat exchangers are very efficient at heating water in recirculating systems and ponds. The heavy-duty, multitube heat exchangers are constructed of titanium and housed in an injectionmolded polyamide body. Fresh and salt water compatible. Primary inlet/outlet (from/to boiler) is 1" FNPT, one-way check valve included. The shell inlet/outlet (from/to tanks) is 2" slip, maximum pressure 29 psi. Five-year warranty.
Great Value
Ti-Tech titanium heat exchangers offer the aquaculture industry the most reliable method of heat transference!
hx10E
Power (kW) BTUs/hr Length* 20 68,000 21" 40 136,000 21" 70 239,000 26"
Tube Flowrate 3.9 gpm 7.4 gpm 13 gpm
Shell Flowrate 44 gpm 66 gpm 88 gpm
*Primary @ 160195C
Ship Wt
49NT20 49NT40 49NT70
20 kW 40 kW 70 kW
9 lbs 11 lbs 16 lbs
$ 710.00 806.45 1,022.22
49Nt20
Chillers
In-Line
287
Delta Star Research Chillers

These high-quality, in-line water chillers are built with helical titanium evaporator coils for maximum efficiency. Titanium evaporators have become the aquaculture industry standard because they are fish-safe and salt water compatible. Their low profile allows for easy placement in tight places. The quiet, internal, spring-mounted hermetic motor/compressor, manufactured by Tecumseh, provides years of reliable service. Larger sizes from 2 hp to 10 hp (9,000120,000 BTUs/hr), and custom designed units are available. For a quote, please call us with your requirements.
Standard Features
Charged with 134A Freon. These chillers will be factory set to operate most efficiently at your desired cooling temperature. Specify the temperature at time of order. All chillers come standard with a digital electronic controller mounted on a 4' cable, remote from the chiller unit. It displays temperature, set point, minimum and maximum in either Fahrenheit degrees (1) or Celsius. A titanium sensor probe with a 6' cable is included with the controller. Prices below include temperature controller, ABS cover and crating charge (these AES standards are typically "add-ons" from other manufacturers). Units listed are all 60 Hz with 4' power cords. Maximum water pressure for all chillers is 20 psi. Sizes 1/5 1/3 hp ship Ground; 1/2 hp and above ship motor freight. Prices are FOB CA. Allow 2 weeks for delivery. Two-year warranty. Made in USA. Standard models operate between 6580F. Option A: Allows an operating range between 5065F (1018C; add an "A" to the part number). Option B: Allows adjustable temperature range of 4080F (4.527C; add a "B" to the part number). Important Temperature Range Information: Water chillers must be built for different water temperatures in order to work efficiently and to provide the full rated BTU heat transfer.
1/4 1/3 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4
ae3
Most hi p Units S y a Same D
AE3 AE4 AE5 AE52 AE6 AE62 AE7 AE8
Hp Volts Running Amps BTUs/hr
1 11/2
115 115 115 230 115 230 230 230
5.4 7.2 9.5 4.8 13.0 7.0 7.2 10.5
3,080 4,050 6,000 6,000 9,500 9,500 12,000 18,000
Min/Max Flow (Gpm)
8/15 10/20 12/25 12/25 15/30 15/30 20/35 25/40
Inlet/Outlet
3/4" 3/4" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2"
19" x 12" x 11" 23" x 14" x 11" 24" x 16" x 13" 24" x 16" x 13" 25" x 21" x 15" 26" x 21" x 15" 27" x 24" x 15" 31" x 26" x 19"
Dimensions
Ship Wt
Standard
$ 868 924 1,400 1,400
Option A
951 1,006 1,483 1,483
Option B
1,075 1,130 1,607 1,607 1,947 1,947 2,271 3,470
Water-Cooled Chillers
Becoming increasingly popular in the aquaculture and aquarium industries, these in-line industrial water chillers feature water-cooled condensing units, making them ideal for installations with an existing freshwater supply. They use water to cool the condenser instead of air provided by a fan. Sources of cooling water could include a facility's chilled water loop, municipal water, cooling tower and well or spring water. The chillers' low heat emission and compact size make them perfect for placement in tight spaces with minimal ventilation. Units include ABS cover, temperature controller and a helix titanium coil. Chillers operate within 4080F (4.527C). Allow 4 weeks for delivery. Prices are FOB CA, motor freight. Made in USA.

7WC
7WC w/ABS Cover
One-year warranty. Digital temperature controller. High efficiency. 134A Freon refrigerant.
Hp* Volts Amps
Temperature range down to 40F. Fresh or salt water compatible. Helix titanium coil. Quiet operation.
BTUs/hr Dimensions Each
1/3 4WC 115 7.5 1/2 5WC 115 9.5 1/2 6WC 230 4.3 3/4 7WC 115 11.3 3/4 8WC 230 5.7 9WC 1 230 7.0 10WC 11/2 230 9.5 *Larger sizes up to 20 hp available.
4,050 6,000 6,000 9,500 9,500 12,000 18,000
24" x 16" x 13" 26" x 24" x 15" 26" x 24" x 15" 26" x 24" x 15" 26" x 24" x 15" 26" x 24" x 15" 28" x 26" x 18"
$ 1,630 2,118 2,118 2,206 2,206 2,520 3,450
Larger Size Shown (5 hp)
288
Chillers
Heat Exchangers/Chiller Barrel Packages/Ice Probe
Heat Exchanger Packages

A complete, water-to-water heat exchanger package for hot and cold water loop systems. Fresh and salt water safe, the compact design and quiet operation make these systems perfect for indoor applications. Each package includes titanium heat exchanger, stainless steel mounting stand, PVC plastic shell, digital temperature controller, three-way water solenoid valve, flow meter, in-line strainer and customized plumbing. This preassembled and ready-to-install system only requires a 115V power source and a hot or cold water supply. The entire heat exchanger can be installed in less than an hour. CPVC shells also available. Ship directly from the manufacturer. Note: These heat exchangers directly absorb or reject heat from the tank system water into another water source (hot or cold).
Hx-240W
Chiller Barrel Packages

Preassembled and ready to install. Preplumbed and wired with TXV. Moisture indicator.
Flow switch. Digital temperature controller. 24V operation.
Aqua Logic DX Chiller packages are complete refrigerant-to-water systems that are safe in both fresh and salt water. Each package includes: titanium tube and PVC shell evaporator, stainless steel mounting stand, digital temperature controller, TXV, flow switch, moisture indicator and customized plumbing. If being used with a heat pump condensing unit, add "-HP" to part number (call for pricing). Note that packages built for cooling only WILL NOT work on heat pump condensing unit. Condensing unit must be supplied at the source (or can be purchased separately when ordering). Ship via motor freight, FOB CA. One-year warranty.
Nominal Hp/BTUs per Hr/kW Process Water Process Min/Max Water Flowrate (Gpm) I/O Refrigerant Connection Size High/Low (ODF)
Hx-3Dx Hx-4Dx Hx-60x Hx-90x Hx-120x Hx-24Dx Hx-36Dx Hx-48Dx Hx-60Dx Hx-900x Hx-1200x Hx-180Dx Hx-240Dx
8/15 10/20 12/25 20/35 1 / 12,000 / 3.5 25/40 2 / 24,000 / 7 20/40 3 / 36,000 / 10.5 20/40 4 / 48,000 / 14 30/60 5 / 60,000 / 17.5 30/60 7.5 / 90,000 / 26.3 90/180 10 / 120,000 / 34 90/180 15 / 175,000 / 51.2 90/180 20 / 233,000 / 65.3 90/180
1/4 / 3,080 / .9 1/3 / 4,050 / 1.1 1/2 / 6,000 / 1.7 3/4 / 9,500 / 2.6
3/4" FIPT 3/4" FIPT 11/2" FIPT 11/2" FIPT 11/2" FIPT
2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 3" Slip 3" Slip 3" Slip 3" Slip
/ 3 / 8" / 3 / 8" / 1/2" / 1/2" / 5 / 8" 3 / 8 " / 5 / 8" 3 / 8 " / 5 / 8" 3/8" / 7/8" 3/8" / 7/8" 1/2" / 13/8" 1/2" / 15/8" 5/8" / 15/8" 5/8" / 15/8"
3 / 8" 3 / 8" 3 / 8" 3 / 8" 3 / 8"
$ 970 990 1,010 1,180 1,350 2,535 2,810 2,975 3,255 5,810 6,675 8,380 11,070
Hx-3W Hx-4W Hx-6W Hx-9W Hx-12W Hx-24W Hx-36W Hx-48W Hx-60W Hx-90W Hx-120W Hx-180W Hx-240W
3,000/.9 4,000/1.1 6,000/1.7 9,000/2.6 12,000/3.5 24,000/7 36,000/10.5 48,000/14 60,000/17.5 90,000/26.3 120,000/35.1 180,000/52.7 240,000/70.2
Nominal BTUs/ hr/kW
3/4" FPT 3/4" FPT 11/2" FPT 11/2" FPT 11/2" FPT
Process Water In/Out
2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip 2" Slip
FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT FPT 1" FPT 11/2" FPT 11/2" FPT
Water Supply Loop I/O

1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
$ 693 716 829 896 1,064 1,895 2,420 2,571 2,850 5,445 6,555 8,380 10,780
Hx-60dx
Coolworks Ice Probe

Efficientdirectly converts electricity into cooling. Reliablefan is only moving part. Easy to installone hole, one nut. Safelow-voltage operation. Environmentally friendlyno chemicals or gases. Can use temperature controller (see p. 284).
The Coolworks Ice Probe uses advanced thermoelectric technology to directly convert electricity into cooling power. Its unique and patented design is based upon Peltier's principle, making the Ice Probe a highly efficient miniature heat pump! The durable aluminum probe is coated with an FDA-approved epoxy, making these units ideal small coolers for miniature aquariums, bait tanks, bioassay research, hydroponics and even potable water systems. The units are capable of cooling 10 gallons of water 20F below ambient temperature in an insulated tank (just a few degrees in a noninsulated tank with heavy lighting). Probes can be mounted through the side of a tank, using the molded bulkhead kit included (11/4" hole required) or can be immersed (probe end only). Temperature controller is not included; we recommend TC11. Weighing only 2 lbs, each Ice Probe includes a separate 12VDC power supply and draws only 50 watts. Ship weight 5 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. AE9 $ 132 119/4+
In-Line/Drop-In
Chillers
289
Delta Star Aquarium Chillers

The Aqua Logic Delta Star aquarium in-line water chillers are designed for aquarium applications where a limited temperature range between 6580F (1827C) is needed (for colder temperature ranges, see the Aqua Logic Delta Star Research Chillers on page 330). They are built with oversized titanium evaporator coils that are safe in both fresh and salt water. The quiet, internally mounted Tecumseh compressor is spring-mounted and will provide years of service. Chillers are charged with ozonefriendly refrigerant (134A Freon ). Chillers include a digital electronic temperature controller mounted on a 4' cable, remote from the chiller unit. A titanium sensor probe with a 6' cable is included with the controller. Controller displays temperature, set point, minimum and maximum in either Fahrenheit degrees (1) or Celsius. ABS cover included. Maximum water pressure for all chillers is 20 psi. All models listed are 115V/60 Hz only, with 4' power cords. All units ship Ground, FOB CA; most units ship in 48 hours! Two-year warranty. Made in USA. AE3 AE4 AE5
Running Hp Amps
1/4 1/3 1/2
Cyclone Titanium Coil Chiller

Installs in any tank in 20 minutes!
Place this chiller near the tank, drop the titanium coil in the water and turn it on. It's that easy! Water circulation past the coil is required. If there is no circulation, place an air diffuser under or attach to the coil. The high efficiency of this chiller is due to its unique helical coil design.
ae3D
5.4 7.2 9.5
BTUs/ hr
3,080 4,050 6,000
Min/Max Flow (Gpm) I/O Dimensions
8/15 10/20 12/25
3/4" 3/4" 11/2"
19" x 12" x 11" 66 lbs $ 868 23" x 14" x 11" 68 lbs 924 24" x 16" x 13" 120 lbs 1,400
Ship Wt
One-half (1/2) hp units come with 6' flexible stainless steel lines. Units under 1/2 hp have 5' flexible lines feeding the 21/2" diameter chilling coil. All chillers come with ABS plastic cover and a remote digital electronic controller which displays temperature, set point in either F (1) or C, mounted in a NEMA enclosure. All Aqua Logic chillers will be factory set to operate most efficiently at your specified cooling temperature. You must specify at time of order. All units have been pretested and have 60-Hz motors with 4' power cords. 1/5 to 1/3-hp chillers ship Ground. Larger sizes ship motor freight. All prices FOB CA. Two-year warranty. Made in USA. Most units ship in 48 hours. Use the chart in Tech Talk 59 to determine the horsepower required for your application. Basic: Chillers operate within a temperature range of 6580F (1827C). Option A: Allows an operating range between 5065F (1018C)add an "A" to part number.
Maximum Running Rated BTU Hp Volts Amps Removal Dimensions w/Cover (L x W x H) Ship Option Wt Basic A
Most p hi Units SDay Same
AE3
AE3D AE4D AE5D AE5D2
1/4 1/3 1/2 1/2
115 115 115 230
5.4 7.2 9.5 4.8
3,080 4,050 6,000 6,000
15" x 12" x 11" 19" x 14" x 11" 19" x 16" x 13" 19" x 16" x 13"
47 lbs $ 939 1,112 56 lbs 994 1,196 100 lbs 1,519 1,690 100 lbs 1,519 1,690
Drop-in coil chillers are perfect for:

Hydroponics. Emergencies.
Fisheries research. Use in high organics.
Temporary applications. Education systems.
TrimLine Titanium Chillers

These chillers have the same reliable design and features as the Delta Star and Cyclone chillers by Aqua Logic, but in a more compact package. The sleek chillers have a brushed stainless steel enclosure and ABS panel inserts. Both models use the helical coil heat exchanger design and include digital temperature controllers mounted with a 4' cable, remote from the chiller unit. They display temperature, setpoint, minimum and maximum in F or C. A titanium sensor probe with a 6' cable is included with the controller. Drop-in coil units come with 5' flexible stainless steel lines attached to a 21/2" diameter remote chilling coil. All units but 1/2 hp and larger ship Ground. Two-year warranty. Made in USA. Basic: Chillers operate within a temperature range of 6580F (1827C). Option A: Allows an operating range between 5065F (1018C)add an "A" to part number.
tld2 tlc2
Flow-Through Models
TLD3 TLD4 TLD5 TLD6
Hp
1/4 1/3 1/2 1/2
BTUs/hr
3,080 4,050 6,000 6,000
Volts
115 115 115 230
Amps
5.4 7.2 9.5 9.5
Min/Max Gpm
810 1012 1215 1215
Dimensions (L x W x H)
17" x 9" x 21" 19" x 9" x 21" 21" x 9" x 24" 21" x 9" x 24"
Inlet/Outlet
3/4" 3/4" 11/2" 11/2"
Weight
$ 924 994 1,488 1,488
Each
Option A
1,008 1,078 1,572 1,572
Drop-In Coil Models

TLC3 TLC4 TLC5 TLC6
1/4 1/3 1/2 1/2
3,080 4,050 6,000 6,000
115 115 115 230
5.4 7.2 9.5 4.8
810 1012 1215 1215
12" x 9" x 21" 16" x 9" x 21" 16" x 9" x 24" 16" x 9" x 24"
N/A N/A N/A N/A
$ 999 1,042 1,618 1,618
1,174 1,216 1,792 1,792
290
Chillers
Aquarium/Tech Talk
Aquarium Chillers by SeaChill

Patented titanium exchanger ensures energy-saving efficiency!
Get stable, consistent temperatures from Teco's SeaChill aquarium chillers. They are easy to installbarbed in-line connections are included, and no hard plumbing is required. Units have a modern look, sturdy construction and a small footprinta perfect fit for an aquarium stand. The digital thermostat with LED display will maintain your desired set temperature within 1F. The air filter is easily removed for maintenance, and a flashing display will indicate when it is obstructed. 115V/60 Hz. Two-year warranty. SCTR5: 12.5" L x 9.5" W x 13.5" H SCTR10, SCTR15, SCTR20: 17" L x 11" W x 18" H SCTR30, SCTR60: 24" L x 15" W x 22" H.
Hp Watts Flowrate (gpm) Capacity (gal)
SCTR5 SCTR10 SCTR15 SCTR20 SCTR30 SCTR60
1/12 1/8 1/5 1/3 1/2
180 200 230 420 818 998
2.54.5 313 313 313 4.513.5 4.513.5
60 120 90200 130500 750 1,300
$ 440 575 695 795 1,595 1,925
SCTR5
SCTR15
SCTR60
AquaticEco.com
King penguin ( Aptenodytes patagonicus).
Tech Talk 59
Chiller Installation & Sizing Tips
1. Insulate water lines to and from chillers. 2. Insulate as much of the water tank as possible. 3. Keep the chiller well ventilated. The higher the temperature around the chiller, the longer it has to work. 4. Submersible water pumps add heat to the water. If a submersible pump must be used, choose the next size larger chiller. 5. Water must be run through the chiller at all times while unit is on. 6. For tanks smaller than 3,000 gallons, allow 24 hours for initial chilling. For tanks larger than 3,000 gallons, allow 48 hours or more. 7. Reduce biofouling by filtering water prior to chiller. Check the filter often. If it clogs and reduces water flow below the minimum required, freeze damage can occur. 8. Consult AES technical department for flow-through and other applications. 9. Ambient air temperature for sizing should be measured directly above the tank to be chilled. 10. An oversized chiller will not cost more to operate, as it only turns on when needed and runs for a shorter time.
Hp
1/6 1/5 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4
AES Chiller Sizing Chart (in Gallons of Water Cooled) for Uninsulated Tanks
Temperature Difference From Ambient (F)
1 11/2 2 3 4 5 8 10
10 90 144 260 360 550 826 1,321 2,115 2,640 3,960 5,280 6,600 10,560 13,200
20 45 72 130 181 280 420 672 1,075 1,320 1,980 2,640 3,300 5,280 6,600
30 30 50 90 130 200 300 500 800 850 1,275 1,700 2,125 3,400 4,250
40 23 40 70 100 154 231 370 555 670 1,005 1,340 1,675 2,680 3,350
Splash aerators, degassing devices, etc., can add a great deal of heat not considered in the above chart. For insulated tanks (at least 2" on all sides), decreased heat loss will require less hp.
In-Line/Heat Pumps
Chillers
291
Multi-Temp Water Chillers

These larger chillers are used in aquaculture, public aquariums, live seafood holding systems and hydroponics. Each has an insulated heat exchanger with titanium helix coils and commercial duty condensing units mounted on a stainless steel frame. Suitable for outdoor installations. Digital temperature controller is in a watertight NEMA 4X box with easy push-button programming. Controller can display in either F or C. Chillers operate between 4080F (4.527C). Chillers 210 hp have a 2" slip inlet/outlet and installed water flow switch to shut them down should flow to the heat exchanger stop. Water pressure should not exceed 40 psi. 230V models listed, 460V models also available. Ship motor freight from factory; allow a 4-week build time. For export see chiller barrel packages (see Index). Split models available at no extra cost (add "-SPLIT " to part number). One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Nominal BTUs/hr Volts/ Flow (Gpm) Dimensions Hp* Capacity Phase(s) Amps Min/Max L" x W" x H" Ship Wt (lbs)
MT-5
Heat Pumps
They heat and cool!
If you need to heat and cool your water in the same season, get a heat pump to do itautomatically! Just set the electronic dial to the desired temperature and these heat pumps will heat or cool to within 1F of the setpoint. LED indicators show which mode is in operation. Like all Aqua Logic chillers, these are suitable for both fresh and salt water. They feature titanium helix coils and powder-coated shrouds. 2" PVC slip, in and out fittings on 210 hp; 3" PVC slip on larger units. 230V models listed; 460V also available. We offer these heat pumps with water temperature operating ranges between 45 and 85F (7 to 24C); you must specify desired temperature operating range when ordering. Units will not work efficiently when air temperature is under 45F (7C). Note min/max flow requirements (water pump not included). Water pressure in pipes should not exceed 20 psi. If located outdoors, units should be protected from direct weather. Price includes dual setpoint electronic temperature controller with digital display. Allow a 4-week build time. Ship from factory via motor freight. One-year warranty. Made in USA. Note: These heat pumps reject heat from the refrigerant system into the tank system.
BTUs/hr Flowrate Dimensions Ship Cooling Volts/ (Gpm) Amps Including Cover Wt (lbs) Hp* Capacity Phase(s) Min/Max @230V* (L" x W" x H")
MT-1 2 24,000 230/1 11.0 20/40 36 x 29 x 54 MT-3 3 36,000 230/1 17.3 20/40 36 x 29 x 54 MT-4 3 36,000 230/3 11.6 20/40 36 x 29 x 54 MT-5 4 48,000 230/1 23.7 30/60 45 x 34 x 60 MT-6 4 48,000 230/3 14.7 30/60 45 x 34 x 60 MT-7 5 60,000 230/1 29.0 30/60 52 x 34 x 62 MT-8 5 60,000 230/3 20.5 30/60 52 x 34 x 62 MT-9 71/2 90,000 230/3 31.0 60/120 54 x 37 x 69 MT-10 10 120,000 230/3 40.1 60/120 54 x 37 x 69 *Larger sizes and additional voltage options available.
350 $ 4,675 380 5,570 380 5,570 450 6,585 450 6,585 470 7,390 470 7,390 830 10,655 900 12,375
Each
HP1 11/2 18,000 230/1 20/40 9.7 36 x 29 x 54 365 $ 4,760 HP2 2 24,000 230/1 20/40 12.6 36 x 29 x 54 365 5,165 HP3 3 36,000 230/1 20/40 17.9 36 x 34 x 60 435 6,410 HP33 3 36,000 230/3 20/40 11.6 36 x 34 x 60 435 6,410 HP4 4 48,000 230/1 30/60 23.7 45 x 37 x 68 490 7,265 HP43 4 48,000 230/3 30/60 14.7 45 x 37 x 68 490 7,265 HP5 5 60,000 230/1 30/60 29.0 52 x 37 x 60 530 8,320 HP53 5 60,000 230/3 30/60 20.5 52 x 37 x 60 530 8,320 HP7.5 71/2 90,000 230/3 60/120 31.0 54 x 37 x 69 900 11,850 HP7 10 120,000 230/3 60/120 40.1 54 x 37 x 69 995 12,590 HP15 15 180,000 230/3 120/180 67.2 106 x 40 x 67 1,400 23,260 HP20 20 240,000 230/3 120/180 83.1 106 x 40 x 75 1,600 28,810 *Larger sizes and additional voltage options available.
Heat Pumps
Delta Star heat pumps automatically handle both heating and cooling duties in fresh and saltwater applications. Titanium heat exchangers in Delta Star heat pumps mean you get the best in corrosion resistance. A properly sized and installed heat pump will provide stable, controlled water temperature. Pumps include a dual stage digital temperature controller in a NEMA 4X-rated waterproof enclosure and will maintain water temperatures from 4085F (529C). Controller will keep the temperature within 1 degree of the set point in F or C. In heating mode these heat pumps work with the liquid refrigerant (Freon) in reverse. Pumps should be mounted indoors where air temperatures stay above 55F. Note: When in heating mode, place the unit in a drip pan that has a drain connection (condensation can form a puddle around the unit).
BTUs/ Flowrate Inlet/ Dimensions Ship Wt Hp Volts Hr (Gpm) Outlet Amps (L" x W" x H") (Lbs)
DSHP-4 1/3 DSHP-5 1/2 DSHP-6 1/2 DSHP-7 3/4 DSHP-8 3/4 DSHP-9 1 DSHP-10 11/2
115 115 230 115 230 230 230
4,000 6,000 6,000 9,500 9,500 12,000 18,000
10/20 12/25 12/25 15/30 15/30 20/35 25/40
3/4" 7.2 11/2" 9.5 11/2" 4.8 11/2" 13 11/2" 7 11/2" 7.2 11/2" 10.5
23 x 13 x 14 24 x 16 x 13 24 x 16 x 13 25 x 21 x 15 25 x 21 x 15 27 x 24 x 14 31 x 26 x 19
90 $ 1,585 135 1,920 135 1,920 170 2,100 170 2,100 180 2,500 225 3,900
HP5
3-Phase Equipment
DSHP-4
292
Airlifts
Pumps
Airlifts/Ventur/Tech Talk
We have designed these PVC pipe sections with simple removable fittings to save you time. These are straight PVC pipes suitable for almost any airlift application. The 1", 11/4" and 11/2" sizes use a single air inlet (the performance is the same as with 2 inlets). The 2", 3" and 4" sizes use two air inlets (note: more than two inlets typically do not improve performance in these size ranges). Sold complete with air fittings and 10' of vinyl air line of the size shown. Made in USA.
Typical * Cfm Range PVC Pipe Size & Air Tubing Size
Tech Talk 33
Airlift Notes
Airlifts are most efficient when moving water from one place to another within the water column. They become less efficient as the water is lifted higher above the surface. For our purpose here, we will split them into two categories: water-moving airlifts, and water-lifting airlifts, up to 4" in diameter.
AL5 Overall Length
Moving Water With Airlifts

Water is heavy when it is in the air, but weighs no more than the water around it when it is in the water. A water-moving airlift will translocate water using very little energy (compressed air). It just needs energy to accelerate and overcome friction. The more air that is injected and the deeper it goes, the more power available. An unconfined airlift doesn't even need a pipe. For example, an air diffuser moves a lot of water within its mass of bubbles.
.51.5 AL1 1" Airlift, 3/16" 8" 8" .51.5 AL1C 1" Airlift, Clear, 3/16" 8" .72 AL2 11/4" Airlift, 1/4" .72 AL2C 11/4" Airlift, Clear, 1/4" 8" 12.5 AL3 11/2" Airlift, 1/4" 8" 12.5 AL3C 11/2" Airlift, Clear, 1/4" 8" 1.53 AL4 2" Airlift, 1/4" 10" 1.53 AL4C 2" Airlift, Clear, 1/4" 10" 12" 24 AL5 3" Airlift, 1/4" 24 AL5C 3" Airlift, Clear, 1/4" 12" 12" 35 AL6 4" Airlift, 3/8" 35 AL6C 4" Airlift, Clear, 3/8" 12" *"Typical" means lifting water to a 4" (10 cm) height above the surface.
$ 8.26 11.38 10.75 15.72 10.75 15.72 17.45 24.68 19.15 34.41 19.29 43.68
Water-Lifting Airlifts
When trying to lift water to a high level, a water pump is simpler and more efficient than an airlift. However, raising water only slightly above the surface can be done easily and economically with compressed air and an airlift pipe.
Water-Lifting Guidelines
1. Do not use an air diffuser. Large bubbles work best, as they reduce water slippage. Air-injecting collars can improve performance slightly on short pipes, but, typically, they are not worth the installation and maintenance difficulty. 2. Smaller pipe diameters work best. If more water is needed, use multiples of small diameter pipes. Also, a sweep works better than an elbow.
Mighty Pump
This little venturi pump can drain 200 gallons per hour without electricity. It is powered by the force of water pressure from an ordinary garden hose. Works great for evacuating the last 1/4" of the water after pumping or siphoning. Simply connect the pump between two garden hoses and submerge it, then turn water on to initiate pumping. Never needs priming. MP264 $ 12.15
How Does It Work?

A. Water in the pipe is displaced with air, making the total weight within the pipe less than the weight outside the pipe. B. Since water seeks its own level by virtue of its weight (and its fluid nature), it will get pushed up an airlift pipe because the weight is less there (lower pressure). C. Ever hear the phrase, "Wind doesn't blow, it sucks"? It's true. The direction of flow is from high pressure to low.
Drains:

Pools Gardens Ponds Aquariums Tubs & Tanks

Weight Outside of Pipe
Weight Inside of Pipe Weight Inside of Pipe
Weight Outside of Pipe
The level of service was extremely responsive. In this day and age of poor service and belligerence, it was enjoyable to experience a company who prides themselves on taking care of the customer. I am very satisfied with Aquatic EcoSystems' professional and rapid service, as well as the quality and value of the products. I will certainly make them one of my go-to companies. Thank You,
Bill Ashling
Frogspawn
Dosing/Peristaltic
Pumps
293
Peristaltic Pumps
Use these fixed-speed, general purpose pumps for dispensing nutrients, chemicals and liquid feeds. Features: self-priming to 29 feet, act as check valves when off, fluid touches only the tube and easy servicing. Controlled by an on/off switch. If required, they can run for hours or along with a repeat cycle timer for variable flowrates. Pumps come with four sizes of Norprene tubing that can also be used to vary the flowrate. One-year warranty. 115V/60 Hz. 907-014 907-036 907-058 14-rpm Pump 36-rpm Pump 58-rpm Pump $ 172 181 189 907-172 907-282 172-rpm Pump 282-rpm Pump 211 262
Diaphragm-Metering Pumps
These diaphragm pumps offer excellent metering capabilities and chemical resistance at affordable prices. They are extremely quiet and ideal for dosing systems with buffer solutions, chemical additives, fertilizers, etc. Self priming, they include 4' of suction tubing with strainer, 8' of 3/8" I.D. discharge hose, check valve assembly and complete instructions. The wetted end (those parts that contact the solution being pumped) is constructed of SAN, PVC, Teflon, Hypalon and polyethylene. Pumps are single output variable control with a max pressure of 100 psi. 115V/60 Hz includes a 5' power cord. 230V/50 Hz available for export by special order. MP103 MP107 MP115 MP130 3 gpd 7 gpd 15 gpd 30 gpd
Ship Wt (lbs) MP115
7 7 7 7
$ 270.80 270.80 270.80 270.80
AquaDose Systems
These gravity drip systems are ideal for dosing marine reef supplements, pH adjusting solutions or hydroponic nutrients. They feature an easy open cap for convenient refilling, fully adjustable valves and require no air pump. Available in two sizes, the systems come complete with solution tank, control valves and tubing. KD2 KD5 KD6
Weight Lbs (kg)
907-058
Note: Not for continuous duty.
2.5 gal (9.5 liters) 5 gal (19 liters) Repl. Hose Kit
$ 47.00 59.00 14.60
44.06/4+ 55.78/4+ 13.46/4+
Flowrate (mL/min) @ Tubing ID (inch [mm])

.062 (1.6) .125 (3.2) 187 (4.9) .250 (6.3) Amps
907-014 907-036 907-058 907-172 907-282
3 8 12 36 60
12 30 49 144 237
28 72 116 344 564
48 126 208 602 987
.37 .90 1.2 2.2 3.3/2.2
4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3) 6 (2.7)

KD6
KD2
Dosing Pump w/pH Controller

This unique dosing pump has an integrated pH controller. It features .01 pH resolution and an internal alarm that is activated whenever the pH value varies by more than 2 pH units from the set point. Proportional dosing slows the pump when the measured pH level approaches the set value, ensuring precise dosage. Kynar , Viton and Tefl on materials are used for all parts that come into contact with liquid. Maximum flowrate is .04 gpm @ 58 psi (50 gpd). Pump is 115V, 50/60Hz and includes power cord, discharge and suction lines, valves and instructions. Weighs 11 lbs. Connects to any BNC pH electrode (sold separately). One-year warranty. DS21 2910B/5 Pump w/pH Controller Submersible pH Electrode $ 894 111
Tech Talk 110

Inlet Strainers
Pump inlets can become quickly clogged by just a few leaves, a plastic bag, a small amount of debris or even a dead fish. Inlet strainers are devices that keep debris out of a pump that might otherwise damage or clog it. They generally are not designed to be water filters (requiring frequent cleaning), but rather pump protectors. A pump's performance is greatly diminished when its inlet is restricted. To avoid flow reduction or stoppage, you will need an inlet strainer with a large enough surface area to not impede water flow, even when partially clogged. Another reason you need a large surface area strainer is to reduce the water velocity at the strainer inlets, so that debris, small fish and animals do not become stuck. To prevent this blockage, we recommend that the strainer screen surface area be a minimum of one square foot for every ten gallons per minute pumped. The strainer opening should be small enough to keep out anything that will clog the pump, the pump's strainer and the orifices of any valves, etc., after the pump.Your water filtering device, such as sand filters, bead filters, cartridge filters, etc., should be located just after the pump. Stringy materials can be a problem because they can go through small strainer openings and wrap themselves on the pump's impeller. To prevent this, use a very large surface area with a strainer inlet that creates a tortuous path. Spun polypropylene, open cell foam and even multiple wraps of window screen over a strainer can be used for this purpose. A check valve (also known as a foot valve) can be attached to the inlet strainer in applications where the pump will lose its prime when shut off. The check valve's orientation is important for rapid and positive closure.
Range
0 to 14 pH
Resolution
.01 pH
Dosage
Proportional Acid or Base
DS21
294
Pumps
Hand/12V/Submersible
Manual Siphon Pump

A great way to safely transfer gasoline, diesel fuel, water, etc. Made of high-impact plastic, this pump functions as a high-volume siphon or regular lift pump. Comes equipped with a 6' piece of 7/16" I.D. inlet hose and 3' of outlet. Pump is only 9" long and 11/4" in diameter. Use it to start a siphon, leave it unattended to empty the vessel, then use it again as a pump to remove the remainder. Made in USA. SP9 $ 52.95
12V Water Pump

Good for solar power applications
This salt water compatible, positive displacement diaphragm pump has three independent pumping chambers, giving three-way dependability. Self-priming to 12', it can run dry without damage. It pumps 3.6 gpm maximum flow (103' max head) and draws 6 amps. 1/2" MNPT in/out. Two-year warranty. Made in USA. DC12 $ 286
Submersible Pumps by Rule

Tank dewatering. Harvesting options. Emergency pumping.
Hauling truck use. Pit/Basement dewatering. Collecting operations.
Boat bilge pumping. Livewell recirculating.

R02
The safety aspect of 12VDC power should not be overlooked. These 12V pumps have brush type motors that will typically run for 2,000 hours or more, making them suitable and reliable for many temporary applications. Rule pumps feature snap-off strainers for easy cleaning; double-insulated, watercooled motors for longer life; Teflon seals; and an antiairlock plastic impeller. They will not burn out when run dry. Rule pumps are silent-running, energyeffi cient and maintenance-free. Float switch (R35 ): 12VDC, up to 14 amps. Turns on pump when water is 21/2", turns off at 1". One-year warranty.
R14
R55 (12VDC)
A "computerized brain" checks for the presence of water and turns on the pump only when necessary, making it perfect for brief and/or unattended dewatering applications.
27 24 21 18 Head (Feet) 15 12
0 R1
Eco-Switch
Featuring a nonmercury design, this fl oat switch is made to work with 12V water pumps. The switch operates with simple air pressure. As the water level rises, air rises in the air tube attached to the switch. This air pressure activates the switch that controls the pump. All wiring is out of the water. Switch can be mounted up to 10' away from the air tube. R24 R20A R02 R10 R14 R55 R81 R80 R88 R35 V1239 Pump, 6 gpm, 12VDC Pump, 17 gpm, 12VDC Pump, 25 gpm, 12VDC Pump, 33 gpm, 12VDC Pump, 61 gpm, 12VDC Pump, 61 gpm, 12VDC Hose, Plastic, 3/4" I.D. Hose, Plastic, 11/8" I.D. Hose, Plastic, 11/2" I.D. Float Switch w/o Fuse, 12VDC Eco-Switch, 12VDC
Amps
R 5+ R5
21/2 4 7 12 15 19 14
Outlet O.D.
3/4" 11/8" 11/8" 11/8" 11/2" 11/2"
14
$ 17.05 38.17 69.78 90.50 153.35 220.00 1.34/Ft 1.60/Ft 2.60/Ft 29.67 51.93
9 6 3 GPH
R
1,000
R0
2
2,000 3,000 4,000
4 20 R24
V1239
Important
R35 R88
Powerheads/Aquarium
Pumps
295
Powerheads, Aquarium
These energy-efficient, low-heat Rio powerheads are fully submersible and have adjustable valves for different flowrates. They include undergravel filters and adapters, air tubing and silencers and discharge adapters with venturi jets. Venturis can add oxygen and increase circulation for only a few cents a day. 115V/60 Hz, 6-ft power cord. Outlets fit 3/4" I.D. hose. UL-listed. One-year warranty. R600H R800H R1100 R1700 R3100
Watts
BIOFLO Rotating Nozzle

This inexpensive defl ector connects to the outlet of a powerhead and rotates clockwise, creating a beneficial wave effect. The internal gears produce current without added energy costs by using the power of the output water pressure. Includes adapters for most powerheads, measures 21/4" x 3". H1711 $ 13.50
6 12 22 23 73
Max Flow (Gpm)
3 4 6 11 15
Max Height
48" 60" 72" 96" 120"
Ship Wt (Lbs)
2 1.5 2 3 5
$ 18.90 24.10 25.80 43.55 72.90
H1711 shown on PU18
R1700
Mini Fountain Pumps

This mini water pump is excellent for tabletop fountains, aquariums or other applications that require a compact pump. Completely submersible and UL-listed! Features: 1/4" outlets, 115V/60 Hz, 3' power cords and a six-month warranty. The SP800 maximum flow is 1.2 gpm, max head is 18" and draws only 5 watts. SP985 max flow is 2.4 gpm, max head is 36" and draws 9 watts. SP800 SP985 SP986 Mini Pump, 2" x 2.2" Mini Pump, 2.4" x 2.7" Mini Pump w/Light $ 8.75 9.10 20.60
Each
7.44 7.74 17.51
6+
Powerheads
These Maxi-Jet powerhead pumps are useful in hatching tanks, aquariums, trickle and undergravel filters, etc. The sealed pumps can be used either submerged or external (with flooded suction). Suitable for salt and freshwater systems. 115V/60 Hz only.
PU18
PU15 PU16 PU17 PU18
Maxi-Jet 400 Maxi-Jet 600 Maxi-Jet 900 Maxi-Jet 1200
Watts
5 8 9 20
1.8 gpm 2.7 gpm 3.8 gpm 4.9 gpm
Flowrate
Maximum Pumping Height
29" 53" 46" 69"
$ 19.00 21.00 25.50 26.95
Each
17.67 19.53 23.72 25.06
6+
SP801
Magi-Klean Pump and Accessory Cleaner Powerheads

All AquaClear powerheads feature a patented pump with free-floating impeller, venturi aeration, variable flow control and an adjustable stem adapter. Models A201 and A301 feature a bidirectional flow outlet to control the flow vertically and horizontally. Models A402 and A802 offer both forward and reverse water flow options. Pumps are 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty. Safely removes lime/calcium deposits in 3 simple steps. Can be used anywhere where deposits have formed, including pumps, skimmers, heaters, filters and pipeworks. Removes even the toughest deposits simply and efficiently. Suitable for decalcifying any piece of equipment that can be removed from the aquarium. Includes three single-dose pouches; each creates 1/2 gallon of soaking solution. D10101 $ 9.95
A402
A201 A301 A402 A802
AquaClear Model 20 AquaClear Model 30 AquaClear Model 50 AquaClear Model 70
2.1 gpm 2.9 gpm 4.5 gpm 6.7 gpm
Flowrate
Watts
12 20 12 20
$ 29 32 41 54
296
Pumps
Submersible/Powerheads
Economy Pumps
A great value, these powerful submersible water pumps feature an alumina ceramic shaft. Suction cup mounting, 3/4" outlet and venturi assemblies for aeration are included. 115V/60 Hz, 6' power cord, six-month warranty.

Waterfall Pumps
Low head.
These pumps are oil-free and use a water-cooled, energy-efficient motor. Each has a 2" MPT/11/2" FPT outlet. Underwater use only, will pass 3/16" solids. 115V/60 Hz with 16' power cords. UL-listed. Two-year warranty.

HX2500 HX4500
Flowrate
4 gpm 10 gpm
Watts
22 70
Actual Wt
1 lb 2.2 lbs
$ 14.45 29.20
VP3500 VP5000
HX4500
Amps
4 7
Ship Wt
11 lbs 12 lbs
$ 143.00 174.00
Each
134.28 139.00
4+
HX2500
8 7 6
25 20
HX 4
Head (Feet)
Head (Feet)
5 4 3 2 1 1.67 3.3 5.0
15 10 5 GPM 10 20 30 40
VP3
VP5
0 50
500
000
HX
250
0
6.7 8.3 10.0 11.7
VP5000
50 60 70 80 100
GPM
Submersible Pumps

Submersible Pumps
TA815
Reef aquariums. Fish-only marine aquariums. ighly populated freshwater feeder H aquariums.
SEIO pumps deliver high volume at an affordable price. Pumps are energyefficient, transfer little heat and provide high, well-dispersed water movement. Ceramic shaft and durable, high-impact plastic make each pump reliable and long lasting. Fully submersible and can be used in both fresh and salt water. Includes all necessary mounting hardware and a 6', 115V power cord. Add "-I" to the part number for a replacement impeller kit (1-lb ship wt). TA815 TA816 TA817 TA818 TA819

These magnetic drive pumps can be used submersed or in-line by removing the integrated prefilter with sponge (flooded suction only). They include bottom-mounting brackets, barbed fittings and suction cups. Pumps are 115V, 50/60 Hz, CE/ LVD-approved. Six-month warranty.
Watts Inlet/ Outlet
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
WP22 Ship Wt
WP22 WP33 WP4 WP5
13 32 85 108
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 15.00 30.00 43.00 62.00
$ 42.50 59.45 69.75 71.55 80.90
Pump
Impeller Kit
12.60 18.75 21.95 25.15 32.45
Technical Information
Model # Volt Watts Max Head Max Flow
WP22 WP33 WP4 WP5
115V/60 Hz 115V/60 Hz 115V/60 Hz 115V/60 Hz
18 40 105 130
6 ft (180 cm) 7.2 ft (218 cm) 13.6 ft (415 cm) 12.8 ft (385 cm)
200 gal (757 L)/hr 350 gal (1,325 L)/hr 950 gal (3,596 L)/hr 1,125 gal (4,259 L)/hr
Mini-Jet Pumps
These small pumps provide exceptional flowrates. They feature adjustable output control. 11 5V/60 Hz, 5'8" power cord, 1/2" barbed outlet. Dimensions: 21/2" L x 11/2" W x 3" H. One-year warranty.
Watts
Self-Cleaning Pump Filter

Tired of intake screen maintenance?
The patented Uflo self-cleaning intake screen continuously backwashes itself with water diverted from the pump's discharge. Ideal for those difficult-to-clean submersible pond pumps/fountains as well as out-of-pond pumps. Suitable for pumps up to 26 gpm. Pipe/pump adapters fit 1/2" to 3/4" diameters. Ideal for mag drive pumps. 41/2" L x 41/2" W x 53/4" H . Weighs 1 lb. PF65 $ 60.42
PU13 PU14
Mini-Jet 404 Mini-Jet 606
5 5
Flowrate (Gpm)
.21.8 1.32.6
Max Height
32" 46"
$ 15.44 19.35
Each
14.20 17.80
6+
PU13
Pump (MD2) Not Included
Pumps Koralia Wavemaker by Hydor

The Koralia Wavemaker is a dedicated system that accepts several low-voltage Koralia controllable pumps (Wavemaker 2 supports two, Wavemaker 4 takes four). Timer-controllable alternating or synchronized flow modes recreate natural wave and tidal effects. Adjustable flowrate fine-tunes water movement to satisfy the needs of your saltwater aquarium and its inhabitants. These features allow you to adjust the power without rearranging your aquarium as corals grow and new corals are added. In addition to supporting up to four pumps, Wavemaker 4 also features LCD monitor and 4 preset programs. KORWV2 KORWV4 Wavemaker 2 Wavemaker 4
# of Pumps Supported
Koralia
297
Koralia Evolution
A compact, energy-saving controllable pump with great performance! Even the exclusive magnet suction-cup support has been improved with vibration reduction technology. Position it, plug it into a timer or directly into your electrical supply and watch your aquarium benefit from the powerful yet gentle flow. Shaftless impeller provides wide, gentle flow. Sphere joint allows adjustable flow direction, and you can position the pump where you like thanks to the included magnetic suction cup (supports glass or acrylic up to 20 mm thick). 115V/60 Hz. KOREVO750 KOREVO1050 KOREVO1400
Watts
2 4
Amps @ 115V 230V
1.7 2.2
.75 1.2
$ 223.95 341.95
4 5 6
12.5 gpm 17.5 gpm 23.3 gpm
Flowrate
Fresh Water
5090 gal 70125 gal 90160 gal
3050 gal 4570 gal 5590 gal
Salt Water
$ 39.79 46.59 55.09
KOREVO750
Koralia Nano Evolution

The new and improved Koralia Nanos now come in two models (240 gph and KORNAN425 425 gph), but remain compact and efficient. The magnet suction support and sphere joint have been strengthened and modified, allowing better flow direction. Both models can be safely run on a timer. Just choose which model is best suited for your aquarium and watch your creatures benefit from the flow of this efficient little powerhead. Sphere joint allows adjustable flow direction, and you can position the pump where you like thanks to the included magnetic suction cup (supports glass or acrylic up to 20 mm thick). 115V/60 Hz, 3.5 watts. KORNAN240 KORNAN425
Flowrate
Koralia 12V Pumps

Koralia 12V is a series of low-voltage circulation pumps from Hydor. All models are specifically designed to connect to the Koralia Wavemaker 2 and 4, guaranteeing a continuous and powerful water flow. Direct flow freely thanks to the special suction magnet.* The Wavemaker allows you to create waves and tidal effects, which are vital for the healthy maintenance of reef aquariums. Sphere joint allows adjustable flow direction. 12V. Models 58 have built-in fish net.
*Koralia Nano magnet fits tanks with glass/acrylic up to 10 mm (0.4") thick; Koralia 1, 2,
3 or 4 up to 15 mm (0.6") thick; Koralia 5, 6, 7, 8 from 12 to 20 mm (0.5 to 0.8") thick.
Watts Min Max Flowrate (gpm) Min Max
4 gpm 7 gpm
Fresh Water
1618 gal 2850 gal
1015 gal 1530 gal
Salt Water
$ 29.59 33.89
KORCTRNAN KORCTR1 KORCTR2 KORCTR3 KORCTR4 KORCTR5 KORCTR6 KORCTR7 KORCTR8
.6 .6 1.6 1.6 2.3 2 4 5 6
3.8 3.9 9.2 10 13.7 8 10 19 22
1.7 3 4.3 6.2 9.2 10 13.3 15 18.3
4.3 7.5 11.3 15.8 23.3 31.2 41.2 51.2 58.3
$ 32.95 35.95 43.95 46.95 50.95 83.95 103.95 117.95 129.95
Koralia Magnum Pumps

The new Koralia Magnum models give you incredible performance with extremely low power consumption. Compact in size and equipped with an electronic start up system, new technologic rotors and propeller. Built-in fish net provides extra safety, and you can position the pump where you like thanks to the included magnetic suction cup (supports glass or acrylic up to 20 mm thick). 115V/60 Hz. KORMAG5 KORMAG6 KORMAG7 KORMAG8
Watts
8 10 12 18
27.5 gpm 36.7 gpm 45 gpm 54.2 gpm
Flowrate
110180 gal 150250 gal 180300 gal 220360 gal
Fresh Water
70110 gal 90150 gal 110180 gal 130220 gal
Salt Water
$ 76.39 84.89 93.39 110.39
KORCTR6
KORMAG5
298

Pumps
Submersible/Fountainheads
Supreme Mag Drive Pumps

Low maintenance. Energy-efficient.
Quiet One Pumps

30 25 20 15 QP 15 10 5 QP 1
60 Hz
QP 21
Quiet operation. Magnetic drive. Energy-efficient. External or submersible. Small footprint, high flowrate.
These robust, epoxy-sealed, low-head, magnetic drive pumps can be used either in-line (above water) or submersed! Designed for fresh and salt water. The pump can be rotated to different positions for vertical or horizontal discharge. A foam pre-filter is included with pumps MD2 MD18 only. A plastic pre-filter is included with MD24. A 10' power cord is standard; 18' is available (see note under price block). UL-listed. MD2 MD7 have 1/2" FIPT inlet/MNPT outlet; MD9 MD18 have 3/4" FIPT inlet/MNPT outlet; MD24 has 1" FIPT inlet/MNPT outlet. 115V/60 Hz (will pump 25% less with 50 Hz). Three-year warranty.
MD12
Feet
QP 17 QP 1
6
20
QP 19
14 QP 13 QP 18 QP 12 QP 1
MD3
VOL2 FRP2
20
MD3
IMD2
Need a quiet water pump for your aquarium or research system? Quiet One pumps have a noise level less than 45 decibels and can be used in either above-water or submersible applications, except QP11, which is for submerged use only. A patented unidirectional impeller with ceramic bearing ensures longer life. Fins provide air cooling and/or water cooling. The 6' power cord pumps are excellent for aquariums and fountains close to a receptacle. Pond pumps include a spray nozzle assortment and have a 20' power cord. Add "P" after the part number to designate pond models. QP21P includes remote. 115V/60 Hz (available in 230V/50 Hz in quantity by special order). UL, C-UL, CE, TUV-GS listed. One-year warranty.
GPM 5
10
15
25
30
40
50
60
QP21P
15
Head (Feet)
10
MD
M D
9
MD
7
12
MD 24
Pond Models Too!

MD 18
QP17
5 MD
GPM
D2
MD3
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
28
32
36
40
44
QP11
MD2* MD3* MD5* MD7* MD9* MD12* MD18* MD24* FRP2 FRP12 MD24PF IMD2 IMD3 IMD4 12746 IMD5 IMD5B IMD6 IMD6B 12780 12790 VOL2 VOL3 VOL4 VOL5
Mag Drive Pump, 4.2 gpm 24 4 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 5.8 gpm 35 5 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 8.3 gpm 45 6 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 11.7 gpm 60 4 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 15.8 gpm 93 7 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 20 gpm 110 9 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 30 gpm 145 11 lbs Mag Drive Pump, 40 gpm 265 11 lbs Foam Pre-Filter for MD2 MD7 Foam Pre-Filter for MD9 MD18 Plastic Strainer for MD9 36 Replacement Impeller for MD2 Replacement Impeller for MD3 & MD5 Replacement Impeller for MD7 Replacement Impeller for MD9 Replacement Impeller for MD12 Replacement Impeller for MD12 (After 2001) Replacement Impeller for MD18 Replacement Impeller for MD18 (After 2001) Replacement Impeller for MD24 Replacement Impeller for MD36 Volute for MD2 & MD3 Volute for MD5 & MD7 Volute for MD9, MD12 & MD18 Volute for MD24 & MD36
Watts
Ship Wt
$ 56.65 60.50 71.00 78.50 99.00 137.00 148.00 179.00 6.83 10.95 9.25 11.25 13.35 13.35 20.10 18.55 18.55 31.40 31.40 40.25 46.15 5.75 5.75 7.25 8.60
Each
53.22 56.87 66.72 73.80 93.06 128.78 139.11 170.05
6+
QP11 QP12 QP13 QP18 QP14 QP15 QP16 QP17 QP19 QP21
Watts
14 26 40 41 50 120 110 140 145 270
1" MNPT 1" MNPT 1" MNPT 3/4" MNPT 1" MNPT 1" MNPT 11/2" MNPT 11/2" MNPT
1/2" Barb 1/2" MNPT
In/Out
$ 22.25 27.19 55.39 54.56 74.34 107.00 104.82 104.84 188.00 337.47
Each
20.03 24.47 49.85 49.10 66.91 96.00 94.34 94.36 169.00 303.72
4+
"P" Each
29.14 39.19 59.73 68.46 72.04 N/A 103.09 116.48 241.85 424.80
FH208
Mag Drive Fountainheads

The three-way and bell fountainhead kits fi t MD2 to MD7. Each kit includes an adjustable fountain head, pump adapter and two 7" extensions. The three-way fountain has three distinct patterns: high and low, fleur-de-lis and lotus. Adjustable bell fountain is a mushroom pattern. FH207 FH208 Three-Way Adjustable Bell $ 16.70 17.15
FH207
*10' power cord is standard. To order an 18' power cord add "2" to the part no.
(e.g., MD2 = MD22) and call for price.
Fountain/Pump Bags
Pumps
299
Fountain Pump, Filtration Systems

Rio Aqua Fountain Pump Pro-Filter systems are oilless and emit little heat. The pumps have magnetic rotors with ceramic shafts. Their mechanical sponge filters promote some biofiltration. Systems include three fountainheads (geyser, three-tier and bell), venturi adapters and 16-ft grounded cords. 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty.
Pump Filter Bags

Submersible pump intake screens are typically quite small and can be blocked with just a little debris. In 1995, it dawned on us that we could put the pump into a filter bag, and we created the Pump Bag . We now have five sizes. Place your submersible pump, its power cord and outlet hose right in the bag, tie the top closed and you have a large surface area, long-life inlet strainer. Select a bag larger in diameter than your pump, with a mesh opening smaller than the pump's inlet strainer but not so fine that the bag requires frequent cleaning. We have three types: lightweight, medium and heavyweight. The lightweight are fi ne mesh, ideal for pumps up to 15 gpm. They have a bottom stiffener ring and about 2 sq.ft. of surface area with a drawstring closure, fitting pumps up to 10" in diameter. Our popular medium weight bag fits pumps up to 7" in diameter and has about 2 sq.ft. of surface area. The heavyweight bags handle up to 12" in diameter and offer about 6 sq.ft. of surface area. The heavyweight bags use a stiff, semirigid, polyethylene mesh for flows to 60 gpm. The medium and heavyweight bags use a tie-wrap closure. Made in USA. PFB101 PFB102 PB1A PB2A PB38 Lightweight, 10" Lightweight, 10" Medium, 7" Heavyweight, 12" Heavyweight, 12"
Type, Pump Dia. Openings
1/32" 1/8" 1/16" 3/16" 3 / 8"
RF2100 RF3100
Pro 2100 Pro 3100
Max Flow (Gpm)
11.3 15
Watts
25 73
Ship Wt (Lbs)
4 6
$ 72.65 87.25
Bell Fountainhead
Flat Dimensions WxL
RF3100 w/Three-Tier Fountainhead
15" x 24" 15" x 24" 12" x 22" 20" x 39" 17" x 39"
Green $ 11.85 10.55 Blue 9.90 8.80 Black 26.85 25.38 Black 14.50 13.78 Black 9.60 9.12
Color
Each
4+
Pre-Filter/Biofilter
Use this versatile filter to pre-filter solids before you pump water back into your system, or place one inside a separate container for use as a biofilter. It incorporates Matala, which works great for both kinds of filtration by either reducing clogging or providing a large surface area for bacteria. Ez Bio Filter is extendable for increased capacity. When used as a pre-filter the only maintenance required is rinsing with tap water. 1 to 11/2" barb (cut to size) or 11/2" FNPT. Ship weight is 5 lbs. EZB20
Dia. x H PFB102 PFB101
8" x 8"
1,980 gph
Max Flow Pre-Filter
1,140 gph
Max Flow Biofilter
$ 55
Don't let this happen to your fountain! Call 407-472-0520 and ask for our Lakes Department for sizing advice or installation. See info about our team on page 12.
PB2A PB1A
300
Pumps
Submersible
Submersible Pump
The Pro-Drainer has a 304 stainless steel case and an automatic fl oat switch, thermal overload protection with automatic reset and a double mechanical shaft seal. 11/4" FNPT outlet and a 3/8" diameter strainer. 115V/60 Hz with 20' power cord. 4 amps @ 5'. Seven-inch max dia.; weighs 11 lbs. One-year warranty. PU7
30 20 10
Titanium Pumps for Salt Water

Super corrosion resistance!
Designed specifically for continuous duty in salt water, these high-quality, Japanesemade, very efficient pumps will provide a long service life. All parts in contact with water are either titanium or FRP resin, including the motor shaft and the screws! Model 4TM is 115V/60 Hz, single-phase. Model 8TMT is 230V, three-phase. Both models have built-in thermal protectors and 19' power cord. Pumps fit inside a 10" pipe. Pumps have 2" FPT outlets, 1" strainer inlets. They might seem expensive, but they're worth it for their long-term reliability in salt water. Two-year warranty. Note: Like most submersible pumps, these should have their motors underwater (for cooling) when in continuous duty applications. 4TM 8TMT
Hp
1/2
$ 295
Head (Feet)
Phase(s)
1 3
Volts
115 230
9.1
Amps
5.8 3.1
143/16" 143/4"
15.9
Height
Ship Wt
18 lbs 20 lbs
$ 1,051.67 1,121.67
Each
946.50 1,009.50
3+
GPM
10
20
30
40
50
m3/h 2.3 60 50
4.5
6.8
11.4
13.6
18.2
20.4 22.7
4TM
@60Hz
8TM T
Head (Feet)
Submersible Pumps
Medium head
These top discharge pumps are built for long life and high performancethey use only 4.8 amps but are rated up to 6.2! The highly efficient PLB2400 has a special urethane rubber impeller, aluminum motor frame and synthetic rubber casing, suction cover and wear ring. The PLB2750 has a galvanized steel housing and a cast iron impeller, and its multidirectional discharge connectors let you easily switch from vertical to horizontal discharge. Outlets are 2" MPT. Both are thermally protected, 115V/60 Hz and have 32' power cords. Two-year warranty. PLB2400 PLB2750
60 50 Head (Feet) 40 30 20 10 GPM 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
40 30 20 10
4TM
GPM 10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Hp
2 /3
Amps
6.2 11.5
Diameter
71/2" 81/2"
Ship Wt
25 lbs 39 lbs
$ 369.23 516.92
ShinMaywa Norus Submersible Pumps

ShinMaywa Norus submersible pumps are efficient, reliable and durable, with a unique hardware design made of fiberglass in addition to their cast aluminum bearing housing. Superior heat dissipation and structural integrity ensure a corrosion resistance and a long lifespan. Stainless steel shaft and impeller. 2" FNPT discharge outlet matches up easily to most water garden skimmer filters. 115V. Two-year warranty. NORUS328 NORUS414 NORUS567 NORUS1088
Hp
1/5 1/3 1/2
PL B
PL B2
27
50
40 0
328 414 567 1,088
Watts
45 66.7 85 115
Performance in gph 5' 10' 15' 20'
30 50 72 112
15 35 57 92
20 45 80
MaxLift
19' 27' 37' 48'
Cord
20' 32' 32' 32'
$ 299 319 399 479
25
PLB2750
20
NO
Head (Feet)
15
NO R NO
RU S1 08
R NO
7 56 US 14 S4 28
10 5 GPM 20
RU
40
3 US
60
80
100 120
PLB2400
NORUS414
3-Phase Equipment
Submersible
Pumps
301
Submersible Pumps
Low head
Safe, reliable and high-quality submersible pumps that can also handle dirty water and solids up to 1" in diameter. Manufactured with noncorroding and rustproof materials. Oilless. Diameter is 51/2" (plus outlet) x 12" H. 115V/60 Hz, with 16' power cord. One-year warranty.
Hp
1/3 1/2
High Efficiency Pumps

Medium head
Ideally suited for continuous duty jobs by virtue of their low power consumption. Oil-filled casing for long life and a cast iron impeller for durability. The PU8 has a maximum diameter of 71/2", less outlet, and comes with a 16' power cord. The PU9 has a maximum diameter of 8", height of 17", 20' power cords and thermal protection. Both are 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty. PU8 PU9 Pump 304 SS Pump
PU9 Amps
SP510 SP520
Watts
330 650
3
Amps
3.0 5.6
Ship Wtt (lbs)
8 11
$ 293.17 379.92
12
Each
263.85 341.93
3+
5.1 5.2
Outlet Size
2" MNPT 11/2" NPT

40 35
Ship Wt
30 lbs 27 lbs
$ 323.08 765.00
m 30 Head (Feet) 20 10
3/h
PU8
SP5
20
30 25 Head (Feet) 20 15 10 5
P
U9
8 PU
SP510
SP5
10
GPM 10
20
30
40
50
60
Submersible Pumps
High head
Multipurpose pumps designed for use where high pressure is needed in clean water. Manufactured with noncorroding and rustproof materials. Ceramic shaft sleeve for long life and sand resistance. Energy-efficient motor with double ball bearing construction, stainless steel shaft and motor housing and built-in overload protection. Environmentally safe, oilless. Multihose adapter for 3/4" garden thread and 1" thread or clamp version. Pumps are 6" W x 14", 15" and 16" H. 115V/60 Hz, with 16' power cord. One-year warranty. SP750 SP1000 SP1200
Hp
1/2 3/4
GPM 10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Submersible/In-Line Pump
Pondmaster Pro's Hy-Drive pump uses the best of mag drive and direct drive technology to quietly and efficiently supply up to 80 gpm. Ideal for ponds and multitank aquariums. Oilless design ensures your fish are safe. Includes extra large inlet screen and 11/2" hose barb adapters. 11/2" FNPT inlet and 11/2" MNPT outlet. 115V/60 Hz; 20' power cord. One-year warranty. PM48
20 Head (Feet) 15 10 5 GPM 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Max Head (Ft)
20
Watts
280
Ship Wt (Lbs)
15
$ 270.66
Watts
650 900 1,100

1.8
SP 1
Amps
5.6 8.4 9.9
Ship Wt
$ 426.67 496.50 582.76
m 150 120 Head (Feet) 90 60 30
3/h
0.6
3.0 5.4
0 20
10 00 SP 75 0
SP
SP750
High Efficiency Pumps

Low head
This pump features a 304 stainless steel motor housing and reinforced plastic pump casing. It has a vortex design, allowing for passage of solids up to 1". Motor is thermally protected, draws only 3.2 amps, comes with a 20' power cord. Maximum diameter is 9", 2" FNPT outlet. No screen on inlet (see Index for Pump Bags ). Weighs 17 lbs. POMUA2 has its own automatic float switch, 115V/60 Hz.
25 20 Head (Feet)
POMU2
GPM
10
20
25
Utility Pump
Can dewater to 1/4"
This submersible utility pump is useful for draining ponds, tanks, basements and more. It has a bottom-screened inlet and a 5/8" GHT outlet. 115V/60 Hz, with 10' power cord. 1.3 amps. Weighs 7 lbs. One-way warranty. UP730
25 20 Head (Feet) 15 10 5 GPM 10 20
$ 107.00
95.11/3+
15 10 5
GPM
10
20
30
40
50
60
POMU2 POMUA2
Stainless Steel Pump SS Pump w/Switch
$ 347.69 441.54
302
Pumps
Propeller/Tech Talk
TF
200 gpm with only ! 7.9 amps
Propeller Pump
Large Propeller Pumps, Low Head

AES has offered these pumps for years without hearing about any failures! These high-quality, stainless steel, submersible pumps are designed for the low-head, high-volume, continuous-duty pumping requirements of aquaculture and can handle temperatures up to 104F (40C). Options: fresh or salt water, horizontal or vertical, single- or three-phase, 50 or 60 Hz, 208 to 575V. Call today for a custom quotation based on your specifications. These pumps are built to order, with other curves available (low-head examples are shown). Prices shown for the pumps and control panels are for single-phase, 230V, 60 Hz freshwater models, with 30' power cords (longer lengths available). Saltwater models are higher priced.
This pump can't be beat for low-head, high-flow, continuous duty applications. You could pump out a standard-size swimming pool in 11/2 hours for about 10 in power cost! The exterior housing is stainless steel, the top and inside portions are cast iron. They have double mechanical seals with silicon carbide faces and high-temperature C3 bearings rated for 60,000 hours. To make installation and removal easier, use our Quick Disconnect Fittings (see Index) to connect the outlet piping. All pumps will handle 5/16" solids. PAB4 comes with a 16' power cord, PAB5 and PAB6 do not come with power cords. 60 Hz, not UL-listed, two-year warranty.
Hp
1/2
PAB4 PAB5 PAB6
1 2
1 3 3
115 4" MPT 10" x 19" 208/230/460 5" FPT 10" x 19" 208/230/460 6" FPT 11" x 23"
22.7 34.1
Volts
Outlet
Dia. x Height
Amps
7.9 5.7 10.7
Ship Wt (lbs)
40 42 97
$ 903.23 1,048.39 1,854.84
Motor control panels are UL, CSA, Type 3R, IP23, outdoor-rated and contain the capacitors, contactors and switches needed to operate the pump. They are sold separately and required to validate the one-year pump warranty. Custom panels are available with float switches, alarms, time delays and lightning arresters. The 11/2 through 3-hp pumps have a 4" MNPT discharge and 13" base diameter; the larger models have a 6" MNPT discharge and 15" base diameters. Do not exceed 30 starts per hour. Ships from factory, allow up to 6 weeks for delivery. Made in USA. PD2 PD6 PD10 PD14 PD19 PD26 11/2 2 3 5 71/2 10
Hp Ship Wt
m3/h 11.3 14 12
45.5
10 Head (Feet) 8
4 PAB
PA B6
$ 2,318.09 2,243.08 3,165.85 4,302.00 5,259.00 5,692.31
Control Panels
PD2CP PD6CP PD10CP PD14CP PD19CP PD26CP
$ 282.69 287.14 319.69 394.15 562.15 691.38
5 PAB
4 2 GPM 200 400 600
Tech Talk 12
Non-Self-Priming Pumps
Centrifugal pumps are not self-priming, unless specifically stated. Water must flow in by gravity, otherwise they will lose their prime, pumping will stop and the shaft seal will probably burn out. The best way to mount a centrifugal pump is to locate it lower than the surface of the water from which it is drawing. This is referred to as "flooded suction" (when the power is off, water will fill the pump). An on/off valve may be needed on the suction side of the pump for use when the pump is removed. A non-self-priming centrifugal pump can be located above the water surface by doing the following, but the performance will be less than the pump's standard curve shows for flooded suction. 1. Install a foot valve (also known as a one-way or check valve) below the water surface. It is typically installed at the end, or the foot, of the suction pipe along with an inlet strainer. The larger the strainer, the better. Never restrict the inlet. 2. Install a priming pot (or some other sealable access) to the highest point in the suction pipe, allowing the pipe to be manually filled (primed). When the pump is sealed at the top and has a foot valve at the bottom, it will not lose its prime. If the suction pipe has a leak, it can either lose water when the pump is off or allow air in when the pump is running. If air gets in, it can kill fish quickly (see Tech Talk 9). When the inlet of a pump is restricted, its performance is reduced. Lifting water on the suction side restricts flow. Do not lift water higher than necessary and always use a nonrestrictive foot valve, suction pipe and inlet strainer.
Union Valve Union Priming Pot
PD10
Control Panel
16 14 12 10
PD2
Head (Feet)
19 PD
4 PD1
10 PD
2 PD
6 4 2
PD
6
Foot Valve Self-Priming Pump (or non-self-priming pump with priming pot and foot valve) Nonrestrictive Strainer
GPM 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600
Pump with Flooded Suction Nonrestrictive Strainer Submersible Pump
Centrifugal/Booster/Mag Drive/Tech Talk
Pumps
303
Jet Pumps
High head
These high-pressure, easy-priming pumps with suction lift to 25' are exceptional. They are made with a double-insulated impeller that prevents water contact with the shaft (ideal for salt water). TEFC motor, illuminated watertight on/off switch and builtin thermal protection. Dimensions are 16" L x 9" W x 10" H. 1" FNPT in and out. 115V/60 Hz. One-year warranty. JP120 JP130
160 140 120 Head (Feet) 100 80
JP
Centrifugal Pumps
Low head
A double-insulated impeller (no contact of metallic parts with water) makes them compatible with salt water. Commercial grade TEFC motor. Dimensions are 11" L x 6" W x 8" H with 1" MNPT. Like most pumps, do not run dry. 115V/60 Hz. UL-listed. One-year warranty.

Hp
3/4
650 1,000
Watts
Amps
10 13
Ship Wt
20 lbs 22 lbs
$ 346.15 381.54
CNP15
30 Head (Feet)
Hp
1/2
Watts
650
Amps
5.7
Ship Wt
20 lbs
$ 273
m3/h 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6.0 7.2 8.4 9.6 10.8
70 60 50
20
CN
CN P
15
JP120
PSI
10
P6
JP
0 13
40 30 20 10
60 40 20 CFM 5 10
GPM
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
CNP15
High-Pressure Booster Pump

Great for cleaning and spraying!
This pump increases water pressure from city mains, private water systems or from tanks or ponds, with suction lifts up to 10' (not self-priming). Cast iron construction with stainless steel shafts and Delrin impellers. It can handle inlet pressure to 80 psi. Maximum outlet pressure is 305 psi (690'). Max liquid temperature is 140F (60C). 3/4" FNPT in/out. Single-phase units include an 8', 115V power cord. Two-year warranty. Made in USA.
Booster pump selection guide.

1. Determine pressure boost required above existing pressure. 2. Determine gpm needed to be pumped. 3. Read across top to pressure boost required. 4. Read down column to select gpm required.
60 50 40 30 20 10 GPM 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
PM 3
120
15 20 25
Magnetic Drive Pumps

Medium-high head
These energy-efficient March Pumps offer the ultimate in reliable, trouble-free performance. They feature built-in thermal overload protection, TEFC motors, dry-run capability and are UL-listed. Materials in contact with solution: polypropylene, ceramic, Viton. Pumps are single phase, 115/230V, 50/60 Hz and include 6' power cord (add "-230" for 230V models). One-year warranty. Made in USA.

PM31 PM32 PM33
TE-5.5C-MD TE-6-T-MD TE-7R-MD
Mfrs Part No.
Amps @115V
3.6 7.4 10.0
1" FPT / 3/4" MPT 1" FPT / 3/4" MPT 11/2" FPT / 1" MPT
PM32
Inlet/ Outlet
Ship Wt
$ 533.33 593.83 725.00
Example:
You have 25-psi supply and require 10 gpm @ 100 psi. Your boost requirement is 75 psi. Read across the top to 75 psi, read down the column to 10 gallons required, select the 3/4-hp unit.
Gpm @ Pressure Boost (Psi) Hp
1/2 3/4
PM 31
PM 32
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
3-Phase Equipment
9 9 14
7.5 8.5 14
6.5 8 12.5
5 7 11
3.5 5.5 10
3.5 7
3.5
TL121
Tech Talk 87
Pump Sizing for Waterfalls
Desired Waterfall Width @ 1" Depth Flowrate Required (gph) Flowrate Required (gpm)
Use one pump with a pressure tank to operate several drum filters.
TL121 TL341 TL101 TL103
Hp
1/2 3/4
Phase(s)
1 1
1 1 1 3
13/6.5 14/7 18/9 4.5/2.3
Amps
115/230 115/230 115/230 208230/460
Motor Voltage
Ship Wt
6" 12" 18" 24" 30" 36"
1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 7,200
20 40 60 80 100 120
$ 523 587 599 647
Calculating the volume of a pond (square or rectangular):

length (ft) x width (ft) x depth (ft) x 7.5 = volume in gallons.
304
Pumps
Mag Drive
TF

High quality at a low price!
These magnetic drive pumps will run much quieter and cooler than most magnetic drive pumps. Feature seal-free bearings (no seals to leak!), stainless steel hardware, a ceramic shaft and polypropylene body. The open-mouth impeller design allows for higher flowrates than similar pumps. A longer magnet and higher bearing surface provide less heat transfer and greater torque for less slippage. Dimensionally interchangeable with Iwaki pumps, each pump has a TEFC motor and a 10' power cord. Fresh and salt water compatible. 115V/60 Hz. Not UL-listed, CE-approved. Two-year warranty. 230V models also available; call for details.
35 30 25 Head (Feet) 20 15 10 5
W4 0H D W55 HD
W2 0H
W40HDX
W7 0H
W1 00H D
W 30
W40 H
DX
W30 HDX
W20HD W30HD W30HDX W40HD W40HDX W55HD W70HD W100HD

18 20
In/Out MNPT
3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
Watts @ 115V/60 Hz
1"
1" 1" 1" 1"
45 90 90 120 130 180 290 390
Ship Wt
$ 129 160 167 190 197 260 284 325
HD
GPM
10
12
14
16

Low-medium head.
40

Low-medium head.
These pumps are perfect for aquaculture and home aquariums. Outlets are adjustable directionally. Thermally protected, 115V/60 Hz, with 6' power cord. UL-listed. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
1/2" PM1 2MDQ-SC 1.6 PM2 2MDQX-SC 1.5 1 3/4"/1/2" PM3 3MDQ-SC .8 PM4 3MDQX-SC .9 1" PM5 4MDQ-SC 1.3 1"/1/2" PM6 4MDQX-SC 1.3 1" 5/8" Barb PM125* 3MDX 1.5 3/4"/1/2" PM112* 3MD-SC 2.4 PM110* 4MD-SC 1.7 1"/1/2" PM18* 5MD-SC 2.0 1"/1/2" * Not recommended for salt water. 30 25 20 Head (Feet) 15 10 5
PM1
Iwaki Walchem magnetic 32 drive pumps are an excellent PM 28 choice for aquaculture 24 applications, aquariums PM 27 and industrial process PM PM 2 6 PM 2 4 16 applications, as they are 22 very efficient, extremely quiet and transfer minimal 8 PM PM21 25 PM motor heat to the water. 23 Motors are UL-approved, GPM 4 8 12 16 20 24 TEFC with built-in thermal protectors. Liquid ends are polypropylene. Pumps can be mounted vertically or horizontally, outlets are adjustable directionally. 115V/60 Hz with 6' power cord. One-year warranty. 230V models also available; call for details.
Head (Feet)
2 PM
0
Inlet/Outlet Mfrs Part No. Amps FNPT/MNPT
Ship Wt
28
32
9 lbs 9 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs 7 lbs 9 lbs 10 lbs 10 lbs
$ 149.63 153.80 203.17 211.50 225.90 232.50 126.00 170.77 205.87 292.50
Each
142.16 146.11 193.01 200.93 214.61 220.88 119.70 162.23 195.58 277.88
4+
3/4" PM20 WMD20RLT .45 6 lbs $ 155 PM21 WMD20RLXT .45 1" 6 lbs 160 3/4" PM22 WMD30RLT 1.0 8 lbs 163 PM23 WMD30RLXT 1.0 1" 8 lbs 179 3/4" PM24 WMD40RLT 1.9 8 lbs 189 PM25 WMD40RLXT 1.9 1" 8 lbs 223 PM26 MD-55RLT ** 1.6 1" 12 lbs 319 PM27 MD-70RLT ** 3.0 1" 15 lbs 354 PM28 MD-100RLT ** 3.4 1" 21 lbs 440 * Do not exceed maximum head, as nonwarranty pump failure can occur. ** These models have Japanese motors.
Mfrs Part No. Amps
Inlet/Outlet MNPT
Ship Wt
Each
147 144 155 171 181 213 304 337 419
4+
PM 18
PM PM 11 3
2
PM 6 PM
PM2
PM5
0 PM11
25 PM 1
6.6 10
GPM 3.3
13.3
16.7
20
23.3
PM27
PM1
Mag Drive
Pumps
305
High-Head Magnum Pumps

Jacuzzi Magnum pumps have no-tool access to the strainer and impeller areasremove the motor or service the strainer basket in seconds without disconnecting your plumbing! The "MK" motor kit (preassembled motor, power cord, impeller and seals; 3/4 to 2 hp only) will have your system running in minutes in the event of a motor failure. Oversize, low-service factor motors will save you money on your electric bill. NSF-, UL- and CSA-certified. These pumps are fully loaded: large strainer basket with clear cover, drain plugs, self-priming to 10', energy-saving motor and built-in check valve flap. They even run dry without damage! Though not rated for salt water, they should give you several years of saltwater service. Then just change the motor assembly! 2" FNPT inlet/outlet on the 3/4 to 3 hp and 2" PVC slip adapter-unions are included. Force 3 series have 3" FNPT inlet/outlet. MAG1 4 come either 115V or 230V; add "-230" for 230V. Three-phase pumps do not have a power cord and must be wired by an electrician. AES highly recommends using protective devices with all 3-phase equipment. Failure to install protective devices will void most warranties. One-year warranty. Replacement motors ("M" series) are the electric motor only. Order a seal kit or use the old one. Then swap your seal, impeller and power cord from the old motor and install them on the replacement. No need to disconnect piping.
PSI 120 100 HEAD (FEET) 80 60 40 3,450 rpm @ 60 Hz 20 GPM 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
MF 35/ MF 3 53 MF 34/ MF 343 F3 33
F3 3/ M
50 40
120 100 Head (Feet) 80

M
MA
MA G4
2/M AG
G5 /M
AG
53
/M
Self-Priming to 10'
30
43 AG
tor s h mo Switc peller s im d an within ! ds s ec on
G3 MA
60 40
20
MA G1 /M A
23 AG
33 AG /M
3 G1
MF33 MAG1 Hp SF Voltage Hz Phase(s) Full Load Amps
10
20 GPM 20
60
100
140
3/4 MAG1 1.0 115*/230* 60 1 8.8/4.4 37 MAG2 1 1.2 115*/230* 60 1 14/7 39 MAG3 11/2 1.1 115/230* 60 1 16/8 41 MAG4 2 1.1 115/230* 60 1 21/10.5 47 MAG5 3 1.2 230* 60 1 16.3 53 3/4 MAG13 1.5 208/230/460 50/60 3 3.4/3.4/1.7 34 MAG23 1 1.4 208/230/460 50/60 3 4.2/4.2/2.1 40 MAG33 11/2 1.3 208/230/460 50/60 3 5.5/5.8/2.9 40 MAG43 2 1.2 208/230/460 50/60 3 6.9/6.6/3.3 44 MAG53 3 1.15 208/230/460 50/60 3 10.1/9.8/4.9 51 MF33 3 1.0 208/230* 60 1 16.3 53 MF34 4 1.0 208/230* 60 1 16.3 53 MF35 5 1.0 208/230 60 1 19.8 58 MF333 3 1.0 208/230/460 50/60 3 10.1/9.8/4.9 51 MF343 4 1.0 208/230/460 50/60 3 10.1/9.8/4.9 51 MF353 5 1.0 208/230/460 50/60 3 13.4/13/6.5 56 MAG1MK Motor Kit for MAG1 MAG2MK Motor Kit for MAG2 MAG3MK Motor Kit for MAG3 MAG4MK Motor Kit for MAG4 MAG0 Strainer Basket, Replacement (Fits All) 10150209 Shaft Seal Only (Fits All) 24-0107-04 Seal Kit (Fits All), Shaft Seal and All O-Rings
Ship Wt (lbs) Each 3+
$ 511.67 541.67 558.13 620.00 903.33 588.33 693.33 725.00 783.33 930.00 876.67 1,093.33 1,520.00 886.67 1,098.33 1,420.00 340.00 343.33 375.00 431.67 20.83 21.50 30.67
460.53 487.50 502.32 558.00 813.00 529.50 624.00 652.50 705.00 837.00 789.00 984.00 1,368.00 798.00 988.50 1,278.00
Replacement Motor
MAG1M MAG2M MAG3M MAG4M MAG5M MAG13M MAG23M MAG33M MAG43M MAG53M MAG5M MF34M MF35M MAG53M MF343M MF353M
$ 230.00 240.83 281.67 303.33 633.33 300.00 350.00 383.33 533.33 671.67 633.33 651.67 615.00 671.67 671.67 607.00
* Includes 8' power cord.
Magnetic Drive External Pumps

Widely used in the aquarium industry, these magnetic drive pumps have ceramic shafts and will pump a high volume of water at an extremely low price. Inlet/outlets are 1" barb fittings. Not designed to run dry. CE-approved, 115V/50-60 Hz. Six-month warranty. MD40 MD55
Amps Ship Wt

These Little Giant pumps have run-dry capability and are very quiet. Volute and impeller are constructed of glass-filled Ryton. Motors are TEFC, single-phase, 115/230V, 50/60 Hz and include an 8' power cord (add "-230" for 230V models). UL/CSA-listed. One-year warranty. Made in USA.

.7 1.5
6 lbs $ 102.18 91.96 8 lbs 152.00 137.00

Head (Feet)
Each
3+
28 24 20 16 12 8 4 GPM 4 8 12 16 20 24
MD 40
PM7 PM8 PM9
Mfrs Part No.
TE-5.5MD-HC TE-6-MD-HC TE-7-MD-HC
Amps @115V
5.0 9.4 11.8
1" FPT / 3/4" MPT 1" FPT / 3/4" MPT 11/2" FPT / 1" MPT
60 50 40 30 20 10
Inlet/Outlet
Ship Wt
$ 558.60 576.45 900.89
Head (Feet)
M
5 D5
PM
PM 8
7
PM 9
PM9 MD40
GPM 10 20 30 40 50
306
Pumps
High-Efficiency/Tech Talk
TF
High-Efficiency Pumps by Sweetwater

Low head, very quiet.
Penny pinchers on electricity, with all the premium features you expect from the Sweetwater brand. These high-efficiency pumps have stainless steel motor shafts with salt water compatible shaft sleeve and seal; 1,725-rpm, thermally protected ODP motors; glass-filled polypropylene pump bodies; 8' power cords; and 11/2" FNPT inlet/outlet (SHE1.7 and SHE2.4). SHE2.9 and SHe4.4 have a 2" in/out with slip unions. SHE2.4 4.4 also available in 230V/50 Hz (add "-230"). Two-year warranty. Made in USA. SHE1.7 SHE2.4 SHE2.9 SHE4.4
Watts @ 10' Head
Great Value
170 220 290 450
Amps @ 115V
1.5 1.9 2.9 4.0
Ship Wt
$ 483.33 522.81 559.65 640.35
Each
SHE4.4
At AES we constantly preach energy conservation because it saves money. An aquaculture business cannot afford big monthly power bills nor should the hobbyist accept that. Compare our SHE2.9 to a typical hardware store water pump when run continuously. SHE2.9 Typical Pump
Brand Gpm @ 10' Head
SHE1.7
25 20 Head (Feet) 15 10 5 GPM 10 20 30 40 50
SHE 4
70 70
Watts
290 900
Cost/Yr @ 10/kWh
$ 254 788
SHE 1.7
.4
S
2.4 HE
SH E2 .9
The AES pump cost about $100 more but saved over $500/year. Which one is the bargain?
60
70
80
90
100
Tech Talk 75
Water Pump Efficiency and Redundancy
We know what you're thinking ... here they go again, talking about efficiency. Yes, and we'll keep doing it. The problem is that, in the US, electricity is so cheap, we all but ignore it. Then, when we get the power bill, we complain about how high it is! be individually turned on or off as needed (installing a check valve on each pump will prevent water from flowing back when that pump is not in use). Also, multiple pumps may be preferred, as then only a portion of the total water flow would be lost when one pump fails. The cost of having a small pump on hand for backup is much less than a large one. For a "ready-to-go" backup, extra pumps could be plumbed into the main line (put the pumps on separate circuit breakers) so that the reserve pump is ready when needed. Alternate the use of the pumps to keep them exercised. Simplify the backup and spare parts inventory at your facility by using multiples of the same pump instead of several single-purpose pumps. Similar multiple redundancy can be used with air blowers, heaters, chillers, filters, etc.
Sound familiar?
Here is a note on energy efficiency from our 1981 Aeration Handbook and Catalog: "... one kilowatt-hour is equivalent to about two days of hard work by one man." A man's labor for 5 per daythat's cheap! As efficiency relates to aquaculture, pumping and aeration are the two biggest consumers of electricity. After feed costs and labor, electricity is probably the next highest overhead expense. Be careful when selecting a pump. Do not compare them by horsepower alone. Often, a cheap pump has an undersized motor that must work very hard to do the job. This may be an appropriate pump selection for temporary or noncritical applications, but not where the lives of your animals are concerned. Often, pool type pumps, when used for low-pressure aquaculture applications, keep the motor in a continuous overload condition. Operating an undersized motor in the duty range of its service factor is acceptable from the pump manufacturer's point of view, but not a fish farmer's point of view. It lowers the pump's cost (which looks good when you are comparing pumps), but increases energy consumption and operating temperature. Higher operating temperature shortens motor life. We've painstakingly selected and tested all of our pumps for power consumption. We've illustrated ratings, specifications and power consumption clearly. We use the term "aquaculture duty" to indicate long-term reliability and efficiency in humid, industrial applications.
In
Two smaller pumps can be utilized in place of one large pump.
Shut-off valve Check valves shown on inlet but may be located on outlet.
Multiple water pumps provide redundancy.

Bigger may not be better when it comes to pumping water. For example, to pump 300 gallons per minute (gpm) to a height of 20', you could use one large 300-gpm pump, two 150-gpm pumps, three 100-gpm pumps, four 75-gpm pumps, five 60-gpm pumps, etc. To determine which is best for your application, consider the following options. Large pumps may only be available with 3-phase motors. If 3-phase power is not available, an expensive, power-robbing phase converter must be used, or multiple single-phase pumps. Even if one large pump can be used, another one must be available as a backup, if the pumping need is critical. Consider multiple pumps. If one pump moves 100 gpm, two of the same pumps together will move 200 gpm, three will move 300 gpm, and so on. If less than 300 gpm is ever needed, multiple smaller pumps will save electricity, as they can
Vs
With proper valve and union locations, one pump can be replaced with little or no interuption to the system.
Single Large Pump
Two Smaller Pumps
Utilizing two smaller pumps provides redundancy and allows continuous operation should one pump fail.
Low Head/Tech Talk
Pumps
307
Pumps
Low head.
Head (Feet)
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 GPM 10 20 30 40 60
Artesian Water Pumps

Low head, self-priming to 3'.
Artesian water pumps are an excellent choice for energy-efficient, reliable performance in applications without flooded suction. Ideally suited for ponds, water features, fountains and aquaculture. Molded of polypropylene. See-through Lexan lid provides access to the large strainer basket. Stainless steel shaft, totally enclosed. TEFC Baldor motors are 1,725 rpm, 115V/230V/60Hz, 8' power cords, 2" FNPT inlet/outlet connections. Call for replacement parts. Three-year warranty. Made in USA. PQ5 PQ7 PQ8
Hp
1/8 1/4 1/3
30 12
Pressure (PSI)
Head (Feet)
Amp Master 3000 has 11/2" inlet/outlet, ODP 60-Hz motor, 6' power cord and one-year warranty. 115V. Made in USA.
10 20 8
8 PQ
PQ
7
5 PQ
10
Hp Amps
DP25 DPU
Amp Master 3000 Repl. 1/2 Union, 11/2" Slip
1/15
1.3
20 lbs 1 lb
Ship Wt
0 GPM 20 40 60 80 100
$ 297.00 10.50
1.6 @ 5 psi 2.7 @ 5 psi 3.7 @ 5 psi
Amps
Ship Wt
$ 644.34 662.14 714.67
DP25 PQ8
Tech Talk 32
Water Pump Definitions
Centrifugal Pump: Medium- to moderate-pressure, flooded-suction or selfpriming pump. An impeller is used to "sling" water to the outside, pumping by centrifugal force. Check Valves: Installed on pump outlet to prevent back siphoning when pump is off. Flooded Suction: Water must enter pump by gravity. Foot Valve: Installed on a pump inlet to prevent the loss of prime during nonoperational periods. Freshwater Pumps: Freshwater pumps can be used with salt water for brief periods and experience only minimal corrosion. Rinse with fresh water after use. Head: The amount of pressure a pump must work against during operation. Total head equals feet of vertical lift plus friction. The amount of head is an important value when sizing a pump correctly. One psi equals 27" of water. Friction: The loss in pressure and volume that occurs when liquids travel through pipes, fittings and other restrictive elements of a piping system. Gpm: US gallons per minute. Pedestal Pump: A self-supporting pump mounted above a long shaft, with the motor above the water level and the intake below. Pressure Curves: Motor overload can occur if pumps are operated below the lowest pressures depicted by the curves shown in the pumps' specifications. If your application does not have sufficient head pressure to stay within the curve, throttle the outlet with a valve or other restriction. Use an amp meter for guidance. Propeller Pump: A submersible pump with a propeller, which draws water through a housing. Propeller pumps are usually high volume, low head. Salt Water Compatible: Our salt water compatible pumps are rated for longterm, continuous duty with salt water. Little corrosion should occur within one year. Spherical Pump: A silent pump that has only one moving partan inductiondriven impeller. Spherical pumps have no motor shaft, seals or bearings, making them virtually maintenance free. Trash Pump: A centrifugal pump that can pass large objects, including sand, gravel and mud. Often used for dewatering ponds. Vertical Pump: A centrifugal pump mounted in a vertical direction. Vertical pumps usually have a long shaft with the motor mounted above water.
Conversion Charts
308
Pumps
Centrifugal
Centrifugal Pumps by RK2 Systems

Low and high head.
RK2 pumps feature high-quality motors, stainless steel hardware and shaft with PVC coating and low heat transfer. 115V/230V/ 60 Hz (power cords not included). Inlet/outlet is 11/2" FNPT. Salt water compatible. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
4031 Hp Style
1/8 1/4 1/2
750 Series Pumps by Sequence

These compact pumps deliver big flow for little power. Great for smaller and simple ponds (3,000 gallons or less). The 1/8-hp motor is protected and fan-cooled in a TEFC enclosure. 115V, includes 8' cord. 2" inlet, 1.5" outlet, max head 12'. Ship weight 12 lbs. 3-year warranty. SEQ3600 SEQ12-4200
Max Watts Amps
14 12 10 Head (Feet) 8 6 4 2 SEQ3600 SEQ12-4200
139 160
1.40 1.56
$ 362 352
4021 TEFC 4031 TEFC 4050 ODP 4070 1 ODP 4081 11/2 TEFC 4091 2 TEFC 4093* 2 TEFC *Pump is 3-phase.
70 60 Pressure (PSI) Head (Feet) 50 40 30 20 10 GPM 10
Running Amps @ 115V
2 2.8 8.6 15 16.6 11.6/230V
Ship Wt
$ 563 605 630 732 947 1,115 1,175
GPM 10
20
30
40
50
60
70
SEQ12-4200
4070
4 05 0
4031
4021
30
50
70
90
100
130
Sun Pumps by Sequence

Good for solar power applications
9 8 7 6 Head (Feet) 5
Stingray Pumps
Medium and high head.
Stingray pumps have a patented air-cooled heat sink that allows the pump to run dry without damage to the shaft seal. All have a 11/2" FPT inlet/outlet and we include 11/2" half unions x slip. 115V/60 Hz (6' power cord included on all but 2-hp model). UL-listed. One-year warranty.
30
80 70 60 Head (Feet) 50 40 30 20 10 GPM 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 20 PSI

JP4
JP3
JP2
JP1
Tired of being a slave to the grid? Save money and electricity with these eco-friendly 12V and 24V pumps. Powerful motor is housed inside a compact totally enclosed nonventilated (TENV) enclosure. 2" inlet, 1.5" outlet. Ship weight 8 lbs. SEQ12VDC5 SEQ12VDC8 SEQ12VDC9 SEQ24VDC5 SEQ24VDC8
Max Watts Amps
4 3 2 1
A= SEQ12VDC5 B= SEQ24VDC5 C= SEQ12VDC8 D= SEQ24VDC8 E= SEQ12VDC9
A B D
10
43 52 58 67 70
3.6 4.3 4.3 2.8 2.9
$ 324 336 345 324 336
GPM 5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 DPU
9.8 1 1 11/2 12.4 2 16 Repl. 1/2 Union, 11/2" Slip
3/4
Hp
Full Load Amps
Ship Wt
$ 250.00 256.78 280.00 317.87 10.50
Each
225.00 231.10 252.00 286.08 9.77
3+
JP1 SEQ12VDC9
Centrifugal
Pumps
309
Dragon Pumps
Low head, self-priming.
Our customers find these pumps 25 to be extremely reliable and energy 306 0 efficient. They have self-priming 20 10 capability and include large, 30 integrated leaf traps with easy15 50 open, cam-lock lids. The industrial TEFC Baldor motor is extremely 10 5 quiet. 3/4 hp and smaller have 2", 5 1 hp and larger have 21/2" slip unions inlet/outlet. Available in 0 115V/60 Hz, except 3060*. Only GPM 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 115V models include 6' power 1 / cord. 1-, 1 2- and 2-hp models are rated for salt water. Three-year warranty if card is sent in; one year if not. Made in USA.
Head (Feet) PSI 15 30
Wave II High-Speed Pumps

Low to medium head.
The Wave line has given us some 50 22 very efficient pumps over the years, 40 17 HS and these high-speed pumps are no W HS H S 3 30 13 W exception. These 3,450-rpm models 1 20 9 give exceptional flowrates at both high and low heads, making them 10 4 well-suited for use where clogging GPM 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 presents a low-pressure problem, like sand filters. Wave high-speed pumps feature Baldor premium motors, saltwater seals, 2" in/out with built-in unions, 50/60 Hz capability, 6' power cords (HSW3 does not include power cord) and a 3-year warranty. Noise reduction pad also included. Strainer baskets ( WLS3) are optional (see p. 310). Made in USA.
Head (Feet) PSI 26 60
2 W HS 15
36 60 5100
0 770
40 30
1/4 5100D 2.8 N 21/2' 42 lbs 1/3 6036 4.3 N 4' 45 lbs 3/4 7700 6.2 N 4' 50 lbs 3040 1 8.7 Y 6' 82 lbs 3050 11/2 12.8 Y 8' 82 lbs 2 18.6 Y 8' 82 lbs 3060* 0950 2" Half Union (2) WPU2.5 21/2" Half Union (Each) 437339 21/2" x 3" Slip Adapter 4101 Replacement Lid 4102 Replacement O-Ring 4103 Replacement Leaf Basket *125/250V, requires 30-amp plug.
Hp
Amps @ 115V
Salt Water Compatible
Suction Lift
Ship Wt
$ 875.00 890.00 999.00 1,275.00 1,365.00 1,449.00 30.00 17.00 4.00 69.00 6.85 34.00
HSW1 HSW15 HSW2 HSW3
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
Hp
Amps @ 230V
4.9 7.7 9.4 12.5
115/230 115/230 115/230 230
Volts
Ship Wt
$ 769 895 1,019 1,139
HSW1
5100D
Wave Pump, 2-Speed

Low head.
25 A two-speed pump has the ability to produce moderate 20 Hig flows at low pressures with hS pe good electrical efficiency and ed =3 15 ,45 then, with the flip of a pump0r pm mounted switch, the pressures 10 can be tripled and the flow can Low Speed = be doubled. Just what you need 1,72 5 5r pm for backwashing bead filters. 1 This 1 /2 hp pump features a 2" union inlet/outlet, 24-hour GPM 20 40 60 80 100 120 run-dry capacity and glass-filled ABS housing. Strainer basket ( WLS2) included. Two-year warranty if the card is sent in; one year if not. Motor is ODP, 115V/60 Hz, with 3' cord and not recommended for salt water. Ships Ground. Made in USA. Head (Feet)
Wave Pond Pumps

Low head.
These water pumps are low-cost, low-pressure, energy-efficient and whisper-quiet! They have an ABS glass-filled housing and 24-hour run-dry capability. Three-year warranty if card is sent in; one year if not. Pumps are 115/230V, 50/60 Hz, 6' cord (115V/ 60 Hz only), 2" in/out with slip unions. Made in USA. WLP1 WLP2 WLP4 WLS2

1/8 1/4 3/4
25 20 Head (Feet) 16 12 8 4 GPM 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
WL P1
WL P2
W LP
4
140
WLP3
11/2
Hp
Amps @ 3 psi
3.8/13.8
Ship Wt
30 lbs
$ 689
Hp
1.2 13' 2.5 16' 6.74 26' Strainer Basket, 2"
Amps @ 3 psi
Max Head
Ship Wt
$ 559.00 595.00 799.00 75.00
WLP3
WLS2
WLP1
310
High head.
Pumps
Centrifugal/Traps
Super Pumps
The pump housings are molded of fiberglass and feature an extra large strainer basket and self-priming capability. Shafts are 316 stainless steel and covered with a ceramic sealer. Motors have thermal overload protection and are UL-listed, 60 Hz. 50 Hz available. 8' power cord includedspecify 115V or 230V (add "-230" to the part number) for the 3/4 and 1-hp pumps. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
1/2 SP12 9.6 115 3/4 SP34 11/5.5 115/230 SP01 1 15/7.5 115/230 9.3 230 SP015 11/2 SP02 2 9.7 230 SP25 21/2 15 230 SP03 3 14.5 230 SP1600M Repl. Strainer Basket SP1600D Repl. Strainer Cover SP1600S Repl. Strainer Cover Gasket SP1600P Repl. Strainer Cover Knob SP1600Z2 Repl. Shaft Seal
Centrifugal Pumps by Sweetwater

Medium and high head.
These high-performance pumps are molded out of glass-filled Noryl . They are fitted with a seal that prevents water from contacting any metal parts, making the pumps salt water compatible.
100
80
Head (Feet)
60 11/2 hp 40
1/2
3 hp 2 hp 1 hp
3/4 hp
Hp
Full Load Amps
Voltage
11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2"
I/O
Ship Wt
$ 417.15 443.98 457.47 522.68 584.78 698.63 955.31 12.64 58.08 8.16 11.02 20.98
Each
396.58 421.78 434.60 496.55 555.54 663.70 907.54
3+
20
hp
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 GPM 10 All pumps come with stainless steel hardware, 8' power cord (PS2SS through PS4SS models only). Inlet/outlet connections are 11/2" FNPT on all pumps. 3,450 rpm, TEFC Baldor motors are slightly oversized for the pumps, resulting in a cool-running, long-lasting, reliable pump. Two-year warranty. Made in USA.
Self g r P imin to 8'

Head (Feet)
70 60
SP
03 SP
50 40
SP
30 20 10 GPM 20
SP12
PS2SS PS3SS PS4SS PS5SS PS53SS PS6SS PS63SS PS73SS 1000.0414
115/230 7.4 @ 115V 115/230 10.8 @ 115V 1 115/230 12.0 @ 115V 11/2 115/230 15.0 @ 115V 11/2 208/460, 3- 4.2 @ 230V 2 230 11.5 @ 230V 2 208/460, 3- 4.6 @ 230V 3 208/460, 3- 5.4 @ 230V Replacement Shaft Seal
Hp
1/2 3/4
Volts
Full Load Amps
Ship Wt
$ 595.00 685.00 712.00 729.00 680.00 848.00 788.00 900.00 38.25
Each
547.40 631.00 655.00 671.00 626.00 780.16 724.96 828.00 34.43
3+
25 SP
2 SP0
015
01 SP
4 SP3
60
40
12
80 100 120 140 160
Pump Trap, Large

Leaves, weeds or whatever, you won't have to empty this basket very often. The typical strainer has only 30 sq.in. of filter area. WLS3 has 165 sq.in! 18.5" H, 9" x 9" footprint. Clear top, air release valves and adjustable feet. 2" in/out slip connections. WLS3 WLS3B WLS3OR Pump Trap Repl. Basket Repl. O-Ring $ 191.23 36.13 10.00
PS2SS
3-Phase Equipment
WLS3 shown with HSW1 (not included)
Pump Trap
Here is a pump trap (also known as priming pot) at a very reasonable price. Ideal for garden ponds, recirculating systems, swimming pools, etc. All-plastic trap has a 11/2" FNPT inlet, 11/2" MNPT outlet and weighs 2 lbs. Measures 11" H x 7" D x 71/2" L. One-year warranty.
230V or Not?
Don't be fooled by terminology. Just because an electrical circuit is described as "230-volt" does not mean that it actually is 230 volts. The actual voltage that is supplied to a circuit is dependent on many factors, including the power supplied by the electrical company and the length of wire between the source and your circuit. In many areas, the electrical company is allowed to vary the voltage by 10%. In fact, some electric companies supply only 208 volts. Save yourself headaches and premature motor failures by using a voltmeter to test your line voltage before installing any electrical equipment.
P5 P5B P5C P5R
Pump Trap Repl. Basket Repl. Cover Repl. O-Ring
$ 48.36 15.39 37.44 8.84
P5
Centrifugal/Commercial
Pumps
311
WhisperFlo Pumps by Pentair

WhisperFlo high-performance pumps offer extremely high water fl ow in a quiet, energy-effi cient package. Durable build makes them effective in residential and commercial applications. Include oversized strainer basket and volute. Compatible with a wide assortment of cleaning and filtration systems. 2" inlet/outlet ports and antiblocking strainer basket ensure maximum water fl ow and efficiency. UL-listed and NSF-certifi ed. One-year warranty.
Hp
1/2 3/4
3-Phase Equipment
WFE2* WFE3* WFE4* WFE6 WFE8 WFE12 WFK-2 WFK3 WFK-4 WFK6 WFK8 WFK12
1 11/2 2 3 1 11/2 2 3
1/2 3/4
1.90 1.67 1.65 1.47 1.30 1.15 1.90 1.65 1.65 1.47 1.30 1.15
SF
115/208/230 115/208/230 115/208/230 208/230 208/230 230 208/230/460 208/230/460 208/230/460 208/230/460 208/230/460 208/230/460
Voltage
Phase(s)
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3
11.2/6.0/5.6 11.2/6.0/5.6 14.8/7.8/7.4 9.6/8.8 11.0/10.2 15.0/13.6 3.2/3.0/1.5 3.8/3.6/1.8 5.0/4.6/2.3 6.4/5.8/2.9 7.1/6.8/3.4 11.0/10.4/5.2
Full Load Amps
Ship Weight (lbs)
41 41 46 54 55 56 39 42 46 54 56 58
$ 490.88 532.48 569.92 580.32 691.60 829.92 490.88 532.48 569.92 607.36 715.52 865.28
120
*Includes 8' power cord. Add "-230" to the part number for 230V.
100
80 Head (Feet)
3 hp
60
1/ 2
3/ 4
1h
hp
1 1/2
p
2h
p hp
40
hp
WFE12
20
GPM
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
High-Volume Pumps
Medium to high head.
These glass reinforced plastic pumps are the answer to high-flow, high-head jobs. Select between self-priming to 4' (SP), flooded suction (FS) or self-priming to 4' with large strainer basket (SPB). Impeller has a plastic shaft sleeve that provides complete separation of the water and electrical parts, plus a saltwater seal with one- hour run-dry ability. 4" inlet and outlet. Standard is a 208230V single-phase motor. Add a "3" after part number to order a 3-phase motor. Two-year warranty. SP331 SP332 SP338 SP341 SP342 SP348
90 80 70 Head (Feet) 60 50 40 30 20 10 GPM 100 200 300 400 3,500 rpm
4-hp FS 4-hp SP 4-hp SPB 6-hp FS 6-hp SP 6-hp SPB
Amps (208/230)
21/19.4 21/19.4 21/19.4 25.8/24 25.8/24 25.8/24
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.0 1.0 1.0
SF
Ship Wt
69 lbs $ 2,584.23 70 lbs 2,678.23 79 lbs 3,225.23 75 lbs 2,809.23 76 lbs 2,885.23 85 lbs 3,237.23
1-Phase
2,633.23 2,694.23 3,188.23 2,594.23 2,694.23 3,213.23
3-Phase
6 hp, Single e Phas ! Option
SP3 41 / SP S P3 34 42
SP 33 8
8
SP3 31/S P33 2
SP331
312
Pumps
Commercial/Gasoline
KingFish Pumps by Sequel

Get great flowrates in a small, powerful package that's built for even the most demanding applications. Suitable for simple biological purification as well as powering artistic water features. Easy-dial frequency control lets you manage your flow and run a complex filtration system without the need for constant supervision. Inlet and outlet are FNPT. 3-phase motor is housed in a durable TEFC enclosure. Simple to install and operate. 115V, 60 Hz. Three-year warranty.
Watts Amps Hp Max Flow Max Head Inlet/ Outlet Ship Wt (lbs)
45 40 35 30
10 0%
Ma x
Head (Feet)
25 20 15
Sp ee
8 0%
60%
40% Ma x Sp eed
20% Max
Ma x
SEQKING
840
9.4
107 gpm
42'
2"/11/2"
28
$ 1,650
10 5
Ma xS pe ed
Sp ee d
Spee
d
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
3-Phase Equipment
GPM 10
20
30
Easy-dial controller makes operation simple.
100 80 Head (Feet) 60
Self-Priming Pumps
Pacer pumps are an excellent choice for saltwater applications or situations requiring self-priming. They feature 316 stainless steel shafts, EPDM seals, lined volute and all stainless steel fasteners. Baseplates include fasteners, shims and the motor coupling guard. Motors listed are TEFC (specify voltage). Power cords are not included. Flexible coupled models listed include motors, bases and preassembly. Because we have many variations, you may want to call for a quotation. 50-Hz motors are available by special order. One-year warranty. Made in USA.
Style Motor Hp Phase(s) Maximum Flow Maximum Rpm
PR 3
rie Se
s
PR 5
Se
rie s
40 20
PR 6S
PR 50 S
PR1 Se rie s
2 PR
eri e
Se
s rie
e ri
es
Close-Coupled
100 150
GPM
50
200
250
300
350
PR50C Close-Coupled .6 1 80 1,750 11/2" 30 lbs $ 667 PR1C Close-Coupled 1 1 120 1,750 2" 35 lbs 798 PR2C Close-Coupled 2 1 110 3,450 2" 45 lbs 923 PR3C Close-Coupled 3 3 180 3,450 2" 60 lbs 885 PR3F Flexible* 3 1 180 3,450 2" 75 lbs 1,448 PR5F Flexible* 5 1 240 3,450 2" 75 lbs 2,045 PR5F3 Flexible* 5 3 240 3,450 2" 75 lbs 1,412 PR6F Flexible* 5 1 280 3,450 3" 75 lbs 1,934 PR6F3 Flexible* 5 3 280 3,450 3" 75 lbs 1,477 *Includes preassembly on baseplateflexible coupling only. Maximum priming suction lift: 25' on 3,450 rpm; 12' on 1,750 rpm.
Discharge & Suction
Ship Weight
Custom Quotes le Availab
Gasoline-Powered Pumps and Trash Pumps

"S" Series
This is a lightweight, self-priming centrifugal pump. Housing is molded of glassreinforced polyester. Stainless steel fasteners, Buna-N O-rings, check valve and abrasion-resistant volute make this pump an excellent choice for general aquaculture applications, including saltwater use. Powered by a Briggs & Stratton I/C (industrial/commercial) gas engine for excellent reliability, except GP1A, which has a standard B&S engine.
GP1A/GP2
"T" Series
This self-priming, centrifugal trash pump is capable of passing solids up to 1" in size. Glass-reinforced polyester housing, nonmetallic impeller, quick-release stainless steel housing clamp, volute and wear plate coating make it ideal for saltwater applications where solids are present. Powered by a Briggs & Stratton I/C gas engine. Includes strainer (photo shows optional roll cage). GP1A GP2 GP5 GP6
100 80 Head (Feet) 60 40 20 GPM 100
GP6
Series
"S" "S" "T" "T"
3.5 5 5 8
Hp
Max Head
80' 80' 90' 80'
150 gpm 240 gpm 240 gpm 350 gpm
Max Capacity
Inlet/ Outlet
2" 2" 2" 3"
Ship Wt
$ 360 655 1,296 1,316
GP5
GP6
GP 5
GP 1A
GP 2
200
300
400
Centrifugal/Accessories
Pumps
313
Genesys 2x3x6 Pump

The Genesys nonmetallic, end-suction centrifugal pump line is designed and engineered for highly efficient pumping solutions. The interchangeable 2x3x6 model is a drop-in replacement for ANSI B73.1-conforming pumps. Composite construction with no wetted metal parts gives it compatibility with most aggressive chemistries. The unique closed impeller and time-tested volute design render performances up to 500 gpm and 180' of shut-off head. And it can produce peak performances at 81% efficiency!
Titan Pumps by Sequence

As large water features and high 22 turnover requirements continue to gain popularity, the cost of energy 18 does not! Titan pumps will give you 12,000 gph for less than 845 watts! 14 With flowrates between 12,000 and 32,000 gph and head capabilities 10 SEQ21T between 21 and 180', they're sure 6 to cover most large-scale water feature requirements. All have TEFC 2 motor enclosure, 3" inlet and 2" discharge. SEQ21T and SEQ45T GPM 50 100 150 200 available in 115V or 230V. SEQ180T available only in 230/460V 3-phase. SEQ21T includes 115V or 230V power cable. Three-year warranty. Made in USA. SEQ21T SEQ45T SEQ180T
50 40 Head (Feet) 30 20 10 SEQ45T
Head (Feet)
Other features:

Straight forward through-bolt construction for simplified field maintenance. True closed-coupled/back pull-out design for ease of use. No impeller or seal adjustment necessary. The simple assembly maintains proper heights.
Sizes range from 3/4 to 15 hp. In order to ensure you receive a properly sized Genesys pump with all the right options, please call Waterlife Design Group at 407-472-0525 for assistance. Prices start at $1,946.
Hp
3/4
3 15
12,500 18,400 32,000
Gph
845 2,110 13,000
Watts
Head (Feet)
Amps
6 10.8 36
200 160 120 80 40
Max Head
21' 45' 180'
$ 1,902 2,400 3,044
SEQ180T
GPM
100
200
300
GPM
200
400
SEQ45T
Pump Mount
Rubber pump-mounting pad reduces noise and vibration. Will fit any 48-frame pump up to 6 3/8" L x 4" W x 3/8" H. Includes four screw pads and a bottommounting pad. PM501 $ 9.80
Universal Motor Cover

Fits most pumps, compressors and electric motors. Has open ends and vented sides. 13" L x 81/2" W x 81/2" H. 100% noncorroding plastic. Assembly required. UMC $ 26.55 21.42/4+
314
Pumps
Tech Talks
Tech Talk 61
Friction Loss in PVC Plumbing
The AES Technical Department set up this actual pumping system (shown at right) six different times using our SHE2.4 pump. Two elbow types and three pipe sizes were used to illustrate the importance of correct plumbing.
Actual Pumping System Using the SHE2.4 Pump 4' Vertical Head = 4' 5 Elbows or Sweeps
Study the results below to understand these principles:

Elbows vs sweeps. Flow vs pipe size. Vertical head vs total discharge head. Pumping cost vs head.
Note: Centrifugal pumps (not self-priming) perform best with flooded suction (pumps filled by gravity) as shown. The suction pipe should be nonrestrictive. To control pump's output, put a valve on the discharge side.
Pipe Size Ell Style Vertical Head
11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2"
90 Sweep 90 Sweep 90 Sweep
4' 4' 4' 4' 4' 4'
Each test used 40' of piping. SHE2.4 Pump Measured Total Discharge Running Amps Pumping Time Head* (ft water) Gpm Pumped @ 115V kW per 100,000 gal
13 12.8 12 10.4 7.4 6.5
34 37 45 49 57 62
2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
.26 .26 .27 .27 .27 .27
49 hours 45 hours 37 hours 34 hours 29 hours 27 hours
Pumping Cost per 100,000 gal @ 10 kWh
$ 1.27 1.17 1.00 .92 .78 .73
All PVC pipe was Schedule 40, elbows were 90 short. Cost is based on 10 per kWh. Actual vertical head was only 4 feet. IMPORTANT: Vertical head is always measured from water surface (as shown), not from pump.
*This example is total discharge head only. For total dynamic head (TDH), entrance and friction losses on the pump inlet side must be added.
Plastic Pipe Selection Chart

Feet of Head Loss per 100' at Diameter (inches) Flow (gpm)
1/2 3/4
Friction Loss in PVC Pipe

2 21/2
11/4
11/2
1. From the chart at left, using gpm and pipe size, find the friction loss per 100' of pipe. Example: 40 gpm in a 11/2" pipe = 10' loss per 100' of pipe. 40' then causes about 4' of head loss. 2. Next, find the friction loss caused by the fittings. Please note that the friction loss depends on the fitting diameter. A standard 1.5" elbow is equal to about 4' of pipe; long elbows, sweeps and 45 elbows are equal to about 2' of pipe; straight through a "T" about 3' of pipe and a 90 turn through a "T" about 9' of pipe. Example: 40 gpm through 5 standard 1.5" elbows = 20' of pipe, which equals 2' of head loss. Add this to the pipe's head loss and the actual vertical head height in feet to get total dynamic head (TDH). It is up to you to determine which pump to purchase and how to plumb it correctly. If you need help, send us a sketch and we'll size the pipe for youat no charge. Note: The electric energy required for a centrifugal pump usually goes down as the head pressure goes up. It is the opposite of an air compressor.
.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 200
.3 1.1 4.1 8.6 14.8 22.2 80.5
1.0 2.2 3.7 5.7 20.4 43.3 73.5
.3 .7 1.1 1.7 6.3 13.4 22.8 48.1 82.0
.3 .5 1.7 3.5 6.0 12.7 21.6 32.6 45.6
.8 1.6 2.8 6.0 10.2 15.4 21.6 28.7 36.8 45.7 56.6
.2 .5 .8 1.9 3.0 4.6 6.4 8.5 10.9 13.6 16.5 35.0 59.4
.3 .7 1.3 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.6 5.7 6.9 14.7 25.0
Tech Talk 10
Water Pump Working Too Hard?
You will only know if your pump is working too hard by measuring the pump motor amp draw at the motor. If it is drawing more amps than the full load amps (FLA) rating on the motor label, there is a serious risk of burning out the motor. To reduce the amp draw, do one of three things: get full voltage to the motor by using heavier wiring, restrict the pump discharge or trim the impeller. Check the voltage at both the pump and the source. If it is less than 5V (or more) at the pump, a heavier gauge wire will reduce the voltage drop and, thus, the amp draw. Pump discharge can be restricted by using a valve, but there is a risk of someone opening the valve later. In place of a valve, use a permanent restriction, such as a reducer fitting in the discharge pipe. To trim the impeller, remove the pump case (volute) and carefully trim 1/8" off the impeller diameter. In some cases, this can be done by very carefully holding a file to the impeller while the pump is on. Put the pump back together and test the amp draw again. Repeat the trimming procedure until the desired amp draw is achieved. Remember that trimming reduces the gpm. To be absolutely certain that motors won't fail due to excessive amp draw, always check volts and amps at the motor while the pump is running at full load. In many places with 110115V service, a voltage variation from 105 to 126 may occur. A motor's amp draw will be the highest when the voltage is the lowest, so check the full load amps when the facility's voltage is lowest and while all other equipment on that circuit is in use. You can use a clamp-on multimeter to check voltage (AES part no. 3838).
Accessories
Pumps
315
Float Switches
No electrician needed!
Use these mercury float switches to automatically operate pumps or alarms. They have 10' SJOW-A Class underwater-rated cable with a piggyback plug so devices can be conveniently plugged into it at the power receptacle (all float switch installations should be GFCI-protected and installed on thermally protected equipment only). Pump Up (U)=when pump switch falls, pump turns on. Pump Down (D)=when pump switch lifts, pump turns on. UL-listed and CSA-certified. Ship weight 2 lbs. One-year warranty. Made in USA. Not for use in potable water.
Volts Max Running Amps Max Starting Amps Power Cord Min/Max Tether Length
Flow Switches
An excellent value on UL-recognized flow sensing switches that can turn on or off a heater, chiller, alarm, pump, etc., up to 2 hp (@ 230V). The ST9 is factory adjusted to close the circuit at 14 gpm and open it at 6 gpm, but is also field adjustable over a wider range. At 40 gpm, it causes only 6" of H2O pressure loss. A "flapper" (piston in ST12) moves with water flow, actuating a magnetic switch on the outside of the pipe. Water cannot reach the electrical section! Operates by sensing water flow only (unaffected by pressure). Plumbing is PVC slip sockets. ST11 and ST12 have a selectable N.O./N.C. setting. Rated to 50 psi, 125VAC to 25 A (1-hp motor) or 250VAC to 25 A (2-hp motor). Switch is single pole, single throw (one wire in, one wire out) with 1/2" FNPT conduit connections on both sides. One plastic plug (shown in black) is included. Switches measure 6" x 6". One-year warranty. Made in USA. ST9 ST12 ST11

PL1U PL1D PL2U PL2D PL3U PL3D
115 115 115 115 230 230
13 13 15 15 15 15
40 40 55 55 35 35
16 gauge 16 gauge 14 gauge 14 gauge 14 gauge 14 gauge
6"17" 6"17" 6"14" 6"14" 6"14" 6"14"
$ 58.40 58.40 101.52 101.52 103.66 103.66
Drip Loop Power cord tethering clamp not included.
Wall Outlet Pumping Range Tether Length Float Switch Pump
11/2" 1" 2"
$ 73.59 95.65 103.00
Each
66.23 86.74 92.70
6+
Grounding Probes, Titanium

Made of pure titanium, these specially designed probes remove "stray voltage" generated by pumps, heaters, lights and other electrical devices. A worthwhile safety device for live seafood tanks, aquariums, hatcheries, garden ponds, etc. Noncorroding titanium probes have 10' wire lead. Simply immerse probe in water and either plug into wall receptacle or attach to grounding lug. Instructions included. TG10 GP10 Probe With Plug Probe w/o Plug $ 14.50 14.95 13.05/6+ 13.46/6+
pl1u
High- and Low-Water Alarms

These alarms operate with a mechanical float switch and 15' cable. The indoor Tank Alert is housed in a NEMA 1 metal enclosure and features a red warning light, horn with silence switch and test button. The indoor/outdoor Tank Alert is the same as the indoor model but housed in a Type 3R watertight, thermoplastic enclosure. High-water alarms sound when water level rises; order "L" models for low-water alarm. All are 115V with 6' power cords. UL-and CSA-approved. Three-year limited warranty. WL252 WL252L WL273 WL273L Indoor High Indoor Low Indoor/Outdoor High Indoor/Outdoor Low $ 117.63 117.63 172.00 172.00
Sacrificial Anode, Magnesium

They can be used to protect submersible pumps, or any other metallic equipment, in water (especially salt water) or wet earth. The more active metal (magnesium) of the anode will be "sacrificed" before any of the less active metal (aluminum, steel, stainless steel, etc.) it is protecting. 5/8" diameter x 5" L. Actual weight .2 lb. SA1 $ 18.41 16.98/6+
wl273
Water Level Switches

These float switches convert from normally open (N.O.) to normally closed (N.C.) circuitry by simply inverting the stem. Polypropylene construction. The mini switch is 21/4" long overall, 1" in diameter with 1/8" MPT mounting, rated at 30 watts. The larger switch is 33/8" overall x 11/2" in diameter with 1/4" MPT and is rated at 60 watts. Each with 16" wires. Great pump switches when used with relays. One-year warranty. Made in USA. ST3M ST3 Mini Switch Large Switch $ 19.20 69.83
st3
Sacrificial Anode, Zinc

These zinc anodes are cheap insurance that will reduce or eliminate corrosion of underwater equipment. Simply attach this 3/4-lb zinc anode to a submerged metal part of the equipment and electrolysis will corrode the zinc first. Each unit has two wires molded in to make attachment easy. Anodes should be changed when they have reduced to 1/4 their original size. 1" x 5". Useful in both fresh and salt water and wet earth. ZA34 $ 7.45 6.71/6+
316
Pumps
Flow Meters
In-Line Flow Meters

Know your water flowrate.
These paddlewheel meters include totalizer. They are resettable, waterproof and continuously display the reading on a LCD readout with a battery life greater than one year. The head of the meter rotates, allowing reading of the display in any position. The meter can be mounted either vertically or horizontally on a pipe that is full of water. Insertion models (PT-I part nos.) install on existing pipe. Pipe mount models (ET part nos.) are pre-installed on 13" long PVC pipe. The operating pressures and temperatures correspond to standard PVC pipe, not to exceed 200 psi. Ambient temperature range: 10 to 150F. One-year warranty.
Flow Meters
These high-performance flow meters feature a durable, one-piece body made of polysulfone. Flow meters also have built-in 316 stainless steel pole guided floats (reduce flow oscillation) and permanent gpm/Lpm scales. Inlet/Outlet 2" FPT unions, Viton O-ring seals. Flow meters measure 19" OAL (including unions) x 41/2" W and weigh 3 lbs each. MUST be mounted vertically. One-year warranty. BWM2 BWM6 BWM10 BWM5 BWM15 BWM20 BWM30
Flowrate (Gpm)
220 660 1080 5100 15130 20175 30230
Flowrate (Lpm)
775 30230 40300 20380 60500 75660 115870
$ 467.77 467.77 467.77 467.77 502.32 502.32 467.77

bwm2
ET13 wm10
Maximum percent solids: 1% of fluid scale. Linearity: 1.5% full scale. Repeatability: 1.0% full scale. Operating pressure: <200 psi.
Mounting Instructions
Mount vertically on horizontal pipe that's at least 10 times the pipe inside diameter from nearest fitting or restriction on the inlet side and 5 times the diameter on the outlet side.

Flowrates (gpm) for Various Sizes of Pipes 3/4" 230 1" 555 11/2" 10125 2" 15200 3" 40450 4" 70800
Flow Meters
These clamp-on flow meters are simple to install. Just drill an 11/16" hole in a horizontal section of pipe and clamp it on with the two stainless steel clamps provided. Easily disassembled for cleaning. May be used with salt water, but the float (replaceable) will corrode. Maximum temperature 120F. Maximum pressure 120 psi. Dual scale, gpm & Lpm. Replacement float fits all. Made in USA.
ET13 ET14 ET15 ET16 ET17 ET18 PT-I-40-2.0 PT-I-40-3.0 PT-I-40-4.0 PT-I-40-6.0 PT-I-40-8.0
Part No
PVC Pipe Size
1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8"
3/4"
Schedule
80 80 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
$ 330.00 330.00 330.00 330.00 335.00 335.00 335.00 335.00 335.00 340.00 360.00
WM10 1" 535/20130 $ 54.95 WM1 11/2" 2080/80300 54.95 WM2 2" 30140/120550 54.95 WM3 21/2" 40200/160750 54.95 WM4 3" 80350/3001,300 54.95 WM5 4" 150600/6002,200 54.95 812365 Replacement Float 5.46
PVC Pipe Size
Flowrate (Gpm/Lpm)
Each
49.50 49.50 49.50 49.50 49.50 49.50 4.91
4+
Provided Mounting Hardware
Digital Flow Meters, Battery-Powered

These NEMA 4X-rated (waterproof) flow meters are economical and easy to install. They measure flowrate or cumulative flow, and offer standard and low-flow ranges. Tamperproof, molded construction features corrosionproof submerged parts. 5932-410 has an in-line fitting. RB-200S8-GPM1 is a clamp-on style that fits Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe. Require 2 AAA batteries (not included). Max temperature 200F, max pressure 300 psig. Accuracy is 2% of reading. 2" L x 6" W x 6" H. Ship weight 1 lb.
Pipe Size Flowrate (gpm) Body Material
Mounting Instructions
Mount vertically on horizontal pipe at least 10 times the pipe inside diameter from nearest fitting or restriction on the inlet side and 5 times the diameter on the outlet side.
5932-410 In-Line Fitting RB-200S8-GPM1 Clamp-On Style
1" 2
220 30300
Polypropylene PVDF
$ 307 325
5932-410
RB-200s8-gpm1
Enclosures/GFCI/Tech Talk
Electrical
317
NEMA Enclosures
NEMA enclosures protect electrical equipment, instrumentation, etc., in wet or humid environments. Bodies are high-impact thermoplastic and feature clear polycarbonate lids with gaskets for a watertight seal and external hinges for easy access. Bodies are easy to drill or cut for cable connectors. Meet NEMA Standard Ratings 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, 4X and 12. Made in USA. Limited quantities available. NM8 NM11 NM14 NM1614 NM2

GFCI Quad Cord

Portable protection against hazardous shock
We highly recommend this GFCI for any place that electrical equipment is used near a wet area. It is rated for 15 A@115V and has four outlets with covers for outdoor protection. The on/off power switch is lighted, and it has a 15-amp circuit breaker reset button. Right angle GFCI plug with 6' of 12/3 gauge cord. UL/CSA-listed. 30334052 $ 46.93 42.90/4+
8" x 8" x 4" 1 lb 10" x 10" x 6" 3 lbs 14" x 12" x 6" 3 lbs 16" x 14" x 12" 5 lbs Latch (1)
Ship Wt
$ 129.00 178.90 273.00 303.20 10.38
Optional quick release latches (NM2) are lockable (NM14 and larger require two).
GFCI Power Cord

nm10
Fiberglass Cabinets
These high-quality, molded fiberglass cabinets are built with a stainless steel piano hinge, latch and padlock hasp. Dust and moistureproof, they have silicone gaskets and integral mounting feet. Ideal for storage of electrical equipment and control circuitry. Made in USA. FFC1 FFC3

This heavy-duty, right-angle, GFCI-protected power cord has a triple tap female end for powering up to three pieces of equipment. Cord is rated at 15 A/115V and has 12/3 gauge wires. Front panel has an LED indicator. UL-, CSA-listed. 30334008 2' $ 38.32 33.72/4+
In-Line GFCI Cord Sets

FFC1
14" H x 12" W x 7" D 18" H x 16" W x 10" D
Ship Wt
9 lbs 19 lbs
$ 177.45 222.60
These portable GFCI cords are rainproof and well suited for use in humid conditions. Theyre rated for both indoor and outdoor use. All are 12/3 AWG and have indicator lights. Available in a wide range of sizes and voltages. UL-listed. Note that GF81 is for 20-amp outlets only; it will not plug into a 15-amp standard household outlet. GF8018 GF8022 GF8052 GF81 GF241 GF225
Amps
Spiral Wrap/Split Tubing

st10
Spiral wrap and split tubing make it easy to organize wires. Split tubing is 3/8" in diameter. Spiral wrap fits all sizes. ST10 SW10 SW01 Split Tubing, 3/8" x 10' Spiral Wrap, 10' Spiral Wrap, 1' $ 6.65 7.55 2.00
15 15 15 20 20 20
Volts
115 115 115 115 230 230
Length
18" 6' 25' 1' 2' 25'
$ 27.62 49.44 71.47 92.55 84.00 134.69
GF81
sw10
Tech Talk 39 Phase Rotation Tester

Use these for testing phase orientation of three-phase power sources. Five LEDs: two indicate phase orientation (correct or incorrect) and whether each of the three phases is live. 100660VAC, 5070 Hz test range. Complete with alligator clips. Dimensions: 31/2" x 2" x 1". Weighs only 5 oz. PRT2 $ 84.99
208V vs 230V Motors

A motor that is rated for 230 or 240 volts is not compatible with 208V power. The motor will fail and will not be covered by warranty. When it fails depends on how well the motor was built, how hard it is working and the actual voltage that is getting to the motor. If you only have 208V power and can't find a motor that is rated for it, you can install a "buck-boost transformer" to raise your voltage. Mostbut not allAC motors are built to tolerate a 10% up or down voltage variation from what is shown on the motor nameplate. A motor labeled as 115V can operate reliably between 108 and 132V. The range for 208V motor is 187 to 229V. The range for 230V is 207 to 253V. After reading these ranges you might think, "A 230V motor can work at 208V." That would be true if your service always gave a minimum of 208V. But it will not because of "voltage variation." For instance, if your service is 208V, you will experience normal voltage variations as low as 187. This is why some 230V motors operate on 208V service for a while, then, when other equipment starts up, the voltage drops below 207 and the motor draws more amps, overheats and fails. Buck-boost transformers reduce (buck) or raise (boost) supply voltage to the required level. A common application is boosting 208V to 230V. If your motor is a long distance from your power meter you will also incur "line losses." These will show as lower voltage and higher amperage at the motor. To be sure your installation is correct, always measure the volts and amps at the motor location, while it and everything else on that line is operating. Both must be within the motor label's specifications. See Tech Talks 5, 10 and 11 for more information.
38387
Clamp-On Multimeter
This clamp-on multimeter measures AC current (max 600 A), AC/DC voltage and resistance. It has a 1.25" (33-mm) circular jaw opening that will fit thick cables, and its Data Hold feature freezes data in its large, four-digit LCD display. Automatic shut-off conserves battery power. Includes test leads, 9V battery and belt holster. The line splitter allows use of a clamp type meter to measure AC current on a 3-wire 115V power cord up to 15 amps. Clamp on an ammeter for an easy and safe measurement of current. Two clamp positions: x1 for direct readings, x10 for actual reading multiplied by 10. Voltage check function. 51/2" x 2" and weighs 6 oz. 38387 480172 Multimeter Line Splitter $ 59.95 15.95
318
Electrical
Power Cable/Housing/Grips
ProSplice
Specifically designed for splicing underwater power cable, the ProSplice features compressible grommets that provide a watertight closure around each cable end. Each ProSplice includes grommets to fit our UC1-S, UC4-S, UC5-S and UC6-S underwater power cables listed to the right. SK10 Power Cord Splice Kit $ 20.85
SK10 Each
Power Cable, Submersible

Flexible and durable.
This PVC cable is safe for wet-service and submersible applications. UL- and CSA-listed; STW 600V grounding. Use 3-wire cable for single-phase and 4-wire cable for three-phase power requirements. Made in USA. UC1-S UC3-S UC4-S UC102 UC103 14-gauge/3-wire 12-gauge/3-wire 12-gauge/4-wire 10-gauge/3-wire 10-gauge/4-wire
Amps UC1-S
18.65
4+
18 25 20 30 25
O.D. (in)
.528 .609 .664 .652 .713
$ 1.55 1.80 1.95 2.62 2.60
Per Ft
100'+
1.40 1.62 1.76 2.36 2.34
UC3-S
UC4-S
Gauge
The heat-sealed kit is designed for underground use. SK8 Heat-Sealed Splice Kit $ 20
14 12 10
115V 6A
65' 104' 166'
Max Cable Length 115V 230V 10 A 6A
39' 62' 99'
260' 416' 664'
230V 10 A
UC102
156' 248' 396'
UC103 Call the AES Technical Department for sizing help.
Weatherproof Housing for Extension Cords

A must for every fish room!
This inexpensive, weatherproof housing safely keeps extension cords protected from mud, surface water and rain. Easy to install, eliminates shock hazard and power interruptions by keeping power cords connected. Measures 81/2" L x 21/2" diameter. Fits round 3-wire cables listed. WPH16 WPH14 WPH12 For 5/16" O.D. Cord, 16 gauge For 3/8" O.D. Cord, 14 gauge For 1/2" O.D. Cord, 12 gauge $ 28.15 28.15 28.15
WPH16
AC Electrical Sensor
Safety first!
This AC electrical current sensor is a noncontact sensor that can be used to detect the presence or absence of AC voltage in order to prevent electrical shock. It is ideal for locating defective grounds, energized circuits and induced voltage. Simply place the sensor on the test area and, if voltage is present, the tip will light up cherry red. This is the only instrument of its type for use by OSHA compliance officers. It is patented, UL-listed and CATIII/CATIV-rated. Operating range 501,000VAC. Powered by two AAA batteries (included). Measures 6" long x 3/4" diameter. Made in USA. AC5 $ 20.85
Cord Grips Weatherproof Receptacle Cover

Ever been shocked by a wet outlet outside? These weatherproof receptacle covers should be part of your safety plan. Install them over duplex outlet or GFCI unit for complete shielding from the elements. The clear dome depth is 31/2" and accepts even the larger power cord plug styles. Made in USA. RC2 $ 15.10 These nonmetallic grips provide a liquid-tight, strain-relief connection for cables, cords and tubing. Manufactured from nylon 6/6, they are suitable for industrial and agriculture applications. Corrosion-resistant, lightweight and nonconductive. L6410 1/4" L6420 3/8" L6430 1/2" L6440 3/4" L6450 1"
Accommodates Dia. of Cable
.114.250" .181.312" .170.470" .450.709" .5901.000"
Hole Size
.492 .670 .875 1.068 1.375
$ 3.80 4.30 4.30 6.50 9.95
L6410
Cable Grips
These low-profile, power cable, strain-relief grips have an extremely wide cable diameter range. The unique internal design assures a liquid-tight seal as well as superior pull-out resistance. Tightening the nut by hand makes the grommet constrict on the cord or cable, locking it firmly in place. Fits cords 3/8" to 3/4" (1 to 2 cm), MNPT connections. LC12
1/2"
$ 4.65
LC34
3/4"
5.15
LC12 Components LC12 Assembled
Solar Power Stations/Timers
Electrical
319
Solar Power Stations

As electricity costs continue to rise, AES is working hard to bring alternative energy sources to your aquaculture facility. Our new solar power station is a complete system that is easy to install and easy to use. Great for powering aeration systems, water pumps, feeders and more. And SUNDIAL timer technology, included with all AES solar power stations, ensures that you'll always have power on demand when you need it. These power stations have been developed using maximum power point tracker (MPPT) controller technology. Solar cells vary in power output in relation to the sun's intensity, so the MPPT tracks the best combination of voltage/current to optimize the power harvested. Packages also include lowvoltage disconnect and overcharge protection to prevent battery damage and maximize system life. All systems have 12V output. Solar panels measure 59.1" x 26.3" x 1.8" and weigh 27 lbs each.
Total Weight Solar Panels Max Amps Power Output
SPS05KW12V SPS1KW12V SPS2KW12V
24" x 14.5" x 16" 24" x 24" x 18" 24" x 24" x 18"
Dimensions
100 lbs 220 lbs 360 lbs
1 x 135 W 2 x 135 W 4 x 135 W
1 x 12V Gel 2 x 12V Gel 4 x 12V Gel
Battery
15 15 30
500 Watt-Hr/Day 1,000 Watt-Hr/Day 2,000 Watt-Hr/Day
$ 2,408 3,510 6,120
Package includes prewired cabinet, circuit breakers, timer, terminals for easy load connection, and solar panel mounting bracket. *System is based on 5.2 average hours of sunlight per day.
Wattmeter
Will pay for itself many times over
Electricity bills mean loss of pro t. Now you can learn what the power for your equipment is actually costing. Simply connect the equipment to the Kill A Watt and it will display how many kilowatts are being consumed. It will also check the quality of the power by monitoring voltage, line frequency and power factor! 115V/60 Hz, max 10 amps, weighs 1 lb. KW4 $ 38.95
24-Hour & 7-Day Electronic Plug-in Timers

These easy-to-use, 115VAC, 15-amp timers have a digital display and feature 8 programs (4 on, 4 off) with programming at 1-minute intervals. Built-in battery for reserve carry over. Manual switch, grounded 3-conductor plug. HSOT HDOT Single Dual $ 17.95 19.95
Power Center
Timer or wave-maker
The Power Center is an easy-to-use, 24-hour timer that has 4 constant-power outlets and 4 timer-controlled outlets. The mechanical timer can set the time-controlled outlets to a minimum of 15-minute intervals, making it great for use with water pumps to create tidal- ow currents. Unit includes a 3' heavy-duty power cord and a 3-prong grounded plug. UL-listed. Measures 12.5" L x 10.5" W x 9.5" H, maximum 15 amps @ 115V/50 Hz. 1690 $ 28.95
Repeat Cycle Timer

Here is a timer that can "do it all," yet is easy to set. It is a repeat cycle timer that will turn on and off at preset intervals (not time of day). Extremely useful for automatic operation of valves, feeding devices, pumps, etc. It allows the setting of timing ranges from .05 seconds to 100 hours! Set on and off periods independently with two dials, 1% accuracy. 13/4" square with 8-wire quick plug. Its double pole, double throw switch is rated at 5 amps, 230VAC. Input voltage 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz. Made in Japan. T5 $ 113.50
7-Day Timer/Switch
This seven-day timer/switch offers features not found in standard timers. It has a NEMA-rated lockable steel enclosure and up to 10 on/off "events" per day. The minimum on or off time is 1 minute with 1 minute increments. Each day of the week may be programmed separately. A manual override allows checking of the run time without disturbing normal programming. This unit will switch two independent loads up to 30 A each at 24/115 or 230V. Another timing alternative offered by this unit is "momentary pulse." Set up to 20 momentary pulses/day. Each is on for 18 seconds only (on time is not adjustable). A battery-controlled microprocessor ensures against memory failure due to power outages. Weighs 4 lbs. Made in USA. TR1 $ 196.28
Dial Timer
This 24-hour timer has two 3-prong outlets and controls any 115V/60 Hz devices up to 15 amps. It also has 15-minute interval settings and a master on/off control switch. Reclose the plastic packaging after plugging in devices for a level of splash protection. UL-listed timer switch. AT2415 $ 8.45
320
Paint/Safety
Sealants/Goggles
Rescue Tape
Seal leaky hoses, pipes, tubing, lines and fittings with the most versatile and easy-to-use emergency repair product available. Rescue Tape is a self-fusing silicone repair product that creates a permanent, airtight, watertight seal in seconds. Leaves no sticky residue and resists fuels, oils, acids, solvents, salt water and UV rays. Insulates up to 8,000 volts, withstands up to 500F and remains fl exible to -85F. 950 psi tensile strength. RT1BLK RT1RED RT1WHT RT1CLR RT1YEL RT1BLU RT1GRN RT1ORN RT1BRW RT2CLR RT2WHT RT2BLK RTF4BLK RTF4RED Black, 1" x 12' x .02" Red, 1" x 12' x .02" White, 1" x 12' x .02" Clear, 1" x 12' x .02" Yellow, 1" x 12' x .02" Blue, 1" x 12' x .02" Green, 1" x 12' x .02" Orange, 1" x 12' x .02" Brown, 1" x 12' x .02" Clear, 2" x 36' x .03" White, 2" x 36' x .03" Black, 2" x 36' x .030" Black Triangular F4, 1" x .02" x 36' Red Oxide Triangular F4, 1" x .02" x 36' $ 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 18.25 18.25
Rockin Foam
Quick-drying black foam specifically for water gardens. Its density is ideal for secure rock placement, leaving little waste and giving you better control during application. Nontoxic and safe for aquatic plants and animals. Tack-free in 30 minutes; can be trimmed, sanded, caulked or plastered in 1 hour. 20-oz can. Made in USA. RCKFM20 $ 17.95 16.16/4+
Fish Pond Coating, Herco H-55
Hazmat AG
New concrete leaches alkali, creating pH and water chemistry problems for fish. With Herco H-55 you can seal and leakproof new and old concrete, block and brick. H-55 can be brushed, rolled or sprayed with an airless gun in two or more coats (one hour apart). One gallon covers approximately 100 square feet. After a 72-hour cure period, fill with water and stock with fish. Herco thinner is required for clean up and/or product thinning. Primer is suggested, but not necessary. Herco caulk crack filler is another excellent concrete product that comes in a 12-oz tube. Made in USA. Ships Hazmat. H55B H55G H55C H700 H55P H12C Neoprene Coating, Black, gallon Neoprene Coating, Gray, gallon Neoprene Coating, Clear, gallon Thinner, Clear, gallon Primer, gallon Crack Filler, Clear, 12-oz Tube
Ship Wt
H55G
Waterweld
TF
Makes repairs underwater in minutes! Permanently repairs pipes, fish boxes, boats, tanks, buckets, concrete, wood, fiberglass, PVCpractically anything (except most plastics like nylon and polyethylene). Sets in 20 minutes and cures hard as steel in only a few hours. Safe for carrying potable water. 2-oz tube. 8277 $ 9.85 8.87/6+
12 lbs 12 lbs 12 lbs 10 lbs 12 lbs 1 lb
$ 112.82 128.20 128.20 56.40 60.51 24.62
H12W
Barricade Tape
Caution tapes are lightweight, economical and reusable polyethylene with a continuous repeat of warning. Meet OSHA 1910.144. Tapes are nonadhesive 3" x 1,000' (300 m) rolls, weighing about 4 lbs. MK310 Caution Tape, 3" x 1,000' $ 16.48
Underwater Epoxy
TF
Easy-to-use, adheres to most surfaces (except soft plastics like polyethylene and nylon) and may be used underwater! Ideal for cementing aquarium rock formations, pond waterfalls and patching pipes. Sets in 20 minutes and cures fully in 24 hours. Manufacturer claims "fish safe," but AES makes no warranty. Made in USA. UP4 Gray, 4 oz $ 12.00
UP4
UP5
Pink, 2 oz
$ 9.90
Visitor Eyewear
These visitor safety glasses come with a universal nose bridge that is comfortable and snug. The wraparound polycarbonate lens provides increased angular coverage and improved peripheral vision. Molded-in brow guard and vented side shields. GL2218 $ 4.85
Pipe and Hose Repair Kit

This water-activated, fiberglass tape permanently repairs almost any piping, including plastic, copper, steel, galvanized, rubber and tile pipe. Will even work underwater! Pow-R Wrap contains no harmful solvents and is approved for use with potable water. Each package comes premixed and premeasured to ensure a minimum of 8 complete wraps around a pipe (enough for high pressure applications up to 300 psi). Cures completely in 40 minutes. PW130 PW260 PW3108 1" x 30" 2" x 60" 3" x 108"
Size Max Pipe Size
1/2" 3/4", 1"

2", 3", 4"
$ 11.10 17.27 23.00
Epoxy Paint/Sealer
Paint/Safety
321
Epoxy Paints
Hazmat AG
Epoxy paint is recognized by the EPA as nontoxic (after curing), is extremely durable and has excellent adhesion to a wide variety of materials. Whether coating fiberglass, wood, steel, concrete or even galvanized surfaces, you won't find a better paint for aquaculture. Simply clean and dry the surface (acid-etch concrete and steel, then use nonsudsing ammonia to neutralize acid residue and use PT20 concrete primer; prime steel and galvanized surfaces). Then mix epoxy paint parts A and B, wait 3060 minutes and spray, brush or roll on. Recoat after about four hours, if desired. The curing temperature range is 55125F. Before adding live organisms, let cure for 7 days. Excellent for drinking water, ozone contact, fresh and saltwater aquaculture, etc. A 1-gallon kit will cover 200250 ft2 of smooth surface with a thickness of 4 mil (.004 inch). Sweetwater epoxy is 65 to 72% solids (depending on color) and has a two-year shelf life (after long exposure to UV, it typically develops a chalky surface). Sold in one-gallon kits only (a kit is 3 parts paint and 1 part activator) in the following colors: PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4 PT5 Clear White Light Green Dark Green Light Blue PT6 PT7 PT8 PT9 PT10 Dark Blue Dark Red Light Gray Dark Gray Black
pt2
pt2: white
pt3: L. Green
pt4: d. Green
pt5: L. Blue
pt6: d. Blue
pt7: d. Red
pt8: L. Gray
pt9: d. Gray
pt10: Black
Note: Paint color shown is an approximation of the actual color. Do not use the color shown as a guide for purchases where exact color is a critical factor.
$ 73.35
66.15/4+
Epoxy Products
To thin epoxy for spraying, use PT18. Use PT16 cleaner for washing out spray equipment after painting. Sweetwater primer (PT17) should always be used before painting galvanized and bare steel surfaces (after HCl etching and nonsudsing ammonia rinsing). PT15 activator is included with the epoxy paint. It is also available separately. Made in USA. PT17 PT18 PT16 PT15

Epoxy Gel
Hazmat AG
Primer, Steel, gallon Thinner, quart Cleaner, quart Activator, quart
Ship Wt
$ 61.75 15.75 13.85 29.15
Each
55.63 14.17 12.47 26.24
4+
Hazmat Hazmat Hazmat Hazmat
AG Air Air Air
A great adhesive for crack repair that works on wet or dry surfaces. An epoxy gel that is not sensitive to moisture (may not be applied underwater, however). This is great stuff for patching, gap filling, joining dissimilar materials and overhead work. It doesn't sag, run or drain into cracks. Excellent for use on concrete, wood, fiberglass and steel. When mixed, this two part epoxy (1 to 1) is a gray-colored heavy paste. The pot life is only about 20 minutes, it hardens in six hours, can be painted over after six hours but before 48 hours, and reaches its final cure after 72 hours at room temperature. If not painting over, wash surface thoroughly with soap and water (after 72 hours) before adding fish. Acceptable for aquatic containment under USDA guidelines. Sold in two-gallon kits. Two-year shelf life. Weighs 22 lbs. Made in USA. PT98 $ 145 130.78/4+ Hazmat AG
pt17
pt16
Epoxy Concrete Sealer
A high-performance epoxy sealer and coating for concrete (more than 20 days old). Deep penetrating properties provide pore filling and strengthening of the concrete top layer, forming a strong adhesive base for surface coating. This is an excellent sealer for Sweetwater epoxy paint (will not fill large pores of cinder blocks), but cannot be used over an existing water-based paint coating. It may also be used on damp (not wet) concrete. For best results, acid etch, rinse with nonsudsing ammonia and pressure wash before application. The Sweetwater sealer is clear (consistency of water) with a pot life of 810 hours after mixing. One gallon will cover approximately 280 ft2 with a 3- to 3.5-mil layer. One-year shelf life. Sold in 2-gallon kit only. Weighs 20 lbs. Made in USA. PT20 $ 124.00 111.60/4+
pt15
SORRY! by law, no paint product may be shipped via air transport UNLESS prior arrangement is made at considerable expense. We recommend shipping all paint products via Ground service (or motor freight).
322
Plumbing
Garden Hoses/Accessories
Garden Hose Menders and Couplings

Premium nylon construction for maximum strength and durability. Patented impact resistant clamp design. Noncorroding, high-grade, stainless steel screws will not strip when tightened. Reusable and leakproof. For garden hose and vinyl tubing with I.D. sizes listed. HM22 HM23 HM34 HM35 HM46 HM47
Hose I.D.
Garden Hose Accessories

3110 3194 3150 TVW

Hose Mender
Plastic Hose Shut-Off $ 1.97 1.55 Plastic Hose End Cap, 2/Pk .65 .48 Plastic "Y" Connector w/Shut-Off 3.40 2.76 76# Washers, 100/Pk 4.80
Each
12+
3194
Female Coupling
Hose Mender Hose Mender Female Coupling Female Coupling Male Coupling Male Coupling
5/8", 3/4" 7/16", 1/2", 9/16" 5/8", 3/4" 7/16", 1/2", 9/16" 5/8", 3/4" 7/16", 1/2", 9/16"
$ 2.25 2.25 1.72 1.72 1.54 1.54
3110 Male Coupling
Garden Hose Adapters

These natural nylon adapters convert garden hose thread (GHT) to standard national pipe thread (NPT) or to barb fittings. NPT is used with most PVC fittings. Follow part number with "A" for 1/2" NPT or "B" for 3/4" NPT. GH2 (A or B) GH3 (B Only) GH4 (A or B) GH5 GH6 GH8

3150
Male GHT x Male NPT $ 1.25 1.04 gh2a 1.15 Female GHT x Male NPT 1.38 Male GHT x Female NPT 1.43 1.19 Male GHT x 1/4" Barb 1.17 .97 Male GHT x 3/8" Barb 1.17 .97 Male GHT x 1/2" Barb 1.17 .97
Each
10+
gh3a
Hose Hanger System

The UnReel is a simple solution for attractive and efficient hose storage and use. Easily mounted, with hardware and mounting template included, the jaw pivots down from its vertical storage position to play out just the length required, one loop at a time, with no kinks. It also pivots side-to-side to feed hose to you. After use, simply return the jaw to its vertical position and feed the hose back into the jaws one loop at a time. Handles up to 100' of 5/8" or 75' of 3/4 " hose (not included). Two-year warranty. HR33 $ 14.45
GH4A
Kink Protector

Coiled spring faucet extension with solid brass couplings. Protects hose and prevents kinks at faucet. Allows hose to bend at sharp angle and maintain even water flow. $ 9.30
KP5
Thanks. This is my third order with you, and I can't say enough good things about Aquatic Eco-Systems.
Alan Lucas
Pipe Fitting Sizing Comparison (Shown Actual Size)
1/8"
MPT
1/4"
MPT
3/8"
MPT
1/2"
MPT
3/4"
MPT
Garden Hoses/Nozzles
Plumbing
323
Hose, Commercial Duty

A heavy-duty, reinforced rubber hose with brass couplings capable of withstanding hot water (200F) and 500-psi burst pressure. Sold in 50' lengths only. Ship weight 10 lbs. CD015
3/4"
Comfort Grip Nozzle

TF
Molded-on vinyl grip is cushioned. Male hose threaded front for attaching accessories. Solid brass valve stem with adjusting nut. Hold-open clip for continuous spraying. Stainless steel spring. Heavy-duty, full size, diecast zinc body. $ 7.50 6.75/4+
Hose w/ 3/4" GHT
$ 39.15
NZ93
Saltwater Nozzle
This nozzle is specially designed to resist the corrosion caused by salt water. The durable polymer body includes an internal spring mechanism of stainless steel. Leakproof and threaded at both ends. NZ474 $ 4.15 3.73/4+
Flexogen Hose
Flexogen hose has long set the standard for quality in garden hoses. It offers the ultimate in quality and value. Heavy-duty, 6-ply hose with machined brass couplings. Kink- and pressure twist-resistant. Coils easily in all kinds of weather. Protective collar resists kinks at faucet. Two-year warranty. H10050 H10075 H10100 50', 5/8" 75', 5/8" 100', 5/8"
Ship Wt
8 lbs 12 lbs 16 lbs
$ 40.00 56.74 73.59
Each
35.92 51.07 66.23
4+
Jet Spray Nozzle

This solid-stream, brass jet nozzle is ideal for walkways, sidewalks and driveways. NZ23 $ 3.33 2.99/4+
Adjustable Brass Nozzle

Made of heavy solid brass, this rugged nozzle is fully adjustable from fine mist to full stream. It features a self-rising stem and is designed to last a lifetime! NZ22 $ 8.47
Polypropylene Delivery Nozzle

h10050
Want an easy way to fill up water tanks? This handy delivery nozzle is excellent for delivering fresh or salt water to jugs, tanks and other containers in labs, hatcheries and even aquarium stores. Nozzle body is polypropylene, lever is stainless steel. 1" FNPT inlet. NZ35 $ 48.00
Have a complaint?
324
Plumbing
Venturis/Hose/Clamps
Turbo-Venturi Injectors
These inexpensive venturis are ideal for small protein skimmers, koi ponds, etc. They are ozone resistant and made of ABS plastic. FNPT inlets and MNPT outlets. V12 V34
1/2" 3/4"
Heavy-Duty PVC Discharge Hose

This HD2 series discharge hose is age and weather resistant. Sold in 50' lengths with NPSH or aluminum Quick Disconnect fittings, one male and one female of the same size as the hose.
$ 20.30 22.25
v12
Extra Heavy-Duty PVC Discharge Hose

Heavy-duty discharge hose (HD3 series) for high-pressure work. Mildew-resistant hose sold in 50' lengths only. Complete with NPSH or aluminum Quick Disconnect fittings, one male and one female of the same size as the hose.
Size Psi
Flow
11/2" 2" 11/2" 2"
90 80 100 100
HD215 HD225 HD315 HD325
NPSH
$ 45.00 55.60 76.73 104.23
Quick Disconnects
HD215Q HD225Q HD315Q HD325Q
50.85 56.10 79.76 110.23
Venturi Injectors
Widely used for the injection of air, oxygen, liquids and ozone. Tests have shown that when installed properly, injectors can transfer ozone into water with efficiencies as high as 99%. These are constructed of PVDF Kynar and are ozone compatible. Venturis have no moving parts and provide trouble free operation. All except V514 include a 1/4" barbed ozone safe check valve. Maximum operating pressure at 100F is 400 psi. Made in USA. V384 V584 V584-2 V978 V1584 V514
Approx. Flow @ 15 Air Suction (cfh) I/O psi in/5 psi out @ 15 psi in/5 psi out
1/2" MNPT 3/4" Barb 3/4" MNPT
hd315
hd215
1" MNPT 11/2" MNPT 2" MNPT
1 gpm 3 gpm 4 gpm 7 gpm 31 gpm 57 gpm
<1 4 5 13 90 394
Each
$ 67 54 56 125 170 370
61 49 51 112 153 348
4+
Discharge Hose
This is a good quality, polyvinyl-coated discharge hose. It is UV-resistant for extra long life outdoors. It lies flat when not in use, which allows easy storage and handling. The maximum roll length is 300', but we will cut it to any size for you.

Venturis offer an efficient and reliable way to inject virtually any gas or liquid into water. v1584
A50112 A502 A503 A504 A506
11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Ship Wt per 100'
$ .90/Ft 1.16/Ft 1.70/Ft 2.05/Ft 3.50/Ft
a502
Suction/Discharge Hose
This PVC hose is externally ribbed with smooth inside surfaces. It weighs about half that of rubber suction hose. Rated at 28" Hg vacuum at 68F. Its small bend radius (see below) and high strength will give reliable service for pumping, siphoning, fish hauling, etc. Full rolls are 100 feet.
Max Actual I.D. Psi Minimum Bend Radius Max* Length Wt/Foot

You can find clamps for less, but then they must be replaced when the screw rusts away. These quality clamps are all stainless steel (#301SS band) including the screw (#410SS)! The one-piece housing is locked to the band without spot welds. The band is 9/16" wide (5/16" on SSAA) and the screw has both a slotted head and a 5/16" hex. Choose clamps with a larger maximum diameter than the outside diameter (O.D.) of the tubing that it will be holding. Made in USA. SSAA SSA SSB SSC SSD SSE SSF SSG SSH SSI SSJ
Diameter Size Minimum Maximum Each
1/4" 1/2" 3/4"
SH4 SH5 SH6 SH8
11/2" 2" 3" 4"
90 70 60 50
6" 9" 13" 18"
100' 50' 20' 8'
.5 lb .7 lb 1.3 lbs 2.1 lbs
$ 2.49/Ft 3.20/Ft 5.69/Ft 9.15/Ft
*Maximum per UPS carton; 100' maximum by truck.
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 31/2" 4" 5"
.22" .38" .50" .75" 1.00" 1.25" 1.50" 2.25" 2.50" 3.00" 4.50"
.62" $ 1.02 .94 .88" 1.20 1.12 1.06" 1.30 1.22 1.75" 1.40 1.34 2.00" 1.40 1.34 2.25" 1.45 1.37 2.50" 1.45 1.37 3.25" 1.75 1.60 4.50" 1.75 1.60 5.00" 2.05 1.82 6.50" 2.25 2.04
ssc ssh
10+
ssf
Quick Disconnect Fittings/Globe Valves
Plumbing
325
Quick Disconnect Fittings

aluminum or polypropylene.
If you have to disconnect hoses with any degree of regularity, you should consider Quick Disconnect couplings. They provide fast, positive, leakproof connections for air, liquids and dry products. They connect and disconnect in seconds without tools; simply lift the cam levers. The female fittings use a Buna-N gasket where they meet the male fitting for a cushioned, leakproof seal. Choose either the aluminum or black fiber-reinforced polypropylene for most aquaculture applications. The polypropylene is rated to 100 psi on 3/4" to 2" size and 50 psi on the 3" size at 68F (20C). Order by part number plus material code suffix: A (aluminum), P (polypropylene). Made in USA.
Male With Female threads

Q75A Q10A Q12A Q15A Q20A Q30A Q40A Q60A
Size
3/4"
aluminum
11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
1"
$ 7.28 8.32 10.27 10.76 12.04 18.88 40.09 78.15
polypropylene
Female With Male threads

Q75B Q10B Q12B Q15B Q20B Q30B Q40B
Size
4.98 5.10 5.22 5.38 6.17 11.28 16.64
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
3/4"
aluminum
$ 15.73 16.93 19.81 18.87 22.26 33.74 50.63
polypropylene
8.98 10.11 11.68 11.46 13.60 23.08
Male With Male threads

Q75F Q10F Q12F Q15F Q20F Q30F Q40F Q60F
Size
Female With hose Nipple

polypropylene
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
3/4"
aluminum
$ 8.54 10.08 11.78 12.53 13.88 24.89 43.61 94.78
4.94 5.22 5.73 6.11 7.64 14.26
Q75C Q10C Q12C Q15C Q20C Q30C Q40C Q60C
Size
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
3/4"
aluminum
$ 14.73 15.14 20.11 19.24 21.58 32.53 45.34 111.86
polypropylene
8.98 10.11 11.68 11.46 13.60 22.55 26.16
Male With hose Nipple

Q75E Q10E Q12E Q15E Q20E Q30E Q40E
Size
Replacement Gaskets
polypropylene
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
3/4"
aluminum
$ 9.19 9.24 11.37 11.47 13.76 22.47 43.05
4.86 5.19 5.67 5.93 6.90 12.73
Q75G Q10G Q12G Q15G Q20G Q30G Q40G Q60G
Size
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
3/4"
$ .79 .68 .74 .79 .74 .89 2.15 2.63
Male plug
Q10W Q12W Q15W Q20W Q30W 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3"
Size aluminum
Globe Valves
$ 9.52 10.78 11.36 11.78 16.14
polypropylene
$ 4.80 5.09 5.46 6.57 10.53
Globe valves are preferred where fine adjustments to fl ow are needed. Celcon (plastic) valves may be used for air or water at -20 to 180F and up to 100 psi. The no-kink style has a MNPT on its base and garden hose threads on the outlet. The VP31 is white PVC (not rated for compressed air) with slip sockets and glues onto 3/4" PVC pipe. All others are threaded. Washerless. Made in USA. VC2 VC3 VP31 VK2 VK3 Celcon 1/2" FNPT Valve, Straight Celcon 3/4" FNPT Valve, Straight PVC 3/4" Slip Valve, Straight Celcon 1/2" MNPT Valve, No-Kink Celcon 3/4" MNPT Valve, No-Kink $ 5.95 5.95 5.65 5.00 5.25
Female cap
Q10V Q12V Q15V Q20V Q30V Q40V Q60V 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Size aluminum
$ 15.52 18.01 18.62 19.16 24.70 33.05 80.40
polypropylene
9.71 9.92 11.46 13.60 20.13 26.12
Female With Female threads

Q75D Q10D Q12D Q15D Q20D Q30D Q40D
Size
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
3/4"
aluminum
$ 15.14 15.46 18.76 20.00 21.40 33.10 47.12
polypropylene
8.98 10.11 11.68 11.47 13.60 22.55
Vk2
Vp31
326
Plumbing
Valves
Valve Manifolds, Large

The PVC globe valves are glued together as manifolds to save you time. Each valve will pass 2 gpm with less than 1 psi pressure loss. These PVC valves have 1/2" FNPT outlets. The manifold ports are 1/2" FNPT and a threaded plug is included, which may be removed for another connection. PV2 PV3 PV4 PV5 PV6

Miniature Stopcocks
For low-pressure air and water. MSK558 MSK610 MSK714 MSK816

5/16" (8 mm) 3/8" (10 mm) 1/2" (14 mm) 5/8" (16 mm)
Hose Valve
$ 1.84 1.88 2.20 2.60
Each
For Tubing
O.D. O.D. O.D. O.D.
1.56 1.60 1.87 2.21
10+
Easily turned handle. Rated up to 45 psi at 100F (38C).

70012
For Tubing
1/2"
I.D.
$ 6.75
OAL
8" 11" 14" 17" 20"
$ 26.18 35.54 45.96 56.11 67.70
Each
23.56 31.99 41.36 50.50 60.94
4+
msk714
Drip Emitter
These emitters have an infinite adjustment up to 2 gph, and screw in with a 10/32" thread. The emitter screws into the riser tube or 3/16" tubing. See Index for riser tube. 42115 $ 1.60 1.28/50+
r Use foto wa t er s i. 100 p

msk558 pv5
msk610
msk816
Water Valve
This reliable ball valve is made of NSF-listed PVC. EPDM O-ring seals, 1/4" FNPT molded threads x 1/4" Jaco, no wetted metal parts.
Valve Manifolds, Medium

Our valve manifolds will save you time and aggravation. They are made with quarter-turn valves (BV25). The manifold ports are 1/2" FNPT and a 1/2" FNPT plug is included. Each valve is 1/4" FNPT. Each valve will pass 1/2 gpm with less than 1 psi pressure loss. They also make excellent manifolds for air distribution. The 1/2" threaded plug may be removed for another connection. MV2 MV3 MV4 MV5 MV6

BV-90W
$ 4.70
3.52/25+
Tubing Valves
Roll Type
RC9 and RC10 are made of polyester (PBT) that offers permanent rigidity and stiffness even in high-humidity areas. Infinite variable flow. Easy one-hand operation. No metal parts. Chemical and temperature resistant. No corrosion. Ideal for continuous, long-term use for air or water. Autoclavable to 320F (160C).
OAL
8" 11" 14" 16" 18"
$ 23.10 26.82 33.31 42.34 48.89
Each
20.80 24.14 25.99 38.11 44.00
4+
Drum Faucet
Here is a very low-cost polyethylene valve that can be used in low-pressure applications. Two-piece construction, 3/4" MNPT threads. DV34 $ 2.75 2.33/25+
RC9 RC10
1/8" to 7/16" 1/4" to 9/16"
For Tubing
I.D. I.D.
$ 6.48 7.50
Each
5.88 6.74
25+
rc9
Clamp Type
Manufactured of tough plastic without sharp edges. DC9 is an "on/off" valve only. The DC10 and DC11 have a 12-position ratchet control. Accurate and economical.
mv6
Labcock/Ball Valve Brass Ball Valves

These top-quality ball valves feature corrosionresistant, chrome-plate balls and Teflon seals for years of high-temperature easy, operation. The body is LA 377 brass forging. Plated steel handle with vinyl grip. VBB2 VBB3 VBB4
1/2" 3/4"
We offer these high-quality, quarter-turn ball valves at a price well below that of other labcock valves. Rated at 150 psi, NSF-approved, PVC body (BV-25W is white) and EPDM O-rings. 1/4" FNPT ports.

DC9 DC10 DC11
Up to 1/4" I.D. 1/8" to 3/8" I.D. Up to 3/4" I.D.

dc9
For Tubing
$ .21 .80 2.50
BV25 BV-25W
$ 4.61 5.70
Each
4.15 5.13
25+
FNPT FNPT 1" FNPT
$ 12.00 17.93 28.74
Plastic Needle Valve

These needle valves are small gate valves designed for applications where accurate flow is required. Valves have a barb inlet/outlet. NV14 NV38 NV12
For Tubing
1/4" I.D. 3/8" I.D. 1/2" I.D.
bv25
Spigot Valve
Barb accepts 5/8" I.D. flexible tubing. Polyethylene.
vbb2
$ 12.20 12.20 11.85
Each
10.97 10.97 10.66
10+
TV1 TV2
1/2" MPT 3/4" MPT
$ 12.20 14.32
Each
10.92 12.88
tv1
10+
nv14
Plumbing Actuated Butterfly Valves

Each of the butterfly valves can be coupled to either electric or pneumatic actuators. The 11/2" through 4" actuators are housed in a NEMA 4X box. They have a 5 second opening or closing time. They are 115V, 50/60 Hz, 15 amps, single-pole, with double- throw switches and a 1/2" conduit connection. The 5", 6" and 8" actuators are similar but feature die-cast aluminum housings and a valve opening speed of 1025 seconds. The pneumatic actuators are of the air-to-spring variety and they require a minimum of 60 psi and a maximum of 120 psi. Springs are adjustable for different air pressures.
Electric Actuator 11/2"4"
Valves
327
BV200
Butterfly Valves
Asahi butterfly valves are known for their high quality, high strength and positive closure. They are made of PVC, polypropylene and stainless steel and feature a notched gauge plate which allows more accurate judging of the percentage of opening. Fit US standard flanges (see Index for flanges). BV115 BV200 BV300 BV400 BV500 BV600 BV800

Electric Actuator 5", 6" & 8"
Pneumatic Actuator
11/2" 2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8"
Ship Wt
$ 161.54 169.23 187.69 214.51 394.92 321.54 585.63
Each
151.85 151.17 176.43 201.64 371.22 302.25 550.49
3+
BV115E BV200E BV300E BV400E BV500E BV600E BV800E
Electric No.
Ship Wt
$ 892.83 898.23 910.69 1,064.37 2,046.71 1,975.11 2,356.66
Each
Pneumatic No.
BV115N BV200N BV300N BV400N BV500N BV600N BV800N
Ship Wt
$ 1,019.97 1,041.29 1,411.51 1,424.71 2,118.00 2,040.89 3,481.02
Each
Economy Ball Valves

Here are some low-cost yet heavy-duty Schedule 40 ball valves. They have EPDM seats and seals, rated at 150 psi, with full port flow openings. To order valves with threads, add "T" after the part number. Imported. SBW12 SBW13 SBW14 SBW15 SBW16 SBW18 SBW19
Slip or Threaded Ship Wt
1/2" 3/4"
Ball Valves
Top quality.
Compact and smooth-turning Schedule 80 PVC ball valves have Teflon seals and EPDM O-rings. Rated at temperatures up to 140F and a pressure of 150 psi. Sold in both slip and thread style. Hayward brand. HBVT12 HBVT34 HBVT1 HBVT112 HBVT2 HBVS12 HBVS34 HBVS1 HBVS112 HBVS2

1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 3" 4" TF
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 6 lbs 10 lbs
$ 3.20 3.60 4.70 6.55 10.35 49.95 81.55
Each
3.03 3.39 4.44 6.14 9.73 46.92 76.75

sbw12
10+
Ball Valves
These high-quality ball valves are offered at an unbelievable price! They feature Teflon ball seats and EPDM O-rings. The valves are very easy to turn. Maximum 150 psi rating. Certified by NSF for potable water use. Add a "T" after part number for threaded valves. 2622005 2622007 2622010 2622012 2622015 2622020
Slip or Threaded
1/2" 3/4"
Thread Thread 1" Thread 11/2" Thread 2" Thread 1/2" Slip 3/4" Slip 1" Slip 11/2" Slip 2" Slip
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 14.89 21.18 23.18 43.77 61.70 13.94 19.56 23.17 39.49 55.82
hbvt12
Ship Wt
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs
$ 8.25 9.45 13.40 17.10 25.85 32.75
Each
7.43 8.51 12.05 15.40 23.35 29.46
10+ 3 2
3-Port Valve
Allows proportional flow.
One 3-way valve can take the place of three regular valves in some situations. This unit can be disassembled for cleaning and fits 11/2" and 2" PVC pipe (11/2" slips into valve sockets, 2" pipe requires couplings or bell ends). The inlet is always open. The handle position closes sides 1 or 3. When in position 2, none is closed. Made in USA. SV300 $ 41.40 38.10/4+
262205
Air Purge Valve, High Flow

Prevents gas bubble disease.
Install at high points in an aquaculture pressurized water system where air accumulates. Water pressure automatically forces air out, and when water reaches the valve, the internal float creates a watertight seal. Must be mounted vertically. Seals from 2 to 100 psi. Under suction, the valve functions as a vacuum breaker. 1" FNPT threads, measures 51/4" H x 2" in diameter. Air discharge rates (cfm): 60 @ 12.5 psi, 100 @ 25 psi and 180 @ 50 psi. ST5 $ 21.25 19.12/4+
Inlet
Air Purge Valve

This brass valve has an internal float that closes the valve when filled with water. Use it to automatically purge air from a water tank, pipe system, oxygen saturator, etc. Mount it vertically wherever air collects. Also works as a vacuum breaker. 1/4" MPT. 1/4" poly plug included. 3" OAL. ST4 $ 14.85 13.78/4+
328
Plumbing
Ball Valves
Single Union Ball Valves

These ball valves are made entirely of glass-filled polypropylene for strength and chemical resistance. They feature low-operating torque (as in easy to open and close), Teflon seats and double EPDM O-rings in the stem area and a 150 psi rating. Choose two- or three-way style. Imported. Note: Union may not be removed while under pressure, even if in the "off" position.
An nsive x ine pe ve ti alterna ion un to true es! lv a ball v
Single Union Ball Valves

These high-quality ball valves allow disconnection of lines without fear of retainer-ring or ball moving. The retainer-ring is locked with two pins to the body. PVC with EPDM O-rings and polyethylene seats. Rated at 150 psi. Available in 11/2" and 2" only. BV112S BV112T BV2S BV2T

11/2" Slip x Slip 11/2" FNPT x FNPT 2" Slip x Slip 2" FNPT x FNPT
$ 15.80 19.70 21.30 26.40
Each
14.20 17.71 19.10 23.62
6+
Two-Way, Single Union

PBV132 PBV133 PBV134 PBV135 PBV136 PBV137
FNPT
1/2" 3/4"
Three-Way, Single Union

$ 14.85 14.85 17.15 27.15 30.40 37.25 PBV232 PBV233 PBV234 PBV235 PBV236 PBV237
FNPT
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
$ 23.65 23.65 28.45 30.30 34.10 43.30
bv112s
pbv232 3
True Union Ball Valves

These high-quality valves are available at low-end prices. They feature Teflon seats that provide easier turning, better sealing and longer valve life. Schedule 80 PVC with EPDM O-rings rated at 150 psi at 72F. All sizes are slip x slip. Imported. TB12 TB34 TB1 TB114 TB112 TB2 TB3 TB4

1/2" 3/4"
Ship Wt
pbv132 1
Three-Way Valve Note:

1. Always open. 2. Open when handle is as shown. 3. Closed when handle is as shown. Turn handle 90 and 2 and 3 are closed. Turn handle 180 and 3 is open and 2 is closed.
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 11 lbs 30 lbs
$ 9.75 12.00 16.20 21.85 28.45 38.60 108.30 221.85
Each
8.30/10+ 10.20/10+ 13.79/10+ 19.45/10+ 25.32/10+ 34.35/10+ 96.38/10+ 197.45/6+
tb1
True Union Ball Valves
TF
Top-quality valve unions on both sides permit easy maintenance. Schedule 80 PVC with Teflon seals and EPDM O-rings. Rated to 150 psi and 140F (60C). Hayward brand. Made in USA. TU12 TU34 TU1 TU114 TU112 TU2 TU3 TU3T TU4 TU4T

True Union True Union 1" True Union 11/4" True Union 11/2" True Union 2" True Union 3" True Union, Slip 3" True Union, Threaded 4" True Union, Slip 4" True Union, Threaded
1/2" 3/4"
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 12 lbs 15 lbs 20 lbs 25 lbs
$ 22.92 27.35 35.62 44.74 60.84 75.76 165.26 165.26 299.03 299.03
Note: 1/2" to 2" supplied with a set of both threaded and slip end connectors.
Ruth Olsen
tu12
Solenoids/Motorized Valves
Plumbing
329
Pure Oxygen Solenoid Valve

Oil and grease can be explosive when exposed to high-pressure pure oxygen, so we offer this specially made solenoid for use with pure oxygen. It has 1/8" NPT in/out, 1/8" orifice, stainless steel body and 1/2" conduit connection. 815NO is UL-listed. 115V/60 Hz only. Made in Germany. 815NC Normally Closed 815NO Normally Open $ 225.40 260.00
815nc
Motorized Valves, 12V

Perfect for aquaculture
Inherently safe, 12VDC is the power used by these high-torque, valve-actuating motors. Permanently lubricated, machined steel gears open and/or close the polypropylene ball valve in 1.5 seconds. These valves are heavy- duty, fully weatherproof and compatible with recirculating aquaculture water containing fish feces (not mud, sand or debris). Supplied with a 24" four-wire lead (you supply the switch).
900
817nc
Large Opening Solenoids

For a high volume of air or water, a large opening is needed. These solenoid valves are servo assisted to open and close openings up to 11/2". Rated to 140 psi, they require no differential pressure. Brass body. Opening sizes same as in/out sizes. 115V/60 Hz, normally closed only. NEMA 4. Each weighs 2 lbs. Allow one week for shipment. Made in Germany. 817NC 818NC
1/2"
The 12V adapter (992) will operate one valve, 994 will operate up to three. The polypropylene ball valves can be disassembled. All units are 1.5 A. One-year warranty. Made in USA. 900 902 904 906 908 992 Valve, 3/4", 12V Valve, 1", 12V Valve, 11/2", 12V Valve, 2", 12V Valve, 3", 12V Adapter, 115VAC to 12VDC $ 280 280 375 461 560 28
1"
$ 187.00 304.75
Solenoid Timer
This NEMA 4 outdoor-rated timer can be fitted to any solenoid on this page (plug standard to DIN 43 650). Timer is programmable via DIP switches and potentiometers. Can be programmed for various on/off cycle times from 1 second to 100 hours, including switch-on impulse. LED display, maximum power consumption is 1.5 watts. It features NEMA 4 protection and working temperature from 14140F. 115V/60 Hz. 825 $ 114.25
Stainless Steel Compact Solenoid

This UL-listed solenoid valve has 1/4" NPT in/out ports, 0140 psi range, Viton seal material and 1/2" NPT conduit connection. 115V/60 Hz only. 17 VA (hold), 24 VA (inrush). NEMA 4. Made in Germany.

813nc
813NC 813NO
Normally Closed Normally Open
$ 167.00 239.50
Each
150.07 215.55
4+
Motorized Ball Valves

These Schedule 80 heavy-duty ball valves feature Teflon seats and seals and 115V actuator motors. 5-second opening and 5-second closing speed prevent water hammer. The motor has a NEMA 4X protective cover. The locked rotor amp draw is 2.2 amps (running amps will be about 1.5). 115VAC, 50/60 Hz, priced below. Add "T" to the part number to order threaded ends (FNPT). One-year warranty. Made in USA. MV34 MV1 MV114 MV112 MV20
Slip or Threaded
3/4"
PVC Gate Valve

These PVC gate valves are as useful as their bronze counterparts and they get the job done at a fraction of the cost. Gate valves are best suited to full open or full closed operation. Do not freeze. NSF-approved, 150 psi maximum working pressure, full flow opening. Available in both slip and FNPT. Add a "T" to end of part number to order threaded ends. Made in USA. WGV12 WGV34 WGV1 WGV114 WGV112 WGV2
Slip or Threaded
1/2" 3/4"
wgv12
mv34
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
$ 292.31 303.92 313.85 321.54 332.98
Solenoid Valves
For automating the flow of air, water, oil, etc., these valves are UL-listed with 1/2" NPT conduit connection (12V) or cord nut (115V). The valve body is brass with stainless steel internals. Temperature range is 14194F (-1090C). 1/8" NPT ports and internal opening, .3 gpm @ 1 psi, 2.2 gpm @ 85 psi. 85 psi max @ 12V, 145 psi max @ 115V, 8 watts. Rated for continuous duty. Made in Germany. 81NC 811NO 82NC 812NO 115V, N.C. 115V, N.O. 12V, N.C. 12V, N.O. $ 75.16 142.07 75.62 135.82
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
$ 12.20 15.72 19.20 24.65 32.90 40.15
Each
11.01 14.08 17.30 22.22 29.67 36.26
6+
Inexpensive Gate Valves

PVC, pressure-rated to 40 psi. Do not freeze.
81nc
gv112-2
GV1122 GV112-2 GV2-2
11/2" MNPT x FNPT 11/2" Slip 2" Slip
$ 3.65 6.70 7.50
Solenoid Note:
"Normally open" is the normal valve position; that is, when no power is applied. "Normally closed" is closed until power is given to open it.
330
Plumbing
Knife Gate/Float Valves

pL9
Knife Gate Valves, 11/2" to 8"

Super for waste drains and low-pressure aquaculture.
Knife gate valves are economical, quick-acting valves for clean and dirty water low-pressure applications. They have become very popular in the aquaculture industry for several reasons: they can be easily taken apart, the seals can be changed and even the valve body can be changed without upsetting the ends that may be glued to your pipes. Therefore, they can be used in place of unions! If you have a valve glued in place, but want to take it out, you can simply unbolt it and purchase new side pieces. They offer unrestricted flow and are quick opening, 100% water tested at the factory and quite low in cost. These 11/2" to 8" valves are all PVC with stainless steel shafts, polypropylene knife gates (except for 4", 6" and 8", which are stainless steel), and have Santoprene seals. The valves listed are all slip x slip, but please note that you can order sides in various other styles below. Like most valves, they are not for use in freezing weather. One-year warranty. GV11 GV2 GV3 GV4 GV6 GV8 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8"
Max psi
Float Valve
Made of plastic for use with clean water only (do not use recirculated water). Mount it to a water supply line at the desired water level. When that level is reached, the valve shuts off. It will maintain the level precisely at 1/4"! Flow is 4 gpm @ 30 psi. Operating range is 10 to 120 psi. 1" FNPT inlet. Made in USA. PL9 $ 35.20 32.74/6+
3.75"
5"
Float Valves, Mechanical

Just the thing for automatic water leveling. they work like the one in your toilet!
RM65 RM262P R825 RM214 R7002F R610
Body pipe Size Outlet Flow @ 35 psi
45 40 30 20 10 10
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 5 lbs 18 lbs 20 lbs
$ 11.55 21.28 25.34 72.87 290.11 459.72
Each
10.50 19.04 22.04 66.44 268.62 427.65
6+
Larger sizes available, please call.
B& P S P B B B
OaL
10" 10" 8" 10" 20" 28"
1/4" Hose Barb 1/4" MNPT 1/2" MNPT 1/2" MNPT 11/2" FNPT
inlet
MGHT
Free Flow Free Flow Free Flow 3/8" Comp. 1/2" MNPT Free Flow
1.3 gpm $ 6.45 5.83 1.3 gpm 60.75 54.70 2.0 gpm 32.30 29.12 3.0 gpm 17.58 15.85 12 gpm 62.85 56.53 112 gpm 134.45 120.98
Each
6+
GV3 GV4
B = Brass, P = Plastic, S = Stainless. Note: 100 psi maximum pressure. OAL is overall length with float.
8" R825 GV2 R610
Gate Valve Replacement Parts

These replacement seals fit our GV part numbers up to 8". Made of Santoprene and are sold either in kits, which include two seals and the required nuts and bolts, or as seals only for 4", 6" and 8" valves. Replacement valve handles are either plastic or metal. RSK112 RSK2 RSK3 RS4 RS68 PH112 MH112 11/2" Seal Kit 2" Seal Kit 3" Seal Kit 4" Seal (1) 6" and 8" Seal (1) Plastic Handle, 11/23" Metal Handle, 11/24"
description RSk112
31/2"
RM214
$ 4.00 5.00 6.00 6.50 31.05 1.60 3.00
31/2"
RM262p
ABS Float Valve

Great for R/O tanks.
This mechanical float valve is made entirely of ABS plastic, compatible with saltwater applications. It measures 81/4" long, has a 1/4" MPT inlet and a free flow outlet. Flow @ 30 psi is 1 gpm; maximum 90 psi. Made in USA. RM51 $ 19.80
Industrial-Size Float Valves

These large-orifice PVC and polypropylene valves with EPDM O-rings are salt water compatible. Maximum operating pressure is 80 psi. Made in USA. 541205 541207 541210 FNPT FNPT 1" FNPT
1/2" 3/4"
3" 3.5" 3.5"
4.2" 5" 5"
12" 12" 13.5"
$ 200.00 280.00 345.00
Aquarium Check Valve

c 541205
This see-through, duck bill check valve will prevent back siphoning. It's the perfect choice for aquarium systems or anywhere that 5/32" or 3/16" I.D. tubing is used. Cracking pressure is 21/2" H 2O Resistance at .07 cfm is 3" H 2 O. Made in USA. ACV1C $ 2.20 1.94/25+
Check Valves/Well Screens
Plumbing
331
Accessible Check Valve

These 4" swing check valves have open access to the flapper. They are made of PVC and can be opened for cleaning. 6' max head. Ship weight 5 lbs. Made in USA. 275P OCV3 OCV4 2" 3" 4" $ 46.44 60.30 64.80
True Union Swing Check Valves

Same as our popular clear swing check valves, but with slip x slip unions, these swing check valves feature quick change bodies. Made in USA.

ocv4
1720C07 1720C10 1720C15 1720C20 1720C30
1" 11/2" 2" 3"
3/4"
$ 19.45 22.15 26.20 37.10 68.35
1720C20
Check Valves
Quick and positive action in any position. Polypropylene valve is highly resistant to chemicals and temperatures up to 100C (212F). Use for any pressure or vacuum system. 228225 will fit tubing 810 mm (1/4" 3/8" I.D.). Overall length 21/2". 228215 fits tubing 1115 mm (7/16" 5/8" I.D.). Overall length 23/4". 228225 228215
228225
Well Screens & Points

Pump that dirty water!
Well screens are for dewatering wet areas and use as pump pre-filters in lakes, ponds and culture systems to prevent debris or animals from being pumped with the water. Made from Schedule 40 PVC pipe, screens have precision-cut slots that are .01" or .04" and made horizontally to prevent collapsing and for more open area per foot than vertical slotting. Use the .01" screens with the " WP" well points to create a shallow well; use the .04" size for less clogging or higher flowrates. Flowrates are per linear foot and are based on .1 ft/sec entrance velocity. Order well points separately; see our "PVC Fittings" section for threaded adapters, tees and caps to complete your installation. All screens are 5' OAL and ship Oversize. Made in USA.
Fits 8- to 10-mm Tubing Fits 11- to 15-mm Tubing
$ 3.57 4.67
Each
3.22 4.21
50+
Check Valves
These plastic check valves have no springs. Use for fresh water, salt water or air. Excellent for foot valves on pumps. 1/2-lb stainless steel springs available for more positive closure for 25 more per valve. Add "85" to end of part number to include springs (except CV5). Made in USA. CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 CV5
FNPT
3/4"
Well Points Only (Fit Schedule 40 Pipe Also)

Pipe Size
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
$ 8.90 9.30 13.84 16.96 20.30
Each
7.98 8.37 12.46 15.26 18.27
10+
WP125 WP150 WP200
11/4" 11/2" 2"
Ship Wt
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 1.58 2.28 3.08
Each
1.46 2.09 2.79
6+
CV1
.01" Screens
WS1251 WS1501 WS2001
Pipe Size
11/4" 11/2" 2"
Gpm/ft
.7 .8 1.3
Ship Wt
4 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs
$ 13.15 14.40 17.10
Each
11.86 12.95 15.46
6+
CV9
PVC Swing Check Valve

Use where minimal head loss is important. They are nonmetallic and use no springs. Rated to 100 psi. Mount horizontally or vertically. Full flow design. Buna-N seal and hingeslip x slip. Not recommended for use with air. CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 CV13 CV14 CV15

3/4"
.04" Screens
WS1504 WS2004 WS3004 WS4004
Pipe Size
11/2" 2" 3" 4"
Gpm/ft
3 4 4.6 6.9
Ship Wt
$ 16.55 16.80 31.80 38.40
Each
14.94 15.17 28.56 34.50
6+
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ 13.64 15.05 14.96 15.85 24.15 43.75 59.45
Each
12.28 13.55 13.46 14.27 21.10 39.38 53.51
4+
WP150
WS1504 WP1251
.01" is about 250 microns (the thickness of a business card). .04" is about 1,000 microns (household window screen).
WP125
Clear Swing Check Valves

For use in fresh or salt water with a minimum of head loss, these PVC swing check valves are identical to our white PVC swing check valves, only clear. They're completely non metallic and use no springs. They're pressure rated up to 100 psi and mount both horizontally and vertically. They have a full-flow design with a Buna-N seal and hinge (slip x slip). Not recommended for use with air. Made in USA. CCV12 CCV13 CCV14 CCV15

Steel Backwater Flap Gates

Coated with a special paint to assure long service life. Designed to attach to the end of PVC pipe to prevent backflow. Fasteners included. Sizes up to 36" available by special order. Made in USA.

11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ 19.49 31.50 48.95 70.15
Each
17.88 29.56 45.97 65.92
4+
FG4 FG6 FG8
4" 6" 8"
Ship Wt
4 lbs 5 lbs 6 lbs
$ 40.60 48.10 49.30

FG4
CCV12
332
Plumbing
Insulation/Fittings
Acrylic Tubing
"Do it yourself" fish farmers are very inventive, but finding the right materials can sometimes be next to impossible. Acrylic tubing, at an affordable price, is one of those handy, but hard-to-find, materials available from AES. This extruded acrylic tubing has only a 1/8" (3.2 mm) thick wall and is much clearer and lighter than our clear PVC pipe. Standard PVC cement can be used to bond acrylic tubing to PVC for most low-pressure applications. TAGL is light-bodied; allow 24 hours to cure fully. For high-pressure bonds, use WO40, a 2-part heavy-bodied cement for bonding acrylic to itself, ABS or PVC. Sold and priced by the foot, plus a cutting charge of $1 per cut. Only TA4 and TA5 are compatible with PVC sockets. Made in USA. TA3 TA4 TA5 TAGL WO40
Approximate Size
Uniseals
Why use an expensive bulkhead when you can use a Uniseal? Just drill a hole in the pipe, tank or bucket, insert a Uniseal, then put some Windex on the end of the pipe and push it in. Its that easy! Feel like rubber, but they are made of DuPont Alcryn, rated to 40 psi and warranted for 25 years. They are immune to cold, will not harden and hold pressure and vacuum. The sizes below correspond to standard Schedule 40 PVC pipe. Fit tank wall thicknesses up to 1/2". Made in USA. U050 U075 U100 U125 U150 U200 U300 U400 U600
Pipe Size Pipe O.D. Holesaw Size
1/2" 3/4"
2" O.D. 31/2" O.D. 41/2" O.D. Acrylic Cement 2-Part Cement
Fits PVC Socket
3" 4"
$ 5.15 9.75 14.43 8.35 24.55
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
.84" 1.05" 1.31" 1.66" 1.90" 2.37" 3.50" 4.50" 6.62"
11/4" 11/4" 13/4" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5" 7"
$ 2.05 2.05 2.55 2.95 3.30 5.40 6.95 8.70 12.25
Each
1.85 1.85 2.35 2.64 2.99 4.88 6.25 7.70 10.04
10+
Tank Wall TAGL Pipe
Push Pipe From This Side TA3
Tee Eliminators
Stop buying tees.
See Index for clear PVC.
Here is a hard-to-find, cost-saving fitting. A PVC 3" x 3/4" reducing tee costs about $10. These tee eliminators can do the same thing for under a buck! Just drill a hole, press in a tee eliminator, then thread in your pipe. Made of flexible PVC with female pipe threads. They work in all rigid pipe materials with pipe walls between 1/8" and 1/4" thick (use holesaws). Made in USA. FC32 FC34 FC36
FPT Size
1/2" 3/4"
Min. Pipe I.D. Hole Size

1"
1" 11/4" 11/2"
13/16" 17/16"
1"
$ .67 .75 1.00
Each
10+
.62 .69 .92
FC36
Anti-Seep Collar
Our 2' x 2' Anti-Seep Collar will prevent the all toocommon washout of underground pipes in levees. It has a solid wood frame with Neoprene rubber center. To use, simply cut a hole in the rubber 25% smaller than the pipe size and slide it through. Use one every 30'. Weighs 7 lbs. Made in USA. ASC2 $ 43.80
Ricordea florida
Mesh Tubes, Plastic

Made from high-density polyethylene, these perforated screen tubes are great for fitting over standpipes, 3/16" (4 mm) openings. Sold in 44" lengths; fit nicely over Schedule 40 PVC.

Inlet Strainers
Strainers/Foot Valves
Plumbing
333
Great for drawing water from ponds & canals!

All PVC construction with easy-clean nylon screen; comes in 4 standard mesh sizes. 2" female inlet slip fitting. Use two or more for higher flows. Ship weight 4 lbs. Made in USA. FI250 FI100 FI60 FI24
Microns
RT144 RT244 RT344 RT444
Fits Over
1" PVC 2" PVC 3" PVC 4" PVC
$ 9.50 18.50 21.50 24.75
Each
8.55 16.65 19.35 22.28
6+
60 152 254 710
4" x 24" 4" x 24" 4" x 24" 4" x 24"
Size
$ 59.85 57.20 52.95 53.33
FI24
RT144
Canal/Lake Screens
Designed for maximum flow and durability, this screen is made of heavy PVC pipe. Slots are .040" (1,000 microns) and it has a 2" FNPT connection. Made in USA.
Max Gpm
Strainers
Plastic strainers with slots that are approximately 1/8" wide in all sizes. Made in USA. 270554 270556 175251 270557 270561

1/2" 3/4"
CS3003 CS3004
3" D x 3' L 3" D x 4' L
14 18
$ 33.44 43.70
MNPT MNPT 1" MNPT 11/2" MNPT 2" MNPT
Overall Length
cs3003
21/4" 27/16" 213/16" 35/8" 37/8"
$ 1.95 2.30 3.05 4.95 9.35
Strainers
Made from high-density polyethylene. Made in USA.

TSS20 TSS25 TSS35
FNPT
11/2" 2" 3
x 1" x 1" 1/2" x 11/2"
Openings
1/4" 1/4"
$ 7.60 9.15 17.90
Each
6.83 8.23 16.10
4+
TSS20
270554
Strainers Foot Valves

These foot valves are perfect for koi ponds and small aquaculture applications. Consisting of a check valve and a strainer, they keep water in the line of non-selfpriming pumps. The polymer check valves have no springs, can be used in fresh or salt water and have a very low pressure loss. Strainers are constructed of Delrin plastic and have 1/8" slots. Made in USA. FTV34 FTV1 FTV114 FTV112 NPT 1" NPT 11/4" NPT 11/2" NPT
3/4"
Strainers fit check valves CV1 to CV4 and can be used for many other applications. Made of DuPont Delrin. Overall length includes threads. Strainer slots are approximately 1/8" wide on all sizes. Made in USA. CV1S CV2S CV3S CV4S
MNPT
3/4"
$ 11.63 11.63 16.00 18.72

FTV1
1" 11/4" 11/2"
23/4" 3" 31/4" 4"
OAL
$ 1.35 1.65 1.75 2.05
Each
1.20 1.48 1.56 1.87
6+
CV1S
334
Plumbing
Drains/Bulkhead Fittings
Bottom Drain
This bottom drain has a 12" diameter dome antivortex fish barrier and slip PVC pipe connection for low restriction drainage. It also features ABS construction and can be used with concrete, fiberglass or liners in fresh or salt water. Total height is 6". D3 3" Slip $ 71 63.47/4+
3/4" Opening
Tank Fitting Kits

An inlet strainer and elbow are included with these color-coordinated bulkhead kits. The in/out fits standard PVC pipe, so you can make many variations of your own. Bulkheads are also available separately. The kit includes bulkhead, 90 elbow and inlet screen, which fits both sides of the bulkhead. Black is standard. TFK1 TFO1 TFK2 TFO2 TFK3 TFO3
Gasket #
Q10G Q10G GK1 GK1 GK2 GK2
Bulkhead Kit, 1/2" Bulkhead Only, 1/2" Bulkhead Kit, 3/4" Bulkhead Only, 3/4" Bulkhead Kit, 1" Bulkhead Only, 1"
11/8" 11/8" 13/8" 13/8" 13/4" 13/4"
3/4" 3/4"
11/4" 11/4" 2" 2"
$ 6.90 5.00 7.45 5.50 7.80 5.75
Each
6.20 4.50 6.70 4.95 7.00 5.20
10+
Liner clamp to 3" pVc
90 Bottom Drains
Nishikoi 90 bottom drains are designed for use in ponds of all sizes. Sweeping corner prevents waste collection. BDC3 BDC4 3" 4" $ 99.99 125.00
Bdc4 tFk3
Bottom Drain
This 4" bottom drain is for use in liner ponds and concrete ponds. Its antivortex drain cover forces water to enter from the bottom of the pond, and its large intake helps reduce pump pressure. SAE standard pipe connection, use with 4" PVC. Offset suction port creates a swirl action that helps remove debris. Includes everything you need for easy liner installation. SBD4 $ 76.75
Bulkhead Buying key

Follow this key carefully to get the right bulkhead. Note that "F" is on the flange side and "L" is length between the gasket and the nut when the nut is at the maximum distance. The "size" of a bulkhead refers to the plumbing connections, the "F" or "B" dimension. The size of the hole needed is the "D" dimension. Do not use these threads for plumbing connections. All of our bulkheads come with one gasket. For most applications only one gasket is needed, located on the flange side, whether or not the flange side is on the water side.
Vacuum Bottom Drain

This unique vacuum drain removes debris that settles at the lowest point in the pond. It can be retrofitted into existing ponds with ease, requiring no excavation. Connects to a pump via 2" PVC or 2" swimming pool flex hose (not included). 16361 $ 40.75 36.57/4+
12"
Flange Side (E)

8"
Gasket
Nut
Bottom Drain With Air Diffuser

This drain works very well in fish and koi ponds as it provides aeration while improving the bottom-cleaning action of the drain. Induced current from rising bubbles draws sediment into the drain. Has a 3/4" FNPT air supply connection and the cfm range is .5 to 1.5. An adaptation of our D3 drain. FD3 3" Slip $ 159.00
Bulkhead Hose Fitting

If you need a 11/2" hose barb on a tank, you can't beat our price on this one! Requires a 17/8" hole and the maximum wall thickness is 1/4". It is PVC, and the metal nut is not suitable for salt water. One gasket (GK3) included. Imported. BKF15 $ 3.45 2.59/12+
drain tip
If you reuse your drain water, it's best if you gravity flow it to your filter, as a pump will puree it and make it much harder to filter out. But don't make your drain piping too large in diameter. If the water travels too slowly, waste will settle in the pipe. You should always have a dump valve at the end of the drain pipe. When you open it, a surge of high velocity water will scour out all settled material and prevent it from contaminating your recirculated water.
Inexpensive Bulkhead Fitting, 11/2"

White PVC. Includes two gaskets.
F = flange side; B = base/bottom side; d = diameter; L = length (width of glass or plexiglas that will fit).
BK112
Gasket #
GK4
11/2" FIPT
Size
FIPT
23 / 8 "
1/2"
$ 8.15 7.32
Each
10+
Bulkhead Fittings/Drill Bits
Plumbing
335
BkF10
BFA Series Bulkhead Fittings

New modelstougher than ever!
TF
Bulkhead Fittings, Economy

Fittings include a gasket. Made of ABS plastic.
F = flange side; B = base/bottom side; d = diameter; L = length (width of glass or plexiglas that will fit).
Our highest quality PVC tank adapters have left-hand threads and a hex-shaped body that allows one-person installation. Heavy-duty, full-buttress threads help prevent leaks under pressure. Select either slip or female inside pipe thread (see chart below). Price includes one EPDM gasket. Made in USA. GK1 GK2 GK3 GK4
No.
$ 1.85 1.12 2.15 2.15
Each
1.67 1.02 1.93 1.93
10+
GK5 GK6 GK7
No.
1.53 1.38 2.78 2.49 25.22 22.91
Each
10+
35012L
35012L 35034L 35100L 35114L 35112L 35200L 35300L 35400L 36012L 36034L 36100L 36114L 36112L 36200L 36300L 36400L
F = flange side; B = base/bottom side; d = diameter; L = length (width of glass or plexiglas that will fit). Gasket # Size F B d
GK1 GK2 GK3 GK4 GK4 GK5 GK6 GK7 GK1 GK2 GK3 GK4 GK4 GK5 GK6 GK7
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
1/2" 3/4"
FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT Slip Slip Slip Slip Slip Slip Slip Slip
FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT
13/8" 15/8" 17/8" 23/4" 23/4" 31/4" 41/2" 53/4" 13/8" 15/8" 17/8" 23/4" 23/4" 31/4" 41/2" 53/4"
22/25" $ 13.60 22/25" 18.29 22/25" 19.88 2" 27.18 2" 29.57 2" 35.22 23/25" 67.82 29/20" 125.80 22/25" 13.07 22/25" 14.37 22/25" 15.81 2" 21.05 2" 21.09 2" 31.15 23/25" 61.33 29/20" 112.70
Each
11.56 15.55 16.90 23.10 25.14 29.94 57.65 106.93 11.11 12.21 13.44 17.90 17.93 26.48 52.13 95.80
10+
BKF121 BKF122 BKF123 BKF124 BKF341 BKF342 BKF343 BKF344 BKF10 BKF11 BKF12 BKF13 BKF1120 BKF1121 BKF1122 BKF1123 BKF20 BKF21 BKF22 BKF23
Size
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
1" 1" 1" 1" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2" 2"
Slip Slip FIPT FIPT Slip Slip FIPT FIPT Slip Slip FIPT FIPT Slip Slip FIPT FIPT Slip Slip FIPT FIPT
Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT
11/8" 11/8" 11/8" 11/8" 13/8" 13/8" 13/8" 13/8" 13/4" 13/4" 13/4" 13/4" 23 / 8 " 23 / 8 " 23/8" 23 / 8 " 27/8" 27/8" 27/8" 27/8"
3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
Gasket No.
1" 1" 1" 1" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 13/4" 13/4" 13/4" 13/4" 115/16" 115/16" 115/16" 115/16"
Q10G Q10G Q10G Q10G GK1 GK1 GK1 GK1 GK2 GK2 GK2 GK2 GK4 GK4 GK4 GK4 GK5 GK5 GK5 GK5
$ 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.95 4.95 4.95 4.95 5.35 5.35 5.35 5.35 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25 7.44 7.44 7.44 7.44
Glass Drill Bits

high quality and made in the USa.
These special drill bits are what you need for drilling bulkhead holes through glass tanks. The diamond bit will cut a 11/8" dia. hole through 1/4" thick glass in approximately 11/2 minutes and should be able to cut 30 to 45 holes before wearing out. The steel tube drill will take about 12 minutes per 11/4" dia. hole, but lasts much longer. Steel drills must be used with a carbide compound (1 lb per 50+ holes). A 50/50 cooling solution of antifreeze/water with either a clay or plastic dam ring is required for both types of bits. Instructions included. Made in USA. GB1 GB2 GB3 GB4 GB5 GB6 GB7 GB8 GB9 11/8" Diamond Glass Bit 11/2" Diamond Glass Bit 13/4" Diamond Glass Bit 11/4" Steel Glass Bit 11/2" Steel Glass Bit 13/4" Steel Glass Bit Drilling Compound, 1 lb Clay, 1 lb Plastic Dam Ring, 3" $ 63.85 81.65 102.00 21.00 22.35 25.00 8.90 6.35 21.20
Bulkhead Fittings
Fipt x Fipt
These female threaded bulkhead fittings are great for most bulkhead applications. Made of polypropylene, they are similar to, but softer than, the PVC bulkhead fittings. Price includes one EPDM gasket. TF1 TF2 TF3 TF4 TF5 TF6 TF7 TF8
Gasket # tF1
GK2 GK2 GK3 GK4 GK4 GK5 GK6 GK7
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT
FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT
13/4" 13/4" 2" 29/16" 29/16" 31/4" 41/2" 55/16"
3 / 8" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4"
1" 23/4"
$ 6.45 6.45 7.80 8.95 9.60 11.55 21.80 48.40
Each
5.80 5.80 6.98 8.05 8.63 10.41 19.70 43.54
10+
GB9 filled with cooling solution.
Bulkhead Fittings
These are a lower strength alternative to our top-quality PVC bulkheads and quite adequate for most applications. BKF7 is white. All others are black. One gasket included. BKF1 BKF2 BKF3 BKF4 BKF5 BKF6 BKF7
Gasket # BkF4 L Each 10+
GB1
GB4
Cable Saw
5.16 5.98 5.79 7.34 7.05 8.63 11.09
Q10G Q10G GK1 GK2 GK2 GK4 GK5
Size
1/2" 1/2" 3/4"
1" 1" 11/2" 2"
FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT FIPT
FIPT Slip FIPT Slip FIPT Slip Slip
11/8" 11/8" 17/16" 13/4" 13/4" 23/8" 27/8"
1" 11/2" 11/2" 13/4" 13/4"
3/4" 3/4"
$ 5.75 6.65 6.40 8.20 7.90 9.55 12.30
Every plumber needs one.

Designed to cut ABS, PVC and CPVC pipe, this handy saw is great for cutting in hard to reach areas. Made of stainless steel, it will cut pipe up to 6" in diameter. CS24 $ 14.60
1/8"
MPT
1/4"
MPT
3/8"
MPT
1/2"
MPT
3/4"
MPT
336
Plumbing
Pipe Cutters/Holesaws/Couplings
Pipe Cutters for PVC

Professional PVC pipe cutters are designed for quick, clean cuts of PVC, polyethylene pipe and hose. The hooked jaw holds pipe in cutting position. Blades are made of a special alloy steel. Blades, ratchet and spring have a rust-resistant finish.

Flexible Couplings
These couplings are extremely useful for adapting different materials and sizes, making temporary connections or for permanent connections that must allow some movement. Not FDA-approved for potable water. Clamps are included. Use in low-pressure applications only.
PVC Pipe Size PVC Pipe Size
KT5 KTR5 KT8 KTR8
PVC Pipe Cutter to 11/4" Replacement Blade PVC Pipe Cutter to 2" Replacement Blade
2 lbs 1 lb 12 lbs 1 lb
Ship Wt
17.95 6.85 46.25 20.65
KT5
FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4 FC5 FC6 FC7
11/4" x 11/4" 11/2" x 11/4" 11/2" x 11/2" 2" x 11/2" 2" x 2" 3" x 11/2" 3" x 2"
$ 5.15 5.70 5.40 5.80 6.05 10.50 7.15
FC8 FC9 FC10 FC11 FC12 FC13 FC14
3" x 3" 4" x 11/2" 4" x 2" 4" x 3" 4" x 4" 6" x 4" 6" x 6"
$ 7.85 15.95 13.95 11.60 11.75 28.35 26.90
Quick Caps Holesaws

These fine US-made holesaws are the right size for drilling holes for Uniseals . A drill chuck arbor is welded on, but a 1/4" drill bit (not included) will be needed for the center when used with an electric hand drill. U601 U602 U603 U604 U605 U606 U607 BT14

For testing or easy cleanout of low-pressure piping. QC1 QC2 QC3 QC4 QC5 QC6
PVC Pipe Size
11/4" u050, u075 13/4" u100 2" u125 21/2" u150 3" u200 4" u300 5" u400 1/4" Bit
Fits AES Bulkhead Numbers
$ 19.77 26.67 25.92 34.51 36.42 49.20 100.00 1.75
11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8"
$ 4.90 5.60 7.15 10.60 14.95 24.75
U601
Both emails I placed were answered very promptly. I made several phone calls as well. The help that I received was first-rate. In fact, I couldn't believe the level of help I was receiving and the knowledge of your staff! Professional, courteous and patient! They answered every question of mine and helped me put together everything I needed. I felt confident with my purchase and will certainly be going to you for all my aquatic needs in the future. Thanks again,
David King
Holesaws
For bulkheads.
These high-quality holesaws are the right tool for cutting bulkhead holes through wood, plastics, etc. They will cut fiberglass but dull rapidly. Expect about ten holes in 1/4" fiberglass before replacement. They cut to a depth of 1 1/4". They must, however, be used with arbors. Order arbor number HSA1 with the 1 1/8" holesaw ( HS20 ). Order arbor number HSA2 with all other holesaws. Made in USA. HS20 11/8" HS21 13/8" HS22 111/16" HS23 17/8" HS24 23/8" HS25 29/16" HS26 31/4" HS27 31/2" HS28 41/2" HS29 51/2" HSA1 Arbor, Small HSA2 Arbor, Large

Expansion Plugs
Expansion plugs are suitable for all low- and medium-pressure water applications. A simple twist of the wingnut will produce a watertight seal. The 11/2", 2" and 3" plugs fit the end of pipes only. The 4", 6" and 8" plugs can also be inserted into the pipe. EP1 EP2 EP3 EP4 EP6 EP8
Nominal Pipe Size Pressure
TFK1 TFK2, 35/36012L TFK3, 35/36034L, TF1, TF2 35/36100L 35/36114L, 35/36112L TF3, TF4, TF5 TF6 35/36200L TF7, 35/36300L 35/36400L HS20 Holesaw All Other Holesaws
Fits AES Bulkhead Numbers
$ 11.50 12.55 14.75 14.75 19.60 21.35 22.85 22.85 63.25 73.55 15.35 19.90
HS20
11/2" End Plug 2" End Plug 3" End Plug 4" Pipe Plug 6" Pipe Plug 8" Pipe Plug
40' Head 40' Head 40' Head 40' Head 30' Head 30' Head
$ 4.87 5.78 7.50 9.56 22.55 44.23
EP4
Pipe Plug
EP1
End Plug
Pipe/Accessories
Plumbing
337
Hand Tite Plugs

This reusable Hand Tite expansion plug is excellent for many applications and can be used in any pipe, including plastic, clay and iron. It seals the bell and spigot ends of pipes as well as jagged holes. Plugs are made of nylon and rubber and can be used in salt water. No tools required for installation. HT4D HT6D HT8D HT10D HT12D 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" $ 14.35 16.55 39.90 114.00 134.00
HT4D
Flexible PVC Pipe

This flexible Schedule 40 PVC pipe permits compound curves, greatly reducing the number of fittings otherwise required. It also reduces friction loss caused by elbows. Standard Schedule 40 or 80 PVC fittings can be used. A special solvent cement (235) is required (do not use purple primeruse acetone as a pipe primer). Sold in full rolls or by the foot. To purchase by the foot, add "F" to end of the part number (e.g., FPP12F). Part numbers beginning with "F" are white, those with "B" are black.
Psi at 70F Max Bend Radius Roll Length Ship Wt Foot Roll
Pipe Hangers
Support those pipes.
On the floor, wall or overhead, these neat plastic hangers will make the job go fast and look great when it's done. After all the hangers are attached, push pipe into the open jaws, and a sharp "click" signals that it is locked in place. They also release easily. Meets UPC (Uniform Plumbing Code) specifications. Sizes below fit PVC, CPVC, ABS, PE, PP, PB and fiberglass pipe nominal sizes. Temperature range: -40 to 180F. Reusable. CP4 CP6 CP7 CP8 CP9 CP10 CP11 CP12 CP13
1/2" 3/4"
FPP12 FPP34 FPP1 1" FPP112 11/2" FPP2 2" 1/2" BFPP12 3/4" BFPP34 BFPP1 1" BFPP114 11/4" BFPP112 11/2" BFPP2 2" 235 Hazmat Air
1/2" 3/4"
100 2" 100' 14 lbs $ 1.45 79.70 100 2" 100' 17 lbs 1.60 100.85 100 3" 50' 13 lbs 1.45 56.40 65 5" 50' 23 lbs 2.40 94.90 60 6" 50' 32 lbs 3.10 134.50 100 2" 100' 14 lbs 1.04 88.17 100 2" 100' 17 lbs 1.25 110.85 100 3" 50' 13 lbs 1.60 56.84 80 4" 50' 22 lbs 1.75 73.65 65 5" 50' 23 lbs 2.00 78.95 60 6" 50' 32 lbs 3.05 114.79 Flex PVC Solvent Cement, 1/2 Pint Can 9.00/Can
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4"
$ .90 1.25 1.70 2.35 2.85 3.75 9.55 10.35 15.95
.81/100+ 1.12/50+ 1.49/50+ 2.08/25+ 2.55/25+ 3.33/20+ 8.54/25+ 9.10/25+ 14.04/25+
FPP12 CP7
BFPP12
Nonkink Tubing, Black

Great for ponds!
If you need to bury tubing, you need nonkink tubing. Use it as a noncollapsing suction hose and for any tubing applications requiring a tight radius. The interior is quite smooth, but clamps are typically required. Sold by the foot and by the 25' coil. Use an "F" at the end of the part number for per foot. PT806 PT807 PT808 PT809 PT810 mm 1"/25 mm 11/4"/32 mm 11/2"/38 mm 2"/50 mm
3/4"/19
Pipe Supports
These inexpensive pipe clamps are ideal for floor and wall mounting but not for overhead mounting of water pipes. They fit standard PVC pipe. A single screw (not included) mounts each pipe support. CP14 CP15 Black, 11/2" White, 2" $ 1.32 1.65 1.16/20+ 1.49/20+
I.D.
$ 0.95 1.40 2.10 2.50 4.00
Per ft
Per Coil
24.45 27.95 37.75 39.95 84.95
PT809
CP14 PT806 PT807
Tech Talk 15
How to Glue PVC Pipe
1. Square pipe ends and remove all burrs, dirt and debris. 2. Check the dry fit of the pipe and fitting. The pipe should easily fit in one-third of the way. Pipe should not bottom when dry; it should be a snug fit. 3. Clean pipe and fitting with PVC cleaner, then prime with Purple Primer. Choose proper PVC cement based on desired cure time (regular cement requires 24-hour cure vs "Rain Tight" 1-hour cure for low-pressure applications). 4. Apply a thin coat of PVC cement to fitting, avoiding puddling inside of pipe. Make certain the entire socket surface is covered. 5. Apply a liberal coat of PVC cement to pipe. Make certain the entire pipe surface to the socket depth is covered. 6. Quickly assemble parts. Cement must be fluid when attaching segments. If not, reapply cement to both parts. 7. Push pipe FULLY into fitting using a 1/4 turn motion until pipe bottoms. 8. Hold pipe and fitting together for 30 seconds, then wipe off excess glue with a cloth. Watch that it doesn't creep back. 9. Keep cement container tightly closed when not in use. 10. Do not pressure test until cement is fully cured, usually 24 hours.
338
Plumbing
Pipe/Tubing
Clear PVC Pipe

If you need to see what is going on inside your pipes, this clearly is what you need (does have slight blue tint). Use economical short lengths to see the degree of microbial growth inside the piping or build entire clear systems for research, prototypes, oxygen saturators, etc. This clear PVC pipe is FDA-approved for food contact applications. May be coldsterilized in ethylene oxide. It is fully compatible with regular Schedule 40 PVC pipe fittings. Install with regular PVC cement. Use compression couplings, flexible couplings or unions to facilitate cleaning. Sold by the foot, 6' length maximum. Lengths over 5' ship Oversize. Cutting charge is $1 per cut. Made in USA. C100 C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108
Nominal Pipe Size
1/2" 3/4"
Multihose Adapters
Keep several on hand. When you need it you need it.
Each of these lightweight plastic adapters can be cut to make several hose couplers. Slide the hose or tubing over one end of the adapter to determine the correct fit. Then remove the hose and cut off the undersized steps. You can either repeat for the other side or cut it in half and use one side. 101W 101X
1/4"1" (525 mm) 3/4"11/2" (2038 mm)
$ 4.15 5.25
Each
3.74 4.73
12+
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
300 240 220 180 170 140 130 110 45
Max psi
Actual O.D.
.8" 1.1" 1.3" 1.7" 1.9" 2.4" 3.5" 4.5" 6.6"
Weight per foot
.1 lb .1 lb .2 lb .2 lb .2 lb .3 lb .4 lb .6 lb 1.0 lb
$ 2.85 3.45 4.37 6.92 7.92 9.92 22.08 30.82 54.88
Foot
101W
Soft Tubing Cutters

These handy cutters are great for cutting vinyl tubing, rubber hose, polyethylene, rope and other soft materials. The KT100 cuts up to 1" outside diameter tubing, while the KT200 cuts up to 2" in diameter. Plastic body with stainless steel blade. Made in USA. KT100 KTB100 KT200 KTB200 1" Cutter Replacement Blade for KT100 2" Cutter Replacement Blade for KT200 $ 15.00 5.82 18.78 7.00
Clear Acrylic Tubing: See Index
Clear PVC Fittings

Schedule 40 PVC
Like the clear PVC above, these slip PVC fittings use regular PVC cement (373). C401005 C401007 C401010 C401015 C401020 C406005 C406007 C406010 C406015 C406020 C429005 C429007 C429010 C429015 C429020
Couplings 90 Elbows Tees
1/2" 3/4"
KT100
1" 11/2" 2"

1/2" 3/4"
$ 7.91 8.95 15.25 28.06 44.00 6.99 5.85 11.65 20.70 36.14
Tee
Silicone Tubing, Aquarium

Extremely flexible, kink-resistant, UV- and tear-resistant, nontoxic, tinted light blue and affordable, this high quality silicone tubing could become your favorite aquarium tubing. Autoclavable. Temperature range -80 to 500F. Its 1/8" I.D. fits aquarium devices and 3/16" barbed fittings. TP30S $ 49.40/100' 40.48/10+
11/2" 2"
1"
90 Elbow
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/2" 2"
4.00 5.75 9.22 15.20 19.00

Coupling
Valve for Silicone Tubing Tygon Tubing
Specifically formulated for lab use, Tygon 3603 tubing works with almost any inorganic chemical. Flexible and clear, it is noncontaminating, autoclavable and ideal for liquid and ozone gas transmission. Sold per foot and in 50' rolls. Add an "F" after part number for per foot. TT18 TT316 TT14 TT38 TT58 TT34
1/8" I.D. 3/16" I.D. 1/4" I.D. 3/8" I.D. 5/8" I.D. 3/4" I.D.
Precision ABS, special low-cost roll clamp, for use with silicone tubing, has flow regulating accuracy compatible to needle valve. Patented design allows for precise and uniform flow control of air or liquids and stays where it's set! It will only work with our silicone tubing. Made in USA. 290 $ .23 .17/100+
$ 1.24 1.82 2.14 3.59 4.83 7.55
Foot
51.00 72.00 88.00 148.00 193.00 345.00

TT18
Roll
Plumbing
Tubing
339
TV100
TV40 TP30HD TP30
TVR200
TVR150
TVR125
TVR100
TVR90
All our nonreinforced tubing is marked every 12" for easy measuring. Reinforced tubing has a higher pressure rating.
Vinyl Clear Tubing

FDA-approved clear vinyl tubing. Our aquarium tubing ( TP30) is a very high quality product with a slightly larger I.D. and heavier wall than the typical 1/8" I.D. aquarium tubing. This tubing is rated at 36 psi @ 72F (22C). Made in USA. For less than full coil quantities, add "F" to the end of the part number shown. Note: Vinyl tubing is not recommended for use with pure oxygen or ozone.
Inside Diameter Inches mm
5/32 3/16 1/4 3 /8 1/2 5 /8 3/4
TP30 TP30HD TV40 TV60 TV70 TV80 TV90 TV100 TV125
Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing Vinyl Tubing
1 11/4
4.0 4.8 6.4 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 25.4 31.8
Outside Diameter Inches mm

1/4 5/16 3 /8 1/2 5 /8 3/4
1 11/4 11/2
6.4 7.9 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 25.4 31.8 38.1
1/32" 1/16" 1/16" 1/16" 1/16" 1/16" 1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
Wall
Coil Length
500' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100' 100'
Max Working Pressure @ 90F
30 psi 40 psi 40 psi 30 psi 30 psi 20 psi 20 psi 15 psi 15 psi
Ship Wt
Per foot
$ .24 .36 .58 .47 .54 .90 1.47 1.85 3.25
55.14 19.67 22.78 25.72 32.63 64.60 102.14 135.37 279.88
Coil
49.63/4+ 17.70/4+ 20.50/4+ 23.15/4+ 29.37/4+ 58.14/4+ 91.93/4+ 121.83/4+ 251.89/4+
Vinyl Reinforced Clear Tubing

Synthetic, fiber-reinforced, food-grade tubing preferred for its kink resistance, high-pressure rating and flexibility. Tough, flexible, polyvinyl tubing has excellent clarity, is odorless and nontoxic. Temperature range -48 to 160F. For less than full coil quantities, add "F" to end of part number. Note: Vinyl tubing is not recommended for use with pure oxygen or ozone.
Inside Diameter Inches mm
1/4 3 /8 1/2 5 /8 3/4
TVR40 TVR60 TVR70 TVR80 TVR90 TVR100 TVR125 TVR150 TVR200
Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing Reinforced Tubing
1 11/4 11/2 2
6.4 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 25.4 31.8 38.1 50.8
Outside Diameter Inches mm
.38" .600" .750" .875" 1.025" 1.312" 1.687" 1.88" 2.5"
9.7 15.1 9.1 22.2 26.0 33.3 42.9 47.8 63.5
.06" .112" .125" .125" .137" .156" .218" .19" .25"
Wall
Coil Length
50' 50' 50' 50' 50' 50' 50' 50' 50'
Max Working Pressure @ 90F
120 psi 120 psi 100 psi 100 psi 80 psi 80 psi 60 psi 60 psi 40 psi
Ship Wt
Per foot
$ .84 1.05 1.34 1.78 2.09 2.83 4.15 5.35 8.10
30.25 41.00 56.00 68.75 83.15 121.00 170.00 230.50 325.00
Coil
27.26/4+ 36.90/4+ 50.40/4+ 61.88/4+ 74.84/4+ 108.90/4+ 152.88/2+ 207.45/2+ 292.50/2+
BTP30HD
BTV40
BTV70
WTP30HD
WTV40
WTV60
WTV70
Black and White Vinyl Tubing

Opaque (nontransparent) tubing (available in black or white) blocks sunlight to eliminate algae growth when used for water delivery. Black hides well in garden ponds, etc. Sold by the roll and by the foot. Working pressures same as clear tubing above. Use an "F" at the end of the part number to indicate purchase by the foot. Roll size is 100'. Made in USA. BTP30HD BTV40 BTV70 Black Tubing Black Tubing Black Tubing
3/16" 1/4" 1/2"
I.D.
5/16" 3 / 8" 5 / 8"
O.D.
Roll Ship Wt
4 lbs 4 lbs 8 lbs
$ .43 .45 .74
Foot
22.67 27.50 49.08
Roll
20.40 24.75 44.17
4+
WTP30HD WTV40 WTV60 WTV70
White Tubing White Tubing White Tubing White Tubing
3/16" 1/4" 3 / 8" 1/2"
I.D.
5/16" 3 / 8" 1/2" 5 / 8"
O.D.
Roll Ship Wt
Foot
.41 .45 .57 .60
25.62 29.53 42.05 45.94
Roll
23.06 26.58 37.85 41.35
4+
340
Plumbing
Fittings
PVC Saddles, Schedule 40

Single & double outlets.
These PVC saddles install quickly with EPDM gaskets over Sch 40 and Sch 80 IPS size PVC pipe. Add a "D" after the part number to designate a double outlet. Includes stainless steel bolts. Drill the hole before or after installation. 466247 466248 466249 466251 466333 466334 466335 466337 466338 466415 466416 466417 466419 466420 466422 466523 466524 466525 466527 466528 466530 466532
Pipe Size
Plastic Clamps
These quick ratcheting, noncorroding clamps work very well on vinyl tubing. They tighten by hand or with pliers and are releasable/reusable. Not for high-pressure applications. Maximum diameters shown are with two teeth engaged. UV-resistant. SNP2 SNP6 SNP10 SNP14 SNP19 SNP24
Clamp Min SNP2
2" 2" 2" 2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6" 6"
2.37 2.37 2.37 2.37 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62
O.D.
Outlet Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ 36.50 36.50 36.50 36.50 45.35 45.35 45.35 45.35 45.35 56.50 56.50 56.50 56.50 56.50 70.00 97.00 97.00 97.00 97.00 97.00 105.00 110.00
Single
42.40 42.40 42.40 42.40 55.45 55.45 55.45 55.45 55.45 68.50 68.50 68.50 68.50 68.50 79.50 103.00 103.00 103.00 103.00 103.00 122.35 127.20
Double
.35" .45" .57" .70" .86" 1"
Maximum Diameter
.39" .51" .65" .80" 1" 1.13"
Fits Vinyl Tubing Part No.
TV40 TV60 TV70/TVR60 TV80/TVR70 TVR80 TV90/TVR90
$ .46 .56 .56 .61 .61 .81
Each
100+
.41 .51 .51 .63 .63 .73
Brass Male Adapters

These high-quality, brass, male adapters will work at high temperatures to 150 psi. They are made of CA360, CA345 or CA370 brass for years of continuous use. Note: Barb sizes are "nominal" (1/2" = .62" actual). Made in USA. 62001B* 62007B 62009B 62005B* 62006B 62008B 62010B 62014B 62016B 62018B 62021B 62022B ZBN54**
1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
Single Outlet
NPT x 3/16" barb NPT x 1/4" barb NPT x 3/4" barb 1/4" NPT x 3/16" barb 1/4" NPT x 1/4" barb 1/4" NPT x 3/4" barb 1/4" NPT x 1/2" barb 1/2" NPT x 1/4" barb 1/2" NPT x 3/4" barb 1/2" NPT x 1/2" barb 3/4" NPT x 3/4" barb 3/4" NPT x 1/2" barb 1/2" MNPT x 5/8" barb
$ .95 1.35 1.25 1.58 1.33 1.33 1.50 3.15 3.24 2.50 3.05 3.95 3.25
ZBN54
Each
62005B
62014B
62022B
*Use with TP30HD tubing only. **Reducing style.
See Thread Size Comparison on page 335.
Double Outlet
Flexible Black Modular Piping

This modular piping snaps together for use in tanks and aquariums (expect some joint leakage). Its unique ball-socket joint design makes it extremely flexible and enables the creation of custom flow patterns in tanks. JT1 JT2 JT3 JT4 JT5 JT6 JT7 JT8 JT9 JT10 JT11 JT12 JT13 JT14 JT15 JT16 JT17
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2"

You can find clamps for less, but then they must be replaced when the screw rusts away. These quality clamps are all stainless steel (#301 SS band) including the screw (#410 SS)! The one-piece housing is locked to the band without spot welds. The band is 9/16" wide (5/16" on SSAA), and the screw has both a slotted head and a 5/16" hex. Choose clamps with a slightly larger maximum diameter than the outside diameter (O.D.) of the tubing that it will be holding. Made in USA. SSAA SSA SSB SSC SSD SSE SSF SSG SSH SSI SSJ
Size
1/4" 1/2" 3/4"
Minimum Diameter
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 31/2" 4" 5"
.22" .38" .50" .75" 1.00" 1.25" 1.50" 2.25" 2.50" 3.00" 4.50"
Maximum Diameter
.62" .88" 1.06" 1.75" 2.00" 2.25" 2.50" 3.25" 4.50" 5.00" 6.50"
$ 1.02 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.45 1.75 1.75 2.05 2.25
Each
.94 1.12 1.22 1.34 1.34 1.37 1.37 1.60 1.60 1.82 2.04
10+
SSE
Flex. Joint Tubing, 6" Round Nozzle 90 Nozzle MPT Connector Y Fitting Elbow Fitting 1/2" MPT Valve 1/2" FPT Valve 1/2" In-Line Valve 1/2" Multinozzle, 15 Flows 1/2" x 1.2" Flared Nozzle 3/4" Flex. Joint Tubing, 6" 3/4" Round Nozzle 3/4" MPT Connector 3/4" Y Fitting 3/4" F x 1/2" M Adapter 3/4" x 3" Flared Nozzle
$ 3.95 1.55 2.10 1.55 3.35 2.90 9.25 7.85 8.95 29.25 3.15 4.95 1.60 1.70 6.75 3.30 6.10
JT10
JT1/JT12
JT15 JT7
JT9
JT8
JT4/ JT14 JT3 JT6
JT2/ JT11 JT13
Plumbing Tubing Adapters, 1/8"1/2"

These polyethylene, precision-injected, molded fittings are high strength, chemically inert and noncorroding. Approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use with liquids for human consumption. Temperature range: -65 to 190F. Working pressure up to 120 psi. Shipping weight is 1 lb per 100. Check with us for special fittings not listed (in 50-piece lots only). Barb sizes shown fit the following AES tubing sizes. Made in USA.

3/16" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"
Fittings
341
Poly Tubing Insert Fittings, 5/8"2"

Use these insert fittings for repairing, adapting or connecting black poly tubing (see Index). Connections under stress or pressure will require hose clamps (see Index). These insert fittings fit the nominal sizes of polyethylene tubing; for instance, a 5/8" fitting fits tubing with .62" I.D. Use letter following part no. to indicate size (A=5/8", B=3/4", C=1", D=11/4", E=11/2", F=2").
Reducer Styles
Reducing Tee (Barb x Barb x FNPT)
Note: Last dimension is center. 121A 121B 111A 111B

3/4"
x 5/8" x 1/2" 1" x 3/4" x 1/2"

3/4"
$ 4.08 5.10 $ 3.68 3.78
121
Reducing Male Adapter (Barb x MNPT)
in
Barb
Standard Styles
Connector (Barb x Barb)
x 1/2" 1" x 3/4" x 1/2" 1" x 3/4"
111
4.76 6.35 9.53 12.7
mm
Tubing
TP30 TV40 TV60 TV70
TP30-HD TVR40 TVR60 TVR70 $ .35 .40 .65 .32 .35 .50 1.10 .50 .32 .50 .79 .55 .60 .83 .65 .65 .71 .84 .95 1.10 1.05 .50 .55 .45 .68 .45 .48 .50 .95 .48 1.10
Each
Part No.
Male Adapters
1/8" NPT x 3/16" Barb 1/4" NPT x 3/16" Barb 1/2" NPT x 3/16" Barb 1/8" NPT x 1/4" Barb 1/4" NPT x 1/4" Barb 1/2" NPT x 1/4" Barb 3/4" NPT x 1/4" Barb 1/8" NPT x 3/8" Barb 1/4" NPT x 3/8" Barb 1/2" NPT x 3/8" Barb 3/4" NPT x 3/8" Barb 1/4" NPT x 1/2" Barb 1/2" NPT x 1/2" Barb 3/4" NPT x 1/2" Barb 3/16" Barb 1/4" Barb 3/8" Barb 1/2" Barb
Tees
62001 62005 62013 62007 62006 62014 62020 62009 62008 62016 62021 62010 62018 62022 62063 62064 62065 62067 62056 62122 62123
101A 101B 101C 101D 101E 101F
$ 1.20 1.48 1.48 1.98 2.60 4.46
Male Adapter (MNPT x Insert)
Reducing Male Adapter (MNPT x Barb)
103A 103B 103C 103D 103E 103F

Plug (Barb)
$ .70 1.36 1.48 2.38 2.63 5.08
110A 110B
3/4"
$ 3.33 3.19
110 123
Note: Last dimension is center. 3/4" x 5/8" x 5/8" 123A $ 4.40 123B 1" x 3/4" x 5/8" 4.53 Note: Last dimension is center. 5/8" x 5/8" x 3/4" 124A $ 6.23 3/4" x 3/4" x 1" 124B 7.18 Note: Last dimension is center. 5/8" x 5/8" x 1/2" 122A $ 2.75 3/4" x 3/4" x 1/2" 122B 3.19 122C 1" x 1" x 1/2" 4.43 122D 1" x 1" x 3/4" 4.11 122E 1" x 1" x 1" 4.93
Reducer Connector (Barb x Barb) Reducing Tee (Barb x Barb x FNPT) Reducing Tee (Barb x Barb x Barb)
Reducing Tee (Barb x Barb x Barb)
105A 105B 105C 105D 105E 105F
90 Ell (Barb x Barb)
$ 2.12 2.93 3.23 3.18 3.77 5.25
114A 114B 114C 114D 114E 114F
$ 1.99 2.13 2.68 3.41 3.70 6.55
124A
107A 107B 107C 107D 107E 107F
Tee (Barb x Barb x Barb)
$ 2.63 2.68 3.55 5.63 5.75 11.38
117A 117B 117C 117D 117E 117F
Female Adapter (FNPT x Barb)
$ 5.18 5.68 6.21 7.39 8.80 14.95
122A 109
1/8" NPT x 3/16" x 3/16" 1/4" NPT x 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" NPT x 1/2" x 1/2"
90 Ell (Barb x MNPT)
109A 109B 109C 109D 109E
x 5/8" 1" x 3/4" 11/4" x 1" 11/2" x 11/4" 2" x 11/2"
3/4"
$ 1.95 2.00 3.29 3.70 5.40
Connectors and Reducers

3/16" Barb x 3/16" Barb 1/4" Barb x 3/16" Barb 1/4" Barb x 1/4" Barb 1/2" Barb x 1/4" Barb 3/8" Barb x 1/4" Barb 3/8" Barb x 3/8" Barb 1/2" Barb x 3/8" Barb 5/8" Barb x 3/8" Barb 1/2" Barb x 1/2" Barb 5/8" Barb x 1/2" Barb
90 Connectors and Reducers

1/8" 1/8" 1/2"
62068 62053 62069 62055 62054 62071 62052 62051 62072 62050
113A 113B 113C 113D 113E 113F
$ 2.66 4.00 5.30 6.42 9.35 14.81
113
Note: Last dimension is center. 3/4" x 3/4" x 5/8" 112A $ 3.08 112B 1" x 1" x 5/8" 3.98 112C 1" x 1" x 3/4" 3.35 119A 119B 119C 119E 119F 119H
90 Ell (Barb x FNPT)
5 / 8" 3/4"
Reducing Tee (Barb x Barb x Barb)
112
101
103
x 1/2" x 1/2" 1" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 1" x 3/4" 1" x 1"
3/4"
$ 2.62 2.63 2.65 2.83 3.09 3.31 $ 2.44 2.99

Each
119
NPT x 3/16" Barb NPT x 1/4" Barb NPT x 1/4" Barb 1/8" NPT x 3/8" Barb 1/2" NPT x 3/8" Barb 1/2" NPT x 1/2" Barb 1/4" Barb x 1/4" Barb 3/8" Barb x 3/8" Barb 1/2" Barb x 1/2" Barb
Male Adapter NPT x Barb
62001L 62007L 62085 62009L 62086 62087 62080 62081 62082
Tee Barb x Barb x Barb
.68 .70 .87 .98 .86 .85 .70 .65 .70
105
114
120A 120B
90 Reducing Ell (Barb x Barb)
x 5/8" 1" x 3/4"
120
Plugs
107
117
62024 62025 62026 62027 62028
1/8" Male NPT 1/4" Male NPT 3/8" Male NPT 1/2" Male NPT 3/4" Male NPT
$ .32 .32 .32 .42 .67 .63 .45
Male Adapters, Low Cost

Tee Adapter NPT x Barb x Barb Elbow Barb x Barb
Nipples
$ .25 .25 .25 62083 62075
1/2" NPT x 1/4" NPT 1/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT
62001-2 62007-2 62009-2
1/8" 1/8" 1/8"
NPT x 3/16" Barb NPT x 1/4" Barb NPT x 3/8" Barb
Connector Barb x Barb
Male Elbow NPT x Barb 62001-2 62007-2 62009-2 62028 62075 62083
342
Plumbing
PVC Supplies
TF
O-Ring Lubricant
This nontoxic, Tefl on -based, waterproof lubricant is for wet or dry environments. White, light-bodied, with a temperature range from 0 to 425F. It prevents rust and is compatible with most metals, rubbers and plastics. USDA H1-rated to be environmentally safe and corrosion free. Coat O-rings, gaskets and bearings before reassembly. 5-oz tube. AML $ 7.94 7.08/4+
Joint Compounds
Warning: Many general-use pipe joint compounds contain substances that can cause stress cracking in PVC parts. We suggest using Teflon paste (370) or Teflon tape (371) on threaded PVC parts. Do not overtighten threaded PVC parts! One or two turns beyond fingertight is generally all that is required to make a sound PVC threaded connection. Unnecessary overtightening may cause damage to both pipe and fitting at some future time.
Teflon Thread Sealants

Used for copper, brass, steel, aluminum, galvanized, PVC and other plastic pipe threads (not recommended for acrylic and plexiglass). Seals to 5,000 psi. This paste handles temperatures from -250 to 500F, not recommended for high-pressure pure oxygen. Nontoxic, chemically inert and will not harden. 4-oz brush can.
373
Cement
370 371
Hazmat Air
"Rain Tight" is a cement that will cure in one hour in low-pressure applications. Regular cement takes 24 hours. Ships Ground only. 373 374 377 379 382 383 235 Clear Cement, Regular, pt Clear Cement, Regular, qt "Rain Tight" Cement, pt ABS/PVC Cement, 1/2 pt PVC Primer, Purple, pt PVC Primer, Purple, qt Flex PVC Pipe Cement, 1/2 pt $ 7.28 12.66 9.20 6.54 6.95 12.84 9.00
Our Teflon tape is a full .002" thick for easier use. Roll is 1/2" wide x 520' (12.7 cm x 160 m). Meets Mil Spec T-27730A. 370 371 Teflon Sealant Teflon Tape $ 8.85 1.75 8.25/12+ 1.58/12+
Teflon Lubricant
Perfect for O-rings.
This special marine white Teflon lubricant will not wash off, is nontoxic and nonstaining. The perfect lubricant for a fish farm, exceeding the performance of grease. 4-oz container.
PVC Joint Welds (Approx. Cement Usage)

Allow two joints for each coupling, three joints for each tee, etc. 1/2 " 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" Per Pint 130 80 70 50 35 20 17 15 10 Per Quart 260 160 140 100 70 40 34 30 20
SX22
$ 11.96
10.92/12+
Adhesive/Sealant
Hazmat Air
Nut Driver
This top quality 5/16" chrome-plated nut driver is the handiest tool we've ever found for tightening or loosening clamps. Made in USA. N516 $ 13.48
GOOP adhesive will adhere to most materials with exceptional strength. No mixing needed. Very thick but will run slightly if applied on vertical surface. Dries to rubbery texture for flexible adhesion. Can be painted after fully dry. Withstands occasional heat of up to 150F (66C). Use on metal, canvas, wood, vinyl and rope. 3.7 oz. AQ1-1 $ 8.40 7.55/4+
Silicone Aquarium Sealant

Contains no mildew/mold inhibitors.
Most silicone sealants on the market should not be used in fish tanks. This one is fish safe for aquarium manufacture and tank repair (after 48-hour cure). Adheres to clean glass, fiberglass, metal, painted surfaces, many plastics and rubbers and nonoily woods. Service range is -60 to 400F (-51 to 204C). Meets US Fed. Specs TT-S-001543A, 00230C, Type II. Large size fits standard caulking guns. One-year shelf life. After the part number, add "B" for black or "C" for clear. Made in USA. SIL1 SIL2 2.8 oz 10.3 oz $ 9.36 17.16
Each
8.70 15.98
12+
SIL2 Pajama Cardinal (Sphaeramia nematoptera) SIL1
PVC Fittings/Tech Talk
Plumbing
343
Insert Adapter (Insert x Slip)

474005 474007 474010 474012 474015 474020 474030 474040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ 1.10 1.33 1.40 2.13 2.25 4.25 12.50 14.75
PVC Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 White

Our PVC fittings are all first quality Schedule 40 (except where noted; Schedule 80 available upon request) and made in the USA.
We offer a great selection of hard-to-find PVC fittings. Since we can't purchase them in the huge quantities that big home centers do, our prices are slightly higher. But ordering from us will save you time searching and traveling.
Insert Adapter (Insert x Spig)

460005 460007 460010 460012 460015 460020 460030 460040
Size
1/2 3/4
Tee (Slip x Slip x FNPT)

402005 402007 402010 402012 402015 402020 402030 402040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1 11/4 11/2 2 3 4
$ 1.13 1.50 1.58 1.60 1.75 2.75 9.25 11.00
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ .68 1.05 1.67 2.83 3.68 4.88 18.12 27.68
Each
.54/50+ .84/50+ 1.33/50+ 2.26/25+ 2.94/25+ 3.90/10+ 14.50/10+ 22.14/5+
Tee (Slip x Slip x Slip)

401005 401007 401010 401012 401015 401020 401030 401040

Crosses (Slip)
420005 420007 420010 420012 420015 420020 420030 420040

$ .36 .49 1" .79 11/4" 1.23 11/2" 1.48 2" 2.69 3" 13.01 4" 18.68
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Each
.29/50+ .39/50+ .63/50+ .98/25+ 1.18/25+ 2.15/10+ 10.41/10+ 14.96/6+
$ 1.53 2.61 1" 2.98 11/4" 3.98 11/2" 4.46 2" 6.26 3" 15.00 4" 25.32
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Each
1.22/50+ 2.08/50+ 2.38/50+ 3.18/25+ 3.56/25+ 5.00/10+ 12.00/5+ 20.26/4+
Reducing Tee (Slip x Slip x FNPT) Reducing Tee (Slip x Slip x Slip)
401101 x x 401126 1" x x 1" 401130 1" x 1" x 1/2" 401131 1" x 1" x 3/4" 401167 11/4" x 11/4" x 3/4" 401168 11/4" x 11/4" x 1" 401209 11/2" x" 11/2" x 1/2" 401210 11/2" x 11/2" x 3/4" 401211 11/2" x 11/2" x 1" 401247 2" x 2" x 1/2" 401248 2" x 2" x 3/4" 401249 2" x 2" x 1" 401251 2" x 2" x 11/2" 401335 3" x 3" x 1" 401336 3" x 3" x 11/4" 401337 3" x 3" x 11/2" 401338 3" x 3" x 2" 401419 4" x 4" x 11/2" 401420 4" x 4" x 2" 401422 4" x 4" x 3"
Size A B C
3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1/2"
$ .67 1.78 1.15 1.15 1.72 1.72 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 13.08 13.08 13.08 13.08 21.79 21.79 21.79
Each
.53/50+ 1.42/50+ .91/50+ .92/50+ 1.38/25+ 1.38/25+ 2.64/25+ 2.64/25+ 2.64/25+ 2.64/10+ 2.64/10+ 2.64/10+ 2.64/10+ 10.46/10+ 10.46/10+ 10.46/10+ 10.46/6+ 17.43/10+ 17.43/10+ 17.43/6+
ou when y ulk b buy in
20%
S a ve
402071 402101 402130 402131 402166 402167 402168 402209 402210 402247 402248 402249 402251 402335 402338
Size A B
1/2" 3/4"
x 1/2" x 1/8" $ 1.35 x 3/4" x 1/2" .82 1" x 1" x 1/2" 1.13 1" x 1" x 3/4" 1.73 11/4" x 11/4" x 1/2" 2.98 11/4" x 11/4" x 3/4" 2.98 11/4" x 11/4" x 1" 2.98 11/2" x 11/2" x 1/2" 3.50 11/2" x 11/2" x 3/4" 3.68 2" x 2" x 1/2" 5.00 2" x 2" x 3/4" 4.64 2" x 2" x 1" 4.64 2" x 2" x 11/2" 4.64 3" x 3" x 1" 13.55 3" x 3" x 2" 15.70
Each
1.08/50+ .66/50+ .90/50+ 1.38/50+ 2.38/25+ 2.38/25+ 2.38/25+ 2.80/25+ 2.94/25+ 4.49/10+ 3.71/10+ 3.71/10+ 3.71/10+ 10.82/10+ 12.72/6+
Tee (FNPT x FNPT x FNPT)

405005 405007 405010
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1"
$ 1.88 2.50 3.80
Each
1.50 2.00 3.04
50+
Tech Talk 14
PVC PipeSchedule 40 vs Schedule 80
In the United States, "Schedule" refers to the thickness of the pipe wall and, therefore, how much pressure it will hold. In most aquaculture applications, Schedule 40 is used because: 1. It works for most applications and is readily available. 2. In small quantities, it is only slightly more expensive than the thinner wall Schedule 120. 3. The wall is thick enough so that it will not distort when walked on. 4. F rom 1/2" to 2", it is rated at no less than 140 psi at 73F. The highest pressure typically found at any facility is 65 psi, which is the average city water supply. Schedule 80 is rated at no less than 200 psi at 73F (up to 2") and is usually gray in color, similar to the gray Schedule 40 pipe used for electrical conduit. There are very few reasons to ever need such a heavy, costly pipe for aquaculture. The outside diameter (O.D.) is the same on Schedule 120, 40 and 80, so an expensive Schedule 80 fitting could be used on Schedule 120 or 40 pipe, if that's all that was available. As the wall of the pipe gets thicker, the inside diameter (I.D.) gets smaller. With fittings, the outside diameter gets larger. The main reason to use Schedule 80 is if it is mandatory in your area for specific applications. Schedule 80 nipples make stronger threaded connections.
344
406005 406007 406010 406012 406015 406020 406030 406040

Plumbing
PVC Fittings
Size
1/2" 3/4"
90 Ell (Slip x Slip)

$ .31 .32 .47 1.20 1.05 1.66 7.58 14.00
Each
90 Ell (FNPT x Slip)

.24/50+ .25/50+ .38/50+ .96/25+ .84/25+ 1.33/25+ 6.06/10+ 11.19/8+ 407005 407007 407010 407012 407015 407020 407030 407040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ .46 .53 1.01 1.67 1.87 5.28 19.53 27.05
Each
.37/50+ .42/50+ .81/50+ 1.34/25+ 1.50/25+ 4.22/10+ 15.61/8+ 21.64/4+
45 Ell (Slip x Slip)

417005 417007 417010 417012 417015 417020 417030 417040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ .62 .98 1.10 1.61 1.73 2.43 10.15 17.43
Each
90 Street Ell (MNPT x Slip)

.50/50+ .78/50+ .88/50+ 1.29/25+ 1.38/25+ 1.94/10+ 8.10/10+ 13.94/5+ 410005 410007 410010 410012 410015 410020 410101
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3/4" x 1/2"
$ .88 .96 1.75 2.47 2.58 5.18 1.18
Each
.70/50+ .77/50+ 1.40/50+ 1.99/25+ 2.05/25+ 4.14/10+ .94/50+
Cap (Slip)
447005 447007 447010 447012 447015 447020 447030 447040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Union (FNPT x FNPT) Schedule 80, With O-Ring

$ .43 .39 .74 .91 1.10 1.30 3.95 8.70
Each
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
.34/50+ .31/50+ .59/50+ .73/25+ .87/25+ 1.03/10+ 3.16/10+ 6.94/6+
458005 1/2" 458007 3/4" 458010 1" 458012 11/4" 458015 11/2" 458020 2"
Size
$ 1.98 2.48 3.79 5.15 6.38 10.23
Each
1.58/10+ 1.98/10+ 3.03/10+ 4.12/5+ 5.11/5+ 8.19/5+
Cap (FNPT)
448005 448007 448010 448012 448015 448020 448030 448040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Union (Slip x Slip) Schedule 80, With O-Ring

$ .68 .84 1.28 1.53 1.55 2.50 5.00 9.05
Each
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
.54/50+ .67/50+ 1.02/50+ 1.22/25+ 1.24/25+ 2.00/10+ 3.99/10+ 7.23/6+
457005 457007 457010 457012 457015 457020
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
$ 1.98 2.48 3.79 5.15 6.38 10.23
Each
1.58/10+ 1.98/10+ 3.03/10+ 4.12/5+ 5.11/5+ 8.19/5+
6" Nipple, Gray Schedule 80 PVC

880060 881060 882060 883060 884060 885060 886060 887060 888060 889060 890060
Size
1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 3/4"
Plug (MNPT)
450005 450007 450010 450012 450015 450020 450030 450040

1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4"
$ 2.16 2.40 1.66 2.00 2.66 3.60 3.50 5.50 12.55 14.87 20.32
Each
$ 1.14 1.25 1" 1.70 11/4" 1.78 11/2" 1.90 2" 2.25 3" 4.63 4" 8.10
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Each
.89/50+ .91/50+ 1.45/50+ 1.51/25+ 1.62/25+ 1.80/10+ 3.70/10+ 6.89/6+
Long Sweep
To keep friction losses low, it's best to use sweeps as opposed to elbows in plumbing systems. These long sweeps are pressure rated to 30 psi. PVC compatible with Schedule 40, 160 and DWV size pipes. Female socket on both ends. Made in USA. SP15 SP20 SP30 SP40

Close Nipple, Gray (MNPT) Schedule 80 PVC

879005 880005 881005 882005 882007 882010 882012 882015 882020 888005 887030 890005
Size
1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4"
$ .96 1.00 1.08 1.46 1.43 1.54 2.21 2.90 3.06 10.53 12.58 26.26
Each
.77 .80 .86 1.16 1.14 1.23 1.78 2.32 2.45 8.42 10.06 21.01
25+
SP15
w bulk buy in
0%u 2 h e n yo
S a ve
11/2" 2" 3" 4"
Size
$ 4.36 5.65 10.76 19.00

"Close" nipples are those with threads that almost touch from both sides. They are the shortest possible length.
Plumbing
PVC Fittings
345
Reducer Bushing (Spig x Slip)

437101 3/4" x 1/2" 437130 1" x 1/2" 437131 1" x 3/4" 437166 11/4" x 1/2" 437167 11/4" x 3/4" 437168 11/4" x 1" 437209 11/2" x 1/2" 437210 11/2" x 3/4" 437211 11/2" x 1" 437212 11/2" x 11/4" 437247 2" x 1/2" 437248 2" x 3/4" 437249 2" x 1" 437250 2" x 11/4" 437251 2" x 11/2" 437334 3" x 3/4" 437335 3" x 1" 437336 3" x 11/4" 437337 3" x 11/2" 437338 3" x 2" 437420 4" x 2" 437422 4" x 3"
Size
Reducer Bushing (Spig x FNPT)

438071 1/2" x 1/8" 438072 1/2" x 1/4" 438101 3/4" x 1/2" 438130 1" x 1/2" 438131 1" x 3/4" 438166 11/4" x 1/2" 438167 11/4" x 3/4" 438168 11/4" x 1" 438209 11/2" x 1/2" 438210 11/2" x 3/4" 438211 11/2" x 1" 438212 11/2" x 11/4" 438247 2" x 1/2" 438248 2" x 3/4" 438249 2" x 1" 438250 2" x 11/4" 438251 2" x 11/2" 438334 3" x 3/4" 438335 3" x 1" 438336 3" x 11/4" 438337 3" x 11/2" 438338 3" x 2" 438420 4" x 2" 438422 4" x 3"
Size
$ .38 .78 .70 .96 1.00 .96 1.08 .98 1.13 .98 1.59 1.70 1.50 1.70 1.70 3.98 3.98 4.50 3.42 4.25 8.80 8.66
Each
.30/50+ .62/50+ .56/50+ .77/25+ .79/25+ .77/25+ .86/25+ .78/25+ .90/25+ .78/25+ 1.43/10+ 1.36/10+ 1.35/10+ 1.36/10+ 1.36/10+ 3.18/10+ 3.18/10+ 3.60/10+ 2.74/10+ 3.40/10+ 7.02/6+ 6.91/6+
$ .82 .82 .60 1.01 1.10 1.53 1.81 1.53 1.65 1.95 1.73 1.78 2.14 2.37 2.65 2.95 2.62 4.38 3.66 4.03 4.38 3.65 8.88 8.89
Each
.66/50+ .66/50+ .48/50+ .81/50+ .88/50+ 1.22/25+ 1.44/25+ 1.22/25+ 1.32/25+ 1.55/25+ .38/25+ 1.42/25+ 1.71/10+ 1.90/10+ 2.12/10+ 2.36/10+ 2.10/10+ 2.95/10+ 2.47/10+ 3.22/10+ 2.95/10+ 2.46/10+ 7.10/6+ 7.10/6+
w bulk buy in
0%u 2 h e n yo
S a ve
T.T. Bushing (MNPT x FNPT)

439072 $ 1.60 439073 1.97 439098 1.10 439099 1.05 439101 3/4" x 1/2" .95 439130 1" x 1/2" 1.68 439131 1" x 3/4" 1.53 439168 11/4" x 1" 2.83 439210 11/2" x 3/4" 2.76 439211 11/2" x 1" 2.30 439212 11/2" x 11/4" 2.55 439251 2" x 11/2" 2.65

1/2" x 1/4" 1/2" x 3/8" 3/4" x 1/4" 3/4" x 3/8"
Male Adapter (MNPT x Slip)

436005 436007 436010 436012 436015 436020 436030 436040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
Size
Each
1.28/50+ 1.57/50+ .88/50+ .84/50+ .76/50+ 1.34/50+ 1.22/50+ 2.26/25+ 2.21/25+ 1.84/25+ 2.04/25+ 2.12/10+
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ .47 .38 .60 .83 .97 1.28 5.26 7.75
Each
.37/50+ .30/50+ .47/50+ .66/25+ .78/25+ 1.02/25+ 4.20/10+ 6.20/6+
Male Adapter Reducing (MNPT x Slip)

436074 436102 436132 436169 436213

1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 11/4" 11/4" x 11/2" 11/2" x 2"
Size
Coupling (Slip x Slip)

429005 429007 429010 429012 429015 429020 429030 429040 429060
Size
1/2" 3/4"
$ .76 .96 2.25 2.13 2.83
Each
.60/50+ .77/50+ 1.80/50+ 1.70/25+ 2.26/25+
11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6"
1"
$ .20 .24 .41 .52 .65 1.24 4.00 5.98 22.71
Each
.16/50+ .19/50+ .33/50+ .42/25+ .52/25+ .99/10+ 3.19/10+ 5.50/6+ 18.18/4+
Female Adapter (Slip x FNPT)

435005 435007 435010 435012 435015 435020 435030 435040
Size
1/2" 3/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4"
$ .43 .56 .67 .96 1.10 1.28 5.03 7.93
Each
.34/50+ .45/50+ .53/50+ .77/25+ .88/25+ 1.02/10+ 4.02/10+ 6.34/6+
Reducer Coupling (Slip x Slip)

429101 429131 429168 429212 429251

Female Adapter Reducing (Slip x FNPT)

435074 435101 435102 435131

1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 3/4"
x 1/2" 1" x 3/4" 11/4" x 1" 11/2" x 11/4" 2 x 11/2"
3/4"
Size
$ .75 1.06 1.55 1.62 3.28
Each
.60/50+ .85/50+ 1.24/25+ .30/25+ 2.62/10+
Size
$ .83 .93 1.00 1.00
Each
50+
.66 .67 .80 .80
Important
Coupling (FNPT x FNPT)

430005 430007 430010
1/2" 3/4"
x 1/2" x 3/4" 1" x 1"
Size
$ .50 .85 1.31
Each
.41/50+ .68/50+ 1.05/25+
346
Plumbing
Accessories
Strap Wrench
The Boa Constrictor is a flexible wrench designed for problem jobs, especially pipes, unions and fittings that require high torque without surface damage. The reinforced polypropylene handle provides the leverage and the rubber strap handles up to 2,000 lbs. This combination provides an unbeatable grip. Available in three sizes: Baby .44" (110 cm), Standard 16" (2.516 cm), Monster 111" (2.528 cm). Monster strap works with standard Boa handle (RS25). RS10 RS25 RS28 Baby Boa Strap w/Handle Standard Boa Strap w/Handle Monster Boa Strap (Strap Only) $ 15.00 23.40 23.40
Flanges, Van Stone (2-Piece Style)

Gaskets and bolts not included.
854005 854007 854010 854012 854015 854020 854030 854040 854060 854080 854100 854120

1/2" 3/4"
Ship Wt
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12"
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 4 lbs 5 lbs 6 lbs 8 lbs 10 lbs
$ 7.73 8.18 9.09 9.36 9.96 13.86 22.47 27.27 42.36 69.55 91.82 101.00
854005
RS10
Van Stone style uses two pieces with center socket loose from the flange portion until tightened.
Gaskets/Bolt Sets Neoprene Rubber Sheet

Good for most general purpose applications. This Neoprene rubber holds up well to oil, water, abrasion and weather. When used for making gaskets, Neoprene conforms to irregular flange joints and seals well under minimum bolt loads. Temp: -20 to 220F. Tensile strength: 800 psi. Sheet is 36" wide and sold by the foot (buy one foot and get 3 square feet).
Fits Flange Size Bolt Holes Bolts
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 7/8" 7/8"
854010G
NRB16 RRB16 RRB18
Thickness
1/16" 1/16" 1/8"
Black Red Red
Color
Each Foot
$ 9.10 6.05 12.10
854010G 854012G 854015G 854020G 854030G 854040G 854060G 854080G 854100G 854200G
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12"
4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 12 12
Bolt Lengths
2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4"
1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb 2 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs 3 lbs
Ship Wt
$ 8.55 9.65 10.00 10.90 12.75 18.85 27.00 27.60 50.00 52.00
Note: Bolts are not stainless steel.
NRB16
Universal Thread File

This one-blade thread file renews all 60-degree threads, even metric and foreign. Relieves oversized threads, right or left hand, and is a handy addition to any tool kit. UTF $ 7.50

Crystal Schalmo
Sacramento Zoo
Aquaculture/Pond Books
Reference
347
Diseases of Warmwater Fish and Trout Diseases

This DVD focuses on identifying fish pathogens. Live action footage of bacteria and parasites are shown in microscopic video shots. Contains two 30-minute movies. Also included is the manual, "Catfish Farming in Kentucky," and over 50 information sheets produced by the Southern Regional Aquaculture Center (SRAC). DVD100 $ 33.47
Aquaculture Desk Reference

A complete, water-resistant, soft cover reference guide for the aquaculturist. Includes many conversion and formula tables, medication doses, feed contents and recipes, fish shipping densities and oxygen absorption charts, etc. Very useful and complete. R. LeRoy Creswell. 1993, 222 pages. WQB18 $ 46.87
Recirculating Aquaculture
TF
Aquaponic Food Production

Aquaponic Food Production is a comprehensive book on aquaponics. Whether your interest is hobby, home food production or a commercial venture, this book provides valuable information on planning, design and operation of an aquaponic system. Color photos and diagrams accentuate the text, providing a detailed look at aquaponic systems and technology. Softcover, 218 pages. Rebecca L. Nelson and John S. Pade, 2008. BE15 BE16 Spanish Version (75 pages) $ 49.95 24.95
Developed to be a practical guide to intensive aquaculture for the practicing aquaculturist, this book is the reference text for the popular Cornell University & Freshwater Institute's Short Course on Recirculating Aquaculture Systems (RAS). Contents include basic principles behind biofilter systems, gas conditioning equipment, solids capture, waste treatment and management, culture vessel design, pumps and fluid mechanics, control and monitoring systems, building standards, ventilation and heating requirements, biosecurity and engineering economics. Book lists a website with programs to perform most necessary engineering calculations. Michael B. Timmons (Cornell University), James Ebeling (Freshwater Institute, the Conservation Fund) and Fredrick W. Wheaton (University of Maryland). WQB109 WQB109S Spanish Edition $ 132.35 142.00
BE15
BE16
Fish Disease: Diagnosis and Treatment

Regarded as one of the most comprehensive reference books available regarding fish diagnostics. Chapters include "Methods for Diagnosing Fish Disease," "Equipping a Fish Disease Diagnostic Lab," "Postmortem Techniques," "Clinical Decision Making," "Treatment Guidelines," "Pharmacopoeia." Edward J. Noga, 1998. Hardcover, 378 pages. WQB90 $ 134
Small Scale Aquaculture

Updated and expanded from the earlier, best-selling Home Aquaculture, this is an excellent source for the hobbyist, now including detailed information on recirculating tank, cage culture, aquaponic and small-scale flow-through applications. Steven D. Van Gorder, revised 2000. Softcover, 210 pages. WQB25 $ 25.00
Pocket Reference
A valuable pocket-sized reference book including topics ranging from water friction tables to the phone number of your favorite airline. A must for everybody. Thomas J. Glover, 4th edition. Softcover, 480 pages. WQB17 $ 12.76
The Pond Specialist

Part of the Specialist series of books, this concise reference guide is useful for both beginners and seasoned pond builders. It includes a variety of solutions and styles for new and existing ponds. Learn about balancing plants and fish successfully too. Find topics easily within four sections "Getting Started," "Ponds," "Pond Additions" and "Small Water Features"each with distinctly colored pages. The author uses clear language and gets right to the point with each subject. Full-color photos and drawings. A. & G. Bridgewater. 2004. Softcover, 80 pages. WQB114 $ 9.95
348
Reference
Aquaculture/Pond Books
Fish Hatchery Management TF

This is a must-have book, covering a wide variety of subjects, from setting up a hatchery through feeding, hatchery operation, fish health, water quality and transportation. Many useful charts. At AES, we use this book daily. US Fish & Wildlife Service, 1992. Softcover, 515 pages. WQB28 $ 95.71
Fundamentals of Aquaculture
An excellent step-by-step guide to commercial aquaculture, general enough for the beginner but comprehensive enough for the experienced aquaculturist. Covers a wide range of topics, from site and species selection to water management, harvesting, even marketing. Over 280 photos. Contains study questions and a reference section at the end of each chapter. James W. Avault, Jr., Ph.D., 1996. Softcover, 889 pages. WQB29 $ 102
Plankton Culture Manual

An excellent book on culturing microalgae, rotifers, ciliates, Artemia and Daphnia. This is a must-have book if you want to raise your own fish food. Great for home hobbyists to commercial fish farmers. Frank Hoff and Terry W. Snell, 1989, 6th edition, 2nd printing. 126 pages, 1.3 lbs. WQB32 $ 30.87
Aquacultural Engineering
This book is sometimes referred to as the "aquaculture bible." Very detailed and informative. If you're serious about aquaculture, you need this book. Frederick W. Wheaton, 1977, reprint 1985. Hardcover, 728 pages. WQB3 $ 99.25
Koi Health and Disease

Every koi/goldfish hobbyist should have this book. It talks about symptoms of diseases, how to treat diseases and preventative measures that can be taken to prevent the diseases from recurring. It also covers topics on water quality and chemical therapy. A video is also available (DVD61) that shows how to do fish autopsies and what certain diseases look like. We recommend both the book and the video for your library. Dr. Erik Johnson, 1997. WQB31 DVD61 $ 39.97 32.15
Fish Health Management DVD

Developed by the University of Florida's Cooperative Extension Service, working directly with commercial fish producers and veterinarians. Contains six chapters. Each chapter lasts about 20 minutes and covers a distinct aspect of fish health management. DVD6 $ 50
Water Weeds and Algae
TF
Don't guess what plants are in your pond. Here is a good reference guide for identifying 65 aquatic plant species. Each plant is pictured, along with the suggested herbicide and application rate to control it. Features herbicide product information, application techniques and general lake and pond management tips. James C. Schmidt and James R. Kannenberg, 1998, 5th edition. 128 pages. WQB2 $ 11.83
Aquatic & Wetland Plants of South Carolina

This book includes botanical descriptions, detailed illustrations and colorful photographs that ensure quick, easy identification of aquatic and wetland plants. Though focused on South Carolina, about 80% of the aquatic weeds covered in this book should be recognizable to most superintendents. Softcover, 128 pages. Aulbach-Smith and de Kozlowski, 1996. Second edition. WQB2115 $ 19.95
Algae: A Problem Solver Guide

This book identifies the algae that commonly bloom in aquariums. Specific recommendations offer ways to control the algae through aquarium husbandry and use of herbivores. Full of detailed descriptions and colorful photographs. Julian Sprung, 2002. WQB99 $ 16.48
Pond Maintenance Assistant CD (Version 1.0)

Contains pictures and information on over 50 aquatic plants and algae and methods of control. Also includes reference lists and water use restriction lists as well as a program to calculate treatment area sizes. System requirements: Windows 95 or higher, 486 processor or higher (Pentium preferred), 50 MB of hard disk space, minimum 800 x 600 resolution, 16 bit (high) color. CD22 $ 12.30
Aquarium/Hydroponics/Aquaculture
Reference
349
Aquarium Corals: Selection, Husbandry and Natural History

An informational book full of tips and advice on the selection and husbandry of hundreds of species of coral. Topics include soft corals (mushroom corals), gorgonians, corallimorpharians, zoanthids, large-polyp stony corals and small-polyp stony corals all illustrated with hundreds of brilliant new identifying photographs. Hardcover, 464 pages. Eric H. Borneman, 2000. WQB101 $ 45
Corals: A Quick Reference Guide

A comprehensive field guide for aquarists, biologists, researchers and scuba divers, this book contains nearly 700 beautiful photos of corals with descriptions, ranges and scientific information. Helpful charts offer information about food, light, water motion requirements, aggressiveness, hardiness and positioning. Hardcover, 240 pages. Julian Sprung, 2000. WQB107 $ 33.54
Clownfishes
A comprehensive guide to the captive raising, breeding and biology of many clownfish species. Detailed chapters include hatchery techniques, inducing breeding behavior, selecting broodstock, feeding and propagation. Full-color illustrations. Softcover, 240 pages. Dr. Joyce Wilkerson, 2001. WQB102 $ 24.48
Conditioning, Spawning and Rearing of Fish With Emphasis on Marine Clownfish

The title says it all! Contains everything you need to know about raising marine, brackish, or freshwater tropical fish. A must-have book. Frank Hoff, 1996. WQB33 $ 31.42
Hydroponic Farming
This video is an introduction to the hydroponics greenhouse industry. Topics covered include greenhouse construction, hydroponic equipment selection and setup, crop selection and day-to-day operation. DVD48 $ 30.94
Aquaculture Science Curriculum

The most comprehensive teaching package. Textbook
Provides information on all aspects of aquaculture in an easy-to-read format. Subjects include fish, aquatic plants, water quality, marketing, economics, nutrition, career opportunities and much, much more. Each chapter ends with a comprehensive review. Suitable for grades 8 and up. Rick Parker, 2002. 621 pages.
Teacher's Manual
Provides learning objectives and answers to text questions. 2002. 127 pages.
Lab Manual
Hydroponic Food Production

This book is a must if you want to raise plants and/or vegetables hydroponically. It's one of the best we have found. Howard M. Resh, 1989. Hardcover, 435 pages. WQB14 $ 62.95
Contains student exercises and activities ranging from culture of various organisms to dissection and water quality testing. Step-by-step instructions are included with each lab. 2002. 141 pages. Teacher's edition also available (BE5, 39 pages). BE1 BE2 BE4 BE5 Textbook Teacher's Manual Lab Manual Teacher's Lab Manual $ 139.00 36.00 87.95 37.95
BE5
BE1
BE2
BE4
Hydroponic Lettuce Production

This book is designed to provide essential information on the physiology of the lettuce plant, details on growing systems and management, raising seedlings, selecting cultivars, nutrition, pests, diseases and harvesting. Dr. Lynette Morgan, 1999. Softcover, 112 pages. WQB82 Hydroponic Lettuce Production $ 40.98
350
Reference
Koi/Hydroponics
Koi: The Living Jewels Series, Parts 17, DVD Version

This seven-part series takes an in-depth look at various ponds. Reviews of their filtration systems, magnificent koi and design elements are included. The best pond and koi DVD to date! DVD38 $ 32.15
Koi Varieties & Appreciation

Learn the correct Japanese names for koi and the classifications in which they are judged. Includes examples of potentially prize winning koi. 60 minutes. 1994. DVD33 $ 32.15
Everything You Ever Wanted to Know About Koi

This DVD contains in-depth sections on filtration, pond construction, landscaping, choosing and buying koi, water quality, pond maintenance and the history of koi. Running time 60 minutes. 1998. DVD60 $ 32.15
An Introduction to Construction
Before you build your koi pond, see this construction video. Shows installation of various components, such as bottom drains, filter systems, pumps, water courses, pond maintenance, and more. 60 minutes. DVD35 $ 32.15
Koi Posters (Set of 4)

This set of koi posters from Blackwater Creek lets you show off your love of koi four different ways. "Circular Motion": From a painting by acclaimed artist Keith Siddle. 24" x 18". Butterfly Koi: "Beauty in Motion." 24" x 36". Feeding Frenzy: Hundreds of hungry koi enjoy lunchtime. 24" x 18". Koi ID: 24 different types of koi in full color. 24" x 26".
Hydroponic Tomatoes
Procedures and methods for growing tomatoes hydroponically are easy to apply, so this is an ideal book for the beginning hydroponic gardener. Howard M. Resh, 2002. Softcover, 144 pages. WQB43 $ 15.95
WH
$ 9.99
Posters, Koi Identification

Learn the differences between koi or just enjoy their beauty with these 27" x 39" posters. 42 top-quality koi from reputable dealers appear on each poster and are classified in English and Kanji. Each koi photo measures 51/2" long. Sold as a set of 3. KPS3 $ 45
Hydroponic Home Food Gardens

A nice introduction into the world of hydroponics. A good book for beginners. Howard M. Resh, 1990. Softcover, 152 pages. WQB13 $ 19
Close-up view of koi identification poster
Aquarium Books/Koi and Aquaculture DVDs
Reference
351
Dr. Burgess's Atlas of Marine Aquarium Fishes

The essential reference guide for any marine fish hobbyist, this book provides a wealth of information on marine fish. Over 4,000 photographs are provided with symbols below each picture providing information on feeding habits, lighting requirements, temperature, habits, tank setup, etc. The book also has sections on aquarium setup, disease treatment and fish care. Extensive care is given to scientific names and family descriptions. 2000. Hardcover, 784 pages. WQB103 $ 65
Hands On Healthcare for Koi

This intensive one-hour video shows how to maintain healthy koi and how to both recognize and treat diseases. Discussions and demonstrations include water testing, anesthetizing and treating koi, taking skin scrapes, microscope use, correct netting techniques, parasite recognition and salt bathing. 2003. DVD61 $ 32.15
Atlas of Freshwater Aquarium Fishes

This highly informative book is an identification guide to all of the tropical fish species available, including angelfish, aquatic plants, betta, catfish, cichlid, discus, freshwater invertebrates, goldfish, killifish, koi, livebearers, oscar, piranha, rainbowfish, tetra and hundreds of other species. Beautifully illustrated, this 11th edition provides basic maintenance information on each species shown. Atlas is fully indexed and cross-referenced by both scientific and common names and has been upgraded to include more than 7,800 full-color photos. Hardcover, 1,168 pages. Dr. Herbert R. Axelrod, Dr. Warren E. Burgess, Neal Pronek, Jerry G. Walls, 1997. WQB105 $ 83
New Marine Aquarium

Describes simplified methods of setting up reef aquariums practiced by the world's leading reef hobbyists. Offers easy-tofollow instructions for long-term success with live rock, equipment, aquascaping, disease prevention and husbandry techniques. Includes a photographic guide to selecting fish, with hardy choices that are recommended for beautiful, interesting and long-lived marine species. Softcover, 144 pages. Michael S. Paletta, 2001. WQB104 $ 15.64
Aquaculture Videos
Alligator Aquaculture in the South
1989, 18 minutes. Discusses breeding, hatching, containment, stocking densities, feeds, dietary needs, etc. DVD8 $ 15
Aquatic Eco-Systems' Tech Talks CD-ROM

AES is proud to offer our Tech Talks on CD-ROM. Compatible with Windows 95 through Windows 7and Mac OS 9/X, this CD-ROM features all of our Tech Talks, including diagrams, charts and pictures. CD14-2 $5
Catfish Farming in the South

1989, 38 minutes. Provides an overview of the catfish industry in the southern United States. DVD20 $ 15
Crawfish Aquaculture in the South

1989, 21 minutes. Itemizes necessary parameters, including pond construction, water chemistry, husbandry, etc. DVD9 $ 15
Red Drum Aquaculture

1989, 34 minutes. Includes the history of red drum (red fish) and shows breeding procedures, hatchery techniques, etc. DVD7 $ 15
Southern Hybrid Striped Bass Production in Ponds

1990, 16 minutes. Features a private farm in North Carolina which produces and markets hybrid striped bass. DVD12 $ 15
Trout Production in the Southeast

1990, 20 minutes. Discusses location selection as well as information on hatching through growout. DVD11 $ 15
352
Reference
Hydroponics/Aquaponics
Hydroponic Capsicum Production

This book is a comprehensive, practical and scientific guide to commercial hydroponic capsicum (pepper) production. Chapters include propagation, system design, nutrition and marketing. Dr. Lynette Morgan, 2000. Softcover, 126 pages. WQB84 $ 42.25
Gardening Indoors
A step-by-step guide. Chapters include detailed information on Rockwool hydroponic systems, water and nutrient chemistry and growing tips. An ideal book for beginners. Van Patten and Bust, 1997. 168 pages. WQB58 $ 16.62
Aquaponics Curriculum
Aquaponics, the combination of aquaculture and hydroponics, provides a unique opportunity to demonstrate many facets of science, biology and botany. Designed for grades 710. The curriculum contains eight chapters: Aquaponics Systems and Designs, Water Quality, Plant Selection and Care. Fish Nutrition and Health, Plant Nutrient Requirements, Photosynthesis and Light, Seed Germination/Planting and Introduction to Fish Anatomy. The Aquaponics Curriculum (BE12) includes an educator's guide, a student manual and a transparency pack. The educator's guide consists of lesson plans and outlines, time periods, objectives, activities, required equipment, tests, answer keys and data forms. The "Student's Manual" (BE13) contains each complete lesson, data forms and test/ review. Nelson & Pade, 2000. BE12 Aquaponics Curriculum $ 68.87 / BE13 Student's Manual 27.00
Hydroponic Basics
A full-color book covering the nuts and bolts of gardening indoors with hydroponics. Discusses general plant science, growing media, hydroponic systems, pest and disease diagnosis and prevention, environmental control and more. George Van Patten, 2004. 80 pages. WQB781 $7
Posters, 24" x 36"

WH19 WH20 WH21 WH22 WH24 WH25 WH26 WH27 Freshwater Bass of North America Warmwater Game Fish Trout, Salmon and Char (Males) Trout, Salmon and Char (Females) Gamefish Prizes of the East West's Most Popular Gamefish Gamefish of the Saltwater Flats & Shallows Tuna of the World $ 17.50 17.50 17.50 17.50 17.50 17.50 17.50 17.50
Introduction to Aquaponics
The "Introduction to Aquaponics" DVD covers the history of aquaponics, applications of aquaponics, necessary equipment and system components, various system designs using animated set-up sequences, plant and fish selection and care, day-to-day operation, water quality and the nitrogen cycle, environmental considerations and references. Bonus features include greenhouses, environmental control and concerns for commercial operation. 2003. DVD1 $ 58.74
Hydroponics Curriculum
Designed for grades 7 and up, the curriculum allows hands-on learning in the areas of nutrition, science, physiology, testing and agriculture. Lesson plans include building a hydroponic garden, hydroponic methods and media, nutrient requirements and testing, leaf and flower structure, seed germination and planting, photosynthesis and light, biological pest control, harvesting and marketing fresh produce. The "Educator's Guide" includes lesson plans and outlines, objectives, time period, activities, required equipment, tests and answer keys and data forms. The "Educator's Package" includes the "Educator's Guide," a student manual and transparencies. Nelson & Pade, 1996. HE1 HE2 HE3 HE4 HHDVD Educator's Package Educator's Guide Student's Manual Educator's Transparencies Hobby Hydroponics DVD, 30 min
Ship Wt
WH24
WH26
Encyclopedia of Hydroponic Gardening

This interactive CD-ROM is ideal for the classroom and beginner hobbyists. Topics include hydroponic growing techniques, plant propagation, nutrient solutions, lighting and more. Minimum requirements: PC with Windows 3.1 or later, 4 MB RAM. 1996. HCD1 $ 31.88
4 lbs 2 lbs 1 lb 1 lb 1 lb
$ 117.93 72.68 26.50 28.24 31.67

Applications:

Public aquariums. Retail holding systems. Research systems. Aquaculture systems.
Multitank rack systems. Seafood holding systems. Residential systems. Koi ponds.
These skid-mounted systems provide complete filtration and circulation for larger recirculating systems. They include magnetic drive or centrifugal pumps suitable for use in fresh and saltwater applications and a combination of mechanical and chemical filters specifically sized for the system and flow rate of the pumps. Systems are plumbed with Schedule 40 pipe (Schedule 80 available at added cost), and heavy-duty, true union and single union ball valves allow easy disassembly. Each system is completely assembled and water-tested before shipping. For more details and options, see page 266.
CSK6B-2
CSK5C-2
CSK install, Dallas, TX.
AES is proud to offer these outstanding products:
Photometer System, eXact Eco-Check

We offer a more cost-efficient, environmentally friendly meter at a better price than most other photometers. The eXact Eco-Check photometer system only uses a 4-mL water sample, so you're using 60% less water (and chemical reagent) per reading. There's no compromise on accuracy because the photometer was designed for a photocell with a 20-mm path length. The wavelength used is 525 nm. You can easily measure desired parameters in the field with the test strips created for this system.
2395 Apopka Blvd. Ste. 100 Apopka, FL 32703
See page 92 for more information.
Change Service Requested.
See it all on the Web at: AquaticEco.com

Catalogo Aquatic Ecosystem

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Catalogo Aquatic Ecosystem

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2011 Master Catalog

Over 13,500 Products Available

Selection. Service. Solutions.

Free Tech Support 407-598-1401

Shop Online AquaticEco.com

Five Easy Ways to Order 1. Phone

AES Workshops in Your Area!

For International Orders

Chemical Waiver Form

- Fresh Water or Salt Water

Information Resources/Index 354

Message From the President/Directions

Message From the President

AES Commitment to Customer Satisfaction

Todd Childress, President

Ora nge ssom Blo

Beach Line Expressway (toll)

Our 130,000-sq.ft. office/warehouse. GPS coordinates: Lat 28.642306 N, Long 81.461045 W

Customer pick-up hours: 8 AM5:00 PM Mon.Thurs. and 8 AM4:30 PM Fri.

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

Order 24/7 From the Most Up-to-Date Source: AquaticEco.com

Find Technical Info

FIND TECHNICAL INFO - MANuALS

FIND TECHNICAL INFO - CuRVES

Many Ways to Contact Us

MANY WAYS TO CONTACT uS

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

Closeouts and Specials

Facebook and Twitter

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

Design & Engineering/R&D

Design and Engineering Services

Research and Development Division

Need design or engineering assistance?

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

Fish Farm/Holding Systems

The ultimate in a Fish Farm.

For AES Vibratory Feeders, see page 147.

Holding System, 1,500-Gallon

Invented Here AES Exclusive

Produce up to 700 pounds of fish at one time.

Biofilter (49 lbs of Feed per Day)

For AES Vibratory Feeders, see page 147.

Sweetwater Air Pump

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

The Mini Fish Farm

Safe and easy to maintain.

For AES Vibratory Feeders, see page 147.

$ 2,590.54 155.27 203.24 7.16 12.86 342.00

The Mini Fish Farm Floating Aquaponics Option Kit

Order Online: AquaticEco.com Order by Phone: 877.347.4788 Tech Support: 407.598.1401

Fish Farm/Quarantine Systems

Fish Farm, Automated

Mount on a Post or Wall Bioreactor Option Float Valve

Post Not Included

290 lbs 5 lbs 75 lbs 10 lbs 15 lbs

$ 3,825.00 745.96 1,239.43 303.72 375.16

Mike and Charlotte Henderson

Manual Controls (Standard)

FF50ACP Automation Option

Quarantine and Holding Systems

$ 638.40 817.60 1,366.40 2,050.33 29.00 7.25

Crating charges not included in price.

A In Overhead view of top filter chamber. Out

Pond management consulting. Fisheries consulting. General aquatic troubleshooting.